Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCONTRACT BETWEEN AUGUSTA, GEORGIA AND REHAB CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC. FOR HIGHLANDS WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER MODIFICATION PAC SYSTEM 1 a, 1 .// GEORGIA 1 Bid Specifications Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System For ' Augusta, Georgia — Utilities Department Bid Due: Thursday, October 26, 2017 @ 3:00 p.m. 1 1 Thanks for doing business with us. . . ' Geri A.Sams, Procurement Director 535 Telfair Street,Room 605 Augusta, Georgia 30901 Rev.1/12/2015 ' Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 1 of 15 I . i r i i i i invitation to Bid Sealed bids will be received at this office until Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m.for furnishing: Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System for Augusta,GA- I Utilities Department Bid documents may be examined at the office of the Augusta, GA Procurement Department, 535 Telfair Street Room 605, Augusta, GA 30901. Plans and specifications for the project shall be obtained by all prime contractors, ' subcontractors and suppliers exclusively from ARC. The fees for the plans and specifications which are non-refundable are$235.00. It Is the wish of the Owner that all businesses are given the opportunity to submit on this project. To facilitate this policy the Owner Is providing the opportunity to view plans online (www.e-arc.com) at no charge through ARC Southern (706 821-0405)(beginning Thursday, September 14, 2017. Bidders are cautioned that submitting a package without Procurement of a complete set are likely to overlook issues of construction phasing, delivery of goods or services, or • coordination with other work that is material to the successful completion of the project. Bidders are cautioned that ' acquisition of documents through any other source is not advisable. Acquisition of documents from unauthorized sources places the bidder at the risk of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information upon which to base his qualifications. A Mandatory.Pre Bid Conference will be held on Tuesday, October 10, 2017 @ 10:00 a.m. In the Procurement ' Department,535 Telfair Street,Room 605. A Mandatory Site Visit will follow. All questions must be submitted in writing by fax to 706 821-2811 or by email to procbidandcon act@aukustaga gov to the office of the Procurement Department by Thursday,October 12,2017 @ 5:00 P.M. No bid will be acceptedbyfax, ' all must be received by mail or hand delivered. No proposal may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after bids have been opened, pending the execution of contract with the successful bidder. A 10%Bid Bond is required to be submitted along with the bidders'qualifications;a 100%performance bond and a 100%payment bond will be required for award. Invitation for bids and specifications. An invitation for bids shall be issued by the Procurement Office and shall include specifications prepared in accordance with Article 4(Product Specifications),and all contractual terms and conditions,applicable to the procurement. All specific requirements contained in the Invitation to,bid including,but not limited to,the number of I ?, copies needed, the timing of the submission, the required financial data, and any other requirements designated by the Procurement Department are considered material conditions of the bid which are not waiveabie or modifiable by the Procurement Director. All requests to waive or modify any such material condition shall be submitted through the Procurement ' Director to the appropriate committee of the Augusta, Georgia Commission for approval by the Augusta, Georgia Commission. Please mark BID number on the outside of the envelope. Correspondence must be submitted via mail,fax or email as follows: ' Augusta Procurement Department • Attn: Geri A.Sams,Director of Procurement 535 Telfair Street,Room 605 Augusta,GA 30901 Fax: 706-821-2811 or Email:procbidandcontract@augustaga.gov No bid will be accepted by fax,all must be received by mail or hand delivered. 4, ' GERI A.SAMS,Procurement Director Publish: ' Augusta Chronicle September 14,21,28,October 5,2017 Metro Courier September 20,2017 Cc: Louis Brazzell Deputy Administrator Tom Wiedmeier Utilities Department Revised: 2/19/2016 1 , ' Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System H Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 2 of 1S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I IINSTRUCTIONS TO SUBMIT I 1.1 Purpose:The purpose of this document is to provide general and specific information for use by vendors 1.7 Minority/Women Business Enterprise (MWBE) in submitting a bid to supply Augusta,Georgia with Policy:Count Order Enjoining Race-Based Portion of equipment,supplies,and or services as listed allove. DBE Program Augusta, Georgia does not have a I All bids are governed by the Augusta,Georgia Code. race or gender conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) program,for projects having Augusta, Georgia as the source of funding. 1.2 Viewing the Augusta Code: All bids are governed Augusta does enforce mandatory DBE requirements I and awarded in accordance with the applicable of federal and state agencies on contracts funded federal and state regulations and the Augusta, by such agencies and has a DBE Program to comply Georgia Code. To view the Code visit Augusta's with U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), website at www,au&ustaea.gay or Federal Transit Administration (FTA), Federal I http:/Iwww.aultustait8.ROv/index.asssx?NI©-685 Guidelines&Procedures. Aviation Administration (FAA) and other federal and state mandated DBE requirements for certain DOT,FTA,FAA,and other federal and state assisted 1.3 Compliance with laws: The Proponent shall obtain contracts as required by 49 C.F.R. Part 26, et, seq. I and maintain all licenses,permits,liability insurance, and/or 49 C.F.R.Part 23,et.seq. This DBE program workman's compensation insurance and comply is only for DOT,FTA and FAA assisted contracts and with any and all other standards or regulations other federal or state funded contracts having required by federal, state or Augusta, Georgia mandatory DBE requirements.(See Article 13 of the I statute, ordinances and rules during the Augusto,GA.Code.) performance of any contract between the Proponent and Augusta, Georgia. Any such Augusta, Georgia prohibits any language in any requirement specifically set forth In any contract solicitation,bid or contract that is inconsistent with document between the Proponent and Augusta, the July 21,2011 Court Order in the case,Thompson Georgia shall be supplementary to this section and Wrecking, Inc. v.Augusta Georgia, civil action No, not in substitution thereof. 1:07-CV-019. Any such language appearing in any Augusta,Georgia solicitation,bid or contract is void I 1.4 Bids For All Or Part:Unless otherwise specified by and unenforceable. Augusta,Georgia or by the proponent,AUGUSTA, GEORGIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE AWARD A copy of this Order can be reviewed at ON ALL ITEMS,OR ON ANY OF THE ITEMS www.auaustoaa aav:home page. I ACCORDING TO THE BEST INTEREST OF AUGUSTA, GEORGIA. Proponent may restrict his bid to 1.8 Augusta,Georgia License Requirement: For further consideration in the aggregate by so stating,but information contact the License and Inspection must name a unit price on each item submitted Department @ 706 312-5050. I upon. General Contractors License Number: If applicable, 1.5 All protest shall be made in writing to: in accordance with O.C.G.A.`§43-41,or be subjected Attn: Geri A.Sams to penalties as may be required by law. I Director of Procurement 535 Telfalr Street,Room 605 Utility Contractor License Number: If applicable, In Augusta,GA 30901 accordance with O.C.G.A.§43-14,or be subjected to Fax: 706-821-2811 or Email: penalties as may be required by law. I procbidandcontracti augustaga.pa_y . 1.9 Terms of Contract:(Check where applicable) 1.6 Local Vendor Preference: The Local Vendor [ j(A)Annual Contract Preference policy shall only be applied to projects of [XJ(B)One time Purchase. I one-hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) or less [ 1(C)Other and only when the lowest local qualified bidder is within 10% or $10,000, whichever is less of the lowest non-local bidders. III Revised 2/11/2016 1 , I Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System Ii Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 3 of 15 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' d 'O R Q I A NOTICE TO ALL VENDORS (PLEASE READ CAAREFULLVi ADHERE TO THE BELOW INSTRUCTIONS AND DO NOT SUBSTITUTE FORMS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY: Attachment_B is a consolidated document consisting of: ' 1. Business License Number Requirement(must be provided) 2. Acknowledgement of Addenda(must be acknowledged, if any) 3. Statement of Non-Discrimination 4. Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Proponent/Offeror 5. Conflict of Interest 6. Contractor Affidavit and Agreement(E-Verify User ID Number must be provided) Attachment B Must be Notarized&the 2 Panes Must be returned withyoursubmittal-No Exceptions. ' Business License Requirement Proponent must be licensed In the Governmental entity for where they do the majority of their business. Your company's, business- license::number must be provided on Page 1 of Attachment B. If your Governmental entity(State or Local) does not require a business license, your company will be required to obtain a Richmond County business license if awarded a contract. For further information ' contact the License and Inspection Department @ 706 312-5050. Acknowledgement of.Addenda: You Must acknowledge all Addenda. See Page 1 of Attachment B. E-Verlfv*User Identification Number,(Company I.D.) The recommended awarded vendor will be required to ' provide a copy of Homeland Security's!Memorandum Of Understanding(MOU) Affidavit Verifying Status for Augusta Benefit Application(S.A.V,E.ProggramU Must Be Re urned With Your Submittal) Return Only If Applicable: 1. The Exception Sheet(if applicable) 111 2. Local Vendor Registration(if applicable) The successful proponent will submit the following forms to the Procurement Department no later than • five (5) days after receiving the "Letter of Recommendation" (Vendor's letter will denote the date forms are to be received) 1. Georgia Security and Immigration Subcontractor Affidavit 2. Non-Collusion Affidavit of Sub-Contractor WARNING: Please review"Notice to Proponent"regarding Augusta Georgia's Local Small Business Opportunity Program Proponent Requirements. Vendors are cautioned that acquisition of bid documents through any source other than the office of the Procurement Department is not advisable. Acquisition of bid documents from unauthorized sources places the proposer at the risk of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information upon which to base his qualifications. Bids are publicly opened. it is your responsibility to ensure that your company has met the Specifications and Licenses'requirements prior to submitting a bid. Rev.8/6/2015 Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bld Due:Thursday,October 26,2017®3:00 p.m. ' Page 4of15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 , ,, • I • • G e...6 It G I A ' Attachment B • You Must Complete and Return the 2 pales of•Attachtnent•B with Your,Submfttai.. Document Must.So Notarized., I Augusta,Georgia Augusta Procurement Department ATTN: Procurement Director • 535 Telfair Street,Suite 605 I Augusta,Georgia 30901• ` �1 Name of Proponent: R e.`n ab n sAY u.c,A-t o h 0-0, r--T ne., • Street Address: 2. 2 14,6 B e.-{-he,i R d I City,State,Zip Code: CAD tlwl. -t"5, Cn A 30o12_, Phone:.7 70- 9 2,Z 0'0(o Fax: '7'70-4#22,-05 a 7 Email:, r'i c it r c_c, e cJ Mat 1 . CO tri Do You Have A Business License? Yes: 1.-------No: • • I Augusta,GA Business License#for your Company(Must Provide): And/or Your State/Local Business License#for your Company(Must Provide): K 5246440 i Ro c.kda\e rO 1, Utility Contractors License#(Must Pirdvtde tf:alspticBbie): LAC.3005bZ. MUST BE LISTED ON FRONT OF ENVELOPE c,304 IGeneral Contractor License#(MPst.Previde if applicable): Additional Specialty License#(Moat Provide if appiicabte): L::,1;41 vnose w- el. U.44 V.4-1Krexra" ,► I - NOTE: Company must be licensed in the Governmental entity for where they do the majority of their business. If your Governmental entity (State or Local)does not require a bufiness license,please state abayye(.1rbcure'mef f will verify),your company will be required to.obtain a Richmond County business license If awarded a BID. For herinforni don[egardljtg.Augusta,GA license the License and inspection Department©706 312-5050, , requirements,please cohtact List the•St: a CI &Count that•issued• r t :L=e: R b eAccio�e- CA, I Acknowledgement of Addenda;(#1) :(#21___:(#3) :(#41_____(#41_____:(#5) : (#6) (#7) :(#8) OTBS••ONECiCAPPROPRIATEBOX(BSI-ADD:ADDRI ALNUMBURS.A4,APPLICABL•E Statement•of Non-Rissriminatige. • I The undersigned understands that it is the policy of Augusta,Georgia to promote full and equal business opportunity for all persons doing business with Augusta,Georgia. The undersigned covenants that we have not discriminated,on the basis of race,religion,gender,national origin or ethnicity,with regard to prime contracting,subcontracting or partnering opportunities. The undersigned covenants and agrees to make good faith efforts to ensure maximum practicable participation of local small businesses on the proposal or contract awarded by Augusta,Georgia. The undersigned further covenants that we have completed truthfully I and fully the required forms regarding good faith efforts and local small business subcontrectodeuppiier utilization. The undersigned further covenants and agrees not to engage in discriminatory conduct of any type against local small businesses, in conformity with Auguste, Georgia's Local Small Business Opportunity Program. Set forth below is the signature of an officer of the • proposer/contracting entity with the authority to bind the entity. The undersigned acknowledge and warrant that this Company has been made aware of understands and agrees to take affirmative I action to provide such companies with the maximum practicable opportunities to do business with this Company; That this promise of non-discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be continuing in nature and shall remain In full force and effect without interruption; That the promises of non-discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be and are hereby deemed to be made as part of and I Incorporated by reference Into any contract or portion thereof which this Company may hereafter obtain and; That the failure of this Company to satisfactorily discharge any of the promises of nondiscrimination as made and set forth herein shall constitute a material breach of contract entitling Augusta, Georgia to declare the contract In default and to exercise any and all applicable rights remedies Including but not limited to cancellation of the contract,termination of the contract,suspension and debarment from future contracting opportunities,and withholding and or forfeiture of compensation due and owing on a contract. I Non-Collusion of Prime;Prpaanent By submission of a proposal,the vendor certifies,under penalty of perjury,that to the best of its knowledge and belief: (a)The prices in the proposal have been arrived at independently without collusion,consultation,communications,or agreement,for the purpose of IIrestricting competition,as to any matter relating to such prices with any other vendor or with any competitor, (b)Unless otherwise required by law,the prices which have been quoted in the proposal have not been knowingly disclosed by the vendor prior to opening,directly or indirectly,to any other vendor or to any competitor. j (c)No attempt has been made,or will be made,by the vendor to Induce any other person,partnership or corporation to submit or not to submit a ;' proposal for the purpose of restricting competition. Collusions and fraud In proposal preparation shall be reported to the State of Georgia Attorney I - General and the United States Justice Department. Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and MC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @3:00 p.m. Page 5 of 15 I . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • I • Conflict-of Interest II' ° By submission of a proposal,the responding firm certifies,under penalty of perjury,that to the best of its knowledge and belief: 1 1.No circumstances exist which cause a Conflict of Interest in performing the services required by this BID,end 2.That no employee of the County,nor any member thereof,not any public agency or official affected by this BID,has any pecuniary interest I in the business-of the responding firm or his sub-consultant(s) has any Interest that would conflict In any manner or degree with the performance related to this BID. By submission of a proposal,the vendor certifies under penalty of perjury,that to the best of Its knowledge and belief: (a)The prices In the proposal have been arrived at independently without collusion,consultation,communications,or agreement,for the I purpose of restricting competition,as to any matter relating to such prices with any other vendor or with any competitor. (b)Unless otherwise required by law,the prices which have been quoted in the proposal have not knowingly been disclosed by the vendor prior to opening,directly or indirectly,to any other vendor or competitor. c)No attempt has been made,or will be made,by the vendor to Induce any other person, partnership or cooperation to submit or not to submit a proposal for the purpose of restricting competition. For any breach or violation of this provision,the County shall have the right to I terminate any related contract or agreement without liability and at its discretion to deduct from the price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such fee,Commission,percentage,gift,payment or consideration. Contractor Affidavit:0nd Aor`eerneitt By executing this affidavit, the undersigned contractor verities its compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the • I .individual,finm,or corporation which Is contracting with Augusta,Georgia Board of Commissioners has registered with and Is participating In a federal work authorization program* [any of the electronic verification of work authorization programs operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security or any equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of • Homeland Security to verify Information of newly hired employees,pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 CIRCA),P.L. • I 99.603],in accordance with the applicability provisions and deadlines established In 0.C.GA§13.10.91. The undersigned further agrees that,should it employ or contract with any subcontractor(s)in connection with the physical performance of services pursuant to this contract with Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissioners, contractor will secure from such subcontractor(s)similar verification of compliance with • 0.C.GA§13-10-91 on the Subcontractor Affidavit provided in Rule 300-10-01-.08 or a substantially similar form.Contractor further agrees to maintain records of such compliance and provide'a copy of each such verification to the Augusta,Georgia Board of Commissioners at the I time the subcontractor(s)is retained to perform such service. Georgia Law requires your company to have an E-Iferlfy*User Identification Number(Company I.D.)on or after July 1,2009. For additional information or to enroll your company,visit the State of Georgia webslte: " . • . uu `httvstle•verifvuscfs.cdVjenrolll and/or htinJ/wwdol.stae alas/idf/niles/300 YO1aJf. ' *E-Verify *User Identification NumberCom an ( a y I.D.) ......._1_0 0 5 3 8 .. ^--') NOTE: E-VERIFY USER IDENDIFICATION NUMBER(COMPANY i.D.)MUST BE PROVIDED:IN ADDITION,THE RECOMMENDED AWARDED I VENDOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COPY OF WOMELAND SECURrMS MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING(MOU) The undersigned further agrees to submit a notarized copyof Attachment • documentation noted as part of the Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissions specifications which I govern this process. in addition, the undersigned agrees to submit all required forms for any subcontractor(s) as requested and or required. I further understand that my submittal will be deemed1non-compliant if any part of this process is violated. Re_I'�1V) ins is r W bW ) -• Com•any Name .• 4/e .c.� —.— ..esz._ -- I • : Autteized Officer yAgent (Contractor Signature) Pr Q,51 d 2.rti�t- I Title of Authorized Officer or Agent of Contractor ( r.qe,_ R. 1Aa nes Printed Na1ne of Authorized Officer or Agent ``,®lo I: AND ,7Z=T2 DAYF lb eRANOTAe✓✓�� 2 ® � , ��° II"9r.. n,z MyCommission Expires: 9 = m ®F . . You Must Complete and Re�rn the 2 Doges.of Attachment 8 with Your Submittal.Document Must Se 1401Nt id.G� r® , ///// /i.m.iiv1 �®\``\ REV.2/17/2016 1 I',,,,,..," Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 6 of 15 I 1 I T . I ' : :. ; 4l. ai v G .: .. :.-, A IYou Must Complete and Return with Your Submittal. Document Must Be Notarized Systematic Alien Verification for Entitlements(SAVE) Program I Affidavit Verifying Status for Augusta, Georgia Benefit Application By executing this affidavit under oath, as an applicant for an Augusta, Georgia Business License or Occupation Tax Certificate, Alcohol License,Taxi Permit,Contract or other public benefit as reference in O.C.G.A.Section 50-36-1, I am stating the foil wing with respect to my bid for an Augusta, Georgia contract for ' ) —Z(08 .Niih'and Ve nus. W&4e.t-`Tre_o!i.ti 44- 1P. la`nAF; We,- Mod o-(ec..ai;Drt (Intl p N/� TITS Project Number and Project Name] P A.e- 5 toe- h a�,.5.40 I Ci €..0 r - . ....I_t� ® 1 C.. s Ul'4'!\i}ve_t fPr pe:Name of natural peen applying on R.- behhaaelf of individual,business,corporation,partnership,or other private entity) t-Ca Ir\S�-ru.0 - re CQ. Tine... . I %type: ofbtuess,corporation,partnership,orother private entity] 1.)_ . 1/ I am a citizen (Printof the UnitedName Satsines. I OR 2.) I am a legal permanent resident 18 years of age or older. OR 3.) I am an otherwise qualified alien(8§USC 1641)or nonimmigrant under the Federal Immigration and Nationality Act(8 USC 1101 et seq.) 18 years of age or older and lawfully present in the United States.* I In making the above representation under oath, I understand that anyperson who knowingly and willfully makes a false,fictitious,or fraudulent statement or representation in an affidavit shall be guilty of a violation Iof Code Section 16-10-20 of the Official Code of Georgia. ig ature Applicant 111 G o_001ne, R. aine,S Printed Nahie 1 *Allen Registration Numberfor 8 Non-Citizens ill SUBSC BED AND SWORN B FORE ME N THIS THE ,� (o DAY OF 1 2 6Ian,20 -T I NOt y Public `.`'''\ciDt5 4 ®®'//���� My Commission Expires: 111( 3619 ....x\-°:i �N®65'6":/;*., v'• j NOTARY SEAL =Z : pq? 0'. Z � oidG�tiC ': j Note: THIS FORM MUS BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED WITH YOUR SUBMITTAL 9° ? 11?Es I.-:: a 00....-.?9.).?...-.0e, E> ` REV.2/17/2016 `/'1UTa t '\' Bld 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modlflcetloni abil ilk System II Bld Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 X13:00 p.m. Page 7 of is 1 I Local Small Business Opportunity Program Ordinance participation of local small businesses;and(a)agreement ftepuiretrtertiS not to engage in discriminatory conduct of any type. Notley ro All Bidders(PLEASE READ CAREFULLY) (iI) Proposed Local Small Business Shall apply to ALL Bids regardless of the dollar amount Subcontractor/Supplier Utilization Plan. In accordance with Chapter 10B of the AUGUSTA, GA. • (till: 7 ementation of Good Faith Efforts to use CODE, Contractors agree to collect and maintain ail records local small bublmit as ses necessary to for Augusta, Georgia to evaluate the effectiveness of Failure to submit the above documentation shall its Local Small Business Opportunity Program and to make such result in the bid being declared non-responsive. I records available to Augusta, Georgia upon request. The (d)Post Contract Award Requirements.The purpose of requirements of the Local Small Business Opportunity Program can this sub-section is to establish requirements for contractor be found at:x�xsitqustaraor. In accordance with AUGUSTA,GA. compliance with the LSBOP after a contract has been CODE, Contractors shall report to Augusta, Georgia the total dollars awarded. This is inwrporl sm into all Augusta, Georgia paid to each subcontractor, vendor, or other business on each Contracts for which a local small business goal has been I contract, and shall provide such payment affidavits, regarding established or negotiated. payment to subcontractors, if any as required by Augusta, Georgia. (1) Contractors shall have an affirmative, Such utilization reports shall be in the format specified by'the ongoing obligation to meet or exceed the committed local Director of Minority and Small Business Opportunities,and shall be small business goal for the duration of the contract.The submitted at such times as required by Augusta,Georgia. Required Augusta,Georgia may deem a contractor to be in violation I forms can be found at v vw.auoustaoa ov. If you need assistance of the a,LSBOP and in breach of its contract If at any time completing a form or filing information, please contact the LSBO Augusta,Georgia determines that: Program office at(706) 821-2406. Failure to provide such reports (a) The contractor will not meet the committed within the time period specified by Augusta, Georgia shall entitle local small business goals;and (b) the reasons for the contractor's failure are 1 Augusta,Georgia to exercise any of the remedies set forth,including but not limited to, withholding payment from the Contractor and/or within the contractor's control.For example,if a contractor collecting liquidated damages. does not meet the local small business goal because the To print a copy of the Prime Contractor Data Collection Form contractor terminated a local small business without cause visit:Mtp:iiwswat,.auguatage.uovilndett.aspx7NID-J672 or if the contractor caused and local small business to I Website: title//wvrw.auctustaaa. v)index,asox'?x id-8 Pwithdraw from the project without Justification, then Augusta,Georgia is Justified in finding the contractor to be SHALL APPLY TO.: RO,)EOS �f)O;f3(l0 ;UP In violation of the LSBOP. Local Small Business Opportunity Program(Continued) (h)Compliance.Th. (4)The Director of minority and small business Sec.1-10-129.Local small business opportunities program opportunities shall be responsible for evaluating good faith participation. efforts documentation and subcontractor information (a) Sealed Bids The following procedures and contract submitted by bidders in conformance with,the AUGUSTA, requirements will be used to Insure that local small GA.CODE and any State and Federal Laws applicable to businesses are encouraged to participate in Augusta, any bid specifications for competitive sealed bid projects ' Georgia contracts,including but not limited to construction prior to award of the contract. contracts, requests for professional services and the (i)Competitive Bids. performance of public works contracts. The Augusta, Nothing In this Policy Is to be construed to require Georgia user department shall indicate goals for local Augusta,Georgia to award a bid contract to other than the small business in all solicitations for contracts over lowest responsible bidder, or to require contractors to $100,000 in value: award to subcontractors, or to make significant material (1) Bid conditions for contracts awarded by purchases from local small businesses who do not submit Augusta, Georgia will require that, where subcontracting the best overall pricing to Augusta,Georgia. goal is utilized in performing the contract,.the bidder or Sec.1-10-130.Exceptions—federally funded projects. 1 proponent, will make;gourd Faith Efforts to sube9titraet In accordance with§1-10-8 and Chapter 10B,the LSBOP with or purchase supplies from local small businesses.Bid shall only be utilized with federally funded projects, specifications will require the bidder or proponent to keep solicitations or contracts as authorized by federal (and records of such efforts that are adequate to permit a Georgia) laws, regulations and conditions applicable to determination of compliance with this requirement such projects. To the extent that there are any conflicts I (2) Each bidder shall be required to provide between any such laws,regulations or conditions and the documentation of achieving goal or provide documentation LSBOP, the federal (and Georgia) laws, regulations and of Good Faith Efforts to engage local small businesses as conditions shall control subcontractors or suppliers, the names of local small I businesses and other subcontractors to whom it intends to NOTE: All forms should be submitted In a separate, award subcontracts, the dollar value of the subcontracts, and the scope of the work to be performed, recorded on sealed envelope labeled Local Small BusinessRequired Forms,Company's Name&Bid Number the form(s)provided or made available as part of the bid package. If there are no sub-contracting opportunities, for questions and or adtiftionai information ' bidder shall so Indicate on the appropriate form. please contact: (6) All bid documents shall require bidders or proponents t0.:�stlbrm#)with tit*bid the following written Local Small Business Opportunity Program, documents, statements or forms, which shall be made 535 Telfair Street,Room 710, available by the Procurement Department. Augusta,Georgia 30901 (I) Non-Discrimination Statement which shall 706 821-2406. affirm the bidder's: (a) adherence to the policies of ( ) Augusta, Georgia relating to equal opportunity in contracting;(b)agreement to undertake certain measures Website: httP://www.auoustana.povilndexasoOnid=83 as provided in this policy to ensure maximum practicable Revised 2-11-16 Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 8 of 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9i t t i LOCAL SMALL. BUSINESS.UTILIZATION PLAN 1 The undersigned bidder/offeror has satisfied the requirements of the bid specification In the following manner(please check the appropriate space): 1 Name of bidder/offeror's firm: R a Crt.ST . , r c By:GILD Q-- a I r1 e� ���1®� f 10 2 /Zb 0 7 (Print Nana Si_ aturer (Da e) 1 The bidder/offeror is committed to a minimum of.. % LSBOP utilization on this contract. (Please complete the requested subcontractor/supplier Information below.) OR The bidder/offeror is unable to meet the LSBOP goal of / 0 %. Therefore, the bidder/offeror will complete in its entirety the document titled GOOD FAITH EFFORTS and submit supporting 1 documentation demonstrating good faith efforts. Subcontractor/Supplier Address Principal LSBOP Utilization • 1 Name Phone Email Contact Certified }, 18 3 t o !d SQ vaz�e.a,� Rd A - -72.� (o � u Mandr /M i0he-11e_ �r�helle .. . Y4-,S 110lu► Wra -- 1 i , m� 1 1 1 1 .. 1 Use additional sheets as necessary, 1 - F tBid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 11 Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 i)3:00 p.m. ' Page 14 of 15 I 1 • Local Small Buse..+ ss Goal The Local Small Business Opportunity Program provides for Local Small Business goals 1 to be set on all applicable Augusta, Georgia procurements over$100,000 in value.' The Local Small Business goal for this procurement is: 1 All bidders or proposers shallsubmit the following with their bid or proposal as required by Augusta, GA Code § 1-10-129:2 1 1. Non-Discrimination Statement: As required bythe3 q Procurement document. 2. Proposed Local Small Business Subcontractor/Supplier Utilization Plan. 3. Documentation of Good Faith Efforts to use local small businesses. 4. Local Small Business Utilization document. 1 1 Failure to submit the above documentation shall result in the bid or proposal being dieclared.non-responsive. 1 _ 1 1 1 Even when a solicitation does not contain a Local Small Business goal (or the goal is set at aero), each Bidder must ' negotiate in good faith with each local small business that responds to the Bidder's solicitation and each local small business that contacts the Bidder on its own accord. Self-performance does not exempt Bidders from Local Small Business Opportunity Program requirements unless the self-performer is a qualified and registered Local Small Business. All of the requirements of the Local Small Business Opportunity Program can be found in Augusta,GA'Code,Chapter IOB. 2 Applicable forms are available on Augusta Georgia's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise website:www.au sta 5. ov. im l; g ) 3 Only one Non-Discrimination statement is required"See Attachment B". ' Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 03:00 p.m. Page 9 of 15 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I • I c*FIEHABswe CONSTRUCTION CO. INC. Mail: P.O. Box 924, Conyers, GA 30012 Special Delivery: 2246 Bethel Rd., Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 770-922-0806 Fax: 770-922-0507 1 October 26, 2017 1 To: City of Augusta Procurement Department ' From: Rehab Construction Co., Inc. RE: Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System for Augusta Utilities Department Utilizing the LSBOP listing provided by the City of Augusta,we have made a good faith ith effort to contact providers that could possibly provide the services that are required for this project. At the bid time this bid was prepared, there has only been one company that had quoted firm pricing and in most cases no response to our requests. The attached pages will show that contact was made with nine suppliers. We will continue to solicit pricing from those who have responded. We are ' hopeful that one other provider will follow through with reasonable pricing that would be suitable to both Rehab Construction Co., Inc. and the City of Augusta. 1 1 1 1 1 I :, I ' , STATE OF GEORGIA Secretary of State I Corporations Division 313 West Tower 2 Martin Luther King,Jr.Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 I ANNUAL REGISTRATION *Electronically Filed* Secretary of State Filing Date:1/16/2017 8:21:21 AM I y CONTROL NUMBER K524046 I .BUSINESS NAME REHAB CONSTRUCTION CO.,INC. BUSINESS TYPE Domestic Profit Corporation EFFECTIVE DATE 01/16/2017 I mimsmimaiammE-iuimammmp I ADDRESS P O Box 924,CONYERS,USA 1,; .�E�0,1fil:: p,. K(),i.'.it i!. ,v,B; .@,6A ,i1 0;I`,-, INAME ADDRESS G.R. HAYNES 2246 BETHEL RD,Rockdale,CONYERS,GA,30012,USA NAME TITLE ADDRESS IGEORGE R HAYNES CFO 2246 BETHEL ROAD,CONYERS,USA GEORGE R HAYNES CEO 2246 BETHEL ROAD,CONYERS,USA I JOSHUA C HAYNES SECRETARY 4393 Mink Livsey Road,Snellville,USA IAUTHORIZER SIGNATURE George R.Haynes AUTHORIZER TITLE Registered Agent 1 +71,,d11w c^' its .., .).11 3 .. .eivi, ., �' Brian P. Kemp I \..,,,/776__-%-' Secretary of State 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 It I GEORGIA GEORGIA SECRETARY OF STATE CORPORATIONS BRIAN P. 1 ` DIVISION KEMP 1 HOME V) BUSINESS SEARCH 1 BUSINESS INFORMATION ' REHAB Business Name: CONSTRUCTION CO., Control Number: K524046 INC. ' Business Type: Domestic Profit yP Corporation Business Status: Active/Compliance 1 _ Business Purpose: Principal Office P 0 Box 924, Date of Formation/ Address: CONYERS, GA, 30012 Registration Date: 7/12/1995 1 State of Formation: Last Annual Georgia 2017 Registration Year: 1 REGISTERED AGENT INFORMATION Registered Agent Name: G.R. HAYNES 1 Physical Address: 2246 BETHEL RD, Rockdale, CONYERS, GA, 30012, USA 1 OFFICER INFORMATION Name Title Business Address 1 GEORGE HAYNES, R CFO 2246 BETHEL ROAD,CONYERS,GA,30012, USA GEORGE HAYNES, R CEO 2246 BETHEL ROAD,CONYERS,GA,30012,USA 1 JOSHUA HAYNES,C Secretary 4393 Mink Livsey Road,Sneliville,GA,30039, USA 1 Back Filing History Name History Return to Business Search 1 Office of the Georgia.Secretary of State Attn:2 MLK,Jr. Dr.Suite 313, Floyd West Tower Atlanta, GA 30334- 1 1530, Phone: (404) 656-2817 Toll-free: (844) 753-7825,WEBSITE: http://www.sos.ga.gov/ CO 2015 PCC Technology Group.-All Rights Reserved.Version 2.1.2a Report a Problem? 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U 1 I 1 ' CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS ' for :highland Ave Water Treatment Plant Filter Modifications and PAC ' System AU #I,111_2015_007 Bid Item # 17-268 Prepared for Augusta Utilities Department 425 Walker Street,Suite 200 Augusta,GA 30901 1 1 ' Engineer Seal Plans&Specifications ' Prepared by ZEL Engineers 435 Telfair Street Augusta,GA 30901 I • 706-724-5627 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS IPROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS IBOND PROJECT UB02015-007 HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT I FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT ISection No. Subject Page(s) I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00005 Table of Contents 5 00020 Advertisement for Bids I 00110 Instructions to Bidders Bid 2 00310 6 00410 Bid Bond 2 ICONTRACT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 1 I 00520 Agreement 4 00550 Notice to Proceed 1 00610 Performance and Payment Bonds 5 I 00620 Contractor's Application for Payment 4 00625 Certificate of Substantial Completion 2 I CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00700 General Conditions 55 00800 Supplementary Conditions 12 I00941 Change Order 1 DIVISION 1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I01010 Summary of Work 10 2015-ASO-15724-OE "Determination of No Hazard to Air Navigation 5 01025 Measurement and Payment 3 I01090 Reference Standards 9 01200 Project Meetings 3 01310 Construction Schedules 4 I01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 10 01370 Schedule of Values 3 01400 Quality Control 6 I01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 8 01570 Traffic Regulation 3 01600 Materials and Equipment 9 I01601 Piping Schedule 4 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 4 I01631 Form,Request for Substitutions 1 1416-00 00005 Table Of Contents.Docx 00005-1 Z E !- I -ENGINEERS- - I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ISECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS I01640 Installation of Owner-Furnished Equipment 3 01650 Starting of Systems 7 I 01658 Disinfection of Structures and Equipment 4 01700 Contract Closeout 7 01710 Cleaning 3 I 01720 Project Record Documents 5 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data 7 01810 Geotechnical Data 14 I01820 Filter Inspection Report 3 DIVISION 2—SITE WORK I 02050 Demolition 7 02100 Site Preparation 4 02200 Excavation, Filling and Backfilling 7 I 02205 Trench Excavation and Backfill 7 02210 Erosion Control 3 02500 Asphalt Pavement 4 I 02520 Concrete Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter 7 02607 Manholes and Covers 7 02675 Disinfection of Water Distribution Systems 3 I 02720 Storm Drainage Systems 6 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates 4 02835 Cantilever Gate 7 I 02936 Grassing 4 DIVISION 3—CONCRETE I03000 Concrete 9 03350 Polished Concrete Finishing 5 03600 Grout 4 I03710 Repair of Existing Concrete 7 DIVISION 4—MASONRY I04200 Unit Masonry 6 DIVISION 5—METALS I05120 Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals 5 05210 Steel Joists, Standard,Longspan and Joist Girders 4 I05310 Steel Deck 8 05520 Handrails and Railings 5 05530 Aluminum Gratings and Treads 5 IDIVISION 6—WOOD AND PLASTIC NOT USED IDIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 2 I 1416-00 00005 Table Of Contents.Docx 00005-2 ZEL I -ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS I07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 3 07530 Single Ply Membrane Roofmg 4 I 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 3 07900 Joint Sealants 5 I DIVISION 8—DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 7 08380 Acoustic Metal Doors and Frames 4 I08711 Door Hardware 9 DIVISION 9—FINISHES I 09260 09510 Gypsum Board Systems 4 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 4 09843 Acoustical Wall Panels 4 I09900 Painting and Finishing 7 DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES INOT USED DIVISION 11—EQUIPMENT 11000 Equipment Erection 6 11248 PAC Feed Equipment 12 Centrifugal Water Pump (Vertical In-Line) 5 I11935 DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS NOT USED IDIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13400 Instrumentation 18 I13521 Filter Underdrain (Per Addendum No. 1) 9 13522 Filter Media 4 13523 Baffled Filter Washwater Troughs 4 I13524 Fabricated Media Baffles 3 DIVISION 14—CONVEYING SYSTEMS INOT USED DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL I15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 13 15062 Ductile Iron Pipe 13 I 15067 Stainless Steel Pipe 8 15100 Valves, Cocks, and Hydrants 10 15103 Butterfly Valves 5 I15123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates 7 15140 Supports and Anchors 7 I 1416-00 00005 Table Of Contents.Docs 00005-3 Z E I.. I --ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS IDIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical - General Provisions 10 I 16050 16075 Basic Materials 6 Electrical Identification 2 16110 Raceways 12 I 16120 Conductors 8 16130 Boxes 5 16441 Safety Switches 4 I 16450 Grounding 3 16461 Dry-Type Transformers (Per Addendum No. 1) 7 16470 Panelboards 6 I 16483 Variable Frequency Drive 16500 Lighting 95 ILIST OF DRAWINGS. DRAWING NO. TITLE I GENERAL G00 COVER SHEET GO1 DRAWING LIST IG02 AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT NOTES GENERAL–WATER–SEWER G03 PROJECT VICINITY MAP–ABBREEVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND INOTES CIVIL ICOl OVERALL SITE PLAN CO2 DEMOLITION PLAN CO3. PAC SYSTEM SITE PLAN • IC04 GRADING PLAN C05 CHEMICAL DUCT PROFILE&DETAILS C06 NOT USED IC07 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL DETAILS C08 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN C09 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DETAILS AND NOTES– 1 I Cl0 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DETAILS AND NOTES -2 • STRUCTURAL ISO1 FILTER NO 1 &NO 7 STRUCTURAL REPAIRS SO2 FILTER NO 7 STRUCTURAL REPAIRS S03 PAC BUILDING PLAN AND ELEVATIONS I SO4 PAC BUILDING SECTIONS &DETAILS SO5 RETAINING WALL&PAC SILO FOUNDATION DETAILS S06 BLOWER ROOM MODIFICATIONS I S07 DOOR&FINISH SCHEDULES AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS I 1416-00 00005 Table Of ContentsDocx 00005 ZEL I -ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I SECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS IMECHANICAL MOl EAST FILTER BLDG FLOOR PLAN I M02 FILTER NO 1 &NO 7 DEMOLITION PLAN M03 FILTER NO 1 &NO 7 DEMOLITION SECTIONS M04 FILTER NO 1 MODIFICATION PLAN I M05 FILTER NO 7 MODIFICATION PLAN M06 FILTER NO 1 SECTIONS M07 FILTER NO 7 SECTIONS I M08 AIR SCOUR HEADER PLAN M09 AIR SCOUR BLOWER ROOM MECHANICAL PLAN M10 BLOWER ROOM SECTIONS I Ml 1 PAC FEED SYSTEM PLAN&SECTION M12 PAC FEED SYSTEM SECTIONS AND ELEVATIONS M13 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS — 1 IM14 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS—2 M15 WEST FILTER BUILDING—PIPE GALLERY PLAN M16 WEST FILTER BUILDING—PIPE GALLERY LOWER LEVEL PLAN IM 1 7 WEST FILTER BUILDING—PIPE GALLERY UPPER LEVEL PLAN M18 WEST FILTER BUILDING—PIPE GALLERY HVAC HOl AIR SCOUR BLOWER ROOM&PAC FEED SYSTEM HVAC PLANS &SECTIONS IH02 AIR SCOUR BLOWER ROOM&PAC FEED SYSTEM HVAC DETAILS,NOTES & SCHEDULES IELECTRICAL E01 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN, LEGEND&GENERAL NO I'ES E02 FILTER NO 1 ELECTRICAL PLANS IE03 FILTER NO 7 ELECTRICAL PLANS E04 BLOWER ROOM AREA,POWER&LIGHTING PLANS I E05 PAC FEED SYSTEM POWER&LIGHTING PLANS E06 PAC FEED SYSTEM ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE AND RISER DIAGRAM E07 EAST FILTER BUILDING ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN E08 ELECTRICAL DETAILS & SCHEDULES I E09 WEST FILTER BUILDING—OVERALL ELECTRICAL PLAN El0 WEST FILTER BUILDING—ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN IINSTRUMENTATION I01 P&ID LEGEND I IO2 P&ID FILTER NO 1 I03 P&ID FILTER NO 7 I4 P&ID AIR SCOUR BLOWER SYSTEM I I05 P&ID PAC STORAGE&FEED SYSTEM— 1 106 P&ID PAC STORAGE&FEED SYSTEM—2 I07 INSTRUMENTATION CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE I1416-00 00005 Table Of Contents Doex 00005-5 Z E I- I -ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . Invitation to Bid Sealed bids will be received at this office until Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m.for furnishing: Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System for Augusta,GA- I Utilities Department Bid documents may be examined at the office of the Augusta, GA Procurement Department, 535 Telfair Street— Room 605, Augusta, GA 30901. Plans and specifications for the project shall be obtained by all prime contractors, subcontractors and suppliers exclusively from ARC. The fees for the plans and specifications which are non-refundable are$235.00. It is the wish of the Owner that all businesses are given the opportunity to submit on this project. To facilitate this policy t the Owner is providing the opportunity to view plans online (www.e-arc.com) at no charge through ARC Southern (706 821-0405) beginning Thursday, September 14, 2017. Bidders are cautioned that submitting a package without Procurement of a complete set are likely to overlook issues of construction phasing, delivery of goods or services, or coordination with other work that is material to the successful completion of the project. Bidders are cautioned that ' acquisition of documents through any other source is not advisable. Acquisition of documents from unauthorized sources places the bidder at the risk of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information upon which to base his qualifications. A Mandatory Pre Bid Conference will be held on Tuesday, October 10, 2017 @ 10:00 a.m. in the Procurement Department,535 Telfair Street,Room 605. A Mandatory Site Visit will follow. ' All questions must be submitted in writing by fax to 706 821-2811 or b email to rocbidandcontra c. 'a' Y p ct@auRust .eov to the office of the Procurement Department by Thursday,October 12,2017 @ 5:00 P.M. No bid will be accepted by fax, all must be received by mail or hand delivered. No proposal may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after bids have been opened, pending the execution of contract with the successful bidder. A 10%Bid Bond is required to be submitted along with the bidders'qualifications;a ' 100%performance bond and a 100%payment bond will be required for award. Invitation for bids and specifications. An invitation for bids shall be issued by the Procurement Office and shall include specifications prepared in accordance with Article 4(Product Specifications),and all contractual terms and conditions,applicable to the procurement. All specific requirements contained In the Invitation to bid including,but not limited to,the number of copies needed, the timing of the submission, the required financial data, and any other requirements designated by the Procurement Department are considered material conditions of the bid which are not walveable or modifiable by the Procurement Director. All requests to waive or modify any such material condition shall be submitted through the Procurement ' Director to the appropriate committee of the Augusta, Georgia Commission for approval by the Augusta, Georgia Commission. Please mark BID number on the outside of the envelope. Correspondence must be submitted via mail,fax or email as follows: Augusta Procurement Department Attn: Geri A.Sams,Director of Procurement ' 535 Telfair Street,Room 605 Augusta,GA 30901 Fax: 706-821-2811 or Email:procbidandcontract@augustaga.gov No bid will be accepted by fax,all must be received by mail or hand delivered. GERI A.SAMS,Procurement Director Publish: ' Augusta Chronicle September 14,21,28,October 5,2017 Metro Courier September 20,2017 Cc: Louis Brazzell Deputy Administrator ' Tom W1 edmeier Utilities Department Revised: 2/19/2016 1 ' ' Bid 17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II Bid Due:Thursday,October 26,2017 @ 3:00 p.m. Page 2 of 15 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION IB INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS IB-01 GENERAL. IAll proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope,addressed to the OWNER. The proposal must be filed with the OWNER on or before the time stated in the invitation for bids. Mailed proposals U will be treated in every respect as though filed in person and will be subject to the same requirements. Proposals received subsequent to the time stated will be returned unopened. Prior to the time stated I any proposal maybe withdrawn at the discretion of the bidder, but no proposal may be withdrawn for a period of sixty(60) days after bids have been opened,pending the execution of contract with the successful bidder. I IB-02 EXAMINATION OF WORK Each bidder shall,by careful examination,satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the work; Ithe conformation of the ground; the character, quality and quantity of the facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work;the general and local conditions;and all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under the contract. No oral I agreement or conversation with any officer,agent,or employee of the OWNER,either before or after the execution of the contract,shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein. IB-03 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS,. I No interpretation of the meaning of plans,specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any bidder orally. IA Mandatory Pre Bid Conference will be held on Tuesday,October 10,2017 @ 10:00 a.m.in the Procurement Department,535 Telfair Street,Room 605. A Mandatory Site Visit will follow. IEvery request for such interpretation should be in writing by fax to 706 821-2811 or by email to piocbidandcentract@augustaga.gov to the office of the Procurement Department by Thursday, October 12,2017 @ 5:00 P.M. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions I will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which,if issued,will be sent by facsimile or U.S. mail to all prospective bidders (at the respective addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than five days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his I bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. IB-04 PREPARATION OF.BIDS IBids shall be submitted on the forms provided and must be signed by the bidder or his authorized representative. Any corrections to entries made on bid forms should be initialed by the person Isigning the bid. Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid forms, unless specific directions in the advertisement,on the bid form,or in the special specifications allow for partial bids. Failure to quote I on all items may disqualify the bid. When quotations on all items are not required, bidders shall insert the words"no bid"where appropriate, Alternative bids will not be considered unless specifically called for. 1 IB-1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Telegraphic bids will not be considered. Modifications to bids already submitted will be allowed if submitted by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the Invitation for Bids. Modifications shall be submitted as such,and shall not reveal the total amount of either the original or revised bids. ' Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships will be signed by all OWNERS. Bids of corporations will be signed by an officer of the firm and his signature attested by the secretary thereof who will affix the corporate seal to the proposal. ' NOTE: A 10% Bid Bond is required in all cases. IB-05 BASIS OF AWARD The bids will be compared on the basis of unit prices,as extended,which will include and cover the furnishing of all material and the performance of all labor requisite or proper,and completing of all ' the work called for under the accompanying contract,and in the manner set forth and described in the specifications. Where estimated quantities are included in certain items of the proposal,they are for the purpose of ' comparing bids. While they are believed to be close approximations,they are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to check all items of construction. In case of error in extension of prices in a proposal,unit bid prices shall govern. ' IB-06 BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS No proposal will be received from any bidder unless he can present satisfactory evidence that he is ' skilled in work of a similar nature to that covered by the contract and has sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in carrying out the work. He shall submit with his proposal, a FINANCIAL EXPERIENCE AND EQUIPMENT STATEMENT, giving reliable information as to working capital available, plant equipment, and his experience and general qualifications. The OWNER may make such investigations as are deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to him all such additional information and data for this purpose as may be requested. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid if the ' evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of him fails to satisfy the OWNER that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Part of the evidence required above shall consist of a list of the names and ' addresses of not less than five(5)firms or corporations for which the bidder has done similar work. IB-07 PERFORMANCE BOND ' At the time of entering into the contract,the CONTRACTOR shall give bond to the OWNER for the use of the OWNER and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools, machinery or materials under or for the purpose of such contract,conditional for the payment as they become due,of all just claims for such work,tools, machinery, skill and terms,for saving the OWNER harmless from all cost and charges that may accrue on account of the doing of the work specified,and for compliance with the laws pertaining thereto. Said bond shall be for the amount of the contract satisfactory to the OWNER and authorized by law to do business in the State of Georgia. Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each copy thereof a certified and effectively dated copy of the power of attorney. IB-08 RECTION OF BIDS These proposals are asked for in good faith, and awards will be made as soon as practicable, provided satisfactory bids are received. The right is reserved,however to waive any informalities ' in bidding,to reject any and all proposals,or to accept a bid other than the lowest submitted if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of the OWNER. IB-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11--) SECTION 00310 IDATE: O do be.)-- .Ci /a, 20/BID 7 PROPOSAL OF /ii), a,L e_an$4 r u d-1 a r\ CAD. I TnC. (hereinafter) Icalled"BIDDER", organized and existing under the laws of the State of Cizori i Q. ,doing business as C, (4,n r p 0 ro -i 0 h . * ITO: Augusta GA . do Purchasing Dept. I 530 Telfair Street,Room 605 Augusta,Georgia 30901 (hereinafter called "OWNER") I In compliance with your Advertisement for Bids,BIDDER hereby proposes to perform all WORK of the Contract for: • BOND PROJECT NO.UB-2015-007 • IBID ITEM#17-268 HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM I in strict accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,within the time set forth therein,and at the price stated below. By submission of this BID,each BIDDER certifies,and in the case of joint BID,each party thereto "` certifies as to his own organization, that this BID has been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement as to any matter relating to this BID with any other IBIDDER or with any competitor. BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specified • in the NOTICE TO PROCEED and to complete the Project to Substantial Completion within 300 I consecutive calendar days. Contractor shall fully complete the project within 30 days thereafter for a total of 330 days. BIDDER further agrees to pay as liquidated damages,the sum of$1.000.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as provided in Article 2,Paragraph 3 of the Agreement. I BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the f g pfollowing ADDENDUM(A): I No. I Dated 0 Cob -e 18 , Z 017 No. Dated , I PART A-FILTER MODIFICATIONS $ Z, O 3j DOO PART B-POWDERED ACTIVATED CARBON(PAC) $ 1S 14 1000 FEED SYSTEM ' IPART C-FILTER RINSE MODIFICATIONS $ Z o 2 , O o p ITEM LS-7-ALLOWANCE TO BE USED ONLY $.200,000.00 AT THE APPROVAL OF THE OWNER TOTAL(PART A+ B+PART C+LS-7) .D • =° $ 3 , 5�' ,000 I1416.00 00310BID 00310-1 Z ,,. L -ENGINEERS- 1 I I I -- SECTION 00310 BID IBIDDER agrees to perform all the work described in the BASE BID of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (Including Allowance)for the total sum of -77}R . i'LL9 0ni . IN.,4. Nv,VDPED F76-y naw5A0 ,q #d °`'/iooh Dollars $ 3, 6QJ OM subject to the reductions or additions resulting from price items,all in accordance with the following Schedule of Payment Items. AMOUNTS ARE TO BE SHOWN IN BOTH WORDS AND FIGURES. IN CASE OF - IDISCREPANCY,THE AMOUNT SHOWN IN WORDS SHALL GOVERN. ADD ALTERNATE 1: I Add LepppldTtO4,11Ppard Media Baffles to owner-furnished fiberglass filter washwater troughs (S troughs)in each filter half for a total of 10 troughs. IAdditional Lump Sum Bid: ONE /-1cmlj)Rc/7 1Ei H7 Trt(v TklvesAth , %HZEE., „Aix a b Dollars$ / S Z , 3Z13 I ADD.AL' `ERNATE:2: . Add Carbon Fiber Structural Strengthening to the southern wail of Filter No 7 (Common Wall ,j between Filter No 6&No 7)as shown on Drawing S02 � � /ooAdditional Lump Sum Bid: tee. an 0 U S aO n A bot i -Ir 5 IDollars$ 3. coo. 00 ADD ALTERNATE 3: IAdd Carbon Fiber Structural Strengthening to the northern wall of Filter No 7 (Common Wall between Filter No 7&No 8)as shown on Drawing S02 • IAdditional Lump Sum Bid: T re.e, 1 o t�5 0.-r\ 1 ot,rN1 b°/10 o o 1.cU"5 Dollars$ ..'31 0 0 0. 00 IADD ALTERNATE 4: Add surface preparation and painting of the filter gallery piping for Filter No 1 and Filter No 7 Iincluding lead paint abatement as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Finishing of these specifications. I Additional Lump Sum Bid: FO r`� f' ; V e_ 1 CLAN,01)-5_h A CLc.- /�o o ba 1 I o r5 1 1 '/ Dollars$4B, CDO. d a r .w,r I 1416.0000310 BID 00310-2 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 , Y . 11: SECTION 00310 BID Supplemental.Unit Prices: Item Nb 1.: Type 2 Concrete Repair: Repair of deteriorated concrete in areas determined by the Engineer to r uire a Type 2 repair. The bid per square foot of repair i n Q ne_ ju+nc�re o \ \er 5ciLtate.. Dollars$ ! 0 0 . O O /square foot - Item No 2: Type 3.Concrete Repair: Repair of deteriorated concrete in areas determined by the • , Engineer to require a Type repair. The bid per square foot of repair iso. Q n e 14v-NA t-e.,c1 Do L 1 oi-s per S LA.Q re. -fin o-k- Dollars$ I DO O O /square foot 111 1 ADD CHANGES AS PER ADDENDUM No.1, dated October 18, 2017. ADD ALTERNATE 5: Provide additive/deductive cost to supply and install new filter underdrains in Filter No. 1 in lieu of repairing and installing existing owner supplied underdrains. Additional Lump Sum Bid: Ohl . k r DR.G:b t-rrrEti1 -11-1-b05AA) • ("1:40 b5 Dollars$ 1 15 , 000 Deductive Lump Sum Bid: Dollars$ To AM NE“..) r gez6 Lss Tta(3S14$ rr PL-reg vV Ay ADD I4(d), c!)�6 nl Lieo of REPri,M'4 gx-'sr'N8 —,ieJsGtos DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE to provide a credit for washwater troughs without Media ' Baffles on Filter No. 7 Deductive Lump Sum Bid: FbRi)l TthOL)34a.1J At4D /oo S Dollars$ 0, to no SEE CLARIFICATIONS ON FOLLOWING PAGE NOTED AS 00310-3A 1 1416.0000310D1D 00310-3 Z E L -ENGINEERS- . i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 ' CLARIFICATIONS HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM 1. If the PAC unit is a priority to the Owner,then we would strongly suggest est the g Owner proceed with the Georgia Power relocation in the PAC feed area. According to the local Georgia Power representatives,the user will need to provide the request. The time for the relocation could be considerable and delay the project. Our bid contains no fees for relocation due to the fact that Georgia Power has not been requested by the user to engineer the relocation. 2. Any repairs, cleaning, etc.necessary to refurbish Owner furnished material will be extra. It is impossible prior to bid to determine piece by piece what those would be. ' Contractor does not warrant any Owner furnished equipment. 1 1 1 1 1 1 00310-3A Clarifications for Bid Submitted by Rehab Construction Co.,Inc. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 Ir- SECTION 00310 BID 1 * Insert"a corporation", "a partnership",or"an individual",as applicable. BIDDER understands that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any ' informalities in the Bidding. The BIDDER agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 calendar • days after the scheduled closing time for receiving Bids. Upon receipt of written Notice of Acceptance of this Bid,BIDDER will execute the formal 1 Contract within ten(10)days and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds as required by Article 5 of the General Conditions. The Bid Security attached in the sum 1 of I v °/t) Boise. BOct AmD • Dollars ($ ) 1 is to become the property of the OWNER E in the event the Contract and Bond are not executed within the time set forth as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the ' OWNER caused thereby. • Respectfully Submitted: Ii 1 By' €,- � 112tlgv'j C$ignature R. E-1c.1 nes Title: Pre s 3 e r13t- Firm Name: Re.4-.Q.\ -Srr u c -1,.oTN Co . -1-r�c. 1 Address:. 2 4(..o l 7'M1 e,1 2c1 . 1 r1rtx s , \ \3 ®d 12_ . (SEAL-if Bid is by a Corporation) i 1 'W.r 1436-0000310 BMD 00310-4 Z E L ENGINEERS- 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11—') SECTION.00310 BID ' • DATA TO BE SUBMITTED WITH BID A. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS: IThe following instructions supplement the requirements of the Information for Bidders and provides instructions for completing the schedules which follow. I • 1. The Bidder shall submit a list of names and addresses of at least five(5) clients for which the Bidder has constructed similar work of comparable size and complexity. ' 2. The Bidder shall list in the space provided in Schedule C ALL major subcontractors to be used for construction of the project. Subcontractors so listed shall be used for the contract construction unless their replacement is approved by the Engineer and the Owner. B. LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS: : 1. Paving.Grading and Other Site'Work: IV.o - known (Xr B1 c, ;11,e- Address: r e..Address: 2. Concrete Construction: . _ Address: 3. Electrical: e,lp Gt t'tl ka �'t"C" C✓ Address: 222.5 b 11-+V L, Ra. , 16\a u s . GA 30q eq 4. Process'Mechanical: Re- tc e.O n s-Vr ta.c-- D n . L-txC... Address: 5. Instrumentation: cJotT 1-1 ER t ou.s Address:. 6014 Ll S L 1.1►)o sr1 i,(-G'1.. -1/44), , A-L P gp•f.'E'fl1 4 6. HVAC: a-� k n o vu n C c '► m e- Address: C. SCHEDULE.OF:E.OUIPMENT INCLUDED IN BASEBID:(CONTRACTOR MUST BID ' BASE BID ITEMS) The"Schedule.of Equipment included in BaseBid"which follows as Schedule D shall be completed Ito denote the manufacturer of major equipment proposed to be furnished by the Bidder under the Base Bid. In that schedule,the manufacturer of the items of major equipment upon which the design ' 1416-00 00310 BID 00310-5 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , - I ,' .,. • I-.4' " ' 1-----% • . SECTION 00310. IBID is based are listed as Selection "BASE BID" for the several items. Also listed under some of those items are.other manufacturers whose equipment or prodUcts are deemed equal in quality and acceptable to be provided. For those items for which more than one acceptable raanrifaeturer is Ilisted,the Bidder must bid on the basis of the Base Bid AND enter amounts to add or subtract for any alternate manufacturers. . I For comparable named equipment the furnished items shall fulfill the function and performance of the item specified and shall be of equal quality; any modifications required by the furnished equipment to the structure,process, associated equipment, or piping shall be a consideration in the I Bid price and the completed installation of the item by the Contractor shall incur no additional cost to the Owner,including engineering cost to accommodate alternate supplier. ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER Alternate+1-$ . I 1. Butterfly Valves BASE BID (A) De ' BASE BID (B) ,...- . : Pro* .i- 1 2, 0°6' I 2. Electric Actuators BASE BID (A) Be . ne :i•ItInote. (B) . • 3. Filter Underdrains BASE BID (A) CL. ..,eopo-l-cD _..„ I ) And Media • • 4. Baffled Filter BASE BID (A) C'VetsDth Washwater Troughs (B) gt311.PIr/ 5, Powdered Activated BASE BID (A) 40271V4 • I Control(PAC)System (B) vel 0 a 1 n e- - (C) Ce ty\c,0 - 4 51060 • 1 6. Centrifugal Water Pump BASE BID (A)0CPattersc_)) I 7. Electrical Panelboards BASE BID (A) pia—Dre ) (B) I . I * ks e.,Ir• ik AA e"A‘ 1,," )At ‘ cck DCA-1)\Cee-r- 12,, 2,b11 I . ) is-• I 1416-00 00310 BID 00310-6 ZEL -ENGINEERS-- I 1 .i 1 ... SBL 31O 004.10 BID BOND 1 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,that we,the ' Rehab Construction Co., Inc. as PrinciP al,The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and as Surety, are.hereby held and firmly bound unto the Augusta,Georgia Commission of Augusta, Georgia as Ownerin the penal sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid (10%) ' for the payment of which,well and truly to be made,we ' Hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. Signed this 26th day of October ' 20 17 The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the ' Augusta, Georgia Commission of Auguista,Georgia,a certain Bid,attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing for the EOMI)PROJECT NO UB-2015- ' 007.lav WATER ATvENTpAxI.FILTER tvroDIFICATIoNs.AND. PAC SYSTEM for Augusta, Georgia in accordance with plans and specifications of the AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT. 1 NOW,THEREFORE, ' (a) If said Bid shall he rejected,or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the Form of Contract attached Veneto.(properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall fiunisha bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor orfurnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perforn the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal. amount of this obligation as herein stated. 1 1416.5OMIR BID BOND 00410-I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 iThe Surety,for value receive,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety Iand its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid;and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such Iextension. I IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporateseals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers,the day and year first set forth above • ISigned and sealed this 26th day of October A.A.2017 I IWitness % ..ip ,f, Rehab Construction Co., Inc. (Seal) (Principal) I ,d / Atter Bye ,' . TA• .- /' Critl'if -of- , Pei_ , sal) 1Loot, nes , Pi-e,621 I --, t 1#AC8$ The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company(Seal) AG, %`• LZ:L. 1 ,/ (Surety) I Attest By .,'- 7-4 7 ` (Seal) I (Title) Kevin M. Neidert,Attorney in Fact I I I I utaa00041oBID 110iel00410-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I THIS:06-WER OF ATTORNEY IS=NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RfrD BACKGR J..'' OUND This`Power of Attorney limits the acts ofthose named hern ei ,and"they have be authontyto bind thC e ompany except in the manner and to the'extent her.'ein stated: I Cehi cats No 77$1744 Liberty Mutual nsuranc man y asu The Ohlo Calty Insurance Company WestAmencan Insurance Company e Co -` POWER OF ATTORNEY.;'-::::::._;'II----.•-. KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE`PRESENTS That The Ohio,Casualty Insurance Company is. cor.ortion dui 'or an Liberty Mutual'lnsurance ompany is a`corporation dui;or "nine R _ y,,g ;.i.i....... d under ar--_-,:..:.,.:1.....-1i.,-„--.. liiws of the State of New Hampshire #haf • - y, ga d.under{tie{aws ofahe State::of Massachusetts;and West?Ame7ca ; r organized under the laws of the State of Indiana:,herein collectivel Fedi : _ r n,Insurance Company is a corporation duty t y., led the.,Companies j pursuant to and_by authority herein set forth does hereb name cons i uta-' AlanFt Yates;BetsyJ.Holmes-BrianiK. Hughes.Dana<D'Rutledge,Daniel Yates;-Ga _i 'ull K Y. t t and`appoint Hartley Michael L Angel Michael S Bickner P.D Yate"s ill F D YatescJj,f�obert N Reynol sarert A Maunartl Kevin M -Nefdert 2viane M all of thecity of Atlanta state of f.A;: each tridiv'rdualiy if there be more thancone ria 'and=deliver for anti on Its behalf:as strict and'sits acfi � Via'Ifs true-attd lawful attorney m�factto make execute,seal,acknowled e ' I i ,r Y and-dee. airy rid all undertakings,bonds reeogntzan"ces and ethersurety obh abort =+n ursu" g . _ be as binding upon the Corttpanies as if they have been dull signed bythe president and;at ested b .ihe seer r y i o trance of these presents'and sfialf y eta ypf theCompanies to their own proper persons IN WITNESS WHEREOF This Power of AttorrtayihasXeeti subscribed:.bytri aufhorized,officer-or.official of€ e.0- e thereto thid 25th; y h .Companiesnd the corporate seals of the-CampaliiQs have been affixed" da of May . 2017 o.V• �Y tt�TS,-,� P�.{NSLRR ,y:1tJ5Gp - �von,l S py q tff.. �c, rc,"�Ii� • ��„any �'r,�,. `Q��Lo rcirv�r 'C t The Ohto Casualty Insurance Company N .• 6-°:::'::';')::9.--'1.-4'''1::::"-o t9tz ° 199- Is L- ---- Mutual,--' -anceCompany- a" 4 ab WestPmencaninsurance Company, Q7l'ZwN �`�% v a�' t� `-�� � �'. 4iF 1J SrEridS NDiA.0: v �I STATE OF PENNSYLI/ANIA' ss:I David M.Care;Assistant Secretary '- §OUNTY OF MONTGOMERY t4- RS-. QD this 25th day of MaY 2077 before me personally appeared David M.Carey,who acknowledged himself to.be.the Assistant_Secreta; of Lib a 0; Company,The Ohio Casualty-Company,and West American Insurance an_and-that' ry �, ,, arty Mutual Insurance-;�}.: 3 .theyeine:crit'med bysigning-onbehalf:ofthez;or orations b" i p ho , ;he as spoh being au., -:.tl.sg to da exepute the:foregoing m-- .7-?at for.the, ur o es- �1 p y himself as arduly au}honied officer R p s >+' �'=lhf WITNESS WHEREOF I have hereunto-subscntsed my name and affixed my notarial seal at King of Prussia Pennsylvania,on the-day.and yearfirst above written ``0 lir. - 5� PAST C0 MMO1StyVE/11 T..QF PE_NNSYtVANfA_ +`tom:: "�7 :•• �oNtY iii _ Q M - �+v�o�' E9!„ C Notarial Seai _ a x Teresa Paste9a Notary Public By ��� - �ir/�� ('� _: i PP - ' nTw M ._ u er ria r p ontgo)nery County Teresa Pasteella Notary Public 1VMy_Commission Expires March28 2021 fv . ' . 3�:� A�� Member Pennsylvan,a Association of Nolarios �,This Power of Attorney is made-and,executedpursuant to-and by authority of the following Bylaws:and Authorizations of The 0 :::::_7:::,,i1:;..-:-: 0. Sof_ -Insurance'Company and West American Insurance•Company:).gpich resolutiop.. are.now fn_fulrforce and:effeet r d' bio Casualty insurance Company Ltbehy.Mutual ;;r�0,. ea ing as follrnvs • _ Q ;ARTICLE N OFFICERS Section 12 Pbwer ofAttomey Any•officer orother official of the Cor oration autho f �r l 11.12 "to such:Ifrnitation:as the Chairman or the=Pres` `- "' " •�" -� _. r zed-for that pu�ose to writing by.the Cfiairrnan or the President and sub act�.•13,...„_i:-.61:_ � _,_ #dent may prescnbe shallappoint such attorneys tri,-fact,<as mma -be�necess o ' '`�:�acknowledgeend deirveras surety an'�and'ah Gijd_eitaki' = ""=' �' --. .-: Y ,- ary.to act in,behalf of the Corporation to"make,execute,seal � = Y -_ . ngs,bonds rebogn¢ances and other.suretyobligations :'Such a tom.ye in f ct-s :powers of attorne shall have:full ower to bindthe-Corpoiatloi b. ctheirsi natur '" '' ' s-ar _ _tri the totfie a section th et foror their respective ...17, ...,.--I-.. .: �: : Y = p Y 9 e andexecution-of.. such Instrumentsand to:attach therefothes 1'0: •_ executed such instruments shaii be as binding as fi signed by the Presidentandattested tb ti"the acre a ea.f the r alt or ey i ctiun er .- tl� R .. Y. $ .t_ry.An y po.war or aufhardy granfed to any representative or.O.:,;,,1- 6-.;i.e. Rome {ho-provisions of this-article.say be revoked at anytime byihe Board ttae Chairman,`tile President orby-thevfficer"or officers .antro is y m fact under _g g such power or authority, ty,- ,. I ,-ARTICLE XIII Execution of Contracts SECTION:5 Surety Beads and Undertalongs Any officer of the-Com any a or' � J .,... __ P Y, th lied for that purpose m Writing bylhe 0fia¢man'or the re'si ant ��^ -0-•."and subject to such limitations es the01,0nan or the,president._nay prescribe'shall:' oint soch'a r ' ' _: -- . � h 4 . �. .' ;_., pR tto keys+n fact-as may be,gecessa to act inb$half ofthe-Com an -t6make Qzec = ; • 3 seaj acknowledge:and deliver as surety any and altvndertakirigs bonds;.eco nizances an_d _ure ry ' --1t, i n uta . —,M, -- g.,,. other sure obN 'tions: Surf:attomeys�irrfacfsu�jectto.the.hmitations-setforik_i" v respective;powers of attorney,shall ha--'.'-1 powertobind The Crim an b`_their:si nater e �h m n so- _. p y..y_ g, re and exii4a- _-of any such Instruments and to-attacfi tlier'eta tfieseat of the Gorr an =O,E:o, Ce ll be asbirtdmg as if sighed by the president-and attested by thesecretary executed such instrtfrtients sha p y When so- v� rtificate-of-Designation Ttte President-of the Co an actin �' " mp Y g pursuant to the Bylaws ofthe Company authI orizes.David M t;arey Assistant Secretary to.a poiril— attume s m (—_ fast as may be necessary to act oh behalf of the Coftipany torrtake execute seal acknowledge and delver as surety any and all ui.7ndertakings bonds recognizances and other s urety oblrgabons. I 9uthonzatlon By unanimous;consent ofthe Company s$pard.;.:.:1.0,-'.-:.:-' f t)irectors the Corn an consent Company=Whatever appearing=upon a remit((ed co of an P y s.'.0.:.;:::.-.:0-•-- thaf facsimile or mech8nically reproduced slgnaTure of any assistant secreta 'of the py Y power of atttrrney isevetl,by the Corrrpatiy m r;lnnectwn wilt}surely.bonds,straitbe vafidand binding uporrthe Company with • tfie same force and effect as though manuallyaffixed:- - 1; Renee C.?Llewellyn;,the undersigned Assistant aecretartr The Ohio Caayalty insurance Co a Lib' hereby certify that theonginai power of.attome .of wlricta the fore of �Y - y Mutual Insurance Company, and Uvest American Insurance Company 40fg ng is a full trite Arid correct copy of the'Power q(.#0-1*executed by=s- Companies is iii full force:and=effect:and , teas notbeen-revoked � �� -= ��� _ IN TESTIMQNY WHEREOF I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies #its 2 6=th day of OC t ob e r (T9 ,9T2fl({99 Zd1.7?9 0 ,r ' f o • - y 5 ' a Bye • �y�Y Renee C Llew ssistant Secretary. LMS•12873.022017 $6 Of 10Q 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I ,,ucusr NOTICE OF AWARD :335, Y�- i CEORG DATE: ICONTRACTOR: Rehab Construction, Co-, Inc. IADDRESS: 2246 Bethel Road Conyers GA 30012 ICity State Zip Code PROJECT: Highland Avenue Water Treatment PROJECT NO: BOND PROJECT NO. UB-2015- ' Plant,Filter Modifications and PAC System At a meeting of the held on (Date) 1 you were awarded the Contract for the following Project: Highland Avenue WTP, Filter Modifications and PAC System I Enclosed please find 5 copies of the Contract Documents for your execution. Please complete the Ipages,affixing signatures,dates, notary and/or corporate seals,etc.where necessary and return to this office within 10 days from the date of this letter,excluding Legal Holidays. IThe Certificate of Insurance must be complete. Power of Attorney must be submitted in triplicate;an original and two copies is permissible. IVery truly yours, I IProject Engineer ,L Reciept of this NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby 1 8 „f n/ TS acknowledged this,the ofY Apr.•t 1 , 20 I Rs..\- 0.\o CA t1,5 rruC4ion ez• -1-"t•• '� nc.. i P ' d Contractor t r . �B • I 1 e.h n es Title I Please sign and return one copy of this Notice of Award Ac nowledgement o: Augusta Utilities Department I 360 Bay Street,Suite 180 Augusta,GA 30901 I I I 1416-00 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD.DOCX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT AGREEMENT ' This AGREEMENT, made on the day of ,20 , by and between AUGUSTA, GEORGIA, BY AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND I COUNTY COMMISSION, party of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and Rehab Construction Co., Inc. party of the second part, hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR. ' WITNES SETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the considerations hereinafter named, agree as follows: ' ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials and all of the equipment and ' labor necessary, and to perform all of the work shown on the plans and described in the specifications for the project entitled: ' BOND PROJECT NO. UB-2015-007 HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENTPLANT FILTER MODIICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM ' and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents as defined in the General and Special Conditions hereto attached, which are hereby made a part of this agreement. ARTICLE II- TIME OF COMPLETION -LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ' The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within 14 calendar days after the date of written notice by the Owner or the Contractor to proceed. All work shall be ' substantially completed within 300 calendar days with all such extensions of time as are provided for in the General Conditions. Substantial completion shall be defined in the General Conditions. Final completion shall be 30 days after substantial completion. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this contract. Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by I and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and construction conditions prevailing in this locality. ' IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL, OR REFUSE TO COMPLETE THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME HEREIN SPECIFIED, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as a ' part of the Consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay the Owner the sum One Thousand and no/100 ($1,000.00) Dollars, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for such breach of contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor 1416-00 00520 Agreement.Docx A-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I ISECTION 00520 AGREEMENT I shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract for completing the work to substantial completion. I The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would, in such event, sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to time by the IOwner from current periodical estimates. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract and the specifications wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed for the I additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the essence of this contract. I ARTICLE III-PAYMENT. (A)The°Contractt Sum I The Owner shall pay to the contractor for the performance of the Contract the amount as stated in the BID FORM and Schedule of Items. No variations shall be made in the amount Iexcept as set forth in the specifications attached hereto. (B)progress Payment I On no later than the fifth dayof everymonth, the ContractorOwner's shall submit to the Owner s Engineer an estimate covering the percentage of the total amount of the Contract which has been I completed from the start of the job up to and including the last working day of the preceding month, together with such supporting evidence as may be required by the Owner and/or the Engineer. This estimate shall include only the quantities in place and at the unit prices as set I forth in the Bid Schedule. On the vendor run following approval of the invoice for payment, the Owner shall after deducting previous payments made, pay to the Contractor 90% of the amount of the estimate on units accepted in place. The 10% retained percentage may be held by the IOwner until the final completion and acceptance of all work under the Contract. ARTICLE IV-ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT. I (A) Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection acceptance, the Engineer shall within 10 days made such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a final certificate, I over his own signature, stating that the work required by this Contract has been completed and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor by the Owner Iwithin 15 days after the date of said final certificate. (B) Before final payment is due, the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the IEngineer that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with work have been paid, except that in case of disputed indebtedness of liens of evidence of payment of all such I 1415-00 00520 Agreement A-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ' SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT ' disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been guaranteed by surety bond. ' (C) The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner, other than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work appearing within 12 ' months after final payment, from requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturer's guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made and still unsettled. (D) If after the work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so certifies, the Owner shall upon certification of the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted. Each payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 1 1 1 1 1416-00 00520 Agreement.Doex A-3 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement in three (5) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first mentioned above. I OWNER: AUGUSTA,GEORGIA x.. „s ATTER Sii At 4�4 44P la. SEAL iy , ,, Ere 7 1 t ✓i. ' :411 a, cry r ... .. .. " C fro. ;` 9 The Honorable Hardie Davis,Jr. etas". :l` fy- pA it a.G a . r�A. • IMayor '; 44 tithe Gs s ' ,'Aa Date: " t 4 Dat; ��' ,', 't �OR � I APPROVED AS TO FORM: DEPARTMENT APPROVAL: 1 By: j By: 1 ••+%"--D, LJOLA—SL........... IThomas D. Wiedmeier Attorney Director, Augusta Utilities Department / I Date: 4----/ /�� Date: 57/0/1 a I CONTRACTOR: ATTEST: / SEAL j By' e �_ �/i By. z Name: ¢.tir.sa. R. ujr ..." . oS tA..o... Ha1tts ITitle: cl.ees �cr\� Ti •. 3,Gre.-Lw.r1 Date: . Date: I I 1416-00 00 20 Agreement �1 5 Ag A'4 I i I .,,u G.US�`T NOTICE TO PROCEED GeoiW I DATE: ITO: Rehab Construction Company, Inc. Attn: George R. Haynes I2246 Bethel Road I Conyers,GA 30012 UB- I BID#17-268 HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT 2015- PROJECT NO: PROJECT: PLANT FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM 007 IYou are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated Ion or before ,and you are to complete the WORK within 360 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore . IVery truly yours, Augusta Utilities Management Team I Project Engineer I Receipt of this NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged IThis,the day of IContractor: By: ITitle: IPlease sign and return one copy of this Notice to Proceed Acknowledgement to: Augusta Utilities Department IAttn: Program Manager I360 Bay Street,Suite 180 Augusta,GA 30901 1 I 1 1416-00 00550 NOTICE TO PROCEED AUD.DOCX I I I I I I I I I I U I I I I I I I I ' SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND (NOTE : BONDNUMBER.•0/ 07 6 6 a,39 ' THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PAYMENT BOND ON PAGE PB-3, IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR THE PAYMENT OF LABOR AND MATERIAL.) ' KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: I That Rehab Construction, Inc. as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and Insurance� Casualty y a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of N/f ,with its principal office in the City of f re% ,State of in P , as Surety, ' hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto AUGUSTA, GEORGIA BY AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA COMMISSION as Obligee, hereinafter called the Owner,in the penal amount of Four Million, Three Hundred One Thousand, Three Hundred Twenty Eight ' no/100 Dollars $4,301,328.00 for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents for the faithful performance of a certain written agreement. WHEREAS, Contractor has by said written agreement dated ' entered into a contract with Owner for the BOND PROJECT UB-2015-007,HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT,FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM in accordance with the drawings and specifications issued by the Augusta Utilities Department ' and the Augusta-Richmond County Commission,which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the CONTRACT . NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if Contractor shall promptly ' and faithfully perform said CONTRACT, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. ' Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the CONTRACT, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly ' (1) Complete the CONTRACT in accordance with its terms and conditions,or (2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, ' and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if the Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available as Work progresses (even though there should be a default a succession of defaults under the contract of 1416-00 00610 Performance&Payment Bonds.Docx PB-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less ' the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding,including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder,the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the contract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount t payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. ' Any suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which final payment under the CONTRACT falls due. ' No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Owner. 1 ' Signed and sealed this day of A. D. 20 . Wit► ss lee 10.4 dOca�i�u ,tehdo.otstc. (Seal) (Contractor) 01 . ayhes, v -4ry // - est 4itit_cc+ B � � _/.�:�� cal) a � Lo % R. -.1 IV Prez slam`\-' ' The Ohio Casualty Witness Insurance Company (Seal) ?1 i / (Surety) Attesatil2A4. By ice- ) / j (Seal) (Title)) Kevin M. Neidert Attorney-in-Fact 1 1416-00 00610 Performance&Payment Bonds.Docx PB-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ' SECTION 00610 LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND NOTE: BOND NUMBER:(,/6676..39 THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PERFORMANCE BOND ON PAGE PB-I, IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR THE ' PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Rehab Construction Company, Inc. as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and Insurance Company a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of /1/14 with its principal office in the City of .jda+b r , State of (h I+ as Surety,hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto AUGUSTA, GEORGIA BY AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION, as Obligee, hereinafter called the Owner,for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined in the ' amount of Four Million, Three Hundred One Thousand, Three Hundred Twenty Eight no/100 Dollars $4,301,328.00 for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves,their heirs, executors, administrators, ' successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated entered ' into a contract with Owner for the BOND PROJECT UB-2015-007, HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT,FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND PAC SYSTEM in accordance with drawings and specifications issued by the Augusta Utilities Department and Augusta-Richmond ' County Commission, which contract is by reference made a part hereof,and is hereinafter referred to as the CONTRACT . NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the Contractor ' shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required to use in the performance of the CONTRACT, then this obligation shall be ' void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject,however, to the following conditions: (1) A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a ' subcontractor of the Contractor for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the contract, labor and material being construed as to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the CONTRACT . (2) The above named Contractor and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Owner that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such 1416-00 00610 Performance&Payment Bonds.Docx PB-3 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant,prosecute the suit to final judgement for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. (3) No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant, (a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the Contractor, ' shall have given written notice to any two of the following: The Contractor, the Owner, or the Surety above named, within ninety (90) days after such claimant did or performed the last of the work or labor, or furnished the last ' of the materials for which said claim is made, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished, or for whom the work or labor was done or ' performed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope addressed to the Contractor, Owner or Surety, at any place where an office regularly ' maintained for the transaction of business, or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in the state in which the aforesaid project is located, save that such service need not be made by a public officer . (b) After the expiration of one ( I) year following the date on which Contractor ' ceased work on said CONTRACT, it being understood, however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law. (e) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, and not elsewhere. ' (4) The amount of this bond shall be reduced byand to the extent t t of any payment or ' payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond. 1416-00 00610 Performance&Payment Bonds.Docx PB-4 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Signed and sealed this day of A. D. 20 Witness / I IMMmtt110u • (Seal) ' (Contractor) rc>SR :11\e-St4011 VaC�t-Q.�arV By (Seal) • 11'x, ras,de_AN"*- I Witness The Ohio Casualty ) Insurance Company (Seal) Att="te,I/�� By (S �')- /' 26 (Seal) 1 (Title) Kevin M. Neidert ' Attorney-in-Fact 1416-00 00610 Performance&Payment Bonds.Docx PB-5 1 1 I THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein,and they,have ri,o authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No. 8026586 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company ! POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana(herein collectively called the"Companies"},pursuant to and by authority herein set forth,does hereby name,constitute and appoint, Michael L.Angel;Michael S.Brickner;Michael Dawson;Kevin M.Neidert;Marie M.Hartley;Betsy J.Holmes;Brian K.Hughes;Robert N.Reynolds; Dana D. Rutledge;Gary Spuller,Alan R.Yates;Daniel Yates;P.D.Yates,Ill all of the city of Atlanta ,state of GA each individually if there be more than one named,its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver,for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed,any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations,in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this 1st day of March 2018 «s MS 4....;'• ,. � M1 , F The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company us , LibertyMutual Insurance Company ai 9 0 1912 7 1991 , p ry C a ' th'',;:,,\\ ,-' West American Insurance Company A f •7 C STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA ss David M.Carey,Assistant Secretary C COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY RI = p L co On this 1st day of March , 2018,before me personally appeared David M.Carey,who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of Liberty Mutual Insurance v I- 0 y Company. The Ohio Casualty Company,and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do,execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes >,(0 2 therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. asC IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at King of Prussia,Pennsylvania,on the day and year first above written. L O L2 (1t c r P PASPCOMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA 'Q M .. Nota oat Sea y. U� r'"'u oago I'-7 Teresa Post ala,Notary Public By' �.G'�� O • i OF Upper Merton Twp.,Montgomery County Teresa Pastella,Notary Public i'a CD"i ',t, ¢4, My Commission Expires March 28,2023 C y O 2 ✓SVL`1. �G �f�Y $°+ Member.Pennsylvania Association of Notaries d0 asE to This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Cl). a ",`, Insurance Company,and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: a..O • U} on 1:3) ARTICLE IV-OFFICERS-Section 12.Power of Attorney.Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President,and subject 0 C ,a; to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe,shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make,execute,seal, ,N y • ,= acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys-in-fact,subject to the limitations set forth in their respective 'O 2 G. powers of attorney,shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so is et 0 t1s executed,such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary.Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney-in-fact under >'Q • the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board,the Chairman,the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. .•d. U , . C ARTICLE XIII-Execution of Contracts-SECTION 5.Surety Bonds and Undertakings.Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, E 1) and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe,shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make,execute, x-M 0 c seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys-in-fact subject to the limitations set forth in their C 0? respective powers of attorney,shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so v O executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. 0 Certificate of Designation-The President of the Company.acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company,authorizes David M.Carey,Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys-in- I...fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization-By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors,the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company,wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds,shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Renee C. Llewellyn, the undersigned. Assistant Secretary, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a kill, true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this day of ,20 . J n' tO�ti^v J�y"n`)'tit' s i, Af y m 't-', �• 'J:: J 19-9 r'l '.. 1911 ` 1997 By: ''.7. e . z Renee C.Llew , ssistant Secretary 15 of 100 LMS 12873 022017 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I __ 0 0 ° I Ju) 64 64 ; : i E4o v. W c Wit.Pt. .� ! NI W FW- Y O ' H 'a 4QT� cry ` U N O 2' U p 0 tp 1:5� C E W N B • +1 O O b I. ""1 .k U' c ' 1- 1, y`' N it c0 Z J C� N c C in c c Z a4.- 0 0 N V O 120 :j v v p N o o W d W I- E } N , Q' E co c0 i V V V N 'w 0 0 N c c 0. 01.. z O) 1- N• C p d a N ggivo g '' w0. x 0 s 0 J d c 64,: E- ti 0 CO to m 1. _0 x _Z O �' O d c c 0 W LL c V v o K •x 'w s O I Ol z O LL (7 0 0 W Cu p W (9 9 . Z .c W . E z .� z a z V E .L: o E o _U u a =O N 0O ° E O Z tY 0 D p ° W W O 0 $j yt. Q Z O z 0 F V cc (ti xi ci J w a c I ^ t N M H _ tG N OC co d ir y to d N O E .O g Y3C0O NO � d1� NO 427 o oa c'vC p U i-" to Cl Cy >+.0� b I ?cp e 0 0 R 8 E m 0 0 ,..8 rn o a�0 0 0 �. p ui LL 0z a ° � 6 36 o 0) o,Q o 2 rn0, ..� E '' co 0 8'0 0 ,,¢ 8 c O0'o� 'C it . S' ( 'g ovO °0 = m ` Ow MUM - e-4,3 ° 8 y qy 0 Q W Q 8osu-'ca03c0 I .8 .c 0 LL poN ; Eocfo `• c L • d c >- w,: w - .- -e08 �;m c z cc O =i m tY 080- 0-0= .v0 O 0 O W N si.=EA c3 o�J c c CO v p c 0 I- Q O O 6Eo10 Nook° 1.. i 1 0, 4y (� c ° 0 t0.0 .-d O • I �j a a Z = Z > >- coma, vi-= O 01•qq,�� dc O >-6 > caw F-° 'a ¢ U 0 g E. 8 83 8 Es 8-0-i¢v m 1 1 I 7c .o I .. (9 E . O . m m '�v tV N Q a to O1 ■� N N Odc °.. a u 1Sw t U, `E E + 01.°- c T° L = `o C gU c 0 w d _ 15 N O C p� c.) w N W v I E � Z ° 0 0 •N `... R a _ E . ET 7 • o 5V Ua.c E 5 8i m oa I m I I I to I 1 Qg CDE e ;N . W WH fid � P V L gaZ. 8 c I ° $ HH W a I. LL co I 1 g o . 8f. v ■— 0 • c-c 1...: c 0 m 0 0 MN ;� N i . IIIIIIIM c.:S m CO 5 CIL a -5 CA ' IN � 1....76Bgym .1 l8. : N( LTo(0U c }i lit p + C 03`p. •Q ?.. L N y O c c GL G • �F q3y. a,,s, I N CO.ID a 1 . m •a I I 1 G3 • 1Ce O to a W .5 ii 8 c . O .6 °" d 0II E LL L° m I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C m et C^ C1tt- 0 CO 0 Co) To 071:) oslorr 20(1)3.c o 0 Qto 111 U) �,� L d,. O L d-+ p£ I0 V . E °N E 6 .. -• 8 dE� . = . o� I " 0 0 I I • An:. 0 o, IC b a.1 03 E E .cow w IC L. CI EM 0 o 0 Oc tl Ui u ` n- c z I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Certificate of Substantial Completion ' Project: Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant,Filter Modifications and PAC System Owner: Augusta Utilities Department Owner's Contract No.: UB-2015-007 Contract: Engineer's Project No.: 1416-00 ' This [tentative] [definitive] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to: Li All Work under the Contract Documents: ❑The following specified portions of the Work: 1 Date of Substantial Completion The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion ' of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below. A [tentative] [definitive] list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as ' amended as follows: ❑Amended Responsibilities ❑Not Amended Owner's Amended Responsibilities: Contractor's Amended Responsibilities: 1 i EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute. ' Page 006251 of 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I The following documents are attached to and made part of this Certificate: 1 This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Executed by Engineer Date Accepted by Contractor Date Accepted byOwner P Date 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute. Page 00625 2 of 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 gavial=Date August 2001 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE I--DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: Addenda-Any changes, revisions or clarifications of the Contract Documents which have been duly issued by OWNER to prospective Bidders prior to the time of opening of Bids. Agreement-The written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. ' Application for Payment-The form accepted by PROFESSIONAL which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to include such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. ' Bid-The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the price(s)for the Work to be performed. ' Bonds-Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security furnished by CONTRACTOR and its Surety in accordance with the Contract Documents.- Change Order--A document recommended by PROFESSIONAL, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER, and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Contract Documents-The Agreement: Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents); CONTRACTOR'S Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement; the Bonds; these General Conditions; the Supplementary Conditions; the Plans, Specifications and the Drawings as the ' same are more specifically identified in the Agreement; Certificates of Insurance; Notice of Award; and Change Order duly delivered after execution of Contract together with all amendments, modifications and supplements issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.3 and 3.5 or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. ' Contract Price-The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement(subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work). Contract Time-The number of days (computed as provided in paragraph 17.2.1) or the date stated in the ' Agreement for the completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR-The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. ' COUNTY-Richmond County, Georgia, or Augusta, Georgia, political subdivisions of the State of Georgia, the Augusta-Richmond County Commission, and its authorized designees, agents,or employees. Day-Either a working day or calendar day as specified in the bid documents. If a calendar day shall fall on �. a legal holiday, that day will be omitted from the computation. Legal Holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day, Memorial Day, 4th of July, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day and the following Friday, and Christmas Day. I ` GC-1 Page 1 of 55 1 1 1 Revision Date 2teTest 2001 Defective-An faultyadjective which;when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, or deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents,or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or has been damaged prior to PROFESSIONAL'S recommendation of final payment, unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion (in accordance with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10). Drawings-The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by PROFESSIONAL and are referred to in the Contract Documents. Agreement-The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no suchd Date is the If no such date,is indicated it Ci�eansthe date on which the Agreement is signed by the Mayor oAugusta, Georgia. Field Order-A written order issued by PROFESSIONAL that modifies Drawings and Specifications, but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. General Requirements-Sections of Division I of the Specifications. ' Laws or Regulations-Laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes and/or orders. of Award-The Written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful l udder erateatin that t upon Nati ctrnpiiace by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent the'dine specified,OWNER will sign and_ deliver the Agreement. Notice too Procdate on A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR(with a copy to PROFESSIONAL)OR startall fixEnt�to date on which-the Contract Time will commence to run.and:on which CONTRACT to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. OWNER-Augusta, Georgia, and the Augusta-Richmond County Commission. Partial Utilization-Placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended or for a related purpose)before.reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work. ' PROFESSIONAL-The Architectural/Engineering firm or individual or in-house licensed person designated to perform the design and/or resident engineer services for the Work vidual designated as the representative or the who shall a PM MANAGER Ilei Thse n be enaOWNER andProfessionl firm or both the PROFESSIONAL and CONTRACTOR OWNERact as when project is part of an OWNER designated program. ProjectThe total construction of which the Work he Contract Documents.uder the Contract Documents may be the whole,or a part, as Indicated elsewhere Project Area-The area within which are the specified Contract Limits of the improvements contemplated to be constructed in whole oi.in part under this Contract. Project Manager-The professionalin charge,.serving OWNER saidw with Oa NSR,for the purpose of dire r rice rchitectural or engineering sr his successor, or any other person or persons, employed by having in charge the work embraced in this Contract. GC-2 Page 2 of 55 1 ` Revision Date August 2001 Resident Project Representative-The authorized representative of PROFESSIONAL as PROGRAM MANAGER who is assigned to the site or any part thereof. Shop Drawings-All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or"for CONMACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, ' standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. ' Specifications-Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor-An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other SUBCONTRACTOR for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. ' Substantial Completion-The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of PROFESSIONAL as evidenced by PROFESSIONAL's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or Specified part) can be used for the purposes for which it:is intended, or if there be no such certifito isa led, when final payment is due in accordance with paragraph 1413., The teems "substantial'complete"and"substantially completed"as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof Supplementary Conditions-The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these IGeneral Conditions. Supplier-A manufacturer,fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor. Underground Facilities-All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasement containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid ' petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems, or water. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work-The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive-A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and;. signed by OWNER and recommended by PROFESSIONAL; ordering an addition, ' deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22. A Work Change Directive may not change the Contract Price or the Contract Time but is evidence that ' the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in Article 10. 1' GC-3 Page 3 of 55 1 I I 1 Revision Data August 2001 signedII II Written Amendment-A written amendment of the Contract Documents, by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the non- engineering or non-technical rather than strictly Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents. 1 1 r 1 I I 1 1 I I I I I GC-4Ipage 4 of 55 I • I I Revision Date August 9OC1 ARTICLE 2-PRELIMINARY MATTERS ' Delivery of Bonds: 2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance with these Contract Documents. Copies of Documents: t2.2. After the award of the Contract, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR, at no cost, one (1) complete set of the Contract Documents for execution of the work. Additional sets of the project manual and drawings and/or individual pages or sheets of the project manual or drawings will be furnished by ' COUNTY upon CONTRACTOR's request and at CONTRACTOR's expense, which will be OWNER's standard charges for printing and reproduction. ' Commencement of Contract Time, Notice to Proceed: 2.3. The Contract Time shall commence as established in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time after the Effective Date of the Contract. ' Starting the Project: 2.4. CONTRACTOR shall begin the Work on the date the Contract Time commences. No Work shall be done prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences. Any Work performed by CONTRACTOR prior to date on which Contract Time commences shall be at the sole risk of CONTRACTOR. Before Starting Construction: 2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report to Writing to PROFESSIONAL any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall Obtain a written interpretation or clarification from PROFESSIONAL before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. CONTRACTOR shall be liable to OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, if CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER for review: 2.6.1. an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the various stages of the Work: 2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions, and ' 2.6.3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of.items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basisfor progress payments during construction. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work which will be confirmed in GC-5 Page 5 of 55 1 1 1 1 Revision Rate AIIguet 2001 writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission. 2.7. Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional Insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, an original policy or certified copies of each insurance policy (and ether evidence of insurance which OWNER may reasonably request) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. Pre-construction Conference: ' 2.8. Before any Work at the site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, OWNER , PROFESSIONAL and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in 2.6 as well as procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing applications for payment and maintaining required records. Finalizing Schedules: 2.9. At least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, PROFESSIONAL and OWNER and others as appropriate will be held to finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten(10)calendar days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until the schedules are submitted and acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as provided below. The finalized progress schedule will be acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as providingan orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contrett Time, but such acceptance will neither impose on PROFESSIONAL responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility therefor. The finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and Sample submissions will be acceptable to PROFESSIONAL as providing a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing as to form the nd substance. CONTRACTORS schedule of values shall be approved by PR CONTRACTOR, in addition to preparing an initially acceptable schedule, shall be responsible for maintaining the schedule, including updating schedule. Schedule updates shall include progression of work as compared to scheduled progress on work. Schedule updates shall accompany each pay request. 1 1 GC-6 Page 6 of 55 I I 1 I Revision Date August 2001 ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE Intent: ' 3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary:what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the State of Georgia. 3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project(or part ' thereof) to be constructed in accordance 'with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be:Inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom Or trade-usage as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade ' meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. 3.3. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents or as may be provided by ' amendment or supplement thereto issued by one of the methods indicated in 3.6 or 3.7,the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict,error,-ambiguity or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:the provisions ofrty such standard,specification manual, code or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by referencein the Contract Documents) and the provisions of any such Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work(unless Such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). Clarifications and Interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by PROFESSIONAL as provided in paragraph 9.4. S.4, Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such ' reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard, specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids),except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. ' 3.5. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any' provisionof any such Law or Regilation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such ' standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier referred to in 6.7, CONTRACTOR shall so report to'PROFESSIONAL in writing et once and before proceeding. With the Work affected thereby and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from PROFESSIONAL; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or PROFESSIONAL for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents: 3.6. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: 1 , GC-7 Page 7 of 55 1 Revision nate August 2001 3.6.1. a formal Written Amendment, 3.6.2.a Change Order(pursuant to paragraph 10.3), or 3.6.3. a Work Change Directive(pursuant to paragraph 10.4). As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. 3.7. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized in one or more of the following ways: 3.7.1. a Field Order(pursuant to paragraph 9.5). 3.7.2. PROFESSIONAL'S approval of a Shop Drawing or sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.24 and 6.26), or 3.7.3. PROFESSIONAL'S written interpretation or clarification(pursuant to paragraph 9.4). Reuse of documents: .8. Neither CONTRACTOR:nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or OWNERSHIP rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing :the Seal of PROFESSIONAL or PROFESSIONAL'S consultant;and they shall not reuse such Drawings, Specifications or other documents(or copies of any thereof) on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and specific written verification or adaptation by PROFESSIONAL. 1 • GC-8 Page 8 0 55 ' 1 I Revision Date August 2001 ARTICLE 4-AVAILABILITY OF LANDS, PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ' Availability of Lands: ' 4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Necessary easements or rights of-.way will be obtained:and'. expenses will be borne by OWNER. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments in the Contract Price or the Contract Times as a result of any delay in OWNER's fumishirig, these lands, rights-of-way or easements, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and. 12. The CONTRACTOR shall provide: for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. Physical Conditions: 4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized in preparing the Contract Documents and those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except ' Underground Facilities)that have been utilized in preparing the Contract Documents. 4.2.2. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in I such reports and drawings. Such"technical data"is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any claim against OWNER, PROFESSIONAL,or any of PROFESSIONAL's Consultants with respect to: ' 4.22.1.the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including but not limited to, any aspectsof the means; methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or 4.2.2.2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings, or ' 4.2.2.3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information. 4.2.3. If conditions are encountered, excluding existing utilities, at the site Which are (1) ' subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indidated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist end generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the ' character provided for in the Contract documents,then CONTRACTOR shall give OWNER notice thereof promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 48 hours after first observance of the conditions. 4.2.4. The OWNER and PROFESSIONAL shall promptly investigate such conditions, and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in CCNTRAGTOR`s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the OWNER OWNEfk and PROFESSIONAL shall recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both. If the OWNER and PROFESSIONAL ' GC-9 Page 9 of 55 r 1 Revision Date August 2001 materially different from those indicated in the Contract determine that the conditions at the Site are not m y Documents or are not materially different from those ordinarily found and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the PROFESSIONAL shall notify CONTRACTOR of the determination in writing. The Work shall be performed after direction is provided by the PROFESSIONAL. ' Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities: , 4.3.1. Shown Or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or PROFESSIONAL by OWNER'S of such Underground Facil- ities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 4.3.1.1. OWNER and PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data;and 4.3.1.2. The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work with the OWNER'S of such Underground Facilities during construction, for the safety and protection thereof as provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which will be considered as having been included in the Contract Price. 4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was: not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and" which CONTRACTOR could' not reasonably have been' expected to be; aware of, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after`becoming aware thereof and before.performing any Work affected thereby except in an emergency as permitted by"paragraph 812, identify the OWNER of such Underground Facility and give written notice thereof to that OWNER and to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL. PROFESSIONAL will promptly review the Underground ;Facility to determine the extent to which the Contract Documents' should be modified to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground: Facility, and the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented to the extent necessary, During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 620. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price ' or an extension of the Contract Time}or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. Reference Points: ' 4.4. OWNER shall provide Engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in PROFESS.IONAL's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. ! ' CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to PROFESSIONAL whenever any reference point �l best rrespdestroyed onsible for therequires accurate replacement or necessary changes in grades or locations, and sha relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. GC-10 Page 10 of 55 1 Revision Rate August l901 Asbestos,PCBs, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material: ' 4.5 OWNER shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto:.in connection with the Work et the ' site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by CONI RACTOR, Subcontractor, Suppliers or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. ' 4,6 CONTRACTOR shall Immediately, ;(i) stop; all work in connection with such hazardous cotndition and in any area affected thereby(except in an`emergency as required by 6.22), and (ii) notify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL (and thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall promptly consult with PROFESSIONAL concerning, the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such hazardous condition or take corrective,action,if any. CONTRACTOR shall not berequired to resume Work in connection with such hazardous condition er in any such affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR special written notice(i)specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the ' resumption of Work, or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot,agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed by CONTRACTOR to be resumed, either party may make a claim I therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 4.7 If after receipt of such special written notice, CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief It,Is unsafe, or does not agree to resume sUch Work under such ' special conditions, then CONTRACTOR may order such portion of the Work that is in connection with such hazardous conditions or in:such affected area to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and.12. OWNER may have deleted such portion of the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. ' 4.7.1 The provisions of 4.2 and 4.3 are not intended to apply to Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site. 1 1 GC-11 Page 11 of 55 1 i Revision Date pngaet 2001 ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance and Other Bonds: • 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as Security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when.final payment becomes due, except as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Ooduments. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are raquired by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds, and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department.' All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act. Licensed Sureties and Insurers; Certificates of Insurance 5,2.1 All beads arid Insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or Insurance companies that:are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Georgia to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limit and coverages so required. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of authority to act. Such surety and inn the Supplementaryc ntes Conll also tlsos.meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided ' 5.2.2. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER,with copies to each additional insured identified in 5.3, an original or a certified copy of the complete insurance policy for each policy required, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with 5.3. 5.23. if the surety on any Bend furnished by CONTRACTOR Is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is tern inated in any state where anypart of the Project is located or It ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 6.1, CONTRACTOR shall within five days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance: 5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such comprehensive general liability and other 111 insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR'S performance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR"s other obligations under the Contract Documents,whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, by any Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work,or by anyone for whose sets any of then may be liable: 1115.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; GC-12 Page 12 of 55 t I - I Revision Date IAugust 2001 5.3.2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease,or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; I5.3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; I . personS 3 4. Claims for damages insured. by personal injury liability coverage which are sustained(a) by any, ase result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (b)by any other person for any other reason; I5.3.5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; I 5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Regulations for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or for damage to property;and 5.3.7. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage Iarising out of the OWNERSHIP, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include the'specific coverage's and be written for not I less than the limits of liability and coverage's provided in the.Supplementary Conditions,or required by law, whichever is greater. The comprehensive general liability insurance shall include completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insurande so required to be purchased and maintained(or the certificates or other evidence thereof)shall contain a provision or;+endorsement.that the'coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until.at least thirty:days prior written notice: has bean given to OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER, and PROFESSIONAL by certified mail. All such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment:andat all times thereafter;when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12. In addition, I CONTRACTOR shall maintain such completed operations insurance for at least two years after final payment and furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 1 Contractual Liability Insurance: I 5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance required by paragraph 5.3 will include contractual liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraphs 6.32 and 6.33. IOWNER'S Liability Insurance: 5.5. OWNER shall; be. responsible for' purchasing and maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance, and/or Risk Retention Program, and, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such I insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. IProperty Insurance: 5.6. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof`(subject to such I GC-13 Page 13 of 55 I 1 Revision Date August 2001 o deductible amounts as may'be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This Insurance shall include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, PROGRAM MANAGER, PROFESSIONAL and PROFESSIONAL'S consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be listed as insureds or additional insured parties,shall insureagainst-the perils of fire anti extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss and damage Including theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other perils as may bee provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and expenses arising out of or resulting from any Insured loss or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insuredproperty(including but not limited to fees and charges of PROFESSIONALS, architects, attorneys and other PROFESSIONALS). If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored on ' and off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work .areto be.Included in an Application for Payment. 5.7. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional I property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions:or Laws and Regulations which will includetconsultants in interests of 0WNER,the Work,CONTRACTOR, l ofRwwhomOshall beisted as Insured or Additional i ured PROFESSIONAL'Scontractors, ORQFESSIONAL ANC 'parties. 5.8. All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5,7 will contain a provision or endorsement that::the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been.given to CONTRACTOR by certified mall and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph of 5.11.2. 5.9. OWNER.shell not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the Interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors" or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are provided in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the deductible amount will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. 5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policy,OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance,and the cost thereof will be charged to"CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the, Work at the site, OWNER shall in Writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. Waiver of Rights: ' 5.11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other for all !oases and damages caused by any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 and other property insurance applicable to the Work, and also waive all such rights against the Subcontractors, PROFESSIONAL, PROFESSIONAL'S.+consultants and all either parties named`as insureds in such policies for losses and damages so caused. As required by paragraph .11, each subcontract between CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, PROFESSIONAL, PROFESSIONAL'S consultants and all other parties named as insureds. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any of the insured parties may have to the proceeds of insurance held by OWNER as trustee or GC-14 Page 14 of 55 1 I 'Revision Date August zeoi otherwise payable under any policy so issued. ' 511,2 OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that policies provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 shell protect all of the partiesinsured and provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils;covered thereby. Accordingly, all such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any ' of the parties named as insureds or additional insureds, and if the insurers require separate waiver forms to be.,signed by PROFESSIONAL or PROFESSIO UAL's consultant, OWNER will obtain the same, and if such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR will obtain the same. Receipt and Application of Proceeds: ' S 12. Any insured loss under the policies of Insurance required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted'with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements,of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.13. OWNER shall deposit in separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such ' agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. AP Receipt and Application of insurance Proceeds 5.13. OWNER, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and.settle any loss with the insurers unless ' one of the parties in Interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after-the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise'of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER,.as trustee, shall make settlement. with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in Interest may reach. if required in ' writing by any party in interest, OWNER as trusted,shall, upon theoccurrence of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of such duties. Acceptance of Insurance: 14. If OWNER has anyobjection to the coverage afforded by dr other provisions of,the insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraphs ' 5.3 and 54 on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, OWNER.shall notify CON- TRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of,such certificates to OWNER in accordance-with paragraph 2;7, If CONTRACTOR<has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other ' provisions of the policies of insurance- required to be purchased and maintained by OWNER in accordance:wlth paragraphs 5,6 and 5,7 on the basis Of their not complying with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery, of such certificates to CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2.7.OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each ' provide to the other such additional information in respect of"insurance provided by each as the other may reasonably request.Failure by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection within the time provided shell constitute acceptance of such insurance purchased by the other as complying with the Contract Documents. ' Partial Utilization-Property Insurance: 5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to I ` GC-15 Page 15 of 55 1 1 1 Revision Date Augur'' 2e01 ' Substantial Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10 provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property Insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the prrperty..insurance shalt not be.canceled or lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. Indemnification 5.16.1. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER, and its employees and agents from and against all liabilities, claims, suits, demands, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of its Work, provided that any such liability, claim, suit, demand, damage, loss, or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused In whole or;in part by an act or omisaton of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, whether or not It is caused in whole or in part by the negligence or other fault of a party indemnified hereunder. 5.16.2. In any and all claims against OWNER or any of its agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any SUBCONTRACTOR, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under the previous paragraph shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any SUBCONTRACTOR under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 5.16.3. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and anyone directly or indirectly employed by it from and against all claims, suits, demands, damages, losses expenses (including attorneys'fees) arising out of any infringement on patent or copyrights held by others and shall defend all such claims in connection with,any alleged infringement of such rights. 1 GC-16 Page 16 of 55 i I Reviojon Date Augt.et 2001 ARTICLE 6--CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ' 6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, ' methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies ' accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work, at all times during its progress, a competent ' resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR, ' Labor,Materials and Equipment: 6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out t the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and:order at the site. Except In connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicted in the Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit evening work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice to PROFESSIONAL. ' 6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals whether temporary or permanent necessary for the ' execution, testing, initial operation, and completion of the Work as required by the Contract Documents. 6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by PROFESSIONAL, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory ' evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance;>with the instruotionS of the applicable Supplier except as otherwise provided in the Contract ' Documents: but no provision of any such instructions will be effective to assign to PROFESSI NAL or any of PROFESSIONAL's consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.14 or 9.15. ' Adjusting Progress Schedule: 6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to PROFESSIONAL for acceptance to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.9 adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon of new developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. IGC-17 Page 17 of 55 1 1 1 Revision Date August 2001 Substitutes or "Or-Equal"Items: 6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary Item or the name of a particular Supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the name:.is °followed by words indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by PROFESSIONAL if sufficient information is submitted by CONTRACTOR to allow PROFESSIONAL to. determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named The procedure for review by PROFESSIONAL will include.the following as supplemented in the General Requirements. Requests for review cif substitute itemsIVT ��flRa and CONTRACTOR wishes eqUipment will not be tocfuprrrished by or e a PROF- ESSIONAL from anyone other than substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall make written application to PROFESSIONAL for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance. to that specified and be suited to the same use as that:"specified The application will state that the. evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute wilf not prejudice CNTICTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not acceptance sof the substitute for use in the Work will requirea change in any of the.Contract Documents or in the provisions of any othertuteand direct con whetetract withor •OWNR for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed pos incorporation or use of the substitute:in connection with the.Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proPosed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, incii;ding: sts of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change, all f which shall considered CONTRACTORo furnish, at CONTRACTOR'sexpense, additional data irerPluating Re OFESSIONAL. PROFESSIONALed substitute, may , require about the proposed substitute. 6.7.2. If a specific means, method,technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to PROFESSIONAL, if CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow PROFESSIONAL to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract 1 as applied Documents. byprecedUre PROFESSIONAL fq review by PROFESSIONAL will be similar to that provided in paragraph and as may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 6.7.3. PROFESSIONAL will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposed substitute. PROFESSIONAL will be the sole judge of acceptability and no substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without PROFESSIONAL'S prior written-acceptance which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop brewing.OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish, at CONTRACOR's expense, a special performtance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. PROFESSIONAL will record time required by PROFESSIONAL and PROFESSIONAL'S consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether t er r for the PROFESSIONAL ALof P accepts a proA posed substitute, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse PROFESSIONAL'S consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute. Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others: , 6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or GC-18 page 18 of 55 1 1 1 Revision Date August 2001 organization (including those acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2) whether initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or PROFESSIONAL may have ' reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. 6.8.2. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or organizat°ions including those who;are to furnish the principal items of materials and equipment to be submitted.to.OWNER prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and;if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the ' Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's or PROFESSIONAL's acceptance(either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation, in which case CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the: Contract Price will be increased by the difference, and the cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceot nce by OWNER or PROFESSIONAL of any such ' Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or.organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL to reject defective Work. 6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL for all acts and ' omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and Other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR' is responsible for CONTRACTOR'S own acts and omissions. •-Nothing in the Contract Docurr encs shell create any contractual relationship between'OWNER or PROFESSIONAL and any such Subcontractor, ' Supplier or other person or .organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL to pay or to see to the.payment of any Moneys due any such Subcontractor Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. ' 6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 1 6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontrietor which specifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract :Documents for the benefit of OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and contains waiver provisions as :required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7. ' Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the ' use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which Is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by other's CONTRACTOR shall;. indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and anyone-:directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, lossesand expenses including attorneys'fees and court and arbitration costs arising out of any Infringement en•;patentrights Or copyrights incident tt the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation 'mule Work.of any_iiwention,. design, process, product or device: not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend ail such claims in connection with anyalleged infringement of such rights. IGC-19 Page 19 of 55 1 1 Revision Date August 2001 1 Permits: 6.13. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, governmental charges and inspection fees, and all public utility charges which are applicable and necessary for the execution of the Work.All permit costs shall be included in the base bid. Permits, if any,that are provided and paid for by OWNER are listed in the Supplementary Conditions. Any delays associated with the permitting process will be considered for time extensions only and no damages or additional compensation for delay will be allowed. Laws and regulations: CONTRACTOR. shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations: applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by. applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor PROFESSIONAL shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR'%compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that any of the Contract Documents are contradictory to such laws,rules and regulations, it will notify the Project Manager promptly in writing. Any necessary changes e shall then be adjusted by an appropriate Change Order. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work that it knows or should have known to becontrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations and without such notice to the Project Manager, it shall bear all related costs. Taxes: 6:15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. Use of Premises: ' 6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and-the operations of workers to the Project site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contrast Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights-of-way, permits°and easements.CONTRACTOR shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Any loss or damage to CONTRACTOR'S or any Subcontractor's equipment is solely at the risk of CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage.to any such land or area, or to the OWNER or occupant thereof or of any land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the Work.Should any claim be made against OWNER or PROFESSIONAL by any such OWNER or occupant because of theprfrmance of of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party by agreement otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (Including, but not limited to,fees of PROFESSIONALS, architects, attorneys and otherprofessionals and court and arbitration costs)arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action,legal or equitable, brought by any such other party against OWNER to the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR'S performance of the Work. 6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulationswaste materials, other ss Work.from the the completion of heWork, CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from GC-20 Page 20 of 55 I I I Revision Date August 2001 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. IRecord Documents: 6.19. Contractor shall keep at the site and in good order one record copy of the Contract Documents and all Drawings and Specifications. These documents shall be annotated on a continuing I basis to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be available to PROFESSIONAL and the Project Manager and shall be submitted with the Application for Final Payment. Safety and Protection: I6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall assume all risk of loss for I stored equipment or materials, irrespective of whether CONTRACTOR has transferred the title of the stored equipment or materials to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: y;I6.20.1. all employees on the Work and other persons and organizations who may be affected thereb 6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage Ion or off the site;and 6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, I pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having I jurisdiction for theAtafety of persons or property or to protect them from dam .e, injury or loss;and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNERs of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility OWNERs when prosecution of the. Work may affect them, and.shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and I replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss°tco any property refer red to in paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may he liable,; shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to'the acts or omissions of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL or anyone employed by either of them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to I the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and PROFESSIONAL has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance,with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable(except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). I6.21. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of its organization whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents at the cite,: This person shall be CONTRACTOR's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by CONTRACTOR to the Project Manager. I GC-22 Page 22 of 55 I I I Revision Date 20031101 2001 I Emergencies: 6.22. In emergencies.affecting the safety or'protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from PROFESSIONAL or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If PROFESSIONAL determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken in response to an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order be issued to document the consequences of the changes or variations. 6.22.1. CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify PROFESSIONAL of all events involving injuries to any porn on the-Site, whether or not such person"-was engaged in=the con ruction of the Project, and shall file a written report on such person(s)and any other event resulting in property damage of any amount within five(5)days of the occurrence. 6.22.2. If PROFESSIONAL determines that a cha such in the e Contract rac Do aumha s is quired because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR'in response rder will be issued to document the consequences of such action. Shop Drawings and Samples: 6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements, CONTRACTOR shall promptly submit to PROFESSIONAL for approval, In accordance With the accepted schedule of submittals, all submittals and samples required by the Contract Documents; All submittals and samples shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of CONTRACTOR and identified as PROFESSIONAL may require. "f`he data shown on or with the submittalswill be tomple e PR'th respect to OFESSIONALdto reviewsthe submittal as n criteria, materials and any other information necessary to enabl • required At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give notice to PROFESSIONAL of all deviations that the submittal or sample may havefrom the requirements of the Contract Documents. I 6.24. PROFESSIONAL shall review and approve submittals and samples. Professional's review th and or i shall be ionlythe r conformance with the design concept Or the Project and Contract Documents. The approval of a separate: iterrt as such will not the information given in the.. indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR will make any corrections required by PROFESSIONAL and resubmit the subm�l samplproved. e shalred number of l constitute its repres+enorrected.OoPies until ptatior} CONTRACTOR'S stamp of approval onany to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER that CONTRACTOR has determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, old construction criteria, materials, numbers, and r da that submittal or sample has been reviewed oroordna catalog the requirementsof the Work and the IContract Documents. 6.24.1. No Work requiring a submittal or earnsle `soappr ved u n shall menti anduntil the submission has been approved by PROFESSIONAL. A copy of each ch approved sample shall be kept in good"order by CONTRACTOR at the site and shall be available to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER, Any del d additionalassociated with compenthe for submittalaproceII bes ail will be considered for time extensions only, and no damages or 6.24.2. Before submission of.each Shop Drawing or sample. CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified all quantitiedimenand similar da acified with aspect atheretonce �iaend,reviewInstallation or requirements, materials, catalog numbersI GC-23 Page 23 of 55 I I I Aevieion Date August 2002 coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the I requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 6.24.3, At the time of each submission', CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL specific: written notice of each variation that the. Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and,, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing submitted to PROFESSIONAL for review and approval of each such variation. 6.26. PROFESSIONAL will review and approve with reasonable_promptness Shop Drawings and. samples, Out PROFESSIONAL'S: review and approval will be only for conformance with the design concept of the:Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents and'shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a specific Means, method, technique, sequence.or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by I the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. I 6.27. PROFESSIONAL's: approval of submittals or samples shall,not relieve.CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any: variation from the requirements of the Contract:. ontract Documents unless: CONTRACTOR has, in writing,called PROFESSIONAL's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and the OWNER has given written approval to the specific deviation; any such approval by I PROFESSIONAL shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions: in the submittals. 6.28. Wherea shop drawing or sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of I shop drawings and sample submissions accepted:by PROFESSIONAL as required, any reated Work performed prior to PROFESSIONAL's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the.:sele expense and responsibility of.CONTRACTOR. Continuing the Work: 6.30. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and.adhere to the progress schedule during:all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes- or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 164 oras CONTRACTOR and OWNER may otherwise agree in writing. I Cleaning Up: I 6.31. CONTRACTOR shall maintain the site free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and, other debris or contaminants from the work on a daily basis or as required At the completion of.the.work, CONTRACTOR shell remove all,.waste materials, rubbish, and debris:from the Site as well at all tools, construction:equiprrrent and machinery, and surplus materials and will leave the I Site clean and; ready for occupancy by OWNER. All disposal shall be in accordance with applicable; Laws and Regulations. In addition to any other rights available tt OWNER under the Contract. Documents, CONTRACTOR's failure to maintain the site may result in withholding of any amounts due I CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR will restore to original condition those portions of the site not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. Indemnification: I GC-24 Page 24 of 55 I I 1 1 Revision Date August 2661 6.32. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER and PROFESSIONAL and their consultants, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and:: expenses,, direct, indirect or consequential (including but not limited to fees and charges of PROGRAM MANAGER, PROFESSIONALS, architects, attorneys and other PROF SSIONALS and court and arbitration costs). arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (Other than. the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them"""to:perform or furnishany,of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of thein may be liable, regardless of whether ori not it is.caused in part bk party indemnified hereunder or arises. by or is imposed by Law and: Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such party. 6.33. In any and all claims against OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER or PROFESSIONAL or any of their"consultants, agents or erriployees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any S•ubcontractor, any person;or"organization directly or indirectly employed by"any of them"to perform.or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts"any of them may.be liable, the indemnification;obligation under Oragrapn 6.32 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor or other person or Organization under workere or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee:benefit acts.. 6,34, The obligations, of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6 32;shall not extend-to-the liability of ' PROFESSIONAL, PROFESSIONAL'S consrltants,::agents:or employees arising out of the preparation or approval"of maps,drawings,;opinions;reports;surveys,Change.Orders;designs or specifications. 1 1 i t GC-25 Page 25 of 55 1 1 1 % Revision Date 1 August 2001 ARTICLE 7--OTHER WORK Related Work at Site: 7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by OWNER% own forces, have other work performed by aided OWNERs or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to-these If thefact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work, and, if CONTRACTOR believes. that such performance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the.parties are unable to agree::as to the extent thereof,: CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 7.1.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility OWNER and other contractor who IS a party'to ' such ,a direct contract for OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with OWNER's employees, proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity"for the introduction and storage cif materials and equiprient and the execution of such°work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. CONTRACTOR shall do ail cutting,fitting and patching of the:Work,that ' may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work.; CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work off others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and wilt only cut or alter their work with.the written consent of PROFESSIONAL and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility OWNERs and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility OWNERs and other contractors. 1 7 2 If any.part of CONTRACTOR'S Work depends for proper execution or results upon the Work of any:such other contractor or utility OWNER(or OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect end promptly report to PROFESSIONAL in writing any delays, defects or: deficiencies in such work that render it 1 < unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR's failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the other work. 1 Coordination: 7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the:Projeet:at the;site, the person �r organization. who: will have authority and responsibility for coordination Of the activities 1 among the various prime contractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the specific; mattersto be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized,.and the extent of such author= ity and responsibilities.will be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.Unless otherwise provided in the 1 Supplementary Conditions, neither OWNER nor PROFESSIONAL shall haveany authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination. 1 1 1 GC-26 Page 26 of 55 1 1 1 1 Relie fon Date hug Jet 2001 ARTICLE 8—OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1. Except as otherwise provided in these RAM MANAGER o'r'ons, OWNER PRO ESSIONALaII issue all �1 communications to CONTRACTOR through the PROGRAM 8.2. In case of termination of the employment of PROFESSIONAL, OWNER shall appoint a PROFESSIONAL against whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former PROFESSIONAL. Any dispute in connection with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration. 8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly. 1 and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13. 8.4. OWNER`S duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing Engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4., Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's Identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site: and in existing structures which have been utilized by PROFESSIONAL in preparing the Drawings and Specifications. 8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8. 1 8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.3. 8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4. 8.8. In connection with OWNER'S right to stop Work or suspend Work, see;.paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. 1 1 1 1 1 GC-27 Page 27 of 55 1 1 1 1 Revision Date auguec zoo? ARTICLE 9---PROFESSIONAL'S STATUS DURING ' CONSTRUCTION OWNER'S Representative: ' 9.1. PROFESSIONAL will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of PROFESSIONAL as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent'of OWNER and PROFESSIONAL. 1 Visits to Site: ' 9.2. PROFESSIONAL will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the premises and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. PROFESSIONAL will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ' PROFESSIONAL's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents.On the basis of such visits and on-site observations as an experienced and qualified design PROFESSIONAL PROFESSIONAL will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work. ' Project Representation: 9.3. If OWNER and PROFESSIONAL agree, PROFESSIONAL will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist PROFESSIONAL in observing the performance of the Work. The duties, ' responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another agent to represent OWNER at the site who is not PROFESSIONAL's agent or employee, the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other person will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Clarifications and Interpretations: 9.4. PROFESSIONAL shall issue such written clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as may be determined necessary, or as reasonably requested by CONTRACTOR, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall ' intent of the Contract Documents. if CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification and interpretation entitles it to an increase in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim as provided for in Articles 11 or 12. ' Authorized Variations in Work: 9.5. PROFESSIONAL may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an ' extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, GC-28 Page 28 of 55 1 1 I Revision Date August 2001 CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or 12. Rejecting Defective Work: I 9.6. PROFESSIONAL will have authority to disapprove'.or reject Work which PROFESSIONAL believes to be defective and will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9,whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. g Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments: ; I 9.7. In connection with PROFESSIONAL'S responsibility for Shop Drawings and samples, see paragraphs 6.23 through 6.29 inclusive. I 9.8. In connection with PROFESSIONAL'S responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11 and 12. 9.9. In connection with PROFESSIONAL'S responsibilities in respect of Applications for Payment, etc.,see Article 14. Determinations for Unit Prices: 9.10. PROFESSIONAL will=determina the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work: performed by CONTRACTOR. PROFESSIONAL will review with CONTRACTOR PROFESSIONAL'S dation determinations on Suchmattersr oth raiere rendering a written decision thereon se PROFESSIONALS written decisions thereon will be dattt�n of an Application for Payment or.atherwi final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days after the date of any such deeision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR delivers to the other party to the Agreement and to PROFESSIONAL written notice of intention to appeal from such a decision, - Decisions on Disputes: 9,11, PROFESSIONAL will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract` Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims,.disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work orfurnishing �%isinterpretation ine of the Wa of the cl aims�n� r Articlest and ct Documents pertaining to the performance and 9 I 2 in respect of.changes to the Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initially to PROFESSIONAL In writing with a request for a formal decision in Wriccorr an ofth thish par gCiamh, which ad orPROFESSIONAL will render in writing within a reasonableI will be delivered by the claimant to PROFESSIONAL and the other party to the Agreement promptly(but s event later than thirty days after tFESSIONAL and the other party ! i nhe occurrence,of the event giving e sixty days a e theretouch ) and written supporting data:will be submitted to' PRO occurrence unless PROFESSIONAL allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim. 9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, PROFESSIONAL will not show padec'sYonoreOndeNedRor in goodfaith CONTRACTOR such capacity.l not be The rendering of I connection with any interpretation or decision by PROFESSIONAL pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay- GC-29 ' Page 29 of 55 I i 1;. ' Revision Date August 2001 ' ment as provided in paragraph 14.16) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter. Limitations on PROFESSIONAL'S Responsibilities: 9.13. Neither PROFESSIONAL's authority to act under this Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any decision made in good faith to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or ' responsibility of PROFESSIONAL to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or employees. ' 9.14 PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or prcdures or the safety precautions and programs used .PROiSStQNAL. shall not;be responsible.for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work In accordance with the Contract Documents. ' 9.15. PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractors, any agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 1 't 1 1 1 1 1 ' GC-30 Page 30 of 55 1 1 1 1 Revision One augusst 2001 ARTICLE 10--CHANGES IN THE WORK • 10.1. Without invalidating the Contract, OWNER may at any time or from time to time order additisal ons*deletions,or revisions inthe aWork.ded The OWNER deleted or revsell provide d. Upon receipts CONTRACith aTOR shall promptly identifying the Work to be rom tl submit a written proposal for the Changed work prepared in accordance with Articles 11 arid"12. I? p Y order the If the pWork to thelis only for deletion,eIn which case CONTRACTOR must cease�performanceion as: di anyct d; related top Pp Work directed; CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to rlaii`ri lost rofits on deleted work. All changed shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. 10.2. Additional Work performed by CONTRACTOR S without or anhorizatiion not tChhe age Ord r will not entitle CONTRACTOR to an increase in the Cont exceptn rain the case of aprevailemergency irrespective any conflicting provised in Article 6. The ions ions ect of this in theseshall Contract paramount and shall ' Documents. 10.3. Upon agreement as to changes in the Work to be performed, Work performed in an emergency as provided in Article 6, will claim prepare CONTRACTOR irifr�a��$rgtoin bethe signed by Time or the Contract Price, PROFESSIONAL ' PROFESSIONAL and CONTRACTOR and submitted to OWNER for approval. 10.4. In the absence of an agreement sprovPecdi�g o0•h OWNER Wo k�h�nge at its e��ivele dwillretion, be in Issue:a Work Change Directive to CONTRACTORand if applicable a will be n a�rdance with Secion 11.3. The Work Change:Directive will specify a price,. Change extension, determined to be reasonable by OWNER. If accordance with ArtR icles 11andto 2, but n hWork CONTRACTOR Directive , CONTRACTOR may submit a claim shall nevertheless be obligated to fully perform the work as directed by the Work Change Directive. 10.5. CONTRACTOR shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work as directed by OWNER, regardless of pending claim actions, unless otherwise agreed to in writing. 10.6. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the , Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility,and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. GC-31 Page 31 of 55 1 i , ' Reviaian Data Au9:at 2001 ARTICLE 11-CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. The Contract Price constitutesthe total comensation (subject to written authorized adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at OONTRACTOR's expense without change in the Contract Price. ' 11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an increase or decreasein the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to PROFESSIONAL promptly(but in no event later than thirty days)after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence(unless PROFESSIONAL allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount ' claimed covers all known amounts(direct,indirect and consequential)to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. Ail claims for adjustment in the :Contract Price shall be deterrmined by PROFESSIONAL in accordance ihilh paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree,on the amount involved..No claim foran adjustment in the.Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2. 11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined by the following procedures: 11.3.1. Designated Unit Price (Field Measure). CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize and acknowledge that the quantities shown for those items designated in the Bid Proposal as unit price items are approximations prepared by OWNER".for bid purposes and that the actual compensation payable to ' CONTRACTOR for the utilization of such items is based upon the application Of unit prices to the actual. quantities of items involved as measured in the field and required to complete the Work as originally defined in the Contract Documents. ' 11.3.2. When it is determined by OWNER that an addition, deletion, or revision to the Work, as defined in these Contract Documents, is required and affects the quantities required for items designed in the Bid Proposal as unit price items, CONTRACTOR and OWNER agree that the compensation payable to CONTRACTOR for such unit price items shall be adjusted accordingly by a Change Order based upon the application of the appropriate unit prices shown in the Bid Proposal to the quantity of the unit price item required to complete the Work as defined in the Contract Documents. ' 11.3.3. Other Unit Prices. For items not designated in the bid proposal as unit prices, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may establish unit prices as agreed on by Change Order. 11.3.4. Lump Sum. When it is determined by OWNER that an addition, deletion or revision to the ' Work is required which results in a change in Work designated in the Bid Proposal as a lump sum item, the amount of increase or decrease in the lump sum.price shall be established by mutual agreement of the parties. 11.3.5. If the pricing methods specified in 11.3 are inapplicable, or if the parties are unable to agree on a price for the changed work, a reasonable price for the same shall be established by OWNER in accordance with 11.4 and 11.6. OWNER shall then process a unilateral Change Order-, specifying the ' GC-32 Page 32 of 55 I r I I Revision Dat: I Aug:t 200. said reasonable price, in accordance with 11.4 through 11.6. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work as directed in the Change Order: 11.3.6. Failure on the part of CONTRACTOR to construct any item to plan or authorized dimensions within the specification tolerances shall result in: reconstruction to acceptable tolerances aat no additional c sty to OWNER, acceptance at no pay; or acceptance at reduced final pay quantity ' reduced unit price all at the discretion:of OWNER. Determinations of aggregate monetary change for items identified as lump sum quantities shall be made by OWNER based upon an analysis of the scope of CONTRACTOR'S failure to construct to plan or authorized dimensions. Cost of the Work: 11.4. The term Cost of the Work means�he or�sum Except oof tll costs as otherwisessarily incurred may be agreed town writing ' ' by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the P by OWNER, suchlycostsfollowing items and shall not e in amounts no 'gher include than ny of the costthose s itemized in paragraph 1ng in the locality of the P1.5�ect, shall include only the , 11.4.1. Payroll costso for employees classifications agreed upon byy fOW NEand.OCONTtCTOR. Payroll R in the performance of the Work mplo schedules of jobyon the basis of their time costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned spent on tees which Payroll in de social include, ecurity contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, nge benefits rmshall workers' or workmen's compensation, health and shalllncludee superintendents and foremenacation and at the site. holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employeesor legal holidays, I The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. 11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipmentfurnished ifield services incorporatedin theed in Gonne ton therewith.ork, including ' costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' CONTRACTOR l cashh discounts aymentstoin Owh chh ase Rtheunless cash d coup sdeposits acc ueNto OWNER. Tr de with which to make p y discounts, rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Work performed by ' Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from eliver such determines, acceptable of PROFESSIONAL, which bidsCTOR and shall dwill be accepted. Ifto OWNER who then a subcontract provides with the aa ' that the Subcontractor shall hr 11 breis etermined in to be paid on tthe he bsame asis f manner Cost of tas CONTIACTOR'st Cost of the Work. All of theo Work shall subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. 11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including butnot limited to engineers, architects, testing ' laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 1 11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following: 11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of GC-33 Page 33 of 55 ' 1 1 I I I Revision nate August 2001 ICONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. 11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the I workers; which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether I11.4.5.3. rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of PROFESSIONAL, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof-all in accordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any I such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 11.4.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. 11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and Iroyalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. 11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related expenses), not compensated by insurance or Iotherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6)provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by I any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the,Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's Fee. If, however;:any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall Ibe paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2. 11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities,fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site,expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. I11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work and premiums of property insurance coverage within the limits of the deductible amounts established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6. I11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, I auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expeditors, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4-all of which I GC-34 Page 34 of 55 I I 1 Agvigion Date pLgugt 2001 2001111 are to be considered administrative costs covered by CONTRACTOR'S Fee. 11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR'S principal area branch offices other than CONTRACTOR'S office at the site. 11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR'S capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital used for the Change Order Work and Charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4 5.9 above). 11.5.5., Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR,any Subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly, employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,including and but t maned q to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly ppli good any damage to property. 11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11,4. CONTRACTOR'S Fee: 11.6. CONTRACTOR 's Fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee, or if none can be agreed upon; 11.6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: 11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall be fifteen percent, 11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall five percent; and if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus asFe , hefifteeaximumen allowablee to CONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit ofall 11.6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5 and 11.3, 11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount t of oeat theeal net decreaand se plus a deduction in 111 Fee by an amount equal to tenpercent e adjustment,in 11.6.2.5. when both additions and the bass as of there lved in any net change�n aec�dancene change, hwith paragraphs CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall be computed on 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.4, inclusive. GC-35 Page 35 of 55 1 I ' Revision Date AvgoOt 2001 11.7. For all changes, CONTRACTOR shall submit an itemized cost breakdown, together with supporting data in such detail and form as prescribed by the Project Manager. When a credit is due, the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in direct cost as determined by the Project ' Manager, plus the applicable reduction in overhead and profit. When both additions and credits are involved in any change, the combined overhead and profit shall be calculated on the basis of the net change,whether an Increase or decrease. In any event, the minimum detail,shall be an itemization of ail man-hours required by discipline/trade with the unit cost per man-hour and total labor price, labor burden, ' equipment hours and rate for each piece of equipment, material by units of measure and price per unit, other costs specifically itemized, plus the overhead and profit markup. ' Cash Allowances: 11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to PROFESSIONAL CONTRACTOR agrees that: 11.8.1. The allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR(less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the site and all applicable taxes; and ' 11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances. No demand for additional payment on account of any thereof will be valid. ' Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by PROFESSIONAL to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. ' Unit Price Work: 11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit ' Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by PROFESSIONAL in accordance with Paragraph 9.10. ' 11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. ' 11.9.3. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement and there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a ' GC-36 Page 36 of 55 1 1 I Revieion Date Au2aIa�snst zoos claim for an increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase. ' I I I I I I GC-37 Page 37 of 55 I I I 1 1/ 1 Revision Pate August 2001 ARTICLE 12--CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME ' 12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Chang.Order. Any request for an extension in the Contract Time shall be made in writing and delivered to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER within 1 seven (7) calendar days of the occurrence first happening and resulting in the claim. Written supporting data will be submitted to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER within fifteen:.(15) calendar days after such occurrence unless the OWNER allows additional time. All claims submitted by CONTRACTOR for adjustments to the Contract Time must set forthin detail the reasons for and causes of the delay and ' clearly indicate why the subject delay was beyond CONTRACTOR's control or fault.. 12.2. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in the performance, progress, commencement, or completion of the Work by any act or neglect of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL, or by an employee of ' either, or by any separate CONTRACTOR employed by OWNER, or by changes ordered'in the Work,or by labor disputes, fire, unavoidable casualties, utility'conflicts which could not have,been identified or foreseen by CONTRACTOR using reasonable diligence. or anycauses beyond CONTRACTOR's control or fault, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as. 1 OWNER may determine. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an extension of time for such causes only for the number of days of delay which OWNER may determine to be due solely to such causes and only to the extent such occurrences actually delay the completion of the Work and then only if CONTRACTOR 1 shall have strictly complied with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. Provided, however, notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, no interruption, interference, inefficiency, suspension or delay in the performance,progress, commencement or completion of the Work for any cause whatsoever, including;.those-for which OWNER or PROFESSIONAL may be responsible in 1 whole or in part, shall relieve CONTRACTOR of its duty to perform or give rise.to any right to damagesor additional compensation from OWNER. CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy::against OWNER for interruption, interference, inefficiency, suspension or delay of any aspect of the Work shall be the right to seek an extension to the Contract Time in accordance with the procedures set forth herein. 1 1 1 1 1 ' GC-38 Page 38 of 55 1 1 I Re AuDate I August 20011 ARTICLE 73--WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS S DEFECTIVE WWORK S: CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR AC Warranty and Guarantee: I 13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER that all materials and in equipment will be new unless otherwise specified and that all work will be of good quality, performed e manner,free*Om faults or defects,and In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and any inspections,tests,or approvals referred to In this Article. All unsatisfactory Work,all faulty Work and all Work not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents or such inspections, tests, approvals, all applicable building, constructionconsideredall be Notice of all defects,shailbe given to CONTRACTOR by PROFESSIONAL. All defective work, whyher or not in place, may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article. Access to Work: 13.2. For the duration of the Work, PROFESSIONAL and its representatives, other designated representatives of OWNER, and authorized representatives of any regulatory agency shall at all times be given access to the Work. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and observation of the Work and also for any inspection or testing by others. ' Tests and Inspections: 13.3. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; require any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL timely notice of readiness therefore. 13.4. The testing firm(s) (if assigned by OWNER to this Work) and all such i s CONTRACTOR. ACTQR pections, tests, or approvals provided for by OWNER shall be identified in writing by All other inspections, tests or approvals shall be at CONTRACTOR'S expense including additional I expenses for`inspection and tests required as a result of delays by CONTRACTOR ny hours slr workedkein excess of 40;hours;per wweek. For all required inspections, tests, and approvals performed, or assembled away from the site, CONTRACTOR will furnish PROFESSIONAL with the eed of Inspections testing, ypforr Testinll such tests will g and Materials be or` 'n accordance with the such otherappl cable: I methods prescribed by the AmericanSociety organizations as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. Materials or Work in,place.that fail to pass acceptability tests snail he retested at the direction of PROFESSIONAL and at CONTRACTOR'S expense. - I 13.5. All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of any public:: body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and I CONTRACTOR(or by PROFESSIONAL if so specified). 13.6. If any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without written concurrence of ROPE SltsNAL,hall 'be t must, at if CON requested by R'sROFESSI©NALunless ' , be uncovered for observation. Such g CONTRACTOR has given PROFESSIONAL timely notice of CONTRACTOR'S intention to cover the GC-39 Page 39 of 55 t 1 I I 1," I Revision Date August 2001 same and PROFESSIONAL has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. I13.7. Neither observations by PROFESSIONAL or Project Manager nor inspections, tests, or approvals:bypersons other than CONTRACTOR shall relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Drcuments. I Uncovering Work: I13.8. If any Work required to be inspected, tested or approved is covered prior thereto without the prior written approval of PROFESSIONAL, or if any Work is covered contrary to the,request`of PROFESSIONAL, the Work shall, if requested by PROFESSIONAL, be uncovered for observation, inspection,testing or approval and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. I13,9. If PROFESSIONAL considers it necessary or advisable that covered Workbe observed by PROFESSIONAL or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at PROFESSIONAL's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as PROFESSIONAL I may require,that portion of the Work in question,:furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct and conseque itial costs of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction (i ncluding_but not limited to fees and charges of PRO ESSIONALs, architects, attorneys and other � ... pp,.p � PROFESSIONALs),and OWNER shall be entitled to an a ro riate decrease in the Contract Price and,if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an I increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract.Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering,exposure, observation,Inspection,testing and reconstruction, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or xtent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. I OWNER May Stop the Work: I13.10. When Work is defective or when CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable:materials>or equipment or male prompt payments to Subcontractors for labor, materials, or equipment pr'if CONTRACTOR violates any provisions of these Contract Documents,OWNER may order I CONTRACTOR to.'stop the Work until the cause for such order has been eliminated. However, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party. CONTRACTOR shall have no right to claim an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time or other damages for a stop work order under this paragraph. ICorrection or Removal of Defective Work: 13.11. When directed by PROFESSIONAL, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to I OWNER and as specified by PROFESSIONAL, either correct the defective Work whether fabricated, installed, or completed, or remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace such defective Work within a reasonable time, as specified in a written notice from PROFESSIONAL, OWNER may have the I deficiency corrected. All direct and indirect costs of such correction shall be paid by CONTRACTOR or deducted from payment to CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR will also bear the expense of correcting or removing and replacing all Work of others destroyed or damaged by the correction, removal, or I GC-40 Page 40 of 55 I I 1 1 Revision Date August]OOi replacement of the defective Work. One Year Correction Period: 13.12. If,after approval of final payment and prior to the expiration of one,year after the date of substantial completion or such longer period of time as may be prescrihedby"law pr by the terms of any. applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, anry Work or materials are found to be defective,incomplete,or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER% written instructions, either correct such defective Workor if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Site and replace it itNNEn defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, may have the defective Work corrected, removed, or replaced. All direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers; architects, attorneys and other professionals)will be paid by CONTRACTOR. Acceptance of Defective Work: I R 13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNE R (and, prior to PROFESSIONAL'S recommendation final payment, PROFESSIONAI:)"prefers to*Wept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect a"ndconsequential costs attributable to OWNER'S evaluation of and determination"to accept such defective Work(such costs to be approved by PROFESSIONAL as to reasonableness and to include but not be limited tofees andura priorggof engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If any such' .accef+. PROFESSIONAL'S recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work,and.OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree es to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article it if the acceptance occurs after such recommendation,an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. OWNER May Correct Defective Work: ' 13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of PROFESSIONAL to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required; by PROFESSIONAL in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR falls to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may,after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this"paragraph, OWNER shall. proceed expeditiously,to the extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action.OWNER.May exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and: suspend CONTRACTOR'S services related -thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR'S tools, appliances, construction equipment and Machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials: and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has"paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere.CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER'S representatives,agents and employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect and consequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to reasonableness by GC-41 Page 41 of 55 1 1 1 1 I, Revision Date August 2001 PROFESSIONAL, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the ' Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. Such direct, indirect and consequential costs,will include, but not be limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court costs and all costs of repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. Neglected Work by CONTRACTOR 13.15. If CONTRACTOR neglects to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including any requirements` of the. progress scheduie,_ PROFESSIONAL may direct CONTRACTOR to submit a recovery plan and take specific corrective actions including, but not limited to, employing additional workmen and/or equipment, and working extended'hours,and additional days, all at ' no cost to OWNER in order to put the Work back on schedule. If CONTRACTOR falls to correct the deficiency or take appropriate corrective action, OWNER may terminate the contract or CONTRACTOR's right to proceed with that portion of Work and have the Work done by others. The cost of completion ' under such procedure shall be charged against CONTRACTOR. A Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Dooumerit ,.including an appropriate reduction in the Contract Price, If the;payments due CONTRACTOR are not sufficient to cover such amount, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. 13.16. Should CONTRACTOR work overtime, weekends or holidays to regain the schedule, all costs to OWNER of associated inspection, construction management and resident engineers shall be identified to CONTRACTOR and the Contract Price reduced by a like amount via Change Order. 1 1 i ' GC-42 Page 42 of 55 1 1 I Revision Date August 7001I ARTICLE 14-PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Schedule of Values: 141. The schedule of values,estabiished as provided forin 2.9 Paymentl serve as aopeptabithe e to Pro��c#rl �r� �r payments and will be incorporated.into a form of application Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. Application for Progress Payment 14.2. At least twenty (20) calendar days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR.shall submit to PROFESSIONAL for review an application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the work completed as of the date of the application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as le requiredby the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also accompanied accom anied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation. all warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clew of liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property e arrangements to protect OWNER'S interest therein, all of Which will be satisfactory to OWNER. Payment is subject to a ten percent (10%) retainage that Will be held until the final payment or acceptanc by OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title: 14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment I covered by any Application for Payment,free nd c eth rf all orLipor ted in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment I Review of Applications for Progress Payment 14.4. PROFESSIONAL will, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of each Applicator for Payment, either indicate in writing a:recommendation of payment and S sent t e application eons for ng OWNER, ' or return the application to CONTRACTOR:indicating g make the AL'S r necessary s for neons and recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may resubmit the application. OWNER shall, within thirty-one calendar days of presentation to him of the I application for payment with PROFESSIONAL'S recommendationm of: the."amount for payment, pay CONTRACTOR amount recommended. 14.5. PROFESSIONAL`S recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for I Payment will constitute a representation by PROFESSIONAL to OWNER, based on PROFESSIONAL'S on-site observations of the Work in progress as n experienced and qualified design PROFESSIONAL dL lication for Payment and the accompanying I and on PROFESSIONAL' s revleuv of the App �. schedules, that the Work has progressed to the point Indicated; that, to the best of PROFESSIONAL'S' knowledge,jectto information and belief, e quality of the Work is in as a functioning whole prior or upon Substantial Completion,ccordance with the Contract tonts subject to an evaluation of the WorkI GC-43 Page 43 of 55 I I I Revision Date August 2001 results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities I and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.10,and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation;and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommendedHowever,. by recommending any such payment,PROFESSIONAL will notthereby be deemed to have represented ' that exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to PROFESSIONAL in the Contract Documents or that there may not be other Matters or issues between the parties"that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. I14.6. PROFESSIONAL'S recommendation of final payment will constitute an additional representation by PROFESSIONALto OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR'S being entitled to final payment as set forth in paragraph 14.13 have been fulfilled. I14.7. PROFESSIONAL may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in PROFESSIONAL's opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations to OWNER. PROFESSIONAL may also refuse: to recommend any: such payment, or, because of subsequently I discovered evidence or the resultsof subsequent Inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as:may necessary in PROFESSIONAL's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: I14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement. 14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order. 14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.14.or I14.7.4. of PROFESSIONAL'S actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.9 inclusive. I OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by PROFESSIONAL because claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or furnishing of the Work or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work or there are other items entitling OWNER I to a off-set against the amount recommended, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice(with a copy to PROFESSIONAL)stating the reasons for such action. ISubstantial Completion: 14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL in writing that the entire Work is substantially I complete(except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that PROF- ESSIONAL issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection of the Work to 'determine the status of I completion. If PROFESSIONAL does not-consider tie Work substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will notify CONTRACTOR in writing givingthe reasons therefor. Ti PROFESSIONAL considers the Work substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the I GC-44 Page 44 of 55 I I I I a �eAuvet 2001 August 2001 I certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ' PROFESSIONAL as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objec- II tions, PROFESSIONAL concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL,will, within fourteen days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER'S, objections, PROFESSIONAL I considers the Work substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as PROFESSIONAL believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, PROFESSIONAL will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, I utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform PROFESSIONAL prior to PROFESSIONAL'S issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, PROFESSIONAL'S aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CON- TRACTOR until final payment. I 14l9. OWNER sto exclude CONTRACTOR ecork ar h e date of Substantial Completion, OWNER shallallowCONTRAC ORrreasonableacesstocomplete or I correct items on the tentative list. Partial Utilization: ' 14.10. Use by OWNER at OWNER'S option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) OWNER, PROFESSIONAL, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be S ' used by OWNER remainderor its tofthe Work, may be accompled purpose without ished ed prorricant rtorence with Subst Substantial Completionofall performance the Work subject to the following: I 14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL that said part of the Work is substantially complete and request PROFESSIONAL to issue a certificate of I Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request PROFESSIONAL to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, I OWNER, CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If PROFESSIONAL does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in writing, giving the Ireasons therefor. If PROFESSIONAL considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. I GC-45 Page 45 of 55 I I I I Revision Date August 2001 14.10.2. OWNER may at any time request CONTRACTOR, in writing, to permit OWNER to take over operation of any such part of the Work although it is not substantially complete. A copy of such request will be sent to PROFESSIONAL and, within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to deter ine its ' status of completion, and PROFESSIONAL will preparea list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected thereon before final payment. If CONTRACTOR does not object in writing to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL that such part of the Work is not ready for separate operation by OWNER, PROFESSIONAL will finalize the list of items to be completed or corrected and will deliver such' list to OWNER and CONTRACTOR together with a written recommendation as to the division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and guarantees for that part of the Work which will become binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time when OWNER takes over such operation (unless ' they shall have otherwise agreed in writing and so informed PROFESSIONAL). During such operation and prior to Substantial Completion of such part of the Work, OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on said list and to complete other related Work. ' 14.10.3. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of property insurance. ' 14.10.4. OWNER, may at its discretion, reduce the amount of retainage subject to Beneficial Occupancy. Final inspection: I14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed upon portion thereof is complete, PROFESSIONAL will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies. Final Application for Payment: 14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of PROFESSIONAL and OWNER and delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all. maintenance and operating instructions, sehedtles, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by 5.2, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents,: including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required, (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, and {'iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers(satisfactor y to OWNER)of all liens arising out of or filed in connection:With\ ' the Work. In Heti of such releases:or waivers of liens and as approved:by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or release in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or ' OWNER's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any lien. ' GC-46 Page 46 of 55 I I I Revision Date August 2001 14.12.1. No application for final payment will be accepted by OWNER until approved as-built documents by CONTRACTOR are accepted and approved by PROFESSIONAL. 14.12.2. Notwithstanding any other provision of these contract documents to the contrary, OWNER and PROFESSIONAL are under no duty or obligation whatsoever owing vendor,yC materials provider,-Subcontractor, laborerr or other party to ensure that payments to any of them are or will be made. Such parties shall relyo only and O dTRAC a all claims bonds or remedy of nonpayment by l ith: CONTRACTOR agrees Subcontractors, Indemnifying..OWNER and PROFESSIONAL for all; claims arising from or resulting from Subcontractor or supplier or material men or laborer services in connection with this project. 14.12.3- General lndornnity CONTRAsCTOsult ng`indemnify O TORR 'd Pa OFEo S refusal for to any damages sualInedg Including;. `lost profit , perform the work required by these centred documents. Final Payment and Acceptance: ` ' 14.13.do , on R e ESS Of AL' review oft he final Application for Payment and accompanying L's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection and pR d by t N documentation as required by the Contract Documents,.PROFESSIONAL.Is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR'S other obligations under; the Contract Documents h y far` fulfilled, PROFESSIONAL will, within ten (10) working days after receipt of the final. App Payment, indicate In writing PROFESSIONAL'S recomMeNnAdation alsopay vement and ten presen to the Applin and to OWNER for payment. At the same.time PROFESSIOL will. CONTRACTOR that the Work acceptable SUbject to to CONTRACTOR,the rin. writing the reasons for PROFESSIONAL will returnapplicationry ' refusing. to recommrrt final Application. Aftech r thease prsea oTOwiUERI of applications and accomp ns and resubmit the in appropriate form and substance and with PROFESSIONAL3a: accom�any3ng documentation, in approp�� recommendation and notice of acceptability,the amount recommended by PROFESSIONAL will become due and will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 14.14, lf,through no fault of CONTRACTOR.final completion of the Work is significantly delayed e ayesdr ad if PR Fd recom e d confirms.OWNER R FESSIOINAL and hout tegmina gOhe.Agreeal ment, Make. I Payment end recommendation of If the remaining` payment of the balance due;for that portion of the Work:fully completed and accepted. balance to be held by OWNER for Work not furnished completed teds reor corrected d t d is ess thanttthe l content e of stipulated in. the Contract acrd If bonds.have the si.irety to the payment of the.balance due for that portion of the Work fully fo plea pa and at c ed shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to PROFESSIONAL with the application payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. CONTRACTOR'S Continuing Obligation: 14.15. CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform; and complete the Work in accordar S t�final ' Contract the :Documents shall be absolute:, Neither recommendation of any p og. payment by PROFESSIONAL, nor the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, GC-47 Page 47 of 55 ' I I 1 Ii ' Revision Dace August 2001 nor any payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review and approval of a Shop.Crowingor sample submission, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability by PROFESSIONAL ' pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nor any correction of defective Work by OWNER will con- stitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents(except as provided in paragraph 14.16). Waiver of Claims: 14.16. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: ' 14,816,1 A waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled liens, front defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to 't4.' 1, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from ' CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 14.16.2. A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 1 1 i 1 1 ' GC-48 Page 48 of 55 1 ' 1 i• 1 ROViE11011 Date August 7001 ARTICLE 15--SUSPENSION OF WORK AND ' TERMINATION OWNER May Suspend Work 15.1. OWNER may,at any time and without,cause,suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice In writing to CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL which will fix the dateon which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the.Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in theif CONTRACTOR Contract Price or an extens apprnsion oved the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. Termination For Cause: ' 15.2. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: i 1;3a : 1. f CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code), at,now or hereafter in effect, or if CONTRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency; I 15.2.2. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR under any Chapter ofthe equivalentanptcy Code similar as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a:petition is filed seeking any relief against CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency; 15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; 162.4. if a trustee, receiver,custodian or agent of CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable • taw or under contract,whose appointment or authority to take charge of property of CONTRACTOR is for theur ose of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of general administration of such p p property for the benefit of CONTRACTOR'r:creditors; 15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inability to pay its debts generally, as they become due; 1 15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.9 as revised from time to time); 15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of PROFESSIONAL;or 15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents, GC-49 Page 49 of 55 ' I I . I7 I Revision nate August 2001 I OWNER may,after.giving CONTRACTOR(and the surety, if there be one)seven days'written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use:the same to the full extent they I could :be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversian) incorporate in the Work all Materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid. CONTRACTOR but which:are stored elsewhere,and finish the Work as OWNER may.deem expedient.In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment.until the Work is finished. I If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and consequential Costs of corripleting the Work(including but not limited to,fees and charges of PROFESSIONALs architects,attar- neys and other PROFESSIONALs and court and arbitration costs) such; excess will be paid to. CONTRACTOR. if such costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR.ehail pay the difference to I OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will be approved as to reasonableness by PROFESSIONAL and incorporated in a Change Order, but when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. I15.3. In the event OWNER terminates the contract for cause and it is subsequently judicially determined that there was no cause for termination, the termination for convenience provision will be the Imeans for disposition of the balance of the contract obligations. Termination for Convenience 15 4. (loon seven working days' written notice to: CONTRACTOR I�OR and PROFESSIONAL, AL, OWNER may; Without cause and without:prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case,CONTRACTOR-shall be paid without duplication of any itairla I 15.4.1. For completed and acceptable: Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents,prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 154.2 For expensessustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materiels or equipment as required by the.Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work;plus fair:and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; I15.4.3. For all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, suppliers and others; and I15.4.4. For reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic I loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.5. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been se terminated by OWNER,: the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may I thereafter accrue. Any retention.or;payment of moneys due,CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: I GC-50 Page 50 of 55 I I 1 Revision Date August 2001 15.6. If through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR,the Work is suspended for a period of more , than ninety calendar days by OWNER or under an order of court or other rpublic it s `" or 111 PROFESSIONAL fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days d or OWNER fails for thirty-one days to pay CONTRACTOR.any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may upon seven working days' writteti notice to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL. and provided OWNER.or PROFESSIONAL did not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recoverfrom OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in 15.2. In lieu of terminating the-Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy,if PROFESSIONAL has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after itis submitted Or OWNER has failed for thirty-one calendar days after it is submitted to pay CONTRACTOR.any slit finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may upon"seven days' written notice to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL stop the Work until receipt of payment of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude nded tTimo prr expert eclaim nder Artictes 11 and 12 for an increase in Contract Price or ontra damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR'S stopping Werk as permitted by this paragraph, The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 6.30 to carry on the Work in accordance with the progress schedule and Without-delay during disputes and disagreements with OWNER. 1 • I 1 1 1 GC-51 Page 51 of 55 ' 1 1 t REt Date Ao 20 Au9vst 2001 ' ARTICLE 16--DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.1. All disputes arising under this Contract or its interpretation whether involving law or fact or both, or extra work, and all claims for alleged breach of contract shall within ten (10)working days of the commencement of the dispute be presented by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for decision. All papers pertaining to claims shall be filed in quadruplicate. Such notice need not detail the amount of the claim but shall state the facts surrounding the claim in sufficient detail to identify the claim, together with its ' character end scope. In the meantime, CONTRACTOR shall proceed With the Work as directed Any claim not presented within,the time lmit specified in this paragraph shall be deemed to have been waived except that if the claim is of a continuing character and:notice=of the;claim isnot given Within tett(10) working days of its commencement, the claim will be considered only for a period commencing ten (10) working days prior to.the receipt by OWNER of notice thereof. Each decision by OWNER will be in writing and will be mailed to CONTRACTOR by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, directed to his last known address. I16.2 All claims, disputes-and other matters in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach thereof shall be decided under Georgia Law in the Superior Court;of Richmond County, Georgia. CONTRACTOR by execution of the ' Contract consents to jurisdiction and venue• in the Superior Court:of Richmond Countyi Georgia, and waives any right to contest same. 1 1 1 1 GC-52 Page 52 of 55 • 1 Revision August bete ' vguvt 2001 ARTICLE 17-MISCELLANEOUS Giving Notice: 17,1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed tohave been validly given if delivered hei ividual or to a member of the by registered firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if dad at or certified mail, postage prepaid,to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. Computation of Time: 17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and:include the last day of sudh period. If the last day of any speriod falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day. General: 17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRNPTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of whose a omission o or act yf i e:+gf erlegally partybclsr of should be maof the deerty's in Writing to,the otheees or r party within enta or rsa for whose."acts the other party is legally li. , h reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this abraagn ate 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any app of limitations or repose. 17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by'these rticu ar _ Conditions nthe the ights remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto,and, p b without 'limitation,1 n,t2, warranties,r t+ guarantees and obligations Imposed upon CONTRACTOR" by paragraphs-5.32, a acrd-15.2 and all of the rights and remedies lway I as e toa I mitaWN��rrt Of,any riR and ghts PROFESSIONALd remedies available to addition to,and are not to be construed any y any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions.ifically in the Contract Documents in connprovisions ect n withthis each particular' aph wili be es bligeffective oas if repeated specific y duty, obligation, right and remedy to which theyapply. All representations, warranties and guarantees made in the: Contract Documents will survive final: payment and termination. or completion of the Agreement. 17.5. CONTRACTOR shall keep adequate records and supporting documentation applicable to this Work and Contract. Said records and deb utnentation shall be retained by CONTRACTOR for a minimum of five(5)years from the date-Of final completion or termination of this Contract. OWNER shall have the right to audit, inspect, and copy ail.such records:and documentation as often as OWNER deems necessary tiering the period of the Contract and for a periods of five (0) years thereafter provided,; er , such hall y shall the gflicted to obtain a copy-:of andlduring l:thelness houre.rwise inspect any OWNER, made at the period of time; shall also haverightactin documentation.. direction of.CONTRACTOR as concerns the"aforesaid records and supporting GC-53 Page 53 of 55 ' 1 1 AB t 201 August Bt 20001 17.6„ The.Contract Documents are intended by the Parties to, and do, supersede. any and all provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O C.G.A Section 13-11-1.,et seg, In the event any provision of the Contract Documents are inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act,this provision of the Contract Documents shall control. ' :agree Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary,the parties agree that no interest shall be due Contractor on any sum held as retainage pursuant to the Contract Documents and CONTRACTOR specifically waives any claim to same. Substitutions: ' 17.8. Notwithstanding any provision ofthesegeneral conditions,there shall be no substitutions of materials that are not determined to be equivalent'to those indicated or required in the contract documents without an amendment to the contract. Sanitary Sewer Overflow Prevention: 17.9. Procedures to Prevent Overflows During Sanitary Sewer Construction: 1 17.9.1 The CONTRACTOR is hereby notified that the discharge of any untreated wastewater to waters of the State is a violation of,Georgia Water Quality Regulations and is prohibited. 17.0.2 The CONTRACTOR will submit an Emergency Response Plan prier to beginning work. This plan will include a list of key personnel with 24-hour contact information who will respond during an emergency situation, The ERP will include estimates of_mobilization time for a response crew to arrive: onsite. Any changes to the Emergency Response Plan Will be submitted to the RESIDE 1T`PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE prior to Implementation.. 17.9.3 In the event bypass pumping is required to facilitate new sewer construction, bypassing plans and supporting calculations must be submitted to the Augusta Utilities Department for review prior ' to establishment of the bypass All bypass systems will Include complete redundancy in pumping systems, if failure of the primary pumping system could result in a discharge of untreated wastewater to waters of the State. ' 17.p.4 Bypass pumping will be monitored continuously by a person knowledgeable in pump operation and maintenance if the failure of the bypass pump could result in the discharge of untreated wastewater to waters of the State. 17.9.5 In the event of a discharge of untreated wastewater, the CONTRACTOR will take the following actions:. 1. Take immediate steps to eliminate or minimize thedischarge of untreated wastewater. 2. Immediately notify the Utilities Department dispatcher (706.796 6000) and the RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE (contact information will be provided at the preconstruction conference). 3. Maintain a chronicle of relevant information regarding the incident including specific actions taken by the CONTRACTOR and estimates of the discharge volume. 17.9.6 The RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE will coordinate notification of the Georgia ' GC-54 Page 54 of 55 1 ---,..--_,..... I 1 Revie 10.Date AUguSt 2001 Environmental Protection Division (800.241.4113) and the Augusta Emergency Management Agency if appropriate. . 17.9.7 If; in the opinion of the RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE and the OWNER).the CONTRACTOR IS not responding to an emergency situation in an appropriate manner, the Utilities Department will undertake necessary potions to abate an oVerflow SttliatiO. The cost of these actions will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, 17.9.8 Following a discharge of untreated wastewater, a downstream inspection will be conducted by the Utilities Department to assess potential mitigation measures that may be required of the CONTRACTOR. PROGRAM MANAGER: , 17.10 The PROGRAM MANAGER for the project is Augusta Utilities Department. The presence or duties of PROGRAM MANAGERS personnel at the construction site,whether as onsite representatives.or otherwise do notniakePROGRAM MANAGER or PROGRAM MANAGERS personnel -. In any way responsible for thoseduties that belong to.OWNER and / or the CONTRACTOR or other entities, and do not relieve the CONTRACTOR or any other entity of their obligations, duties, and responsibilities, including, but not limited to, ail construction methods, means, techniques,'sequences, and procedures 'necessary for Coordinating and completing all portions of the construction work in I pedordancewith the construction Contract Documents and any health and safety precautions required by such construction work. PROGRAM MANAGER and PROGRAM MANAGER'S personnel have no authority to exercise any .. Control over any construction contractor or Other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions and have no duty of -inspecting, noting, observing, correcting, or reporting on health or 'safety deficiencies of the CONTRACTOR(S)or other entity or any other Persons at the site except PROGRAM MANAGER'S own personnel. The presence of PROGRAM MANAGER'S personnel at the construction site is for the purpose of 1 providing to OWNER e greater degree-61 confidence that the completed construction work willconform generally to the construction documents and that the Integrity of the design concept as reflected in the construction documents has been implemented and preserved by the Construedon contractor(s). PROGRAM MANAGER neither guarantees the performance of the construction contractor(s) nor assumes responsibility for construction contractor's failure to perform *fork in accordance with the I construction documents. For this coAGREEMeNT only, construction sites include places of manufacture for materials incorporated into the nstruction work, and construction contractors include manufacturers of materials incorporated I into the construction work I I GC-55 Page 55 of 55 I I I 1 ISECTION 00800 INDEX TO SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS I ISECTION t SC-01 Omitted I SC-02 SC-03 Omitted Bonds SC-04 Contractor's Liability Insurance I SC-05 SC-06 Project Sign Protection of the Environment SC-07 Temporary Toilets I SC-08 Plans and Specifications Furnished SC-09 Record Drawings SC-10 Shop Drawings SC-11 Existing Structures ISC-12 Salvage Material SC-13 Referenced Specifications SC-14 Traffic Control I SC-15 Surveys SC-16 Construction Order and Schedule SC-17 Consulting Engineers I SC-18 Inspection and Testing of Work SC-19 Site Access SC-20 Tree Save I SC-21 Georgia Prompt Pay Act SC-22 City Acceptance SC-23 Disputes I SC-24 SC-25 Specified Materials Interest Not Earned on Retainage SC-26 Basis of Payment I SC-27 Compliance with Laws, Codes,Regulations,Etc. SC-28 Equivalent Materials SC-29 After Hours Inspection I SC-30 Supplement to the Agreement I I I1416-00 00800 Supplementary conditions 00800-1 I - I I 1 I ' SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS -01. OMITTED -02. OMITTED. -03.BONDS: ' The Contractor will include in the lump sum payment for Lump Sum Construction the cost of his performance and payment bonds. 04.CONTRACTOR/8 uABnjTy a/ A.NCE:. Insurance shall be written with limits of liability shown below or as required by law, whichever ' is greater: Commercial General Liability(per occurrence)Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000 General Aggregate Products $2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 Personal&Adv Injury $ 1,000,000 Fire Damage ' Automobile Liability(any auto) Combined Single Limit $ 500,000$ 1,000,000 Excess Liability(any auto)Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 ' Workers Compensation Statutory Limits Employer Liability $ 1,000,000 1 -05.PROJECT ICN The Contractor will provide and install one (1) project sign at prominent location on the ' construction site as directed by the Engineer. The sign will carry in a prominent manner the name of the project, the Owner, and the name of the Contractor and the Engineer and a 24-hour phone number for the Contractor in 4-inch letters. The sign shall be constructed and erected on wood posts in a substantial manner 7-feet above the ground. The full size stencil shall be ' approved along with colors before fabrication. The Contractor shall include the cost of the project sign in the Total Base Bid. -06 PROTECTION OF THE i.ENVIRONMENT: The Contractor will carefully schedule his work so that a minimum amount of the exposed earth ' will be subject to erosion by rainfall or wind, and he will provide means satisfactory to the Engineer to minimize the transportation of silt and other deleterious material from the project area onto adjacent properties or into adjacent water courses. ' 1416-00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-2 1 I I All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,whether herbicide,pesticide,disinfectant,polymer,reactant or of other classification,must show approval I of either EPA or USDA.Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in conformance with printed instructions. -07.TEISMAY,LIMET,Ak. Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities on the site for workmen employed in the he I construction work. Toilets shall be adequate for the number of men employed 1d maintained in a clean and sanitary condition.Workmen shall be required to uSeolyth left ese of the ts. Att completion of the work, toilets used by Contractor shall be removedandpremisesI condition required by the Contract. -08.PLANS A_D SPEC1 'IC#'FTONS FURNISHED: I The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, by the Owner up to five (5) sets of direct black ction line prints together with a like number of complete boundle furnished to the Contractor at the ; , purposes.Additional sets of plans and/or specifications w cost of reproduction upon his written request. -09. CORD DRAWI1' . The Contractor will maintain in his office one which plete atsethe end of eat of �h day's s work any I ding any supplemental sketches) pertaining to the project upon , the deviations from the construction lines shown thereon and all changes orderedwingbywibe made Engineer eer will be shown accurately in red pencil. If necessary, pp show details of deviations or changes, and these will be kept constructionwith the and ead the compset. The letion of will be available to the Engineer for inspection during construction. Prior to submitting his estimate for final payment, As-built -built drawingsr dshrawings include tap e to be l prepared and submitted by the contractor to the engineer. ' locations and manholes located to a minimum of two separate surfacefeatures. -10. EOP DRAWING$ . I The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review shoe shoi wg,s, cutsthe drawings or, lists,steel details and other descriptive data on every item,and so indicate on each copy thereof. specified herein. The Contractor shall check all submittals Six copies of such shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before ordering of the material. Submittals which have not been checked by the Contractor not be ermy withreviewed by the Engineer.Reviews by the Engineer of submittals will cover only general cthe I project requirements,while responsibility for otified bdetailed conformity y mail of the results of shall he submittal reviews within e Contractor. The Contractor will be notified thereof. I ten(10) days of the receipt by the Engineer 1 1416-40 0000 Supplementary Conditions 00800-3 I I 1 -11. EXISTING STRUCTURES: Where Where sidewalks, street signs,private signs, walls, sidewalks, fences,pipelines, etc. are removed in accomplishing the work, each and every item will be replaced in the same or better manner or condition than that in which it was before construction began. The Contractor will protect and hold harmless the Owner from any suit, action, or dispute whatever arising from the Contractor's work adjacent to private property. -12. SALVAGE MATERIAL: All existing installations to be removed, including but not limited to masonry and concrete rubble,asphalt,pipe, etc. will be disposed of at an approved location by the Contractor. -13.REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS: Where specifications or standards of trade organizations and other groups are referenced in these specifications, they are made as much a part of these specifications as if the entire standard or ' specification were reprinted herein. The inclusion of the latest edition or revision of the referenced specification or standard is intended. -14.TIM TRAITIC COI R L Traffic control shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) of ' the Federal Highway Administration, latest edition. The Contractor shall give prior written notification to and shall obtain the approval of the Augusta Fire Department,Police Department, Emergency Medical Services, and the Augusta Traffic Engineering Department of any street ' closures. -15.SURVEYS: The Engineer has established base lines for locating the principal component parts of the work, together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the work. From the information thus ' provided, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction lines and elevations. The Contractor shall employ only Registered Land Surveyors or Registered Professional Engineer to perform all detail surveys. The Contractor will diligently preserve and maintain the position of all stakes, reference points and bench marks after they are set and, in case of willful or careless destruction,he shall be charged with the resulting expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by their unnecessary loss or disturbance. ' -16.CONSTRUCTION ORDER.AND SCHEDULE: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed order, schedule, and methods of construction activities within the general guidelines specified for maintenance and 1416-00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-4 1 protection of highway and pedestrian, traffic; utility lines; drainage ways; adjacent properties; and as otherwise specified. ' B. After notice to proceed and prior to the first payment on the contract the Contractor shall submit the following for review: (1) Breakdown of contract price into units of cost for each item required to complete the total work; this breakdown will be the basis for judging the percentage complete at any time. (2) A statement of the order of procedure to be followed that will result in the required protection and completion of the work within the overall contract time. (3) A bar chart showing the percentage of each item schedules against time and so scheduled that Contractor's order of construction is clearly shown. C. With each request forContractor shall submit two copies of the bar chart ' .payment the clearly marked to show the work completed at the date of the payment requested. D. Progress Schedule Requirements (1) Bar Chart Schedule: Prepare on maximum 11 inch by include17 at least: sheet size for each separate stage of Work as specified and shown,to (a) Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities reasonably required to complete work, including, but not limited to, subcontract work, major equipment design, factory testing and startup activities, project close out and cleanup and specified work sequences, constraints, and milestones, including Substantial Completion date(s). Listings to be identified by Specification section number. (b) Identify: (i)horizontal time frame by year,month, and week, (ii) duration, early-start, and completion of each activity and sub-activity and (iii) , critical activities and Project float. (c) Provide sub-schedules to further define critical portions of the work. (d) Monthly schedule submissions: show overall percent complete, projected 111 and actual, and completion progress by listed activity and sub-activity. (e) Identify the critical path on the schedule. (2) General: (a) Schedule(s) shall reflect work logic sequences, restraints, delivery windows, review times, contract times and milestones set forth in the Agreement, and shall begin with the date of Notice to Proceed and conclude with the date of Final Completion. (b) The schedule requirement herein is the minimum required. Contractor may prepare a more sophisticated schedule if such work will aid Contractor in execution and timely completion of work. (c) Base schedule on standard 5-day work week. 1926-00 00300 Supplementary Conditions 00800-5 (d) When bar chart or network analysis schedules are specified,use Primavera Project Planner,latest version, SureTrak latest version or a compatible and • approved software. (e) Adjust or confirm schedules on a monthly basis as follows: Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the contract times (or milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress ' schedule then if effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. ' Proposed adjustments in the progress scheduled that will change the contract times(or milestones)may only be a Change Order. Use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead/lag logic restraints, and extended activity times are prohibited and use of float time disclosed or implied by use of alternate ' float-suppression techniques shall be shared to proportionate benefits to Owner and Contractor. Pursuant to above float-sharing requirement, no time extensions will be ' granted nor delaydamagespaid until a delayoccurs which (i) impacts g p project's critical path,(ii) extends work beyond contract completion date. ' -17 CONSULTING ENGINEERS The Owner is the Director of Utilities. The Professional Engineer is Zimmerman, Evans and Leopold, Inc. I -18.INSPECTION AND TESTING OF WORK: The Owner shall provide sufficient competent personnel for the technical observation and testing of the work. The Engineer and his representatives epresentatives shall at all times have access to the work whenever it is in ' preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access, and for inspections. Inspectors shall have the power to stop work on account of a workman's incompetency, drunkenness, or willful negligence or disregard of orders. An inspector may stop the work entirely if there is not a sufficient quantity of suitable and approved materials or equipment on the ground to carry it out properly or for any good and sufficient cause. Inspectors may not accept on behalf of the Owner any material or workmanship which does not conform fully to the requirements of the contract and they shall give no orders or directions under any possible circumstances not in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish the ' inspector with all required assistance to facilitate thorough inspection or the culling over or removal of defective materials or for any other purpose requiring discharge of their duties for 1416-00 00800 SupplementaryCnnditinns - 00800-6 1 which service no additional allowance shall be made. The inspector shall, at all times, have full permission to take samples of the materials that may or may not usedthe ' Any inspection provided by the Engineers is for the purpose of determining compliance with provisions of the contract specifications and is in no way a guarantee of the methods or appliances use by the Contractor,nor for the safety of the job. If the specifications,the Engineer's instructions,laws, ordinances, or any public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by an authority other than the Engineer, of the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by the Engineer shall be made promptly, and work should be covered up without review.or where practicable at the source of�s may. ,be uncovered for examination arid., consent of the Engineer, it must,if required by the E�nem ` properly restored at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of any work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work is found to be ireplacement.accordance with sucthe Contract isnot Documents,the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay such cost. The Owner will em ploy a qualified materials testing laboratory, hereinafter referred to as the Laboratory, to monitor more fully on the Owner's behalf the quality of materials and work, to perform such tests as may be required under the Contract Documents as conditions for acceptance of materials and work. The Laboratory will be solely responsible to and paid d b ' separately by the Owner. The timing of the work of the Laboratory will be co Y Engineer through the duly authorized inspector. The Owner will bear the cost of testing a particular material or area of the work once. Where retesting is required O foner ingtco recti e measures or under other circumstances, the Contractor shall reimburse f additional testing. -19.SITE ACCESS: In order to minimize damage to existing paving and landscaping, access to the site ffort contractor's personnel and equipment will be restricted to the routes designatedby the r. The contractor will be required to use on those routes unless written approval is given by the owner. -20.TM SAVE ' Prior to beginning grading operations,the Contractor is to notify the Owner and the Engineer so that those trees which are to be saved can be marked in the field. Once these trees are marked, the Contractor shall take every precaution,including tree protection fence,to save these trees. ' 1 ]416-DO 00800 Supplanentery Conditions 00800-7 I I I I -21.GEORGIA PROMPT PAY A+I This Agreement is intended by the Parties to, and does, supersede any and all:provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, 0 C.G:A. Section 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any provision of this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act, the provision of this Agreement shall control. I -22. CITY ACCEPTANCE: Notwithstandinganyother obligations of the Contractor, he shall complete the work to the full g satisfaction of the Augusta Utilities Department and the Engineer. This provision shall not Irelieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for guarantees., 23 D SPUTE IAll claims, disputes;;and other matters in question between the(honer and the Contractor arising out of or relating to the Agreement, or the breech thereof;shallbe::decided in the Superior.Court I of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by executing this Agreement, specifically consents to venue in Richmond County and waives any right to contest the venue in.the Superior Court of Richmond County,Georgia. I -24.SPECIFIED MATERIAL': I Attention is drawn to the specification of certain brands or manufacturers of construction Materiels on the drawings. Unless the phrase"or equal" appears in the thespecification thereon, no substitution or deviation from the product specified will be allowed. Notwithstanding any I provision of the general conditions, there shall be no substitution of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the contract documents without an amendment to the contract. I -25.INTEREST NOT EARNED ONET'A:INAGE: Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no interest shall ' be due to the Contractor on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this Agreement and Contractor specifically waives any claim to same. I -26.BASIS OF PAYMENT"_ As explained in the section"Instrttetie to Bidders"and in the"General.Conditions",payment Iwill be made based on the per cent complete per the contractor's approved breakdown. I //�� pp 1/�� oo I 1416-00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-0 I I I -27.COMPUA CE WITH LAWS,CODES.,REGULATIOTS,ETC.: Supplementing the provision of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, the successful bidder awarded this contract by signing the contract acknowledges the following, however, this is not to be '' construed as all inclusive or being these only: 1, Underground Gas Pipe Law: The Contractor signing the contract acknowledges that he is fully aware of the contents and requirements of "‘Georgia Laws 1969, Pages 50 and the following, and any � amendrents and regulations pursuant thereto", and the Contractor shall comply therewith. 2. High Voltage Act: The Contractor by signing the contract acknowledges that he isslllyaware contents and requirements of "Act No. 525, Georgia law 1960, anyamendments thereto, and Rules and Regulations of the commissioner of Labor pursuant thereto" (the preceding requirements within quotation marks being hereinafter referred too tthe et"hig1 act" , and the Contractor shall comply therewith. ' voltage ) also confirm on behalf of the Contractor that he: A. has visited the premises and has taken into consideration the location of all electrical ci to I power lines on and adjacent to all areas onto which the contract documentsrequire permit the Contract either to work,to store materials, or to stage operations, and B. that the Contractor has obtained from the Owner of the aforesaid electric power lines I advice in writing as to the amount of voltage carried by the aforesaid lines. The Contractor agrees that he is the "person or persons=responsible for the work-to be gYy done" as referred to in the high voltage act and that accordingly the Contractor is solei "responsible for the completion of the safety measures which are required by Section 3 of I the high.voltage act before proceeding with.any work." The Contractor agrees that prior to the completion of precautionary measures required by the high voltage act he will neither bring nor permit the bringing of any equipment onto the site(or ontoy area or Areas onto which the contract documents .require or permitthe comewithin eight feet Contractor ntr�towork, tox store materials,or to stage operations)with which it is possible of any high voltage line or lines pursuant to operations arising out of performance of the Contract. The foregoing provisions apply to power lines located(a) on the site and (b) on any area or areas onto which the contract documents require or permit the Contractor either to work, to store materials, or to stage operations, or.(.c) within working distance gI heir used on (a) and (b) above. 'These provisions ofthe for equipment or materials, Contract do not limit or reduce the duty of the Contractor otherwise owed to the Owner, to other parties, or to both. The Contractor agrees that the foregoing provisions I supplement provisions of the General Conditions. The Contractor agrees and 1416.00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-9 I I, ' acknowledges that any failure on his part to adhere to the high voltage act shall not only be a violation of law but shall also be a breach of contract and specific violation of the provisions of the General Conditions which pertains to safety precautions. 3. Occupational Safety&Health Act: The Contractor by signing the contract acknowledges that he is fully aware of the provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and he shall comply therewith. ' -28. EQUIVALENT MATERIALS Notwithstanding any provision of the general conditions, there shall be no substitution of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the contract documents without an amendment to the contract. 29 .AFTER HOURS INSPECTION If the Contractor opts to work before or after normal working hours, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday,.or on Augusta, Georgia Legal Holidays, then the Contractor must pay for the cost of inspection by Augusta, Georgia and follow all necessary procedures listed in "Section 15, Right-of-way Encroachment Guidelines, Part E, Outside of Normal Working Hours," of the Augusta-Richmond County Planning Commission Development Documents dated September, 1999, or latest version. If inspectors of Augusta are needed to work outside normal business ' hours,Augusta needs to be notified in advance. ' -30 SUPPLEMENT TO THE AGREEMENT a) Defediveptichig To the extent that the pricing provided by CONTRACTOR is erroneous and defective, the parties may,by agreement,correct pricing errors to reflect the intent of the parties. ' b) Specifiedexcuses for delay or non.-performance CONTRACTOR is not responsible for delay in performance caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, ' floods, and other severe and unexpected acts of nature. In any such event, the contract price and schedule shall be equitably adjusted. c) Termination of the.contract for default Failure of the CONTRACTOR, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise ' comply with a material condition of the Agreement shall constitute default. Augusta, Georgia may terminate this contract is part or in whole upon written notice to the CONTRACTOR pursuant to this term. 1416.00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00000-10 ( I d) Prohibition against contingent fees There shall be no contingent fees allowed under this contract. e) An acknowledgement by all parties contracting with Augusta,Georgia as follows: "Contractor acknowledges that this contract and any changes to it by amendment, modification, change order or other similar document may have required or may require the legislative authorization of the Board of Commissioners and approval of the Mayr. Undelir Georgia eoity giaslaw, ume Contractor is deemed to possess knowledge concerning Augusta, Georgia's contractual obligations and the consequences of Contractor's provision of goods or services to Augusta, Georgia under an unauthorized contract,tiame�d Contractor modification, may be precluded from e order or other similar document, including the possibility ' recovering payment for such unauthorized goods or services.Accordingly, Contractor agrees that if it provides goods or services to Augusta,Georgia under a contract that has not received proper legislative authorization or if the Contractor provides goods or services to Augusta, Georgia in excess of the any contractually authorized goods or services, as required by Augusta, Georgia's Charter and Code, Augusta, Georgia may withhold payment for any unauthorized goods or services provided by Contractor. Contractor assumes all risk of non-payment for the provision of I any unauthorized goods or services to Augusta, Georgia, and it waives all claims to payment or to other remedies for the provision of any unauthorized goods or services to Augusta, Georgia, however characterized, including, without limitation, all remedies at law or equity." This ' acknowledgement shall be a mandatory provision in all Augusta, Georgia contracts for goods and services, except revenue producing contracts. . f) Vie of Augusta.,Georgia La All contracts for contractors performing demolition and/or construction projects for Augusta, Georgia shall contain a provision requiring that all debris, trash and rubble fom the project be transported to and disposed of at the Augusta, Georgia Solidlh local and state regulations. The contractor shall provide evidence of proper disposal through I manifests, which shall include the types of material disposed of, the name and location of the disposal facility,date of disposal and all related fees. I g) Federal Work Authorization Program All contractors and subcontractors entering into contracts with Augusta, Georgia for the physical I performance of services shall be required to execute an Affidavit verifying its compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm, or corporation which is contracting with Augusta, Georgia has registered with and is participating in a federal work I authorization program. All contractors and subcontractors must provide their E-Verify number and must be in compliance with the electronic verification of work authorized programs operated I by the United States Department of Homeland Security or any equivalent federal work 1416-00 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-11 1 • 1 authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify ' information of newly hired employees, pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), P.L. 99-603, in accordance with the applicability provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91 and shall continue to use the federal authorization program throughout the contract term. All contractors shall further agree that, should it employ or contract with any subcontractor(s) in connection with the physical performance of services pursuant to its contract with Augusta, Georgia the contractor will secure from such subcontractor(s) each subcontractor's E-Verify number as evidence of verification of compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91 on the subcontractor affidavit provided in Rule 300-10-01-.08 or a ' substantially similar form. All contractors shall further agree to maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of each such verification to Augusta, Georgia at the time the ' subcontractor(s)is retained to perform such physical services. h) Owner Inspections ' All contracts shall provide that Augusta, Georgia may, at reasonable times, inspect the part of the plant, place of business, or work site of a contractor or subcontractor or subunit thereof which is pertinent to the performance of any contract awarded or to be awarded by Augusta, Georgia. ' i) Local;Sxnail ius in s In accordance with Chapter 10B of the AUGUSTA, GA. CODE, Contractor expressly agrees to ' collect and maintain all records necessary to for Augusta, Georgia to evaluate the effectiveness of its Local Small Business Opportunity Program and to make such records available to Augusta, ' Georgia. The requirements of the Local Small Business Opportunity Program can be found at www.augustaga.gov. In accordance with AUGUSTA, GA. CODE § 1-10-129(d) (7), for all contracts where a local small business goal has been established, the contractor is required to ' provide local small business utilization reports. Contractor shall report to Augusta, Georgia the total dollars paid to each local small business on each contract, and shall provide such payment affidavits,regarding payment to subcontractors as may be requested by Augusta, Georgia. Such ' documents shall be in the format specified by the Director of minority and small business opportunities, and shall be submitted at such times as required by Augusta, Georgia. Failure to ' provide such reports within the time period specified by Augusta, Georgia shall entitle Augusta, Georgia to exercise any of the remedies set forth, including but not limited to, withholding payment from the contractor and/or collecting liquidated damages. 1 t i 1416-00 00800 Supplanentsry Conditions 00800-12 1 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER CO NUMBER BID ITEM DATE PROJECT,TITLE HIGHLAND AVENUE WATER TREATMENT PLANT,FILTER DIFICATIONNAND PAC;SYSTEM BOND ' ORIGINAL CONTRACT DATE PROJECT NUMBER PROACTUB- 2015-007 OWNER AUGUSTA,GEORGIA PO NUMBER The following change is hereby made to the contract for the above project: Description of Change(for a more detailed description see attached proposal): PAYEE TOTAL AMOUNT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER $ The contract time will be INCREASED by calendar days as a result of this change. ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $ ' PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDER(INCREASE) $ THIS CHANGE ORDER(INCREASE) $ TOTAL REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT WITH CHANGE ORDER $ FUNDING NUMBER/ACCOUNT NUMBER PROPOSED BY: DATE: CONTRACTOR ' DATE: REQUESTED BY: ENGINEER ' SUBMI I-LED BY: DATE: DEPARTMENT BEAD 1 FINANCE ENDORSEMENT: DATE: CO VIPTROT.T.FR ' RECOMMENDED BY: DATE: ADMINISTRATOR APPROVED BY: DATE: MAYOR i 1416-00 00941 Change Order 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by contract documents B. Contractor use of site and premises C. Owner occupancy D. Partial Owner Occupancy E. Easements and right-of-way F. Fences ' G. Protection of public and private property H. Maintenance of access I. Barricades and lights J. Field Engineering K. Lines,Grades and Dimensions tL. Regulatory requirements M. Coordination 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. PART A: FILTER MODIFICATIONS 1. Improvements to the existing filters No. 1 and No. 7 including demolition, ' structural modifications, filter media replacement, installation of new filter bottoms, air scour backwash system, coating of existing surfaces and ancillary Civil,Architectural, Structural, Process, Instrumentation,Electrical and 1 HVAC/Mechanical work as described herein and shown on the drawings. 2. Several items of equipment will be pre-purchased by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. These include: ' a. Filter underdrains—Filter No. 1 b. Filter Washwater troughs—Filter No. 1 I c. Filter air wash blowers d. Air Scour Header—Filter No. 1 1416-00 01010 Summary Of WorkDoc 01010-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK I 3. Technical specification sections more specifically identify equipment which is to be installed but not furnished under this Contract. Installation requirements are I included in the technical specifications. 4. Provide without additional compensation,any apparatus,material and labor not specifically mentioned in the specifications or indicated on Drawings that is necessary to complete and make operational any portion of work. B. PART B: POWDERED ACTVATED CARBON (PAC)FEED SYSTEM I 1. Construction of a new PAC Feed system, including new PAC Building, PAC Silo and feed equipment,new chemical duct banks and feed tubing and ancillary Civil, Architectural, Structural, Process, Instrumentation,Electrical and HVAC/Mechanical work as described herein and shown on the drawings. 2. Technical specifications more specifically identify equipment to be furnished. 3. Provide without additional compensation any apparatus,material and labor not specifically mentioned in the specifications or indicated on Drawings that is necessary to complete and make operational any portion of work. 4. The Contractor will be required to submit a"Notice of Proposed Construction or ' Alteration—Off Airport"to the FAA for the use of construction equipment necessary to erect the PAC system silo. The Owner has applied for a permit for permanent construction of the silo at the location shown on the drawings based on I a maximum structure height of 42 feet above ground line(AGL). The Contractor's application must reference Aeronautical Study No 2015-AS0- 15724-OE. The Contractor shall also file FAA form 7460-2"Notice of Actual Construction or Alteration" at least 10 days prior to start of construction(7460-2 Part 1) and within 5 days after construction reaches its greatest height(7460-2, Part 2). A copy of the"Determination of No Hazard to Air Navigation"is included at the end of this section of specifications. C. PART C—FILTER RINSE MODIFICATIONS f 1. Provide two (2)vertical in-line pumps (1 installed, 1 spare), furnish and install new 16"diameter filter rinse water piping, connection to existing rinse water piping system and ancillary electrical,mechanical and instrumentation work as described herein and shown on the drawings. 2. Add vacuum bias check valves to existing air/vacuum release valves at seven(7) locations in existing filter gallery. I 3. Furnish all materials, equipment, supplies, appurtenances;provide all construction plant equipment and tools; and perform all necessary labor and supervision 4. Coordinate the progress of the Work including coordination between trades, I subcontractors, suppliers,public utilities and Owner to insure the progress of Work I D. ALTERNATES 1. Alternate No. 1: Furnish and install fabricated media baffles on owner-furnished filter washwater troughs to be installed in Filter No 1 as described herein and I shown on the drawings. 1416-00 01010 Summary Of Work.Dor 01010-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I I ; SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 2. Alternate No._2: Add carbon fiber strengthening to common wall between Filter No 7 and Filter No 6 as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 3. Alternate No.3: Add carbon fiber strengthening to common wall between Filter No 7 and Filter No 8 as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 4. Alternate No.4: Add surface preparation and painting of the filter gallery piping for Filter No 1 and Filter No 7 including lead paint abatement as specified in ' Section 09900,Painting and Finishing of these specifications. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING A. GENERAL 1. Augusta Utilities Department(Owner) operates the Highland Avenue Water ' Treatment Plant continuously(24 Hours per day, every day of the year). It is imperative that all interruptions to plant operations be previously planned and submitted by the Contractor a minimum of 30 days prior to the proposed I 2. interruption and approved in writing by the Owner in advance of the interruption. At this time there is no known process,mechanical or electrical system connections requiring shutdown of the entire plant facilities. If the Contractor identifies a process,mechanical or electrical connection which will require a full plant shutdown, the Owner will be given 90 day notice to evaluate the interruption and determine whether it can be mitigated or avoided. In general, no plant shutdown shall be allowed for a period longer than 6 hours from the filtration ' stops until the time filtration resumes. Full shutdowns will also be restricted to night time hours as defined below. 3. The work on the Filter Rinse Modifications shall be coordinated with plant ' operations personnel such that no shutdown of filter operation will result from the performance of this work. B. DEFINITIONS 1. This schedule is intended to provide a guide for the construction of new facilities in order to facilitate current plant operations during construction. This schedule ' does not relieve the contractor from his responsibility to perform the work with minimal impact to existing operations or to provide a detailed construction schedule for approval. Activities are listed in the general order in which they must occur to maintain plant operations;however, due to the nature and extent of the work,it is possible to start later activities first if appropriate measures are taken to maintain continuous and full plant operations. ' 2. 3. Nighttime means the time between 10:00 pm and 4:00 am. Peak Demand Season means the period between April 1 and through the second full week in September. ' 4. Winter Construction means the period between October 1 and April 1. When an activity requires winter construction,the activity cannot be started before Oct 1 and MUST be completed by April 15. ' 5. Additionally,no construction that could affect plant operations can be ongoing during the 1St full week of April(Masters Golf Tournament). - q I 1416-0001010 S,��OfWork 01010-3 Z E L -ENGINEERS- b I SECTION 01010 I SUMMARY OF WORK C. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE 1. It is the desire of the Owner that the construction of the PAC Feed System take precedence. 2. Preparation: a. Install Erosion and Sediment Control Devices as shown on the Civil Drawings. ' b. ' Install temporary fencing and other security measures required to control access to site. 1) Submit"Notice of Proposed Construction"to FAA as described in Article 1.2-B. 3. General Demolition: a. Demolish fencing as shown on Drawings. b. Filter Demolition Operations 4. The following activities can be started at any point following the necessary demolition work: a. PAC Building: (including,but not limited to) structure, grading,paving, I above and below ground utilities,tie-ins to existing utilities,and fencing. b. PAC silo foundation I c. Install PAC silo and feed equipment d. Start-up PAC system e. Connectionsand disconnections required for Raw Water Irrigation System f. General site security: conduits,cameras, and sensor to be installed around I the perimeter of the site,provided that the Contractor coordinates the construction with other activities to prevent damage to the existing installed systems. 5. Duct Banks: a. Construct the chemical duct banks addition. b. Install chemical, signal, and electrical lines as indicated on the drawings. 6. Install slideg ates in existing filter influent flume for Filters No 1 and No 7. tors (WINTER CONSTRUCTION ONLY). Thiaactivity will requireto be la oenff 1 and 2,SedmentatQn Basins l through 3, and Filters 'l through10 line. This work must be performed within a time frame of two weeks. a. Place sandbags or cofferdam in existing sedimentation basin effluent/filter influent flume between Basins 3 and 4. b. Remove existing gates and mount gates at Filter No 1 and Filter No 7. 7. Work in Filter Building: No filters (1-10) can be backwashed while performing activities 6.a and 6.b. This work should be coordinated with activity 5. If these activities cannot be performed,00nou1rently with activity-5 they must be performed as WINTER CONSTRUCTION, and each activity must be performed within a 24-hour time period. I a. Complete installation of Air Scour Blowers and Header.. b. Complete demolition operation in Filter No. 1. c. Construct Improvements to Filter No. 1. I d. Complete demolition operations in Filter No. 7. e. Construct Improvements to Filter No. 7. 01010-4 Z E I 1416-0001010 Summery Of Work ENGINEERS I I ISECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK ' 8. Finish Grading and Paving: Once all pipes have been pressure tested and accepted,perform finish grading and pave roads, driveways, and parking lots. 9. Plant permanent vegetation. 10. Complete all remaining outside work(grading,paving,sidewalks,fencing, etc.). 11. Remove Erosion and sedimentation control devices once permanent vegetation is established. 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES ' A. Contractor shall limit his use of the premises for Work and storage, to allow for Owner occupancy. B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Engineer. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on site under this Contract. ' D. Move any stored products,under Contractor's control,which interfere with operations of the Owner. ' E. Obtain and pay for the useof additional storage or work areas needed for operations. • F. Contractor may use those areas indicated on the drawings for storage and such additional areas as Engineer may.designate. ' 1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner(by agreement with the Contractor)will occupy and continue operations of the existing facilities during the construction of these improvements. Such use of facilities by ' the Owner shall not be deemed as acceptance of any work or relieve the Contractor from any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 EASEMENTS AND RIGHT-OF-WAY A. Confine construction operations to the immediate vicinity of the location indicated on t Drawings and use due care in placing construction tools,equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies, so as to cause the least possible damage to property and interference with traffic. ' B. On Private Property: 1. If use of land outside Owner's easements or Rights-of-Way is desirable or necessary, obtain consent of, and execute a written agreement with,the owner and r tenant of the land 2. Do not enter for material delivery or occupy for any purpose with personnel, tools, equipment, construction materials, or excavated materials,any private ' property outside the designated construction easement without written permission of the owner and tenant ' 1416-00 01010 Summary Of Work 01010-5 Z E L --ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 01010 ' SUMMARY OF WORK C. Within Highway Rights-of-Way: 1. Owner will obtain permits 2. Perform all work and conduct all operations of Contractor,his employees, and his subcontractors in accordance with the requirements, and under the control (through Owner)of the highway authority owning,or having jurisdiction over and control of,the right-of-way in each case 3. Reimburse highway authorities,through Owner, for expense of any flag man or protective devices which may be required highway authorities in connection with the Work ' 1.7 FENCES A. Maintain all fences affected by the Work until completion of the Work. B. Do not relocate or dismantle fences which interfere with construction operations before obtaining written permission from the fence owner with an agreement as to the length of time the fence may be left relocated or dismantled. ' C. Where fences must be maintained across construction easements install adequate gates. D. Keep gates closed and locked when not in use. ' E. At the completion of Work across any tract of land restore fences to their original or better condition and to their original location. 1.8 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY I A. It is mandatory that the Contractor locate all previously placed underground installations and construction prior to his engaging in any work in areas where such improvements may exist. The Contract drawings indicate general locations of such existing improvements solely for the purpose of initial and general representation thereof. The Owner and Engineer have not verified locations of these improvements as a basis for locations displayed on the drawings. All utilities and improvements must be located and flagged by the Contractor prior to commencing work. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to verify existing utilities. No additional compensation shall be made for utilities or utility locations that may vary from those shown or not shown by the drawings. Flags must be maintained and based upon actual field determinations. The Owner's project inspector must be notified before any work begins in vicinity of existing underground improvements. B. Protect, shore,brace, support, and maintain underground pipes, conduits,drains, and ' other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by construction operations. C. The Contractor shall carefully restore all property defaced by the operations or acts of any of his agents or employees. Such restoration shall include seeding, sodding, transplanting of lawns,hedges, or ornamental plantings, and the repair or replacement of streets, driveways,walks,fences, or other facilities in such a manner as to meet the 1415.00 01010 Summery Of Work 01010-6ZEL —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Iapproval of the Engineer. No structures, fences or trees shall be removed without the consent of the property owner or until condemnation procedure,if necessary,has been Icompleted. D. Restoration of property shall commence immediately upon substantial completion of the proposed work at each tract of property along the construction site. IE, Use new materials for replacements. I K. Do not remove trees outside the permanent easement,except as authorized by Engineer: 1. Where practical,tunnel beneath trees in yards and parkings when on or near the line of trench I 2. Employ hand excavation as necessary to prevent tree injury 3. Adequately protect trees left standing against damage by construction operations I G. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets,roads,highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, location or character,which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or personnel to or from the Work or any or site Ithereof,whether by him or his subcontractors. H. Make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the Owner of, or the agency or authority having jurisdiction over, any damaged property concerning its repair or Ireplacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with•the damage. I. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and available for use at Iall times. 1.9 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS IA. Conduct Work to interfere as little as possible with public and school district travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian: Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct private roads, driveways and I1. walks,provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of private travel. 2. Give owners of private drives reasonable notice before interfering with them I3. In making street or access road crossing,do not block more than one-half the street at a time: a. Whenever possible,widen the shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate I traffic flow b. Provide temporary surfacing on shoulders as necessary 4. Maintenance of traffic is not required if Contractor obtains written permission I from the owner and tenant of private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved,to obstruct traffic at the designated point. I I1416-00 01010 Summery Of Work 01010-7 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 01010 ' SUMMARY OF WORK B. Detour: 1. Provide,as required,bridges across trenches,barricades, guardrail approaches, lights, signals,signs, and other devices necessary for protection of the Work and public safety. 2. Where the authority having jurisdiction requires that traffic be maintained over any construction work in a public street,road, or highway, and traffic cannbt be maintained on the original roadbed, or pavements, construct and maintain a detour around the Work. 1.10 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS A. Protect streets,roads,highways, and other public thorough fares which are closed to traffic by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs. B. Locate barricades at the street intersecting public thoroughfare on each side of the blocked section. ' C. Provide suitable barriers, signs, and lights to the extent required to adequately protect the public. D. Provide similar warning signs and lights at obstructions such as material piles and equipment. E. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise. F. Store materials and conduct work to cause the minimum obstruction to the Owner and the , public. G. Install and maintain barricades,signs, lights, and other protective devices in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, as required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.11 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Georgia and acceptable to the Engineer. B. Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points. C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. D. The Contractor shall make his own surveys And establish his own working lines and grades from the basic reference lines established by the Engineer. Establish elevations,lines,and levels,utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. ZEL 14]6-00010)0 Summary Of Work 01010-8 ^ENGINEERS^ 1 1 ' SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK ' 1.12 LINES, GRADES AND DIMENSIONS A. Construct all Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings: 1. Remove and reconstruct improperly located Work B. Engineer will establish or designate 2 basic horizontal and vertical control points: I1. Use these points as datum for the Work 2. Provide,without charge, such competent personnel and tool, stakes, and other materials as Engineer may require in establishing or designating control points,in ' establishing construction easement boundaries, or in checking layout survey, and measurement work performed by Contractor. ' C. Provide all additional survey, layout,and measurement work required: 1. Work performed by a qualified professional engineer or registered land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve all ' permanent reference points during construction: a. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Engineer b. Report to Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed,or ' requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations c. Require surveyor to replace Project control points which may be lost or destroyed: 1) Establish replacements based on original survey control ' 3. Establish lines and levels,locate and layby out, instrumentation and similar appropriate mean: a. Site improvements: 1) Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement 2) Utility slopes and invert elevations b. Batter boards for structures c. Controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades 1 4. 5. From time to time,verify layouts by the same methods. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. 6. On request of Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy or field engineering work. D. Dimensions shown in figures or which can be determined by computation from other figures shown, shall take precedence over dimensions scaled from the drawings. When the work of the Contractor is affected by finished dimensions,these shall be determined by the Contractor at the site and he shall assume the responsibility therefore. ' 1.13 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all federal, state, and local laws,regulations, codes, and ordinances applicable to the Work. 1416-00 01010 Summery Of Work 01010-9 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 01010 1 SUMMARY OF WORK B. Comply with the Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970(PL91-596) and under Sec. 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act(PL91-54). ' C Other standards and codes which apply to the Work are designated in the specifications. ' 1.14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling,submissions, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later. Verify all dimensions and location of items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. ' C. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electricalwork,which 1 are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes,ducts, and conduit,as closely as practicable;place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. E. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts,and wiring within the construction. Coordinate ' locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION - �.1915-00 01010 Summary Of Work 01010-10 ZEL ENGINEERS— .Dec DISINFECTION OF WATER •/EA I ENT PLANTS 5 r I4.3.3 Calcium hypochlorite. Calcium hypochlorite is a(ail. .k in granular r) form or in small tablets and contains approximately 65 percent a ..r able chlorine by Iweight. The calcium hypochlorite should be stored in a cool, dry, dark environment to minimize its deterioration. The precautions listed on the container should be carefully noted. I Sec. 4.4 Plant Disinfection Procedures I4.4.1 Plant piping. All plant piping shall be disinfected using one of three • . alternative methods described in ANSI/AWWA C651, including application meth- Iods, chlorine solution strengths, retention times, disposal of highly chlorinated water, and bacteriological sampling and testing. I4.4.2 Tanks and ckarwells. All storage tanks, clearwells, and similar recepta- des shall be disinfected using one of the methods described in ANSI/AWWA C652, indu ding application methods, chlorine solution strengths, retention times, disposal I of highly chlorinated water, and bacteriological sampling and testing. 4.4.3 Filters. This section describes disinfection of filter basins and gravel, silica sand, anthracite, arid other mixed media materials except granular activated 040„,/ t : carbon (GAC). GAC cannot feasibly be disinfected in the field. Therefore, when Ii ,GAC is to be part of the filter media, special care shall be used to protect the GAC from contamination;all other media shall be placed in the filter basin and disinfected I prior to placement of the GAC. 4.4.3.1 Preparation. Before any filter material is placed, the filter basin itself shall be thoroughly leaned as described in Sec. 4.1. I4.4.3.2 Media placement. After the filter basin has been cleaned, the filter media shall be placed in the basin in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B100, using all Ireasonable precautions to maintain cleanliness. Following placement, thr filter media shall be backwashed and prepared for service in accordance with ANSI/AWWA I B100. 4.4.4 Filter disinfection. After all other work is completed, and before the I filter is placed in service, the entire filter basin up to the maximum water level shall be disinfected by one of the following methods. 4.4.4.1 Disinfection procedure. Sufficient chlorine shall be injected into the Ibackwash water to produce a free chlorine residual`of at least 25 mg/L throughout the filter. The chlorinated water shall be allowed to stand in the filter for at least 1144 12 hr.At the end of the 12-hr contact time, the chlorinated water shall be tested to I . I Addendum 1 Bid Item#17.268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . . I .• 0 AWWA C65303 , Idetermine the amount of ftee chlorine residual. If the fire residual is less than 15 me., the chlorination process should be repeated. Sufficient tests should be made both fl) Ifiom the top and bottom of the unit(ancl at intermediate points if feasible)to ensure that the residual readings measure the lowest chlorine level existing in the unit at•the Iend of the 12-hr period. Ifsansfa' ctory chlorine residuals are obtained after the chlorine retention period, the filter shall be run to waste or backwashed thoroughly to remove the highly chlorinated water. I 4.4.4.2 Alternative procedure. Sufficient dilorine shall be continuously . injected into the filter influent water while filtering to waste to produce a free Iresidual oat least 25 ingil.. When water with at least a 25 mg& free residual chlorine concentration reaches the filter-to-waste, the flow of water shall be stopped, I : and the filter shall be held full of the chlorinated water fora period of not less than 12 hr. At the end oldie 12-hr contact time, the chlorinated water shall be tested to Idetermine the free residual. If the free residual is less than 15 ingl,the chlorination process shan. c repeated. Sufficient tests should be made both from the top and it, bottom of the unit(and at intermediate if feasible) to ensure that the residlua ... points rogs eadi measure the'Mat thlorine level existing in the unit at the end of the 12-hr period. After the chlorine retention period, if satisfactory chlorine residuals are ,... obtained, the filter shall be run to waste or backwashed thoroughly to remove the 'i 0) highly chlorinated water. ,... I4.4.4.3 GAC filters. Disinfecdon of granular activated carbon (GAC) (see ANSI/AWWA B604) filters shall, be similar. to Sec, 4.43.1, 4.4.3.2, 4,4.4.1, and 4.4.4.2 except that in Sec. 4.4.3.2, all media and support gravel (see ANSIMWWA I 8100) except GAC shall be placed in the filter prior to disinfection. Following disinfection awarding to Sec. 4.4.4.1 or 4.4.4.2, the GAC may be placed in the.filter. I The GAC must be stored and handled to keep it as dean as possible.Any equipment used in pia/zing the GAC in the filter must be cleaned and disinfected with a 200 nign, Isolution of chlorine immediately before use. This includes shovels, spreading devices, or other equipment that cornes in contact with the GAC. In addition, all workers I • with shall wear rubber boots and glows that have been previou.sh,disudicted wia 200-inrA chlorine solution. I 4AAA Chlorinated discharge. If there is any question that the chlorinated *- d ischary will cause damage to the environment, a'educing agent shall be applied to I the water to neutralize the residual chlorine. (See appendix A for neutralizing , 1 I Addendum 1 Bid Item#171268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I DISINFECTION OF WATER TREATMENT PLANTS 7 chemicals.) Federal, state, or local environmental regulations may require special provisions or permits prior to disposal of highly chlorinated water. SECTION 5: VERIFICATION 1 Sec. 5.1 Bacteriological Sampling ' After the chlorination procedure is completed, and before the treatment unit or facility is placed in service, two or more samples shall be taken from the unit or ' facility not less than 30 min apart awl shall be tested for the presence of coiiforin in accordance with the latest edition of:Standard Mhodr, r the Examination of Water •' and Wastewater. If none of the samples show the presence of coliform, the unit or facility may be placed in service. if any of the samples show the presence of•coliform, one of the following procedures,shall be followed before placing:the unit:or facility in service: I. Take -repeat santpies at least 24 hr apart until consecutive samples do not ' show the presence of colifoiim 2. Chlorinate the unit or facility in accordance with Sec. 4.4.4,and maniple. Sec. 5.2 Record of Compliance ' The report of bacteriological test results certifying that the water discharged from the treatment facility is free of coliform bacteria shall serve as the record of compliance. ■ SECTION 6: DELIVERY This standard has no applicable information for this section. 1 ' i- • 1 • tAddendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Mail Processing Center Aeronautical Study No, Federal Aviation Administration 2015-ASO-15724-OE ,• Southwest Regional Office ' • Obstruction Evaluation Group 10101 Hillwood Parkway Fort Worth,TX 76177 ' Issued Date: 03/23/2016 Allen Saxon • ' Augusta Utilities Department 360 Bay Street Augusta,GA 30901 **DETERMINATION OF NO HAZARD TO AIR NAVIGATION** ' The Federal Aviation Administration has conducted an aeronautical study under the provisions of 49 U.S.C., Section 44718 and if applicable Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations,part 77,concerning: Structure: Carbon Silo Location: Augusta, GA Latitude: 33-28-19.61N NAD 83 ' Longitude: Heights: 82-01-54.52W 444 feet site elevation(SE) 43 feet above ground level(AGL) 487 feet above mean sea level(AMSL) This aeronautical study revealed that the structure would have no substantial adverse effect on the safe and efficient utilization of the navigable airspace by aircraft or on the operation of air navigation facilities. ' Therefore,pursuant to thauthority delegated to me,it is hereby determined that the structure would not be a hazard toair navigation provided the following condition(s)is(are)met: As a condition to this Determination,the structure is marked/lighted in accordance with FAA Advisory circular 70/7460-1 L, Obstruction Marking and Lighting,red lights-Chapters 4,5(Red),&12. It is required that FAA Form 7460-2,Notice of Actual Construction or Alteration,be a-Fled any time the project is abandoned or: _X At least 10 days prior to start of construction(7460-2 Part 1) X Within 5 daysafter the construction reaches its greatest height(7460-2,Part 2) • ' See attachment for additional condition(s)or information. This determination expires on 09/23/2017 unless: ' (a) the construction is started(not necessarily completed)and FAA Form 7460-2,Notice of Actual Construction or Alteration,is received by this office. (b) extended,revised,or terminated by the issuing office. (c) the construction is subject to the licensing authority of the Federal Communications Cori ssion (FCC)and an application for a construction permit has been filed,as required by the FCC,within ' Page 1 of 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 6 months of the date of this determination.In such case,the:determination expires on the date: prescribed by the FCC for completion construction,or the date the FCC denies the application. NOTE:RUEST FOR EXTENSION OF THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD OF THIS DETERMINATION MUST BE E-FILED AT LEAST 1.5 DAYS PRIOR TO THE EXPIRATION DATE.AFTER RE-EVALUATION OF CURRENT OPERATIONS IN THE AREA OF THE STRUCTURE TO DETERMINE THAT NO SIGNIFICANT AERONAUTICAL CHANGES HAVE OCCURRED,YOUR DETERMINATION MAY BE ' ELIGIBLE FOR ONE EXTENSION OF THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD. This determination.is subject to review if an interested party files a petition that is received by the FAA on or before April 22,2016.In the event a petition for review is filed, it must contain a full statement of the basis upon which it is made and be submitted to the Manager,Airspace.Policy&Regulation,Federal.Aviation. Administration,800 Independence Ave,SW,Room 423,Washington,DC 20591, ' This determination becomes final on May 02,2016 unless a petition is timely filed..In which case,this determination will not become final pending disposition of the petition.Interested parties will be notified of the grant of any review.For any questions regarding your petition,please contact Airspace Regulations&ATC Procedures Group via telephone--20 -267-8783-or facsimile 202-267-9328. ' This determination is based,in part,on the foregoing description:which incindes specific coordinates,heights, frequency(les)and power.Any changes in coordinates,heights,and frequencies or use of greater power will . void this determination,Any future construction or alteration,in9luding increase to heights,power,or the ' addition of other transmitters,requires separate notice to the FAA, This determination does include temporary construction equipment such as cranes,derricks,etc.,which may be ' used during actual construction'of the structure.However,this equipment shall not exceed the overall heights as indicated.above.Equipment which has a height greater than the studied structure requires separate notice to the FAA. ' This determination concerns the effect of this structure on the safe and efficient use of navigable airspace by aircraft and does not relieve the sponsor of compliance responsibilities relating to any law,ordinance, or regulation of any Federal,State,or local.government body. Any failure or malfunction that lasts more than thirty(30)minutes and affects a top light or flashing obstruction light,regardless of its position,should be reported immediately to 077)487-6867 so a Notice to Airmen ' (NOT'AM)cen be issued.As soon as the normal operation is restored,notify the same number. This aeronautical study considered and analyzed the impact on existing and proposed snivel,departure,and en route procedures for aircraft operating under both visual flight rules and instrument flight rules,the impact pa on all existing and Planned public-use airports,trtilitary atrptrrts and aeronautical facilities; and the cumulative irnpact resulting from thestudied structure when combined with the ipactof other existing or proposed ' structures.`Inc study disclosed that the described structure would have no substantial adverse effect on air navigation. ' An account of the study findings,aeronautical objections received by the FAA during the study(if any), and the basis for the FAA's decision in this matter can be found on the following page(s). I ' Page 2 of 5 1 1 1 If we can be of further assistance,please contact Earl Newalu, at(404)305-5958, On any future correspondence concerning this matter,please refer to Aeronautical Study Number 2015-ASO-15724-OE, Signature Control No:266796768-285978586 (DNH) Mike Helvey ' Manager, Obstruction Evaluation Group Attachment(s) ' Additional Information Map(s) 1 1 i 1 1 1 Page 3 of 5 I i 1 f Additional information for ASN 2015-ASO-15724-OE Proposal: To construct a(n)Carbon Silo to a height of 43 feet above ground level,487 feet above mean sea ' level. Location: The structure will be located 0.5 nautical miles northeast of DNL Airport reference point. Part 77 Obstruction Standard(s)Exceeded: 1 Section 77.17(a)(5)a height that affects an Airport Surface by penetrating 1 Section 77.19(d)Approach Surface by 30 feet as applied to DNL. ' Preliminary FAA study indicates that the above mentioned structure would: not exceed traffic pattern airspace have no physical or electromagnetic.effect on the operation of air navigation and communications facilities. have no effect on any airspace and routes used by the military. Details of the proposed structure were circularized for public comment. There were no letters of objection ' received during the comment period. The proposed structure proximity to the airport was considered and found to be acceptable. The impact on arrival,departure and en routepocedures for aircraft lS c erati under ill%;conditions at operating existing and planned public use and military airports,as well as aeronautical'facilities,was considered during ' the analysis of this structure. The aeronautical study disclosed that the structure,at a height of 487 feet above mean sea level(AMP,would have no adverse effect upon any terminal or en route instrument procedure or altitude. The cumulative impact resulting.torthe structure,when combined with the impact of other existing ��;f��R.) p or proposed structures was considered and found to be acceptable Therefore,it is determined that the proposed structure would not have a substantial adverse pct on"the'.safe and'efficient use of the navigable airspaceby aircraft or on any navigation facility and would not be a hazard to ' air navigation. I/f1////1/l ND OF COMMENTS/////M 1 • ' Page 4 of 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 , �y# TOPO Map for ASN 2015-ASO-15724-0E *�' vat*-•. i]'!,.�r-r * at+. s f. '4.0'‘, ,y: `'.. t) ; a ;1'1' u1 y_P,''''''.' rt (k' .i ' :i §)612- } t-i, e�,^ 4 it-4,s40; )� W it) -7;-,W0'/,-4,30t, Y �.�+ `� k+�o- "\ � ��Ih ti fpr?.J', Y, ( i i, r2,,,,:, _.:,....-,:-.4,,, r .: $�d i.. t x+T g �4 c:,'p ,w.t L� {..1„ E a p , ' ,��j �'{ h ,.t ! �s 4ry. -, t A k h �6dr. �+`•. y 4 , d ' Y'F ' 'E, '' . ; qa y' to>.' � .�c��''v!„}�l,�sssf_A��,.� r ii �. � •A''*, ::1,41,..'. r !`' it f ,} {�t r. � +,.$ - � �iy� y �_::::.*.k11, w �L�"�; �.r�}u � � J 6 , ' i' .. .., %: Srih �$'. ,' t. t.S � �t-'40',,,1*T R.�: 4` 4 :: "% ,s r�1' &"44,f,;;',,,,‘-:::' �+4;" ,a, l' '� fit 1 !:. w/i Sp `r9}' , «.t ,�' 4+ d7 1,,`�i7�,.. wr - 1'k. �•r�+�{'1 1.X' 9d. v r. �4t ��lY„ y i" ...*-,..,-01. !R� kl r t f 1 ' .KY'' + ,.5„o,x;71' ‘.1.74\ .'}1°"�r s ft/t�4r[ Sfa L, tj4sy t KIb��T " z" a t ;q i� � t (y F�Ft� F tr1 r4ti� s j:icy }j P N �4� "� sa d g '� ta,.s a. tt; � +r'• "'tit "., r`a t- 'raf'p,„,...0.„-0,...4,k e8•, '�Pptt (j, 44L, 44%1-, _ U a.,, rs,,I ., E>;., 4 ,, 9 �S".� r iF .' i rs "2 lrii „,,,,,,,,_1....,,,,,„,„,. y 5� t (� .a4.7ti"w ,,, ,, 'r r--� 1 Y'c; �`-4 e,. q 'I� {{. ...1i „,ex,,,,; Ci'-r f �”N `. ,,,,?,=4.41,,,,,,....,,, ,,f.'4 . ` „y,,,,,.....'}�.r , .+.5~:i, ,-, ( '- 4. i t k ,.0 1 ��� Lu�'.�¢�+�6 t.` ‘.1'.': ''-i,'. � 4 wr fiz''4b bro )'etc .�f' j�(`vA� �r ' '7 17 r �-�v a a f'��.�, tp dY � :1� v-. i1 '4'!T •F,� aS..-e s r �Fdf e -1 r"4�! ' `def- . # x r�. +t 0:I''. 'h$t/AP/ t1`t� o�`�> aEy rf "�.1`�T i 'til. YIr� � �.,�. `� a- �-r .aL v�,,, i�. ��” �t, , 9 e;; ,:44 e n' °+r9�r r 4 •L" "l k-r68 r typ',`'li � ''ti F '� /lrtrr +'tit= l,f/s, #. r i'•� e+'iYi�1 d � �, ' }i .S�'��l a`wr�i 'i d_. f e' ` -G i; �.1s4 �..k( .i,;i f'l i..1%"5' FYs}J` c -,±, erfy ,..,,, 14 �P,,•: 4; �Z�� ,,i _ 1 ' . q ., '�!. a.4,;� gy d ',ft' z�z+a� ' �$', u'"/q, a 4 z � '' ',-,...'1) � •f��Si t � A� � � ,q � '�`F �tw•� �frTa,fJ1L', ��� r F ��V(y� t t ! 1' 6r t"*:7,,tt 6 ,U 4. 4s i or, Nlf-tir„ t ?! O t t'. , ? .az* 5',11 R i'1,1, tt 'ry'L.� ir} �. ,.A",rte`- ' , `---"r47, f .1, +.Fly " 't�F y� �:5���� / I 4 � , YiCie � ,r dp�� tat,. a "4 -. § ti ,ry.� p . c`k`, t r r�a, �_ �� ws^ iii) r'fy� a s �,�,,��{ i qv.wv tv t r.+. .-:est n,._' �` a tl fi 4\Isr-�i-.F-t`�'� 17,'7..7 y r .J i ° „ .''''..t5/4,'‘,44 .1'44/14,f-' q a ;w"fl SKP�r�*-,�9 Q ( m,ti�[l it '�PRt,a ti rte+ ���yr )" 3..., ' ; gmV��' `A 1:, 'yf-' '� 'e 4 e•t�}f E Kr: 0" 1�t"'x1.4' b•HaC:•`y,''''[ Rf��j 'n' "'41 i '� r Q' � +U - ,c+9r�,. • 4'�v�...y, ,�l''��{ti F+?�4t .,x v 'q ,k•jhr 7 !t� � , r t t ,q ,rt � f41rah rr`Ijf l 4, ,,� t 1, c .�°�) !� ,„; r �r-,r' „r ,,- -ii9- 0• `- p,�, r7.:•'.e /, , ai�� � �l `+� z,� tti>' t � cad- e-t � -�4�` d,�r.� Ppra� 1^v' * 'la „a gs�kB1r1P`cr�sZ y� y*i� pe �tft " 7��j 1 {r ,��� � '�K,,7:-,-ItV, _ t< { a"tr- &" � iF -i '�fM � ,,.p'd2. rh tli' j-, Y4 �k' �"1� ,ria' �u � Q,'�iti,,, "e imi'.� �`''F�� f',"��-�� �f�.f^�yi�u:•����� a�d d�4r� / ty'r4i'', tr; 7 's. �� t r? 'rr4„ 7 r�"tt 4 v} F''r B v,�"..,.ovr r'sr1 11y fp n, 1?l J� ,¢(,y , 4.2 4 y'{� 1 4 ic ;,t+,Pf r- t,,,-- r.,��z t;J - ' ,,,L.:,„" , ,N ,,ta )'' �� t IP:.j .t+', _ t.f".•. �' 1 r` � .(4.-1 ,, r Q 4� a�,. ''''417•%„,n `, , ". 1t fAz:-W , yi Y ,�', .r 4?.. # -;°i!r ', %)f �#r , t" .3.:.•' T..4” '• 'r v •U y F{"Y{tµv- "wr r "Vi-i, . y, t ,i'• s; rj. r <� tr'''�rq Irt p, Sqr { ,, 40,-,„,..—..5,,r,,,,1,,.,„...,'c5ii1 /l �r;' i •r .. 4,, 4'tl 4.4 1 ,i'N , }4�,`y ih£ rc.,l.i'''.i"3�a ;�-`,'A' ,,' '� a... < f ! �4x '.� �� � fa4-?r"'{ r � t,—';.--7„-,,,t,.. .� tet., A t, "+ , i, rtr , i ,,,,,7 -,,,c,,1,y � . is `` �h `41y�". I "t`-$ ,,‘,`<444,4) -' , jy .A.',.`��.•L, .'ib`r -r z,-.:,••••.0,F h '•v�i "� ' Ja ,rn' -.411, i- ray el 1 Y e.qp.!•-'' S, .ak, ti' +,ir 6470;le '� rtsn� -� amc��3t ; t� h 3, '..2.6...:67 "4'�7'� a��'� 'x"'� `t 'P ,;.,gr"Lo. r� *+.4.71_r'L.s'+�+t�tlx buw,: • ,.rA„ r4ar • ".4;,,.&.——,,ir,e, 4 f„• } g•'',..,-..".'.• 7^ ^,..k,,,_- �,')1 4. 0 , t.°y+r 4 S ..,,„0•Q>,,,,, t5,-''.:,,,•,1,,r,„ ,'ht 'dk r� �gy( y 7 -,,X r t Y`' q d'1 "7+ '�fil ,E. "fir :"+ •4' (° ., k - *: , -a :75� �' C � ' L>a. n. Li� ��-i§a'*r 1-� "` „ 4 i•rtf', r6 L� '6' s� 100^-,r ., �f , j�; �r� y,-di,$g -, t k S i.. . 4 t -,4\ A eta +` °,i sa�sr �. M�,�` -kms 'viskt a,g�,1, � Li b 1t4t v i ,i t#'} "it +fie-- „� r.•rpj a ,,,+ y'f, i ^ -f '4 a �-w ��, �a ��c►�• I ,„, y.4 �l, ', �. +.... 5 t. .• l(,i � ��E�Y� �+7 CF`4, ]1 f '�i,K°.s�dp,..— u W P a 4 •t .,-.-!••••-.:3,,,I.,, j,,,I �4 f 4 i, Cti �J T 'n 1 _ a l .y.t•,7't4 r ..y S H< `isyr f'`.a--STA•, "'" q r'k„ ;' �� :�t. �c � c °2 s�a;ra �l v �7,! � t�`'L�Ai.•{,'{t b 'ATF ,MP.1-`' k60?il.,/ 'far y •` #. 4;::,,',1„,4.,,,,.,94,,,,..,-,.,<*_„!,:.' ' 2. „/. , ni eu„Yl.� 7'vt i t •?'r -�+j'�' �; �, S r ,` •�t )�"s^y.z (�q'sj k 05...-CL r'. +it 4 '4 ,....47,,,.1,!=i � -�!'IPN�a'A'Y f r afk P s" iO4-'--,6,,.. „`.f 4 ,..-y{tf;,1,: 1Fy.,l ,y.,e-'16� >'i'4' f` ;Ow 8'';Fv'` �`Via+ . 'c•6 9 .- Ti � '.r;4t-w'r '' :.P.-'f” t,',,'}.F`r v IYjk1 t'I �• kl"i , ;9 �Y° , I'^4 E—c,i.i•,y h sNd ,,,9 - ,...'15%,-4.... , ,, , ' �tY'%- .04: v . --7"7..4..i . ,ati.! d, :• ,n'1 P y,, t*,1.. ig,�-tf•.• -i - * �' 41:07,r4-4`, s ' , I . I I I IPage 5 of 5 I i i SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SEC ' 1.2 TION INCLUDES A. Format and Data Required B. Preparation of Application for each Progress Payment ' C. Substantiating Data for Progress Payments D. Preparation of Application for Final Payment ' E. Submittal Procedure F. Basis of Payment 1.3 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED ' A. Submit applications typed on Application for Payment and Certificate for Payment using form,as included in Section 00620, Contractors Application for Payment with itemized data typed on 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch white paper continuation sheets. B. Provide Itemized Data on Continuation Sheet: 1. Format, schedules,line items, and values: Those of the Schedule of Values 1.4 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT ' A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer in accord with the schedule established by Conditions of the Contract and Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. ' B. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information,including that for Change Orders executed prior to the date of submittal application. I 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with the respective totals indicated on the continuation sheets. 3. Execute certification with the signature of authorized officer of the Contractor's firm. 4. Notarize signature where required on Certificate for Payment. C. Continuation Sheets: ' 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of Work,with time number and the scheduled dollar value for each item. 2. Fill in the dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work ' has been performed or products stored. ' 141b-0007625: Meatturt5gev:And Payment 01025-1 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3. List each Change Order executed prior to the date of submission at the end of the continuation sheets: I a. List by Change Order number,dollar amount,and description as for an original component item of work 4, Use data from approved Schedule of Values: Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. 1.5 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. When Owner or Engineer requires substantiating data,Contractor shall submit suitable information,with a cover letter identifying: 1. Project 2. Application number and date 3. Detailed list of enclosures 4. For stored products: a. Item number and identification as shown on application b. Description of specific material ' B. Submit 1 copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. C. Submit an updated construction schedule with each application for payment. I to D. Submit evidence of payment and release of liens uwithin ment and materials deliv0 days of tered to the Contractor for Work performed by subcontractors or forequipment ' site during construction. 1.6 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT I A. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments. B. Use continuation sheets for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in I Section 01700,Contract Closeout. 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE . I A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer at the times stipulated in the Agreement. B. Number: Five copies of each Application. C. When Engineer finds the Application properly completed and correct,he will transmit two Certificates for Payment to Owner,with a copy to Contractor. Upon approval by Owner,Owner will transmit payment to Contractor with one copy of Certificate attached. 1.8 LUMP SUM ITEMS: A. PART A—Filter Modifications I B. PART B—Powdered Activated Carbon(PAC)Feed System 1416-00 01025 Measurement 01025-2 Inrement And Payment —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C. PART C—Filter Rinse Modifications D. No quantity measurement for payment will be made. E. Payment will be made on a lump sum basis relative to percent complete for each Bid item. 1 F. Lump sum price includes entire work involvedin the Contract for the individual Bid Items including the necessary appurtenance features and equipment which are considered incidental to the work and as such must be included in the Bid Price. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 1 1 i z I .. 1416-00 01025 IfeasmementnndPa m 01025-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I ISECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Quality assurance IB. Schedule of references 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. For products or workmanship specified by association,trade,Federal Standards,or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes I B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents I C, Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Engineer before proceeding D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties to the Contract or those of the Engineer shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document I1.3 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES A ACGIH American Conference of Governmental I Industrial Hygienists AA Aluminum Association 1330 Kemper Meadow Dr.,Suite 600 900 19th St.,NW Cincinnati,OH 45240 Washington,DC 20006 www aegilwrg_ I www:as umittit;tr r ACI American Concrete Institute AABC Associated Air Balance Council P.O.Box 9094 1518 K St.,NW Farmington Hill,MI 48333-9094 I Washington,DC 20005 wwt#abwww aci nit:or eirq uona ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers 222 W.Las Colinas Blvd.,Ste.641 I Association Irving,TX 75039 5423 1827 Walden Office Sq.,Suite 104 www:concrete-pipe oro;; Schaumburg,IL 60173-4268 www.aanianetworr ADC Air Diffusion Council I . 1000 E.Woodfield Rd.,Suite 102 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Schaumburg,IL 60173-5921 Transportation Officials www.fieXibleduetoig 444 N.Capitol St.,NW,Suite 249 I Washington,DC 20001 ADSC The International Association of Foundation ri�avvattslitis.or Drilling 9696 Skillman Street,Suite 280 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association Dallas,TX 75243 I 1200 19th St.,NW,Suite 300 wNvw.aclsc-iafd.eolti' Washington,DC 20036-2422 cvww,abin tt-de, 1416-00 01090 Reference standards 010904 1 Z E I —ENGINEERS— 1 I I SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS I AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee I 1111 19th St.,NW,Suite 800 PO Box 210 ll Washington,DC 20036 Germantown,MD 20875-0210 wwwiafaadpii,iirg sWwa]so.ort; AFSA American Fire Sprinkler Association,Inc. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ' 9696 Skillman St.,Suite 300 International,Inc. Dallas,TX 75243-8264 ' 30 W.University Dr. www.sprinklernet.org Arlington Heights,IL 60004-1893 www tnc orgi AFSS American Filtration And Separation Society ANSI American National Standards Institute 252 N.Washington St.,Suite A 1819 L Street,NW Falls Church,VA 22046 wwWashington,DC 20036 ' �t afssneiety Tari; wkvti*sansr arg AGC Associated General Contractors Of America APA/EWA APA-The Engineered Wood Association 333 John Carlyle St.,Suite 200 P.O.Box 11700 Alexandria,VA 22317 •II www.age.org Tacoma,WA 98411-0700 ww.apawam er AHA American Hardboard Association I1210 W.Northwest Hwy. APFA American Pipe Fittings Association Palatine,IL 60067 111 Park Pl. Falls Church,VA 22046 v lsttfdtx rd.org; vvww.nofts.r m AI Asphalt Institute • Research Park Drive API American Petroleum Institute P.O.Box 14052 1220 L Street NW Lexington,KY 40512-4052 Washington,DC 20005-4070 www,asoluiltinstitt*org www s , AIA American Institute of Architects AREMA American Railway Engineering and 1735 New York Ave.,NW Maintenance-of--Way Association Washington,DC 20006 8201 Corporate Drive,Suite 1125 www2.aia.org/myaia Landover,MD 02785-2230 I wWw.tt ia.or AICE American Institute Of Chemical Engineers 3 Park Ave ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute I New York,NY 10016-5991 4301 N.Fairfax Dr.,Ste.425 wwui arche.trg Arlington,VA 22203 www.ars.or . AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ARRA Asphalt Recycling and Reclaiming Association One East Wacker Dr.,Suite 3100 #3 Church Circle,PMB 250 Chicago,IL 60601-2001 Annapolis,MD 21401 w+ aisorg www.a€aa.org: AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th St.,NW,Ste. 1300 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers Washington,DC 20036 World Headquarters I www steel org 1801 Alexander Graham Bell Dr. Reston,VA 20191-4400 wWW.as eorg: AITC American Institute of Timber Construction I 7012 S.Revere Pkwy,Suite 140 Englewood,CO 80112 www.aitc glularn.arg. ZEL i41a o0 01090 lite « sddS 01090-2 u —ENGINEERS— I I = SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating, BIA Brick Institute of America and Air-Conditioning Engineers 11490 Commerce Park Dr. 1791 Tullie Circle,NE Reston,VA 22091 Atlanta,GA 30329 www,$a.orl www aslane am IC ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers CACI Compressed Air and Gas Institute 3 Park Ave. 1300 Sumner I New York,NY 10016-5990 Cleveland,OH 44115 a m8:tl www.eagi.i)rg ASNT American Society for Non-Destructive Testing CDA Copper Development Association,Inc. I Inc. 1711 Arlingate Ln. 260 Madison Ave., 16th Flr. New York,NY 10016 Columbus,OH 43228-0518 ww.cot er+7rg., wwwasnt:ora; I CGA Compressed Gas Association ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 1725 Jefferson Davis Hwy,Suite 1004 901 Canterbury,Suite A Arlington,VA 22202-4102 Westlake,OH 44145 www.ccanetcon>� wwv ass .=;lumb` _or: .. CII Chlorine Institute,Inc. ASTM American Society of Testing Materials 1300 Wilson Blvd. International Rosslyn VA 22209 111 100 Barr Harbor Dr. vww,eJ2.cons III West Conshohocken,PA 19428-2959 w ,as4 CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association I AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 1500 Lincoln Hwy,Suite 202 1952 Isaac Newton Sq.West St.Charles,IL 60174 Reston,VA 20190 www,eisa;or wwvawinet: rg I AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Rd.,Suite 419 P.O.Box 5690 Chattanooga,TN 37421 Granbury,TX 76049 www.eispi.orA I Www:awa.an; CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute AWS American Welding Society 9891 Broken Land Pkwy,Suite 300 550 NW LeJeune Rd. Columbia,MD 21046 I Miami,FL 33126 ww chinlin*f org wwwarnw_eld•arg CRI Carpet and Rug Institute AWWA American Water Works Association 310 S.Holiday Ave. I 6666 W.Quincy Ave. Dalton,GA 30722-2048 Denver,CO 80235 w ems 'om ww v.ewwtLo CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute I 933 N.Plum Grove Rd. B Schaumburg,IL 60173-4758 www,crsi.org BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. CSI The Construction Specifications Inst. I 355 Lexington Ave.,'17TH Floor 99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300 New York,NY 10017 Alexandria,VA 22314 www.bum1d .ard.• m www.csin t.org1 . 1416.00 03090 Reference Standards 01090-3 ZEL -ENGINEERS- 1 I I SECTION 01090 IREFERENCE STANDARDS F CSSB Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau FAA Federal Aviation Administration I www darbureausc P.O.Box 1178 800 Independence Ave.,SW Sumas,WAAur u °Washington,DC 20591 rg www.faa.gov CTI Cooling Technology Institute , Glass Association of North America Houston, , Wells Fargo Drive,Suite 218 2945 SW Wanamaker Dr.,Suite A TX 77090 Topeka,KS 66614 et#i°rg:. www.gla€tswcbsif .coin D-E FM FM Global Corporate Headquarters P.O.Box 7500 DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers P.O.Bon,RI Association International Joh�vnvton,RI 02919l 1300 Summer Avenue Cleveland,OH 44115-2851 ,www.dasinu,.corn FS Federal Specification Unit General Services Administration Federal Supply Service FSS Acquisition Management Center Environmental Programs and Engineering DHI The Door and Hardware Institute Policy Division 14150 Newbrook Dr.,Suite 200 Washington,on 20406 Chantilly,VA 20151 htip J/pubifss=gsi gov dhi rt ; FSSA Fire Suppression Systems Association DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association 5024-R Blvd. 245 Riverchase Pkwy E.,Ste.O 5024 R ,CampbellD 2Blv Birmingham,AL 35244 Baltiwww.fssa.net 236 _tlspi'a•ar EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association G-H—I 3000 Corporate Center Dr.,Suite 270 Morrow,GA 30260GA Gypsum Association utur.eifsfacts.com 810 First St.,NE, Suite 510 Washington,DC 20002 EJCDC Engineer's Joint Contract Documents wwva usg cram www.gv I Committee psunt.org. American Consulting Engineers Council (www.uteex.oriDGANA Glass Association of North America 1015 15th n 2945 Southwest Wanamaker Dr.,Suite A Washington, DCC 20005 Topeka,KS 66614 www.glassv ebslte.eomt ino EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 N.Broadway Hydraulics Institute I Tarrytown,NY 10591 Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers J++3' 'etrna• Association 2107 Wilson Blvd.,Suite 600 EPA Environmental Protection Agency Arlington,VA 22201 I US EPA/NSCEP wvrw. sirnanet arg P.O.Box 42419 Cincinnati,OH 45242 utww. ra,gav R Iain-oo olovo Referenceslmaacts 010904 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I ,, I SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association LPI Lightning Protection Institute Division of NAAMM 3335 N.Arlington Heights Rd.,Suite E I 8 South Michigan Ave.,Suite 1000 Chicago,IL 60603 Arlington Heights,IL 60004 www.lightningrg www,naninntbrgI : HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association P.O.Box 2789 M—N Reston,VA 20195-0789 www,lipva,org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association I . 1300 Sumner Ave. IAS International Approval Services Cleveland,OH 44115-2851 U.S.Operations wwwtibma,cpit. 8501 E.Pleasant Valley Rd. I Cleveland,OH 44131-5575 wvew:a$ " sp MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 60 Revere Dr.,Suite 500 Northbrook,IL 60062 ICBG International Conference of Building Officials www mapletloor org I 5360 Workman Mill Rd. Whittier,CA 90601 MIA Marble Institute of America www.itho.ktrz 30 Eden Alley,Suite 301 Columbus,OH 43215 I ICC International Code Council wwwmarble inst tute.com 5203 Leesburg Pike#708 Falls Church,VA 22041 MIL Military Standardization Documents mm ittleotitt r Defense Automated Printing Service / I 700 Robbins Ave. Building 4D IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Philadelphia,PA 19111-5094 Engineers,Inc. www:dedssp.daps ini1" 1 3 Park Ave., 17th Floor I New York,NY 10016-5997 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the wwi Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park St.,NE IMIAC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Vienna,VA 22180-4602 I Council inss h Corr3 -.. International Masonry Institute v ww innweb:or __,... www th NAA National Arborist Association 815 15th St.,NW Route 101,P.O.Box 1094 I Washington,DC 20005 Amherst,NH 03031-1094 www nat�arb corn IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal 120 Wall Street, 17th Floor Manufacturers New York,NY 10005 8 South Michigan Ave.,Suite 1000 Www,iesnaor Chicago,IL 60603 wimuutaanmoss I ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America 400 Stone City Bank Building NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Bedford,IN 47421 Manufacturers www.iliai.ctm. (Division of GANA) ' 2945 Southwest Wanamaker Dr.,Suite A Topeka,KS 66614 K—L wivw..g isswobsitc coin KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association NACA NACE International I 1899 Preston White Dr. 1440 South Creek Drive Reston,VA 20191-5435 Houston,TX 77084 wwsv,kama'org= www org, I tate-oo 01090 References,anaar& 01090-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I I I SECTION 01090 I REFERENCE STANDARDS NETA International Electrical Testing Association P.O.Box 687 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers 106 Stone St. Association Morrison,CO 80465 Iwcw,nctaworltl•x 44 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 310 Alexandria,VA 22314 www.narnxu : NFPA National Fire Protection Association One Batterymarch Park NAPHCC National Association of Plumbing-Heating- P.O.Box 9101Quincy,MA 02269-9101 Cooling Contractors wwwttfla.nt 180 S.Washington Falls Church,VA 22040 www:Pligmehmilk NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 1300 Spring St.,Suite 500 Spring,MD 20910 Silver NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Silver fi c tiri Association,Inc. 1220 L Street NW,Suite 100-167 Washington,DC 20005 NGWA National Ground Water Association nb a dra 601 Dempsey �' ' '" gt1 Westerville,OH 43081 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NIBS National Institute of Building Sciences 2302 Horse Pen Road 1090 Vermont Ave.,NW,Suite 700 Herndon,VA 20171-3499 Washington,DC 20005-4905 v�incma.oz www.nlbs.org NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology 7910100 Bureau Dr,MS 2150 Gaithersburg,MD 20899-2150 Bethesdsdaa,,MDMD 20814-3095 Woodmont Ave.,Suite 800 ww nr st gov: wwwnap e( i.> NDI Nickel Development Institute NLA National Lime Association 200 North Glebe Rd.,Suite 800 t 214 King West,Suite 510 Arlington,VA 22203 Toronto,Ontario org Canada MSH 3S6 wwliclime. I wwv.nidi.tir NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau #406-First Capital P1. •960 Quayside Dr. 8575 Gnt Circle New Westminster,BC V3M6G2 I Gaithersburg,brg,MD 20877 CANADA www nebi,nriy www.nlaa.org a..org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers 3 Bethesda Metro Center,Ste.1100 Association Bethesda,MD 20814 P.O.Box 3009 ivti�Y.tteant'utg Memphis,TN 38173-0009 NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Aviv»,rnofroa.org Association 272 Tuttle Road NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association P.O.Box 87A 1500 Rhode Island Ave.,NW Cumberland Center,ME 04021 Washington,DC 20005 I wwu;ttelnt :rit : www paintForg NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association I 1300 N. 17th St.,Ste.1847 Rosslyn,VA 22209 www.nerna.org 1416-00 01090 xcru sxm 01090-6 ZEL ENGINEERS— ll I 1,7 SECTION 01090 I REFERENCE STANDARDS NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of I O'Hare International Center America 10255 W.Higgins Rd.,Ste.600 3913 Old Lee Hwy,Suite 33-B Rosemont,IL 60018 Fairfax,VA 22030 www rctttlon1nt org www.pdca.com 1 NSF NSF International PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute P.O.Box 130140 45 Bristol Drive Ann Arbor,MI 48113-0140 South Easton,MA 02375 I wt:a e nsl org http.fWDlottivtii e NSPE National Society Of Professional Engineers PEI Petroleum Equipment Institute 1420 King St. P.Q.Box 2380 I Alexandria,VA 22314 Tulsa,OK 74101-2380 NSPI National Spa and Pool Institute 2111 Eisenhower Ave. PMI Plumbing Manufacturers Institute I Alexandria,VA 22314 ai :ttpit ; 1340 Remington Rd.,Suite A Schaumburg,IL 60173 www.pmihome.org NSWMA National Solid Wastes Management I Association PPFA Plastic Pipe And Fittings Association 4301 Connecticut Ave.NW,Suite 300 800 Roosevelt Rd.,Bldg.C,Ste.20 Washington,DC 20008 Glen Ellyn,IL 60137 www nawana q rg w pj fahome r;; I NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association PS Product Standard 110 E.Market St,Suite 200-A U.S.Dept.of Commerce Leesburg,VA 20176 Washington,DC 20203 E. www.ntma.com PTI Post Tensioning Institute NUCA National Utility Contractors Association 1717 W.Northern Ave.,Suite 114 4301 North Fairfax Dr.,Suite 360 Phoenix,AZ 85021 I Arlington,VA 22203-1627 wwwy t t sior trlg.t rg www nuc teom NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers R I Association 205 W.Touhy Ave. RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections Park Ridge,IL 60068 'www,bolrcounoil,org; IRIS P The Redwood Inspection Service 630 J Street Eureka,CA 95501 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Rd. - S I Skokie,IL 60077 )vioimportcemetit.mg SCDOT South Carolina Department of Transportation 955 Park Street PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Columbia,SC 29201-3959 I 209 W.Jackson Blvd. �vww,sbtlat tarp Chicago,IL 60606-6938 SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association 400 Penn Center Blvd.,#530 I Pittsburgh,PA 15235 WWa.cvpressninfn<:trg 11416.00 01690 Reference standard, 01090-7 Z E I- _ENGINEERS- 1 I I SECTION 01090 + I REFERENCE STANDARDS STI Steel Tank Institute 570 Oakwood Rd. Lake Zurich,IL 60047 SDI Steel Deck Institute svwvr.teoltank earn, P.O.Box 25 _ Fox River Grove,IL 60021 I SWI Steel Window Institute w w sdt' rg, 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland,OH 44115-2851 SDI Steel Door Institute wwty xst l nc]o„ss ctatr 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland,OH 44145-1967 www.streldiPor.org SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing,and Restoration Institute SFPA Southern Forest Product Association 2841 Main St. City,MO 64108 2900 Indiana Avenue w w.Swrtanlin .dj Kenner,LA 70065 WWW.sfpa.prg.ar SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers T Association TCATile Council of America,Inc. 401 N.Michigan Ave. Chicago,IL 60611 100 Clemson Research Blvd. Anderson,SC 29625 www srgsira n m g!$tg t Www.tildmitedln SR Steel Joist Institute TIAIEIA Telecommunications Industry Association/ 3127 10''Ave.,North Ext. Electronic Industries Alliance Myrtle Beach,SC 29577-6760 2500 Wilson Blvd.,Suite 300 WWW stt l�t�st.i?rg Arlington,VA 22201 www:tiaonlsne Or SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' I National Association TMS The Masonry Society 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. 3970 Broadway,Suite 201-D Chantilly,VA 20151-1209 Boulder,CO 80304-1135 w+wtv.snxaoria:or www-masonry octety.org II SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau TPI Truss Plate Institute 4709 Scenic Hwy 583 D'Onofrio Dr.,Suite 200 Pensacola,FL 32504-9094 rwtyspilx:s tg Madison,WI 53719 www,Vmst.or SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute TN Turfgrass Producers International 200 Reservoir St.,309 A 1855-A Hicks Road Needham,MA 02494 Rolling Meadows,IL 60008 �vww:spr or www.turfgrassod_or,g SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturer Association I 8 S.Michigan Ave i;—Z Chicago,IL 60603 UL Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings 333 Pfingsten Rd. I 40 24th St.,6u'Floor Northbrook,IL 60062-2096 Pittsburgh,PA 15222-4656 www.ul.com rvwvs g arg 1 Inie•oo 01090 Reference Standards 01090-8 ZEL -ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS VMAA Valve Manufacturers Association Of America }uww:etlaetuko.cont`. 1050 17th St.,NW,Ste.280 ' Washington,DC 20036-5503 w+>w vis.ctr WIC Woodwork Institute of California 3164 Industrial Blvd. West Sacramento,CA 95691 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www wicuet org: ' P.O.Box 23145 Portland,OR 97281 www wciig>org ' WDMA Window and Door Manufacturers Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1400 E.Touhy Ave.,Suite 470 522 SW 5th Ave.,Suite 500 Des Plaines,IL 60018 Portland,CO 97204-2122 www.nwwdn:org www wwpii org ' WH Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed) 3210 American Drive ' Mississauga,Ontario L4V 1B3 CANADA PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 • 1 i I 1416-0001090Reference StandmrdS 01090-9 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U 1 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART I GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. General requirements B. Preconstruction conference C. Progress meetings 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IA. Engineer will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting,regularly scheduled progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings including items requested by Owner and Contractor ' 2. Preside at meetings 3. Record the minutes;include all significant proceedings and decisions 4. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 5 days after each meeting: ' a. b. To all participants in the meetings To Owner c. Furnish 3 copies of minutes to Contractor B. Owner may attend meetings C. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ' A. Engineer will schedule a conference after Notice of Award B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties ' C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative ' 2. Engineer and his professional consultants 3. Resident Project Representative 4. Contractor's Superintendent ' 5. Major Subcontractors 6. Major Suppliers 7. Others as appropriate '. D. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates ' 2. Distribution of Contract Documents 3. Submission of list of subcontractors and suppliers, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule _.. 1n1e-40 MOO Project Mea;,,ss 012004 ZEA -ENGINEERS- 1 M I SECTION 01200 - _ _ PROJECT MEETINGS 1 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Engineer I 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, cost proposal requests, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures I 6. Construction scheduling and updates 7. Critical work sequencing 8. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 9. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 10. Use of premises: a. Office,work and storage areas I b. Owner's requirements 11. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids 12. Temporary utilities I 13. All safety and first-aid procedures are responsibility of the Contractor 14. Security and housekeeping procedures as required by the Owner 15. Procedures for testing 16. Requirements for start-up of equipment 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Engineer will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at `' maximum monthly intervals B. Location of the Meetings: The project field office of the Contractor,or other locations , arranged for by Contractor, convenient to all parties C. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings,prepare agenda with copies for 1 participants,preside at meetings,record minutes, and distribute copies within three(3) days to Contractor, Owner,participants, and those affected by decisions made D. Attendance: 1, Owner's Representative I 2. Engineer, and his professional consultants as needed 3, Resident Project Representative 4. Contractor's Superintendent 5, Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda I 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Others, as appropriate E. Agenda: I 1. Review minutes of previous meetings 2. Review unresolved issues from last meeting I 3. Review of Work progress 4. Field observations,problems, conflicts and decisions 5. Identification of problems which impede planned progress I 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals 1416-0001200 Project Mect ZE' 01200-2 . s —ENQINEERS I I I SECTION 01200 I PROJECT MEETINGS I 7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules S. Maintenance of progress schedule 9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules I 10. Planned progress during succeeding work period 11. Coordination of projected progress 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards I 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination 14. Other business relating to Work IPART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used IPART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I . I I I ' 1416.00 01200 Project Meetings ... 01200-3 Z E L„ —ENGINEERS- I - I 1 1 1 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Requirements B. Format C. Content D. Progress Revisions E. Submittals ' F. Distribution 1.2 REQUIREMENTS A. Within 10 days after Effective Date of Agreement, Contractor shallp �r are and submit to Engineer estimated construction progress schedules for the Work,with subschedules of ' related activities which are essential to its progress. B. Submit revised progress schedules with each pay request. ' C. The Contractor shall provide a written schedule of tasks expected to be done on a weekly basis. The schedule shall be provided on the previous Friday to the RPR. ' D. Owner may require Contractor to add to his plant, equipment,or construction forces, as well as increase the working hours,if operations fall behind schedule at any time during construction period. ' 1.3 FORMAT ' A. General schedule format: Conform to©Primavera, Suretrack critical path method(CPM) scheduling format or approved equal: 1. Base schedule on work days and regular working hours,Monday through Friday, as specified in General Conditions 2. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch 3. Color format ' B. Row(Listings)—Show: 1. Project Title 2. Major areas of construction 3. Construction activities within major areas of construction 4. Provide a separate bar for each construction activity. Bars to be annotated with activity description 5. Critical path activities to be clearly identified by color and lines 1a,e-ouul3ioconsnrn „ on Schedules 01310-1ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' m. 1 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULESI 6. List in chronological order by start date each major area of construction and then by each construction activity within its respective area of construction I 7. Show project start date, finish date,data date,run date, and revision table 8. Contract milestone dates 9. Legend I C. Column(Headings)—Show: 1. Activity ID: Define by number corresponding to major specification sections 2. Activity Description 3. Percent Complete 4. Original Duration 5. Remaining Duration 6. Total Float 7. Early Start 8. Early Finish 9. Time Scale: Identify first day of each week. Allow space for notations 10. Data date line 1.4 CONTENT I A. Construction progress schedule: 1. Submit initial construction schedule for full length of Contract time as specified in Section 00520,Agreement Between Owner and Contractor including number of days for float. 2. Initial construction schedule submitted with early substantial and final completion prior to specified Contract time will not be acceptable. 3. Initial construction schedule will be used to evaluate critical path and Contract time extensions requested by Contractor. 4. Subsequent construction schedules may reflect an accelerated schedule with early finish that may or may not include reduced number of days for float when compared to the initial construction schedule for full Contract time. I 5. Show complete sequence of construction by activity or major area of construction. 6. Major areas of construction to include, at a minimum, each separate stage of Work as specified in Section 01010, Summary of Work and major items of Work I as specified in Divisions 02 through 16. B. Submittals schedule for shop drawings and product data—Show: I 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals 2. The dates accepted submittals will be required from Engineer. Extensions of time for delays in submittal approval shall only be allowed as provided in Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples C. Products delivery schedule—Show delivery dates for: t 1. All major items of equipment and materials 2. Products specified under provisions of Section 01020,Allowances. I 1476.00 01310 Construction Schedules ScLedutes 01310-2 ' —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01310 I CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES D. Training program schedule—Show schedule incorporating specific equipment as listed in I Section 01400,Quality Control under manufacturer's field services: 1. Provide duration of each training session with start/finish times. 2. Use consecutive 8-hour work days with provisions for 1-hour lunch and two I15-minute breaks. 3 Present a minimum of two options for the start/finish dates of training program for Owner selection. I 4. Duration of each training session is specified in individual equipment specification sections. 5. Coordinate training program schedule with requirements of Section 01650, I Starting of System. 1.5 PROGRESS REVISIONS IA. Progress schedules are to be representative of actual construction progress and sequencing of activities. Schedules that do not accurately represent construction progress will be rejected. IB. Indicate progress of each activity as of data date I C. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission I 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes D. Provide narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays,and impact on schedule 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect 3. Effect on changes on schedules of other prime contractors I1.6 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit initial schedules within 10 days after award of Contract: 1. Engineer will review schedules and return review copy within 10 days after receipt I2. If required,resubmit within 7 days after return of review copy B. Submit revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment. IC. At each submission submit the number of opaque reproductions which the Contractor requires, plus 3 copies which will be distributed by Engineer. Do not submit fewer than 5 copies. 1 I I 1416-00 01310 Construction Schedule .... 01310-3 ZEL -ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.7 DISTRIBUTION A. Engineer will distribute copies of accepted schedules to: 1. One copy to Owner 2. One copy to Resident Project Representative • 3. One copy to be retained in Engineer's file 4. One copy to Contractor to be kept on file at job site 5. Remainder to Contractor for his distribution B. Schedule recipients will report promptly to Engineer and Contractor,in writing,any problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. I PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used I PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 i 1 i 1 1 1416-00 01310 Construction Schedules 01310-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Submission of all shop Drawings and product data as required by the Contract Documents for all equipment and materials to be furnished under this contract unless I specifically indicated otherwise. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Sections for Divisions 1 through 16-Required Submittals 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Shop Drawings—Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner: 1. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown I2. on Contract Drawings. Identify equipment by reference to equipment name and tag number shown on Contract Drawings. I 3. Scale and Measurements: Make drawings accurate to a scale with sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement and function of component materials and devices. I . 4. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch. 5. Fabrication drawing size: 11 inch by 17 inch or 24 inch by 36 inch. B. Product Data—Preparation: I1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models submitted for review. 2. Identify equipment by reference to equipment name and tag number. I3. Catalog cut sheets: Cross-out or delete irrelevant data. 4. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 5. Show dimensions and clearances required for installation and maintenance. I6. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 7. Show external connections, anchorages, and supports required. I C. "Certificate of Compliance": 1. Provided by manufacturer or supplier in lieu of submittal data required. 2. Certifies that product data or item identified in certificate is in total compliance I , 3. with Contract Document requirements. Specifically identifies project name and that there is no deviation from Contract Documents. I 4. Identify equipment by reference to equipment name and tag number. 5. Identify limits of equipment,materials or work provided. 6. Provide for specific product data or item only as indicated herein. I I 1416.00 01340 Shop nr srna„ctDateAndsunipxs 01340-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES 1 D. Construction Schedule: Designate in the the datessfor subm submion ission le,or in a and the datesethat reviewed arate coordinated shop drawing schedule, I Shop Drawings and Product Data will be needed. E. Samples—Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: I 1. Functional characteristics of the product,with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color,texture and patten;. I 3. Comply with requirements identified in individual specification sections. F. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: I 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the Work by crossing out or omitting irrelevant data. 2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. G. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site,at a location acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Size or area: Thatspecified in the respective specification section. 3mock-up complete and finished. 4. FabriRemove each mock-upssamato conclusion of Work or when acceptable to the Engineer. 4. Remove 1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review shopdrawings and product data prior to submission for accuracy and r completeness of each submission. B. Approve and stamp each submission before submitting it I C. Determine and verify: '• 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data I 4. Conformance with specifications D. Prior to each submission,carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. I E. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with specified requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents with respect to means, methods,techniques, sequences, and operations of construction,and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto. F. Make submissions promptly in accordance with Construction Schedule, and in such I sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. I 1416-00 0I340 Shop Drawings produx Data And Samples 01340-2 01340-2 I —ENGINEERS— SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES ' G. Limit requirements for expedited submittal review by Engineer to no more than 20 percent of total number of submittals: 1. Expedited submittal review period: Less than 14 calendar days H. Notify Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from Contract Document requirements: 1. Identify and tabulate all deviations in transmittal letter. 2. Indicate essential details of all changes proposed, including modifications to other facilities that maybe a result of the deviation. 3. Include required piping and wiring diagrams. I. Provide resubmissions within 30 calendar days following return of reviewed submissions for submittal items with disposition of either"Rejected"or"Revise and Resubmit". Promptly address noted Contract Document requirements,unresolved issues and all other comments of Engineer prior to final review and approval by Engineer of resubmissions. Contractor will be notified by Engineer of any deficient submittal items after the Ispecified number of calendar days required for resubmissions has expired. 1.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ' A. Make submissions far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmissions, and for placing orders and securing delivery ' B. In scheduling, allow a minimum of 21 calendar days for review by Engineer following receipt of submission in Engineer's office. ' C. Consecutively number all submissions: 1. Assign unique number to include all shop Drawings,product data and other ' 2. information required for individual specification sections. Each specification section may still have more than one submittal number for later submissions(i.e.,Preliminary O&M Manuals, Final O&M Manuals, etc.). ' Dr Hard Copy Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings and Product Date: Submit a maximum of 2 copies for Contractor's use,plus a maximum of 4 copies which will be distributed by Engineer when approved. Do not submit more than 6 copies. E. Electronic Submittals: ' 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Transmit to Engineer in electronic(PDF) format. 2. Engineer will return the completed review to the Contractor via e-mail or uploaded to Engineer's FTP site as warranted by file size. 3. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors or suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. I 1414.00 01340 Shop Drawings Product Data And Samples 01340-3 Z E I —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLESI F. Sample and Color submittals: Submit 3 copies of each sample unless specified otherwise in individual section. 1 G. Accompany each submission with letter of transmittal showing all information required for identification and checking. Submittals shall contain: I 1. Submittal number 2. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions 3. Project title and number 4. Owner Contract identification number if applicable 5. The names of: a. Contractor b. Supplier c. Manufacturer 6. Identification of the product,with specification section number ' 7. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 8. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials 9. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers 10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents: which a. If Contractor proposes to provide material or equipment of work deviates from the Contract Documents,indicate so under"deviations"on the transmittal form accompanying the submittal. ` ' b. Identify all requested deviations as specified and on copies of Specifications and Drawings required per paragraph 1.5.F.11 c. If deviations from specifications are indicated and,therefore requested by , Contractor,the submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed,written justification for each deviation d. Failure to include a copy of marked-up specification sections, along with , justification for any requested deviations to specification requirements, with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration by Engineer , 11. Confirmation of compliance with Contract Documents: a. Unless a Certificate of Compliance he following permitted documentseto demonstrate uipment where specified,provide g compliance with the Contract Documents: 1) Copy of relevant Drawings with all addendum updates that apply to equipment in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15 marked to show specific changes necessary for equipment proposed in Contractor's submittal: a) If no changes are required,Drawing(s) shall be marked"no changes required" b) Failure to include copies of relevant drawings with submittal,whether changes are required or not, shall be cause for rejection of entire submittal with no further I review by Engineer ., _ __ 01340-4 1416-00 01340 SBop Drawings Pxaduci Data And Samples —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01340 I SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES ' c) Relevant Drawings include as a minimum control diagrams,process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs), and Process(P) drawings ' 2) A copy of each pertinent specification section in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15 with all addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable specification sections, with their respective addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance. Otherwise mark to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements per paragraph 1.5.F.10 12. Identification of revisions on resubmissions 13. An 8 inch by 4 inch blank space for Contractor's and Engineer's stamps 14. Stamp cover sheet of each submittal as identified in letter of transmittal 15. Contractor's stamp: Initialed or signed, certifying review and approval of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with ' requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. Use stamp to include wording similar to the following: ' This submittal has been reviewed by[name of I contractor]and approved with respect to the means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto, [Name of contractor]also warrants that this submittal complies with contract documents and comprises no deviations thereto: Section No: Submittal No: DATE: BY: . H. Submittal Log: ' 1. Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of the Work showing current status of all submissions. 2. Show submittal number, section number, section title, submittal description dates I 3. and disposition of submittal. Make submittal log available to Engineer for Engineer's review upon request. I. Unless specified otherwise,make submissions in groups to facilitate efficient review and approval: 1. Include all associated items from individual specification sections to assure that all information is available for checking each item when it is received. ' 2. Submit a complete initial submittal including all components when an item consists of components from several sources. 3. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with provisions of the Contract. 1416-0001340 Shop Drawings Product Data And Samples 01340-5 Z E L -ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES 4. Engineer will not be held liable for delays due to poorly organized or incomplete submissions. I 5. Do not include items from more than one specification section for any one submittal number. 1.6 DISPOSITION OF SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA ' A. "Approved": Approved with No el ons Noted: . commn s noted No corrections or on submittal or in transmittal letter. 2. Issues or miscellaneous comments pertaining to other related items of the Work may be included in transmittal letter. I 3. Resubmission not required. B. "Approved as Noted": Approved with Corrections Noted: 1. Comply with corrections or comments as noted on submittal and in transmittal letter. 2. Resubmission not required. ' C. "Revise And Resubmit": Incorrect or Specific Information Still Required: 1. Submittal is either:incorrectly agitated; specific comments need.to be addressed and incorporated in resubmittal;and/or additional information may be required as noted in transmittal letter. 2. Submitted information may not include or address specific item required per the specification as identified in transmittal letter. 3. Specific information related to identified item may be required for final approval of submittal. 4. Resubmission of entire submittal may be required or resubmission of specific item may be required as identified in transmittal letter. D. "Rejected": Returned for Correction: 1. Contractor required to resubmit complete submittal package in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Submittal does not comply with provisions of Contract Documents as noted in transmittal letter. I 3. Resubmission required 1.7 DISPOSITION OF SAMPLES I A. "Approved": Approved with No Exceptions Noted: 1. One sample sent to Owner 2. One sample sent to Resident Project Representative 3. One sample retained in Engineer's file 4. Acknowledgment: Copy of transmittal letter sent to Contractor I 5. Resubmission not required B. "Approved Noted": Approved with Corrections Noted: / 1. One sample sent to Owner 01340-6 Z E L 1476-00 01340 Shop Drawings Product Data And Samples —ENGINEERS— ' SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 2. One sample sent to Resident Project Representative 3. One sample retained in Engineer's file 4. Acknowledgment: .Copy of transmittal letter sent to Contractor 5. Work performed or products furnished to comply with exceptions noted in ' acknowledgment 6. Resubmission not required C. "Rejected": Returned for Correction: 1. One sample retained in Engineer's file 2. Remaining samples sent to Contractor for resubmittal and compliance with the I Contract Documents as noted in transmittal letter. . Copy of transmittal letter sent to Owner 4. Resubmission required 1.8 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Engineer and resubmit until ' approved. B. Transmit each resubmission under new letter of transmittal. Use number of original 1 submittal followed directly by a capital letter corresponding to the number of times a submittal is resubmitted(i.e., 1, 1A, 1B,etc.). C. Shop Drawings and Product Data: ' 1. Revise initial Pr-swingsor data and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. p 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by ' Engineer. D. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal ' E. Reimbursement of Resubmission Review Costs: 1. Review of first submittal [and one resubmittal] will be performed by Engineer at no cost to the Contractor. ' 2. Costs for review of subsequent resubmissions will be directly paid by Contractor. 3. Engineer will document work-hours required for review and costs for Engineer review will be deducted from payments due Ceara-auras,'change`Order deducts. 4. Charges for review of resubmissions will include Engineer at maximum rate of $135 per hour and Submittal Clerk at maximum rate of$60 per hour. t1.9 ENGINEER'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accord with approved submission ' schedule provided that each submittal has been called for by the Contract Documents and is stamped by Contractor as indicated above: 1. In the event that Engineer will require more than 14 calendar days to perform an expedited submittal review as requested by Contractor, Engineer shall so notify ' Contractor or indicate so on the submission schedule. ' 1415-0007340 Shop Drawings Product Data And Samples 01340-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS— SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 2. No extensions of time are allowed due to Engineer's delay in reviewing submittals unless all the following criteria are met: review ofI a. Contractor has notified Engineer in writing that an expedited particular submittal in question is critical to the progress oftlie Work and Contractor has identified the requested submittal return date. b. Engineer has failed to return submittal within 21 days of receipt of the submittal or receipt of said notice,whichever is later c. Contactor demonstrates that delay in progress of the Work was directly • attributable to Engineer's failure to.return submittal.within 21 days 3. No extensions of time are allowed of data,incluproding multipleess of ork caused by rejection and subsequent resubmissionI resubmissions B Review drawings and data submitted only for general conformity with Contract Documents: , 1 Engineer's review of drawings and data returned marked"Approved"or Approved as Noted"does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities,and details of maaterial equipment device Or items shown. 2. Engineer'sreview does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors, omissions or,deviations nor responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Engineer's review Shall not extend to Means,methods,teehnrques,sequences, operations of construction,and safety precautions and programs.incidental thereto. No infonnation.regarding these items will l e.rev.iewed whether or not I included in submittals. C. Assume that no shop Drawing or related submittal comprises a deviation to the Contract I Documents unless Contractor advises Engineer otherwise in writing which is acknowledged by Engineer in writing: 1. Considerand review only those deviations from the Contract Documents clearly identified as such in submittal and tabulated in the Letter of Transmittal. 2. At the discretion of the Engineer,notify Contractor that review of specific deviations will be reviewed under provisions of Section 01630,Product Options and Substitutions. D. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission. I E. Transmit,unreviewed,tWContractor h have not been approved by Contractolr.d for by the Contract Documents or I F. Engineer will not review uncalled-for shop drawings or product data except by special arrangement. I I 1416-00 01340 Slop LhawMZEL tings product Data 01340-8 d Samples —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES G. Affix stamp and indicate approval for submittal or resubmission requirements with the following stamp: 0 APPROVED 0 APPROVED AS NOTED ' 0 REJECTED 0 REVISE AND RESUBMIT Approval Is only for geneial.tatikadlaance with the design ' concept of the Project and;Ott information'given in the Contract Documents,Contractor Is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated et the job site;information that pertains solely to the fabrication prat sa or to the means and methods of comtrfctiop; coutdinpttap of the work of all ' trades;and performing work in a safe and satisfactory manner. This approval does not modify Contractor's duty to comply with the Contract Documents, ZIMMERMAN,EVANS AND LEOPOLD,INC. ' Date by'. 1.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Unless indicated otherwise,provide all submittals required by individual sections of the ' Contract Documents to establish compliance with the specified requirements. B. Contractor may provide "Certificate of Compliance"in lieu of product data submittal as required above for the following sections: 1 1 1 1 1 '` 1416-0041340 Shop Drawings Product Data And Samples 01340-9 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES I Section Number Section Title Product Data or Item I 02050 Demolition 02936 Grassing 03600 Grout 07210 Building Insulation I 07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 09260 Gypsum Board Systems I 09510 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09843 Acoustical Panels I 15100 Valves,Cocks,and Hydrants 15140 Supports and Anchors I 16075 Electrical Identification PART 2 PRODUCTS I Not Used I PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used I END OF SECTION I I I I 1 I 1416A0 01340 Shop Drawings Product Deis And Samples 01340-10 ZELu —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01370 I SCHEDULE OF VALUES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values B. Subschedule of Unit Material Values ' C. Cash Flow Projection 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01025—Measurement and Payment ' B. Section 01200—Project Meetings 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit to Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, within 10 days after Effective Date of Agreement B. Upon request of Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness C. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing over payment of Contractor on items of the Work which will be performed early will not be accepted ' D. Revise and resubmit the Schedule of Values until acceptable to Engineer. No Applications for Payment shall be submitted until Schedule of Values is accepted E. The Schedule of Values,when accepted by Engineer, shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment 1.4 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch white paper; Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Engineer upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of project and location 2. Engineer and project number 3. Name and address of Contractor 4. Contract designation 5. Date of submission ' B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component p parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction 1416-0001370 schedule Of Values 01370-1 Z E 1. —ENGINEERS 1 1 SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES C. Follow the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items: 1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications D. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item ' E. List such items as bond and insurance premiums,temporary construction facilities, monthly field overhead, mobilization and demobilization separately , F For the Various Portions of the Work: 1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: a. The cost of the materials,delivered and unloaded,with taxes paid b. The total installed value, including Contractor's overhead and profit G. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum ' 1.5 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES A. Submit a Subschedule of Unit Costs and Quantities for: 1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste 1 D. The Unit Values for the Materials Shall be Broken Down Into: 1. Cost of the material,delivered and unloaded at the site,with taxes paid 2. Installation costs,including Contractor's overhead and profit E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item 1 in the Schedule of Values 1.6 CASH FLOW PROJECTION I A. Submit estimated cash flow projection for the project: 1. Estimate monthly pay applications 2. Coordinate with Schedule of Values and Construction Schedule B. Resubmit a revised cash flow projection with any pay application which brings the aggregate of all pay applications to date to value which differs from the projected value by more than+20 percent 1416.00 01370 Sebedu1e Of Values 01370-2 Z E —ENGINEERS— SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 2 PRODUCTS ' Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 i 7416-00 01370 Schedule Of Values 01370-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation B. Inspection and testing laboratory services and qualifications ' C. Laboratory duties and limitations of authority of testing laboratory ' D. Contractor's responsibilities E. Manufacturer's field services and reports ' F. Field testing G. Testing and services schedule ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 01010—Summary of Work B. Section 01090—Reference Standards C. Section 01340—Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 'h D. Section 01600—Material and Equipment E. Section 01650—Starting of Systems ' F. Section 01730—Operation and Maintenance Data 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents C. Where specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 1416-00 01400 Quaid),Control 01400-1 ZE . ' —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 01400, 1 QUALITY CONTROL B. Provide copies of written reports for materials, equipment or systems as scheduled at the end of this section. Reference each report by respective section number I C. Laboratory qualifications—Provide statement of qualifications from testing firm and testing firm personnel for review and acceptance by Engineer D. Field personnel qualifications—Provide statement of qualifications for review and acceptance by Engineer for the following: 1. ACI certification 2. Independent special inspector and testing as specified E. Laboratory test reports—Provide written reports of each test and inspection to Engineer. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and number 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions 7. Date of test 8. Identification of product and specification section 9. Location of sample or test in the Project 10. Type of inspection or test 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents I 12. Interpretation of test results when requested by Engine&r F. Shop test reports: Provide reports detailing results of tests and certification from manufacturer to verify compliance with specifications 111 G. Field test reports: Provide reports detailing results of the tests. Indicate compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Identify corrective action for materials and equipment which fails to pass field tests H. Manufacturer's field services: I 1. Provide qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to acceptance of Engineer/Owner 2. Provide reports to Engineer through Contractor certifying that: I a. Equipment is properly installed and lubricated b. Equipment is in accurate alignment c. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping I and anchor bolts d. Equipment has operated satisfactorily under full load conditions 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION I A. Monitor quality control over suppliers,manufacturers,products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality I 1416-00 01400 Quality Control 01400-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions, including each step in sequence ' C. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Engineer before proceeding ' D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher;standards or more precise workmanship ' E. Secure Products inlace with positive p ve anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration,physical distortion or disfigurement F. Inspections and testing required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract IG. Certification of products: Respective sections of specifications ' H. Testing, adjusting and balancing of equipment: Respective sections of specifications I. Laboratory tests required and standards for testing: Respective sections of specifications ' 1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all specified services and testing related to the design of mixes,products and equipment,to Engineer's review of proposed materials and equipment before,during and after incorporation in the Work and to retest materials and equipment which fail original tests: 1. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract ' B. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Engineer. 1 1.7 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY A. Perform all tests to determine compliance with Contract Documents by an independent 1 commercial testing firm acceptable to Engineer B. Testing firm's laboratory: Staffed with experienced technicians,properly equipped and 1 fully qualified to perform tests in accordance with specified standards C. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for 1 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction" as applicable D. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located E. Testing equipment: 1 1416-40 Oi4OO quality convoy 01400-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 a SECTION 01400 I QUALITY CONTROL L Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards I b. Accepted values of natural physical constants 1.8 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor;provide qualified personnel after due notice B. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of I construction: 1. Comply with specified standards 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents I C. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products ' 1.9 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release,revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work 3. Owner employed laboratory shall not perform any duties of the Contractor 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with personnel laboratoryersonnel and provide access to Work , B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory ' D. Furnish copies of product test reports as required ilities: , E. Furnish incidental labor and fac 1. To provide access to Work to be tested I 2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested 3. To facilitate inspections and tests 4. For storage and curing of test samples I 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Comply with provisions under Section 01650, Starting of Systems I B. Contractor shall coordinate and pay for the services of manufacturers'representatives to perform the specified services 1416-00 01400 Quality Control 01400-4 ZEL ' _ENGINEERS_ I SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL C. When specified in individual specification Sections,require material or Product suppliers ' or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, startup of equipment, testing, adjusting and balancing of equipment and, as applicable,to initiate instructions when necessary D. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or ' installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions E. Qualification of Manufacturer's Representative:Authorized representative of the manufacturer; experienced in the application and installation of the subject equipment F. Insect check and equipment as re required and approve installation Inspect, adjustq pp ' G. Be present when equipment is placed in operation H. Revisit the site as often as required to correct all problems and until equipment ' installation and operation are acceptable to Engineer I. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data and respective sections of these specifications 1.12 FIELD TESTING ' A. Contractor shall payall costs associated with field testingof materials and equipment as required in respective sections of the specifications ' B. Provide all required materials, labor, equipment,water, and power required for testing C. Perform all tests in presence of Engineer or Owner and provide one copy of field test results to Engineer same day of tests D. Repair with no additional compensation all materials and equipment which fail during testing 1.13 TESTING AND SERVICES SCHEDULE A. Testing laboratory services shall be provided for,but shall not be limited to, the following: ' Specification Type of Material, Equipment Section or System. 02200 Excavation,Filling and Backfilling 02500 Asphalt Pavement 03000 Concrete 04200 Masonry 111 1416.0001400 Quality Control 01400-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 1.14 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for,but shall not be limited to,the following: Specification Type of Material,Equipment ' .Section or Systen.... 11248 PAC Feed System 13400 Instrumentation and Controls 13521 Filter Underdrains 13700 Access Control and Surveillance System 16483 Variable Frequency Drive ' 1.15 FIELD TESTING provided Field testing shall be for,but shall not be limited to,the following: I Specification Type of Material,Equipment Section or System._ Section 02200 Excavation,Filling and Backfilling Section 03000 Concrete Section 04200 Masonry PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION . I Not Used END OF SECTION 1 I 1 1 1416-00 01400 Quality Control01400-6Z E L _ENGINEER._ SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity,lighting,heating,ventilating,telephone service,water, and sanitary facilities B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing and protection of the Work C. Construction Facilities: Access roads,parking,progress cleaning, storage, and temporary ' buildings 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish,install and maintain all temporary utilities to assure continuous service required for the Work,except as allowed herein and remove on completion of Work. Modify and ' extend systems as work progress requires B. Furnish, install and maintain all construction aids required for the Work, except as • allowed herein, and remove on completion of the Work 111 C. Furnish, install and maintain fences and barriers as required red for protection of the public, property and the Work I D. Contractor may use existing roadways for access and parking to the extent practical. Provide any additional access and parking required for Contractor's personnel or ' operations E. Provide a field office for the use of the Contractor's Superintendent, Owner's Representatives, and Engineer F. Provide storage sheds as required by the Contractor ' G. Products may be new or used,but must be serviceable, adequate for the intended purpose, and must not violate the requirements of any applicable codes or standards H. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities I. Provide a project identification sign 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: ' 1. Comply with applicable Federal and State rules and regulations,local codes and ordinances 2. Comply with utility company requirements 1' 1416-0001500 Cons6vdion Facilities And Temporary Controls 01500-1 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 Mk SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor shall arrange for and pay all costs associated with power service to the field ' office and to Contractor's storage sheds and pay all costs for energy used B. Construction;:equipment larger than 15 amps, 1 0 V,single phase,arrange for and pay all costs associated with temporary power service either from the local utility or a portable engine-generator C. Provide power outlets for construction operations,with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at the site. Provide flexible powercords as required D. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location ' E. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized during construction F. Provide adequate distribution equipment,wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting: 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting G. Pay all costs for installation and removal of temporary electrical service ' 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations , B. Provide and maintain lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes as required ' C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required I D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs TEMPORARY HEATING 0 1.6 TEMPO A. Provide and pay for all temporary heat as required to maintaiin adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meetspecified minimum conditions of , the installation of materials and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity B. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls C. Pay all costs of installation,maintenance,operation and removal and for fuel consumed ' D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress,unless indicated otherwise in specifications i t1416-90 01500 ConstructionFttcilities And Temporary Controls 01500-2 —ENGIN EE RS— 1 I SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS E. Provide temporary heating for all subcontractors as required I1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATING A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes,vapors, or gases B. Provide and pay for temporary ventilation equipment as required to maintain adequate Ienvironmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work,to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temp or humidity IC. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials,to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or I gases D. Portable ventilators shall be standard approved units complete with controls IE. Pay all costs of installation,maintenance, operation and removal and for power consumed 1.8 TELEPHONE'SERVICE I A. Provide,maintain andpaY for all telephone service to field offices at time of project mobilization IB. Provide two direct line instruments in Field Office for telephone service: 1. To field office, one direct line C. Pay all costs for removal of telephones D. Toll charges shall be paid by the party placing the call I 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE IA. Provide all water required for construction purposes B. Provide all drinking water required by construction personnel. Pay all costs I1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities: 1. As required by laws and regulations 2. Not less than 1 facility B. Service, clean,and maintain facilities and enclosures 1, ' 1416-00 07500 Constraclion Facilities And Temporary Controls 015003 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.11 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate the ' execution of the Work: Scaffolds staging, ladders,stairs,ramps,runways,platforms, railways,hoists, cranes,chutes, and other such facilities and equipment y , B. Contractor may, at his own risk,use existing hoists and cranes at the site and hoists and cranes installed hereunder: 1. Coordinate with Engineer and Owner 2. Do not exceed rated capacity of hoists and cranes 3. Replace or repair any damaged units 4. Owner makes no representation as to the suitability, serviceability, or safety of new or existing hoists and cranes and assumes no responsibility for their safe use by construction personnel C. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction,by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate legitimate requirements by Owner D. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment, and services at completion of the ' Project E. Clean,repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities: ' 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids 2. Grade the areas for the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes and clean the area ' 1.12 BARRIERS A. Provide biers to prevent.unauthorized entry:Io'e nstructi n areas and to protect ' existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials,site and structures from damage C. Install facilities of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes D. Relocate barriers as required by progress of construction E. Completely remove barriers,including foundations,when construction has progressed to the point that they are no longer needed ' F. Clean and repair damage caused by installation, fill and grade the areas of the site to required elevations and slopes and clean the area 1.13 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence ' 1416.00 01500 Construction Facilities And TemporaryControls 01500-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— ' 1 I SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks IC. Provide additional fencing to protect stored materials&products or to insure public safety ID. Provide Owner two (2)keys to lock(s) 1.14 WATER CONTROL I A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide,operate, and maintain pumping equipment IB. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion I1.15 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES ' A. Provide temporary insulated weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products,to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual I specification Sections,and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks B. Provide temporary roofing as required to protect work and equipment I 1.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK I A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections I B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs, sills,and soffits of openings IC. D. Protect finished driving surfaces, floors,and other surfaces from traffic,dirt,wear, damage,or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials IE. Prohibit storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If activity is necessary,obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer IF. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas 1.17 SECURITY I A. Provide securityand facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry,vandalism, or theft I B. Coordinate with Owner's security program ' 3416-00 01500 Construction Facilities And Temporary Control 01500-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.18 ACCESS ROADS A. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to service ' construction area B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded ' traffic flow C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions ' D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering street or clean streets as required by owner E. Existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic 1.19 PARKING ' A. Temporary dirt surface parking areas adjacent to the site can accommodate construction personnel B. When site space is not adequate,provide additional off-site parking C. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement or streets 1 1.20 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials,debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition B. Remove debris and rubbish from remote spaces prior to enclosing the space C. Remove waste materials,debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site in accordance with local and state regulations D. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing 1.21 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Construction: 1. Structurally sound,weathertight,with floors raised above ground 2. Temperature transmission resistance: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements 3. At Contractor's option,portable or mobile buildings modified for office use may be used 4. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide surface drainage 5. Construct temporary field offices and storage sheds on proper foundations, provide connections for utility services: a. Secure portable or mobile buildings when used b. Provide steps and landingsiat entrance door 1416-00 01300 Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls 015006 Z E --ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 01500 I CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 6. Mount thermometer at convenient outside location,not in direct sunlight I 7. Provide periodic maintenance and cleaning for temporary structures,furnishings, equipment and services 8. Remove temporary field offices, contents, and service at a time they are no longer I needed 9. Remove storage sheds when they are no longer needed • 10. Remove foundations and debris;grade the site to required elevations and clean the I areas B. Contractor's Office and Facilities: II. Size: As required for general use and to provide space for project progress meetings 2. Services: I a. Lighting: 50 foot candles at desk top height b. Exterior lighting at entrance door c. Telephone: One direct line instrument Automatic heating and mechanical cooling equipment to maintain comfort Id. conditions e. High-low outdoor type thermometer,mount as directed by Engineer 3. Furnishings in meeting area: I a. Conference table and chairs for at least 8 persons b. Racks and files for project record documents in, or adjacent to,the meeting area I c. Meeting area: 200 square feet minimum,minimum dimension 8 feet 4. Other furnishings: Contractor's option I C. Storage Shed: 1. To requirements of the various trades,as required 2. Dimensions: Adequate for storage and handling of products I 3. Ventilation: Comply with specified and code requirements for the products stored 4. Heating: Adequate to maintain temperatures specified in the respective sections for the products stored ID. Existing facilities at the site shall not be used for field offices or storage E. New permanent facilities shall not be used for field offices or for storage I1.22 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS I A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials,prior to Final Application for Payment IB. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work ID. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition 1416-00 01500 Constn ction Facilities And Temporary Controls 01500-7 ZEL. I —ENGINEERS- 1 M. I SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used I PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 I . I I 1 I I 1 I O I-0)fi-OOO15000onvwction Facilities And Temporary Coahos 015000 ZEL I—ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC REGULATION IPART 1. GENERAL . 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. General Requirements B. Regulatory Requirements IC. Construction Parking Control ID. Flagmen E. Flares and Lights IF. Haul Routes G. Roadway Usage Between Operations IH. Traffic Signs and Signals I. Removal 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise authorized,keep at least one lane of traffic open at all times Is B. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian access to ALL businesses and institutions during the I time during the time they are open and to all residential and other occupied buildings and facilities at all times. IC. When work is not in progress,keep all traffic lanes open D. All traffic lanes shall be open during hours of darkness,weekends, and holidays IE. Plan and pursue operations so as to minimize the time direct entrances are blocked. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS IA. Conformance: "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,"U.S. Department of Transportation,or applicable statutory requirements of authority having jurisdiction. IB. Operations on or about traffic areas and provisions for regulating traffic will be subject to the regulation of governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the affected areas. IC. Contractor shall make application to the Augusta Engineering Department,Engineering Division,452 Walker Street, Suite 110, Augusta, GA 30901 for"Application and Permit for Right of Way Encroachment"for work involving interruption of traffic or connection I I 1416-0001570 T ffio Regulation 01570-1 Z E —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC REGULATION to existing roadways. Work in or adjacent to roadway cannot commence until permit is approved. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access ' by emergency vehicles, and Owner's operations B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non designated areas ' 1.5 FLAGMEN A. Provide trained and equipped flagmen to regulate traffic when construction operations or ' traffic encroach on public traffic lanes 1.6 FLARES AND LIGHTS A. Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic 1.7 HAUL ROUTES A. Consult with authority having jurisdiction in establishing public thoroughfares to be used ' for haul routes and site access B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic,to minimize interference with public traffic 1.8 ROADWAY USAGE BETWEEN OPERATIONS A. At all times when work is not actually in progress,make open,passable,and maintain to 1 traffic such portions of the Project and temporary roadways or portions thereof as maybe agreed upon between Contractor and Owner and all other authorities or parties having jurisdiction over properties involved 1.9 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A. At approaches to site and on site,install at crossroads, detours,parking areas,and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic B. Install and operate traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in ' areas under Contractor's control,and areas affected by Contractor's operations C. Relocate as Work progresses,to maintain effective traffic control 141643 01570 Traffic Regulation 01570-2 Z E —ENGINEERS— I 1 1 SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC REGULATION D. Protect all roadways by effective barricades on which are placed warning signs ' E. Provide barricades and warning signs for open trenches, other excavations and obstructions ' F. Illuminate by means of warning lights all barricades and obstructions form sunset to sunrise 1.10 REMOVAL A. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required B. Repair damage caused by installation C. Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 i 1 1 1 1416-00 01570 Traffic Regulation 01570-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES tA. General requirements for materials and equipment B. Definitions ' C. Quality assurance and qualifications ' D. Delivery,storage and handling E. Product Qualifications ' F. Product Certification G. Warranty ' H. Material and fabrication requirements I. Preparation,installation and field quality control requirements 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The section applies to all equipment provided under this contract B. The requirements of detailed specifications take precedence over this section in the event r of an apparent conflict C. Provide all new materials and equipment, except as specified or required by testing ' D. Except as specifically indicated or specified,materials and equipment removed from the existing structure shall not be used in the completed Work ' E. Contractor to coordinate equipment with other parts of the Work,including verification or compatibility of structures,piping, wiring and equipment components ' F. Contractor is responsible for all alterations in the Work to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or specifications ' G. Do not use anymaterial or equipment for an purpose other than that for which is Y designed or specified H. Provide materials, equipment and/or systems suitable for its intended purpose and/or function as confirmed and supported by the supplier and/or manufacturer where only routine maintenance and care is required for its operation. Do not use material, I F equipment or a system that will become damaged, require excessive maintenance, fail to 1416-00 01600 Materials And Equipment 01600-1 Z Ei I ' —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I perform:and not function as required. Materials, equipment end systems provided are expected to function and operate.when exposed to the wide.ran.ge of environmental I conditions,encountered for this type of facility. Damaged,unsuitableor defective Y materials, equipment and/or systems identified by the Engineer shall be replace at no cost to the Owner. I. Manufactured articles,materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, herein, erected,used,cleaned and conditioned as directed by I specified to the contrary 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Special tools,instrents,devices,or accessories: Any tools,instruments,devices or accessories required for repair,adjustment or maintenance of equipmentwhich are designed especially for the equipment in questin or which are not normally kept in stock I by local tool suppliers 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS . A. Installers Qualifications: Equipment and material shall be installed and placed in service by or under the guidance ofqualified personnel having the.knowledge and experience necessary for proper results. Where-Contractor's or subcontractor's employees are not properly qualified,:such personnel shall cfield representative oft e equipment supplier 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with;work'and conditions,at the site I B. Deliver products in undamaged condition,in manufacturer's original container or packaging,with identifying labels intact and legible,all in accordance with • manufacturer's instructions C. Immediately on delivery,inspect shipments toassure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and accepted submittals and:that products are properly protected, I undamaged and correct quantities D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or I damage to products or packaging E. Box,crate,or otherwise completely enclose and protect all equipment I F. Protect painted surfaces against impact,abrasion, discoloration or other damage G. Include complete packing lists and d bills of material with each shipment I H. Deliver anchor bolts together with templates sufficiently early to permit setting when structural concrete is placed I 01600-2 Z E L 141b-0001600 Materiels And&N1Pmerit —ENGINEERS— ' • SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ' I. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling and protect against damage during transit handling or storage J. Protect equipment from,exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry and dust free ' at all times K. Grease or oil all bearings and similar items L. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures M. For exterior storage of fabricated products,place on sloped supports, above ground on blocking or skids to prevent soiling,staining or other damage N. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection ' O. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation • P. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter Q. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage R. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions ' S. Store immediately upon delivery T. Store electrical equipment and equipment with bearings in weathertight structures ' maintained above 60°F U. Protect electrical equipment, controls, and insulation against moisture,water, and dust i damage V. Connect and operate continuously all space heaters furnished in electrical equipment W. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed ' X. Provide permanent, labeled,packings for spare parts I... 1416.0001600 Materiels And Equipment 01600-3 ZEL L ' —ENGINEERS— SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.6 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION A. All materials or products which come into contact with drinking water must be certified , . as meeting the specifications of the American National Institute/National Sanitation Foundation Standard 61,Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects. Certifications shall be provided with product submittals. B. All chemicals and products added to a public water supply as part of the treatment process shall be certified as meeting the specifications of the American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation Standard 60,Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals—Health Effects. The certifying party shall be accredited by the American National Standards Institute. ' 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty all materials and equipment against faulty or inadequate design,improper assembly or erection,defective workmanship or materials,leakage,breakage or other failure I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suitable for the service conditions B. Structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel in equipment shall conform to AISC standards, except as otherwise specified 2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS ' ' A. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA,ANSI IEEE ABMA,and NEC standards for the duty imposed by the driven equipment B. If driven equipment is subject to frequent starting duty,provide motors suitable for that duty , C. Nameplate horsepower based on continuous duty at 40 degrees C ambient,unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for intermittent duty as a standard industry practice. Temperature rise about 40 degrees C ambient on continuous operation not to exceed the NEMA limit for 1.0 service factor and Class B insulation or Class A insulation if used D. Designed for satisfactory operation at any voltage within plus or minus 10 percent of rated voltage E. Designed for full voltage starting F. Bearing life based on the actual operating load conditions imposed by driven equipment , 1416-09 ZEL 01600 Materials And Equipment 01600-4 U ENGINEERS 1 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT G. Sized for the altitude at which the equipment is installed IH. Nameplate horsepower sized far continuous operation is 40,degr e.0 ambient at least S percent more than the max continuous load imposed by the driven equipment,whether Iservice factor is 1.0 or higher I. If driven equipment specification calls for encapsulated winding,provide a sealed I insulation system designed for a more severe environment than usual varnish treatments can withstand, General Electric "Polyseal",Allis-Chalmers "Poxeal",U. S. Motors "Ever- seal"or equal. Motors with encapsulated windings may be single voltage rated IJ. Clamp-type grounding terminal inside the motor conduit box K. Oversized motor conduit boxes,with 3/4 inch NPT minimum unless indicated otherwise IIL. Totally enclosed outdoors IM. Dripproof or totally enclosed indoors, suppliers option except where specified otherwise 2.3 DRIVE UNITS IA. Input horsepower rating not less than nameplate horsepower of the driving motor B. Designed for 24 hr continuous duty I C. Gearmotors: Rated AGMA Class II,AGMA nameplate I D. Gear reducers—Totally enclosed, oil lubricated,antifriction bearings throughout: 1. Rating: a. Worm gear reducers: 1.20 service factor I b. Shaft mounted gear reducers: AGMA Class II c. All others: 1.50 service factor 2. AGMA nameplate IE. Mechanical variable speed drives-1.75 service factor at maximum speed: 1. If belt driven,provided with a spare belt I2. Bracket type mounting not acceptable F. V-belt drives: 1.60 service factor, sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment I2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Safety guards: I 1. 16 USS ga or heavier galvanized or aluminum-coated steel or 1/2 inch mesh expanded metal 2. Miscellaneous,accessories and supports, including bolts: Galvanized steel 3. Provide for all belt or chain drives,fan blades,couplings or other movingor !, rotatory parts I 1416.00 01600 Mata;a1s and Equ;,unen: 01600-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 4. Cover rotating parts on all sides 5. Designed for easy installation and removal 6. Provided with all necessary supports and accessories 7. If outdoors, designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water B. Equipment anchor bolts: ' 1. Furnished with equipment 2. Provided with at least 2 nuts per bolt 3. Minimum diameter: 3/4 inch 4. Long enough to permit 14/2 inch of grout below baseplate,if equipment is baseplate mounted, and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete t C. Baseplates: 1. Cast iron or welded steel 2. Provide for pumps, compressors and similar equipment 3. Neat design 4. Pads for anchoring I 5. Adequate grout holes 6. Provide pump bases with a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection 111D. Special tools and accessories: 1. Provide all special tools,instruments and accessories required for proper maintenance 2. Provide all special lifting and handling devices required 2.5 FABRICATION A. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the best modem manufacturing and shop practices ,• B. Manufacture parts to standard sizes and gages C. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical by the same manufacturer and ' II D. Design structural members for shock and vibratory loads: I 1. Use 1/4 inch minimum thickness for all steel which will be submerged,wholly or partially,during normal operation E. Lubrication system: 1. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation 2. Require no attention during equipment startup and shutdown 3. No lubricant wasting I 4. Convenient and accessible: a. Oil drains and fill plugs easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform 1416-00 01600 Materials And Equipm01600-6ent Z E L —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01600 _` MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I b. Drains located to allow convenient collection of oil during oil changes without removing the equipment from its normal installed position 5. Provide constant level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication systems I2.6 CHEMICALS A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,whether I herbicide,pesticide,disinfectant,polymer,reactant or of other classification,must be registered for the purpose specified with USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with instructions I2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS ' A. Observation of performance tests: 1. Where specifications require the presence of Engineer for testing of equipment, Owner is to pay for all costs of Engineer's first visit 2. If subsequent visits by Engineer are required because of incomplete tests, Iretesting or subsequent tests,Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all costs PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. haspeet equi n1erxt for signs of pitting,tint decay,or'other deleteric us effects of storage. Do not install any equipment showing such effects. Replace damaged equipment with identical new equipment. I3.2 PREPARATION Install equipment anchor bolts during placement of structural concrete IA. 33 INSTALLATION IA. Install all equipment on bases 4 inch minimum height , B. Anchor baseplates to the concrete base and fill space beneath with grout IC. Provide lubricantslis lubricantsrecommended by the equiprnentmanufacturer in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs.and to replace all consumption during testing, startup and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner ID., For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work: 1. Use special care in removal,handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper I function in the completed Work 2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products,which require off- site storage,restoration, or renovation. Pay all costs for such Work 1 I 1416-0001600 Materials And Equipment 01600-7 ZEL. —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT E. Handle,install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accord with manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with specified requiretments 1. Obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation in the manner detailed in the submittal section 2. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion 3. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents 4. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions 5. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions F. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide a qualified manufacturer's field representative when specified in Section 01650 or in the detailed specifications to provide the services specified B. Where installation assistance is specified,manufacturer's representative is to observe, guide,instruct and direct Contractor's erection or installation procedure C. Where an installation check is specified,manufacturer's representative is to verify ro equipment is erly installed as detailed in the Section 01650 ' properly D. Field representatives are to revisit the site as often as necessary to attain installation satisfactory to Engineer ' E. Acceptance of Work-in connection With the installation of equipment furnished by others is subject to acceptance by the field representative. Such acceptance by the field ' representative or Engineer does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for planning, supervising,and executing the installation of Work or of responsibility for defective Work 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Perform under provisions of Section 01650, Starting of System ' B. Perform all required adjustment tests, operation checks, and other startup activities required 1 I_]416-0001600 MaterialsAndEquipment 01600-8 - ZE ' —ENGIN EERS— 1 I SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3.6 CLEANING A. Perform under provisions of Section 01710, Cleaning. ' B. Repaint all painted surfaces which are damaged prior to equipment acceptance to Engineer's satisfaction END OF SECTION 1 1 i 1 1 1 1416-00 01600 Mottxihk And Equipment 01600-9 Z E L t —ENGINEERS- 1 I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 SECTION 01601 ' PIPING SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION.INCLUDES A. Piping designations,materials, locations, and test conditions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02720—Storm Drainage Systems B. Section 15060—Pipe and Pipe Fittings ' C. Section 15062—Ductile Iron Pipe D. Section 15067—Stainless Steel Pipe E. Division 15 plumbing and HVAC specifications ' PART 2 PRODUCTS • Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULES A. Pipeline Schedules 1 I i 1 1 lass-OO 01601 Piping Schedule 01601-1 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS- 1 I Hmoll r, z N. i o 4 el � w ,.,1 0 i y a N O t A4 1 U'' N o 0 0 0 0 W 0I -g I A a ! P:1 18 PI g 4 04 0 04 w0 w w w w 1=1:1 w c [`` 0 N .N O 0 Py 111 C.W' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Tr E-41-1 f1 H 4-4c cn o o h A A A A 1 Oma: C 0 0 O o i -0 o cn cn u 3 ..., .1 :5-' i:9 6 ai t t` .6 . W cd AU w ce w �✓ w :5 ! 3 1 A Q B- U A a I 1 1 I ` s0 awW I Ovo a � + � ` za N i I V ,4 d g oEn 1 a x x x x , z x x IO N N' n O U 1 -4 ,--E .N, .Nr to t/ N O O O O O O ' t I I t I1i3 , ,.8t is 0 W S P S W aQ O O O p O o t0 N M F.• U o o00 A A A Q 40 P.4 ill UA U U U U x o Iii Ui ' a :)2 Q � a3 a � x4 w n v, _ I ' ` Ai a ; - I I I SECTION 01601 1 PIPING SCHEDULE B. Abbreviations: Abbreviations used in the Pipeline Schedule are defined as follows: I 1. Test type: a. H—Hydraulic(water)pressure testing procedures b. P—Pneumatic(air)pressure testing procedures 2. Piping: a. CML—Cement Mortar Lined b. DIP—Ductile Iron Pipe ' c. STL—Steel pipe d. RCP—Reinforced Concrete Pipe END OF SECTION ' 1 1 • 1 I I1 I I I 1416-00 01601 Piping Schedule 01601-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Product options available to Contractor I B. Procedures for securing acceptance of proposed Substitutions for a product which is specified to.Contract Documents by reference to one or more of the following: 1. Name of manufacturer 2. Name of supplier I3. , Trade name 4. Catalog model number I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01340- Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples I1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. The Contract is based on standards of quality established in Contract Documents: 1. In agreeing to terms and conditions of Contract,Contractor has accepted A; responsibility to verify that specified products will be available and to place orders for all required materials;.in such a timely manner as is needed to meet I construction schedule 2. Neither Owner nor Engineer has agreed to substitution of materials or products called for in Contract Documents, except as they may specifically be stated Iotherwise in writing 1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS IA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only—Any Product meeting those standards or description: I1. Products specified by reference to standard specifications such as ASTM and similar standards 2. Products specified by manufacturer's name and catalog model number B. Products Specified.by Naming One or More Manufacturers—Products of manufacturers named and-meeting_speci fication nooptions or substitutions owed: . Where materials and/or products are specified by naming one single manufacturer Ii and/or model number,without stating that Substitutions will be considered,only the material and/or products named are approved for incoiporation into the Work I C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers With a Provision for Substitutions—Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with this section: Where materials and/or products are specified by name and/or model number, I1. followed by words"Or accepted substitution": I 1416-00 01630 Product Options And Substitutions 01630-1 ZEI- -ENGINEERS- 1 k. . I SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS a. The material and/or product specified by name establishes required standard of quality I b. Materials and/or product proposed by Contractor to be used in lieu of materials and/or products so specified by name shall in all ways equal or exceed the qualities of named materials and/or products c. [Proposed substitutions shall be presented at the pre-construction meeting] D. Where phrase"or accepted substitution"occurs in contract documents, do not assume that materials, equipment or products will be accepted as substitution unless item has I been specifically so reviewed for this Work by Engineer 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within 30 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement I B. Written requests for substitution considered: 1. After award of Contract 2. Only when submitted through Contractor C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop Drawing or product data submissions,without separate written request ' D. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor: 111 1. Should the Contractor demonstrate to satisfaction of Engineer that specified Material or product was ordered,in a timely manner and will not be available in time for incorporation i ti this Work,Contractor shall submit to Engineer such I data on proposed substitute materials and/or product as are needed to help Engineer determine suitability of proposed Substitution q E. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed \ I Substitution with Contract Documents F, A request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product and that it Will perfbrrn functionfor whidh:it is intended 2. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified Product be 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may required for Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner 4. Will provide a complete operating installation including any and all changes and ' I additions in structure,piping,building,.mechanical and electrical work, controls and accessories necessary to accommodate:pr'+ osed Substitution 5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently I become apparent 6. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with review by Engineer and re-approval by authorities I 1416-00 01630 Product Options And Substitutions 01630-2 ZEL I —ENGINEERS— SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION I1.6 A. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration in a manner similar to provisions fir submission requirements under Section 01340: 1. Substitutions\+ill be considered as "deviations' to the Contract Documents 2. Submit with transmittal letter describing the deviation and justifications for • accepting Substitution I 3. Submit shop drawings,product data, and certified test results attesting to proposed substitution equivalence 4. Burden of proof is on the proposer IB. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution Transmittal Contents: IC. 1. Identification of proposed Substitution: a. Manufacturer's name b. Telephone number and representative contact name I c. Specification section or drawing reference of originally specified product including discrete name or tag number 2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed I Substitution with Contract Documents 3. Itemized comparison of original product and proposed Substitution addressing , characteristics including but not necessarily limited to: I a. Size b. Composition c. Weight Id. e. Electrical or mechanical requirements Installation and maintenance requirements 4. Product experience: I a. Location of previous projects utilizing product in similar situation per Contract Documents b. Name and telephone number of persons knowledgeable of proposed Ic. product associated with referenced projects Available field dataand test reports associated with proposed product 5. Identify any changes to construction schedule or cost required to implement I proposed substitution 6. Samples: a. Provide in similar manner under provisions of Section 01340 as requested I b. by Engineer Provide full size sample if requested by Engineer c. Samples will be retained by Engineer until substantial completion Engineer is not responsible for loss or damage to samples Id. 1.7 ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION A. Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to acceptor reject request for I Substitution ' 1576.0001630 Product Options And Substitutions 01630-3 Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION.0.1630 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed Substitution to comply with all aspects of specified product to seem=design.intent C. If request for Substitution results in change of Contract Amount or Contract Time, adjustments will be applied under provisions in General Conditions D. Substitutions will be rejected if: 1. Submission is not through Contractor with Contractor stamp of approval 2. Requests for Substitution are not made in accordance submission procedures outlined herein 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of the original design as determined by Engineer 4. Substitution is not equal to original product specified or will not adequately perform intended function as determined by Engineer 1.8 REIMBURSEMENT OF SUBSTITUTION REVIEW COSTS ' A. In the event Substitutions are proposed to Engineer after award of Contract,Engineer will record all time used by Engineer and Engineer's consultants in evaluating each proposed Substitution B. Contractor shall reimburse Owner far all charges of Engineer and,Engineees consultants , for time spent in evaluating proposed Substitution,whether or not the Engineer approves a proposed Substitution: 1. Costs for Substitution review will be deducted from payments due Contractor as change order deducts 2. Charges for review of proposed Substitution will include Engineer at maximum rate of$175 per hour plus costs of Engineer's consultants , 1.9 DELAYS in construction arising by e of the nonava lability of a: peci ed material ' A. Delay. and/or product will not be considered by the-Engineer as justifying an extension of the agreed tie of ubstantial andfor Final Completion PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used ' PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 1416-00 01630 Product Options And Substitutions 01630-4 ZEL -ENGINEERS- ' I I SECTION 01631 rREQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION PROJECT: rOWNER: TO: AUGUSTA PROCURMENT DEPARMENT ISPECIFIED ITEM: ISection Page Paragraph/Article Description The Contractor hereby requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: I Attached data includes product description,specifications,drawings,photographs,performance,and test data adequate for evaluation of the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require I for its proper installation. The Contractor certifies that the following paragraphs,unless modified by attachments,are correct: I l. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The Contractor will pay for changes to the building design,including engineering design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades,the construction schedule,or specified warranty r requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The Contractor further states that the function,appearance,and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or Isuperior to the specified item Submitted by: I Signature: For use by the Engineer Finn r Accepted E Accepted as noted IAddress r Rejected r Received too late By Date Date ITelephone Remarks I Attachments y I 1416-00 01631 Form Request For Substitution 01631-1 Z E I —ENGINEERS- r I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 SECTION 01640 INSTALLATION OF OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Work includes providing all labor,materials, tools, equipment, accessories, and services necessary for receiving, unloading, storing,installing equipment, and testing items as specified in this Section. The Owner has executed a contract with the equipment ' manufacturer and has assigned the equipment to the Contractor. The equipment shall be installed by the Contractor as provided in this Section. B. Equipment Manufacturer's Installation Drawings: Installation drawings and instructions for the equipment to be installed under this Section of the Work are available for review in the office of Engineer and in the office of the local representatives for the ' manufacturer. The name and address for the local representative is listed below: 1. Equipment Item: Air Scour Blowers a. Vendor: Universal Blower PAC, Inc. 440 Park 32 West Drive Noblesville, IN 46062 e-mail: alsversalbloetpae. rn. b. Number of Units: 2 c. Blower Model Equalizer 602T d. Motor: 100 HP, 1800 rpm, TEFL 3160/2301460,405T e. Approximate Package Weight:4000 LB f. Location: Stored at Vendor Warehouse 2. Equipment Item: Underdrain,Washwater Troughs,Trough Wall Thimbles and Underdrain lateral ' a. Vendor: Leopold Water and Wastewater Products c/o Principal Environmental 1770 The Exchange, Suite 210 ' Atlanta, GA 30339 e-mail: 'or . $ ' ':$641 " ds.ri ,.:corn b. Number of Units: Underdrains,washwater troughs and underdrain lateral I for 2 cell filter c. Underdrain Type: Leopold Universal Type SL d. Location: Currently stored at plant site. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 11000—Equipment Erection 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Tests: Performance testing, if required,shall be accomplished by the equipment manufacturer unless specifically specified hereinafter under individual items. 1416-00 01640 Installation Of t)i* IRtu shed Equipment 01640-1 Z E L —ENOINEERB— t 1 SECTION 01640 INSTALLATION OF OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Equipment,products and materials shall be shipped,handled, stored, and installed in 1 ways which will prevent damage to the items. Damaged items will not be permitted as part of the work except in cases of minor damage that have been satisfactorily repaired and are acceptable to the Resident Project Representative. B. Packaging and Marking: All equipment shall be protected against damage from moisture, dust,handling,or other cause during transport from manufacturer's premises to site. , Each item or package shall be marked with the number unique to the specification reference covering the item. 1. Stiffeners shall be used where necessary to maintain shapes and to give rigidity. Parts of equipment shall be delivered in assembled or sub-assembled units where possible. C. The equipment supplier shall be responsible for delivery of the equipment to Site in pp undamaged condition. It shall be pre-assembled to the degree indicated in the approved Shop Drawings. Repair of equipment defects or damage to coatings incurred prior to the arrival of the equipment at Site shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier.The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the equipment prior to unloading for damage or evidence of mishandling.Any damage shall be inspected by the Engineer and/or the equipment supplier prior to the unloading of the equipment at Site. D. Acceptance at Site: The Work shall include receiving and unloading the equipment items specified upon their arrival at Site, storing and protecting the equipment in accordance with the supplier's recommendations and this Specification prior to installation, installation of the equipment in accordance with instructions and erection drawings provided by the equipment supplier and approved by the Engineer,installation of anchor bolts and foundations, grouting of all baseplates,performance testing,and repair of shop coatings marred or damaged after the equipment has arrived at the Site. E. Physical damage to the equipment i caused byContractor during unloading, storage,or ' installation shall either be repaired by the equipment supplier at the Contractor's expense, or repaired by the Contractor under the supervision of and in accordance with instructions of the equipment supplier. 1.5 COMMISSIONING A. All labor and materials required for testing or placing equipment in operation after the equipment has been properly installed and the installation approved by the equipment supplier and Engineer shall be provided by the equipment supplier unless otherwise specifically noted. 1416-00 01640 Installation Of Ovmeo-Furnished Equipment 01640-2 ZEA. —ENGINEERS— I i 1 SECTION 01640 INSTALLATION OF OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 GENERAL I A. Equipment and material supplied to facilitate installation, or appurtenant to the equipment installed under this Section, shall comply with the requirements of the various specification Sections where these items are specified. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION IA. Equipment provided under this Section shall be fabricated,cated, assembled, installed and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with detail drawings, I specifications, engineering data,instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as approved by Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION ACCEPTANCE I A. Installation shall be considered complete when the equipment supplier approves the installation and,after performance testing,informs the Engineer of acceptance of the I installation in writing; and installation is accepted by the Engineer. ' END OF SECTION I I I I I I 1416-000I640InstallationOfOwnc--FumishudEquipment 01640-3 ZE L I —ENGINEERS- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Start-up,pre-demonstration and demonstration of facility, systems or equipment ' B. Personnel training C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing D. Related systems start-up and demonstration period requirements 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01310—Construction Schedule B. Section 01400—Quality Control: Manufacturer's Representative and Test Results C. Section 01700—Contract Closeout: Substantial Completion and Extra Materials ' D. Section 01730—Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructional Materials 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Project System: Specific system,consisting of an independent arrangement of equipment, structures, components,piping,wiring,materials or incidentals that performs an identifiable function which is both operational and safe B. Pre-Demonstration Period: Period of time,of unspecified duration after initial ' construction and installation during which Contractor,with assistance from manufacturer's representative,performs the following activities in sequence: 1. Initial equipment start-up 2. Correction of all discrepancies or functions prior to Demonstration Period ' C. Demonstration Period: Period of time,of specified duration,following Pre- Demonstration Period, during which Contractor completes personnel training including ' review of approved O&M Manuals with Owner and initiates process flow or product through facility or Project System, starts up and operates facility or project system without exceeding specified downtime limitations, to prove functional integrity of ' mechanical and electrical equipment and components and control interfaces to satisfaction of Engineer as evidence of Substantial Completion D. Related System: Equipment or subsystem whose function is necessary for the start-up, testing and operation of the project system as a whole E. Substantial Completion: Reference General Conditions 1416.0a 01650 Stetting Of Systems 01650-1 Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 . I SECTION 01650 I STARTING OF SYSTEMS 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Submit in chronological order listed below prior to completion of Pre-Demonstration Period: 1. Master operation and maintenance training schedule: a. Submit 30 days(minimum)prior to first training session for Owner's personnel b. Schedule to include: 1) Target date and time for Owner witnessing initial start-up of each system 2) Target date and time for Operation and Maintenance training for each system,both field and classroom 3) Target date for initiation of Demonstration Period c. Submit for review and approval by Owner d. Include holidays observed by Owner e. Owner reserves the right to insist on a minimum 7 days'notice of rescheduled training session not conducted on master schedule target date for any reason I f. Resubmit schedule until approved 2. Substantial Completion Submittal: a. File Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion,Request for Inspection and documentation under provisions of Section 01700 b. Approved Operation and Maintenance manuals received by Engineer minimum 1 week prior to scheduled training c. Written request for Owner to witness each system pre-demonstration start- up. Request to be received by Owner minimum 1 week before scheduled training of Owner's personnel on that system d. Equipment installation and pre-demonstration start-up certifications I e. Letter verifying successful completion of all pre-demonstration start-up activities including receipt of all specified items from manufacturers or suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period I f. Letter verifying successful completion of Demonstration Period start-up activities 1.5 COST OF START-UP A. Contractor to pay all costs associated with facility, systems or equipment start-up 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used I I 1416-00 meso Storting OFSyetems 01650-2 ZEA —ENGINEERSI I I SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 START-UP—GENERAL IA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems B. Notify Engineer 7 days prior to start-up of each item I C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked forro er lubrication, p p drive rotation,belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause Idamage D. Verify that tests,meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer I E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are p p . complete and tested F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers'instructions I G. When specified in individual specification Sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400, Quality Control that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly I I. Start-up divided into two periods: 1. Pre-Demonstration Period including: I a. Completion of Work to prepare facility, systems or equipment for Demonstration Period b. Start-up of equipment I2. c. Complete filing of all required submittals Demonstration Period including: a. Demonstration of functional integrity of facility or system I b. Training of personnel c. Review of approved preliminary O&M Manuals with Owner d. Filing of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for IInspection J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment or system scheduled for start-up and training: I1. Prepare and submit manuals in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data prior to delivery of equipment or system 2. Confirm approved preliminary operation and maintenance manuals are available I , prior to commencing any equipment or system training activities I 1416-00 01650 Starting Of Systems 01650-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 01650 I STARTING OF SYSTEMS 3. Start-up and demonstration period of equipment or system will not be complete, nor will start-up and demonstration period payments be made,until I manufacturer's authorized representative includes a complete and thorough review of the approved preliminary O&M Manual with Owner during the equipment training session `, I 3.2 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Equipment Start-up: I 1. Requirements for individual items of equipment are included in Divisions through 16 of these Specifications 2. Prepare equipment to operate properly and safely and be ready to demonstrate functional integrity during Demonstration Period 3. Perform equipment start-up to extent possible without introducing product flow 4. Test tanks,pumping,filters, and similar equipment requiring a fluid,using clean I water supplied at Contractor's expense 5. Dispose of water used for equipment start-up 6. Procedures include,but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of: 1) Power, control, and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source I 2) Voltage of all circuits 3) Phase sequence 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems 5) Alignment of connected machinery 6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems 7) Lubri.catapi 8) Valve orientation and position status far manual.operating mode 9) Tankage for integrity using {clean water) {process water.} 10) Pumping equipment using {clean water) (process water) 11) Instrumentation and control signal generation,transmission, reception,and response under provisions of Section 13400 12) Tagging and identification system 13) All equipment: Proper connections, alignment,calibration and adjustment b. Calibrate all safety equipment c. Manually rotate movable parts to assure freedom of movement d. `Bump"start electric motors to verify proper rotation e. Perform other tests,checks, and activities required to make equipment ready for Demonstration Period f. Documentation: 1) Prepare log showing each equipment item subject to this paragraph and listing what is to be accomplishedng equip person start-up I 2) Provide place for Contractor to record date and P accomplishing required work. Submit completed document before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion certification I 1416-0001650 Starting Of Systems 01650-4 ZEl. —ENGINEERS — I I I ISECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 7. Obtain certifications,without restrictions or qualifications, and deliver to IEngineer: a. Manufacturer's equipment installation check letters b. Instrumentation supplier's instrumentation installation certificate I 3.3 PERSONNEL TRAINING I A. Reference individual equipment specification sections B. . Conduct all personnel training after completion of equipment start-up for the equipment I for which training is being conducted: 1. Personnel training on individual equipment or systems will not be considered completed unless: I a. All pre-training deliverables are received and approved before commencement of training on the individual equipment or system b. No system malfunctions occur during training I 2. c. All provisions of field and classroom training specifications are met Training not in compliance with the above will be performed again in its entirety by the manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner 3. Videotape each training session IC. Field and classroom training requirements: 1. Hold classroom training on-site 2. Notify each manufacturer specified for on-site training that Owner reserves the I right to video record any or all training sessions. Organize each trainingsession g in a format compatible with video recording I 3. Training instructor: Factory trained and familiar with giving both classroom and "hands-on"instructions 4. Training instructors: Be at classes on time. Session beginning and ending times to I be coordinated with the Owner and indicated on the master schedule. Normal time lengths for class periods can vary,but brief rest breaks should be scheduled and taken I 5. Organize training sessions into maintenance verses operation topics and identify on schedule 6. Plan for minimum class attendance of 15 people at each session and provide I 7. sufficient classroom materials,samples, and handouts for those in attendance Instructors to have a typed agenda and well prepared instructional material. The use of visual aids, e.g., films,pictures, and slides is recommended for use during I I the classroom training programs. Deliver agendas to the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to the classroom training. Provide equipment required for presentation of films,slides, and other visual aids 8. Cover information required in Operation and Maintenance manuals submitted Iaccording to Section 01340 and following areas as applicable to project systems: a. Operation of equipment b. Lubrication of equipment I ! c. Maintenance and repair of equipment I 1416-0001650Stetrungoesy8c 01650-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 01650. STARTING OF SYSTEMS d. Troubleshooting of equipment e. Preventive maintenance procedures I f. Adjustments to equipment g. Inventory of spare parts h. Optimizing equipment performance , ' i. Capabilities j. Operational safety k. Emergency situation response ' 1. Takedown procedures(disassembly and assembly) 9. Address above paragraphs a),b),h), I),j)and k)in the operation sessions 10. Address above paragraphs ),d),c) f), g), and 1)in the niaintenane sessions 11. Maintain a lag of classroom training provided including: Instructors,topics,:;dates, time, and attendance D. Complete filing of all required submittals: ' 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3. Training material ; I E Prepare and insert additional data.in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent ring instruction F. Amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections I 3.4 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD. A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance.of Products to Owner's personnel within 14 days ' prior to date of Substantial Completion unless specified otherwise by requirements of construction staging per Section 01010, Summary of Work B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners'personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance I C. Demonstrate start-up,operation,control,adjustment,trouble-shooting,servicing, maintenance,:and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times,at equipment I location D. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the mechanical, electrical, and control interfaces I of the respective equipment and components comprising the facility or system as evidence of Substantial Completion E. If,during the Demonstration Period,the aggregate amount oftime used for repair, 111 alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any equipment or systems that renders'the affected equipment or system inoperative exceed 10 percent of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of functional integrity will be deemed to have Failed. In the event of I 1416-0001650 Starting u Systems01650-6 ZEL� -ENGINEERS- ' I I . SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS failure, a new Demonstration Period will recommence after correction of the cause of Ifailure. The new Demonstration Period shall have the same requirements and duration as the Demonstration Period previously conducted IF. Conduct the demonstration of functional integrity under full operational conditions G. Owner will provide operational personnel to provide process decisions affecting plant I performance. Owner's assistance will be available only for process decisions. Contractor will perform all other functions including but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period IH. Owner reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures,routine maintenance scenarios, etc.,to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes II. Duration of Demonstration Period:Minimum of 5 consecutive days: 1. Time of b ginningand ending of any Demonstration Period will be agreed upon I by Gontractoi, €' ner,;and Engineer in advance ofnitiatir g Demonstration Period 2. Length of Demonstration Period other than specified will be agreed upon by Contractor,Owner and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period J. Provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner's questions throughout the I , Demonstration Period K. Provide final field instruction on select systems and respond to any system problems or failures which may occur I L. Provide all labor, supervision,utilities, chemicals,maintenance, equipment,vehicles or P any other item necessary to operate and demonstrate all systems being demonstrated END OF SECTION I I I I 1 , 1416.0001650 Starting Of Systems 01650-7 Z E L I —ENGINEERS- I i i I ISECTION 01658 DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT IPART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for disinfection of plant structures and equipment. I1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NSF Standard 60, Listing of Certified Drinking Water Treatment IChemicals—Health Effects B. AWWA B300- Standard for Hypochlorites. IC. AWWA B301 —Standard for Liquid Chlorine D. AWWA C653—Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants I1.3 SCHEDULE OF DISINFECTION I A. Coordination: Equipment is to be disinfected just prior to the Final Mechanical Performance Tests. , ' B. Item to be Disinfected: 1. Filter(No. 1 &No. 7) 1.4 SUBMITTALS IA. Bacteriological Test Results: See Paragraph h 1.5 A.1. I B. Wastewater Disposal Plan 1. The Contractor shall develop a plan for safe disposal of chlorinated wastewater from disinfection/testing of pipelines, structures, etc. Submit the Plan to the I Engineer for review and to the State of Georgia Environmental Protection Division GAEPD for review and approval at least two weeks in advance of disinfection/testing activities. Do not perform disinfection/testing prior to I 2. receipt of approval from GAEPD. The disposal plan shall include provisions for neutralizing chlorine and any other contaminants to levels acceptable to GAEPD. I 3. Specific methods and devices designed to prevent erosion and subsequent sedimentation at the point(s) of discharge shall also be included in the Contractor's Plan. I1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bacteriological Tests: I1. See AWWA C653, Sections 1 and 4. 1416.00 01658 Disinfection Of Structums And Equipment 01658-1 Z E IL I —ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 01658 DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT a. Number of Samples Required: Reference 1.3B above for corresponding items. 1) 1.3B.1 —One sample each. 2) 1.3B.2—One sample each. 3) 1.3B.3 —One sample each. 4) 1.3B.4—One sample each. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Transport,handle and store disinfection products in a manner recommended by respective manufacturers to prevent contamination and deterioration of products. ' B. When handling disinfection products,due caution is advisable. Wear gloves, apron, goggles,and suitable vapor mask. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300. B. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301. C. Provide NSF Standard 60 certified products per Listing of Certified Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals-Health Effects. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING WATER A. Obtain flushing and disinfecting water for disinfection of structure at water treatment plant from Owner. B. Incur all costs in utilizing and disposing of flushing and disinfecting water. t C. Owner will not charge for water used to initially flush and disinfect a structure. If any structure has to be reflushed and/or redisinfected, cost of obtaining this additional water ' from Owner will be at Contractor's expense. D. Include costs for disinfection of structures and equipment in unit or lump sum prices bid for work as no separate payment will be made for disinfection. 3.2 CLEANING AND PRELIMINARY FLUSHING A. Clean items to be disinfected of dirt,debris,residual formed on sides of items, and any s other foreign material. Thoroughly flush with water prior to disinfection. 1416.0001658 Disinfection Of Structures And Equipment --:„01658-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— ' SECTION.01658 DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT ' 3.3 CHLORINATION A. General: After being thoroughly flushed, disinfect specified structure by chlorination. B. Form of Chlorine: Apply chlorine in a chlorine gas-water mixture, calcium hypochlorite solution,or chlorine spray solution. ' C. Methods of Application: 1. General: Submit methods of application to Engineer for approval. 2. Chlorine Gas-Water:Mixture: Apply chlorine gas-water mixture by means of a ' solution feed chlorination device. Provide device with means to prevent backflow of water into chlorine cylinder. 3. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: Inject or pump a solution consisting of 5 percent Icalcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight into the lines. . Chlorine Spray Solution: Apply chlorine spray solution, having a concentration of at least 200 ppm.Apply uniformly to all interior surfaces,including equipment by fruit tree sprayers, fire hoses, or other approved equipment. After spraying, fill holding basin to a depth of 6 inches with water containing at least 50 ppm chlorine. 3.4 POINTS OF APPLICATION A. If chlorine spray solution is not going to be used for basins,inject disinfecting solution ' into water as it enters each basin or inject into influent main. 3.5 RATE OF APPLICATION A. Control water to be used in disinfection rocess to flow slowlyinto basins. P 3.6 PREVENTION OF REVERSE FLOW A. Exercise great carethat strong chlorine solution in areas being treated will not flow back ' into water supply where water for disinfection is being obtained. 3.7 RETENTION PERIOD AND CHLORINE CONCENTRATION A. Retain chlorinated water in above specified items at least twenty four(24)hours. After chlorine treated water has been retained for required time,the chlorine residual is to be at least 25.0 ppm. Should initial procedure fail to result in specified conditions,repeat ' chlorination procedure, at no additional expense,until results are obtained. 3.8 FINAL FLUSHING A. Following chlorination, completely flush all treated water from above specified items until replacement water throughout each facility,upon test,is proven to have a combined chlorine residual of approximately 2.0 ppm. ' 1416-00 01658 Disinfection Of Structures And Equipment 01658-3 . Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 01658 DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT 3.9 CHLORINE CONCENTRATION AFTER DISINFECTION A. After disinfection and during subsequent mechanical performance tests,maintain chlorine residual in all units of plant at a concentration satisfactory to Engineer. If chlorine residual drops to zero(0),Engineer has option to require redisinfection of any or all units of plant at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 I ZEI.iaieoao1sssDsmr ;�ots,�, And i «t 016584 ^ENGINEERS^ ..,.._.. ._ . ti......µ. I SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES • IA. Closeout procedures IB. Final cleaning C. Adjusting ID. Contractor's closeout submittals E. Project record documents IF. Warranties IG. Spare parts and maintenance materials H. Delivery to Owner II. Substantial completion J. Final inspection IK. Reinspection fees IL. Final adjustments of accounts M. Final application for payment I1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Comply with requirements stated in conditions of the Contract and in specifications for Iadministrative procedures in closing out the Work B. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,Work has been I inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's inspection Provide submittals to Engineer/Owner that are required by governing or other authorities IC. D. Submit final Application for Payment pp ym identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,previous payments, and sum remaining due I1.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Provide final cleaning under provisions of Section 01710, Cleaning I 1416-0001700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 ZE I —ENGINEERS— I SECTION.01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ' B. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection C. Clean equipment to a sanitary condition D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems E. Clean site; sweep paved areas,rake clean landscaped surfaces F. Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site ' 1.4 ADJUSTING A. Provide under provisions of Section 01650, Starting of Systems B. Adjusting operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project record documents ' B. Operating and maintenance data, instructions to Owner's personnel: As specified in Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data 1 C. Spare parts and maintenance materials: As specified in individual sections and as specified herein D. Evidence of payment and waiver of claims: As specified in General and Supplementary Conditions ' E. Two copies of each specified special bond,warranty, and service contract F. Final inspection reports by all regulatory agencies demonstrating the agencies' final ' approval G. At Contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to Engineer for the Owner ' H. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each Record Document 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide project record documents under provisions of Section 01720,Project Record Documents L. 1416-00 01700 Contract Closeout Z Esut ' --CNrtxtNCIERS-- SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ' B. Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Reviewed shop drawings,product data, and samples ' 6. Field test reports 7. Construction photographs C. Store record documents and samples separate from documents used for construction: 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for samples ' D. Record information concurrent with construction progress: 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded ' 2. Legibly mark to record actual construction E. Specifications and addenda—Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: ' 1. Manufacturer's name,product model,number,trade name and supplies 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized 3. Changes made by Addenda,field-order or change order ' F. Record documents and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: ' 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work 4. Field changes of dimension and detail ' 5. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order ' G. Submit documents to Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment H. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index ' I. Maintain documents in clean, dry,legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes ' J. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Engineer K. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by Engineer 1416-OD 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-3 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 01700. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1 L. Label each document"Project Record" in neat,large printed letters 1.7 WARRANTIES , A. Provide duplicate notarized copies B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors,suppliers, and manufacturers C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three"D"side ring binder with durable plastic . I cover D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment ' E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period 1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts,maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment C. Store the items in a clean,dry,heated,storage shed, or bonded warehouse . ' D. Protect all items from damage during storage. Store in sturdy wooden boxes or crates with lid 1.9 DELIVERY TO OWNER A. At or prior to time of inspection for Substantial Completion deliver all required items to ' Owner at place on site designated by Owner: 1. Contractor and representatives of Owner and Engineer shall inspect and inventory all items delivered , B. Submit to Engineer detailed itemized summary of all items delivered: 1. Organize summary by specification sections 2. Indicate on summary any items delivered which were damaged or defective 3. Contractor and Owner's and Engineer's representatives shall sign summary certifying that all items listed were delivered and that,unless otherwise noted on summary, all items were in good condition at time of delivery to Owner C. Engineer will review summary for completeness and inform Contractor promptly of any deficiencies therein 1416.00 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— ' 1 I SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D. Contractor shall deliver all additional items identified by Engineer and replace all Idamaged and defective items noted on original summary before requesting final inspection I E. Summary for additional and replacement items, signed by Contractor and Owner's and Engineer's representatives, shall be submitted I1.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete,he shall submit to I Engineer: 1. A written notice that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected I B. Within reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Engineer will make an inspection to p !n p determine status of completion IC. Should Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. Engineer will promptly notify Contractor in writing,giving reasons therefore I 2. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies in the Work and send second written notice of Substantial Completion to Engineer 3. Engineer will reinspect the Work I D. When Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete,he will: P 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion with tentative Iist of items to be completed or corrected before final payment 2. After consideration of any objections made by Owner as provided in Conditions of the Contract and when Engineer considers the Work substantially complete,he will execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor definite Certificate of I Substantial Completion with revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected I E. No Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued by Engineer until detailed itemized summary is submitted for review I F. Final payment will not be made until all specified spare parts,maintenance materials, and special tools have been delivered to Owner in acceptable condition 1.11 FINAL INSPECTION A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, Contractor shall submit written certification that: I 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents I I 14I6-00 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-5 Z E - —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection B. Engineer and Consultant will make an inspection to verify status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification C. Should Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. Engineer will promptly notify Contractor in writing listing incomplete or defective work 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy stated deficiencies and send second written certification to Engineer that the Work is complete ' 3. Engineer will reinspect Work D. When Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under Contract Documents,Engineer shall request Contractor to make closeout submittals 1.12 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should Engineer and Consultant perform reinspections due to failure of the Work to comply with claims of status of completion made by Contractor: 1. - Owner will compensate Engineer for such additional services of Consultant 2. Owner will deduct amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor 1.13 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement of accounting to Engineer 1 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to contract sum: 1. Original Contract Sum 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders b. Deductions for uncorrected Work c. Deductions for liquidated damages d. Deductions for reinspection payments e. Other adjustments 3. Total Contract Sum,as adjusted 4. Previous payments 5. Sum remaining due 1.14 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in conditions of the Contract 1 1416-00 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-6 —ENGINEERS— ' 1 1 SECTION 01700 I CONTRA.0 'CLOSEOUT PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 Not Used 1 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 1 END OF SECTION i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1416.00 01700 contract Closeout 01700-7 Z EL ENG INEER 6- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i SECTION 01710 CLEANING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Hazards and governing control B. Cleaning materials C. General work area conditions during construction ' D. Interior and exterior(site)cleaning 1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials p y i1.3 SCHEDULING A. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces 1.4 HAZARDS AND GOVERNING CONTROL IA. Hazards Control: 1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances ' B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities including anti-pollution laws: 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site ' 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits,oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: 1. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer ' 2. New and uncontaminated B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned 1 1416.40 41710 Cleaning 017104 104 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WORK AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste and debris caused by work on this project B. Prevent dust nuisance attributable to this work C. Do not drop or throw materials from heights greater than 4 foot or less than 4 foot if conditions warrant greater care D. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible E. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces F. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site G. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies H. Repair,patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish to match adjacent surfaces I. On completion of work,leave area in a clean,natural looking condition. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of required permanent Work 3.2 INTERIOR CLEANING 1 A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Keep work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel in existing facility operations 2. At maximum weekly intervals,dispose of waste materials,debris,and rubbish 3. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis,until substantial completion 4. Vacuum clean interior spaces, including inside cabinets 5. Control dust in work areas of existing facilities: a. Provide protection to existing electrical and mechanical equipment as required to eliminate detrimental effects due to construction b. Check air handling filters in existing units having construction activities. Weekly replace as necessary c. Check interior of existing electric panels and vacuum if dust accumulation has occurred at maximum monthly intervals d. Sweep all floors,including basins,tunnels,platforms,walkways,and pick up and dispose of all debris at maximum weekly intervals. Use dust suppressant sweeping compound in areas open toareas of existing facility operations t 1416.00 01710 Cleaning 01710-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS t I ISECTION 01710 CLEANING B. Final Cleaning: I1. Remove grease,mastic, adhesives,dust,dirt, stains, fingerprints,labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces 2. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses,lamps and trims clean I 3. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors 4. Polish glossy surfaces to a shine finish 5. Ventilating systems: I a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction b. Clean ducts,blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during I6. construction Replace all burned out lamps 7. Broom clean process area floors I8. Mop office and control room floors 3.3 EXTERIOR(SITE) CLEANING IA. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Construction debris: a. Confine in strategically located container(s)covered to prevent blowing Iby wind . Remove from work area to container daily c. Haul from site once a week(minimum) I 2. Vegetation: Keep weeds and other vegetation trimmed to 3 inch maximum height 3. Remove soils,sand,and gravel deposited on paved areas and walks asre required to prevent muddy or dusty conditions: I 4. a. Do not flush into storm sewer system Comply with stormwater general permit requirements, and monitor and employ best management practices(BMP) IB. Final Cleaning: 1. Remove trash and debris containers from site: a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers I 2. Broom clean paved surfaces 3. Rake clean other surfaces of grounds I3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During substantial completion walk thru or prior to start-up, conduct an inspection with IEngineer to verify acceptable condition of all work areas I END OF SECTION I 1416.0001710 Cleaning 01710-3 z E L� I -ENGINEERS- i i I SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Maintenanceof record documents. Throughout pr'og ess of Work,maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents,and,upon completion of Work,transfer recorded changes to set of Record Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Include,but are not necessarily limited to,General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. B. Individual sections of Technical Specifications. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions under Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. ' B. Engineer's acceptance Project Record Documents will be a of the current status of p prerequisite to Engineer's recommendation for payment of progress payments and final payment under the Contract. C. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment,secure Engineer's acceptance of the current status of the Project Record Documents. D. Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the final Project Record Documents ' to Engineer for acceptance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on Contractor's staff acceptable to Engineer. ' B. Accuracy of records: 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from accepted Project Record Documents. C. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 17 1416-00 of no Project Record Documents 01720-1 ZEA ' —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS D. Record the exact final location of pipe lines by,offset distances to surface improvements such as edge of existing pavement or to property markers, etc. at a maximum interval of 200 feet. Make sufficient measurements to definitely locate all pipe lines to permanent points. The drawings shall show references to all valves, fittings,pipe material changes, etc. E. Record drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Developer's name, address,and phone number. 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Lot numbers and Parcel I.D. Number. 4. Road names and rights-of-way widths. 5. Water and sanitary sewer utility easements. 6. All water service locations and distances from both front property corners of serviced lot for new development construction. ' 7. All wastewater services with clean-outs and distances from both property corners of serviced lot and from nearest manhole for new development construction. 8. Invert and top elevations of all manholes as well as state-plane coordinates as ' supplied by red-lined drawings. 9. Label all sewer services as to distance from a specified manhole,i.e.-Manhole A 5+56'. 10. Label all water services as to distance from a specified valve,i.e. -Valve 5+56'. Valve numbering shall be sequential to the degree possible. 11. All valves,nodes and fittings for water line construction shall be labeled with state plane coordinates and depths(X,Y,Z)on red-lined drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Maintain job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. ' B. In the event of loss of recorded data,use means necessary to again secure the data for Engineer's acceptance: 1 1. Such means shall include,if necessary in the opinion of Engineer,removal and replacement of concealing materials. 2. In such case,provide replacement to the standards originally required by the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of Owner's Notice to Proceed, secure from Engineer at no charge to Contractor one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract. 1 1416"00 01720-2 01720 Project Record Documents Z E —ENGINEERS— 1 I I SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I B. Final Record Documents:At a time nearing the completion of the Work, secure from Engineer at no charge to Contractor one complete set of blueline copies of all Drawings in the Contract. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET A. Immediately upon receipt of job set, identify each of the Documents with the title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS—JOB SET". IB. Preservation: 1. Devise a suitable method acceptable to Engineer for protecting job set, I considering the Contract completion time,the probable number of occasions upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under which these activities will be performed. I 2. Do not use job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by Engineer,until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents. 3. Maintain job set at the site of Work as that site is designated by Engineer. I 4. The Engineer may request that project"redlines"be submitted with monthly pay requests. C. Making entries on Drawings: 1. Using an erasable colored pencil(not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries in I 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes,use different colors for the overlapping changes. ID. Make entries in pertinent other Documents accepted byEngineer. P � I E. Conversion of schematic layouts: 1. In some caseson the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits,piping, ducts, and similar items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise I physical layout: a. Final physical arrangement is determined by Contractor, subject to Engineer's acceptance. b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require I accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the Drawings. 2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings,by dimension accurate to within one I inch,the centerline of each run of items described above: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "ductile iron drain," "galv. water,"and the like. I, 1436.00017201.rojeaRa:ordDocvmrats 01720-3 Z E L I —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 01720 I PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS b. Show, am bysymbol or note,the vertical location of the item("under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like). c. Make all identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to the , Specifications. 3. Engineer may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts where, in Engineer's judgment,conversion serves no useful purpose. However,do not ' rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing by Engineer. PROJECT FINAL PR CT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The purpose of final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information ' regarding all aspects of Work,both concealed and visible,to enable future modification of Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement,investigation,and examination. , B. Acceptance of recorded data prior to transfer: 1. Following receipt of blueline copies for Final Record Documents,and prior to start of transfer of recorded data thereto, secure Engineer's acceptance of all recorded data. 2. Make required revisions ' C. • Transfer of data to Drawings: 1.. • Carefully transfer change data shown on job set of Record Drawings to the corresponding bluelines,coordinating the changes as required. 2. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing, a full description of changes made during construction,and the actual location of items to be located. ' 3. Call attention to each entry by drawing a"cloud" around the area or areas affected. 4. Make changes neatly, consistently,and with the proper media to assure longevity , and legibility. D. Transfer of data to other Documents: 1. If Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean during progress of Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly and acceptable to Engineer,the job set of those Documents other than Drawings will be accepted as final Record ' Documents. 2. If any such Document is not acceptable to Engineer,secure a new copy of that Document from the Engineer at Engineer's usual charge for reproduction and , handling,and carefully transfer the changed data to the new copy for acceptance by Engineer. E. Review and submittal: 1. Submit completed set of Project Record Documents to Engineer as described above and under provisions of Section 01340,Shop Drawings,Product Data and 1 Samples. 1416 001720PntectRecodDownnNiDoo 01720-4 Z C■ L ' —ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' 2. 3. Participate in review meetings as required. Make required changes and promptly deliver final Project Record Documents to Engineer. 1 3.3 CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor has no responsibility for recording changes in Work subsequent to Final Completion, except for changes resulting from Warranty work. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 I k. 1 1 1 7416.00 01720 Project Record Documar s 01720-5 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— 1 I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Submittals IB. Format and content of manuals C. Manual for equipment and systems ID. Instruction of Owner's personnel E. Schedule of submittals I1.2Q UALITY ASSURANCE I A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this section I 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings B. Manuals for equipment systems shall be prepared by the equipment manufacturer or Isystem supplier C. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and Ioperation of products furnished under the Contract D. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in Iother pertinent sections of Specifications 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Manuals for equipment and systems: I1. Submit 3 preliminary copies prior to the date of shipment of the equipment or system: a. Engineer will review Ib. If approved, "Approved " 1 copy will be returned to Contractor, 1 copy sent to Resident Project Representative and 1 copy retained in Engineer's file c. If approved, "Furnish as Corrected," 1 copy will be returned to Contractor, 1 copy sent to Resident Project Representative, and 1 copy retained in Engineer's file d. If not approved, "Revise and Resubmit" or"Rejected,"2 copies will be I returned to Contractor with Engineer's comments for revision and 1 copy I 1416-00 01730 Operation And Maintcnance Data 01730-1 Z E I.. —ENGINEERS- i SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA retained in Engineer's file. Resubmit 3 revised preliminary copies for Engineer's review I e. Partial payment of 50 percent for equipment and systems on hand or installed will be made for preliminary manuals returned"Exceptions Noted" f. No partial payments will be made for equipment and systems on hand or installed until preliminary manuals are submitted and approved 2. Submit 3 final copies no less than;,30 days prior to putting the equipment or I system in service. If final manuals differ from approved preliminary manuals, submit 2 copies of any necessary supplemental material with instructions for insertion for conforming Engineer's and Resident Project Representative's copies of preliminary manuals to final manuals: a. Engineer will compare with approved preliminary manual b. If identical or otherwise approved, "Approved ", Contractor will be so notified Approved final copies will be transmitted to Owner c If not approved, "Revise and Resubmit," or"Rejected"all copies will be returned to Contractor for revision or retained by Engineer and the necessary revision data requested from Contractor at Enizteer's option d. No portion of tile Work is substantially complete until final equipment and system manuals relating to that portion of the Work are approved by Engineer of e. Submit 4 copies of any revisions found desirable during instruction Owner's personnel with instructions for insertion for revising Owner's, Engineer's and Resident Project Representative's copies of manual 1 f Submit 2 final CD copies of approved nal manuals g 2 copies of revisions and one CD copy will be:transmitted to Owner and one CD copy retained by Engineer , C. Additional requirements for specialized instruction of Owner's personnel are given in the detailed equipment specifications , 1.4 FORMAT I A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel B. Presentation of Information: I 1. Size: 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch 2. Paper: 20 lb weight minimum, white, for typed pages 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab,bind in with text b. Reduced to 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch by 17 inch and folded to 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch I c. Where reduction is impractical, folded and placed in 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch envelopes bound in text I d. Suitably identified on drawings and envelopes 5. Provide fl sheets for each se•arate .roduct or each •iece of o s eratin e•ui•merit: 1416.00 67730 Operation And Maintenance Data 01730-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I I SECTION 01,730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of Iequipment b. Provide indexed tabs,may be in color 6. Spine and cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title"OPERATION I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS"preceded by the word. "PRELIMINARY" or "FINAL" as applicable. Final manuals to list information on the cover and the spine. List the following: I a. Title of project,reference Owner and project location as applicable b. Identity of separate structure as applicable c. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual and specification I section number 7. As much as possible, assemble and bind material in the same order as specified I C. Binders: 1. Preliminary manuals: Commercial quality permanent 3-ring or 3 post binders with durable, cleanable,hard plastic covers. GBC bound manual may be accepted I2. upon review by Engineer Final manuals: Commercial quality permanent 3-ring or 3 post binders with durable, cleanable,hard plastic covers with clear plastic cover and spine pockets I suitable for title and cover inserts. Manufacturer's pre-printed binder may be accepted upon review by Engineer. "Deluxe Round Ring View Binder" as manufactured by Wilson Jones or accepted substitution ID. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of table of contents of this Project Manual I E. Provide tabbed flyleaf for each separate product and system,with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment I F. CD and/or DVD: 1. Label each CD and/or start-up DVD provided 2. Provide with project name, section and equipment/system label on CD and for CD I 3. case When multiple CDs or DVDs are required,provide CD/DVD 3-ring plastic binder sheet(s)for insertion into final O&M manual I1.5 CONTENTS OF EACH VOLUME A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order: I 1. Contractor,name of responsible principal, address and telephone number 2. A list of each product required to be included,indexed to the content of the volume I 3. List, with each product,the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate Ic. Identify the area of responsibility of each d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement I 1416.00 01730 Operation And Maintenance Data 01730-3 Z E I —ENGINEERS= i I SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA111 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents I B. Product data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or installed b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation c. Delete references to inapplicable information C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems b. Control and flow diagrams 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation: 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings D. Written text,as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: pp 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedures I E. Copy of each warranty,bond and service contract issued: 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of fracture b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds 1.6 MANUALS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS : ' A Provide an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment or system • listed in the schedule of manuals in the quantity listed in the submittal schedule I B. Content for each of equipment and system as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts: a. Function,normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions b. Performance curves,engineering data and tests c Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts I 2. Operating procedures: a. Startup,break-in,routine and normal operating instructions b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions • c. Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable 111 d. Special operating instructions 3. Maintenance procedures: I a. Routine operations " "trouble-shootin b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" Disassembly, repair and reassembly I d. Alignment, adjusting and checking 7416.0001730Operniinn And Maintenance Date 01730-4 Z E'L —ENGINEERS- 1 I I SECTION 0.1730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: Ia. List of lubricants required 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer I7. Original manufacturer's parts list,illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance: a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear I b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts 8.. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings: I a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams, 10. Charts of valve tag numbers with the location and function of each valve 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts,manufacturer's current prices and Irecommended quantities to be maintained in storage 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications IC.. Content for each electric and electronic item or system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function,normal operating;characteristics and limiting conditions b. Performance curves, engineering"data a:nd tests I c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 2. Circuit directories of panelboards: I a. Electrical service b. Controls c. Communications 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams I 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions b. Sequences required I c. Special operating instructions 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations 1 b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" c. Adjustment and checking 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructionsI 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts,manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications ID.. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instnretion.o Owner's personnel IE. Additional requirements for Operation and Maintenance Data: The respective sections of specifications I I 1416-0001730 Operation And Maintenance Date 01730-5 Z E —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 01730 IOPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide under provisions of Section 01650, Starting of Systems I B. Prior to final inspection or acceptance,fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation,adjustment and maintenance of all products, I equipment and system C. Operation and maintenance manual constitutes the basis of instruction: ' 1, Review contents of manualwith personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance D, Additional requirements for specialized instruction of Owner's personnel are given in the detailed equipment specification 1.8 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS • A. Equipment and systems operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared for each of the following: I Specification Section Type Of Equipment Or System 02835 Cantilever Gate 08711 Door Hardware 11248 PAC Feed Equipment 11935 Centrifugal Water Pump(Vertical In-Line) 13400 Instrumentation and Controls I 13700 Access Control and Surveillance System 15100 Valves,Cocks and Hydrants I 15103 Butterfly Valves 15123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates 15773 Split System Heat Pumps and Air Conditioners 16483 Variable Frequency Drives I I I I 1416•00 07730 Operation And Maintenance Date 01730-6 ZEL—ENGINEERS--- I I SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ' PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i I 1416.00 01730 Operation And Maintenance Data 01730-7 - Z E L ' —ENGINEERS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01810 GEOTECINICAL DATA IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Report of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200—Earthwork I1.3 .INVESTIGATION A. Soil and subsurface investigations were conducted at the site,the results of which are to I be found in the report issued by CSRA Testing and Engineering Co.,Inc., dated June 30, 2015. IB. A copy of the report is appended at the end of this Section C. Bidders are urged to examine soils investigation data and to make their own investigation of the site before bidding I 1.4 INTERPRETATION IA. Soil investigation data is provided only for information and the convenience of bidders B. Owner and Engineer disclaim all responsibility for the achy,true location,and extent I of the soils investigation that has been prepares by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretations of that data by bidders,as in projecting soil-bearing values,rock profiles,soil stability and the presence,level, and extent of underground I .water C. Owner and Engineer disclaim all responsibility for the existence of other soil andI subsurface investigations previously prepared for Owner,Engineer,or others; It is the sole responsibility of the Bidder to obtain other soil and subsurface investigations that may be available for interpretation, at no additional cost to the Owner ID. Soil investigation data is not part of the contract documents PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) I PART 3 EXECUTION(NOT USED) IEND OF SECTION I ' 1416410 01810 Geotechnical Data 018104 ZEL —ENGINEERS- ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ' csra TESTING AND ENGINEERING CO., INC. I 1005 Emmett St.,Suite A Augusta,Georgia 30904 (706)733-6960 I Fax(706)737-0629 I I June 30,2015 1 Augusta Utilities Department p 360 Bay Street, Suite 180 I Augusta, Georgia 30901 Attn: Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. Re: Reportof Geotechnical:Exploration Highland`Avenue Water Treatment Plant-New Silo Augusta,Georgia CSRA ReportNo. B-069.15 IDear Mr. Leetch: CSRA Testing & Engineering is pleased to submit this report of our exploration services for the Iproposed project. Our services were provided in accordance with your email authorization of our proposal. This report presents a review of the information provided to us, a discussion of the site and subsurface Iconditions, and our foundation and earthwork recommendations. The appendix contains a boring location plan and the results of our field:testing. I Project In_,foima ian I Based on the information provided, the project is to involve the construction of a new silo located at the I existing Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant in Augusta, Georgia. The new silo is to be located adjacent to the existing old filter building and is to be approximately 12' in diameter and 50 feet high. No loading data has been provided to us at this time. However, based on our previous experience, we anticipate that the tank I will be supported by a thickened mat foundation bearing near existing grades. The construction area is very gently sloping in the proposed tank area and we anticipate that only minor additional earthwork will be required Ito achieve final grades. Member Society for Tasting and Mater9 rd Amtedited by AASHTO Acr,teditatiOn Program MAN I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. IPage Two June 30, 2015 I Pose Of EL1cploration 1 , The purpose of this exploration was to obtain specific subsurface data at the site and to provide Ifoundation and earthwork recommendations for the proposed project. ISae Conditions We conducted a site reconnaissance to observe and document surface conditions at the site. Informationathered was used to helpus interpret the subsurface data and to detect conditions which could 9 affect our recommendations. I The site is located at the existing Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant in Augusta, Georgia. Areas I not currently under roof are generally gravel or grass covered. The site is very gently sloping to the east in the proposed tank area. Surface soils exposed consist of previously placed sandy fills and/or sands with gravel. No surface water was noted near the building site at the time of our field work. Site Geologic Conditions The site is located near the fall line which is the contact area of the Upper Coastal Plain Province and Ithe Piedmont Province. The project site is located in Coastal Plain Physiographic Province. The Coastal Plain consists mainly of marine sediments which were deposited during successive periods of fluctuating sea level and moving shoreline. The formations dip slightly seaward and several are exposed at the surface in bands paralleling the coast. Many beds exist only as fragmental erosional remnants sandwiched between more I continuous strata above and below. The soils in this province are typical of those laid down in a shallow sloping sea bottom; interbedded sands, silts, and clays. These soils overlay residual soils and crystalline I rocks of the Piedmont. Subsurface Conditions The subsurface conditions were explored with one (1) soil test boring drilled according to the ' procedures presented in the appendix. The boring location and depth were selected by CSRA. The actual field boring location was determined by our field crew relative to the existing building. The boring location I shown in the appendix should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used. I i d I Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. Page Three June 30, 2015 I The subsurface conditions encountered at the boring location are shown on the test boring record in I the Appendix. This boring record represents our interpretation of the subsurface conditions based on the field log, and visual examination of field samples by our geotechnical engineer. The lines designating the interface I between various strata on the boring record represents the approximate interface location. The water level shown on the Boring Record represents the conditions only at the time of our exploration. 1 One (1) soil test boring was drilled in the proposed silo area to depth of 30 feet below the ground surface. A deeper boring for a seismic site classification was not requested. The soil test boring revealed a Isubsurface profile generally consisting of multiple strata. The surficial layer was noted to be a previous fill that consisted of clayey sands (SC). This previous fill stratum was encountered to a depth of approximately 9.0 Ifeet below the ground surface. Standard penetration resistances ranged from 7 to 13 blows per foot, indicating that the fill was properly compacted during original placement. a The virgin soils below the fill consisted of sands with varying fine grained particle content. The virgin sandy soils ranged from silty(SM) to clayey(SC) and were recorded to be very firm to dense in consistency. I Standard penetration resistances ranged from 24 to 35 blows per foot. IGroundwater Conditions INo groundwater was encountered in the soil test boring at the time of drilling. In silty sands the water levels can usually be determined accurately near the time of drilling. In fine grained soils and clayey sands, it Imay take several days for water levels to stabilize. Fluctuations in the groundwater level can occur due to variations in rainfall, evaporation, construction activity, surface runoff, and other site specific factors. The I highest groundwater levels are generally encountered in early spring and the lowest in late summer. The likelihood of groundwater in the near surface soils can be expected to increase following periods wet weather. ISite Preparation Recommendation IAll topsoil, vegetation, and surface soils containing organic material should be removed from the proposed construction area and either wasted from the site or used as topsoil in areas to be landscaped. During the Istripping and rough grading, positive surface drainage should be maintained to prevent the accumulation of water. If the exposed subgrade becomes excessively wet or frozen, or if conditions are encountered different I from those described previously in this report, the geotechnical engineer should be contacted. I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t z . Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. I Page Four June 30, 2015 I After stripping and rough grading, we recommend that the subgrade be proofrolled prior to excavation I of the foundation or placing any structural fills. We recommend that the proofrolling operation be observed and documented by experienced geotechnical personnel. If unsuitable conditions are encountered at the subgrade I level, recommendations for dealing with the conditions should be provided to the owner's representative by the geotechnical engineer. Any excessively wet soils encountered should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted fill. I •FDwidaI n Recor endadons I As stated previously, we anticipate that a mat foundation will be utilized to support the proposed silo. Mat foundations have the advantage of providing the maximum safety against soil failure due to the reduced foundation pressure derived by spreading the load over a larger area. They also have the advantage of being Iable to bridge over isolated soft areas due to the rigidity of the mat and, therefore differential settlements are minimized. Mat foundations have the disadvantage of being typically more expensive than typical shallow I footing foundations. IWe anticipate that the mat will bear in previously placed (firm SC soils). Mat foundations bearing in this material are acceptable for a maximum bearing pressure of up to 2,500 psf. We expect total settlements on I the order of 1 inch and differential settlements of up to 0.5 inch. Another soil parameter used in the analysis and design of mat foundations is the modulus of subgrade reaction (Ks). Based on the data obtained in our exploration, we recommend a design modulus of subgrade reaction of 130 kips per cubic foot for the near Isurface sandy soils (SC). IThe maximum net allowable bearing pressure recommended is based on our previous experience and correlations made previously between standard penetration test resistances and the performance of I foundations supported by soils similar to those at this site. A 6 inch layer of clean gravel or free draining sand covered with an impermeable membrane should be placed beneath the mat to provide a vapor barrier and permit lateral drainage beneath the mat. It should be noted that the near surface clayey sands encountered at the site are more sensitive to moisture and exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation bearing level if the foundation excavations remain open for too long a time. Therefore, foundation concrete should be placed as 1 soon as possible after the excavation is made. If the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion or I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Yr Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. Page Five June 30, 2015 1 exposure, the softened soils must be removed from.the foundation excavation bottom immediately prior to ' placement of concrete. If rainfall becomes imminent while the bearing soils are exposed, we recommend that a 2 to 4-inch thick "mud-mat" of "lean" (2,000 psi) concrete be placed on the bearing soils before the placement of reinforcing steel. We recommend that experienced geotechnical personnel observe the mat excavation immediately prior Ito placing concrete. He should compare the soils exposed with those encountered in the soil test borings and document the results. Any significant differences should be brought to the attention of the owners' representative along with appropriate recommendations. The foundation bearing area should be level and should also be free of loose soil, ponded water and debris prior to the inspection. Compacted Fill RecommendOons 1 We recommend that soils used as compacted fills be free of debris and have less than 3% by weight fibrous organic material. They should have a maximum dry density of at least 95 pcf, a liquid limit of less than 50, and a plasticity index of less than 20. Before filling operations begin, representative samples of each proposed fill material should be collected. The samples should be tested to determine the maximum dry density, optimum moisture content, natural moisture content, gradation and plasticity of the soil. These tests are needed for quality control during compaction and also to determine if the fill material is acceptable. We recommend that all compacted fill be constructed by spreading acceptable soil in loose layers not more than 10 inches thick. The fill should be compacted in thin lifts to at least 97 percent of the standard proctor maximum dry density(ASTM D-698). The moisture content of the fill soils should be maintained within ' +3 and -3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content as determined from the Proctor compaction test. This provision may require the contractor to dry the soils during periods of wet weather or wet the soils during the hot summer months. The fill surface must be adequately maintained during construction in order to achieve an acceptable compacted fill. We recommend that the fill surface be sloped to achieve sufficient drainage and to prevent water from ponding on the fill. If precipitation is expected while fill construction is temporarily halted, the surface should be rolled with rubber tired or steel drummed equipment to improve surface run-off. If the surface soils become excessively wet or frozen, fill operations should be halted and the geotechnical engineer should be consulted for guidance. 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Mr. Bob Leetch, P.E. ' Page Six June 30,2015 1 We recommend that the fill placement and compaction be observed and documented by experienced geotechnical personnel. Significant deviations, either from specifications or good practice, should be brought to the attention of the owner's representative, along with appropriate recommendations. Basis ForRecomm datic The recommendations provided are based inpart on project information provided to us and they only P apply to the specific project and site discussed in this report. If the project information section in this report ' contains incorrect information or if additional information is available, you should convey the correct or additional information to us and retain us to review our recommendations. We can then modify our ' recommendations if they are inappropriate for the proposed project. Regardless of the thoroughness of a geotechnical exploration, there is always a possibility that conditions between borings will be different from those at specific boring locations and that conditions will not be as anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition, the construction process may itself alter soil conditions. Therefore, experienced geotechnical personnel should observe and document the construction procedures used and the conditions encountered. Unanticipated conditions and inadequate procedures ' should be reported to the design team along with timely recommendations to solve the problems created. We recommend that the owner retain CSRA to provide this service based upon our familiarity with the project, the subsurface conditions and the intent of the recommendations. ' We wish to remind you that our exploration services include storing the samples collected and making them available for inspection for 60 days. The samples are then discarded unless you request otherwise. We will be happy to discuss our recommendations with you and would welcome the opportunity to provide the additional studies or services necessary to complete this project. We appreciate the opportunity to ' provide our professional services and look forward to working with you on the remainder of this project and on future projects. If you have any questions concerning this report or wish to have further discussions, please contact us at(706) 733-6960. Respectfully Su.a .fitted, I ell r •rather E. Pruett, P.E. 1 U I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U APPENDICES I 1 1 1 1 • APPEND IX Boring Location Plan 1 1 1 1 r t I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -41,,,,\\\\011_\11,1% .7,114 ti a t ii F‘ _ _ . _ ___. , , ., , ,14 1 ilk , , § L4, 3 4-4 E . I /. E .. E E _ M ® + 1 1 __ _ - a rin -( _ - — _ .� _ z ! 1 1\ w I 1 i S N1 --,-4-1 -- i / / \ I LI-4- -----. ----- -------- - -- -- - - -- - - rl Jo- / ed /� iff l' 1 , ^/ 1 1 b, („ii -)Ito II El If r; i _._ \*... I +...) I 4 \ \ ala A 4 a Q o 1 z ..., . t, 11.1_I00I I 1 - 4 (in z ® g I, il a hrl V V .,ter r• N Nw - -_ _� ___. SII_ y 1 56 17,7 � -- LV1 .y �• � 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' APPENDIX II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G S r a TESTING AND ENGINEERING COMPANY, INC. 1005 EMMETT STREET,SUITE A AUGUSTA,GEORGIA 30904 (706)733-8960 I (FAx) 737-0629 PROJECT ._New Silo Highland Avenue WTP BORING NO,_ B-1I . LOCATION .Augusta. ?sot9Ia DATE June 16 2015 I DEPTH - PENETRATION r VISUAL 'PERCENT ? FEET VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION UNIFIED VALUE(N) MOISTURE �..�..�,. .�..�.�. CLASS. . 13@1' r 7 d)3.5' v. 5' Firm to Loose, Brown and Tan Clayey Sand(Fill) SC 13@6' 24@8.5 SM wn 10' Very Firm, Brown Silty Sand I I Very Firm to Dense, Reddish-Brown Clayey Sand 40 @ 13.5' SC mo 15' 35 @ 18.5' ® 20' Dense, Reddish-Tan Silty Sand SM 132@23.5' 7 25' I 1.._. Dense to Very Firm, Tan and Purple Slightly Clayey I _ Silty Sand SM 27 @ 28.5' 4 30' Boring Terminated at 30 feet. ,– Top 3"is Gravel. — i 35' . 1 N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2"split tube sampler one foot after seated. None WATER TABLE I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I U I � Field m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I IFIELD TESTING PROCEDURES I . SOIL TEST BORINGS I Soil sampling and penetration testing were erformed in general accordance with ASTM D 1586. F I The borings were made by mechanically twisting a continuous steel flight hollow stem auger into the soil. At regular intervals,soil samples obtained with a standard 1.4 inch ID.,two inch OD., split barrel sampler. The sampler was first seated six inches to penetrate any loose cuttings,then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the. I sampler the final foot was recorded as the 'penetration resistance". The penetration resistance, when properly evaluated,is an index to the soil strength and foundation supporting capability. Representative portions of the soil samples,,obtained from the sampler, were placed in glass Jars and transported to OUT laboratory. 'In the laboratory,the samples were examined by an engineer to verify the driller's field classifications. Test Boring Records are attached,graphically showing the soil descriptions and penetration resistances. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01820 FILTER INSPECTION REPORT ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Report of Filter Underdrain and Fiberglass Troughs Inspection. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 13522—Filter Media ' B. Section 13523 —Baffled Filter Washwater Troughs C. Section 13524—Fabricated Media Baffles 1.3 INVESTIGATION A. A copy of the report is appended at the end of this Section. ' 1.4 REQUIREMENT ' A. Contractor is responsible for complying with the recommendations of the Filter Inspection Report. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1 1 1 ' 1416.00 01820 Filter Inspection Report 01820-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 I - I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I II I LEOPOLD Filter Inspection Report REV.01 k9 Augusta Utilities Department 1110114 IabrandPa e1 of2 I General Information Leopold Representative Printed Name:Patrick Rattigan Contract Number:M65122 I Arrival Date: 10.4-16 i Departure Date/: 10.4-11i Fitter Equipment-Filter Equipment and accessories stored on site Total Number of Filters Onsite: enough for two filter cells i Customer&Plant Information Customer Information: . Plant Information(Include Name,Address,Pit,Email): Contacts: Robbie Mobley 2841 C Central Ave. I Cell: 706-421-7018 Augusta Ga, 30909 Email: rmobley@augustaga.gov I i tlndeniraln Type IMS Type Grout Pour Type Flume Type }dr Hauser Type ❑ s ® Cap i ® Two Part 0 Front LSI J Pips EI SL 0 200 0 Mono to Center F El XA €{ El 1000 0 XA Patty ❑ Top Feed l 'I ID None � � 0 Wall 0 Wall Feed F ` { Filter Inspection Leopold Service Representatives Comments on work performed during visit(including pictures of any concerns): ' 1 ) 2 Filter cells— 14' 9"x 34' 1" IExisting Filters 10-4-16 1 l I inspected the filter equipment that had been purchased in 2006.The customer told me that the equipment was covered for a few years then the tarps failed and most of the equipment was left to Ioutside weather. The factory plastic covering on the type SL block had since failed also.The protective sealant tape covering on the primary chamber has since fallen away.The sealant in the primary chamber is still flexible.Some of the blocks have dirt in the sealant.These particular blocks will need the sealant I removed and re-applied. Some blocks showed signs of sun exposure but were still flexible. I hit them with a hammer to make sure they were not brittle.All accessories including,end plates, 0-rings,gaskets, anchor rods,trough hardware, air header piping are in acceptable condition. I I 1 I I LEOPOLD Filter Inspection Report REV.01 Augusta Utilities Department 1/10/14 Ia xylem brand Page 2 of 2 I , The underdrain blocks are in acceptable condition if the outlined steps listed below are followed: I1. Each block that is dirty is pressure washed inside and out. 1, 2.The blocks that have dirt in the primary chamber sealant groove will have to have the sealant removed. IThe sealant will be reapplied at the time of lateral assembly. 3.All troughs fiberglass parts will need the exterior side re coatedwithan approved resin mix by a certified fiberglass technician/or Xylem service rep approvedby Leopold.y I i [ I I .4. f-' I ::::,,,-,..;,Akl.„.. 1 '''''''.'1:*I'l. r-. . '-q , •„,., —, '- II ( 1 f ; I I. 't —k,i ,-'.-1.k,k,t r -`1 i r:Y' Nz-Z.4.- '-:,, _•‘".., 'i`, .. 4.;;..41, I1 I would like to thank the plant personnel for all the help I received when I was at the site.Please contact ' Chris if you have any questions or concerns about this project including any warranties etc. I [ 1 Chris.ball@xyleminc.com I Phone:724 453 2109 IService Sign-Off(Leopold Representative to Flinn) I Leopold Representative Printed Name&Signature:PatrIckKRattigan ! Senior Technical Service Representative i = ).4=3441 4'4" , I I I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION ' PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition,removal, salvage and disposal of existing materials, structures and equipment where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section B. Partial demolition of existing water treatment structures and removal of materials from site C. Demolition and removal of foundation, concrete steps, sidewalk, curb and gutter, and asphaltic paving I D. Disconnecting and capping miscellaneous water and chemical feed piping and electric utilities E. Demolition of existing control equipment,valve controllers and actuators and miscellaneous valves ' F. Demolition of filter control panels 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02200—Excavation,Filling and Grading B. Section 02936—Grassing C. Section 09900—Painting ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition,removal sequence, and location of salvageable items. Indicate location and type of construction for barricades and fences C. Permits and Certificates: 1. . Permits and notices authorizing building demolition 2, Certificates of severance of utility service ' 3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit underrovisions of Section 01720,Project Record Documents P B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions 1416-0002050Danolition 02050-1 Z EL ' —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 02050. DEMOLITION 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of structures,safety of adjacent structures, dust control, and disposal B. Obtain required permits from authorities C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks,or hydrants without written permission from Owner E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Sections 01010, Summary of Work and 01310, Construction Schedules. B. Schedule work to avoid disruption of water scheduled treatment td plant operations during demolition of existing building, systems and equipment , C. Provide detailed descriptions for demolition and removal procedures 1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill,required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work 3. Remove and replace defective work 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing B. Provide products as specified or as required to complete cutting and patching operations C. Inspectiori. 1. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching 2. After uncovering work,inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products,or performance of the work ' ZEL 1416-00 02050 Demolition 02050-2 —ENGINEERS— ' 1 t Imo. SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION I 3. Reprt unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to.tlhe Engineer in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Engineer has provided further instructions I D. Preparation: 1. . Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value of integrity of the affected portion of the Work I . Provide devices and methods to protect other portios:of the Project from damage: 3. Provide protection frotn the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water I 4. Execute-fitting and adjustment of products toprovide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions,tolerances and finishes 5. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide I completed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents 6. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit and other penetrations through surfaces IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS IA. Fill Material: Use on site fill material under provisions of Section 02200,Excavating Filling and Backfilling I ( PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION IA. Verify areas to be demolished are unoccupied and discontinued in use IB. Do not commence work until conditions are acceptable to Engineer 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Provide,erect, and maintain tenlporaty barriers,enclosures,security fences and shoring at demolition locations in accordance with Sion 01500, Construction Facilities and, Temporary Controls to protect personnel IB. Protect existing structures and electrical service which are not to be demolished ' C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing telephone, electrical, instrumentation and control systems in service during construction ID. Protect designated trees and plants from damage E. Mark location of existing utilities IF. Arrange for and verify termination of utility services to include removing meters ' Ia�c 400205ODenovtio 02050-3 Z E L. I —ENGINEERS-- 1 SECTION.02050 DEMOLITION G. Remove items scheduled to be salvaged for Owner, and place in designated storage area 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to Owner access. Maintain protected egress and access at all times C. Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust where applicable. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose D. Do not use water to extent causing flooding, contaminated runoff,or icing E. Break concrete and masonry into sections less than 3 feet in any dimension , F. Repair damage to adjacent structures structures exposed by demolition work G. Parge walls or adjacent p H. Make neat saw cuts, 1 inch in depth, around areas of concrete to be removed,where remaining concrete is to be incorporated into new work I. Remove existing exposed piping and electrical wiring and conduit to be abandoned to structural surface, cut flush,and finish to match existing surfaces ' J. Remove buried piping,wiring, and conduit to be abandoned as required for the Work. Plug the remainder flush. Wiring to be abandoned ed shallberemoved from the conduit. Conduit designated for reuse shall remain,other it shall be removed 3.4 DISPOSAL A. Remove demolition debris daily B. Do not.store or burn materials on-site C. Transport demolition debris to disposal area 3.5 SALVAGE A. Carefully remove items to be salvaged and or reused in Work or to be delivered to Owner'sstorage:. 1. Store and protect items indicated on drawings or specified a to he reused s in 2. Replace in kind with new items any item damagedthrough removal, storage, or handling 3. Do not reuse materials or equipment not specifically indicated or specified to be reused ZEL 02050-4 —ENGINEERS— ' 1436A002Q5077emo1@ion SECTION 02050. DEMOLITION ' B. Preparation of ent for Storage: 1. Identify each componaent,with markings or tags to show its position in the assembly and the assembly of which it belongs ' 2. Bundle pump column and shaft sections for convenient storage and handling and provide with platforms,lifting devices and supports to prevent damage and deformation 3. Place small parts in wooden boxes and clearly mark contents on the outside 4. Thoroughly clean and dry equipment 5. Remove oil from oil-lubricated bearings and gear boxes and replace with storage ' oil 6. Grease grease-lubricated bearings 7. Coatunnpainted.surfaces with 2 coats of rust-preventive compound 8. Replace any breather plug with solid plug ' 9. Megger test motor windings,attach report of the test results to the unit and furnish one to the Engineer 10. Attach unit to suitable crate bottom 11. Enclose unit in polyethylene film and seal all seams and the film to the base of the unit with tape 12. Construct crate of wooden slats around"top and sides of unit 13. Attach permanent instruction tag fo outside of crate stating"This unit has been prepared for storage-replace oil,vent plugs and lubricant in accordance with manufacturei4s c s before startup" ILstru 3.6 SITE DEMOLITION ' A. Disconnect,remove,cap and identify designated utilities within demolition area B. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of two feet below finished grade C. Remove existing trees where shown D. Remove existing piping to the limits,shown E. Remove asphalt paving, curb, gutter, sidewalk and other concrete slabs to facilitate construction ' F: Remove fencing fabric to be reinstalled in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect under provisions of Section 01600,Materials and Equipment ' G. Backfill areas excavated caused as a result of demolition,in accordance with Section 02200,Excavating Filling and Backfilling H. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours as shown on Drawings I. Remove demolished materials from site I 1416-0002050 Demolition 02050-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 02050 I DEMOLITION J. Do not bum or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition I K. Seed disturbed areas under provisions of Section 02936,Grassing 3.7 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION I A. General: 1. Remove,relocate and extend existing installation to accommodate new construction 2. Remove abandoned wiring back to nearest outlet or device that is to remain or back to source of supply 3. Remove existing filter consoles and associated wiring and piping. B. Existing electrical service: 1. Work by Georgia Power: a. Remove two poles and relocate overhead power line b. Remove and relocate three site lighting poles 2. Work by Contractor: 1 a. Remove and relocate engine/generator for temporary use during construction b. Itemove,,salvage and transport engine/generator and auto transfer;switch to storage at[Water Treatment Plant)site after neis permanent sere is installed c. Remove and dispose underground fuel storage tank I d. Remove and relocate underground service entrance cables, conduits,and any appurtenances. Provide standby power conduit and cables for temporary use during construction. Completely remove temporary service I after new permanent service is installed C. Existing telephone service: ' 1. Remove and relocate underground telephone service cable 111 D. Other site electrical: I 1. Remove and relocate electric gate and accessories 2. Remove and replace underground telemetry wiring along east side of water treatment building I E. Existing Lab,Power Room and Entry: 1. Remove and relocate panelboard "L-UPS" 2. Remove lighting,receptacles, switches,miscellaneous electrical, and accessories I to facilitate construction of new facilities 3. Remove motor control center sections as shown on Drawings 4. Remove automatic transfer switch I 1416-00 02050 Demolition 02050-6 Z E L—ENGINEERS— ' I 1 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION 3.8 BUILDING DEMOLITION A. Remove existing doors and hardware where indicated on the Drawings B. Saw cut and remove existing concrete filter washwater troughs. Provide temporary supports as required to prevent damage to existing walls or floors ' C. Saw cut and remove portion of existing filter bottom to the limits shown D. Remove existing equipment pads in Blower Room ' E. Reference drawings for demolition of other miscellaneous building components to facilitate construction of new facilities ' 3.9 PROCESS EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS DEMOLITION A. Filters: ' 1., Remove existing filter media 2x Remove existing filter bottoms 3; Remove existing filter sweeps and piping 1 4. Remove existing filter control valves 5. Remove system piping aid electrical under provisions of this section END OF SECTION 1 i 1 i 1 1416-0002050 Dernohtion 02050-7 Z E L t —ENGINEERS- 1 I 1 1 I SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances,materials and supervision, and in performing all operations in connection with clearing, grubbing, and topsoil stripping in strict accordance with this section of the Ispecifications,the applicable drawings and terms and conditions of the Contract. The Contractor is required to contact the ONE CALL CENTER in the State of Georgia. Call 1-800-282-7411. I1.2 GENERAL I A. Operations shall be conducted in a manner that will provide for the safety of employees and others. B. Existing utility lines,paving or structures to remain shall be safeguarded and protected I from damage, and supported if necessary. C. Prior to any work, the Contractor shall obtain necessary permits for work in the area or Ishall ascertain that the permits have otherwise been obtained. D. Classification of Excavation: All excavation in connection with site work will be I considered unclassified common excavation. ` 1.3 SITE CONDITIONS IA. The area to be cleared and grubbed is shown schematically on the Drawings or specified below. I1.4 REFERENCES A. Latest edition of the"Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia" I1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances,rules,regulations and laws of local,municipal, state or federal authorities having jurisdiction. B. Layout work shall be done under supervision of a Civil Engineer or Registered Land I Surveyor,registered in Georgia. C. Transit and measuring devices shall be calibrated to layout site and construction work. I PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 EQUIPMENT 1416.00 02100 Site Preparation 02100-1 ZEL I -ENGINEERS- SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall furnish equipment of the type normally used in clearing and grubbing operations including,but not limited to,tractors, dozers,chippers,trucks, loaders, and root rakes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install erosion and sedimentation control structures as shown on the Drawings. ' B. Protect all trees,vegetation,structures,utilities, and buildings not designated for removal for demolition. ' 3.2 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A. Topsoil (top 6"—8" of material)is to be removed from all cleared and grubbed areas and ' placed in designated stockpile areas as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall then grade the entire work site to conform, in general,to the finish elevations shown on the Plans. B. Shape topsoil stockpiles to drain without ponding water. ' C. Where trees are indicated to remain, stotopsoil stripping at drip line. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Construct tree protection barricades,minimum 3'-0"high around individual trees and groups of trees designated to remain. Construct barricades at drip line. ' B. Protect tree root systems from damage due to deleterious materials caused by run-off or spillage during mixing, use or discarding of construction materials or drainage from stored materials. Protect root systems form compaction,flooding,erosion or excessive wetting. , 3.4 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES TO REMAIN A. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees,hand excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots. Relocate roots in backfill areas. If large, main lateral roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation limits, bend and relocate without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately 3"back from new construction. ' B. Allow no exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is places; provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in moist condition and temporarily support and protect from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill. S • C. Prune braches in accord with standard horticultural practice to balance loss to root system 1416-00 02100 Site Preparation 02100-2 Z E L -ENGINEERS- SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION ' caused by damage or cutting of root system. Engage qualified arborist approved by the Engineer to prune branches. 3.5 REPAIR FOR DAMAGED TREES A. Engage a qualified arborist approved by the Engineer to perform tree repair work. B. Make repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees. ' C. Remove dead trees and damaged trees in construction area which are determined by the tree arborist to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern. 3.6 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ' A. Clear and grub each area before excavating. All trees,herbaceousowth and stumps are to �' P be chipped for mulch. Mulch will be stockpiled in the areas designated on the Plans or used ' for erosion control as required. All other debris is to be removed to an approved landfill. B. Materials to be removed from the project site include, but are not limited to trash, organic matter,construction waste materials(i.e.paving, concrete miscellaneous structures,houses), debris and abandoned utilities. C. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots larger than 1 1/2 ' \ inches in diameter to the depth specified,and matted roots from the areas to be grubbed. 1. In the clear well and settling basin areas,stumps,roots,logs or other timber 11/2 inches and over in diameter,matted roots and other debris not suitable for foundation purposes,shall be excavated and removed to a depth not less than 24 inches below any structure or slab, 18"below any subgrade,shoulder or slope;and to a depth of 12 inches below finish grade in areas to be grassed. 2. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps and roots,shall be refilled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform to the surrounding ground surface. 3. Grubbing wil not be required in areas other than those occupied by current,and ' proposed construction and graded and grassed areas. D. All foundations and planking embedded in the ground shall be removed and disposed. Butts of utility poles shall be removed. E. Landscaping features shall include,but not limited to, fences, cultivated trees and shrubbery, property corners, man made improvements and signs. The Contractor shall take extreme 1 care in moving landscape features and promptly re-establishing these features. F. Surface rocks and boulders shall be grubbed from the soil and removed from the site if not suitable as rip rap. 1416-0002100sucP tion _.. 02100-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION G. The entire construction area shall be grabbed by heavy tractors with root rakes. Raking shall generally proceed along the contour rather than up anddown slopes so as to inhibit soil erosion. F. Wheic the tree limbs interfere with utility wires,..or where the trees to be felled are in close proximity to utility wires,the tree Shall be taken down in sections to eliminate the possibility of damage to the utility. G. Any work pertaining to utility poles shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate , utility. • H. All fences adjoining any excavation or embankment that, in the Contractor's opinion, may , be damaged or buried, shall be carefully removed,stored and replaced. Any fencing that,in the Engineer's opinion,is significantly damaged shall be replaced with new fence material. I. Stumps and roots shall be grubbed and removed to a depth not less than two feet below wade.. All holes or cavities which extend below the subgrade elevation of the proposed work shall be filled with crushed rock or other suitable material, compacted to the same density as the surrounding material. J. The Contractor shall exercise special precautions for the protection and preservation of trees, cultivated shrubs, sod, fences, etc. situated within the limits of the construction area but not directly within excavation and/or fill limits. The Contractor shall be held liable for any damage the Contractor's operations have inflicted on such property. K. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to existing improvements resulting from Contractor's operations. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. The debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing operation shall be removed from the site and disposed of in accordance with all requireMents of federal, state, county and municipal regulations. No debris of any kind shall be deposited in any stream or body of water,or in any street or alley. No debris shall be deposited upon anyprivate property. In no ease shall any material or debris be left on the Project, shoved onto abutting private properties or buried on the Project. B. When approved in writing by the Engineer and when authorized by the proper authorities, ' the omtraetor may dispose of such debris by burning en the Project site provided all requirements set forth by the governing authorities are met The authorization to burn shall not relieve the Contractor in any way from damages which result from the Contractor's operations. END OF SECTION • :41$00 02100 S e rr ton 02100-4 Z E I.. —ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes the following: 1. Preparing of subgrade for building slabs,walks,and pavements. ' 2. Drainage fill course for support ofbuilding slabs is included as part of this Work. 3. Excavating and backfilling of trenches within building lines. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02100- Site Preparation B. Section 02205 -Trench Excavation and Backfill C. Section 02210- Erosion Control D. Section 02936- Grassing 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates B. ASTM C136- Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates C. ASTM D1241 -Material for Soil Aggregate Subbase,Base, and Surface Courses ' D. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ' E. ASTM D1557 -Modified Method Standard Test Methods for Linear Density of Textile . Fibers ' F, ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method G. ASTM D2922 -Nuclear Methods for in Place"Density" H. ASTM D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus I. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity ' J. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining ApparentOpening O enin Size of a Geotextile I. ' 141641002200 Excavation,Filing Aid Backfilling 02200-1 Z E —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 022.00_ EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING K. ASTM D6938 -Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth) L. AASHTO M288 -Geotextile Specifications for Highway Applications M. AASHTO T180-Moisture-Density Relations Of Soils , 1.4 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION ' A. All excavation shall be unclassified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL A. The bedding material shall be well-graded crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the I requirements of ASTM C-33, Gradation 67 (3/4 inches to No. 4). 2.2 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL • A. General Material forfill and backfilling shall beselectedfrom the excavated material, and shall be free of trash,lumber,or other debris,roots and other organic,perishable or deleterious matter. B. Borrow Material shall be selected from excavated on-site materials to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular application for which it is to be used, The material shall consist of sandy soils or sand-clay soils capable of being readily sped and compacted to the required densities and shall be free of roots,trash and any other deleterious material. The material shall be obtained from on-site excavation as approved by the Engineer. Borrow material shall be stored as necessary, and shall be graded and maintained so that adequate and proper drainage and a neat appearance shall exist at all times. C. Topsoil shall consist of a natural material that occurs in surface deposits of limited depth, and for elevated areas,it shall be composed of natural mixtures of clay and soil binder with sand. Topsoil shall contain no more than 25 percent of clay and shall be free of stones larger than 2 inches in diameter,roots,excessive vegetation, rubbish or other deleterious matter.The Engineer shall approve topsoil before being used on the work. Topsoil as described, shall be excavated from all areas to be disturbed,whether for structures,piping, site grading, or paving, and it shall be stored for later use. Stockpiled topsoil shall be placed to provide good drainage. 2.3 SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE A. Woven geotextile fabric,manufactured for separation applications,made from , poli olefins or polyesters; elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following,measured per test method: 1. Survivability: Class 2;AASHTO M 288. 1416-00 02200 Excavation,Falling And Backfilling 02200-2 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve,maximum;ASTM D 4751. ' 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second,minimum;ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours exposure;ASTM D 4355. 2.4 RIP RAP A. The stone material for rip-rap shall be in the size range of 4"diameter to 60 lbs. stone. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. General: The excavation shall conform to dimensions and elevations appropriate for the roadway or structure. Excavation shall be continued to the elevation necessary for firm ' support. The excavated surface beneath the structures and pavement shall be proofrolled in four passes using a minimum of 10 yards of material loaded on a pan excavator or equivalent. Any soft spots shall be filled and compacted to 98%ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). The resulting surface shall be brought back to appropriate grade with suitable fill from the excavated material and recompacted to 98%of the density measured by ASTM D1557. B. Excavation for Walls and Footings shall extend a sufficient distance to allow for the placing and removal of forms,installation of services and for inspection,except where ' the concrete wall or footing may be authorized to be deposited directly against excavated surfaces. C. Dewatering and Drainage of Excavated Areas: Grading in the vicinity of structures shall 1 be controlled to prevent surface water from running into excavated areas. Dewatering by pumping or wellpointing from excavated areas shall be performed by the Contractor to provide a stable excavation and a firm pit or trench bottom. Dewatering shall incur ' no extra cost to the Owner. 1. All dewatering methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer as to capacity and effectiveness. Water removed from the excavated areas shall be ' conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of discharge where it will neither cause injury to public health,public or private property,the surface or use of streets by the public, or work completed or in progress. D. Protection against Flotation: To guard against the danger of flotation of empty or partially empty structures due to a high water table, all dewatering operations shall be ' continued without interruption until such time as sufficient backfill has been placed or construction has been completed sufficiently to overcome the buoyancy effect of a completely empty structure that is entirely submerged. ' E. Shoring and Protection of Excavations: Shoring shall be provided by the Contractor as necessary to protect life or property. All existing structures, streets,pipes, and foundations which are not to be removed or relocated shall be adequately protected or ' replaced by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall adequately protect the work under construction and�1the safety of his workmen in excavations by the 1416-00 02200 Excavation,Filling And Backfilling 02200-3 1 ZEL —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 02200 1 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING use of suitable sheeting, shoring,bracing, or by sloping the banks in accordance with the angle of repose of the soil. 1. The Contractor alone is responsible for any damage or injury resulting from his failure to either provide adequate protection from the excavation or to comply with OSHA requirements and guidelines. F, Excess Material: Excess material to be used for backfill or stored for later use shall be stockpiled.Excavated material shall be deposited a sufficient distance from the side of excavation walls to prevent excessive surcharge on the wall. Excess excavated material OR material not suitable for backfill or filling shall be disposed of by the Contractor off site, graded and grassed as required by Section 02210,Erosion Control. Disposal of the excess material is the responsibility of the Contractor. ' 3.2 FILL A. Earth fill shall be placed in layers/lifts not to exceed 8 inches in thickness. Each layer shall be compacted at optimum moisture content in a manner approved by the Engineer. After compaction,the dry weight per cubic foot for each layer shall be as specified for backfilling. B, Roadways: Roadways shall consist of a compacted subgrade. The top 8"of the subgrade shall be compacted to 98%density as measured by Modified Proctor,ASTM D1557. 3.3 BACKFILLING A. The Engineer shall be notified before backfilli ng in order that the workmay be inspected before it is covered. After completion of the inundation footings,walls, or pipe work, and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleared of all trash and debris. Symmetrical backfill loading shall be maintained. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action or eccentric loading upon ur against a structure or pipe. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not in excess of 8 inch thickness,and shall have an optimum moisture content when compacted. After compaction,the dry weight per cubic foot for each layer shall be at least 95%of the maximum Laboratory Dry Weight per cubic foot, as determined by ASTM D1557, exceptthat backfill under slabs,walls, footings,sidewalks and pavement shall be at least 98%of ASTM D1557. 3.4 GRADING A, General: Site grading shall consist of excavating and placing all necessary materials outside the limits of the structure. Site grading shall be completed when all surfaces are inconformity with the contours as shown on the drawings,smooth, firm, containing the specified materials, Site grading shall also include all excavation, filling and compacting required for constrtiction of temporary roads. 1416-0002200 Fxcavalion,Filling And$ackfdling 02200-4 Z E —ENGINEERS . I SECTION 02200 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING I B. Topsoil work shall not be performed when the soil is so wet that the filth(physical condition)of the soil will be destroyed, such as moisture content, degree of aeration and rate of water infiltration. I3.5 RIP RAP A. Designated areas shall be riprapped for a minimum of 5 square yards each. Areas to I receive riprap shall have a geotextile separation fabric beneath the riprap stone.. The area to be covered shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions, depressions and debris. The fabric shall be placed with the long dimension running up I the slope, and overlapped a minimum of 1 foot at joints. Fabric shall be anchored in place with pins of a type recommended by the fabric manufacturer, which are placed not more than 3 inches from the centerline of the overlap. Fabric shall be placed loosely so I as to give and avoid stretching or tearing during placement of riprap. Fabric shall be protected from clogging due to clay, silt or other contaminants and shall be cushioned with sand of sufficient depth to protect the fabric during placement of riprap. Stones I shall be dropped not more than 3 feet during construction.Riprap shall be placed to form a uniform surface not less than 8 inches thick,with a tolerance of plus 4 inches. IB. Embankment: This item consists of placing in fills and embankments for roadways, and other site grading work; materials removed from the various excavations and borrow pits; all as specified herein and in accordance with the appropriate lines, grades, Isections, contours and dimensions. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION METHODS I A. General: During construction, embankments, fills and excavations shall be s kept shaped p and drained. Ditches and drains along the subgrade shall be maintained in such manner I as to drain effectively at all times. Grading shall be done so that the surface of the ground will be properly sloped to prevent water from running into the excavations for structures or pipe lines; any water which accumulates in excavations shall be removed promptly. Excavated materials shall not be stockpiled within a distance from the edge I of any excavation less than 1-1/2 times the depth of the excavation. Suitable material removed from excavation shall be used,where feasible,in the formation of I embankments,fills, subgrades, shoulders,backfills,and site grading; excess material from excavation not required for such uses, or materials not suitable for such uses, shall be stockpiled. Any wetting,hauling, scarifying,mixing, shaping,rolling,tamping or other operation incidental to the following requirements,which,in the judgment of the IEngineer, are necessary to obtain the specified results, shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 1 I B. Site Grading: Except as otherwise specified herein, all disturbed areas on the site shall be finished off to a uniformly smooth surface, free from abrupt,irregular surface changes. The degree of smoothness shall be that ordinarily obtainable from power grader operations. The finished surface shall not be more than 0.20 foot above or below I1416-00 02200 Excavation,Filing And Backfilling 02200-5ZEI- -ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING I the established grade. There shall be no roots,wasted building materials,trash or other unsightly matter projecting through or visible at the surface. I C. Ditches shall be cut accurately to line, grade, and cross section. Any excessive ditch excavation shall be backfilled to grade with material approved by the Engineer, . ' consisting of suitable excavated soil,borrow or stones. The requirements of paragraph '`Site Gradine above,shall apply to ditches except as follows: The degree of smoothness ness.shall be that usually obtainable withstringline or hand raking methods;the I finished surface of ditch slopes shall not be more than 0.10 foot above or below the appropriate elevations. D. Embankment: Sloping ground surface,steeper than one vertical to four horizontal,on 1 which embankment or fill is to be placed, shall be plowed,stepped,or broken up n such manner that the a ba�ent material will bond with the existing surface.= App d material, consisting of earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel,clay gravel, shale,or or other clods granular material (not containing muck,trees, stumps,brush,matted roots of earth or stones)shall be placed in horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in depth. Each layer shall be spread uniformly and tamped and compacted to 90 I percent of the density measured by Modified Proctor ASTM D1557. Tamping shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers or mechanical hand tampers.Final compaction may be by an approved power roller weighing not less than 10 tons,except where insufficient cover may cause damage to pipe. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the soil moisture density tests and for the in- place tests of filled and backfilled areas. Tests shall be permed by an independent laboratory approved by the.Engineer and shall be performed in accordance with the following: (1) Laboratory Density Tests on soils shall conform to ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T180,METHOD A, and(2)Field Density Tests accurately reflect the in place density. Two Laboratory certified copies each of the moisturedensityto the tests and the in-place tests shall be forwarded promptly by the Laboratory Engineer. I B. Tests for in-place density shall consist of 3 laboratory tests and 12 field density tests. The Owner will pay directly to the testing laboratory only for tests in excess of this number,except that where there are retests on materials that failed to meet the I specifications,the retesting of rejected materials and reinstalled work shall be done at the Contractor's expense, I C. The Engineer, at his discretion,may order tests and inspections to be performed durir ng the progress of the work, or at the completion of any individual unit of the work, the time of final inspection of the entire project. Random spot cheeks:of elevation and I slopes shall be conducted by ordinary surveying methods utilizing an established benchmark. Random spot-checks a s ade o�mf ta tock andil measuring the thess shall be ickness of topsoil by cutting through the surface w p I exposed. 1416.00 02200 Excavation,Filling And Backfilling 02200-6 ZEA I —ENGINEERS— SECTION 02200 EXCAVATION,FILLING AND BACKFILLING` ' 3.8 GRASSING A. Areas'disturbed by construction operations shall be grassed in accordance with.Section 02936, Grassing Areas to be grassed shall be planted,maintained,and shall utilize lime, ' fertilizer,proper and approved grass and mulch suficient to produce a cover suitable to eliminate significant erosion. ' 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Inspection of each area of the site work as itis completed shall not constitute final ' acceptance of the item or area. The Contract(3r shall maintain all items in such condition as to be ready for final inspection from the time of completion until the final acceptance of the entire project. ' 3.10 RESTORATION OF PRIVATE PROPERTY ' A. The Contractor shall carefully restore,all property defaced by operations or actions of any of his agents or employees. Such restoration shall shallinclude seeding,sodding,and transplanig of lawns,hedges or ornamental plantings, and the repair or replacement of ' ether private facili •ties in such manner as to meet the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. No structures or trees shall be removed without the consent of the property owner or until condemnation procedure,if necessary,has been ' completed. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1416-00 62200 Excavation,Filling And Hackfilimg 02200-7 Z E —ENGINEERS— ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02205 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL I .. R PA T 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavation,trenching, complete and continual dewatering of ' excavation, sheeting,bracing and shoring of sides of trench excavation,backfilling around site utilities including all pipelines, electrical conduits and duct banks, and disposal of excess excavated material. 1 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D1557-Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using ' Modified Effort(56,000 ft-lbf/ft3)-Modified Proctor Test. B. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION 1 A. All excavation shall be unclassified, except rock excavation. B. Rock Excavation: Rock excavation shall be defined as the removal of material that cannot be excavated without systematic drilling and blasting or jack hannnering. Any ' boulder larger than 1/2 c.y. generally is also classified as rock.All excavated rock shall be removed from the site. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Written reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER,with ' copy to CONTRACTOR, documenting testing and/or inspection results. Tests shall include: 1. Test reports on borrow material. 2. Gradation analysis for granular backfill and subbase materials. 3. Field reports;in-place soil density tests will be performed by a representative of OWNER ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: CONTRACTOR will em=ploy and pay for a qualified ' independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. 1416-0002205 TrenchExcavalion and Backfill 02205-1 Z E A ' -ENGINEERS- wialowrimommoomm 1 SECTION 02205 I TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Existing Utilities:Locate existing underground ound utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place,provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. B. CONTRACTOR shall notify One Call Center in the State of Georgia 1-800-282-7411, ur ' three working days priorto starting any excavation with power equipment, 1. Should uncharted,, or,inco ectly harte $"piping or caber utilities he encountered dig excavation,cons It utility Owner immediately for directions.Cooperate in keeping res , tive services°and facilities , with OWNER and utility cornpdtrp in operation.Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities tic upled by OWNER or others during occupied hours except when permitted in writing by ENGINEER, and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 3. Provide minimum of 2 working days notice to ENGINEER and receive written notice to proceed before i testing any utility. 4. I)einolish and completely remove from Site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. - Right of Way.Markers: All Property corners,right of way markers C. and Corners, and easement markers shall be flagged and protected from all construction activity or shall be reset by a qualified registered land surveyor iii the State of Georgia at no additional expense to the Owner if disturbed or damaged as aresultof construction. D. Use of Explosives: Permission,from authorities having jurisdion where blasting is necessarry,it shall be done in accordance with local ordinances by Skilled and precautions shall be taken to avoid damage. Suitable mats shall be provided to confine, within the limits of the excavations, all materials lifted by blasting, A log shall be I recorded to define horizontally andvertically where rock is encountered. The recorded log shall be made available i0 the Engineer at all times. Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to blasting. 1 E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this Work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate weaning'ligh as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from. damage caused by.settlement,lateral movement,undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 3. Perform excavation by hand within drip line of large trees to remain.Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible.Maintain moist I condition for root system,and cover exposed:roars WO moistened burlap. 1 ZEL 02205-2 7476-00 02205 Trench Excavation and Backfill -ENGINEERS- I :SECTION 02205. TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL ' A. Material for fill and backfilling shall consist of the native excavated material,if suitable, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other debris,roots and other organic,perishable or ' deleterious matter. 2.2 SELECTED REFILL MATERIAL FOR TRENCH BACKFILL ' A. Selected refill material shall be used to refill the trench bottom to a minimum depth of 6"where rock excavation is required in the trench. Such material shall be crushed stone or gravel ofs€itable..gradation free from sod, sticks,roots and other organic,perishable 111 or deleterious matter. Selected refill material shall be#57 stone or smaller. 2.3 BEDDING AND HAUCHING MATERIALS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE ' A. Unless ecic ed otherwise bedding°and haunching materials shall be crushed stone sized between No. 57 and No. inclusive. ' 2.4 FILTER FABRIC WOVEN TYPE A. Filter:fabricassociated,with bedd shall be 'polypropylene woven fabric. The lahrc ' shall be a high modulus type with good separation capabilities. The fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and naturally occurring chemicals alkalies and acids. ' B. The fabric shall have an equivalent opening size EOS of 20 to 45. C. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 500X,Amoco 2002,Exxon GTF-200 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. General: The excavation shall conform to dimensions and elevations appropriate for the pipeline or structure. Excavation shall not be carried below the elevation necessary for ' construction. B. Trench Excavation: Trenches shall be excavated true to line and grade. Trenches to ' receive pipe having nominal diameter of less than 24"shall not be less than 12"wider and pipes greater than 24"shall not be less than 12"°wider nor more than 16"wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid.therein. ' 1. The maximum width specified applies to the width at or below the level of the top of the pipe. The width of the french above the pipe may be as wide as necessary to provide room for proper installation of the work. If the site has width constraintsor easement limitations,the proper shoring of the trench wall 1416-00 02205 Trench Excavation end Beckfill 02205-3 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 02205. I TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL shall be necessary. The Contractor shall comply with the safety requirements of I OSHA. 2. The bottoms of trenches for water lines shall be 4"to 6"of loose native material to accept the utility main. Bell holes and excavations for joints shall be dug by I hand, These holes shall be so spaced and sized as to permit first class workmanship on the joint and to insure that the maximum length of pipe possible will rest on the bottom of the trench. 3. If the trench bottom is determined to be unsuitable to receive the pipe, a minimum of 6"of unsuitable material shall be removed (in 6"lifts,maxieaum of 2')and replaced with either borrow material or selected refill material as directed by the Engineer. C. Dewatering and Drainage of Excavated Areas; Grading in the vicinity of die work shall be controlled to prevent surface water from running into excavated areas. DewateralagI. by pumping or welipointing from excavated areas shall be performed by the Contractor to provide astable excavation and a firm pit or trench bottom. Dewatering shall incur no extra cost to the Owner. al ofe En as to I 1. All dewatering methods shall be subject to the.approv � capacity and effectiveness. Waterremov"ed from the excavated areas shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of discharge where it will neither cause injury to public.health*public or private.property,the surface or use of streets by the public or work completed or in progress. D. Protectiou..Against Flotation To guard against the danger of flotation of"emptyy or partially empty pipe or struck due,to a high water table,all dewatering operations shall be continued without interruptionuntil such time as sufficient backfill has been placed over the top of the pipe or aroundstructures to overcome the buoyancy effect of a completely empty pipe or structurewhich is entirely submerge:. • E. Shoring and;Protcctkoai of Excavations: Shoring shall be provided lty the Contractor as ' necessary to protect life or property All existing structures,streets,pipes,hydrants,; valves and foundations which are not to be removed or relocated shall be adequately protected or replaced by the Contractor without cost to the Owner; The Contractor shall I adequatuly protect the work under construction and the safety of his workmen in excavations by the use of suitable sheeting,shoring and bracing,or by sloping the batiks in accordance with the angle of repose of the soil if siteconditions permit. The I Contractor alone is responsible for any damage or injury resulting from his failure either to provide adequate protection from the exoavatior or to comply with OSHA requirements. ' 3.2 ROCK EXCAVATION A. Replacement Depth: Where rock is eeountered in the trench bottom,replacement depth I excavation shall be carried below the bottom of the pipe a minimum distance of 6"for pipe less than 24" and 9" for pipe larger than 24".02205-4 ZEL I 1416-00 02205 Trench Excavation cad Backfill —ENGINEERS— I I' SECTION 02205 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL IB. Over Excavation: The over excavation of rock within the trench beyond what is necessary for the correct grade of the pipe shall be refilled with selected refill material at Ino extra cost to the owner. 3.3 LENGTH OF TRENCH OPENING I A. In exeavat g ter pipelines the excavation shall at all times be finished to the required grade for VI adequate distance in advance of the completed pipeline.Unless otherwise peernaitted by ENGINEER,not more than 50 feet of trench shall be open at onetime in I advance ofthe pipe.The length of the street which-.may be occupied by the construction work at anyone iime.will be based on'the requirements of use of the street by the publio No more than 600 consecutive feet of length of the streetshall be occupied at one time, I and vehicle traffic through the street shall not be entirely stopped without the permission of ENGINEER. I3.4 METHOD OF EXCAVATION IN EARTH A. .All excavation shall be by open cut froin.the surface,except in.special cases whereI tunneling under pavement or structures may be required or where tunneling`under the root system shall be required for tree root protection.All excavation shall be made in such a.mannO and to.Well depth,lenges and width as shall give ample room for building the structures,for bracing,sheeting, and supporting the sides of the excavation '' for pumping and drainage of groundwater and sewage which may be encountered,and for the removal of all materials excavated. Special care shall:be taken so that the soil below the bottom of structures to be built shall be left undisturbed to provide.a'firm bed' Ifor construction. 3.5 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS IA. Stockpile-excavated materials'a eptable for backfill:and fill where directed..Place, grade,and shape stockpiles for proper:drainage. . Locate and retain soil.materiala away from edge of excavations.Do not store Ii within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. I3.6 BEDDING I A. Place specified beddtng.materials under the pure, in the haunches along the sides of the pipe, and over the pipe to tz level 1 foot above the pipe.The.material directly below the pipe shalt be compacted.The material in.the haunch area shall be placed in layers not to I exceed 6 inches M depth,and shall be compacted to 95 percent of its maximum unit weight. 1416-00 02205 T7cach Excavation and Backfill _ ... 02205-5 Z E L I —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 02205 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 3.7 BACKFILLING TRENCHES ' A. BACKFILLING(Above the Top of the Pipe): The Engineer shall be notified before backfllhng in order that the work may be inspected before it is covered. After completion of the pipe work, andprior to backfilling,the excavation shall be cleared of all trash and debris. Symmetrical backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not in excess of 8"thickness after compaction,and shall have an optimum moisture content When compacted All backfilling of thetrench,:including the width of the sloped'banks,: shall be compacted as directed, After compaction, the dry weight per cubic foot for each layer shall be at least 90%of the maximum Laboratory Dry Weight per cubic foot,as determined by ASTM D 698. B. When directed by the Engineer, selected refill material shall be used to refill the trench bottom where unsuitable soil is encountered. Refill material shall be a minimum of 6". ' Where unsuitable material is greater than 6"below the bottom of the pipe,material shall be removed and refilled in 6"layers to a maximum of 2' as directed by the Engineer. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing during Construction: hle°w testing service to inspect and backfill or construction work is approve each subgrade and fill layer before further performed. B. Tests for compaction and density shall be conducted by an independent testing ' laboratory'approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay for all testing. 1. The soils testing laboratory is responsible for the following: a. Field compaction testing shall be based on using the maximum dry density determined by the Standard Proctor Compaction Test in accordance with ASTM D698. b. Determination of in-place backfill density shall be done in accordance ASTM TM D1 556,"Density and Unit Weight ofSoil In Place by the Sand-Cone Method",ASTM D2937,"Density of Soil In Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method"or ASTM D2922,"Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)". c. Test frequency for trenches and confined areas of 1 test per two foot vertical lift for every 100 linear feet for pipelines not in roadways. Testing for trench backfill in roadways shall be 1 test per two foot vertical lift for every 25 linear feet or 2 per roadway crossing per lift, minimum. ' d. Inspecting and testing stripped site, subgrades and proposed fill materials. 1 ' ZEL 1416•00 02205 Manch Excavation and Backfill 02205-6 —ENGINEERS— 1 1 SECTION 02205 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ' 2. Contractor's duties relative to testing include: a. Notifying laboratory of conditions requiring testing. b. Coordinating with laboratory for field testing. c. Providing representative fill soil samples to the laboratory for test purposes. Provide 50 pound samples of each fill soil, END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I416-00 02205 Trench Excavation and Backfill 02205-7 Z E I ' —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02210 EROSION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. ' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Under this section shall be included all measures both temporary and permanent to ' control erosion and sedimentation, and protect all surface waters and property both on and off site. This shall include all labor,materials and equipment necessary to meet the requirements of this Section. ' 1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION ACT—DEFINED ' A. It is the intent of this Specification that the Project and the Contractor comply with all applicable requirements of the Latest edition of the"Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia". B. The Handbook for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia further defines practices and requirements. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all sediment and erosion control measures on the project site during construction. The Contractor is responsible ' for any damage caused due to failure to implement these requirements. A Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Permit has been obtained by the Owner so that periodic inspections may be made by the County. The Contractor is to cooperate with the person performing these inspections. 1.4 COORDINATION WITH CONTRACT PLANS ' A. A Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan is included in the Contract Documents and is to be implemented as a part of the procedures necessary to implement requirements ' of the Act and Ordinance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PRODUCTS A.. Filter Fabrics Materials shall be strong rot-proof synthetic fibers formed into a fabric of ' either the woven or non-woven type. Either type of fabric shall be free of any treatment or coating which might significantly alter its physical properties after installation. The fabric shall contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors to make the filaments resistant to ' deterioration resulting from exposure to sunlight or heat. The fabric shall be a pervious sheet of synthetic fibers oriented into a stable network so that the fibers retain their relative position with respect to each other under normal handling, installation, and service conditions. Edges of the fabric shall be finished to prevent the outer yard from I pulling away from the fabric. 1416-00 02210 Erosioa Control 022104 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 02210 1 EROSION CONTROL 1 During all periods of shipment and storage,the fabric shall be strapped in a heavy-duty protective covering which will protect the cloth from sunlight,mud, dust, dirt, and debris. The fabric shall not be exposed to temperatures greater than 140 degrees F. 2,. The fabric shall meet the physical requirements called out in GDOT Specification 171 B. The Wire Support Fence shall be at least 24"high and shall have at least 6 horizontal wires 4x4 W1.5xW1.4 or equal ' C. Posts for Type Sdl-Ns silt fence shall be a minimum of 4 feet long with a 6 foot maximum spacing and may be soft wood, oak or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least ' 2"in dia. or 2"x 2".Nominal oak posts shall be at least 1"thick and steel shall be at least 0.75 lb./ft. D. Wire Staples/Fasteners shall be#17 gauge minimum and shall have a crown at least 3/4 ' inch wide and legs at least 1/2 inch long. Nails for fasteners shall be#14 gauge minimum, 1 inch long with 3/4 inch button heads. Fasteners shall be evenly spaced with at least 4 per post. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Implementation of the requirements of the Act is based on the following principles: ' 1. The disturbed area and the duration of exposure to erosion elements should be minimized. 2. Protect off-site and downstream locating draining systems and natural waterways from the impacts of erosion and sedimentation. 3. Limit the exit velocities of the flow.leaving the site to non-erosive or pre- developed conditions. 4. Design and implement an ongoing inspection and maintenance plan. 3.2 SYMBOLS A. The Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan contains standard symbols for the different types of measures for implementing the Act. These symbols are defined for conditions,design criteria and construction specifications in Sections II and III of the t Handbook. 3.3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS , A. Grading operations shall be conducted in a manner that will minimize the exposure of disturbed soil to wind and rain. The contractor shall make every effort to temporarily stabilize disturbed areas as soon as the desired grade is achieved, and shall sequence operations logically such that exposed areas are utilized for structures or permanently stabilized in a timely manner. All work shall be done in accordance with the latest edition of the"Manual for'Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia". 1416-0002210 Erosion Control 02210-2 Z E.L- —ENGINEERS- 1 I _ SECTION 02210 I EROSION CONTROL B. All disturbed areas shall be grassed by sodding or seeding, fertilizing,mulching and I watering to obtain a ground cover which prevents soil erosion. C. A temporary construction egress pad shall be installed and maintained at any point where I construction vehicles enter a public right-of-way,street or parking area. The pad sill be used to'eliminate mud from the construction area onto public rights-of-way. The pad shall be constructed as shown in the Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control. ID. All measures installed for sediment control shall be checked at the beginning and end of each day when construction is occurring to ascertain that the measures are in place and Ifunctioning properly. E. Removal of Temporary Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Measures: After permanent erosion control features of the work site are complete and ample grass is established,the Itemporary fences, ditch checks, etc. shall be removed. Silt that has collected shall be removed, or when appropriate,regarded, stabilized,and planted. I END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I I 1416-00 02210 Erosion Control 02210-3 Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02500 ASPHALT PAVEMENT ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labor, supervision,equipment,materials and performing all operations in connection with the pavement of the driveway and parking area of this project,in accordance with this section t of the specifications, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates e ates ' B. ASTM D1557-Test methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb Rammer and 18 inch drop C. ASTM D1559-Test Method for Resistance of Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02100-—Site Preparation B. Section 02200-Excavation,Filling&Backfilling 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Test and Inspection Reports: Written reports shall be submitted to Engineer,with copy to Contractor,documenting testing and/or inspection results. Test shall include: ' 1. 2. Certificates of Compliance on all Materials Field Reports; in place base course,binder and surface course density tests. ' 1.5 GENERAL: A. Asphalt Pavement: Asphalt pavement shall consist of the excavation, filling, preparation and further compaction when necessary of the proof-rolled and recompacted subgrade,placing of the graded aggregate base course,application of bituminous prime coat, application of the binder course,tack coat,and an asphaltic concrete surface course and performing other items of construction as indicated or necessary to complete the ' pavement. B. SEASONAL LIMITATIONS: ' No bituminous materials shall be applied for surface treatment between November 10 and April 10, except with written approval of the Engineer. I ' 1416-00 0200 Asphalt Pavemcut 02500-1 ZEL. —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 02500 1 ASPHALT PAVEMENT- C. WEATHER LIMITATIONS: Bituminous mixtures shall not be produced or placed during rainy weather,when the sub gratle or base course is frozen or Shows'any evidence of excess moisture or when the moisture on the surface to be paved would prevent proper bond,nor when the air temperature is less than 45°F.in the shade away from artificial heat. 1.6 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS: - , All work and materials required under this section of the specifications shall conform to the applicable sections of the"Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges" of the Department of Transportation, State of Georgia. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: GDOT Section 400,ASTM D 946. ' B. Aggregate for Base Course: GDOT Standards, Section 815. CIn wGDOT Standards, . C. Aggreg D. Aggregateate for for BiWearingnder Course:ourse: In accordaccordanceance with ith GDOT Standards,SectionSection802802. E. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with GDOT Standards,Section 802. F. Mineral Filler: In accordance with GDOT Standards, Section 883. , G. Primer: In accordance with GDOT Standards, Section 412. H. Tack Coat: Conformingto Section 413 of the Georgia Department of Transportation I Standard Specification. I. Herbicide Treatment: Commercial chemical for week control,registered by ' Environmental Protection Agent'. Providetranular,liquid, or wettable powder form. Conforming to Section 725 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specification. 2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Base Course: Graded Aggregate Base(GAB). C. Binder Course: 2"2201b/sy Superpave or as directed by the Engineer. D. WearingCourse: 1-1/2" 165 ib/sy Superpave or as directed by the Engineer. 1 1416-00 02500 Asphalt Payment 02500-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS-- 1 SECTION 02500 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 SUBGRADE: ' A. Excavation; The Contractor shall excavate the existing material as needed to provide far the base course. All unsuitable excavated materials that eaiot be used in fill areas shall be wasted in spoil areas. Excavation shall be performed in a manner and sequence that ' will provide drainage at all times. All excavation shall be unclassified and considered common excavation for this project B. Grading, Filling and Backfilling: The grading shall conform to the applicable requirements described in detail Section 02100 of these specifications.Filling and backfilling shall conform to Section 02200 of the specifications. C. Protection of Subgrade: The Contractor shall protect the subgrade from damage and shall keep it adequately drained. It shall be kept free from ruts and other depression and in a smooth and compacted condition until the asphaltic binder course has been ' placed. 3.2 GRADED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE: ' A 6"thick graded aggregate e ate base course shall be applied in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 310 of the Georgia DOT Standard p� ations.. Material shall be corapacted to at least 100%of maximum density at glitimum moisture content based upon the Modified Proctor Method,ASTM D-1557. The base shall be drained by installing weeps at low points and intervals not to exceed 50 ft. ' 3.3 BITUMINOUS PRIME: Bituminous prime shall be applied to the finished base course and to existing surface I treatment at a rate of not less than 0.18 and not more than 0.23 gallons per square yard. Application of the bituminous prime shall be in accordance with Section 412 of those specifications. ' 3.4 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BINDER AND SURFACE COURSES: ' A. General: Areas required to be paved shall receive a 2-1/2"Intermediate Course and a 1-1/2"inch compacted thickness surface course. The surface course shall be Asphaltic Concrete, Type F;the intermediate course, Type B. ' B. Mix: The job mix will be determined in accordance with the provisions of Article 828 of the Georgia DOT Specifications and shall require the approval of the Engineer. ' C. Application: Apply the asphaltic concrete surface course in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 400.05, Georgia DOT Specifications. I 1416-CO 02500 Asphalt Pavement 02500-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 02500 ASPHALT PAVEMENT D, Compaction: Compact to at least 98%of hedensity aoshall Hammer laboratory onspecimen each sideof the the same mixture subjected to 50 blows of a standard specimen,based on the Marshall Test Procedure,ASTM D1559. 3.5 ASPHALT DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT OVER TRENCH A. Driveway cuts over trench excavations shall be saw-cut parallel over pipeline. Asphalt driveway replacement shall include 6"compacted crushed stone base over 95%standard proctor compacted backfill with a 2-112"compacted course of asphalt,equal to existing after applying tack coat to stone. B. Limits for drivewayreplacement shall be 4'-0"plus pipe O.D. wide. Disturbance or 1 damage to the driveway outside of the trench limits shall be repaired at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.6 TESTS: A. Materials: The Contractor shall be responsible for having the materials he proposes to furnish tested to demonstrate this conformance to these specifications. Certified copies of Test Reports shall be approved by the Engineer prior to construction. B Compaction and Thickness: Compaction and thickness tests will be made at the ' discretion of,and at locations specified by the Engineer,at no cost to the Owner. 3.7 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY: 1 The Contractor shall carefully restore all property defaced by operation or acts by his agents or employees. Such restoration shall include,but not be limited to seeding, sodding,ornamental planting,repair or replacement of structures,or other facilities and shall be at least equal in quality to the original undisturbed condition. No such cost shall be incurred by the Owner. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1434-00 02500 Aspheh Patty€[cxtt 02500-4 Z E 1. —ENGINEERS-- 1 t1111111111111111101 ....„ I SECTION 02520 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS,CURB AND GUTTER IPART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland cement concrete curbs, gutters and walkways 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200-Excavation,Filling and Backfilling B. Section 02500 Asphalt Pavement I C. Section 03000-Concrete D. Section 07900-Joint Sealants II1.3 RESOURCES A. ASTM A1064- Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire IReinforcement,Plain and Deformed, for Concrete B. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for I Concrete Reinforcement C. ASTM C309- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for I Curing Concrete D. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for IConcrete E. AASHTO M233 -Standard Specification for Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture for Treatment Iof Portland Cement Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. I1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish samples,manufacturer's product data,test reports, and materials' certifications as Irequired in referenced sections for concrete and joint sealants. 111/ I t4tb000zs2oConcrete s� Curb&Gutter 02520-1 .. L -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 02520 1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS,CURB AND GUTTER 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS I A. Traffic Control: 1 1. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 1 2. Utilize flagmen,barricades,warning signs and warning lights as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conformance: All materials shall conform to the applicable section of the Department of 1 Transportation Standard Specification in the State where the Project is located. B. Forms: 1. Use steel,wood,or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms,free of distortion and defects. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. C. Welded Wire Mesh: 1. Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric,ASTM A1064 2. Furnish in flat sheets,not rolls,unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars,ASTM A615, Grade 60. E. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures,bonding materials,curing materials, and others as I required. F. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 07900,Joint Sealtants, 1 for performed expansion joint fillers and sealers. G. Anti-Spalling Compound: Fifty percent(by volume)boiled linseed oil and 50%(by volume)mineral spirits,complying with AASHTO M233. I H. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: 1 1. Complying with ASTM C309,Type I,Class A unless other type acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 Kg/square meter in 72 hours, when applied at 200 sq.ft./gal. I 1 1aie000zec��cec�un Sidewalks, s coma 02520-2ZEA —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 02520 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS,CURB AND GUTTER I3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: I a. "Masterseal";Master Builders b. "A-H 3 Way Sealer';Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Company c. "Ecocure";Euclid Chemical Company I d. "Clear Seal";A. C.Horn e. "J-20 Acrylic Cure";Dayton Superior f. "Sure Cure";Kaufman Products Incorporated I g. "Spartan-Cote";The Burke Company h "Sealkure";Toch Div. -Carboline i. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech I j. "Polyclear";Upco Chemical/USM Corporation k. "L&M Cure";L&M Construction Chemicals 1. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries ' m. "LR-152";Protex Industries n. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill II. Bonding Compound Prilyr�yl acetate or acrylic base,rewett010 type. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: Ia "J-40 Bonding Agent";Dayton Superior Corporation . b. "Weldcrete";Larsen Products c. "Everbond";L&M Construction Chemicals I d. e. "EucoWeld";Euclid Chemical Company "Hornweld";A. C. Horn f. "Sonocrete"; Sonneborn-Contech g. "Acrylic Bondcrete";The Burke Company J. Epoxy Adhesive ' 1. ASTM C881,two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. 2. Provide material "Type", "Grade",and"Class"to suit project requirements. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: I a. "Epoxtite";A. C. Horn b. "Edoco 2118 Epoxy Adhesive"; Edoco Technical Products c. "Sikadur Hi-Mod"; Sika Chemical Corporation d. "Euco Epoxy 463 or 615";Euclid Chemical Company e. "Patch and Bond Epoxy";The Burke Company f. "Sure-Poxy";Kaufman Products Incorporated I 2.2 CONCRETE MIX,DESIGN AND TESTING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, I sampling and testing, qualitycontrol,and as herein specified I1416-00 02520 Concrde Sidewalks,Curb&Gutter 02520-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 1 Air 1 SECTION 02520 1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURB AND GUTTER B. Design mix to product normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, I water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture(super-plasticizer),air-entraining admixture and water to produce the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi,minimum at 28 days 2. Flexural Strength: 600 psi minimum at 28 days 3. Slump Range: 2.5" to 4" 4. Air Content: 4.0 to 5.5% 5. W/C Ratio: 0.53 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION ; I A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 1 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines,rigidly braced and secured B. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. C. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8" in 10' I 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis not more than 1/4"in 10' D. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure 1 separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT_ I A. Locate,place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections,unless otherwise indicated I 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: I 1. Comply with requirements of Section 03000,Concrete, for mixing and placing concrete, and as specified herein. have been checked for line and 2. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms 1 grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures 1 until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. 1 talb-0002szoConcrete sdeaaiks,ctr>&caner 02520-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS-- 1 I t' SECTION 02520 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS,CURB AND GUTTER I3. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. I Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,reinforcement,or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing,dowels,and joint devices. I 4. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as Ifar as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2-hour,place a construction joint. B. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic in cl i e maybe used for Guth and gutter placement at I Contractor's option. If machine placomont is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must producecurbs and gutters to required cross-section,lines, grades,finish, and I jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable,remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. I3.5 JOINTS A. General: 1. Construct expansion and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. I 2. When joining existing structures,place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,unless otherwise indicated. I B. Tooled Joints: Form weakened plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. Sawed Joints: Form weakened plane joints using powered saws equipped with IC. shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn,abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. ID. Construction Joints: 1. Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2-hour,except where such Iplacements terminate at expansion joints. 2. Construct joints as shown or,if not shown,use standard metal keyway section forms. IE. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins,manholes,inlets, structures,walks and other fixed objects,unless otherwise indicated. I1416-0002520 Concrete Sidewalks,Curb&Goa 02520-5 Z E L -ENGINEERS I / 1 SECTION 02520 I CONCRETE SIDEWALKS,CURB AND GUTTER p 2. Locate expansion joints at a maximum spacing of 50'o.c. Extend joint fillers full I width and depth of joint,and not less than 1/2"or more than 1"below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer is specified,place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. I 3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed,wherever possible. Where more than one length is required,lace or clip joint filler sections together. I 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. ' F. Fillers and Sealants: 1. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of joints,materials,installation,and performance. 2. Control joints in sidewalks shall be spaced at intervals equal to the width of the sidewalk and in curb and gutter at 10' intervals. ' 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING I A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete,smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. B. After floating,test surface for trueness with a 10'straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities,and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous ' smooth finish. C. Work edges of slabs,gutters,back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2"radius,unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. I D. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 1. Broom finish: By drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,perpendicular I to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Engineer. 2. On inclined slab surfaces: Provide a coarse,non-slip finish by scoring surface with I a stiff-bristled broom,perpendicular to line of traffic. E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, I clean ends of joints and repoint any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with defects. I ZEL 1416-00 02520 coat s amu:, b&c mer 02520-6 I ENGINEERS- — I I SECTION 02520 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURB AND GUTTER ' 3.7 CURING A. Protect and Cure: Protect and cure finished concrete,complying with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete. B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted,maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. C. Sweep concrete pavement,driveways or access ramps and wash free of stains, ' discolorations,dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 I tats-oo 02520 consrete Sidewalks,Curb&Gutter 02520-7 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS- U I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -111111111111111/ I SECTION 02607 MANHOLES AND COVERS ' PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints,transition, ring, cover, anchorage and accessories 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02200–Excavation,Filling and Backfilling B. Section 03000-Concrete ' C. Section 03600.-Grout 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A48 -Gray Iron Castings g ' B. ASTM A1064- Carbon-Steel Welded Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,Plain and ' Deformed, for Concrete C. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement • D. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregate ate ' E. ASTM C150-Portland Cement F. ASTM C478 -Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections G. ASTM C913 -Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures H. ASTM C923 -Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures ' and Pipes I. ASTM D2240-Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations,rim elevations and sizes and elevations of penetrations ' C. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, steps, component p , p Hent construction,features, configuration, and dimensions 1416-00 02607 Manholes And Covers 02607-1 Z Ei L -ENGINEERS- 1 NW SECTION 02607 MANHOLES AND COVERS 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS I A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product suitable for use with raw wastewater and surface runoff B. Water temperature: Range 41 degrees F to 87.8 degrees F PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS I A. Reinforcement for cast in place bases: 1. Reinforcing Steel:No. 5 rebar,ASTM A615 Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric:ASTM A1064 1 B. Concrete: Section 03000 except as modified herein: 1. Minimum compressive strength: 3,500 psi at 28 days 2. Cement:ASTM C150,Portland Cement,Type II 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances C. Precast sections: I 1. Specifications: ASTM C478 2. Minimum wall thickness: 5 inch I 3. Reinforcement:Welded wire fabric,ASTM A1064 4. Grade rings as required 5. Precast base and first barrel section cast monolithically: I a. Cast-in openings for pipe penetration D. Preformed plastic gaskets: I 1. Conformance:. Fed. Spec. SS-S-00210(GSA-FSS),Type 1, Rope Form. Primer required 2. Diameter: 1-1/2 inch for 48 inch manhole; 2 inch for 60 inch manholes and larger 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. "Rub'r-Nek,"K.T. Snyder Co. b. "Kent Seal No. 2," Hamilton-Kent Manufacturing Co. c. Or approved equal I E. Pipe penetration seals for precast sections: Neoprene rubber pipe penetration gaskets, #40 durometer A,ASTM D2240 and adjustable stainless steel pipe clamps, "A-Lok"or approved equal I F. Manhole steps: Steel bar, 2 inch Grade 60,drop-front type with polypropylene coating applied by manufacturer,Type MA Industries Inc. "PS2-PFS" or accepted substitution 1416-00 02697 Manholes And Covers 02607-2 Z E < I —ENGINEERS— i I z: SECTION 02607, MANHOLES AND COVERS I G. Manhole frame and cover: 1. Cast iron,heavy duty traffic type,ASTM A48, Class 30B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat,true surfaces I 2. 3. Covers to seat at all points on frame Lettered as directed in 2-inch high flushed boss letters 4. Neenah R1706 for sewer standard applications shall be the comparable product of I S. Sumpter Machinery Co., Dewey Bros,US Foundry or equal. Neenah R605 for Flat concrete slab application or approved equal 6. Neenah R6044-A or equal for unpaved areas IH. Cleanout rings and covers: 1. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat,true surfaces I2. Covers to seat at all points on ring I. Manhole Height Adjustment:Use precast concrete grade rings or HDPE adjusting rings IJ. Rock Subbase: 3/4 inch minus,well-graded gravel. Comply with provisions for pipe embedment in Section 02200,Excavation, Filling and Backfilling IK. Water: Clean and free of deleterious substances Grout: Provide under provisions of Section 03600, Grout IL. 2.2 FABRICATION I A. Manhole section: 1. Precast concrete 2. Minimum manhole inside diam: 48 and 60 inch where indicated I 3. Provide eccentric cones for all manholes except where indicated otherwise 4. Cones: Same or greater reinforcement and wall thickness as manhole section 5. Manhole steps: 1'-4"on center,vertical alignment above largest bench I 6. Joints: Keylock type with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally and tightly 7. Manhole opening: Minimum 24 inch clear I8. Drop structure: As indicated on Drawings PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located IA. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location,ready for roughing into Work C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct I / It416-0002607Manholes And Covers 02607-3 Z E L. —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 02607 MANHOLES AND COVERS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Excavation and Backfill: Refer to Section 02200 for requirements B. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections ' C. Rock Subbase: Remove water, excavate, and place 3/4 inch rock 6 inch minimum depth, vibrate for compaction 3.3 PLACING MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Place base pad,trowel top surface level to accept manhole section with uniform bearing all around B. Place sufficient non-shrink grout on base to ensure watertight fit between first manhole section and base or place first manhole section directly in wet concrete C. Place manhole sections plumb and level,trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad. D. Cut,and fit for pipe sleeves E. Clean ends of sections and place double mastic gasket ' F. Fill inside and outside of joint completely with non-shrink grout and trowel smooth G. Cure non-shrink grout using approved methods outlined in Section 03600,Grout H. Set cover rings and covers level without tipping,to correct elevations I. Completed manholes shall be rigid and watertight J. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size,shape, and location ' 3.4 PREFORMED GASKETS A. Remove and replace manhole sections which have chipped or cracked joints B. Thoroughly clean section joints C. Install gasket in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations D. Only use primer furnished by gasket manufacturer 3.5 MANHOLE INVERT A. Place concrete in bottom of manhole and form smooth transition. Trowel smooth and brush for non-skid finish. Slope bench 1-inch per foot for drainage to invert B. Invert shape to conform to radius of pipe it connects 111 02607-4 1416-00 02607 ManholesAnd(`AYC5 _ENG.._ SECTION 02607 MANHOLES AND COVERS ' C. Remove all rough sections or sharp edges which tend to obstruct flow or cause material to snag ' D. Construct in conformance with standard Drawings E. Remove all excess grout or concrete from invert ' 3.6 DROP ASSEMBLIES A. Construct as shown on Drawings 3.7 FLEXIBLE JOINTS A. Provide joint in sewer pipe less than 2 feet from manhole B. Where lastJ joint to manhole is more than 2 feet away,place concrete cradle under pipe to within 2 feet 3.8 PIPE STUBOUTS FOR PRESENT AND FUTURE SERVICE CONNECTIONS ' A. Install service stubouts where shown on Drawings B. Place stubouts in base of manhole and form smooth invert C. Maximum length: 12 inch outside manhole wall D. Place watertight plastic gasket plug in all stubouts ' E. Brace plug against blow-off ' F. Match pipe crown of service connection with pipe crown of outlet pipe 3.9 PERMANENT PLUGS ' A. Thoroughly clean contact surfaces of pipes to be abandoned or cut off B. Pipes 18-inch diameter and less: Place 18-inch deep concrete plug ' C. Pipes greater than 18-inch diam: Plugs can be cast-in-place concrete with outside face plastered with non-shrink grout D. Plugs: Watertight and capable of withstanding all pressures 3.10 TEMPORARY PLUGS A. Install 2 inch plywood plugs in joint ' B. Make water tight as required by Engineer 1416.00 02607 Msnbolos And Covas 02607-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 02607._ MANHOLES AND COVERS C. Backfill against plug 3.11 MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS A. Place rings in bed of non-shrink grout on top of manholes ' B. Ensure no infiltration will enter manhole at this location C. Carry non-shrink grout over flange of ring D. Set top of ring flush with all surfaces subject to foot and vehicular traffic or as required by local jurisdiction E. Set top of ring 6 inches above surfaces in open,untravelled areas F. Use precast or HDPE grade rings for height adjustment ' 3.12 MANHOLES OVER EXISTING SEWERS A. Construct manhole base and install manhole sections as described herein B. Maintain flow at all times C. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer D. Break out crown of existing pipe and make invert E. Cover the edges of the broken pipe with mortar and trowel smooth to the new invert i ' F. Provide cover over invert so debris does not enter existing pipe lines 3.13 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES A. Maintain flow at all times B. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer C. Concrete core into existing manhole and reform invert to provide smooth flow transition D. Cover area around new pipe with non-shrink grout and or waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure E. Make connection during low flow periods 3.14 FIELD TESTING A. Test all manholes unless specified otherwise: 1, Hydrostatic test: a. Plug all inlets and outlets ' 14]600 02607 Manholes MZEL: 02607-6 d Covers —ENGINEERS— 1 111111111111 SECTION 02607 MANHOLES AND COVERS b. Fill manhole to minimum of 3/4 depth or to within 6 to 12 inches of ring ' bottom c. Allow water to stand for 24 hours d. Refill manhole to original depth before beginning leakage test ' e. Test leakage during following 24 hour:period f. Maximum allowable leakage. Less than 0>2 gp /ft above invert g. Repair all manholes that fail leakage test and retest until mantle e passes test at no additional cost to Owner h. Method of repair subject to review by Engineer ' B. Test manholes immediately after assembly and before backfilling C. Remove standing water in excavation which may affect test accuracy ' D. Conduct final test after backfilling E. Perform all testing in presence of Engineer I END OF SECTION ff 1` 1 1 i 1 1 ' - 1416-00 O2607 Manholes And Covers02607-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a I SECTION 02675 y DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Disinfection of potable water distribution system B. Testing and reporting results I1.2 REFERENCES IA. ANSI/AWWA B300—Standard for Hypochlorites B. ANSI/AWWA B301—Standard for Liquid Chlorine IC. ANSI/AWWA C651—Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains D. NSF 60—Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals-Health Effects I1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements B. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds Ispecified requirements 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720,Project Record Documents B. Disinfection report;record: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion 3. Test locations I 4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water)in ppm for each outlet tested 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion I6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested C. Bacteriological report; record: I 1. Date issued,project name, and testing laboratory name,address, and telephone number 2. Time and date of water sample collection - 3. Name of person collecting samples I 4. Test locations 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested 1 I 7476-00 02675 Disinfection Of Water Distribution Systems 02675-1 5-1 Z E —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 02675 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform,to bacterial standards of Augusta Utilities Department(AUD) 8. Bacteriologist's signature and authority 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651 and C652 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS ' A. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience ' B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems, approved by the State of Georgia 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AUD"Water and Sanitary Sewer-Guidelines"or state regulation for I performing the work of this Section PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: ANSI/AWWA B300,Hypochlorite,ANSI/AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected and pressure tested , B. Perform scheduling and disinfection activity with start-up,testing, adjusting and balancing,demonstration procedures,including coordination with related systems , C. Complete disinfection after passing pressure tests 3.2 PRESSURE TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the work of this Section B. Pressure test system under provisions rovisions of Section 02667,Water Lines. Repair leaks and re-test C. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete, flushed and clean D. Inject treatment disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid from into piping system to obtain 50 mg/L residual 1416-0002675 Disinfection Of Mater DIs ibmion Systems 02675-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS I SECTION 02675 I DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual IF. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours I G. Flush, circulate and clean until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L is achieved;use municipal domestic water I H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing,from outlets and from water entry, and analyze Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection II. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL I A. Owner shall pay all costs for bacteriological tests and analysis of treated water except as indicated otherwise under provisions of Section 01400, Quality Control. IB. Test samples in accordance with ANSFAWWA C651 END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I 1 1416-00 02673 Disinfection Of Water Distribution Systems 02675-3 ZEA —ENGINEERS- 1 U I I I I U U I I I U I I I I I I I U I - • SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Extent of storm drainage systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200—Excavation,Filling and Backfilling B. Section 02607—Manholes and Covers IC. Section 03000- Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES IA. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings B. ASTM A1064- Carbon-Steel Welded Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,Plain and I Deformed, for Concrete ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement IC. D. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregate IE. ASTM C150 -Portland Cement F. ASTM C478 -Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections IG. ASTM C913 -Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures I H. ASTM C923 -Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes 1.4 . QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. ManufactureX's Qualifications Firms regularly engaged hi manufacture of storm drainage system's products of types,materials,and sizes required,whose products have Ibeen in satisfactoryuse in shriller service for not less than 5 years B. Installer's,Qualifications; Firm witat least 3 years of successful installation experience I . on projects with stonn drainage work similar to that required for project C. Environmental Compliance Complyith applicable portions of Georgia Environmental Ptoteotion Division regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems I i I 1416-0002720Storm D inageSystems 02720-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I 111 SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS I 1.5 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for storm drainage system materials and products B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for storm drainage systems,showing piing , materlls,size,locations, and inverts. Include details,of underground structures, connections, and manholes. Show interface and Spatial,relationship between piping and ` proximate structures C. Record Drawings: At project closeout,;submit record drawings of installed storm drainage piping and products,in accordance with requirements of Section 01720,Project Record Documents. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists`for storm drahiage system Materials and products. Include'this data,product data, shop drawings,and regard drawings in maintenance manual;in accordance with requirements of Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS , A. General: Provide pipes of one of the following materials,ofweight/class indicated. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes,with ' joining method as indicated B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Pipe greater than 12" shall be ASM C i 6, Class III 1. Fittings: Reinforced concrete, same strength as adjoiningpp , tongue-and-groove gasketed joints complying with ASTM C 443 C. Concrete Pipe: Pipe smaller than 12" shall be ASTM C 14,Class 2 non-reinforced I concrete pipe 1. Fittings: Concrete, same strength as adjoining pipe,tongue-and-groove gasketed joints complying with ASTM C 443 D. I P ,Pipe:Where indicated,HDPE pipe and Rpm Fittings shall be ADS N-12 or an equal product meeting ASSHTO TO M2 4 Type 5,ASSHTO M294 joints,ASTM:D3350 I material properties. 2.2 STORM SEWER MANHOLES I A. General: Comply with Section 02607,Manholes and Covers. B. Frame axed hover; Cast or Ductile-iron, 26"diameter cover,heavy"-duty,indented top I design complying with F.S. RR-F-621 and ASTM A220 with lettering cast into top reading"STORM SEWER" I 02720-2 1 1416-00 02720 Sto=rn Damage Systems —ENGINEERS— I11111111111111111111111•Mir Aar SECTION 02720 I STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS I2.3 CATCH BASINS A. General: Catch basin structures shall conform to GDOT#1033D and#1034D Precast I Catch Basins. B. Frame and Grate: Cast or Ductile-iron,26" diameter flat grate,heavy-duty complying with F.S. RR-F-621 and ASTM A220 IC. Pipe Connectors: Resilient, complying with ASTM C923 I2.4 PRECAST DROP INLET STRUCTURES A. Drop inlet&fractures shall conform to.GDOT#1019A Precast Drop Inlet with Type"B" Ior Type"R"Hoods. Refer to drawings for type of Hood. B. Inlet structures shall conform to GDOT#1011A Precast Reinforced Manhole with Frame and Cover I2.5 PIPE CONNECTIONS I A. Holes forPipe: Each unit shall be cast with pipe holes of the specific number and: dimensions necessary to incorporate the unit into the drainage'system as shown on the plans; I t B. Pipe Connections: Pipe shall be connected to units with either mortar or Class"A" concrete I2.6 RIPRAP A. Stone;Riptap Thestone used for stone slope protection shall be sound,rough,dense and I resistant to the action of air and Water and satisfactory to the Engineer. The stone shall have a density of not less than 150 pounds.per cubic foot, Neither the breadth nor the thickness of any piece of stone shall be less than one-third of its length. The stone will be I subject to inspection on delivery and if found to be improper gradation or quality,it will be rejected. The stone shall consist of quarry run sues,.graded as specified below: IStone Slope Protection Size of Stone Percent of Total Weight I Smaller than the Given Size Class 1 100 lbs. 60 lbs. 80 25 lbs. s9 2 lbs.Not to Exceed 10 I I 1416-0002720 Storm Drainage SYstema 02720-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS I PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. General: During backfilling/topsoiling of storm drainage systems,install continuous I underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 611 to 8"below finished grade 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. A. General: 1. Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated 2. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site 3. Lay piping beginning at low point of system,true to grades and alignment indicated,with unbroken continuity of invert 4. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream 5. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements B. Concrete Pipe: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of ACPA"Concrete ' Pipe Installation Manual" C. Cleaning Piping: • I 1. Cleat interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab ox dragin-line and pull past each joint as itis completed 2. In larges accessible piping,brushes and brooms maybe used for cleaning lc 3. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or when work stops 4. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris pipe Joint Adapters: Make joints between different types of p pe with standard manufactured I adapters and fittings intended for that purpose 111 E. Closing Abandoned Utilities: 1. Close open ends of abandoned underground utilities which are indicated to remain in place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydro-Static or earth pressure which may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed 2. Close open ends of concrete or masonry utilities with not less than 8"thick brick masonry bulkheads 3. Close open ends of Piping with threaded metal caps,plastic plugs,or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood plugs are not acceptable I F. Interior Inspection: 1. Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has I occurred 1416-00 02720 Storm Drainage Systems 02720-4 ZEL , —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 1 2. Make inspections after lines between manholes,or manhole locations,have been installed and approximately 2'of backfill is in place,and again at completion of project 1 3. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe,infiltration or other defects, correct such defects, and re-inspect 3.3 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. General: PlaceP recast concrete sections as indicated. Where manholes occur in pavements;set tops of frames and coversflush with finish surface. Elsewhere, set tops 3" 1 above finish steam,.unless ollierwise indicated B. Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C891 1 C. Rubber Joint Gasket: Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C443 at joints of sections 1 3.4 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS A. General: Construct to sizes and shapes indicated 1 B. Frames and Grates: Set frames and grates to elevations indicated C. Set to within 1/2 inch of grade on a bed of compacted sand bedding material which is approximately 2 to 3 inches thick 1 3.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES A. For branch connections.ons f side into exiting 24"or larger piping, or to underground structures,cut opening into unit sufficiently large to allow- "of concrete to be packed ' around entering connection. Cut ends of connection passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall,unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6"of concrete for 1 minimum length of 12"to provide additional support or collar from connection to undisturbed ground 1 B. Provide concrete which will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated ' C. Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials 1 D. Take care while making connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering existing piping or structure. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material which may accumulate i 14I6-00 02720 Storm lhaiaage Systems 02720-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ' 3.6 PLACEMENT OF RIPRAP A. Stone Riprap: The slope protection shall be placed in such a manner as to produce a reasonable well-graded mass of material with the minimum practicable percentage of voids, and shall be constructed within the limits and to the lines,grades,and sections shown on the Plans. A tolerance of plus 6 inches or minus 3 inches from the limits shown on the Plans will be allowed in the finished surface on the slope protection except that the extreme of this tolerance shall not be continuous over an area greater than 100 square feet. Materials shall be placed in:horizontal layers starting on the riverwward edge of the section and worked up the slope. Dutnpi ,g down theslope will not be pe pitted. Materials shall not be dropped from a height greater than 3 feet. Any damage to the slope due to the fault of the Contractor shall be repaired at no expense to the Owner 3.7 BACKFILLING A. General: Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying, jointing, and betiding of pipe,and":`after ntial gn pection andtesting are completed ns B. To minimize local area traffic interruptions,allow no more than 100'between pipe laying and point of complete backfilling 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1426A0027205tmZEL 02720-6 m Drainage Systen3s —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Chain link fence framework, fabric, and accessories ' B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02835 - Cantilever Gate ' B. Section 03000-Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM A491-Standard Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric ' B. ASTM C94-Ready-mixed Concrete C. ASTM F567-Installation of Chain-Link Fence ID. ASTM F1043 - Strength and Protective Coating Requirements of Metal Posts and Rails for Industrial Chain Link Fence 1.4 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fence height: Overall height of 7'including the 3 strands of barbed wire on the top,arms ' vertical B. Line post spacing: At intervals not exceeding 10 feet for chain link fence C. Chain link fence post and rail strength: Conform to ASTM F1043 light industrial fence quality 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples ' B. Product data: Provide data on posts,chain link fabric, accessories, fittings, and hardware ' C. Samples: Submit two samples of fence fabric 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating construction and finish 1416.00 02831 Chain Link Fences And Gates 02831-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- i SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES.. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: The fence shall have an overall height of 7' including the 3 strands of barbed wire on the top, arms vertical. The fence shall be the standard product of Cyclone Fence Corp.,or American Chain&Cable,Anchor Post Products, or equal. Pipe,posts and braces shall be heavy galvanized. B. Fabric shall be No. 9 gauge,2"mesh, aluminum coated chain link fence fabric in conformance with ASTM A491. C. Posts: Line posts, 2-1/2" O.D. @ 3.65 lbs/FT. shall be spaced not more than 10'. Corner posts shall be 3"O.D. @ 5.79 lbs/FT. Posts for the 16' gate leafs shall be 4" schedule 40 @ 10.8 lbs/FT. Posts shall be anchored in concrete footings, crowned to shed water. D. Top Rail: A 1-5/8" O.D. @ 2.27 lbs/FT.top rail shall be provided for the entire fence. E. Fabric b " Reinforcin :Vire: All fabric reinforcing wire shall be provided along the bottom � edge. It shall be not less than No. 7 gauge coiled spring wire. Galvanized ties or clips shall be provided for attaching reinforcing wires to fabric at intervals of not more than 2 feet. F. Post Braces: Nominal 1-5/8"O.D. @ 2.27 lbs./FT. galvanized tubular post braces extending to each adjacent line post at mid-height of the fabric shall be provided for each corner,pull and end post. A 3/8"diameter truss rod shall also be provided from the line post back to the corner,pull, or end post,with a turnbuckle or other equivalent provision for adjustment. G. Stretcher bars 3/16 x 3/4 inch in size,with length 1"less than fabric height, shall be provided for stretching and securing the fabric at each end, corner and pull post,one for each end post and two for each corner and pull post. H. Post Tops: All posts shall be provided with post tops which will fit over the outside of posts to exclude moisture and shall be combination tops with barbed wire supporting arms. Post tops shall be provided with a hole suitable for the through passage of the top rail. I. Barbed wire supporting arms shall be vertical and shall be fitted with clips or other means for securing three lines of galvanized barbed wire,the top line approximately 12" above the top of the fabric and the other lines spaced uniformly between the top line and the top of the fabric. J. Barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands-of 12-1/2 gauge wire with 14 gauge 4 point barbs spaced approximately 5" apart. The wire shall be aluminum coated. The barbs may be aluminum coated or galvanized. 1416-00 02831 Chem Link Fences And Gate: 02831-2 Z E —ENGINEERS I I SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES I K. Ties or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric to all line posts and to top rail at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Gates shall be swing-type complete with latches, stops,keepers and hinges,with 3 strands IL. of barbed wire mounted on vertical arms above the fabric. M. Frames for Gate Leafs up to 16' shall have primary frame members of 4" O.D. @ 9.1 Ilbs/FT. Gates shall be trussed and braced in such a manner as to provide a rigid frame and ample strength to insure a gate free from sag and twist. The end members of each frame shall be extended approximately 12"above the top member and arranged for Iattaching 3 uniformly spaced lines of barbed wire. N. Stretcher bars shall be provided for each gate to facilitate tight installation of the fabric in I each gate frame. O. Ties,bands and clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for I attaching the fabric to the frame and stretcher bars and the stretcher bars to the gate frame. P. Hinges shall be of heavy pattern,of adequate strength for the gate, and with large bearing Isurfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn under the action of the gate. The gates shall be capable of being opened and closed easily by one person. Q. Latches, stops and keepers shall be provided for all gates; the latches shall the plunger bar I arranged to engage the stops when closed and the keepers when open. Latches shall be P P P arranged for locking by padlock. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set I in concrete and to engage the plunger of the latch bar of the double gate. Keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate when in full open position,one being required for each gate leaf. IR. Bands or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric and stretcher bars to all terminal posts at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. IS. Finish: All metallic units or items not otherwise specified shall be hot-dip galvanized finish. Ties,clips, and bands and barbed wire barbs may be aluminum. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION IA. Post Setting: All posts shall be securely anchored in concrete footings,neatly crowned to shed water. Footings shall be poured in cored holes unless the soil will not permit coring, I in which case alternate methods will be permitted subject to prior approval by the Engineer. Footings for line posts shall be 10"diameter by 2'-9"deep and for corner,and end posts shall be 16"diameter by 3'-6"deep; for the gate posts,the footing shall be 20" diameter by 4'-6"deep. In all cases,the posts shall extend to within 3 inches of the I bottom of the footing. Posts shall be aligned and set to permit fabric and top rail installation at a uniform grade approximating the general slope of the ground. Where 1416.00 02831 Clain Link Fences And Gates 02831-3 I ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ' necessary,to prevent short length sags or dips in the top of the fence,post heights shall be adjusted as directed by the Engineer. I B. Post Spacing: Each run of fence shall be set up so that a uniform spacing of posts will result.The spacing shall be approximately,but not more than 10 feet. Corner and gate posts shall be used as pull posts and shall be installed to facilitate proper stretching of the fabric during its installation. END OF SECTION I I I I I 1 II I . I I 1 1416-00 02831 Clain I,{nk Races And Gals 02831-4 -ENGINEERS- SECTION 02835 CANTILEVER GATE PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cantilever Gate,gate operator and accessories ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02831 - Chain Link Fences and Gates B. Section 13700—Access Control and Surveillance System ' C. Section 16010-Electrical-General Provisions . D. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Product data: Provide data on posts,fabric,ratings,performance data, accessories, fittings, and hardware C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and ' limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,protection,examination, preparation,and installation of Product ' D. Samples: Submit two samples of fence fabric 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating construction and finish 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience ' 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. as suitable for the ' purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS I , 2.1 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY The fence gate operator(s),detection loops,photo beams,and accessories shall be provided 1416-00 02835 C nti!ever Gate 02835-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 02835 CANTILEVER GATE by fencing supplier su lier who shall accept total responsibility for installation and operation of 1 these components of the automatic gate entry system. Gate operator(s) shall function as specified herein and shall be compatible and completely interface with the access control/telephone entry system specified under Section 13700, Access Control and Surveillance System. Fencing supplier shall coordinate installation of the gate operator(s), detection loops, photo beams and accessories with the installer of the access control/telephone entry system to insure that all equipment provided is compatible and that the system operates as intended. 2.2 CANTILEVER GATE 1 A. The gate frame will be fabricated from a minimum 2"x 3" 6063-T6 alloy with a .125" wall thickness. Intermediate vertical members will be 2" square x .125"wall tubing. Structural members will be wrap-fillet welded 95%of their circumference, allowing a seep hole for condensation to escape. The gate frame will be of all-welded construction. A one-piece 6061-T6 alloy extruded track will be welded to the gate frame to form a rigid connection to it. The track will weigh no less than 3.60 pounds per linear foot. The gate will be braced by 1" square x .090"wall tubing members between:all of the vertical members,including the counter balance section, Vertical members on the gate will not exceed 7- 1 centers. Fence fabric shall be installed on gate to match surrounding fence. B. Two truck assemblies, one on each gate support post,will support the gate and track system. The body of the truck assembly will be constructed from extruded 6061-T6 aluminum. The truck assembly will have four 2"diameter, 9/16"wide,sealed ball- bearing wheels. One side-thrust guide wheel will be located on each end of the truck assembly to ensure proper alignment of the truck assembly within the track. The truck assembly will be supported by a self-aligning 5/8"rod-end that connects to the hanger bracket using two 5/8"-18 nuts. The hanger bracket will be constructed from 6"x 4"x 1 1/2"A-36 steel angle iron. The finished 6.25"long bracket will receive either 4"round or 4"square u-bolts. C. One standard bottom guide assembly will be supplied for each support post. The standard 1 bottom guide assembly will be constructed from an aluminum bracket that will incorporate two 3.5"diameter natural rubber guide wheels with a 1.25"contact surface. The wheels will be attached to the.brackets by 3/8"zinc-plated axle bolts. Elongated holes will be provided in the bottom guide bracket to allow proper leveling of the gate as it passes between the guide wheels. 1 D. The two gate support posts will be 4"OD Schedule 40 posts, or two 4"x 4"square tube posts with no less than a 3/16"wall thickness. A third post for the gate catch will match the support post. Minimum length of the posts will be equal to the gate height plus 4'. All posts will be provided by others and installed in a vertically plumb position with a minimum of 3.5' below grade, encased in a minimum 0.25 cubic yards of concrete. Spacing for post will be determined from the counter balance chart provided by gate manufacturer. 1416-O0 02835 Cantilever Geta 02835-2 zEL —ENGINEEHS- 1 SECTION 02835 CANTILEVER GATE E. Gates, truck assemblies and hanger brackets carry a five-year limited warranty,which will cover all defects in material and workmanship,provided that the installation of these ' components is performed in a proper manner,within the guidelines established by gate manufacturer. ' F. Gate shall be topped with three rows of barbed wire similar to existing fence. 2.3 INDUCTIVE LOOP VEHICLE DETECTORS ' A. Inductive loop vehicle detector shall be designed and manufacturer by Reno A&E or approved equal. The listing of a specific manufacturer above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. The ' manufacturer listed above is not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. There are 4 frequencies that are DIP switch selectable from the front panel. C. Changing the frontpanel RESET button or any DIP switch position(except frequency ' selection)resets the detector: After changing the frequencyselection switches,the detector will require a RESET. Reset clears the loop fault memory. D. Vehicle detection results when,a negative change in loop inductame exceeds the sensitivity setting. The 4 detection sensitivity levels are front panel DTP.switch selectable. E. An external DIP switch setting may be turned ON to increase sensitivity ONLY during ' the DETECT period. When a vehicle enters the loop,the detector sensitivity is boosted to a higher level than the vacant loop setting. This feature helps prevent dropouts daring the passage of high bed vehicles and is particularly useful in sliding gate situations. F. An external DIP switch setting offers either a Presence or Pulse mode of operation. When set to the Presence position,an internal DIP switch setting offers either the output to be TruePresenceTM(infinite)or Limited Presence. When set to the Pulse position, an internal DIP switch setting offers either Pulse on Entry or Pulse on Exit. 1. TruePresleTM will hold the call for aslong as the vehicle is present and power is ' not removed or reset applied. Limited Presence will typically hold the call output for about one to three hours. The TruePresenceTM time applies only for normal size automobiles and trucks and for normal size loops(approximately 12 sq ft to 120 sq ft). 2. When in the pulse mode,the 250 millisecond pulse can be selected as either pulse-on-entry(when a vehicle enters the loop)or pulse-on-exit(when a vehicle enters the loop). G, A 2 second delay can be activated by an internal DIP switch. Output delay is the time the I detector output is delayed after a vehicle first enters the loop detection area and is indicated by tthe front panel"DE'T'ECT"LED flashing at 4 Hz with a 50%duty cycle:. If the 2 second output delay feature:is activated,.the output relay will only be turned or.after 1416-00 02835 Cantilever Gate 02835-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 02835 I CANTILEVER GATE 2 seconds has passed with a vehicle continuously preset in the loop detection area. If a I vehicle leavesthe loop detection area during the 2 second delay interval,detection is aborted and the next vehicle entering the loop detection area will.;initiate a new full 2 second delay interval. I "remembers"if H. When power is removed for 2 seconds or less,the detector automatically a vehicle was present over the loop: When power is restored,:the detector will continue to output a call until the vehicle leaves the:loop. (Power loss or dips of 2 seconds or less will not drop the call). I. A green super high intensity light emitting diode(LED)indicates power status during normal detector operation. When the green(POWER)LED is ON the power to the detector is normal. Whenpowettireps approx. 20%from nominal,the green.LED turns I OFF and the detector remains operational. When power drops approx. 25%from nominal,the green LED is OFF and the"line"voltage is not sufficient to operate the detector. 1 J. The red"DETECT"LED is steady ON while a vehicle is being detected. The"DETECT" LED will flash at a 4 Hz rate with a 50%duty cycle while timing out the 2 second call delay. K. if the total inductance of the detector input network goes out of the ange mode.specified for e red the detector or suddenlychanges more than±25%the detector will enter fail "LOOP FAIL"LED will begin flashing with a 50%duty cycle once per second for a shorted loop condition or will be ON continuously for an open loop condition. These I indicator conditions will continue until the inductance returns to its previous value at which time the detector output will automatically resume normal operation and the red "LOOP FAIL"LED will flash at a distinctive lee flashes The flash per rate second)to indicate an intermittent loop fault has occurred and corrected. will continue until another loop fault occurs,the detector is RESET, or the detector loses power. [The detector input network, consist of the loop or loops plus the feeder cable (lead-in or home run)up to theonnector on the detector). II 1. Fail Safe operation: When the loop fails or power is removed, continuity exists between Common and N.O. I2. Fail-Secure operation: When the loop fails or power is removed, continuity exists between Common and N.C. L. Automatically tunes to loop within 2 seconds after application of poweror reset. 30 is reached seconds of operation is required before full sensitivity and presence tim following application of power or a reset. M. Fully_self-compensating for environmental:changes and loop drift over the full temperature range and the entire loop inductance range. 1. Loop Inductance Range: 20 to 1000 microhenries with Q factor of 5 or greater. ZEL 1 I416-e0 0'2835 Cantilever Gate 02"Q 3`"-4 —ENGINEERS— I I ' SECTION 02835 CANTILEVER GATE 2. Loop Feeder Length: Up to 2500 feet maximum with proper feeder cable and appropriate loops. ' 3. Loop Input: Transformer isolated. The minimum capacitance added by the detector is 0.068 microfarads. N. Grounded Loop Operation: The loop isolation transformer allows operation with poor quality loops (which may include a single point short, or leakage to ground). O. Lightning Protection:The detector can tolerate, without damage, a 10 microfarad capacitor charged to 1,000 volts being discharged directly into the loop input terminals, or a 10 microfarad capacitor charged to 2,000 volts being charged between either loop terminal and earth ground. ' P. Internal Circuitry Isolation:All internal electronic circuitryis isolated from mall external circuitry. AC power is isolated by means of the power transformer. The loop is isolated ' by means of the loop isolation transformer. The outputs are isolated by means of the output relays. ' Q. Automatic Reset Internal Fuse: When 120 VAC is applied to 24 VAC models,the automatic internal fuse will open. The fuse will automatically reset when power is removed for 3 seconds. Source voltage should be verified before reinstalling. ' R. Relay Rating(s): The relay contacts are rated for 6 amps max, 150 VDC max, 300 VAC max and 180 Watts max switched power. S Ruggedized Construction: The enclosure is high temperature rated lexan plastic. Printed circuit boards are 0.062 in FR4 material with 2 oz copper each side. 2.4 GATE OPERATOR A. Gate operator(s)shall be Elite Access Systems,Inc. of Lake Forest, California,Model SL- 1 3000-UL. Equal products of other manufacturers that meet the requirements of these specifications may also be used. ' B. Provide a slide gate operator for use with aluminum cantilever slide gate. Gate operator shall be designed for high traffic installations and shall be capable of handling continuous cycles daily with gates up to 1000 lbs and 37 feet in length. The operator motor shall be ' minimum 1/2 horsepower,instant reversing, 120 Volt AC,4 amp, 1625 rpm,with high speed ball bearings. Provide higher horsepower operator if recommended by manufacturer for the gate size selected, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Motor shall be provided with motor overload protection and shall have solid state electronic motor drive system incorporated into the board. t` D. Provide No.40 nickel chain as a minimum. Chain shall be guided by rollers which prevent the chain from slipping off of the drive sprocket. 4I6'OQ 02835 02035-5 Z E L -ENGINEERS- ' 1 SECTION 02835 , CANTILEVER GATE I E. Operator(s) shall use a solid steel,machined pulley and notched v-groove belt for torque transfer from motor to gear reducer. F. Provide heavy duty 30:1 ratio gearbox lubricated in an oil bath. , G. Provide limit switch device with high speed ball bearings to limit gate travel in the full open and full closed positions. H. Operator(s) shall be equipped with a reversing entrapment sensor to continuously monitor motor current. If the gate is closing and hits a vehicle or other obstruction,the sensor shall detect the increased load and reverse direction. If the gate is opening and hits a vehicle or other obstruction it shall stop and reverse four to six inches. Sensor shall be capable of operating normally on off level installations and shall not be affected by wind resistance. If the gate hits an object twice while opening or closing,the system shall shutdown and an alarm shall sound for five minutes. A manual reset button shall be provided to reset the alarm during the five minute period. I. Gate operator(s)s shall have an adjustable timer that can be set from 0 to 60 seconds. J. Gate operator(s)s shall have Elite Omni Option Control board,or equal control board_ ' located inside operator housing with buttons to close,stop and open the gate. Board shall e As a Minimum,the board have spike suppressors to protect against lightning darag • Shall accommodateinputs:for safety loops,exit loop,center loop, fire department key switch, access control(proximity card)system and telephone entry system. Provide plug in loopdetectors for use with the control board for safety, center and exit loops. K. Traveling time of gate operator shall be adjustable. Gate shall be capable of an average traveling speed of 1 foot per second. Gate operator shall be equipped with a soft stop feature. L. All metal parts of gate operator(s) shall be gold zinc-plated fir protection from rust. Chassis shall be constructed of'/inch sanded,welded, and geld zinc plated sheet metal. Exterior cover of gate operator shall be high density polyethylene plastic. M. Operator(s)shall be equipped with a hand crank to manually open the gate in the event of a power outage or other failure of the gate operator. N. Gate control shall be operable by an emergency override key switch which is an integral part of the system. 2.5 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR A. Include photoelectric sensor system for personnel safety. Gate shall stop closing and reverse directions if an object passes through the gate when the gate is closing. Sensor to be Omron"E3K-R10K4"or Engineering approved equal. ' B. Method of detection is to be retroreflective. 1416 90 oasis c1ever Gate 02835-6 ZEL —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 02835 CANTILEVER GATE C. Sensing distance to be 40 feet. ' D. Adjustable potentiometer for sensitivity adjustment. E. Light source to be pulse modulated infrared LED. F. System to be able to detect opaque materials. G. DC power reverse polarity protection H. Operating temperature to be at a minimum—13°F to 131°F. ' I. Photoelectric sensor to be UL Listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Install all equipment per manufacturers' recommendations. ' 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS Coordinate with camera and security equipment to provide an integrated system. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstrate system operation and provide 2 hours of instruction and training with plant personnel. ' B. Conduct walking tour of project and briefly describe function,operation and maintenance of each component. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1416-0002835 Cantilever Gate 02835-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I <__. . ...... A.. I . SECTION 02936 GRASSING IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Extent of grassing includes all lawn areas disturbed by construction operations I B. For roads under state jurisdiction,grassing on the right-of-way shall meet the requirements of the Department of Transportation Standard Specifications I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200-Excavation IB. Section 02607 -Manholes and Covers C. Section 02675 -Disinfection of Water Distribution System: Disinfection of site service Iutility water piping 1.3 GENERAL IA. The gras g operations shall.consist of preparation of the soil,including tallage;liming and f thhzing,-seeding,mulching,and watering, and maintenance and repair ofplantedI areas until a satisfactory grass cover is obtained and the work is finally accepted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Certificates of Compliance: Submit Cert6ificates of Compliance for all materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS IA. Topsoil shall be natural soil of the region,free from lumps, clay,toxic substance,stielcs debris,vegetation,stones over one-inch in maximum dimension,and suitable for growing I grass B. Seed: Slopes oft horizontal to-1 vertical and steeper shall be planted with Korean Lespede a All.other areas to be grassed shall be seeded with Hulled Bermuda grass I teed. All seed for grassing shall be.tested and:approved by the South Carolina Department of Agriculture not more than 6 months prior to the date Of sowing and ;packaged and labeled in accordance with the South Carolina Seed Laws and Rules and I Regulations in effect on the date of the Invitation for Bids. Seed which has become wet ormoldy or otherwise damaged prior to the time of sowing will be rejected. C. Agricultural Lime shall be a pulverized limestone having the following certified I chemical and physical properties: 1. Total Carbonates,not less than 85% I1416-0002936 Grassing 02936-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I .... I SECTION 02936 GRASSING 2. Passing 10-iitesh screen, at least 100% , 3. Passing 100-mesh screen, at least 25% 1 D. Fertilizer: All fertilizer shall be a dry,free-flowing commercial 10-10-10 fertilizer suitable for application by a fertilizer distri.butor,grain drill,planting machine or similar standard equipment. The fertilizer shall be certified to meet the requirements ofFertilizer Laws of the State of Georgia in effect on the date of the Invitation for Bids. Any fertilizer which becomes caked or otherwise damaged prior to the time of use will be rejected. E. Mulch: My of the mulch matetiels,-consisting of forest litter,hay,straw,hulls of cotton balls Or Peanuts,giound corncobs, t .54- if,.....8 of corn,cane,potato vm es,tobacco or other ; stems,or peat,which are permitted under Standard,Specifications of the State Highway Department of Georgia will be acceptable provided they are properly shredded or ground. Mulch materials which contain seeds of species of weeds or Which would plants , germinate and be harmful to the proposed planting will not be acceptedBefore collection of mulch material is begun or delivery is made,the Contractor shit submit samples for approval. Only approved mulch from approved sources will be accepted. F. Water fox use in connection with the grassing operation may be purchased from the Utility System,or Obtained from any other approved source. Such water shall be free of excess,chlorine,.or other chemicals or substances harmful to plant growth PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GROUND PREPARATION A. Prior to preparingthe ground for grassing operations,all Weeds,brush and Other vegetation in the areas to be planted which has not been removed during clearing and grubbing and grading operations shall be removed from the site. All irregularities in the • surface shall be smoothed out and all roots,stone and other foreign material to tillage, planting and proper growth and maintenance of the grass shall be removed. In all areas I where the topsoil has been removed during grading operations,the topsoil which has been stockpiled stockpiled shah be returned and evenly distributed over these areas, Objectionable foreignmatetials contained in the topsoil shall also be removed as the topsoil is, distributed. B. Topsoil shall be placed four inches to six inchesdeep,over all areas to be grassed,using I Salvaged topsoil to the extent possible and topsoil from off-site borrow to supplementthat salvaged, Topsoil shall be spread over the areas to be grassed and shall be fine graded so as to be suitable for sowing 3.2 LIMING AND FERTILIZING A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to finished grade, agricultural lime and I fertilizer conforming to the requirements of this specification shall be uniformly distributed over the areas,lime fertilizer at the rate shown in Grassing Table. In areas I where mechanical s•readers cannot be used,the lime and fertilizer ma be a s shed b - 1416-00 02936 Grassing 02936-2 ZEL _ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 02936 GRASSING I hand methods. The lime and fertilizer shall not be applied when the wind makes it difficult to obtain satisfactory distribution. I 3.3 TILLAGE A. The lime and fertilizer shall`be thoroughly and'unrfor my mixed with the soil to:a depth.. of approximately 3"by plowing,discing and harrowing until:the soil is friable and well I pulverized Hand;tillage will be required in all areas wheremechan ical equipment cannot be operated. I3.4 SEEDING A. Hulled B';za uda.grassseed cenformin to the requirements ofthis spe iicutipn; hall be I uniformly sawn by approved mechanical power drawn drills or seeders or,in small areas, by mechanical hand seeders,at the rate of 10 pounds per acre; Lespedeza at 40 pounds per acre The seed _shall be covered and compacted to a depth.of 1/8 to 14 Mob by I means of a dnitipa ker and an empty.trafft c roller or another roller weighing less than 3 tuns: Broadcast seedingshall not bedone when the wind makes it difficult to get satisfactory distribution, The Bermuda grass seed shall not be planted prior to April 15 or after September 15, Seed shall not be sown unless the soil has the optimum moisture Icontent't or more through a depth of at least 3 inches. 3.5 WATERING A. After the seeds have been sown,the moisture content of the soil will be tested. If there is not enough moisture in the soil to insure germination and adequate plantgrowth,water I shall be applied by sprinkling until an adequate moisture content baa been:reached. In the absent of'adequate rainfall during the germination and early growth period,the Contractor will be required to maintain the requiredadequate moisture content of the soil Iby periodic sprinkling operations. 3.6 MULCHING IA. Mulching-of seeded areas will not be required but may be employed at the option of the Contractor as an aid in reducing erosion<and conserving soil moisture. If employed,.,the I mulch shall conform to the requirements of this specification. The rate of application of the mulch depends on.the.kexture ofthe-mulch. The proper application will allow some sunlight to penetrate and air to circulate, at the same time shading the ground. If desired, immediately after the mulch is spread,the material may be anchored to the soil by a Icultip cker;,disc harrow,or other suitable equipment. 3.7 ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IA. The Contractor is responsible for providing a satisfactory stand of living seeded grass in which gaps larger than 12 inches do not occur at the time of acceptance of the project. Any areas which fail to show a uniform stand for any reason whatsoever, shall be I, reseeded with Hulled Bermuda seed, and such reseeding shall be repeated until acceptance by the Engineer.The Contractor shall properly water,mow and otherwise I ]416-00 02936 Grassing 02936-3 Z " L —ENGINEERS— 011111.1.116- "win• SECTION 02936 GRASSINGI maintain all planted areas and any damage resulting from erosion,washing or other causes,shall be repaired by fill topsoil,tamping, :efertilizing and reseeding,at no I additional.expense to the Owner,if such damage occurs prior to acceptance of the project. 3.8 GRASSING TO CONTROL EROSION In the event completion of grading operations of areas to be planted extends beyond the A. season. ; specified grassing periods,'grassing must be.postponed Until the following spring The Contractor will.be 6 emitted to seed such areas with R e ass at his own ex,-` •e or b mulehin:. shall control erosion of the aded areas. All mowing and maintenance operations during the fall and winter seasons will be the obligation of the to the Owner'sr Erosion must be controlled by acceptable methods to prevent damage property or to adjacent property owners, and to limit migration of silt to the streams. 3.9 GRASSING TABLE erstdrieirt Cever: Fertilizer: 10-10-10; 1000 lbs.per acre Agricultural Lime: l 'l4 tons per acre Mulch: 2tons mulch straw per acre On slopes 3:1 or less: I flulled Common Bermuda 1alb/fie 5110- 8/15 OR, Tall Fescue. 40 lb/ac 9125 - 12/20 AND,> Annual.Rye Grass 50 lb/ac 9/1 11/10 On slopes greater than 3:1:In addition to the above, add: • Interstate Lespedeza(scarified) 40 lb/ac 5/1-8/10 T 16, . - Cover: Fertilizer: 10-10-10; 500 lbs.per acre Agrieulturai Lime 1500 lbs.per acre,required only for soil pH<5.0 Mulch: As Needed END OF SECTION I I 02936-4 —ENGINEERS . I1416-00 02936(hessiog I 111 SECTION 03000 CONCRETE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete B. Reinforcing steel C. Forms D. Concrete accessories 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03600- Grout B. Section 07900-Joint Sealants I 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ACI 304-Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete B. ACI 309 - Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete C. ACI 315 -Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures D. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete E. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement F. ASTM C31 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ' G. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates H. ASTM C39-Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens I. ASTM C94-Ready-Mixed Concrete J. ASTM C143 -Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ' K. ASTM C150- Standard Specification for Portland Cement ' L. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete M. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the IVolumetric Method N. ASTM C185 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar 1416-0003000 Concrete 03000-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 03000 CONCRETE O. ASTM C260-Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete P. ASTM C309 -Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete Q. ASTM C404- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Grout R. ASTM C494-Chemical Admixtures for Concrete S. ASTM D1752 -Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete ' Paving and Structural Construction T. ANSIIAWWA C651 - Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains ' U. ANSIJAWWA C652-Disinfection Of Water Storage Facilities V. ANSI/AWWA C653 - Standard for Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants W. CRSI—Manual of Standard Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. ' B. Shop drawings of reinforcing steel shall show steel for slabs in planand steel for walls in elevation. Bar lists and bending diagrams shall be submitted as part of the reinforcing steel shop drawings. Fabrication of reinforcing steel shall not commence prior to approval of the shop drawings by the Engineer. C. Shop drawings for metal forms shall be submitted if requested by the Engineer. Shop drawings for metal forms shall show the layout, framing and supports,with unit dimensions and sections,type and location of welds, and details of all required accessories. Include printed literature on Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. D. Placement drawings, except for slabs on grade,of all concrete floor slabs,roof slabs and , walls showing openings for sleeves,ducts, chases,etc., which conform to the equipment, piping,passage ways, etc.,being utilized for the project shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. Placement of concrete for slabs and walls shall not commence until the drawings are approved by the Engineer. E. Design Mixes for each class of concrete required shall be submitted for approval. Concrete proportions, including water-cement ratio, shall be established in accordance with ACI 318-11,proportioning on the basis of field experience or proportioning by water-cement ratio. Once the mixture for the concrete has been designed,tested, and accepted by the Engineer,the exact mixture proportions shall be used throughout the subsequent casting operations. Submit copies of each design mix and each aggregate gradation for approval. I 1416.00 03000 Concrete 03000-2 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 I I SECTION 03000 CONCRETE I1.5 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Steel reinforcing shall be stored on supports that will keep I . the steel from contact with the ground and in such a manner as to be protected from rusting, oil,grease, and distortion. Store metal forms off the ground;pitch to shed water and cover with waterproof material. I1.6 CONCRETE QUALITY A. All concrete shall be classified by the 28-day compressive strength, f°. The design slump shall not exceed 4 inches;the air content shall be 5%± 1%. The concrete shall be a workable mixture free from segregation and bleeding. Ready-mix concrete shall conform ' to ASTM C94. Field mixed concrete shall be mixed with a standard type of batch mixer equipped with adequate facilities for accurate weight measurement and control of each material entering the mixer. A retarding admixture approved by the Engineer shall be I used when the air temperature is 80°F or above. Care shall be taken that the mixing water shall be cold for all concrete mixed in hot weather;in hot weather,materials shall be cooled such that concrete delivered to the project shall not have a temperature higher than I 75°F,or a mix designed utilizing a superplasticizer shall be used for temperatures up to 87°F. In cold weather, fresh concrete shall be protected from freezing. Concrete shall not be poured unless the air temperature is at least 40°F and rising. IB. All concrete not otherwise designated shall be 4,000 psi concrete. C. Curbs, gutters and ditch paving may be 3,000 psi concrete. ID. Reaction blocking, fill concrete,mud mats and pipe encasement may be 2,000 psi concrete. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS IA. Cement: Portland Cement shall be Type I or Type III conforming to ASTM C150, or it shall be Type IA or Type IIIA conforming to ASTM C175. Only one brand of cement Ishall be used for exposed concrete in any individual structure. B. Fine Aggregate shall consist of clean,hard natural sand,manufactured sand or a I combination thereof, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates, and shall be graded from 3/8"to No. 100 sieve. I C. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel,or a combination thereof, conforming to the requirement of ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates, and shall be graded to meet the requirements of size number 467, 67 and 7,as appropriate. ID. Water shall be clean and free from oils, acids, salts,or other injurious substances. I 1416-00 03000 Concrete 03000-3 Z E L. —ENGINEERS 1 I SECTION 03000 CONCRETE E. Admixtures shall be used to provide entrained air. The amount of entrained air shall not exceed 7%. Other admixtures shall be used only with written approval of the Engineer. I Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260. Other admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494. Calcium chloride will not be permitted. • F. Curing Paper_ p shall conform to specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete, ASTM C171. G. Reinforcing steel for concrete shall conform to ASTM A615,Grade 60. All splices shall be lapped 40 diameters unless otherwise noted. Principal reinforcement shall be shifted to miss openings through concrete work. Where the resulting spacing exceeds three times the slab or wall thickness or 18",whichever is less,nominal minimum steel shall be detailed at the centerline of the opening and#5 corner bars shall be added in each layer of reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with the CRSI Manual "Placing Reinforcing Bars". H. Welded Wire Fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Splices shall be lapped one bar spacing plus 2 inches but not less than 8 inches. Fabrics from wire gauges 12 gage and smaller shall be galvanized. I. Forms shall be of wood,metal, or other material approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish forms that are structurally adequate for the imposed loads resulting in correctly aligned concrete. For exposed concrete surfaces, forms thoroughly braced and tied together with approved corrosion resistant devices shall be used. Form ties shall be free of devices that will leave a hole or depression larger than 7/8"in diameter in the exposed surfaces of concrete, such that when forms are removed,no metal shall be within one inch of finished surface. Curved surfaces concealed below grade may be formed in planes up to 2'-0" wide. Holes left by form ties shall be grouted, and the surface left smooth and flush. Exposed corners of walks,slabs and walls shall be rounded. Exposed corners of formed concrete shall have a 3/4 inch chamfer,unless otherwise noted. J. Slab Forms to be left in place shall be a minimum of 2"deep,20 gage stainless steel Type 304. Minimum Moment of Inertia(I) shall be 0.378 inches'and minimum Section Modulus(S)shall be 0.326 inches3. K. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler Strips shall conform to ASTM D1752. I L. Grout shall be a portland cement grout consisting of one part of cement,two and one-half parts of sand and the minimum quantity of water to make a workable mix. Cement shall conform to ASTM C150,Type I and sand shall conform to ASTM C404, Size 2. M. Joint Sealant shall be Sika®Duoflex®SL or NL with Sika®Duoflex®Primer 5050 as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp., or the comparable products of W.R. Meadows, 111 Inc. or W. R. Grace. I 1476-00 03000 Concrete 03000-4 ZEL -ENGINEERS- I . SECTION 03000 CONCRETE 1 N. Waterstops shall be 9"x 3/16"sealtight polyvinyl chloride PVC)waterstops having a hollow center bulb as manufactured by W.R.Meadows, Inc. or equal. Splices or joints in PVC dams shall be fully bonded and watertight butt joints made in conformance with the I recommendations of the manufacturer. Two sample splices of each plastic material used shall be submitted for approval before proceeding with concrete work. O. Bonding Compound: Sika"Sikadur 32,Hi-Mod"bonding compound,or approved equal. P. Epoxy Adhesive(for grouting dowels): Sika"Sikadur Anchorfix-4",or approved equal IQ. Chemical Anchors: For concrete, anchors or reinforcing steel bars(rebar)shall utilize Hilti HIT-HY-200 System Adhesive(or equal) for installation in drilled holes. For masonry, anchors or rebar shall utilize Hilti HIT-HY70 System Adhesive(or equal)in Idrilled holes. The anchors shall be as manufactured by Hilti,Rawlplug, Simpson or approved equal. I R. Wall Pipes shall be ductile iron pipe, except where otherwise indicated on the plans, of appropriate size and shall be provided for all pipes passing through concrete walls. Where chemical lines are to pass through a wall pipe in a concrete wall,the appropriate Ilink seal shall be used. S. Access Hatches and Ventilators shall be as specified in Division 5 of these specifications. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement are in compliance with ACI 318. IB. Verify that anchors, seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cased into concrete are accurately placed,positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing Iconcrete. 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush, sandblasting, or pressure washing, and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete and insert steel dowels with chemical anchor system. I3.3 CONCRETE PAVEMENT Concreteroadway pavement shall conform to all requirements for materials, quality, workmanship,finish;cleaning and testing as speciried in this section of the I - specifications. The 28-day compressive strength of pavement along the roadway shall be 4,000 psi. Pavement shall be un-reinforced consisting of a subgrade compacted to 100% maximum dry density, a 6"graded aggregate base, and 6"of concrete pavement. I 1416-000300000MMIE 03000-5 Z E L -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 03000 CONCRETE 3.4 SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT JOINTS A. Sidewalk contraction joints at 5'-0" spacing may be formed 1/8"by 1"deep with a jointing tool or may be saw cut. Pavement joints 1-1/2" deep at 12'-0"spacing shall be saw cut promptly after casting. 3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. All embedded items included in an area shall be installed before concrete placement begins. Full cooperation and coordination shall be made with other trades to install embedded items. Suitable templates or instructions, or both, shall be provided for setting items not placed in the forms. Embedded items shall have been installed and inspected and tests for concrete shall have been completed and approved by the Engineer before concrete is placed. No "boxing out" or"cutting" will be permitted unless indicated on plans or approved in writing by the Engineer. ' B. Wall Pipes, Sleeves,Anchor Bolts, and similar items shall be accurately placed and firmly secured before concrete placement begins. Ferrous metal embedded items shall be111 galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise noted. C. Waterstops shall be installed where indicated on the plans and in all other expansion joints subject to hydrostatic head. Waterstops shall be firmly attached to the outside layer of reinforcing steel and shall be installed complete before concrete placement is started. 3.6 WORKMANSHIP , A. Placing: Concrete shall not be cast without approval of the Resident Project Representative prior to ordering concrete. In accordance with the recommendations of "Guide for Consolidation of Concrete", ACI Committee 309,concrete shall be placed in the forms and mechanically vibrated to produce concrete without segregation or honeycomb. Slabs and beam stems shall be placed in one operation. Concrete shall be ' placed continuously between construction joints. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. If there is a delay in placement,the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated by mechanical vibration. During the casting of wall sections not less than two mechanical vibrators shall be operated continuously for each casting location. The concrete shall not be freely dropped more than 6 feet,nor moved horizontally,after being deposited,more than 5 feet. The Contractor shall provide sufficient "windows", chutes or other means or methods of depositing the concrete to comply with these requirements. The concrete shall be brought to correct level with a straight edge and struck off. Bullfloats shall be used to smooth the surface of slabs. Power floating of the slabs shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared, and/or the mix has stiffened sufficiently that the weight of a man standing on it leaves only a slight imprint on the surface. B. Reinforcing bars shall be free from scale,oil, and structural defects. The system of holding the bars in place shall insure that all steel in the top layer will support the weight of the workman without displacement and be placed in accordance with ACI 315 and 318. Reinforcement in slabs on grade shall be supported on stable concrete supports, 1416-00 03000 concrete 03 000-6 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 03000 CONCRETE ' such as chair bolsters. All reinforcing steel within the limits of a day's pour shall be in place and firmly wired before concrete placement starts. ' C. Construction joints shall be formed at the locations shown on the plans,unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Joints which must be formed in other locations shall be waterstopped where appropriate, shall be adequately keyed and doweled, and shall be formed along either a horizontal or a vertical line. ' D. Curing and Protection: All freshly cast concrete shall be protected from the damaging effects of the elements - freezing, rapid drop in temperature,loss of moisture and from future construction operations. The Contractor shall maintain the concrete temperature above 50°F for the first 10 days after placing. All concrete shall be cured by flooding with clean water or by keeping forms and other protecting material wet with clean water ' for a minimum of 10 days. All surfaces neither protected by forms nor covered with water for the entire 10 day period shall be kept wet and covered with curing paper meeting the requirements of Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete, ASTM C171. If a ' floor is left uncovered during the curing period, a film of water shall be clearly visible at all times on the entire surface of the slab. E. Membrane Curing Compound may be used in lieu of water curing of concrete that will not be covered later with topping,mortar or additional concrete. Membrane curing compound shall be spray applied at a coverage of not more than 300 square feet per gallon. Unformed surfaces shall be covered with curing compound within 30 minutes after final finishing. If forms are removed before the end of the specified curing period, curing compound shall be immediately applied to the formed surfaces before they dry ' out. Curing compound shall be suitably protected from abrasion during the curing period. F. Removal of Forms: The forms shall not be removed until the concrete has attained ' sufficient strength to prevent cracking or other injury,but in no case less than 75%of its design strength. When forms are removed,the Contractor shall place adequate reshores to prevent damage to the concrete by construction loads. The sole responsibility for safe ' practice in this regard shall be the Contractor's. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHES IA. Rough or Form Board Finish: All concrete wall surfaces which are not exposed to view may be given this finish. This finish shall be, as a prerequisite, a thoroughly vibrated concrete which will give a surface smooth,free from air pockets,water pockets, sand streaks, or honeycomb. After the removal of the forms, all fins shall be cut off; all holes, depressions, and rough spots shall be carefully pointed up with mortar having the same proportions of cement and sand as used in the concrete being treated. The surface film of ' all pointed surfaces shall be carefully removed before setting occurs,otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the forms. I B. Rubbed Finish: Walls,beams, sills, and under slab surfaces which are exposed to view shall have a rubbed finish. As soon as the rough surface finish has set sufficiently,the entire surface shall be wet with a brush and rubbed with a No. 16 Carborundum stone to 1416.00 03000 Concrete 03000-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS— a I SECTION,03000 CONCRETE i bring the surface to a paste. The rubbing shall be continued sufficiently to remove all form marks and projections,and to produce a smooth dense surface without pits or I irregularities, The materialwhich is ground to a paste,in the above process, shall be carefully spread or brushed uniformly over the entire surface and allowed to take a"re- set". The final finish shall be obtained by a thorough rubbing twith re surface isa No. 3 0 of smooth Carborundum stone. This rubbing shall continue until the texture and uniform in color. The surfaces shall be stripped evenly with a brush so as to remove excess paste, and the surface left smooth with only enough paste remaining to i obtain a uniform color. C. Float Finish: The surface of all concrete slabs shall,unless otherwise hereinafter specified,be.given afloat finish, The structural slab shall be brought to the established gradebyscreeding, The surface shall be tested for irregularities with a straightedge. lrreg ilanttes shall be eliminated and the entire surface finished with a wooden band float or finishing machine. Finish shall be a true plane within a°tolerance of 114 inch in 10 feet measured in any direction. D. Broom Finish: Surfaces of roof slabs, and exterior walkways or platforms shall be given i a broom finish. A smooth,true and uniform surface is a prerequisite for this finis . When the progress of the set provides the proper consistency,the surface shall be raked with a broom to give parallel transverse lines in the surface and to give a uniform texture. i E. Standard Trowel Finish: All interior floors shall be trowel finished. Both power and hand troweling shall be required. Power troweling shall begin as soon as little or no i cement paste clings to the blade. Troweling.shall be continued until the surface ss henseall be, smooth,and free:of all minor blemishes,such as trowel marksHand trowelings required to remove slight imperfections:left by the troweling machines and to bring the surface to a dense smooth finish, Sprinkling of dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand on the surface of the fresh concrete shall not be permitted. 3.8 SAMPLES AND TESTS i The Contractor shall be responsible for the concrete mix designs,test cylinders for proving the mix designs,tests for the aggregate gradation and quality,for molding test cylinders during the progress of the job,delivering the cylinders for testing to the laboratory,testing for slump and air content, and for conduting load tests, if required. The Owner will pay directly for any excess 28 day tests of the concrete cylinders molded I during the progress of the work; Tests made at the age of 7 days willbe at the Contractor's expense Before proceeding with the mix design,the Contractor shall obtain approval by the Engineer of the testing laboratory. Tests not:specifically indicated to be i done at the Owner`s expense,inclUding includingthe retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. 1 A. Cylinders: Make one atngth test per 50 yards of'each class ofconcrete;placed but not less than one for each days pour. Mold and cure thice cylinders for each:strength test in accordance with ASTM C31. Test two cylinders after 28 days for acceptance in, 1 accordance with ASTM C39;test the third cylinder only where either of the tests of the zE� 1 1436.00 03000 Concrcic 03000-8 —ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 03000 CONCRETE I cylinders is irregular or unacceptable. Additional cylinders must be molded if 7 day test is made at contractor's option. B. Slump: Tests for slump shall be performed at ie job'site on all concrete:inunediately I prior to placing in accordance with.the Test for`Slump of Potland Cement Concrete, ASTM C143`. If the slump varies from that of the design mix by more than that permitted I by ASTM C4,the concrete shall be rejected, '1n no cast shall the maximum specified water-cement ratio of the approved Mix design be exceeded. Air Content: One test for air content shall be made for each strength test. This test shall IC. be made on a concrete sample that has been removed when consolidation of the concrete in the forms has been completed and shall be in accordance with the Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method,ASTM C173. ID. Load Test: if there exists;any evidence'of faulty work unship,.violations-of specifications,or likelihood of concrete having been frozen;loadtests may be required in Iaccordance with ACI 318. These'tests shall be under the direction of the Engineer. 3.9 CONCRETE REPAIRS IA. Correction of Deficiencies: The Contractor shall be responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified reqUirements,including strength, honeyconibtg,spalls,cracks,chips,holes, fins,tolerances.and dishes. Where Ishrinkage cracks occur in slabs,walls,etc.,;the cracks shall pressure grouted with epoxy grout to restore-the concrete strength and eliminate leaks. I3.10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING At such time as water is available, all basins,tanks,flumes,es,and sunimincluded within, I the project shall be given a hydrostatic test by filling with.tinter. The work shall not be acceptable if there is visible leakage or if the drop in water level.is 1/2"or more in any 24-hour period. This maximum permissible,drop in water'level shall include evaporation,. leakage, ab rption::and all other losses: Failure to meet this test shall be cause for rejection ofthat portion of the work. Any remedial measures used to meet the test requirement must be approved in writing by the Engineer before incorporation into the work. I END OF SECTION I I 1 . 1416-0003000 Concrete 03000-9 Z E L —ENGINEERS I I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03350 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING ' PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grinding of the slab surface to receive clear reactive,penetrating liquid ' hardener/densifier. B. Application of clear reactive,penetrating liquid hardener and concrete dye.. C. Progressively polishing and burnishing of the slab surface to achieve Finish Requirements. D. Application of stain resistant surface treatment 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Concrete B. Section 07900 -Joint Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI B101.1 -Test Method for Measuring Wet SCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials ' B. ASTM C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. C. ASTM C1353 —Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Dimension Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic Using a Rotary Platform, Double-Head ' Abraser D. ASTM D523- Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. ' E. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. ' F. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. ' G. ASTM E96/96M Method B(Water Method)- Standard Test Methods for.Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. H. ASTM G154-Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet(UV)Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 7916-0003350Poliahc3Concrete Fini,hn1 03350-1 Z EL ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 03350 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 1.4 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and tested physical and performance properties on products to be used for the work. C. Certificates bymanufacturer stating that installer is listed applicator of special concrete finishes, and has completed the necessary training programs. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers,with seals unbroken,bearing manufacturer labels I indicating brand name and directions for storage. B. Store concrete hardener/densifier and surface protectant treatment in environment recommended on published manufacturer's product data sheets. ' 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate 1 temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity,ventilation, and other conditions affecting performance and finishing requirements. B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. Protect the completed slab to prevent damage by the other trades during floor completion. D. Temperature Limitations: ' 1. Apply when surface and air temperature are between 40 degrees F and above 95 degrees F unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply when surface and air temperatures are expected to remain above 40 degrees F for a minimum of 8 hours after application,unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions. E. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pre-Densifier Concrete Cleaner: Cleaner to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other stains from existing slab surface, Consolideck Cleaner/Degreaser by PROSOCO,Inc. or equal. B. Penetrating Concrete Hardener/Densifier: Lithium silicate hardener/densifier. 1416-00 03350 Polished Concrete Finishing 03350-2 ZEI -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 03350 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING ' 1 Abrasion Resistance: Greater than 50 percent improvement over untreated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM C1353. 2. Achieve 'High Traction Range' readings when tested in accordance with ANSI ' B101.1. 3. Coefficient of Friction:Greater than 0.60 dry, Greater than 0.60 wet when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028. ' 4. Adhesion: Greater than 10 percent increase in pull-off strength when compared to an untreated sample when tested in accordance with ASTM D4541. 5. Water Vapor Transmission: 100 percent retained when compared to untreated ' samples when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/96M Method B(Water Method). 6. IJV Stability: No degradation or yellowing of material when tested in accordance ' with ASTM G154. C. Translucent Concrete Dye: General Purpose water-carried,penetrating,translucent colored dye, Consolideck GemTone Stain by PROSOCO, Inc.,or equal. ' D. Interior Concrete Protective o dive Treatments: 1. General Purpose high-gloss film forming premium sealer,lithium silicate ' hardener/densifierm PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrate with installer present for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. ' B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean dirt, dust,oil, grease and other contaminants that interfere with penetration or performance of specified product from surfaces. Use appropriate concrete cleaners approved by the concrete surface treatment manufacturer where necessary. Rinse ' thoroughly using pressure water spray to remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of product. B. Repair,patch and fill cracks,voids,defects and damaged areas in surface as approved by ' the Engineer.Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of product. C. Variations it substrate texture and color will affect final appearance and should be ' corrected prior to application of sealer/hardener system and the polishing steps. ' 1416.00 03350 Polished Concrete'ru ing 03350-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 03350 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING D. Protect surrounding areas prior to application. E. Seal open joints in accordance with Section 07900,Joint Sealants. F. Apply specified sealants and caulking and allow complete curing before application of ' penetrating concrete hardener/densifier. G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.3 CONCRETE POLISHING A. Adhere to industry standard polishingprocedures forand wet grinding/polishing is dry acceptable when industry standard polishing procedures are adhered to. B. Sequential progression of diamond polishing steps shall be required and limited to no I more than double the grit value of the previous diamonds used. C. Overlap adjacent polishing passes by 25 percent D. Perform each pass perpendicular to the other pass north/south then east/west;multiple passes may be needed. ' E. Progressively grind and polish the slab surface utilizing approved diamond segments as necessary to produce Finishing requirements. ' 3.4 APPLICATION OF PENETRATING TRANSLUCENT DYE AND CONCRETE HARDENER/DENSIFIER A. Dilute translucent dye as recommended by manufacturer to create desired color. (Apply within 24 hours of dilution). B. Lightly wet a clean microfiber pad with diluted translucent concrete dye,leaving the pad damp ' C. Apply prepared diluted translucent dye to the clean, dry concrete per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Allow treated surface to dry for one hour minimum prior to walking on or auto scrubbing. E. Remove excess stain residue by cleaning slab with auto scrubber or dry burnisher and allow treated surface to dry. ' F. Dry polish floor with 400 grit resin diamonds. G. Clean slab with auto scrubber and allow surface to dry. H. Apply second coat of penetrating diluted translucent dye,if required. ZEL 1416-00 03354 Polished Concrete Finishing 0335.0-4 —ENGINEERS— 1 ' SECTION 03350 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING ' I. Remove excess stain residue and allow treated surface to dry. J. Apply a single coat of hardener/densifier per the manufacturer's instructions. ' K. Continue progressively dry polishing floor with required resin diamonds to produce desired fmal finish. ' 3.5 APPLICATION OF INTERIOR CONCRETE PROTECTIVE TREATMENT A. Application of• etral purpose,high.gloss protective treatment ' 1. Apply per manufacturer's published recommendations to clean,dry slab at the completion of mechanically polishing the slab surface. 2. Once dry,high- speed burnish slab surface fitted with burnishing pad to increase ' gloss and to help the treatment fuse and bond with the concrete for increased durability and longevity. 'Surface temperatures immediately behind the burnisher must-achieve 90:5 degrees Fahrenhet. Burnish between coats if multiple ' applications are required to produce finish 3.6 SLAB PROTECTION A. Protect finished floors to prevent damage including staining, gouges and scratching by construction traffic and activities until possession. ' B. Do not drag or drop equipment or material across the slab which will scratch or chip it. C. Inspect tires for debris prior to use on slab. Remove embedded items which may cause damage to floor slab. D. Clean up spills on slab immediately. Provide cleaning chemicals and absorptive ' materials. E. Provide a clean slab using concrete maintenance cleaner within an auto scrubber, equipped with soft nylon brushes,in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 1 i I ' 141G-0003350 Polished ConaadeTSYiahing 03350-5 Z EL .. —ENGINEERS- I i I SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grouting of column and equipment baseplates ' B. Grouting of anchors and dowels into existing concrete C. Other grouting specified or indicated on Drawings r1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02607 -Manholes and Covers B. Section 03000- Concrete ' C. Section 05120- Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metal D. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C109-Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar ' B. ASTM C157 -Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement Mortar and Concrete C. ASTM C191 -Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement byVicat Needle Y ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples ' B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog sheet for material indicating test data and physical properties ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable industry standard,U. S.Army Corps of Engineers Specification ' CRD-C-621 for Non-Shrink Grout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Shrink,Non-Metallic Grout: I1. Master Builders—Masterflow 928 2. Edoco—Non-Ferrous Non-Shrink 1416-0003600 Grout _. 03600-1 Z .,'L —ENGINEERS- 1 h. ARNOW 1 SECTION 03600. I GROUT 3. L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc.—Crystex 4. W.R. Meadows—Sealtight 588-10K 5. Sonneborn—Sonogrout 10K 6. Tamms—Tanunsgrout Supreme I 7. Sika—SikaGrout 212 8. Or equal B. Non-Shrink,Metallic Grout: 1. Master Builders—Embeco 636 Plus 2. Master Builders–MasterFlow 885 3. Or Equal I C. Epoxy/Grout Adhesive: 1. Hilti Hit HY-200 I 2. Dayton Superior—Sure-Anchor 1-50 3. Sika—Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod 4. Or equal D. Latex Bonding Agent: 1. Speeco—B20 Liquid Latex 2. Euclid—Flex-Con 3. W.R. Meadows—Intralok Bonding Agent 2.2 MATERIALS A. `an Shrink,Non-Metallic Grout Factory premixed compound consisting ofnon- metallic aggregate,cement,water reducing and plasticizing agents, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi in one day and 8,000 psi in 7 days. B. Non-Shrink,Metallic Grout: Factory premixed compound consisting of metallic and quartz aggregate, cement,water reducing and plasticizing agents,capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 3,600 psi in one day and 8,000 psi in 7 days. C. Epoxy Grout: Three Component Epoxy Resin System: 1. Two liquid epoxy components 2. One inert aggregate filtered component I 3. Each component furnished in separate package for mixing at job site D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious substances E. Latex Agent:BondingA ent: Acrylic liquid compound readily mixable as an admixture to grout I I I ZEL 1 !416-(F3 03600 Grout 03600-2 —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 03600 GROUT IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION IA. Non-Shrink,Non-Metallic Grout: 1. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. 2. Saturate concrete with water for 24 hours prior to grouting and remove excess I water just prior to placing grout. 3. Cold weather conditions: a. Warm concrete, substrate and base plate to 40 degrees F, or above; store Igrout in warm area. b. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for cold weather application. 4. Hot weather conditions: I a. Use cold mixing water and cool base plate if possible; store grout in cool area. b. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for hot weather application I5. 6. Apply to clean, sound surface. Apply latex bonding agent to hardened concrete,mix-in-grout, or as directed by Engineer. IB. Non-Shrink,Metallic Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. Epoxy Grout: Apply only to clean, dry,sound surface. IC. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Non-Shrink,Non-Metallic Grout: 1. Mix in a mechanical mixer. 2. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. I 3. 4. Provide expansion joints on long pours. Provide air vents where necessary to eliminate air pockets. 5. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I 6. 7. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the top of baseplates. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine grout. 8. Where exposed to view finish grout edges smooth. I 9. Except where a slope is indicated on the Drawings, finish edges flush at the baseplate,bedplate,member or piece of equipment. 10. Protect against rapid moisture loss by immediately covering with wet rags and Ipolyethylene sheets or curing compound. 11. Wet cure grout for 7 days,minimum. 12. Where grout over 3"is to be placed,it shall be done in two operations,bringing the I surface up to within approximately 1" of the machinery base and allowing the initial section to set a minimum of 24 hours before placing final grout. 13. Maintain the temperature at a minimum of 40 degrees F until grout reaches 3,000 psi. I 14. After placement of grout,eliminate excessive external vibration. I1416-00 03600 Grout 03600-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I m. SECTION 03600 I GROUT B. Non-Shrink,Metallic Grout: I 1. Mix in a mechanical mixer. 2. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. 3. Provide air vents where necessary to eliminate air pockets. 4. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the top of baseplates. 6. DO NOT VIBRATE GROUT. 7. Provide metal or wood forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine grouts 8Where exposed to View finish grout edges smooth with chamfer. 9 Except where a slope is indicated on the Drawings,finish edges flush at the baseplate,bedplate,member or piece of equipment 10. Protect against rapid motttute loss by immediately covering with wet rags and polyethylene sheets or curing compound. I 11. Wet cure grout for 7 days,rninimurn.. 12 Where grout over 3' is to be placed,it shall be done in two operations,bringing the surface up to within.appf,omately 1" of the machinery base and allowing the initial.section to set a minimum of 24 hours before placing final grout. 13. Maintain the temperature at a minimum of 40 degrees F until grout reaches 3,000 psi. 14. After placement of grout, eliminate excessive external vibration. C. Epoxy Grout I 1, Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's,instructions. 2. Completely fill all cavities and spaces mound dowels and anchors without voids. 3. Grout baseplates and bedplates as specified for non-shrink,non-metallic grout. 4. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to insure proper I placement. 3.3 SCHEDULE ' A. Non-Shrink,Non.-Metallic Grout Geral Use: 1. Grouting of column"and equipment baseplates. I B. Non-Shrink,Metallic Grout: General Use: directed 1. Grouting of equipment:and machinery baseplates where specifically by I equipment manufacturers instructions or as directedby the Engineer: 2. Where edges will be exposed,cut back 3A inch and finish with non-metallic grout. C. Epoxy Grout: I 1. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. END OF SECTION ON I ZEL 1 741b-0003600 Grout03600-4 —ENGINEEPS— SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE ' PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Repairs to portions of the existing concrete. Types of repair to be made include but are not limited to: ' 1. Wall Resurfacing on existing concrete. 2. Repair of surface spalls on existing concrete. 3. Repair of exposed concrete surfaces in existing concrete water retaining ' structures. 4. Carbon fiber structural strengthening 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300- Concrete tB. Section 03600- Grout C. Section 07900-Joint Sealants ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. B. ASTM C 39-Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C. ASTM C 109-Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-inch, or 50-mm Cube Specimens). ' D. ASTM C 496-Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. ' E. ASTM C 882-Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples ' B. Product Data: 8nbinit manufacturer's descriptive product data and;went specifications for materials proposed for the work of this section. Provide a certification stating that:the repair materials meet the specified requirements. C; Repair Sites: Submit sketches of repair sites indicating type of repair,location, and dimensions. , , tale-0003770 Repair Of Existing Concrete _ 03710-1 Z E —ENGINEERS- SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Repair Product Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall have a program of training,certifying, and technically supporting a nationally organized Approved Contractor Program with annual re-certification of its participants. B. Contractor Qualifications: Contractor shall have at least five years of experience in concrete repair services. The Contractor shall also be an Approved Contractor of the manufacturer of the specified product,who has completed a program of instruction in the use of the specified material, and shall provide a notarized certification from the manufacturer attesting to their Approved Contractor status. 1. Contractors shall provide the Engineer with two job references where they have successfully repaired concrete with the specified product. ' C. Manufacturer's Representative Services: The Contractor shall arrange for, and provide, the services of the product manufacturer's technical representative to be on site during the start of repair operation. 1. Services shall include detailed instructions to the Contractor's personnel on the use of the concrete repair material. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver the specified product in original,unopened containers with the manufacturer's name,labels,product identification,and batch numbers. B. Storage: Store the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. . I 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor,in conjunction with the Engineer, shall inspect the existing concrete surfaces and determine the location,limits,and type of repair required for each structure. The Contractor shall then develop and submit sketches of repair sites called for in 1.4,C. Areas of concrete removal specifically indicated on the Drawings shall be included in the Contract Bid price and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs of deteriorated concrete identified by the Engineer during the course of the contract shall be performed by the Contractor at the supplemental unit price. Repair of concrete required ' due to demolition of adjacent concrete or embedments shall be included in the Contract Bid price and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall not perform any repair work without prior approval of the Engineer. , B. Reinforcement may be encountered within the repair region. C. When using abrasive blasting equipment,shield all work for the protection of those ' portions of the plant which are still in operation. 1 1416-0003710 Repair Of ExistingConctcte 03710-2 Z E L -ENGINEERS-- I I SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENTITIOUS POLYMER MORTARS A. Polymer Repair Mortar: 1. Repair of Horizontal Surfaces (Type 3 Concrete Repair): a. Polymer-modified cementitious,2-component;trowel-grade patching Imortar such as SikaTop 122 Plus as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. 2. Repair of Vertical and Overhead Surfaces(Type 3 Concrete Repair): Ia. Polymer-modified,cementitious,2-compartment,fast setting mortar such as SikaTop 123 Plus, Gel Mortar, as manufactured by Sika Corporation,or approved equal. I3. Deep Repair of Vertical,Horizontal and Overhead Surfaces (Type 2 Concrete Repair): a. Polymer-modified, cementitious 2-compartment mortar such as SikaTop I 111 Plus with pea gravel aggregate as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. I B. Bonding Compound: 1. Provide Bonding Compound on excavated surfaces(Type 2 Concrete Repair): a. Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem b. Or approved equal. I C. Concrete Coating awe.1 Conprete Repair) A non-Vapor-barrier,flexible protective, I waterproofing,polymer-modified,Port and cement sluinry,NSF approved for potable water. 1. Compressive Properties, ASTM D 695 at 28 days: 4500 psi minimum 2. Tensile Properties,ASTM 638 at 28 days: 770 psi minimum 3. Bond Strength,ASTM C 882 at 28 days: 820 psi minimum 4. Vapor Permeability,ASTM E 90 at 28 days: US Perms 18. 5. Acceptable Manufactureers: Ia. Sika Corporation: Sika Top Seal 107 2.2 CARBON FIBER STRUCTURAL STRENGTHENING IA. Carbon Fiber Fabric: 1. High Strength Unidirectional Carbon Fiber Fabric. I 2. 3. Tensile Properties: 500,000 psi Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sika Corporation: SikaWrap Hex 103C. IB. High Strength Epoxy: 1. Two Component,moisture tolerant,high strength,high modulus epoxy. 2. Tensile Properties: 10,500 psi I 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sika Corporation: Sikadur Hex 300/306 I1416.00 03710 Repair ofExisting conade 03710-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- . SECTION 03710 I REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE 2.3 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS I A. The use of other than the specified products will be considered providing the contractor . requests their use in writing to the Engineer This request shall also be accompanied by (a)A certificate of compliance from an approved independent independenttesting laboratory that the proposed substitute products met or exceed the:specified performance criteria,tested in accordance with the specified test standards,and(b)Documented proof that theproposed' substitute products have a five year proven record of performance,confinted"by actual field tests and five successful installations that the Engineer can investigate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. As indicated on the Drawings, several areas of concrete removal and replacement for the I existing structures are required. B. Type 1 through Type 3 repair procedures and Carbon Fiber Structural Strengthening are I defined in this section with additional guidelines given on the Drawings. C. Other removals not defined as Type 1 through Type 3 are also required. For these removals and replacements, Contractor shall follow these procedures; 1. Make a.one-ineh'deep saw cut around the perimeter repair area. Remove spalled,scaled,•:loose,and deteriorated concrete to sound concrete. Thoroughly blast and clean the newly exposed area prior to forming. Remove all resulting debris from the site. 2. Render all surfaces of exposed concrete and reinforced steel free of oil, solvent, grease,dirt,dust,bitumen,rust,loose particles and foreign matter. 3. Use caution where reinforced steel iseAavered so as not to damage the steel or its bond in the surrounding concrete. Do not use pneumatic tool in direct contact with reinforcing steel. Use maximum 30 pound size:hammer for chipping behind reinforcing steel. Exposed reinforcing shall remain in place except where otherwise indicated!for removal by direction of the Engineer or the.Drawings. Blastreinforcing steel in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning,to remove all contaminants,rust and rust scale. a. In areas where reinforcing steel is found to be surrounded by deteriorated concrete or has at least one-half its surface exposed or has less than 1 inch I cover,the depth of removal shall be such as to include all deteriorated concrete but not less than 3/inch below or behind the reinforcing steel. b. Where the existing reinforcing steel is severely corroded or damaged, cut I out reinforcing steel, and replace with new reinforcing steel of the same size and spacing. Where existing steel is determined by the Engineer to have insufficient cover, either replace reinforcing or adjust as directed Attach new steel behind existing steel with a;minimum lap of 16 inches. Remove concrete to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch behind new steel. 1476-00 03710 Repair Of Existing Concte4e 037104 ZE- —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE ' 3.2 TYPE 1 REPAIR—WALL RESURFACING A. General: 1. This work consists of coating ofexisting Filter No. 1 and Filter No. 7. Limits of ' coating in each structure are shown on the Drawings but generally includes the walls,underside of walkways, gullet bottom,center trough walls and bottom in each filter half. The bottom of the filters are excluded. ' B. Repair Procedure; . Concrete surface must be clean, free o `grease, oil, and loosely adheri :g particlesIi All surface repairs must be completed and cured prior to starting this repair Surface must be power washd prior to application, Two Coats of 40 mils DFT each are required. Application must be performedaccording to mara:ufacturer's recommendations by trowel or spray. C. Minimum ambient and substrate temperature at time of application: 45°F and rising. ' 3.3 TYPE 2 REPAIR—CONCRETE SPALL A. General Requirements: ' 1. This consists of the removal of unsound concrete and the repair of spalled and delaminated concrete sues m areas,greater than five.(5)square feet and greater than one inch deep,using repair mortar with pea gravel. Contact manufacturer for recommended amount of pea gravel. B. Mixing: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. C. Repair Procedure: ' 1. Inspection: a. In the presence of the,Engineer,inspect concrete suraces.iintended to be repaired under work of thissection to determine the exact llrnits and. ' locations of those areas. Make a 2. one-inch deep saw cut around the perimeter of the repair area. Remove spalled, scaled, loose, and deteriorated concrete to sound concrete. Minimum depth of concrete removal shall be 2 inches. Thoroughly blast and clean the newly exposed area prior to forming the newly exposed area prior to forming. Remove all resulting debris from the site. 3. Remove unsound concrete material in a manner to facilitate uniform placement of ' repair mixture; slope upper area of excavated voids evenly to within one inch of the face of the concrete to preclude entrapping air and forming hollow spots in the. freshly placed repair mixture. Within inch of the surface, the upper outline shall ' be essentially perpendicular to the surface. 4. Render all surfaces of exposed concrete and reinforcing steel free of oil, solvent, grease, dirt, dust,bitumen,rust, loose particles and foreign matter. ' 5. If reinforcing steel is encountered,use caution where reinforcing steel is uncovered so as not to damage the steel or its bond in the surrounding concrete. ' 1416-00 03710 Repair Of Existing Concrete 03710-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- i I SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE Do not use pneumatic tools in direct contact with reinforcing steel. Use maximum 30 pound size hammer for chipping behind reinforcing steel. Exposed reinforcing shall_remain in place except:where otherwise indicated for removal by direction of Engineer or the Contract Drawings. Blast reinforcing steel in accordance with SSPC-SP-6,Commercial Blast Cleaning,to remove all ' contaminants,rust and rust scale. a. In areas where reinforcing steel is found to be surrounded by deteriorated concrete or has at least one-half its surface area exposed or has less than 1 I inch cover,the depth of removal shall be such as to include all deteriorated concrete but not less than 3/4 inch below or behind the reinforcing steel. b. Where the existing reinforcing steel is severely corroded or damaged;cut out reinforcing steel and replace with new reinforcing steel of the same size and spacing. Where existing steel is determined by the Engineer to have insufficient cover, either replace reinforcing or adjust as-directed. ' Attach new steel behind existing steel with a minimum lap of 16 Inches. Remove concrete to a minimum depthof Ya inch behindthe new steel.. 6. Form excavated areas on vertical surfaces of concrete mebers in accordance with Section 03300,Concrete. Design forms so that placement access will be at the top of each formwork assembly. a. Prior to forming up vertical surfaces,install reinforcement as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required and directed by the Engineer. 7. Provide Bonding compound on excavated surfaces. 3.4 TYPE 3 REPAIR—CONCRETE SPALL ' A. General: ' 1. This work consists of the removal of unsound concrete and the repair of spalled and delaminated concrete surfaces for an area of five square feet or less,and one inch or less in depth,unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1 B.; Repair Procedure:: 1. Inspection: In the presence of the Engineer,inspect concrete surfaces to be repaired under work of this section to determine the exact limits and locations of I those areas to be repaired. 2. Make a one-inch deep saw cut around the perimeter of the repair area Remove spalled,scaled,loose,and deteriorated;concrete to sound concrete. Use maximum 30P ound size pueimatic hammer or other approved method to remove I deteriorated concrete, Thoroughly blast and clean the newly exposed area prior to installing repair mortar. Remove all debris from the site. I C. Minimum ambient and substrate temperature at time of application: 45°F and rising. 3.5 CARBON FIBER STRUCTURAL STRENGTHENING I A. General: I 1. The limits of this work are shown on the Drawings. ]41fi-t}00?970Repair flfExisting Concrete 03710-6 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I ammaink SECTION 03710 REPAIR OF EXISTING CONCRETE IB. Strengthening Procedure: 1. Concrete must be clean, sound, and free of surface moisture. Dust,laitance, I grease,oils, curing compound,waxes, and coatings must be removed by mechanical means and provide a roughened texture. 2. Apply epoxy product per manufacturer's recommendations to prime and seal I surface. 3. Use Thixotropic version of epoxy for overhead applications. 4. Minimum ambient and substrate temperature at time ofapplication: 40°F and rising. I5. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparing,saturating, cutting,and installing the Carbon Fiber fabric. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I1416-00 03710 Repair Of Existing Crete 03710-7 Z Ci L —ENGINEERS— I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Concrete unit masonry. IB. Clay unit masonry in the form of brick. C. Dimension stone masonry trim in unit masonry walls. ID. Build into masonry all bolts,anchors, reinforcing, frames and accessories required for completion of masonry Work I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03000—Concrete IB. Section 05120—Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metal Section 08100—Metal Doors And Frames IC. 1.3 REFERENCES IA. Uniform Building Code—Chapter 17 Structural Tests and Inspections B. Uniform Building Code—Chapter 21 Masonry IC. ACI 530—Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures ID. ASTM C90—Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units E. ASTM C91—Standard Specification for Masonry Cement IF. ASTM C126—Facing Brick and Solid Masonry Units G. ASTM C141—Standard Specification for Hydrated Hydraulic Lime for Structural IPurposes H. ASTM C144—Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar II. ASTM C 1364—Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone 1.4 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit underprovisions of Section 01340, ShopDrawings,gs,Froduct Data and Samples I B. Product Data: Submit data for decorative masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties,anchors, and other accessories: I 1416-00 042001,11111 Masonry 04200-1 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 04200 I UNIT MASONRY 1. Mix designs for grout for masonry reinforcement. Provide test results from an I independent testing laboratory certifying conformance to grout strength requirements and UBC Standard 24-22 C. Manufacturer's Certificate: I 1. Provide certificates stating compliance with specifications for masonry unit grades,types, and classes ' 2. At time of, or prior to delivery of materials to jobsite a certification letter from supplier of the materials shall be provided to assure materials used in construction are representative of materials used to develop prism test records in accordance with UBC Standard 21, Section 2105.3.3,Item 1 D. Submit qualifications of masonry subcontractor,independent special inspector and testing I laboratory E. Prior to fabrication of masonry units, submit two sets of a full pallet of standard integral I colors shown on 2 inch by 2 inch plain block pieces. Review is for color and texture only F. Submit full pallet of available mortar color samples for color selection by Owner. I Samples should reflect actual installed mortar color G. Include masonry and mortar product data in material and finishes manual as specified in Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data H. Submit product literature for masonry accessories I. Submit mix designs for grout for masonry reinforcement. Provide test results from an independent testing laboratory certifying conformance to grout strength requirements and UBC Standard 24-22 I 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all requirements of local building codes and all supplements as adopted by governing agency in which jurisdiction the masonry Work is performed 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS I A. Masonry subcontractor: Company specializing in masonry Work with a minimum of 5 years of recent relevant experience I B. Testing laboratory: Comply with requirements of Section 01400,Quality Control DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I 17 A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, i Materials and Equipment 14)6-00 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-2 ZEL I -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY I B. Store all masonry units and materials off the ground in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration, contamination, or wetting by rain,snow or ground water: 1. Reject cement which has become caked,partially set or otherwise deteriorated,or I 2. any material which has become damaged or contaminated Cover all masonry materials to protect from elements C. Protect facing material and all adjoining work against staining: I1. Keep tops of walls covered with non-staining waterproof covering when work is not in progress 2. Extend cover 24 inches down face of wall,hold cover securely in place I3. Clean top surface of work of all loose mortar when work is resumed D. Do not apply loads for at least three days after building masonry columns or walls IE. Prevent grout or mortar from staining face of exposed masonry: Protect all sills, ledges, projections and adjacent materials from damage I F. Protect and brace masonry walls during construction to prevent damage or loss due to wind IG. Yard age concrete masonry units a minimum of 30 days prior to delivery to jobsite H. Mortar: 1. Deliver in sealed unit bags. Identify each bag with project name;material name I and type 2. Store stacked no more than two bags high IPART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS IA. Water shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, or injurious substances. I B. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150,Type I. It shall be a standard product, the name of which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. C. Masonry cement shall conform to ASTM C 91, and shall be a standard product approved I by the Engineer. D. Hydrated limeshall conform to ASTM C 141. IE. ,Aggregate for masonry mortar shall conform to ASTM C 144. I F. Concrete Block: All concrete block shall be load bearing block conforming to ASTM C 90. Bearing block shall be Type II units made with normal weight aggregates. Exposed faces of blocks shall be free of chips, cracks, or other imperfections. G. Cast Stone: 1. Comply with ASTM C1364 I ]416.0004200 Unit Masonry 04200-3 Z E l' —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 04200 1 UNIT MASONRY 2. Wall Caps: Unit number 721 —Chamfer 5 I 3. Manufacture a. Stone Legends,Dallas,TX b. Approved Equal H. Face Brick: Face brick shall be used where indicated or otherwise shown on the drawings. All face brick shall be select, sound,whole,new clay or shale, conforming to ASTM C216, Grade SW,Type FBS.Brick shall be modular size with a reddish toned mortar. Brick color shall match the color and texture of the existing Filter Building brick. I. Masonry wall-reinforcement shall be#5 A615 grade 60 vertical and horizontal @ 4'-0" minimum,on center,grouted. Horizontal reinforcement may be replaced with galvanized truss type extra heavy Dur-O-Wall or equal (3/16 dia. Side rods and No. 9 cross rods). 3. Mortar: Aggregate and other materials for masonry mortar shall conform to applicable ' specifications listed above. Mortar mixtures shall be portland cement mortar and shall contain the following proportions by volume,measured loose: Type Portland Masonry Hydrated Lime or Aggregate Measured in Damp Cement Cement Lime Putty Loose Condition 1 None 1/4 M Not less than 2-1/4 and not 1 1 None more than 3 times the sum of 1 None 1/4- 1/2 the volumes of cement and lime used S 1/2 1 None I K. Board Type angulation: shall be 1"or 2" as shown on the drawings, cellular polystyrene conforming to ASTM C578. I L. Wall Flashing: shall be 3 ounce copper armored Sisalkraft. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work B. Verify items provided by other Sections of Work are properly sized and located C. Verify built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work I p �' 1475-0004200UmlMesom04200-4y Z E L —ENGINEERS— I I w I I .' SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY IC. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support 3.3 INSTALLATION I A. Joints in the exposed face of all masonry walls shall be finished with a concave jointing tool to compact the setting mortar and form a continuous contact with the masonry unit. IAll holes and cavities shall be filled with mortar before tooling, B. Pointing andCleaning: When the work is completed, all holes or defective mortar joints in exposed masonry shall be pointed,or where necessary, cut out and repointed. All Iexposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned within 24 hours of placement, and all cavities shall be kept free of droppings. Exposed masonry shall be protected against staining from wall covering or other sources and excess mortar shall be wiped off the Isurface as the work progresses. C. Acoustical Concrete Masonry Units(ACMU)shall be installed in accordance with the I block manufacturer's instructions. Slots shall be exposed to the area where sound absorption is required. Slots shall be kept free of mortar or debris above the mortar joint. Lines shall be straight and true. ID. Weep Holes: shall be located at 24"o.c. horizontally in the exterior wythe of cavity walls directly above all foundations, flashing,or other water stops in the wall. The holes may I be formed by placing 3/8"round fiberglass or similar cord in the mortar then withdrawing the cord after the wall is completed. Weep holes shall be kept free of obstructions. I3.4 WORKMANSHIP A. Brick and block shall be laid in running bond. Only experienced masons shall be I employed. Masonry shall be laid plumb and true with full bed joints,buttered with sufficient mortar to fill end joints, and all units shoved in place. Where cutting of exposed masonry is necessary,the cuts shall be made with a motor driven masonry saw. I No masonry shall be laid when the temperature is below 45°unless it is rising and at no time when it is below 40°F. The top of exposed walls shall be protected by waterproof material when work is not in progress. The walls shall be solid and without voids in the I joints. Bond beams shall be filled with 4000 psi concrete conforming to the requirements of the Concrete section. Keep cavity free of mortar. I B. Joints: Both interior and exterior joints shall be tooled;vertical joints shall be tooled before horizontal joints. Tooling and troweling shall compact the setting mortar and form a continuous contact with the block. All holes and cavities shall be filled with mortar before tooling. Exposed interior masonry joints shall be neatly finished for painting. I C. Pointing and Cleaning: When the work is completed, all holes or defective mortar joints in exposed masonry shall be pointed,or where necessary, cut out and repointed. All exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by procedures utilizing a mild acid application I1416.00 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-5 Z Ei L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY followed by full rinsing. If so cleaned, all sash, frames, or metal lintels shall be completely protected. D. Types of Mortar: Exterior walls and interior bearing walls shall be laid in types M or S mortar. ' E. Sample Panel : Provide sample brick and block wall panel approximately 4' long by 3' high showing workmanship,bond,thickness,tooling of joints, color range of brick and I mortar. Approval of the Engineer shall be required prior to construction of any walls. Lay sample panel as a unit to show composite construction including any wall reinforcing, flashing, and insulation. Finish work shall match sample. Panel to remain in place through completion of the work. F. Masonry wall reinforcement installed in horizontal courses at 16 inches o.c.in all cavity walls unless otherwise noted. The cross rods in cavity walls shall have no moisture drips. Vertical reinforcement is required at each side of all openings and at the ends of all walls. Horizontal reinforcement is required at the tops of all walls, and across all openings. G. Masonry:wal :anchors±shall be provided at the intersection of abutting walls. Where intersecting partitions are not bonded by masonry headers, 1-1/2"x 14 gauge stainless steel anchors shall be provided at no more than 16"vertical spacing. Brick fascia shall be anchored in accordance with ACI 530 with anchors approve3d by the Engineer. Anchorage for steel trusses,metal roof decking,and composite floor decking shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,unless otherwise shown on the drawings. H. Board Type Insulation: installed on the inner wythe side of the cavity. It shall be cut to fit neatly around adjoining surfaces,applied in moderate contact with adjoining units,and supported by the masonry reinforcement. I, y al Flashing: shall be installed over heads and under sills of all openings in exterior masonry walls,including windows,doors, and louvers, and shall be installed at each line of floor construction. Flashing at floors or roofs shall be made continuous. Joints in continuous flashing shall be lapped at least 4 inches and tightly sealed with mastic. Wall flashing shall carry upward across the cavity at an angle and through the next higher joint of the inner block wall where it shall bend back on,itself 1/2 inch. Flashing over or under openings that are discontinuous shall have the ends turned up to form a pan • END OF SECTION 1 1416-00 04200 tinZEL Unit Masonry 04200-6 —ENGINEERS— SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural metalwork,beams,ladders,angle frames,bearing plates,anchors,anchor bolts I and all other miscellaneous metal items to fully complete the structures in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable plans and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Section 03600—Grout IA. B. Section 05520—Handrails and Railings IC. Section 05530—Aluminum Gratings and Treads D. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing IE. Individual Equipment Sections-Component Parts of Equipment 1.3 REFERENCES IA. AISC-Steel Construction Manual I B. AISC-Specification for the Design,Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings C. ANSI A202.1 -Metal Bar Grating Manual for Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair I Threads ASTM A36-Carbon Structural Steel ID. E. ASTM A123 -Zinc(Hot-DipGalvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products g F. ASTM A193 -Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications IG. ASTM A241 -Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip H. ASTM A307-Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength II. ASTM A325-Structural Bolts, Steel,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength Ir J. ASTM A386-Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength I1416.00 05120 Structural Steel And Misc Metal 05120-1 Z E L -ENGINEERS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL K. ASTM B221 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire,Profiles,and Tubes L. ASTM B241 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube M. ASTM B308-Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles N. AWS A2.4-Standard Symbols for Welding,Brazing and Nondestructive Examination O. AWS A5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ' P. AWS A5.4- Specification for Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding Q. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code-Steel R. GSA:FF-S-325 - Shield,Expansion;Nail Expansion,And Nail,Drive Screw Devices, Anchoring,Masonry ' 1.4 TOLERANCES A. Structural steel: 1. All members level,plumb and aligned within 1:500 2. Top elevation of roof and floor members within 1/16 inch of that indicated on Drawings 3. Girt faces and other supporting members in vertical planes within 1/8 inch 1.5 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples steel,metalwork,brackets hatches,ladders, ' B. Shop Drawings: Fabrication of structural frames, and handrails shall not commence prior to approval of shop drawings by the Engineer. Five sets of shop drawings which have been checked by the Contractor for dimensions and conformance to the plans and specifications shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall include complete details and schedules for fabrication for shop assembly of members,and details, schedules,procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers information describing fabricated metal specialty items. Include sizes,dimensions and assembled weights. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all applicable provisions of adopted building code and OSHA for handrails, guardrails and ladders. 141600051 20 Structural Simi And IvFisc?vtre: ZEl. 05120-2 —ENGINEERS— SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials and equipment under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. B. Store on blocking so that no metal touches the ground and water cannot collect thereon. ' C. Protect materials from bending under its own weight or super-imposed load. D. Welding electrodes shall be delivered in unbroken packages and stored when opened in a ' closed,dry heated box. E. Do not store materials on the structures in a manner that might cause distortion or damage ' to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,EXCEPT STAINLESS,STEEL A. Structural Steel: Except as otherwise indicated, structural steel shall be ASTM A36,Fy= 36 ksi. B. Aluminum pipe: shall be ASTM B241,Fy=35 ksi. C. Aluminum shapes: shall be ASTM B308, alloy 6061-T6,Fy=35 ksi. ' D. Exterior Pipe Railing: Conform to the requirements of Section 05520,Handrails and Railings. E. Aluminum Ladders: Ladders shall have 2-1/2"x 1/2"stringers with 15/16"square non-slip rungs spaced at 1,-0"on center maximum. Ladders shall be aluminum, alloy 6061-T6,Fy ' 35 ksi. All necessary anchor bolts will be stainless steel and furnished with ladder. All material will have a standard mill finish. The portion of the ladder in contact with concrete shall have a heavy shop coat of bituminous paint. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Fasteners greater than%z inch in diameter shall be A325, all others shall be ASTM A307, Grade A,regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts with hexagonal heads and nuts. G. Electrodes for Welding: For carbon steel conform to AWS Code D1.1, A5.1,A505,or A588,as appropriate utilizing Series E70XX electrodes. ' H. Welding of stainless steel and non-ferrous materials shall use electrodes appropriate for the application. ' I. Cast Nosing and Thresholds shall be cast aluminum abrasive type cross hatched style as manufactured by American Safety Tread Co. or shall be the comparable products of ' 1416-00 05120 Structural Steel And Misc Metal 05120-3 Z Ei L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05120 i STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL Wooster,White Foundry, Construction Castings or approved equal. Except as otherwise detailed,thresholds shall be Type 815 or 8155, 6 inches wide;nosings for concrete steps shall be Type 801,3/8 inch thickness by 4 inches wide and 6 inches less in length than the full width of the stair. ' J. Expansion Anchors shall have stainless steel shanks and nuts,unless otherwise specified. Anchors shall be either expansion type or chemical adhesive drop-in type as manufactured by Hilti or approved equal. Expansion anchors shall be installed in conformity with the manufacturers recommendations for maximum holding power,but in no case shall the depth of hole be less than four hole diameters. Minimum distance between the center of any expansion anchor and an edge or exterior corner of concrete shall be not less than 4-1/2 times the diameter of the hole in which it is installed. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL MATERIALS ' A. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners shall be ASTM A193,stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be Grade 8,Type 304 stainless steel. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel shall be fabricated in accordance with appropriate AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Fabricate with natural camber of the member up. Properly mark and matchmark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.Where finishing is required,complete the assembly,including welding of units,before start of finishing operations. Welders shall be certified for all positions and thicknesses appropriate to their work on this project. ' B. Non-Ferrous and Other Miscellaneous Metal shall be fabricated in accordance with appropriate aluminum association specifications and to a quality comparable to the Commercial Quality of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. Metal surfaces exposed to view shall be free of surface blemishes,including pitting,seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names and roughness. ' C. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are shown or specified. All butt welds shall be full penetration butt welds. Fillet welds not otherwise noted shall be 3/16". Welders shall be certified for all positions and thicknesses appropriate to their work on this project. Bolted connections not otherwise noted shall be two 3/4"o ASTM A307 HEX HD Bolt. D. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and miscellaneous metal, and for the passage of other work through the members. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing as needed to receive other work. ' E. Painting: Stainless steel, galvanized steel,and aluminum will not be painted.All steelwork shall be shop primed with one coat of gray chromate primer Tnemec poxiprime 65 over a surface which has received commercial blast(SSPC-SP6)or better surface preparation. The 1416-00 05120 Structural Steel And Mac Metal 05120-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL prime coat shall be compatible with the coating system specified in the Section 09900, Painting and Finishing. Where paint has been withheld from areas to be welded and other bare spots, scrapes,etc.,the areas shall be touched up with the original primer. Minimum prime coat dry thickness shall be 2 mils. F. Aluminum in contact with concrete shall receive a heavy coating of epoxy or other coating suitable for exposure to drinking water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces and areas to receive structural and miscellaneous metal are prepared to required grades and dimensions,level, and otherwise in conformance with the Drawings. 3.2 ERECTION A. Structural steel and miscellaneous steelwork shall be erected in conformance with current edition of AISC Specifications. I3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect all metal erections from all damage prior to subsequent work of other trades. ENI)OF SECTION i i I I , 1416-00 05120 Structural Steel And Mise Metal 05120-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS,STANDARD,LONGSPAN AND JOIST GIRDERS PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open-web steel joists B. Longspan steel joists C. Deep longspan steel joists D. Joist girders E. Accessories and fittings F. Shop painting and touchup 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 05120- Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals B. Section 05310-Steel Deck C. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. International Building Code(IBC),Latest Edition B. AISC-Specification for the Design,Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for ' Buildings ' C. ASTM A36—Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel E. SJI- Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,K-Series F. SJI-Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists,LH-Series, and Deep Longspan Steel Joists,DLH-Series G. SJI- Standard Specifications for Joist Girders ' H. SJI-Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders I. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC) J. SSDL-Steel Structures Painting Manual-Volumes 1 and 2,Latest Edition 1416-00 05230 Steel Joists,Standard,Longspan And Joist Orders 05210-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS, STANDARD,LONGSPAN AND JOIST GIRDERS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's checked shop drawings and checked field erection drawings shall be sulc)mitted for review in accordance with Section 01340,Shop Dreiwings,Product Data and Samples. Include erection plans indicating the type and size of steel joists,Joist girders,,plan locations,top elevations,connection details,framing at openings,and type and spacingfor bridging Identify each end and its location for all unsymmetdcal steel joists and joist girders. Identify all steel joists and joist girders which are upgraded from those indicated on the drawings. B. NO REPRODUCTION OF ENGINEERING DRAWINGS SHALL BE ACCEPTED AS CONTRACTOR OR VENDOR SHOP DRAWINGS. THIS TYPE OF SUBMITTAL WILL BE IMMEDIATELY REJECTED. C. Joist Certification: The manufacturer of all steel joists and joist girdets shall be a member of the SJI and shall furnish to the Building Official a certificate of compliance With SJI Specifications,and which also identifies the joists delivered for this specific project (Project name and address). Such certificate for compliance ghall be furnished before installation. D. Calculations: Submit complete engineering design calculations for all steel joist and joist girders. Design shall include connections,bridgingilacing,or shoring as required diking and after construction. Calculations shall clearly illustrate the steel joist and joist girder profiles and all loads Considered. Calculations shall bear the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is located. Submit calculations wncurrently with the shop drawings. E. Manufacturer's data and specifications,including application recommendations,on the joist and joist girder primer paint. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition and stored in a manner and at a location that will minimize the formation of waterholding pockets,soiling and deterioration of the paint film. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Opat-web steel joists designated in the stemdard K-Series shall conform to SJI Standard Specifications for Open-Web Steel Joists,K-Series and shall comply with SIT Specifications. Joists designated K shall be designed to support.the loads given in the Standard Load TableS for the standard designations and any additional loads indicated on the drawings. HI1416-00 05210 Steel Joists,Standard,I,tnespan Md Joist Girders 05210-2 ZEL -ENGINEERS— MikeeHEZzru, .'Lim 7 e:r S .MV.I ze-m-gamvz.,.rs.:v ^`". .�...-- .�_ SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS,STANDARD,LONGSPAN AND JOIST GIRDERS I B. Longspan steel Joists designated in.the standard shall conform to SJI Standard Specifications for Lc ngspait Steel Joists,LH-Series,and shall comply with Sil Specifications.Joists designated LH shall be designed to support the loads given in the I Standard Load.Tables for the standard designations and any additional loads indicated on the drawings. ' C. ' Joist girders shall conform to SJI Standard Specifications for Joist Girders,and shall comply with SJl Specifications. Joist girders shall be designed to support all loads as indicated on the drawings. ID. Manufacturer shall incorporate special loadings that are indicated on the drawings into their design calculations. IE. Accessories and fittings,including end sports and bridging shall be in accordance with the standard specifications under which the joins and joist girders wtre°designed. I F. Additional`ridging shall be supplied,as required by the joist manufacturer,.to resist wind uplift loads as indicated on the drawings,'to stabilize the joist and joist girder top chord when a standing seam roof is employed,.etc. IG. Shop Painting Joists,joist girders,bridging and accessories shall receive a shop coat of gray.rust inhibitive coating.Paint;shall be 2 mils dry,no sagging,by�Southern Coatings,. Inc, l-2969,Cadilac,Rust leul i,Tnemec or approved equal. 2.2 FABRICATION IA. General D not fabricate until submitted shop dra .ings have been successfully reviewed and approved. Fabricate steel joist,joist girders,and bridging with specified materials in accordance with SJIStandard Specifications and AISC Specification for the Design, ' Fahrieatio i:and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning. I C. Joists and joist girders with cracked or improper welds and joists and joist girders'otherwise J damage so as to affect their structural properties,shall not be used in the.work.Field repair ' of such damaged joists and joist girders will be allowed only by special permission and subject to the approval of the Engineer:The method of`repairs shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. ID. All joists and joist girders to be bundled with top chord down. Ends of all joists to be even. E. Structural steel for supplementary framing and joist leg extensions shall conform to ASTM I A36. F. Welding: Welding of joists shall comply with SJI standards. Welding of joist girders shall comply with AWS D1.1. I 1416-00 05210 Steel Joss,Standard,Longspsn And Joist Girders 05210-3 ZEL ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS, STANDARD,LONGSPAN AND JOIST GIRDERS PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. General: Handle and erect steel joists,joist girders and bridging in accoordance with the AI$C Specification for the Design,Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings and the SJI Standard Specifications and Recommended Code of Standard. Practice. B. Careshallbe exercised at all times in handling and placing of j oists and joist girders. AU Joists and joist girders shall be fastened in place and budging installed prior to receiving any construction loads,The Contractor shall coordinate joist and joist girder location with theaccess spate and fixture placing requirements of other trades. All joists and joist girders at columns shall be set in its final location with erection bolts in place.All joists and joist girders set in their final location shall not be left overnight without being connected to the supporting members. C. Bearing surfaces of the joists,and joist girders shall be in the same plane with full bearing; t on the supporting wall and:shall be anchored as required in the SJI Standard Specification. D. Bridging size and spacing shall conform to the requirements of the SJI Standard Specification.Each line of bridging.shall be securely anchored to the walls or supports at the ends of the line and to each.joist and joist girder by welding or bolting Welding will not bepermitted for longspan joists. Bridging for longspan joists shall always be bolted. �t nails an,Joists oyer ed cross' - P Joists over 40'in span shall include one row of bolted bridging 60'in span shall have all cross bridging. E. Deviation from a straight line between ends of any installed joist or joist girder shall not exceed 3/8 inch for every 10 feet of span length. shall be applied at joist and joist girder panel points.If this is not ' F. Concentrated loads possible,the chords'must be reinforced as required by the joist and joist girder manufacturer or th Engineer. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Painting: Seo Section 09900,Painting and Finishing. If steel deck is indicated on drawings to be iingalvanized then joists shall be painted along with decking.. 3.3 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Patching: All abraded,corroded and field welded areas shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer as specified for shop coat. END OF SECTION 1416.OOOi210Steel Joists,Standard,LongspenAnd Joist Ga052104 ZEL de�s —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof deck B. Metal form deck C. Closures and fillers D. Fastening of deck;Bearing plates,angles and stud shear connectors ' E. Acoustical insulation in roof deck flutes 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 05120- Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals B. Section 05210-Steel Joists and Standard, Longspan,and Joist Girders C. Section 09900—Painting and Finishing 1.3 REFERENCES A. AISI SG-971 -Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; ' American Iron and Steel Institute B. ASTM A36- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ' C. ASTM A108-Standard Specification for Steel Bars,Carbon,Cold-Finished, Standard Quality D. ASTM A123 -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products IE. ASTM A611 -Standard Specification for Structural Steel(SS), Sheet, Carbon,Cold-Rolled F. ASTM A653 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process G. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code- Steel H. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel I. FM P7825 -Approval Guide I 1416-0005314 Steel Deck 05310-1 Z E l —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK J. SDI-Publication No.29-Design Manual for Composite Decks,Form Decks,Roof Decks ' and Cellular Floor Deck Systems with Electrical Distribution K. SDI-Manual of Construction with Steel Deck L. SDI-Diaphragm Design Manual M. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer 1 N. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers(Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") O. SSPC-Paint 25.1 -Zinc Oxide,Alkyd,Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel P. UL-Fire Resistance Directory 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. B. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified. ' C. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: L/360 D. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: L/240 E. Maximum Lateral Deflection of Diaphragms: 1/500 of the height of the wall ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. ' B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations,projections,openings, reinforcement,pertinent details, and accessories. ' C, Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. I D. Mechanical Fasteners; test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with requirementstesting.based on comprehensive E. Certificates: Certify meets or exceeds specified requirements. F. Submit manufacturer's deck catalog showing specifications,load tables(including ultimate ' tension and shear capacities), diaphragm tables and installation instructions. G. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work,verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1415-03 05310 Steel Deck 053 10-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' I I SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK IH. ICBO Evaluation report. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Design deck layout,spans,fastening,and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the state where the Iproject is located. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with Iminimum 5 years of experience. Member of the Steel Deck Institute. C. Welder qualifications: Each welder shall have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved,and if applicable,shall have undergone recertification. I 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. All material shall be examined for damage or defects upon arrival at the job site. Any irregularities shall be reported immediately on the freight bill of lading and to the Project Manager. • 111 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Acceptable steel deck manufacturers are as listed below: 1.. Vulcraft Corp. 1 2. Verco Decking,Inc. 3. Metal Dek Group 4. Approved Equal I2.2 MATERIALS I A. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, 1 %2"deep steel sheet,wide-rib type: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel,with G90/Z275 galvanized coating and minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. I2. a. Grade to meet performance criteria. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611. a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria. I 3. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. 4. Minimum performance requirements and design shall incorporate 22 gage metal thickness(excluding finish),with a width of 24 inches. Side and end joints shall be I lapped and welded. Galvanized deck closures shall be supplied at all deck edges parallel to the flutes. Provide UL-listed fire resistance rated units. UL design number as indicated on drawings. 5. The gage,configuration and attachments of the metal roof deck are designed to provide a diaphragm shear capacity in accordance with the International I1416-00 05310 Steel Deck 05310-3 ZEL -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK Conference of Building Officials(ICBO). In addition to vertical load capacities, ' any"or equal"metal roof deck substitutions must provide the same shear capacities at a minimum. 6. Galvanized deck closures shall be supplied at all deck edges parallel to the deck flutes. B. Shop Painting: A phosphatized type cleaner shall be used to remove all grease,oil and other foreign matter to prepare the steel surface for further treatment. A light gray flexible acrylic,rust inhibiting prime paint shall then be roller applied and oven cured having a dry film thickness of 0.3 mil minimum each side. Any product not meeting this specification must be approved in writing by the Engineer. C. Deck shall be packaged to conform to installation requirements. Bundles shall not contain ' mixed sizes. D. Touch-up paint shall be of the same type used for the shop painting. E. Touch-up of scratched or field welded galvanized surfaces shall be made with cold galvanizing compound by ZRC Worldwide or approved equal. 2.3 EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36 steel,unfinished. ' B. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars. C. Welding Materials: AWS Dl.1. I D. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel,self tapping. E. Weld Washers: Mild steel,uncoated,3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick. , F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 25.1,zinc oxide. ' G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20. H. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick;profiled to fit tight to the deck. I I. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type,minimum 1.1 lb/cu ft density; profiled to suit deck. 1 1 1416.00 05310 Steel beck .._...05310-4 ._ Z E I , —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 2.4 ACCESSORIES ' A. Accessories shall be furnished as appropriate and as shown on the reviewed shop drawings. Fabricated accessory items necessary to complete the installation of the roof deck shall be standard designs of the manufacturer and subject to approval of the Engineer. Finish of ' accessories shall be the same as the roof deck units except that zinc-coated accessories may be used with shop painted deck. B. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips,wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. C. Cant Strips: Formed sheet steel, 14 gage thick,45 degree slope,3 1/2 inch nominal width and height, flange for attachment. D. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides,recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface,bearing flange 3 inches wide,sealed watertight. E. Floor Drain Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom,sloped sides,recessed 1-1/2 inches ' below floor deck surface,bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Deck units shall provide a satisfactory surface for the reception of insulation. Wherever practicable,units shall be of sufficient length to span a minimum of three supports. Deck units shall conform to American Iron and Steel Institute's"Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members". Where steel roof deck units extend over three or more spans, a moment coefficient of L/10 and a deflection coefficient of L/240 under live and dead loads combined shall be used. There will be no loads suspended from the deck and design shall be without consideration of such loadings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. Examine support framing for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work under this section. 3.2 ERECTION A. All work shall be in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings and the requirements ' specified herein. B. Use of the installed roof deck as a storage space or a working platform shall be permitted only after the portion desired for use has been secured in place. Construction loads shall be I distributed on plywood or planking and shall not rest directly on the metal deck. ' 14)6.000531OStee1Deck 05310-5 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK C. Deck units shall be applied only over supports which have been accurately aligned and secured in position. D. Joints and laps shall be tight and made without stretching. End laps shall be 2 inches or more and shall be made over supports. E. Minimum end bearing shall be 2 inches. F. Welding shall be in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Fastening of deck units to supports shall be by electric arc welding. Care shall be exercised in the selection of the electrodes and amperage to provide positive weld and to prevent high amperage blow holes. 2. Roof deck shall be welded to steel framework using '/2"minimum diameter puddle weld at maximum spacing as indicated on drawings or as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Deck shall have side laps to accommodate the side laps welds specified on the drawings. Side laps must be fastened as indicated an the drawings. When roof deck cantilevers over the support,the sidelaps shall be fastened at the end of the cantilever and at 12 inches on center from the end of the cantilever to the first support. 4. Steel deck accessories shall be securely welded in place. 5. Welds shall be free of cracks,craters, and other defects. 6. All sheets placed shall be welded in place by the end of the day. G. Units with burned holes or any other damage shall be replaced with satisfactory units. H. Unless indicated otherwise,penetrations of the deck for the attachment or suspension of other items shall not be made. I. Openings shall be cut into steel deck at the locations indicated or otherwise rrequiredd to accommodate other work and shall be made in such a way to maintain the tructural properties of the deck and the finished appearance of exposed surfaces. , 3.3 INSTALCATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacture instructions. Align and level. B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing. C. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing. D. At cellular deck intended for electrical raceways,level and align deck within 1/8 inch horizontally and vertically. Butt ends, allow for maximum 118 inch;gap. Install sheet.steel covers over gaps wider than 1/8 inch.Tape and seal joints watertight: i talc-oo 05310 Steel Deck 05310-6 —ENGINEERS 1 ISECTION 05310 STEEL DECK IE. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports;at 12 inches center. maximum,parallel with the deck flute and at each transerse flute using methods specified. ; Welding. Use fusion welds through weld washers. Ii Place and secure special deep fluted sections for integral concrete bridging. F. Clinch lock seam side laps. G. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum. IH. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum. I. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. IJ. At deck openings from 6 niches to 18 inches in size,provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place,angles r to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. UK. Where deck changes direction,install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates,of same thickness as deek. Fusion"weld`12 inches on center maximum. I . L. At floor edges,install concrete stopsuptrmed,to top surfacq of slab,to contain wet concrete. Provide:stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. IM. At openings between deck and walls,columns, and openings,provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close opening . IN. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures. IO. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld. P. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each Ideck flute. Q. Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each Ideck flute. R. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below. IS. Immediately after welding deck,and.other metal components in position,coat welds, burned areas,and dnaged`surface coating with touch-up primer. I3.4 FINISH A. If steel deck is indicated on.the drawings to be ungalvanized,then the deck and joists are to be paintedper specification Section 09900,Painting and Finishing. I , I 1416-000$3SOSteel Deck 05310-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 E t SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION I A. Before placement of roof insulation and roof coveting,inspect and rt ae d deck or tears, rs ,or other daanage which world imped its str ral.integri ` repair any B. Patching: Finish of deck units shall be maintained at all times using touch-up paint or galvanizing co npourid whenever necessary to prevent the formation d errust Thoroog lean and touch-up wilds,burned areas rusted areas and areas scarred th g c an approved paint or galvanizing compound. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 t 1 1416-0005310 SteelZEL 05310-8 Deck —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum component handrail including all fittings, anchors,bases and accessories. B. Mounting hardware and trim. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 05120—Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals 1.3 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 -Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes ' B. ASTM B209- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate C. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, ' Rods,Wire,Profiles, and Tubes D. ASTM B429- Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The component aluminum handrail system shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with the requirements of OSHA and the Standard Building Code. It shall be ' engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand the structural loadings as required by applicable codes or as defined below,whichever is greater. 1. Guardrails shall be designed to withstand a uniform horizontal load of 50 pounds ' per foot with a simultaneous vertical load of 100 pounds per foot applied to the top rail. 2. Handrail and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a uniform horizontal load of ' 3. 50 pounds per foot applied to the top rail. All guardrails,handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction, at any point on the railing system. B. The handrail system design and installation should allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum changes in ambient temperature,preventing opening of joints, buckling,overstressing of connections,and other detrimental effects. Expansion joints shall be placed at 60-foot intervals and at all concrete expansion joints. 1416-00 05520Ilatkknalls And Railings 05520-1 ZEIL ' —ENGINEERS— SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. B. SubmitP roduct data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for 1 all components of each product type specified. C. Shop Drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project which includes the following: 1 1. Show complete layout;plan views, elevations,connections,details for fabrication and attachment to other elements,and other installation details. 2. Include structural calculations and anchorage if requested by the Project Engineer. The submittal should be signed and sealed by the registered engineer responsible for the structural design of the system,certifying compliance with structural performance requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer and craftsmen having resources to provide consistent quality in appearance and physical properties,without delay of work. B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by the manufacturer. I C. Handrail shall be the product of a company regularly engaged in the manufacture of pipe railing for a minimum of 5 years. Railing shall be shop assembled in lengths not to exceed 24 feet for field erection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Handrails shall be properly packaged to prevent scratching and denting during shipment, storage and erection.Inspect materials to ensure that specified products have been received. Maintain protective wrapping until project is completed. B. Store components to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion,and other construction activities. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Review and coordinate setting drawings, shop drawings,templates,and instructions for installation of related items to be embedded in concrete and masonry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Tri Tech,Inc.,Austell,GA B. Design Components, Inc.,Fayetteville, GA , 1416-00 05520 Handrails And Railings 05520-2 Z E —ENGINEERS— , 1 r I . SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS IC. Nystrom Building Products,Minneapolis,MN D. Approved equal. 1 2.2 MATERIALS A. Posts and rails shall be a minimum of 1 1/2"schedule 40 aluminum pipe,alloy 6063-T6 or I6105-T5,ASTM B429 or B221.Post spacing shall be a maximum of 6'-0". B. Bars,Rods,and Tubes: ASTM B221.Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209. I C. Handrail shall be made of pipe and fittings mechanically fastened together with Series 300 stainless steel hardware. Handrail systems,which use fittings that are cast,glued,pop- Iriveted or sheet metal screws will not be acceptable. D. Toe-boards shall conform to OSHA standards.Toe-boards shall be a minimum of 4"high and attach to the post using clamps which allow for expansion and contraction between Iposts. Toe-boards shall be set 1/4" above the walking surface. E. Wedge anchors shall be AISI Type 303 stainless steel.Wedge anchors to be spaced 10d apart and have 5d edge distance for no reduction in pullout strength.A safety factor of 4 shall be used on pullout values published by the manufacturer. I F. Drainage: Provide weep holes or other means to allow trapped water to drain from hollow sections exposed on exterior or to condensation or moisture from other sources. I G. All aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete,grout or dissimilar metals will be protected with a coat of bituminous paint,teflon isolators or other approved material. 2.3 ACCESSORIES IA. Provide appropriate returns,corners, and mounting brackets as required to properly finish handrail system and to support it in conformance with Uniform Federal Accessibility IStandards. 2.4 FABRICATION IA. Factory or shop-fabricate to comply with specifications,manufacturer's printed requirements, and shop drawings.Field fabrication of the railing system is not permitted. I1. Maintain post spacing and anchorage as required to comply with specified structural requirements. 2. Use connections that maintain structural capacity of joined members. IB. Pre-assemble railing system,including posts,in easy to lift sections whenever possible; clearly mark units for site assembly and installation 1416-00 05520 Handrails And Railings 05520-3 ZEL I _ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 2.5 FINISHES A. All handrail and components shall be clear anodized per Aluminum Association M12C22A41 (215-R1).The pipe shall be plastic wrapped to protect the finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Field fabrication of the railing system is not permitted. B. Set handrails plumb within 1/8"of vertical and align horizontally to within 1/8"in 12 feet. ' C. Install wedge anchors to proper depth to develop full pullout and shear values. Check all fasteners and bolts in base connections and splices for tightness. ' D. Adequate provisions for expansion and contraction shall be incorporated into the rail. E. Toeboards shall be shipped loose and attached to the handrail in the field. Attachment to 1 the posts will be made with clamps. 3.2 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrate and conditions where railing systems are to be installed. B. Notify in writingof unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION ' A. Prepare surrounding construction to receive railing system installations in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. ' 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and shop drawings. B. Install posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete whenever possible,or by core drilling. 1. Separate aluminum,which might contact concrete,masonry,or other metals,by means of asphaltipaint or other approved method to prevent electrolytic action,; 2. After posts are inserted,solidly fill the remaining space between post,and side of sleeve or hole,with non-shrink nonmetallic grout to approximately 1/2 inch below exposed surface. 3. Install appropriate waterproof sealant as recommended by the manufacturer; slightly taper away from posts. 141600 05520 Handrails And Railings 05 5204 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS ' C. Adjust,level, and securely install railingsystem components. 1. Avoid sprinting assembled components of system into place. 2. Align rails so that variations from level for horzontal members,and from parallel* with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members,do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. D. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction by use of expansion joints/gaps in top rails, ' at intervals required by manufact rer;strictly adhere to manufacturer's instrinstructions>for locations of expansion joints and fastening of expansion sleeves. E. If installed configuration will not allow water drainage from hollow sections,drill weep holes at bottom locations or use other approved methods to provide drainage. ' 3.5 REINSTALLATION A. All defective,damaged or otherwse improperlyinstalled handrail shall be removed'and replaced with an aPProPtiate which complies with thissection at no additional ' cost to the Owner. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Verify that handrail is level and rigidly secured to substrate;make any adjustments required. 3.7 CLEANING A. Following installation, aluminum handrail shall be cleaned with a mild soap and clean ' water.Acid solutions,steel wool or harsh abrasives shall not be used. 3.8 PROTECTION SCHEDULES A. Provide adequate protection for all-surfaces of completed installations to prevent damage during remainder of construction activities. END OF SECTION 1 i 1416.0005520Handrails-And Railings 05520-5 - Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— ' - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05530 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND TREADS PART 1. GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grating:Aluminum B. Aluminum Checkered Plate C. Aluminum Stair Treads ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03000-Cast-hi-Place Concrete B. Section 05120—Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals. ' C. Section 05520-Handrails and Railings. 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. AA DAF-45 -Designation System for Aluminum y Fuushes B. BASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ' C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire,Profiles, and Tubes D. ASTM B429-Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and ' Tube E. NAAMM-Metal Bar Grating 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. The gratings and treads shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with the requirements of OSHA and the Standard Building Code. It shall be engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand the structural loadings as required by applicable codes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. ' B. Submit product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all components of each product type specified. 1416-00 05530 Aluminum Gratings And Treads 05530-1 ZEL ' -ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 05530 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND TREADS C. Shop Drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project which includes the following: 1. Show complete layout;plan views,elevations,connections,details for fabrication and attachment to other elements, and other installation details. 2. 2.Include structural calculations and anchorage if requested by the project Engineer.. The submittal should be signed and sealed by the registered engineer responsible for the structural design of the system, certifying compliance with structural performance requirements. ' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AManufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer and craftsmen having resources to ' provide consistent quality in appearance and physical properties,without delay of work. B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by the manufacturer. ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Gratings and treads shall be properly packaged to prevent scratching and denting during I shipment, storage and erection. Inspect materials to ensure that specified products have been received.Maintain protective wrapping until project is completed. . I B. Store components to avoid damage from moisture,abrasion,and other construction activities. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Review and coordinate setting drawings, shop drawings,templates, and instructions for installation of related items to be embedded in concrete and masonry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Thompson Fabricating-Birmingham,Alabama. ' B. McNichols Grating Company C. IKGBorden D. or approved equal. ' 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gratings shall be fabricated of I—shaped serrated bars, alloy 6063-T6;with swaged cross bars spaced on 4" centers. Bearing bars shall be spaced on 1-3/16"centers,IKGBorden Type IB,McNichols type GAL,or equal. Top surface of bearing bars shall be striated to provide a non-slip surface. Minimum depth of grating shall be 1-1/4 inches. _....._ ._ .. . 1416mi .00 05530 Atuoum 05530-2 Z E L Castings And Treads ' —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 05530 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND TREADS 1 B. Grating shall be designed to support a uniform load of 200 pounds per square foot,with a maximum deflection of/4". The maximum fiber stress shall not exceed that which is allowed by the Aluminum Association. I 1. Depth of bearing bars as indicated on Drawings 2. Comply with ANSI A202.1 3. Provide 3/16 inch thick,full depth bands at ends of bearing bars in grating floor Isections 4. Provide 3/16 inch toe plates around openings in grating,extend the full depth to 4 inches above top of grating,weld toeplates to each bearing bar IS. Weld bands to first,last and every fourth intermediate bearing bar 6. Center openings at a joint between panel sections 7. Cut cross bars flush with outside face of side bars I 8. Cut clean and smooth without fins,beads,or other projections, sawed or sheared joints 9. Fabricate in easily handled panels,maximum panel weight 80 lbs 10. Align cross bars and edge bars of adjacent panels 11. Make all bearing bars parallel 12. Make all grating flat with no tendency to rock I 13. Tolerance: a. Length: 3/16 inch,± b. Width: 1/8 inch,± ICMaximum differences or opposite diagonals: 1/4 inch . d. Bearing bar spacing: 1/32 inch,plus or minus e. Band and toeplate vertical and horizontal alignment: 1/8 inch+ ' f. Maximum clearance between panels: 1/4 inch 14. Pressure Locked type 15. Treads may be pressure-locked or one-piece extrusions 16. Bearing bars: 3/16 inch minimum flat stock or equivalent I-bars at 1 3/16 inch Icenters C. Aluminum shelf angles shall be anchored to the concrete using type 304 stainless steel I wedge anchors. D. Aluminum stair treads shall be I-bar grating type with and extruded aluminum corrugated Inosing. E. All aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete,grout or dissimilar metals will be protected Iwith a coat of bituminous paint,mylar isolators or other approved material. 2.3 FABRICATION IA. Factory or shop-fabricate to comply with specifications,manufacturer's printed requirements, and shop drawings. I 1416-00 05530 Aluminum Gratings And Treads 05530-3 Z Ei L I —ENGINEERS- 1 a SECTION 05530 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND TREADS 2.4 FINISHES 111 A. All components shall be clear anodized per Aluminum Association M10C22A41 (215-R1). The pipe shall be plastic wrapped to protect the finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Field fabrication is not permitted. B. Align horizontally to within 1/8"in 12 feet. C. Install shelf anchors to proper depth to develop full pullout and shear values.Check all fasteners and bolts in base connections and splices for tightness. D. Adequate provisions for expansion and contraction shall be incorporated. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and conditions where systems are to be installed. I B. Notify in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.3 PREPARATION A. Prepare surrounding construction to receive installations in accordance with manufacturer's I requirements. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and shop drawings. I B. Standard installation clearances and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of the current metal Bar Grating Manual. C. Adjust,level, and securely install components. D. Install alumiutu i clamps or clips to anchor the grating securely toits supports A-mhir urai of four fasteners ppanel shall be provided,unless otherwise shown on the drawings, Clips shall not protrude above the top of the grating. E. If installed configuration will not allow water drainage from hollow sections,drill weep holes at bottom locations or use other approved methods to provide drainage. 1416-00 05530 Aluminum Gratings And Treads 05530-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 05530 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND TREADS ' F. Cut-outs for circular obstructions are to be at least 2"larger in diameter than the. obstruction. Cut outs for all piping 2"in diameter and smaller shall be made in the field, Bond all ends of gratings. ' 3.5 RE-INSTALLATION A. All defective,damaged or otherwise improperly materials handrail shall be removed and replaced with material which complies with this section at no additional cost to the owner. 3.6 CLEANING A. Following:installation,aluminum surfaces shall be cleaned with a mild soap and clean +ater. Acid solutions,steel wool or harsh abrasives shall not be used. ' 3.7 PROTECTION SCHEDULES A. Provide adequate protection for all surfaces of completed installations to prevent damage during remainder of construction activities. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1416-O0 05530 Aluminum Gmtings And Treads 05530-5 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS- ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass batt insulation ' B. Board insulation for masonry cavity walls 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 02200—Excavation,Filling and Backfilling I B. Section 04200—Unit Masonry C. Section 09260—Gypsum B6ard Systems ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Submit Product Data for each item specified with manufacturer's certification that insulation products comply with specified requirements 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment B. Do not deliver plastic insulation materials to the project site prior to timeof installation ' Protect the materials of this section before,during,and after installation. Protect at all times against ignition. Complete the installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible C. Store materials in a safe, dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation. In the event of damage,repair,remove and replace materials to the approval and at no ' cost to the Owner PART 2 PRODUCTS t2.1 MATERIALS A. Rigid Tnsu1ation Cavity Wail Insulation: Polystyrene foam,ASTM C57a,Type ; ' 1 inch thick, 16 inches wide by 96 inches long,total R value=5.0, Styrofoam Cavitymate by Dow Chemical Company, or accepted substitution 1416-00 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 Z E —ENGINEERS^ 1 I SECTION 07210 I BUILDING INSULATION B. Thermal Batt Insulation: Glass fib��b�e s ithRmembrane,6 inch thickness conforming R 19 0 9 inch , ASTM C-665,Type II; 3-1/2 inch thickness=R-30. Thickness as shown on the Drawings PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install building insulation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Install insulation into all framing spaces,behind electrical outlets and piping,framing members and any other area in such a way as to form a complete insulating blanket around the heated/cooled areas of the structure and to provide a complete sound attenuation blanket 2. Install perimeter insulation at interior of all exterior foundation walls starting at a point 4 inch below grade and extending to top of footing B. Rigid InStallatit n:: u ld 1. Cavity wall insulation: Clean surface of walls of foreign material which keep insulation from fitting snug to the wall. Apply board to extetor face;to load bearing'masonry wall Lay boards against the wall annd eclanically fasten or ' spot bond to hold material between wall ties. Tightly fit end joints C. Batt Insulation: Install snugly between franfing members. Staple kraft faced batty to I framing members. Do not install faced insulation in:an unprotected condition. Protect kraft faced insulation with gypsum board END OF SECTION • I I I I 1436•00 07210 Building Insulation 07210-2 ZEA. —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and deck insulation as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 07530- Single Ply Membrane Roofing 111 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide roof insulation approved for FM Class I(I-60), and UL Class A classification ' roof assembly applications. B. Provide polyisocyanurate insulation conforming with Federal Specification HH-I- 1972/GEN and HH-I-1972/1,2. C. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Bulletin 1-29S,dated June 1986: Sure-Seal ' Mechanically-Fastened Roofing Systems Factory Mutual Membrane and Insulation Securement Requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver, store,protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original,unopened protective packaging. Store, where directed,off the ground. ' C. Keep insulation materials dry at all times. D. If stored outside,raise insulation above ground or roof level on pallets and:cover with a ' tarpaulin or other waterproof material. Plastic wrappinginstalled at the factory should not be used as outside storage covers. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Verify that surfaces are in suitable condition. Correct unsuitable surfaces. B. Do not lay more insulation than can be completely covered with roofing materials the same day. ' C. Do not lay insulation on roof surface that has ponded water, snow or ice. D. Do not expose insulation to excessive heat,sparks or open flame. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1416-00 07220 Roof And Deck Insulation 07220-1 ZEI. —ENGINEERS- 1 111111111111111111111.111111V Namikow. SECTION 07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. B. Submit Product Data for each item specified with manufacturer's certification that products comply with specified requirements. C. Submit shop drawings for insulation layout. Clearly indicate insulation types, slopes and thicknesses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. GAF Materials Corporation, 1361 Alps Road,Wayne New Jersey 07470 B. Firestone Building Products, 250 West 96th Street, Indianapolis,IN 46260 2.2 MATERIALS A. Non-tapered insulation: Rigid closed cell,polyisocyanurate foam insulation with nonasphaltic fiberglass facing chemically bonded in the manufacturing process. B. Cant strip: 3 inches by 3 inches,perlite or wood fiber as manufactured by International ' Permalite, Inc. or equivalent. C. Roof insulation must be compatible with the membrane roofing and must be an approved product of the roofing manufacturer. D. R-VALUE 1. Non tapered insulation: a. Minimum conditioned thermal value: 1 inch thickness=R-Value of 6.0 as determined in accordance with RIC/TIMA Technical Bulletin 281-1 , b. Polyisocyanccrate insulation minimum thickness: 1.5 inches 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners with minimum 3 inch round stress plate,. lengths as required and approved for specific use by roofing manufacturer,NRCA General Guide to Fasteners and Factory Mutual. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify that substrate is firm, dry and clean ' B. Apply insulation as noted below, or in strict accordance with insulation manufacturer's specifications to meet requirement of FM Class 1, 1-90 installation for mechanically- fastened roofing systems in accordance with Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Bulletin 1-29S: 7416-00 07220 Roof And Deck Insulation 07220-2 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— SECTION 07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION I1. In the field of the roof,insulation boards less than or equal to 4 feet by 4 feet require a minimum of 2 FM approved fasteners and plates; insulation boards between the sizes of 4 feet by 4 feet and 4 feet by 8 feet require a minimum of 4 ' 2. fasteners and plates Fastening density requirements listed above must be increased by 50 percent (1.5 times as many fasteners) at roof corners and perimeter. ' C. Cut and fit insulation board around all roof penetrations and projections. Feather insulation board around roof drains. ' D. In no event shall more insulation be placed on the surface to be roofed than can be covered with roofing membrane prior to the onset of inclement weather or termination of each day's work. ' E. At no time shall surfaces or edges of insulation be left exposed. Remove and replace installed insulation which becomes wet. ' F. Protect insulation from water at all temporary terminations during installation by a suitable cut-off and/or water dam. Protect applied insulation and completed roofing ' against damage by roof traffic at all times. G. Apply units of insulation with long joints continuous. Stagger end joints. All joints shall be tightly butted. H. In applications of more than one layer, apply succeeding layers using same procedure as for first layer. Stagger all joints between layers. Tightly butt all joints. ' I. Remove and reinstall roof system at any area ponding or causing ponding. END OF SECTION . 1 1 1 1 ' 4 1416.0D 07220 Roof And Deck Insulation 07220'3 Z E 1. —ENGINEERS- t SECTION 07530 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION ' A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO) fully-adhered single ply roof system and related finishings and accessories as shown on the Drawings, specified herein and as required for ' a complete roof installation 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS iA. Section 07220 -Roof and Deck Insulation B. Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal C. Section 07900-Joint Sealants ' 1.3 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. External fire resistance: UL Class A B. Wind uplift: FM I-60 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Roof manufacturer licensed applicator: 1. Applicator's experience: Continuously applied roofing materials in State of South ' Carolina for minimum of five years 2. Written statement: Provide written statement from manufacturer authorizing and approving the roofing system applicator ' B. Conduct coordination conference with manufacturer's representative, applicator, General Contractor, sheet metal installer, and Construction Manager C. Keep record indicating temperature and moisture conditions and type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations 1 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 15 year written warranty covering materials and installation for total roofing system including insulation. Include watertight condition 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not expose membrane and accessories to constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees F 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations during cold weather .....__.... 1416A007530Slagle Ply lvJensltiitiaRoofing 075304 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 . I SECTION 07530 I SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING B. Adjacent materials: Do not use oil based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow watt products(petroleum, grease,oil, solvents,vegetable or mineral oil,animal fat)or direct I steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system 1.7 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit shop Drawings to roof manufacturer and Engineer for approval. Approved shop Drawings are required for inspection of the roof: 1. Shop Drawings shall be approved and assigned a number by the Roof Manufacturer 2. Shop Drawings shall include: . a. Completely executed Notice of Award b. Outline of roof and size c. Deck type I d. Roof slope and designated direction of slope e. Location and type of all penetrations f. Perimeter and penetration details g. Key plan h. Sheet layout and sizes i. Number of uncured flashing rolls by width j. Insulation manufacturer,brand and thickness ' k. Fastener manufacturer,brand and length 1. Warranty type and period B. When field conditions necessitate modifications to the originally approved shop , Drawings,submit a copy of the shop drawings outlining all modifications to Carlisle for revision and approval C. Submit written statement from manufacturer's representative prior to commencement of roofing installation and after inspection of completed roofing system accepting the . , substrate for start of roof system installation and accepting the contpieted installation of the roof system 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Handle insulation and rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends. Store off ground and keep covered with waterproof covering. Do not leave insulation exposed to weather 1 B. Store materials in dry area and at temperature between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F C. Replace damaged or wet materials I PART 2 PRODUCTS t 2.1 MANUFACTURER , A. Firestone Ultraply TPO 1416-00 07530 Single Ply Membrane RoofinZELg 07530-2 I —ENOINEERB— I I - I , SECTION 07530 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING IB. GAF Everguard TPO C. Or approved equal I2.2 MATERIALS A. Membrane: Thermoplastic polyolefin(TPO), 0.060 inch thick sheet, color:white IB. Flashing: Firestone TPO 0.060 inch thick sheet,color: white I C. Accessories: Cements, lap sealants,nailing strips, fasteners,one way roof vents,etc., as recommended by manufacturer IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify layout of work before beginning installation. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck has been completed I B. Examine surfaces for inadequate;ancho . e,drainage,foreign material,moisture,and unevenness which would prevent,execution and quality of application of roofing system as specified I • C. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections: 1. Verify placement of wood blockings,inserts,nailing strips, cants, drain pan linings, etc. I 2. Coordinate roof penetratems, equipment bases-and other conditions, as required 3. Reset roof drains or scuppers that are not at proper level to drain finished roof before installation I . D. g Be 'nnin work under this section signifies acceptance of existing conditions by installer Beginning I3.2 PREPARATION A. Dry and broom clean surfaces before beginning work B. Protect paving and building walls adjacent tci hoist prior to starting'work,_ Lap suitable protective materials at least six inches. Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave I protective: Vot ing in place for duration of roofing work 3.3 APPLICATION I A. Install roofing:system in accOrdance with manufacturer`s recommendations,design requirements,and reference standards. Install in accordancewith manufacturer's standard details unless othise indicated` I ` B. Membrane: Apply,lap and splice using methods and materials per manufacturer's instructions except where indicated otherwise herein: I1416-00 07530 Singlc Ply Membrane Roofing 07530-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 07530 - - - `- SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1. Mechanically fasten to perimeter using approved fasteners and recommended spacing 2 Lay membrane smooth and wrin e-free using a roller type device(no brooms). Remove air bubbles and securely adhere membrane to substrate 3. Splices 3-inch minimum lap sealed with lap sealant ' 4. Daily seal loose edge of membrane at completion of each day's work C. Flashing: Apply,lap,and splice using methods,materials, and details per manufacturer's instructions: 1. Flash around`penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible 2. Field'fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details D. Terminations: Make terminations according to manufacturer's standard details,NRCA Standard Details, and as indicated on the Drawings ' E. Seal,alljoints bete:roof substrate and penetrations, flashings, and other roof system components and accessories accessories'per Section 07900,Joint Sealants. ' END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1415-0007530Single Ply Membrane Roofing 075304 ZEL _ 1 —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Flashing and sheet metal as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein IB. Metal counter flashing and base flashing. C. Metal wall flashing and expansion joints. ID. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 07530- Single Ply Membrane Roofing IB. Section 07900-Joint Sealers 1.3 REFERENCES IA. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate B. ASTM D2822- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos Containing I C. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, 1985, Construction Details I D. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual I1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the I items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Manufacturer's technical product data,installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. I1.5 WARRANTY A. Sheet metal work shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from date of substantial I completion. Sheet metal work associated with roofing shall be warranted for a period of 15 years under the roofing warranty. I B. Warranty shall include replacement at Contractor's expense of any defects which occur during the warranty period which,in the opinion of Engineer are due to defective materials,workmanship, or for failure to allow for expansion/contraction. I I1a1s.00msaoFlashing And Sheet Metal 07600-1 ZEI. —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 07600 I FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B209,alloy 3003,temper H14,AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish; ' 0.032"thick(20 gage)except as otherwise indicated for flashing and cleats,and gauges as specifically noted on Drawings. I 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic cement: ASTM D2822,Type 1 ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Assure that surfaces over which sheet metal are to be applied is smooth and free of defects. ' B. Correct roughness in substrate or anything in the construction that would make it difficult or impossible to produce a first-class installation of sheet metal work. C. Keep work clean at all times. 3.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS A. Where sheet metal abuts into adjacent dissimilar materials,the juncture shall be executed I in a manner that will prevent electrolysis between the two materials. B. Cover all treated wood with base ply prior to flashing. 3.3 FLASHING A. Single Ply Membrane Roofing for sheet metal flashing detail of flue penetrations. I B. Form sheet metal on a bending brake. C. Shaping, trimming and hand seaming shall be done on the bench as far as practicable, I with the proper sheet metal working tools. 3.4 . INSTALLATION A. Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 10'-0 in length and 1'-0 from corners and intersections. I B. Install flashing and sheet metal in locations and configurations as shown on Drawings. Hem all edges. I 1416-00 07600 Fln And sty Metal 07600-2 Z E L I —ENGINEERS— SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL C. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work with other trades to provide weathertight and ' neat installation. D. Wherever possible fasten metal flashing separately from roofing membranes and flashing to allow independent movement. E. Provide two piece flashing at all intersecting planes. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 I 1416.00 07600 11e4hing And Sheet Metal 07600-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1101010111111110111111111.11 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing substrate surfaces B. Sealant and joint backing for joints 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03000-Concrete ' B. Section 04200–Unit Masonry C. Section 07530 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing D. Section 07600 -Flashing and Sheet Metal E. Section 08100-Metal Doors and Frames F. Division 15 -Mechanical G. Division 16- Electrical 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM C790-Use of Latex Sealing Compounds B. ASTM C804-Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds D. ASTM C919 -Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications E. ASTM C920- Elastomeric Joint Sealants F. ASTM D1056 -Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber G. ASTM D1565 -Flexible Cellular Materials—Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers ' (Open-Cell Foam) H. SWRI(Sealant,Waterproofing and Restoration Institute)—Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification I. ANSI 116.1 -Multi-Component Elastomeric Sealing Compounds for the Building Trade ! , 1416-00 07900-)ointSeal®b 07900-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics,performance criteria, substrate preparation,limitations, color availability and intended use. C. Samples: Submit two samples,2-inch by 2-inch in size,illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures,surface preparation, perimeter conditions requiring special attention for field installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. , 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this 1 section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Experience in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.. Maintainp temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and ' I after installation. B. Install sealants only when the air and surface temperatures are above 50 degrees F. i 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700,Contract Closeout. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight seal,water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 1 1 1416.00 07900-oint Sealants 07900-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS ' A. Bituminous Based (Type A): Single comps rent,aaspbalt compound,elongation capability of 0 to 2 percent of joint width;manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal. B. Acrylic Emulsion Latex(Type B): ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25,Use T,,Multi component,non-staining,non-bleeding,non-,sagging; color as selected; Sannlast c SL2 ' Manufactured by Sonneborn.or approved equal: 1. Elongation Capability: 500 percent 2. Service Temperature Range: 20 to 150 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 35 C. Butyl Sealant(Type C): ASTM C920,Grade NS, Class 25,Use Tsingle component, ' solvent release,non-skmnmg,non sagging,black dolor;manufactured by Sonnebom or approved equal: 1. Elongation Capability: 7 to 10 percent 2. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30 • D. Polysulfide Sealant(Type 13), PS TT S.227E,ASTM C920,Grade NS,Class 25,Use' NT;two component,chemical ging,non-staining,nein.ble ding,capable of continuous water immersion,non-sagging type; color as selected,Sonolastic.nr anufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal: 1. Elongation Capability: 25 percent 2. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35 E: Polyurethane Sealant(Type E): FS'T' ":.Sw227fix ASTM C920,Grade NS,Class 25,1.7'se. NT;:single component,chemical curing,non-staining,non-bleeding,non-sagging t rpe ' color as selected; Sanolastic NP2 manufactured by Sonnebom or approved equal: 1. Elongation Capability: 50 percent 2. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F t3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35 F. Silicone Sealant(Type F): FS-TT-S-230C,ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; ' single component, solvent curing,non-sagging,non staining,fungus resistant,non:- bleeding,color as selected,;Proglaze tnannfactured by Trerrco Oraniseal manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal: I1. Elongation Capability: 50 percent 2. Service Temperature Range: 20 to 350 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35 ' 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining-type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. ' 1416-0007900-Joint Sealants 07900-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 11111111 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056;round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod;:oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width;non-gassing; Sofrod manufactured by AET,Sonofoam ' manufactured by Sonneborn, Cera-Rod manufactured by W.R. Meadows or approved equal. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove all dust,grease oil,wax and loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Wipe surfaces with clean rag soaked in suitable solvent. ' C. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. D. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION , A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required 2:1 width/depth ratios with minimum depth of 112 inch. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter,ridges, and sags. F Apply sealant within recommended ded application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. ZEL 1416.00 07900-JaiM 07900-4 Sealants —ENGINEERS— ISECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS ' G. Tool joints concave to a smooth even fmish, flush with the edges of the sealant recessed H. Keep adjacent surfaces clean and free of overlapping sealant I. Remove sealant and reseal joints when: • 1. Excess sealant is outside the joint and feathered onto surfaces 2. Itis not possible to paint adjacent surfaces to a clean line ' 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01710,Cleaning B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls B. Protect sealants until cured 3.6 SCHEDULE Location _ Type Color Window perimeter E To match frame color Door Frame/Walls B To match adjacent paint colors ' Joints Between Cast-in-Place concrete walls D Gray unless noted Expansion&Contraction Joints D or E Gray unless noted ' Under Thresholds C Black Paving Joints A Black END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1416.00 07900-Joint Sealants 07900-5 ZEA. —ENGINEERS- 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08100 IMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Non-rated, fire rated and thermally insulated steel doors and frames B. Louvers ' C. Interior and exterior glazed light frames D. Anchors for steel frames 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200-Masonry B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel And Miscellaneous Metal tC. Section 08380- Acoustic Metal Doors and Frames D. Section 08711 -Door Hardware E. Section 08800-Glazing ' ` F. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing 1.3 REFERENCES 1 A. ANSI A115 - Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware p ep ' B. ANSI A117.1 - Specification for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People ' C. ANSI/SDI-100—Standard Steel Doors and Frames D. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process E. ASTM C236-Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot-Box F. ASTM E152-Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies G. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class H. DHI: Door Hardware Institute-The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames,Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware F MI6-0008100 Metal Doors And Frames 08100-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows J. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Codes (latest edition) K. NFPA 252 -Fire Tests for Door Assemblies ' L. UL 10B-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.4 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers as those shown on Drawings ' C. Shop Drawings: 1. For each door type,indicate door and frame elevations,internal reinforcement, eloure method,and cut-outs for glazing,louvers, and finish 2 Clearly identify location,typical and special details of construction,methods of assembly,materials,jointsandconnections I D. Product Data: Indicate door configurations,location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement,frame configuration,and anchor types and spacings ' E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1 B. Provide doors and frames manufactured by a single fine , C. Conform to local codes and ordinances, state laws and regulations for performing the Work of this Section 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B B. Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 450 F degrees across door thickness ' C. Installed Door and Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated 1 1416-00 08100 Metal Doors And Frames 08100-2 Z E L.r —ENGINEERS ' I SECTION 08100 IMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING IA. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment IB. Mark all doors and frames.with reference numbers corresponding with door schedule Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging: IC. 1. Inspect for damage 2. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Engineer I D. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging: 1. Inspect for damage 2. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Engineer IE. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation: 1. Store doors in well ventilated area,under cover I 2. Place units on 4-inch high minimum wood sills with 1/4 inch between stacked doors Hold bottom of welded frames rigidly in place by spreader bars to maintain alignment IF. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop Drawings 1.10 COORDINATION 1 A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware Iinstallation C. Preparation for Hardware: ANSI 115,use templates furnished by finish hardware supplier I for cutouts,reinforcing, drilling,tapping,or otherwise prepare the doors and frames to receive finish hardware IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR MANUFACTURERS IA. Ceco Door Products B. Republic Doors and Frames I C. Curries Manufacturing, Inc. Product D. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company Product I I 1416-00 08100 Metal Doom And Frames 08100-3 .. ZEA. --ENGINEERS- I IOW SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.2 DOORS AND PANELS A. Exterior Doors(Non-thermally Broken): SDI-100 Grade I B. Interior Doors(Non-rated): SDI-100 Grade II C. Interior Doors(Fire Rated): SDI-100 Grade II 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION ' A. Face: 18 gauge Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 B. Core: Polystyrene foam with steel channel grid or vertical steel stiffeners ' 2.4 FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 14 gauge thick material,base metal thickness B. Interior Frames: 16 gauge thick material,base metal thickness ' 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers: Provide sight-proof stationary louvers where indicated, constructed of inverted 1 V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24-gauge galvanized cold-rolled steel set into 20-gauge galvanized steel frame B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel U shape,butted corners;prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws C. Silencers: Resilient rubber,fitted into drilled hole D. Primer: Zinc chromate type ' 2.6 FABRICATION -DOORS A. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel,h shaped, specifically for double doors r B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place: 1. Locate hardware in accordance with DHI—"Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware" C. Attach fire rated label to each door unit that is specified as rated I D. Close top and bottom edge of all doors with continuous steel channel closure: 1. Top channel to be flush steel 2. Seal joints watertight E. Configure exterior doors with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping 1416-00 08 100 Metal Doors And Frames 08100-4 ZEl —ENGINEERS^ ' I SECTION 08100 IMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES F. Provide weep hole openings in bottom of doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture IG. All doors to have beveled edges I2.7 FABRICATION-FRAMES A. Fabricate frames as welded unit IB. Mullions for Double Doors: Fixed type,of same profiles as jambs Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type,of same profiles as jamb and head IC. D. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes IE. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top IF. Terminate door stops 1 inch above finished floor: 1. Cut stop at 90 degree angle and close I G. Prepare frame for silencers: 1. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side ' 2. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions H. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. 1 2.8 FLOOR ANCHORS Securely weld'floor anchors inside each jamb,with two holes provided at each jamb for IA. floor anchorage B. Where so scheduled or specified adjustable floor anchors providing not less than 1 inch Iheight adjustment C. Minimum thickness of floor anchors: 16 gauge I2.9 JAMB ANCHORS A. Frames for installation in masonry walls: 1. Provide with adjustable jamb anchors of wire type 2. Provide minimum of three anchors on each IB. Frames for installation in stud partitions provided with steel anchors,not less than 18 gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb,four per jamb,plus one over 7'-0" up to 8'-0",one per two feet thereafter I C. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete,masonry-or structural steel: I 1416-0008100 Meal Doors AndFames 08100-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 08.100 iMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Provide with anchors of suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings 2. Four anchors per jamb with countersunk heads 1 2.10 CLEARANCES A. Edge clearances between doors and frames at head and joint: 1/8 inch ' B. At door sills where no threshold is used: 3/4 inch standard except if otherwise indicated C. At door sills where a threshold is used: 1/4 inch maximum between door and threshold D. At door sills when carpet is used: 1/4 inch higher than the thickness of the carpet ' E. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 1/8 inch 2.11 FINISH I A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 B. Primer: Rust inhibitive air dried PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work ' B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI B. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack,twist and out of square C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing r D. Fill frames in masonry walls with grout as the wall is laid up E. Coordinate with masonry gypsum wall board wall construction for anchor placement F. In masonry construction,locate wall anchors in jambs at hinge and strike levels ' G. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frame and secure to adjacent construction with expansion anchors approved by Engineer H. In metal stud partitions,install wall anchors in jambs at hinge and strike levels: 1. In open steel stud partitions,place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie 2. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws 1414.00 08100 Metal Doors And Frames 08100-6 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I. Anchor frame to floor with two stainless steel 3/8 inch expansion anchors each jamb J. Install door louvers,plumb and level K. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08711 L. Touch-up factory finished doors: ' 1. Sand bare and rusted areas and reprime 2. Surface to be free of irregularities and ready for field paint 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measuredwith straight edge, corner to corner ' 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700, Contract Closeout B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement ' 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Reference Drawings for Door Schedule I END OF SECTION 1 1 1 i 1 Ir 1416-0008100 Metal Doors And Frames 08100-7 Z E L i —ENGINEERS— 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sound rated steel doors and frames ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200-Unit Masonry: Mortar fill of metal frames B. Section 05120- Structural Steel And Miscellaneous Metal C. Section 08711 -Door Hardware D. Section 09900-Painting: Field painting of doors 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process ' B. ASTM E90- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements C. ANSUSDI-100- Standard Steel Doors and Frames D. DHI: Door Hardware Institute-The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel ' Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware E. UL 10B -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples B. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers as those shown on Drawings C. Shop Drawings: 1. For each door type, indicate door and frame elevations,internal reinforcement, ' 2. closure method, and cut-outs for glazing,louvers,and finish Clearly identify location, typical and special details of construction,methods of assembly,materials,joints and connections D. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement, frame configuration, and anchor types and spacings E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions 1416-0008380 Acoustic Metal Doors And Frames 08380-1. Z E L —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC METAL DOORS AND FRAMES F. Test Reports: Provide copies of sound test reports showing compliance with specified sound ratings. ' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 B. Mark all doors and frames with reference numbers corresponding with door schedule C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging: 1. Inspect for damage 2. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Engineer D. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging: 1. Inspect for damage 2. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Engineer E. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation: 1. Store doors in well ventilated area,under cover 2. Place units on 4-inch high minimum wood sills with 1/4 inch between stacked doors ' F. Hold bottom of welded frames rigidly in place by spreader bars to maintain alignment 1.6 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ' A. For door and frame assemblies: Rating of STC 46,operable. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 ACOUSTIC DOOR MANUFACTURERS A. Overly Door Company B. Karpen Steel ' C. Next Door Company D. Approved Equal Pp 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION ' A. Face: 18 gauge Steel sheet B. 1 3/"thick with continuous welds and internally constructed to meet STC rating. ' 2.3 FRAMES A. 16 gauge thick material,base metal thickness 1476-00 08380 Acoustic Metal Doors And Frames 08380-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 08380 ' ACOUSTIC METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.4 SOUND SEALS I A. Zero manufacturing style le 326, or equal at head and jambs. q IB. Zero manufacturing style 367 at sill with Style 627A threshold or equal 2.5 FINISH IA. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 IB. Primer: Rust inhibitive air dried PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI IB. Prior to installation,all frames must be checked for rack,twist and out of square Fill frames in masonry walls with grout as the wall is laid up IC. D. Coordinate with masonrygypsum wall board wall construction for anchor placement • E. In masonry construction,locate wall anchors in jambs at hinge and strike levels F. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frame and secure to adjacent Iconstruction with expansion anchors approved by Engineer G. In metal stud partitions,install wall anchors in jambs at hinge and strike levels: 1. In open steel stud partitions,place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie 2. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws I H. Anchor frame to floor with two stainless steel 3/8 inch expansion anchors each jamb I. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710 IJ. Touch-up factory finished doors: 1. Sand bare and rusted areas and reprime I2. Surface to be free of irregularities and ready for field paint 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES IA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner 3.3 ADJUSTING IA. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement 1416-0008380Acoustic Metal Doors And Frames 08380-3 I Z E —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3.4 SCHEDULE I A. Reference Drawings for Door Schedule END OF SECTION I I 1 1 1 • • I I 1 I I SEL 1416.00083B0Acoustic Metal Doors And Frames 083804 - I —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware 2. Electrified door hardware 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2000- Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ' B. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen C. BHMA A156 -Hardware Standards D. DHI A115 -Hardware Installation Standards E. NFPA 80- Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening F. NFPA 252- Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies ' G. UL 305 -Fire Rated System Design H. UL 1784-Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams. ' C. Samples: For each exposed finish and/or products as requested by the Architect or Owner. ' D. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets,in a horizontal format,per the DHI Handbook/January 1996, Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule indicating type, style, function, size, label,hand,manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description of each electrified door hardware ' function,including sequence of operation. E. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks,in the format I recommended by the DHI Handbook/June 1989 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. ' 1416-0008711 Door Hardware 08711-1 Z Ei L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: The supplier shall be or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications,by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable. C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule. D. Keys: Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. E. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. F. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1 as indicated in Part 3 for this section. G. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified products. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 2. Warranty Period for Locksets and Cylinders: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the product named for each ' door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers specified for each type of hardware item. 1416A3 08771 Door Hardware 08711-2 ZEL t -ENGINEERS- SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 2.2 DOOR HARDWARE A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Door Hardware Sets at 1 the end of Part 3. Manufacturers'names are abbreviated. 2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hinges: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section. ' 2. Pivots and Pivot Hinges: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section. ' B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves)into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. ' C. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Brass or bronze, with steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel,with steel pin, except as indicated in hardware sets. ' 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel,with steel pin. D. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and as indicated in Hardware Sets, ' Part 3 of this section. E. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges:. ' 1. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes). 2. Wood Doors and Frames: Wood screws. 3. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Threaded-to-the-head wood screws. i2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES ' A. Manufacturers: 1. See product legend,Part 3 of this section Marks USA(MK). B. Lockset Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets,Part 3 of this section. ' C. Dummy Trim: Match lock trim and escutcheons. ' D. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES IA. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Latches: Internal,battery-powered locks; consisting of complete lockset,motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device. I416-DD 08711 Door Hardware 08711-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 amemesw SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE Provide key override,low-battery detection and warning,LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock. 1. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2.6 BOLTS A. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. B. Surface Bolts: Flush bolt heads of minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)diameter rods of brass,bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-)long rod. C. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, as indicated, designed for mortising into door edge. 1.. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2.7 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. See product legend,Part 3 of this section Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection,based on testing according B. Panic Exit to UL 305. C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic ' protection,based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. 1. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 2. Outside Trim: Lever and Lever with cylinder material, finish, and design to match locksets and latchsets,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on all wood doors. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Push-Pull Design: As scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2.9 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section B. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3. ' 1. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection,based on testing according to UL 305 and __. 1416.05087]1 DoorHmdwarc 08711-4 Z E L , —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE INFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. I C. Carry-Open.Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors,unless automatic or<self-latching;.bolts are used. I 2.10 CLOSERS A. Surface-Mounted Closers: ' 1. Ma.anufacturers: See product legend,Part 3 of this section B. Size of Units: Factory-sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for Iopening force. 2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS IA. Protective Trim Units: Sized 2 inches less than door width on push side,by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with exposed machine or self-tapping screws. I 1. Material: Metal a. Manufacturers: 1) See product legend,Part 3 of this section I2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS Stops'and Holden: Provide floor stops for doors,•unesswall or other type steps are IA. scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic: Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate,provide overhead holders. 1. Manufacturers: Ia. See product legend,Part 3 of this section B; Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to Iframe. 2.13 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS - A. Door Gasketing: Provide eontin ous weather strip gasketing onexteriordoors and provide smoke,light,or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. I Provide noncorrosive fasteners far, exterior applications and elsewhere as Indic ted> 1. Manufacturers: a. Gasketing and Door Bottoms Ii) 2. See product legend,Part 3 of this section Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control„as tested according to ASTM E83. 3. Smoke Labeled Gasketing Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed I and labeled,based on testing according to L. 1784. 4. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled,based,on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. 1416-0008711 Door Hardware 08711-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 08711 1 DOOR HARDWARE • 5. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D2000 and AAMA 701/702. 111 B. Thresholds: Of type scheduled or indicated. 1. Manufacturers: I a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2.14 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE consistingof rails,hangers, supports,bumpers, I A. Sliding Door Hardware: Complete sets g floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Manufacturers: I a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section 2. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 125 lb. 2.15 CYLINDERS,KEYING,AND STRIKES ` I A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. I 1. Manufacturers: a. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. I 2. Number of Pins: Six. 3. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. t B. Keying tem: Factory registered keying s yste n 1. Keys. Provide nickel sil er.ki keys permanently inscribed with a visual.key control number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE"notation. Provide three change keys and' five master,or grand master keys. I C. Key Control tern Include key holding hooks,labels,key tags with self-locking key . and markers. Contain system in wad,m .anted type metal cabinet ' ' holders,envelep�es, With baked-enamel finish. Include cross-index system set up by key control manufacturer, with card index. •' 1. Manufacturers: a. See product legend,Part 3 of this section D. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt,with I curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. 2.16 FABRICATION I A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard I materials if different from specified standard. B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door I hardware,unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated applications. 1416-00 09717 Door Hardware 08711-6 Z E I I —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE IC. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, I "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18. IPART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction,;wall and floor construction,and other conditions Iaffecting performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. I B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107. IC. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series. D. FRP Door Preparation: Comply with Section 08220. E. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements,unless otherwiseindicated: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural I Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." F. Adjust and reinforceatta bmernt substrates as;necessary for prOperinstallatioatad I operation. Drill and countersink:units a at are not factory preps aced for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry,standards. 1. ' Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant I complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation ofheatmgand ventilating I equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. I 3.2 FIELDQ UALITY CONTROL I A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. I1416.0008911 Door Hardware 08711-7 Z E L -ENGINEERS--- I SECTION 08711 t DOOR HARDWARE 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS I HARDWARE SCHEDULE Legend: Products: Manufacturer: Approved Substitute: Hinges (HA)Hager McKinney, Stanley I Pivots (RI)Rixson Donna, ABH Locks/Latches (SA) Sargent Corbin, Schlage,Yale Entry Control Locks (SA) Sargent Corbin, Schlage,Yale Exit Devices (SA) Sargent Corbin,Von.Duprin,Yale Closers (NO)Norton Corbin, Sargent,Yale O'Head Stop/Holders (RI)Rixson ABH, Glynn-Johnson Misc.Door Trim (TR)Trimco/BBW Ives,Rockwood Weatherstripping (PE)Pemko Reese,Hager Sliding Door Hardware (HA)Hager Lawrence, Stanley Key Cabinets (LU)Lund Telkee I Fire Dept.Key Box (KN)Knoxbox no substitute Furnish all items in US32D/630,, except as indicated in the schedule. Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. Weatherstripping to be Clear Anodized Aluminum. Closers to be EN!G 89 Finish.Miscellaneous door trim may be furnished in US32D/630,Dull/Satin Stainless Steel. Use 2 pair of hinges or 2 each intermediate pivots at doors 7'-6"and over. ' Use 5-inch by 4.5-inch hinges at doors 3'-6"and over. Furnish glass bead kits at exit devices where required. Fasten all exit devices and closers with SNB fasteners. Furnish all brackets required to mount closers, as required by frame or door details. Door Jambs must be cleaned of all dirt, grease,oil, solvents or solvent residue and dust before applying Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive backed Gasketing, Smoke Seal or Weatherstripping. I I I . I 1416-00 08711 DaorHardwarc 08711-8 Z E —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE IHardware are sets*11 be_as follows: HW SET—1 (Single Exterior) I 1 each Electric Strike 850-630 32D Hanchett 1 each In-line Power Controller 2005M3 Hanchett 1 each Exit Device 8943 ETL 32D Sargent I 1 each Latch Protector x 320 630 Rockwood 1 each Hydraulic Closers series 3511 32D Sargent 1 each 84.00-12 xE4Er.CS Kick Plate,Push side 32D Ives each Perimeter Seal x S88D Black Pemko Ii 1 each Door Bottom Sweep x 345AP Clear Pemko 1 each Overhead Rain Drip x 346C Clear Pemko 1 each Cast Threshold x GS-300A x 5"width IEW SET-2 (Exterior Pair) 1 each bdt Device x 16-43- 904 x 815 x PTB x TB x CPC 32D Sargent 1 each Exit Device x 14-8710 x TB x CPC 32D Sargent 1 each Electric Strike 8500-630 32D Hatchett 1 each In-Line Power Controller 2005M3 Hatchett 2 each Closer x 351 x CPS x SRI x TB EN Sargent 1 each Overhead Rain Drip x 346C Clear Pemko 1 Set Meeting Stile Astragal x 18041 CP x 18041 CP Clear Pemko 1 each Perimeter Seal x S88D Black Pemko 2 each Door Bottom Sweep x 345AP Clear Pemko I 1 each Cast Threshold x GS-300A x 5"width Reuse existing electric strikes and controller on Door No 103. I HW SET 3 (Single Interior,Non-latching) 1 each Hydraulic Closers series 3511 32D Sargent 1 each 8400-12 04E-CS Kick Plate,Push side 32D Ives 1 each 8300-8 Pull Plate w/8105-8 Pull 32D Ives 1 each 8200 Push Plate 32D Ives 1 each Cast Wall Stop x 401 626 Rockwood 3 each Silencer x 608 Gray Rockwood IEND OF SECTION I I I . I1416-00 08711 Door i adwae 08711-9 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 i SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Gypsum Board Systems B. Taped and sanded joint treatment ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120- Structural and Miscellaneous Metal ' B. Section2 07 10-Building Insulation tC. Section 09900—Painting and Finishing 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM C36-Gypsum Wallboard B. ASTM C475 -Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction C. ASTM C630- Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board D. ASTM C754-Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board E. ASTM C840-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board F. ASTM C1002- Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board G. ASTM E119-Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials H. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings ' I. GA-216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board pp 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, and joint tape ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840 1416-00 09260 Gypsum Board sysl� 09260-1 __.. Z E L ' -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum I three years experience 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Conform to International Building Code for fire rated assemblies as follows: 1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by FM No. WIA- 1 hr I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. Georgia Pacific B. Gold Bond C. Genstar I D. United States Gypsum Company 2.2 METAL STUDS,JOIST,AND ACCESSORIES A. All products will be manufactured by the current members of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.All galvanized studs and joists shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the minimum requirements of 1996 A.I.S.I. standards.All studs shall be 22 gauge minimum. B. Provide all accessories including,but not limited to,tracks, clips web stiffeners,anchors, fastening devices,resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer for the steel members used. I Fastening of components shall be with self-drilling screws or welding. Screws or welds shall be of sufficient size to insure the strength of the connection.All welds of galvanized steel shall be touched up with a zinc-rich paint.All welds of carbon sheet steel shall be touched up with paint. Wire tying of components shall not be permitted. C. Prior to fabrication of framing,the contractor shall submit shop drawings to the engineer to obtain approval. Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square,with components attached in a manner to prevent racking and to minimize distortion while lifting and transporting. I 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C36 1/2 inch thick,maximum permissible length; ends square I cut,tapered and beveled edges B. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 1/2 inch thick,maximum permissible length; ends square cut,tapered and beveled edges 1416.00 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 2.4 ACCESSORIES ' A. Corner Beads: Metal B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC bead ' C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475;reinforcing tape,joint compound,adhesive, and water ' D. Fasteners: ASTM C1002,Type S12 E. Expansion(control)Joint: Use where indicated ' PART 3 EXECUTION t3.1 EXAMINATION Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work 3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION A. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for an angular fit against abutting member. Studs shall be plumbed,aligned and securely attached to flanges of both upper and lower runners. In all doubled jamb studs and doubled headers not accessible to insulation contractors, insulation equal to that specified elsewhere shall be provided. Splices in axial load bearing members other then ' runner track shall not be permitted.Temporary bracing where required,shall be provided until erection is complete. B. Runners should be securely anchored to the supporting structure. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, and elsewhere to furnish supports. Lateral bracing shall be provided by use of gypsum board and gypsum sheathing or by horizontal straps or cold-rolled channels. Bracing shall conform to Section D3 of the AISI Specification. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member. C. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under ' structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners D. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs E. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels or wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for ' support of plumbing fixtures,toilet partitions,wall cabinets,toilet accessories, and hardware I ZEL1416-00 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-3 ' - —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 09260 IGYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect wall furring framing tight to concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring I brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions 3.4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION ' A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216 B. Erect single layer gypsum board vertically,with edges and ends occurring over firm I bearing C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing ' D. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant E. Place controljoints consistent with lines of buildingspaces as directed � P F. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials 3.5 JOINT TREATMENT ' A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints,edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes B. Feather coats onto th r adjoiningsurfaces so that camber is maximum 1/16 inch 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction ' END OF SECTION ' I 1 I • II 1416-00 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' I SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Acoustical ceiling, complete with suspension system, ceiling panels,and related accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified herein 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS t A. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Systems B. Division 15-Mechanical C. Division 16-Electrical ' 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM C635-Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay In Panels B. ASTM C636-Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and ' Lay In Panels C. ASTM E84-Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. ASTM E580-Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions E. Federal Specifications(FS) SS-S-118B - Sound Controlling Panels and Tiles ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples ' B. Submit manufacturer's printed product data for grid system and acoustical tile: l„ Certifications required: a. Certify that products furnished for this project are asbestos free ' b. Certify that products meet or exceed Specification requirements 2, Maintenance: a. Instructions for proper maintenance and cleaning ' b. Provide instructions for refinishing c. Provide recommendations on precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performance ' C. Submit 6 inch square sample of acoustical material 1111 ' 1416-00 09510 Suspended Aeousnce1 Ceilings 09510-1 Z E I —ENGINEERS-- I 1 SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling tile with three years , minimum experience B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience, approved by manufacturer 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store,p rotect,and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, , Materials and Equipment B. Delivery: Deliver material in original,unopened,protective packaging,with 1 manufacturer's labels intact and legible showing brand name,pattern, size,thickness,and fire rating C. Storage: Comply with acoustical material manufacturer's recommendations for storage of units 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of 70 degrees F in space to receive ceiling for 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. Subsequently maintain 55 degrees F minimum temperature 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Install acoustical units after building is fully enclosed, components in ceiling are installed,and heating system is operating. Coordinate installation with items penetrating or supported by suspension system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Grid: 1. Grid system: Exposed inverted T,intermediate structural standards,ASTM C635. Conform to requirements for ASTM E580. 15/16 inch face dimension 2. Suspension system: Main runner tee-bars, cross runner tee and angle edge mountings arranged in modular 24 inch by 24 inch grid and 24 inch by 48 inch grid, suspended from structure above by wire hanger 3. Material and color: Provide tees, edge angles and accessories formed from electro-galvanized cold rolled steel,bonderized and given a baked enamel finish. Provide grid with double web construction. Color: White B. Acoustical ceiling: ' 1. 24 inch by 24 inch by 3/4 inch square-cut rectangular lay-in panels for 15/16 exposed tee grid, see Drawings for location 2. Class A per ASTM E 1264 ' 1416-00 09510 suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— 111 1 SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 3. Conform to Federal Specification FS SS-S-118B, Flame Spread of 25 or under, STC Range 40-44,NRC Range 0.70-0.80 ' 4. Travertone Fissured by Armstrong or Acoustone "F"Fissured by U.S.G.Interiors, Inc 5. Color:White 2.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver under provisions of Section 01700, Contract Closeout B. At time of completing the installation,deliver stock of maintenance materials to the t Owner. Furnish full size units matching the units installed,packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels ' C. Extra stock acoustical units: Furnish an amount equal to 2.0 percent of the amount installed of each type,pattern, color,but not less than 10 units. Do not use for replacement of damaged units prior to building occupancy or substantial completion whichever occurs later ' PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING A. Before installation, allow materials to reach room temperature and have stabilized moisture content similar to conditions that will be normal when occupied 3.2 LAYOUT ' A. Follow the requirements of the reflected ceiling plan for grid layout B. If no grid layout requirements are noted on the reflected ceiling plan,measure each ' ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less than half width units at borders ' 3.3 GENERAL A. Install products in this Section after all components in the ceiling plenum are installed ' B. The installation of the suspended acoustical ceilings shall be made by a Contractor approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical material and suspension system and shall result in a workmanlike job,free from all defects and imperfections. Cooperate with ' other trades to facilitate the layout,the installation of lighting,plumbing, and heating fixtures that may occur in the ceiling ' C. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 D. Install light fixture protection and necessary hangers and ties in accordance with U.L. Design No. G201 and ASTM C636 1416-00 09510 Suspended Acoustical Ccilings 09510-3 Z E L ' _ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 3.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Suspended acoustical grid system: ' 1. Hang tee members in a flat plane using 12 gage galvanized wire. Locate hangers near each end(within 12 inch) and spaced not more than 4'-0" on center along each carrying channel. In addition,install additional hangers to provide two foot ' spacing of supports where light fixtures,grilles or other concentrated loads are hung from structure. Support only from building structural roof joists 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ' ceiling plenum that are not of the supporting structure. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing or counter splaying 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying,either directly to structures or to insert, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for the substrate,and which will not deteriorate or fail due to age,corrosion,or elevated temperatures B. Edge Moldings: 1. Install at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the Work 2. Securely fasten vertical leg of edge moldings to wall 3. Secure not more than 3 inches from each end and not more than 16 inches on center along molding 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Level moldings and grid system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0" in any direction 3.6 LAY-IN SYSTEM ' A. Install acoustical panels with pattern running in one direction B. Fit adjoining tile to form flush,tight joints. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at edges and penetrations C. When installing"Fissure"type product, intermix tile from 4 or more cartons to obtain uniform distribution of fissure variations 3.7 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION A. Clean up completed installation and adjacent surfaces,protect installation from damage or dirt from other Work until Substantial Completion of Project END OF SECTION 1 1416-0009510 Sowed Acoustical caunp5 09510-4 ZEL -ENGINEERS- . ' 1 I SECTION 09843 ACCOUSTICAL WALL PANELS` ' PART 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SETION INCLUDES ' A. Acoustical wall panels and installation components,complete. ' 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ' B. ASTM C423 - Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method C. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings, ' Product Data and Samples B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of acoustical wall panel required. C. Samples Submit 12 inch X 12 inch samples of specified acoustical wall panel featuring specified surface material,edge and corner detail and method of attachment. D. Ceitifleations: Submit manufacturer's writtn product certification that all furnied=wall panels meet or exp the specification requirements. Include certified pies of tests specified when required. E. Shop Drawings: Submit elevation drawings showing wall panel layout,methods of attachment and installation details. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Single-Source R gnsibiliProvide acoustical panel units and installation components by a single manufacturer whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of acoustical wall panels with specified requirements. B. Applicator Installation by skilled applicators with no less than three years of documented experience installing acoustical wall panels of the types and extent specified for the project. 141&0009543 Acoustical Panels 09843-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 09843 ACCOUSTICAL WALL PANELSI C. Fire Performance Characteristics: a Class 1/A fire 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: All panel components have rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING I 1.5 PRODUCT A. Delivery;Deliver acoustical wall panels to.the frro,l ect Arte in unbroken andundamaged original factory packaging and clearly labeled with the manufacturer's identification label, ' quality or grade. B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry, climate controlled storage area within temperature and humidity ranges recommended by manufacturer.Provide protection from damage and exposure to harmful environmental conditions. C. Acclimatization: Before installing acoustical wall panels,allow panels to acclimatize to room temperature and humidity. D. Handling: Carefully handle acoustical wall panels to avoid soiling and damage. ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply acoustical treatments when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperaturerant es required by the wall panel manufacturer. 2. Do not install acoustical panels until wet work suchas concrete,;plasteing and painting is done and building is completely enclosed: 3. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintainsubstrate surface and ambient temperatures above 60 degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 4. Maintain constant reco:rnm temperature ended tem erature and humidity for at least.48 hours • prior to,throughout the installation period and continuously after panel installation completion. 5. Field Measurements: Check and verify actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication. III 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's 1 year written warranty against manufacturing defects from date of substantial completion. I , 1416-00 09843 Acoustical ZEL Inalical Panels —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 09843 ACCOUSTICAL WALL PANELS IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Acoustical Wall Panels: Sound DesignsTM,Koroseal Acoustical Treatments,Koroseal Interior Products,LLC,Fairlawn,OH. IB. Approved Equal 2.2 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS IA. Acoustical Wall Panels: 1. Space,Material; Provide material fully laminated t€ the fiberglass core fact, edges and returned no less than 1-1/2"to the back of the panel to.provide fitly Ifinished edges and tailored corners. 2. Provide panel surface materials as described below: a. Perforated"Vinyl Surface Finish: Color White Ib. Acousticallyperforated and tested and:reported in accordance with ASTM C 423 , c. Total Weight 2lounoes,perlin or yatd, I d. Backing Weight:2.7 ounces per linear Md. e. Fabric backing and content: PolyCotten Osnaburg 3. Core Composition: Whispertone®Wallboard.6-7 pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation containing a minimum 40%post-consumer recycled glass as a percent of glass weight. 4. Core surface:Plain I 5. Panel Thickness: 2 inch 6. NRC rating: Minimum 1.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 7. Panel Dimensions: 48"X 96"nominal I 8. Edge Profile: Square, edge hardened with water-based resin hardener. 9. Surface Burning Characteristics:All panel components have a Class 1/A fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. I10. Mounting Method: Permanent B. Acoustical Wall Panel Accessories: I 1. Panel Anchors: 'A"316 stainless steel chemical anchors embedded in existing wall. (Minimum 9 anchors per 48"X 6"panel, 2. Mechanical Clips: Two-part z-clips with one part mechanically fastened to the I panel in factory applied resin hardened attachment area and the other part fastened to the wall. I I1416-0009843 Acoustical Panels 09843-3 Z ",L —ENGINEERS- I u I SECTION 09843 ACCOUSTICAL WALL PANELS I PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION P' Site Conditions. Do riot proceed with installation until spaceconditioned to meet manufacturer's recommendations and all wet work is complete. 3.2 PREPARATION .' ' A. Measure each wall area and establish layout of acoustical treatments. B. Assure equal border widths at opposite edges of each wall. C. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1 the panels to an existing wall per the manufacturers A. lnst�:wall panels by attalung � mitten instructions,as shown on Drawings. B. Attach wall panels to the wall using specified panel anchors C.All field � fabricated a details.will be finished in accordance with manufacturer's I writterkinstanation instructions. 3.4 CLEAN-UP COMPLETION A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustic wall panels athat ve become cleaning inssoiled uring handlingg and installation according to manufacturer's recommended B. Replace damaged panels. Upon completion of the work,move surplus materials,rubbish.and debris resulting C.: Ifrom the wall covering installation. Lave areas to beat clean andorderly condition. END OF SECTION I 1 I 1 ZEL ,. .... . 09843-4 —ENGINEERS— t41b-W 09843 Acoustical Panels I SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all plant,labor,equipment, I appliances, and materials,and in performing all operations in connection with the painting of metals,masonry, wood,plastic, and equipment of the buildings and process work.Painting shall be performed at such times and in such places as the I Contractor and Engineer may agree upon in order that dust-free and neat work shall be obtained. All painting shall be done in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Ferrous I metals shall be prime coated in the shop as specified herein or in other sections and shall have any bare spots resulting from handling or welding touched up with one coat of the respective shop coat. I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Section 05120—Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metal IA. B. Section 08100-Metal Doors and Frames IC. Section 15060-Pipe and Pipe Fittings D. Section 15100-Valves, Cocks and Hydrants IE. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods F. Section 16075 -Electrical Identification I1.3 .REFERENCES IA. ASTM D4258 -Surface Cleaning of Concrete B. ASTM D4259-Abrading Concrete IC. AWWA D100-84-Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA D102-97 -Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks ID. E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning IF. G. SSPC-SP 3 -Power Tool Cleaning IH. SSPC-SP 6 -Commercial Blast Cleaning I1416-00 09900 Feinting And rinhinitS 09900-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS-- 1 SECTION 09900 PANTING AND FINISHING I. SSPC-SP 7 - Sweep Blast Cleaning 1 J. SSPC-SP 10-Near White Blast Cleaning K. Unless otherwise specified, all work and materials for the preparation and coating of all I metal surfaces shall conform to the applicable requirements specified in the Steel Structures Painting Manual,Volume 2, Systems and Specifications Revised,latest edition,published by the Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All paints shall be fresh and shall arrive on the job inthe original,unopened congers that clearly show the name of the manufacturer and directions for application. This specification utilizes the products of the Carboline Company as the standard of quality and color;the comparable products of Induron or Tnemec may be substituted upon approval by the Engineer. PING STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5 SHIP , A. All paints shall be properly prepared by the manufacturer and delivered to the site for field painting in the original unbroken containers with manufacturer's label plainly printed thereon. Each container shall provide labels with following information:Name or title of material;manufacturers name; date of manufacture; list of hazardous ingredients; thinning instructions; and application instructions.Type of material to be applied at each location shall be submitted to the Engineer with the manufacturer's written recommendation of the type paint for each item to be painted. Containers that are broken, opened,watermarked and/or contain caked, lumpy, or otherwise damaged materials, are 1 unacceptable and shall immediately be removed from the work site. B. The Contractor shall exercise every precaution in the storing of paints, solvents,cleaning fluids,rags,and similar materials as to eliminate the risk of spontaneous combustion or other hazardous.conditions P able:fire extinguishing-equipment shall be provided in a convenient location for emergency access. All painting materials stored on the job site shall be stored in a location outside ofthe work area. The Contractor shall take all safety precautions in accordance with Section 7 of AWWA D-102,NFPA Bulletin No. 101 and all federal, state and local regulations. ' 1.6 SURFACES REQUIRING PAINTING A. The painting required by this section shall include painting the piping and equipment of , this contract,including the steel work associated with the project. B. Exterior painting shall include: all ferrous metal associated with the work of this contract including hollow metal doors and frames, exposed piping and equipment, and any other exterior work shown as requiring a coating or finish. 1416-00 04900 Feinting And Finishing 09900-2 Z E I —ENGINEERS— U SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING C. Interior painting shall include all new exposed interior concrete and block(except floors), drywall,exposed wood,ferrous metal work,piping,fittings,valves,equipment and other metal work of this contract Interior painting shall also include touch up of all new and existing surfaces modified or damaged during construction. D. Unions, screwed fittings, and flanges on PVC pipe shall not be painted. E. Equipment prefinished by the manufacturer shall conform to the special requirements of the specification section in which the equipment is specified,but shall not have a finish of ' lower quality than herein specified for exterior and interior metal work. 1.7 LEAD ABATMENT PLAN ' A. Work described under Alternate 4 requires surface preparation and painting of exiting piping known to include lead based painted surfaces. This requires a lead abatement plan to complete the work. A plan must be submitted prior to commencing any surface ' preparation of these surfaces. The Lead Abatement Plan must include as a minimum the following elements: 1. Signage 2. Personnel Protective Equipment requirements 3. Hygiene requirements for personnel leaving the work area 4. Air Monitoring requirements 5. ' Exposure Assessment ' 6. Hazardous Waste Disposal methods 7. Mobilization and Demobilization requirements ' B. All lead abatement work shall conform to OSHA Construction Industry Lead Standard 29 CFR 1926.62. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COATING SYSTEMS ' A. Surface: Exposed ferrous metal,machinery, and equipment—non-immersion;interior or exterior;new or existing. ' Surface Prep—SSPC SP6(Lead abatement required for Filter Gallery Piping—Alternate 4) Primer—Carbozinc 859 @ 3.0-5.0 mils DFT. Shop apply primer for new work. ' 1st Coat—Carboguard 690 or 890 @ 5.0-8.0 mils DFT 2nd Coat—Carbothane 133HB @ 3.0-5.0 mils DFT Total System— 11.0-18.0 mils DFT I 1415-00 09960 Painting And Finishing 09900-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING B. Surface: Ferrous metal—immersion(NSF);interior or exterior;new or existing. ' Surface Prep—Abrasive blast clean(SSPC SP10)with 3.5 mil anchor profile. Primer—None 1 Finish—Polyclad 708/100%solids elastomeric polyurethane @ 25.0mils(or 40.0 mils for pitted steel)DFT in a single coat(multiple passes) Total System—25.0 mils DFT(new) or 40.0 mils DFT(pitted steel) C. Surface: Concrete and CMU—non-immersion,interior,new or existing Surface Prep—Concrete must be cured for 28 days at 75°F&50%relative humidity (laitance, form oils,curing agents or surface hardeners must be removed by suitable method prior to coating application. CMU—Mortar joints should be thoroughly cured a minimum of 15 days at 50%relative humidity. Existing masonry and concrete shall be brush blasted before coating. Primer—Sanitile 600 @ 2.0-20.0 mils DFT 1st Coat—Carboguard 690 or 890 @ 5.0-8.0 mils DFT 2nd Coat—Carboguard 690 or 890 @ 5.0-8.0 mils DFT ' Total System— 10.0-16.0 (without primer) D. Surface: Gypsum Board,interior. Primer—One coat latex primer sealer 1.5 mils DFT Finish—Two coats acrylic latex finish,eggshell 1.5 mils DFT ' E. Surface: Interior Wood Surfaces. Primer—One coat alkyd enamel prime sealer 1.5 mils DFT Finish—Two coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss 1.5 mils DFT PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. , C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work and which will not allow preparatory work outlined in 1 preparation of surfaces. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application prior to commencement of work . 143609900-400 09900 Painting And Dnishing Z E L, —ENGINEERS— SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING ID Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable. IE. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisturecontent of surfaces using ark electronic moisture meter;: Do not apply I fhushes unless moisture.content of'sur aces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and gypsum wallboard. 10 percent: 2. Maso: y,concrete,.and concrete unit masonry: 8 percent I 3. Interior wood: 12 percent 4. Exterior wood: 12 percent 5. Concrete floors: 8 percent I3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION All'surfaces:that are:to bes painted shall,prion to application of paint be cleaned,washed IA. and f l prepared as specified here Surfaces of ferrous'Metal to receive Phenolic, Vinyl,Epoxy,or Alkyd Primerrs shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting to commercial blast metal(SSPC-SP6).Where long oil primers are elsewhere specified, I SSPC-SP3,power brush cleaning is acceptable,,submerged surfaces shall''be near white blast(SSPC-SP10). • B. Masonry"and concrete surfaces'requiring.paint shall be free of moisture,dust,dirt,oil, 111 grease or stains. Efflorescence or laitance shall be removed by brushing, sandblasting, or,subject to the directions of the Engineer,by acid etching.Reference coating Imanufacturer's product data sheets for specific Macepreparation guidelines. C. Prepainted surfaces Primed suraces where thecoating is in good condition shall be lightlysanded,wire brushed,or brush blasted to slightly roughen the surface. Where the Ipmt is showing rust,or otherwise-failing,the surface shall be sand blasted for repainting as new material. Surfaces shall be sanded to eliminate the scale marks and other I imperfection's which will not permit a smooth finished surface. Cracks,nail holes, and Other defects shall be appropriately filled and Smoothed. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP IAll painting'shall be donein a workmanlike manner,leavi ig the finished surface free from drops,ridges,waves,laps-and brush marks. Sufficient time shall be allowed I between coats to insure proper dryim;g. Paint shall be applied under dry and dust free conditions. Paint shall be applied in a manner that the coverage shall not exceed that recommended by the mannfactu ern "Where there is any doubt, either about generic I composition or compatibility of existing coatings a test application shall be made and after 14 days checked for adhesion characteristics and other forms of incompatibility. If I 1416-0009900 Painting AndlAti data 09900-5 Z E L_ —ENGINEERS- SECTION 09900 I PAINTING AND FINISHING 3.4 COLORS I Where two field coats or more are required by these specifications,the colors shown in this section shall be used for all except thefinal coat. Final paint shades.must be •. approved after application of the initial coats and before the application of the fmal coat. Selected colors for the project are from the Carboline color book. Trim shall be finished same as wall colors. A color schedule complete with color chips shall be submitted for approval. A. Exterior Work: , Manhole frames and covers Black Electrical Equipment&Poles Aluminum Color I Street Marking Yellow Guards and Caution Marking Safety Yellow I Piping-Stenciled names and Color Code Direction Arrows every 36" I Valves-To match Pipe Color Code B. Piping,Pumps,Valves-Color Code Identification painting shall be provided for all piping in accordance with the following I schedule. Names and flow arrows shall be stenciled on all the piping in an appropriate approved contrasting color. NAME OF PIPE GENERIC COLOR CARBOLINE I Raw Water Olive Green V359 Settled Water Aqua H313 Finished or Potable Water Dark Blue 9112 I Sewer(Sanitary or Other) Dark Gray 6751 Alum Orange 4427 Caustic Yellow with N625 I Green band K386 Hypochlorite Solution Yellow N625 Phosphate Light Green with Red band 6325 ' 7585 Polymer Orange with 4427 . green band K386 Sodium Permanganate Violet 7528 . I Other pipes Light Gray 2716 ElectricalLight Grafi 2716 Fire Protection Red 7585 I • 3.5 CLEAN UP The work area shall be kept free from surplus materials,dirt and rubbish at all times. I After completion of the work, all paint spots or other marks shall be removed from floors, 141600 09900 Painting And FinishingDoc 09900-6 ZEL I —ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid Item#17.266 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING I walls,doors,and windows,etc. All exposed metal work and glass shall be carefully cleaned and the work area left clean. I 3.6 UNSATISFACTORY APPLICATION If the item has an improper finish, color, or insufficient film thickness,the surface shall be cleaned and topcoated with the specified material to obtain the specified color and I coverage. Specific surface preparation information will be secured from the coatings manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.All visible areas of chipped,peeled,or I abradedpaint shall be hand or power sanded,feathering the edges The areas shall then be primed and fish coated in accordance with the specifications Work shall be free:4f rois,bridges,shire,laps,or other imperfections. Evidence of these conditions shall be I cause for rejection. Any defects in the coating system shall be repaixed by the Contractor per written recommendations of the coating manufacturer and as approved by the engineer. IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I I • I I ' 1416-00 09900 Painting And Finishing 09900-7 Z E —ENGINEERS- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. The work covered by this section of specifications consists of furnishing supervision, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection on withlant, r� Equipment Erection as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 03000- Concrete B. Section 03600-Grout I1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples IA. • B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog sheet for material indicating physical properties ' 1.4 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS A. All equipment and pipe supports shall be grouted with plain grout,unless otherwise directed B. The Contractor,unless instructed()therms'. by the Resident Project Representative(RPR) shall comply with the markings where shown for lifting and. notations other such placed upon tie package .; placed 1 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final alignment of all motors purchased directly by the Owner or furnished with the equipment purchased by the Owner or furnished by the Contractor D. All work necessary for preservation of and preventive maintenance for equipment,whether stored or erected,shall be performed by the Contractor.Preservatives shall be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor to maintain written records of all preservation and preventive maintenance performed on major equipment before time of final acceptance E. Spare parts furnished with equipment,but not to be erected, shall be placed in the storage area designated by the RPR F. The Contractor shall furnish such expendables as welding rods,oxygen,acetylene,stainless steel(ss)shims, cleaning solvents, cleaning rags,etc. G. Equipment guards,platforms,railings,etc.,furnished with equipment, shall be completely erected by the Contractor. 1476-0011000 Equipment Erection 11000-1 Z E --ENGINEERS— IL SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TAGS A. All equipment shall be provided with stainless steel equipment identification tags(not I painted) showing equipment number,permanently attached to the equipment. 13. t n.forination on the equipment tag is to include equipment identification, equipment size, basic operating characteristics; such as RPM, GPM,HP,volts, amperes,full load efficiency and any other information pertinent to the use and operation of the equipment. 2.2 GROUT ' A. Conform to requirements of Section 03660, Grout PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION AND ASSEMBLY I A. The Contractor shall place and assemble equipment and machinery in accordance with the best practice of the trades involved. B. Wherever equipment manufacturer's special setting or erection instructions are furnished or called for by the manufacturer's representative,they shall be followed. C. Wedging will not be permitted. Only flat shims shall be used in leveling equipment. All shims shall be furnished by the Contractor. Jack nuts shall not be used on anchor bolts for leveling, aligning or supporting machinery and equipment. ' D. Dial indicators shall be used for equipment alignment unless otherwise instructed by the RPR. I E. Couplings shall be aligned within .003"tolerance overall unless otherwise instructed by the RPR. F. Only oil bath heaters shall be used to expand bearings, iuplings,etc. Oil temperature shall be controlled to prevent overheating of bearings. Should bearings be heated to temperature higher than that recommended by the bearing manufacturer,the<Owner 0a,11 have the right to require the Contractor to provide new bearings in exchangefor those overheated. G. No piping shall be permanently bolted to equipment flanges until thei e is sufficiently Y supported and has been checked by the RPR to see that no strain is placed on the equipment All mechanil drive couplings assembled by the vendor shall be broken and checked by the Contractor prior to start-up and any misalignment shall be corrected,corrected. All mechanical drive couplings shall be rechecked prior to start-upfor misalignment and any misalignment shall be corrected by the Contractor. i 1416.00 1]OOOEquipment Erection 11000-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION ' H. The work includes the flushing of gear cases and lubricant boxes where necessary and placement of initial fill of lubricants. I. Equipment erection shall include furnishing and installing dowels which shall be standard taper pins (1/4 inch to ft.)with pulling nut. Dowels shall be installed for each component piece, in a drilled and taper reamed hole in each of the diagonally opposite feet near the anchor bolt. Dowels shall not be installed until after the final alignment,immediately ' prior to start-up,has been completed. J. The Contractor shall remove any beams,bracing, etc.,which interfere with erection of equipment and shall reinstall all components so removed immediately after erection of the equipment. The Contractor shall install any temporary supports required to permit erection of equipment. ' K. Openings for access into the building shall be made and closed by the Contractor. L. The Contractor must furnish,install, and dismantle any temporary access platforms that he deems necessary to erect the equipment. M. All drives involving two or more items of equipment and a motor,shall generally be tinstalled in a sequence in which the motor is installed last. This sequence is mandatory in cases involving a direct-connected motor drive.All items shall be in place and aligned prior to grouting. ' N. Spare parts and maintenance tools furnished with equipment shall not be used for installation work, and shall be turned in to the RPR. ' 3.2 GROUTING OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY A. Forms for grout shall be properly designed and constructed to hold grout in position, ' without leakage until the cement has set up. Form plank shall be dressed and of uniform thickness,tongue and grooved sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of mortar. B. Plywood or metal forms, approved by the RPR,may be used at the Contractor's option. C. Exposed edges shall have chamfer as directed. ' D. All necessary ties, wires,braces, etc.,required to properly align the forms, shall be furnished by the Contractor. ' E. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer, either concrete mixer or mortar mixer type. For small amounts,hand mixing may be permitted if approved by the RPR. Material shall be accurately measured by volume or by weight,with mixing water carefully ' measured. F. Foundation surface shall be clean dense concrete, free from laitance, oil, soaps, or other foreign material before placing grout. Surface of foundation shall be chipped to remove deleterious material and expose aggregate. All sand,paper or other packing shall be 1416-00 11000 Egwpmenl Erection 11000-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION removed by the Contractor from anchor bolt sleeves before placing equipment. Surface to receive grout shall be thoroughly wet ahead of grouting operation. All dirt and excess water shall be removed by blowing with compressed air, or other means suitable to the RPR. G. Any required chipping of foundations to prepare a satisfactory surface shall be done prior to placing machinery by the Contractor. H. Grouting of equipment,for which the manufacturer furnished equipment erection supervision, shall be done when directed by and under the general supervision of the manufacturer's erection supervisor. ' I. Unless otherwise directed, grout shall fill the entire base and shall be finished off smoothly and flush at the grout holes. I J. Any equipment that is required to be grouted with Non-shrink,metallic grout by the manufacturer or manufacturer's erection supervisor shall be grouted with same unless otherwise changed by the RPR. i K. Add just enough water to make a placeable mix. Mix shall be stiff and rammed into place unless otherwise instructed by the RPR or manufacturer's erection supervisor. 1 Where thick grout(over 3")is to be placed,it shall be done in two operations,bringing the surface up to about 1" of the machinery base and allowing the initial section to set a minimum of 24 hours before placing final grouting. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CHAIN OR BELT DRIVEN EQUIPMENT A. Direction and speed of rotation of driving shafts and motors shall be checked before , connecting to driven shafts. Driving shafts having axial end play, such as those of motor and certain other equipment, shall be run at operating speed; and the running position shall be marked,using chalk and scriber or other similar method. The shafts shall be blocked in this position while aligning the equipment. B. Shaft leveling shall be by use of a machinist's (Starrett#98, or equivalent)level on bare 1 shafts, across the teeth of multiple width sprockets,or across the outer faces of sheaves. C. Angular alignment and end clearance shall be checked by use of a feeler gauge of proper thickness inserted at four equally spaced points, 90°apart, around the outer edges of coupling halves. D. Rechecks shall be made for level,radial, and angular alignment and end clearance in the ' same order as originally made and readjustments made until all four are in satisfactory adjustment, since anyreadjustment of one of the above may destroy prior readjustment of another. Final recheck shall be made with dial indicators of high accuracy, or optical equipment approved by the Engineer. 1 1416-00 11000 Equipmcnt Etccdon 11000-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 I. , SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIRECT DRIVEN EQUIPMENT A. Direction and speed of rotation of driving shafts and motors shall be checked before ' connecting to driven shafts. Driving shafts having axial end play, such as those of motors and certain other equipment, shall be run at operating speed; and the running position shall be marked,using chalk and scriber or other similar method. The shafts shall be blocked in this position while aligning the equipment. ' B. Shaft leveling shall al be by use of a machinist's(Starrett#98, or equivalent)level placed across the faces of the two coupling halves. Radial alignment shall be checked at the same time byuse of a straight edgeplaced across the faces of the two coupling halves gh g a ves in p g both the horizontal and verticalp lanes. ' C. Angular alignment and end clearance shall be checked by use of a feeler gauge of proper thickness inserted at four equally spaced points, 90°apart, around the outer edges of coupling halves. D. Rechecks shall be made for level,radial, and angular alignment and end clearance in the same order as originally made and readjustments made until all four are in satisfactory ' adjustment, since any readjustment of one of the above may destroy prior readjustment of another. Final recheck shall be made with dial indicators of high accuracy, or. 3.5 TEST RUN A. Before startingitem of equipment for the first time, all an eq pof the following shall be performed: ' B. Direction and speed of rotation shall be checked. ' C. Removal of all shaft blocks used for blocking shafts in running position during installation. D.. Lubrication of all parts with manufacturer's recommended grade and quantity of lubricant, and under the Owner's supervision. E. Tightening of all bolts and capscrews. ' F. Torch trim bolt projections to approximately1/8 inch above nut, and grind smooth. G. When ready to start, and before applying power,the connected equipment shall be rotated manually, if possible,to make sure that the rotating parts move freely and that there are no foreign objects in the equipment. Otherwise, a thorough visual inspection shall be ' made. H. Start-up and test run shall be conducted in the presence of the Resident Project Representative. 1 1416-00 110,30 Equipment Erection ...... .... 11000-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT ERECTION I. Upon completion of test run and after all final corrections have been made, and wherever applicable,the equipment base and grouted foundation plate shall be doweled. Dowels shall be in place before placing the equipment in operation. In addition,torch trim bolt projections to approximately 1/8 inch above nut. J. The equipment supplier shall provide a qualified "equipment technician(s)" at the job site who is knowledgeable and competent with all aspects of the equipment and the particular application required of the equipment. Such an individual(s)is to have demonstrated competence in the following areas: 1. Equipment erection,installation, and tie-ins. 2. Equipment operation. ' 3. Equipment maintenance. 4. Equipment trouble-shooting,problem analysis and problem correction. K. Since the installation and start-up of equipment must proceed in an orderly manner and according to schedule,the"equipment technician(s)" is to be available at the job site when scheduled and is expected to cooperate with all personnel. L. Trials shall be run in the presence of the RPR and shall be conducted in such a way and to such an extent to demonstrate to the RPR that all provisions of the equipment specifications have been complied with in full. M. All results from tests,trials, and final acceptance tests shall be documented and turned over to the RPR as required by the RPR. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1416.0011000 Equipment Erection 11000-6 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment,materials, and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with forniahg,installing, testing, and the initial operation of the powdered activated carbon(PAC)Feed equipment,complete with all appurtenances, in strict accordance with this specification and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms of the Contract. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 11000-Equipment Erection ' B. Section 13400-Instrumentation ' C. Section 15060-Pipe and Pipe Fittings D. Section 16010-Electrical—General Provisions E. Section 16050-Basic Materials And Methods 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop Drawings: Provide assembly,installation drawings, dimensions,piping and instrumentation diagrams,interconnecting diagrams, electrical schematics, layouts and net weight. ' C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature,including general assembly,materials of construction,performance characteristics,power requirements,wiring diagrams, service connections, and additional information necessary to determine compliance with these specifications. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide connection requirements and start-up instructions. 1 E. Manufacturer's Field Report: Indicate personnel present and actual tests and start-up procedures that were performed by manufacturer's representative. F. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data 1416-00 11248 Pac Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-1 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT B. Operation Data: Include manufacturer's instructions, description of system operation, start-up data,trouble-shooting check lists, and repair data. . I C. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's literature; cleaning procedures,replacement parts list, wiring diagrams, and repair data. I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store,protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, ' Materials and Equipment. B. Accept sole source unit and accessories on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. ' C. Protect sole source unit and accessories from physical damage including effects of weather, water,and construction debris. ' 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Unless otherwise specified,the equipment furnished under these specifications shall be , guaranteed for a period of five(5)years from the date of final acceptance thereof against defective materials, design, and workmanship. In the event of the failure of any part or parts during the guaranty period, due to the above causes,the affected part or parts shall be removed and replaced promptly at the expense of the contractor. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. The equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer who is regularly engaged in chemical feed system design and supply. ' B. The major components of the PAC Feed System shall be furnished by a single supplier to ensure full coordination of all units and to establish a single source of responsibility and ' control over the system. C. The manufacturer must have installed and had in satisfactory operation for a period of not less than five(5)years a minimum of five(5) installations of similar size. ' 1.8 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The bulk PAC System shall be designed to receive bulk PAC,store, create and PAC slurry for injection to the process stream. The intent of this specification is to provide a complete operating system that will automatically respond to changes in process conditions. As a minimum,the system shall be designed for the following: 1. Feed Capacity: PAC Feed Rate: (Low Range) 14 lbs/hr minimum 69.5 lbs/hr maximum (High Range) 69.5 lbs/hr minimum 521 lbs/hr maximum 2. Storage Capacity: p _ 1416.00 11248 Pac Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT Total Storage Capacity 3,000 Cubic Feet IWorking Storage Capacity 2,600 Cubic Feet Electrical classification for the area is Unclassified Maximum Height: In order to meet the height limitation of FAA Obstruction I Standards. The maximum height of any component on the silo cannot exceed 43'-0"above the foundation pad. I B. The system shall receive PAC in bulk pneumatically conveyed into the storage silo from the PAC supplier. C. Flow of PAC from the storage silo shall be assisted by means of fluidization into two volumetric feeder systems. The volumetric feeders shall draw from the transition hopper, and meter PAC at an adjustable rate into the wetting cones in response to plant generated Iflow signals. D. A main control panel shall be control and indicate the status of components in the system. With exception of bulk loading, all activities of the PAC system shall be operable in an I automatic mode without supervision. 1.9 SYSTEM COMPONENTS I A. The PAC Feed System shall consist of,but not be limited to the following components: 1. Compressed Air System 2. Silo Fill Line I 3. Silo Dust Collection 4. Silo PAC Storage I 5. PAC Volumetric Feeders and Hoppers 6. Wetting Cones 7. PAC Motive Water Booster Pumps I 8. PAC Feed Eductors and Feed Valves 9. Instrumentation and Controls 10. Accessories IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER IA. Subject to compliance with specified requirements,manufacturers offeringproducts p is which may be incorporated in Work include: I 1. Merrick Industries-Lynn Haven,FL 2. Cabot-Norit Activated Carbon—Marshall,TX 3. 1PM Systems—Lee's Summit,MO I 4. Chemco Systems—Monogahela,PA 5. Approved Equal I I416-0011248 Pec Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-3 Z E I -ENGINEERS— , 1 SECTION 11248, PAC FEED EQUIPMENT 2.2 SELF-CONTAINED PAC STORAGE AND FEED SYSTEM ' A. General 1. All components of the PAC Feed and Storage System(except Compressed Air System,PAC Feed Control Valves and Main Control Panel) shall be mounted in the silo or the silo under skirt area requiring minimal field assembly. B. Storage Silo ' 1. A welded carbon steel silo with full support skirt shall be provided to receive and store the bulk PAC. The silo shall be a maximum 14 feet in diameter with an eave height depending on final design configuration. The silo shall be designed for storing powdered activated carbon with a dry bulk density of up to 35 lb/ft3 cubic feet. The discharge cone shall include a 60°minimum slope. 2. Wind design speed for the project location is: 115 MPH—Exposure B. 3. Seismic Zone: Per IBC—Site Class D, Seismic Risk Category 1, Seismic Importance Factor 1.0. 4. The silo roof deck shall be fabricated from steel plate sloped for drainage and coated with a non-skid coating.The deck shall include a vent filter; a 24"manway, 8 inch pressure and vacuum relieving valve; and, a guided wave-radar level transmitter. < ' 5. The silo shall be equipped with a bifurcated hopper serving the dual feed system. 6. A galvanized OSHA compliant ladder with integral safety cage and intermediate landing shall be provided for access to the silo roof deck,which shall be enclosed with pipe handrail and galvanized steel toe-board supported by galvanized steel angle posts. 7. Access to the silo under-skirt area shall be provided by a double 6'-0"x 7'-0" hollow metal door with ventilation louvers. The silo deck and ladder,entry to the under skirt area and,the silo under-skirt area shall illuminated. 8. A 120/1/60 AC convenience receptacle shall provided on the silo top deck. 9. The silo structure shall be marked/lighted in accordance with FAA Advisory , Circular 70/7460-1L,"Obstruction Marking and Lighting",red lights—Chapters 4, 5 (Red)and 12. C. Silo Underskirt HVAC 1. The Silo underskirt area shall be ventilated with an exhaust fan and gravity operated inlet louvers. A 10kw electric resistance heater shall be provide to maintain a minimum of 50°F inside the under skirt area. The skirt area shall include a 1.0 inch thick rigid insulation system. D. Storage Silo Dust Collector(BLW-412) I 1. Flanged Mounted, Open Bottom,Mechanical Shaker Type Collector. A pulsed jet dust-collector of equal capacity will be considered an acceptable alternate. 2. Baghouse: a. 14 Gauge Carbon Steel Construction,Epoxy Painted b. Fifty-Four(54)Woven Polyester Filter Bags 1) 375 ft2 Filter Area �t 48O 1416-0011248Pac Feed Equipment-Silo 112 -4 Z E L. —ENGINEERS— ' I SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT I c. 1/4 HP, 1,200 RPM,230-460/60/3, Shaker Motor Id. Two (2)Hinged Access Doors for Bag Removal 3 Blower Assembly a. 5 HP, 3,500 RPM, 230-460/60/3, 1,280 CFM, TEFC Exhaust Fan Motor I b. Cast Aluminum Wheel,Direct Driven c. 1,280 ACFM Rated 4. Disconnect Switches I 5. Lighting Arrestor with Bracket, Shipped Loose for Field Installation 6. Shipped Loose for Field Installation E. Truck Fill System I1. A complete truck fill pipe assembly shall be provided from the truck fill location to the silo PAC entry point which includes 4-inch nominal diameter(4%2" OD) schedule 40 carbon steel pipe to convey the PAC from bulk delivery trucks into the Isilo. The inlet end of the conveying pipe has a 4"nominal quick disconnect male adapter and lockable dust cap at a point 5 feet above grade adjacent to the Truck Unloading control panel.The piping shall be mounted to the silo wall,supported Iby a suitable number of pipe supports to prevent movement and vibration;turn 90 degrees; and terminate tangentially approximately 1 foot below the silo eave.All bends in the fill line have a minimum 24"radius. I2.3 SILO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IAPAC Fluidization System . 1. The upper section of the silo discharge cone shall be equipped with a minimum of eight(8)High Pressure air fluidizing nozzles on the circumference. The lower I section of the silo cone section shall include a minimum of two Low Pressure fluidizing nozzles. 2. Nozzles shall be removable from outside the silo storage area to facilitate maintenance. Each zone of fluidizing air shall be pulsed by electrically operated I solenoid valves. Timing and duration of the pulses to optimize fluidization of the PAC shall be controlled by the PLC located in the Main Control Panel. 3. The fluidization system shall be designed to assure mass flow within the silo and Iuninterrupted dosing. B. Bin Activators (BA-412A,BA-413A) Provide two(2),minimum 3'-0"diameter Bin I Activators 1. Carbon Steel Construction, Epoxy Painted 2. 3 HP TENV Vibrator Motor, 230-460 Volts,.60 Hertz, 3 Phase I 3. Black Neoprene Main Sleeve with Stainless Steel Clamps 4. Hanger Arm Assemblies with Grade 8 Hardware 5. Primary and Secondary Pressure Relief Cones (Baffles) 6. Mounting Ring with Bolt Holes to Mate with Companion Flange on hopper 7. 12.00"Diameter Flanged Outlet I 1416-0011248 Pac Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-5 Z E I -ENGINEERS- _SECTION 1. , PAC FEED EQUIPMENTI C. Manual Knife-gate Valve(KGV-412, KGV-413) 1. A manual chainwheel wheel actuated knife-gate valve shall be provided at the Bin Activator discharge flange to isolate the PAC storage from the feed system below. All PAC contact surfaces shall be stainless steel. I D. Rotary Valve(VRA-412B,VRA-413B) 1. The silo discharge cone shall be equipped with a rotary valve for feeding PAC from the silo into each feeder hopper. The rotary valve displacement shall be greater than 100 cubic feet per hour at a speed of approximately 10 rpm. 2. Cast iron with 12-inch 150#flanged inlet and outlet connections. 3. Machined steel rotor with outboard bearings which are effectively isolated from the process material. 4. Drive motor: 1 HP is 480/3/60,coupled to an oil bath lubricated gear reducer mounted on a support bracket extended from the valve body which drives the valve ' rotor through a chain and sprocket arrangement, enclosed in an OSHA compliant chain guard. E. Expansion Joint 1. A sleeve expansion joint shall be installed between the rotary valve and the feeder hopper inlet to facilitate installation and access to the feeder hopper interior. 2. Minimum 6 inches in length and compatible with valve flanges. F. Volumetric Feeder&Hopper(VF-412A,VF-413A) 1. Auger type volumetric feeder to meter the PAC from the feeder hopper into the 1 PAC Slurry Tank. 2. Equipped with a three cubic foot stainless steel supply hopper with a level switch to indicate high PAC level in the hopper. All wetted surfaces of the feeder and the supply hopper shall be fabricated from stainless steel. 3. Feeder Drive: 1 HP 480 VAC 3 phase variable speed motor and controlled by a Variable Frequency drive via the PLC located in the Main Control Panel with Operator input from the HMI system. The VFD shall allow a turn-down ratio compatible with the low and high feed range specified in the"Design Requirements". I 4. The feeder controller shall be programmed to allow feeding of the carbon at a constant rate in pounds per hour; or to follow a 4-20 mA analog signal,representing 0%to 100%of the maximum feed rate,provided from a remote location. I G. Drop Tube 1. The feeder discharge shall be equipped with a stainless steel removable drop tube, located between the volumetric feeder outlet and the Holding Tank,which will guide the PAC from the feeder discharge tube into the PAC Wetting Cone. H. PAC Wetting Cone(PWC-4-14-A,PWC-4-14-B) • 1. Stainless steel construction with stainless steel removable cover and an inspection hatch installed adjacent to the drop tube. I 1476.00 11248 Pec Feed Equipment-Silo _. .. 11248-6 Z E I —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT 2. Wetting Cone shall be configured to introduce PAC in suspension and supply the PAC Feed Eductor. One(1)3"Overflow and 4"Drain Assembly a. One(1)4"Lug Style Butterfly Valve with Lever Operator 3. 3"Overflow with a High Level Switch ' 4. PAC Feed Eductor with a discharge pressure gauge and high pressure switch. The Eductor shall be sized to inject PAC slurry at the feed rates shown in"Design Requirements"and provide a 35Tgpm minimum flow rate into the PAC feed ' piping. The eductor shall be equipped with inlet and discharge valves for servicing. 5, Inlet Water Assembly a. Two (2)Isolation/Shut-Off Valves b. One(1)Bronze Strainer c. One(1)Check Valve d. One(1)Flex Connector(Isolation) e. One(1)Bronze Hose Bibb I, Compressed Air System 1. Air Compressor a. A complete compressed air system shall be provided in the PAC Building to supply air for: PAC fluidization;vent filter cleaning; and pneumatic valve ' operation.The system shall include a compressor,mounted on an 80-gala receiver tank that will supply 17.2 SCFM @ 100 PSIG. The compressor is driven by a 5 HP 480/3/60 motor. 2. Air Filtration ' a. Replaceable type e t e Coalescingand Particulate Filters shall be provided to remove contaminants from the compressed air supply and ' minimize the potential for downstream equipment malfunction due to debris in the air stream. b. Particulate Filter: 5 micron 1 c. Coalescing Filter: 1 micron with automatic float drain d. Each filter shall be equipped with a differential pressure indicator. 3. Air Dryer:refrigeration type capable of reducing the dew point of 25 SCFM @ 100 PSIG air to 38°F with an ambient temperature of 100°F. Unit shall be self- contained 120/1/60 AC. 4. Air Receiver: 60 gal Vertical Air Receiver tank,ASME certified to 200 PSI @ ' 650°F provided to aid in supplying a consistent air pressure to the: Silo Vent;PAC fluidization system; and pneumatically actuated valves.An automatic drain valve shall be provided to remove condensate trapped in the tank. J. Drains 1. Provide a 4 inch floor drain with"P"trap in the silo floor for connection to 4 inch plant drain. ' 2. Provide a 4 inch open sight drain(OSD)in the silo floor for connection to the 4 inch plant drain. I , 1416-00 11248 Pec Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-7 Z E -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT 2.4 PAC FEED OUTLET VALVES A. Provide three(3)pneumatic activated diaphragm valves(fail closed)for feeding PAC to I the various plant feed locations. 2.5 PAC SLURRY WATER BOOSTER SYSTEM ' A. Furnish a PAC Slurry Water Booster System including a 2 inch Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ)type backflow preventer,variable frequency driven(VFD)water booster pump ' and a magnetic flow meter for supplying water to the PAC Feed Eductors. The booster pump shall be capable of delivering 35 gpm of water to the eductor at a pressure of 120 psig with a suction pressure at the pump of 50 psig. The pump speed shall be controlled ' I by the VFD to maintain a constant flow rate(operator adjustable). The motive water shall include a pneumatic-activated ball valve pressure regulating valve and a magnetic flow meter for inlet water flow rate indication. ' 2.6 VALVES &PIPING A. Solenoid Valves:brass body, soft-seated, with 120V AC solenoid coil. Solenoid ; I operators shall be molded coil in NEMA 4 enclosure. B. Air Pressure Control Valves: provided for the system air pressure, the Low Pressure and ' High Pressure PAC fluidization systems. C. Manual Valves: ANSI 200#threaded bronze full port ball valves. ' D. Pneumatically Operated Ball Valves: Water flow for the PAC Wetting Cones supply and the PAC Feed Eductors shall be controlled by pneumatically operated ball valves. In the event of power loss, these valves shall fail closed. These valves shall be stainless steel, full port, 3-piece ball valves with mating actuators. E. Piping 1 L Motive water and slurry piping- schedule 40 stainless steel,threaded,minimum of ANSI 150#class. 2, Compressed air piping-ASTM B-88 Type K hard drawn copper pipe with solder joint fittings or threaded brass fittings. 3. Feeder hopper vent piping-PVC socket pipe and fittings. 4.. Compressed air tubing and instrument sensing lines-black polyethylene tubing and fittings. 2.7 INSTRUMENTATION I A. Pressure Switch: Pressure switches shall be installed to monitor the motive water pressure. I B. Pressure Indicators: Liquid filled pressure indicators shall be installed to monitor the supply/motive water pressure and the Pump discharge pressure. I 1416-00 11248 Pec Peed Equipment-Silo 11248-8 Z E —ENGINEERS— I, I FEEDSECTION 11248 PAC EQUIPMENT C. Level Transmitters: The storage silo shall be equipped with a Rosemount 5708L 3D I solids scanner level instrument and controller for monitoring level and volume in the PAC storage silo. I D. Point Level Switches: Point level probe or paddle switches shall be installed to sense the PAC level at three elevations in the Silo and two elevations in each feeder hopper and to provide an alarm signal when the level falls below the probe. The level switch shall be I mounted in such a way as to be removable from outside the tank. The level probe shall have been proven to be reliable in PAC service applications. 2.8 POWER DISTRIBUTION IA. Motor Control Center(MCC411) shall be provided in the Control Building for power distribution of the PAC system 480/3/60 AC power. Included in the MCC are: I 1. Main disconnect breaker that will protect and de-energize the complete PAC electrical system. 2. Motor circuit protector, a NEMA starter and solid-state overload protection for I 3. each 480/3/60 AC motor. Control power transformer converting 480/1/60 AC to 120/1/60 AC to provide power for controls, lighting, and equipment. 1 4. Single breaker for isolation and protection of the control power system. 2.9 CONTROL PANEL I A. Main Control Panel (FCP-411):NEMA 4X main control panel mounted in the Control i Building. The panel provides face-mounted controls,status and alarms for the PAC dosing system. The programmable logic controller(PLC), fuses,low voltage breakers, Iand terminal blocks for control of all system equipment shall be located within the panel. The main control panel shall include a fluorescent work light. Provide additional breakers for building lights and receptacles. I B. Truck Unloading Control Panel(FCP-410):NEMA 4X truck unloading control panel located as shown on the plans near the silo fill line to facilitate the filling of the silo from I a typical pneumatic road tanker.The panel has front mounted lights to indicate: PAC level status within the storage silo;high differential pressure across the silo vent filter; low air pressure;and vent filter sequencing. In addition, the unloading panel shall include I An OFF/ON selector switch for the silo vent filter; and an acknowledge button to silence the alarm horn mounted on the bottom of the panel. This panel shall be an integral part of the system controls and hard-wired to the main panel. IC. Panel features 1. Provide with the following items and/or features: a. Panels fabricated of 304 stainless steel and rated NEMA 4X. I b. Terminal blocks are installed for termination of all Purchaser installed cables. c. Terminal blocks for voltage of 120 volts and less are equal to Allen Bradley 1492-W10. I ' 1416-DO 11248 Pao Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-9 Z E I -ENGINEERS^ I SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT d. All selector switches,pilot lights,push buttons and other devices that are visible on the front of the control panels will have Lamacoid nameplates, which are white with black letters. 2. All wiring is installed in Panduit or similar wireways. 3. All terminal strips for all wiring terminations are numbered. 4. Wiring is stranded copper, 600 volt,THHN insulated,extra flexible type.As a minimum wire size is#12 AWG for all power wiring,#14 AWG for all external control wiring,#16 AWG for all control panel internal control wiring and#18 AWG twisted shielded pair for analog signal conductors.Wiring is color coded as follows: 5. Wire colors are as follows: a. Ground wiring is green. b. 120 volt ac, 480 volt ac and 90 volt dc power wiring is black. c. Neutral wiring is white. d. 120 volt ac control wiring is red. e. 24 volt dc control wiring is blue. 6. Wiring at all terminals within panels,junction boxes, and field devices are numbered with shrink fit,machine printed labels. D. Control philosophy: 1. Main System Control Panel . a. Graphic system representation b. Main Disconnect Switch c. Transformer d. Circuit breakers or fuses as required e. H/O/A and status indication lights for the following: 1) System Start 2)Air Fluidation System 3)PAC Slurry Pump f. Status indication light and remote alarm and for the feed hopper water system pressure g. Motor starters as required for equipment supplied. 2. A plant flow signal will be provided to the system supplier to enable the PAC system flow based control. 3. Status&Alarms (HMI) a. Feeder Malfunction. b. Motive Water Pressure Low. c. Compressed Air System Low Pressure d. Compressed Air System High Temperature e. Feeder Hopper PAC Level Low. f. PAC Wetting Cone High Level Alarms 4. The following control switches will be located on the control panel: a. System Stop pushbutton switch. 5. The following control functions will be on the HMI: a. Local Start PAC System. b. Local Stop PAC System. c. Feeder Off/Auto selector. 7416-00 11248 Pee Peed Equipment-Silo 11248-10 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT d. Alarm Acknowledge. ' e. System Operation Local/Remote selector. f. System Mode Non-Paced/Paced selector. g. Fluidization System On/Off/Auto selector. h. Trip reset selector. i. PAC feed rate selection. j. Slurry Water Booster Pump Speed Control 2.10 PAINTING A. The equipment described herein shall be factory primed and painted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Silo interior, exterior and underskirt area shall be prepared for coating by Icommercial blast cleaning(SSPC-SP6). . Interior(Storage):No coating 2. Interior(Skirt): Polyamide Epoxy, 2.0 mils DFT ' 3. Exterior(Prime): Polyamide Epoxy, 2.0 mils DFT 4. Exterior(Finish)Polyurethane,2.0 mils DFT(Color selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard color chart) ' 5. Roof:Add non-slip coating C. PAC Feed System frame and ferrous metal surfaces shall be steel grit blasted to SSPC- SP-6 standards,with one coat baked epoxy primer, 1.5 mil min. DFT and exterior only _ baked enamel finish coat. D. Machined and polished surfaces,stainless steel, or non-ferrous or galvanized metals are not painted. Drive units and motors are not painted. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION Install the PAC Feed System at the location shown on the drawings and specified and in IA. compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. The installing contractor shall furnish and install anchor bolts as required by the PAC System supplier. B. Upon completion of the installation, a full operating test shall be performed in the presence of the engineer and a qualified manufacturer's representative. The contractor shall furnish all the labor,materials and equipment required for such a test and shall ' correct any installation related deficiencies noted. C. The PAC Feed System components shall be clearly identified with professional lettering ' and all valves and pipelines will be clearly marked with labels as approved by the Engineer. 1416-00 11248 Pac Feed Equipment-Silo 11248-11 Z E ' —ENGINEERS-- I ENGINEERS—I I SECTION. 11248 PAC FEED EQUIPMENT I 3.2 START-UP SUPPORT A. The contractor shall provide start-up, check-out and instruction service by a factory ' authorized service technician. 3.3 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION 1 A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to refer to the division 13 and division 16 sections of these specifications and to provide suitable connections for all electrical I equipment and accessories and instrumentation and control equipment required for operation of the chemical feed systems. 3.4 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES A. The contractor shall furnish and install complete with necessary valves, adapters,and i support for all water lines and solution lines of the size and type indicated to connect the feeder with the water supply and with the desired point of application. All water and solution lines and appurtenances shall be as indicated and as specified in section 15060, I pipe and pipe fittings of these specifications. 3.5 SUPERVISION OF INSTALLATION I A. The installation of the equipment furnished under these specifications shall be under the direction of a qualified representative employed by the manufacturer of the equipment, who will test ad adjust the equipment during initial operation and instruct the operating personnel in the care,operation and adjustment of the equipment. Complete printed operating instructions and spare parts lists, as herein previously specified, shall be furnished, supplemented by cuts and diagrams showing the component parts of the equipment and all control devices. END OF SECTION I I 1 I I 1416-00 17248 Pao Pa11248-12 Z Ed Equipmcnt-Silo I -ENQINEERS- I SECTION 11935 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMP(VERTICALIN-LINE) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES tA. Vertical In-line Centrifugal Water Pumps. B. Provide one installed and one complete pump as a spare. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900- Painting and Finishing B. Section 11000- Equipment Erection 1.3 REFERENCES A. HI-ANSI/HI Pump Standards B. ANSI B88.1 -Turbine Pumps 1 C. NEMA- Standards Publication 1.4 WARRANTY tA. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pump and motor to the Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of three(3)years under normal use and service ' for municipal applications. In the event that the equipment should fail to perform in accordance with the purchase contract, or proves defective, modifications or additions shall be promptly made by the Vendor at no cost to the Purchaser. In the event that the ' Vendor is unable to modify the equipment to meet performance guarantees,the purchaser shall have the option to return the equipment to the Vendor for a full refund of the purchase price. The pump manufacturer's warranties shall be in published form and shall t apply to all similar units. The warranty period will begin on the day that successful test runs of the equipment are performed. A copy of each warranty shall be provided to the Owner with delivery. ' B. The performance of any or all pumping units shall be guaranteed at the specified pumping conditions. The total horsepower required by the pumps shall not be in excess of that indicated by the results of the manufacturer's shop test. C. A pump exhibiting excessive vibration,noise levels, or wear under normal service during the warranty period will be considered defective. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 1416-4011435 Verflcatln-Line Pump 11935-1 Z E l ' —ENGINEERS- 1 t SECTION 11935 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMP(VERTICAL IN-LINE) B. Equipment Submittal: The plans show the extent and general arrangement of the equipment and may be modified as required to suit the equipment furnished, subject to the approval of the Engineer. As soon as practicable, and not later than 30 days after the award of the Contract,the Contractor shall submit the following descriptive literature and drawings for all equipment being furnished under this section of the specifications: 1. Certified sectional and dimension drawings. 2. Certified performance curves showing head,flow,Bhp,Hydraulic efficiencies, and NPSHR. 3. Certified data on motor giving following information: a. Full load amps. b. Locked rotor amps. c. Full load rpm. d. Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 loads. e. Power factor at full, 3/4,and 1/2 loads. f. Sound pressure at operating point, DBA. C. Equipment and Piping Installation Drawings: Complete details of the installation and any necessary changes in arrangement,piping, etc.,from that indicated on the plans. D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment manufactured in the United States and supplied by a single manufacturer. B. Provide field performance testing under provisions of Sections 01400, Quality Control. ' C. Manufacturer to field test each pump and submit test results to Engineer for review and approval prior to Owner acceptance. ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01600,Materials and Equipment. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All products must fully comply with these specifications. Standard product must be111 modified,if required, for compliance. All pump components shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the pump. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering pumps which may be supplied for the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Patterson 2. Grundfos 1416-0011935 Vertical le-LiaePump 11935-2 Z E L 1 —ENGINEERS— i I SECTION 11935 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMP(VERTICAL IN-LINE) I3. Approved Equal I2.2 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS A. Design: Pump(s) shall meet the following minimum conditions: I1. Capacity(GPM) 2100 2. Head(Feet) 40 I3. Efficiency(%) 70 Per Addendum No. 1) 4. Maximum Speed (RPM) 1185 (Per Addendum No. 1) 5. Maximum Shutoff Head(Feet) 65 (Per Addendum No. 1) I 6. Maximum Required NPSH(Feet) 11 Per Addendum No. 1) 7. Motor Horsepower 30 I 8. Suction Nozzle Diameter(Inches) 10 9. Discharge Nozzle Diameter(Inches) 10 10. The motor shall be non-overloading at all points in the operating range. IB. Casing: Casing shall be made of close-grained cast iron,having minimum 30,000 psi tensile strength,with wall thickness suitable for 250 psi service and appropriate safety I factors. Casing shall consist of upper and lower half castings containing the volute and suction passages, and removable bearing housings that are doweled and securely bolted to the lower half of the casing. Inboard and outboard bearing housings shall be replaceable I without the need for field alignment. Casing shall be axially split along the shaft centerline with flat faced suction and discharge flanges and mounting feet cast integral with the casing. The casings shall be single volute, doweled to permit easy removal and Iaccurate replacement for inspection and maintenance. C. Suction and discharge connections shall be sized to reduce friction losses and to reduce I turbulence and noise. All suction and discharge flanges shall be nut-and-bolt connections, 125#ANSI drilling. The casing shall be drilled and tapped at the highest point for mounting of an air release. The casing shall be drilled and tapped for drainage Ipiping. D. Impellers: The impellers shall be of bronze, of the enclosed type, double suction, Francis I vane design. The impellers shall be statically and hydraulically balanced. They shall be precision cast in one piece with smooth flow contours to promote maximum efficiency. They shall be securely fastened to the impeller shaft with shaft sleeves and nuts and Isecured with a precision fit and full length key. Impeller skirt shall have sufficient metal thickness to allow machining for installation of impeller rings. IE. Pump Shaft: Each pump impeller shaft is to be turned and polished 416 stainless steel and of sufficient diameter to allow no greater than 0.003 inches maximum deflection at the sealing box under all conditions on the pump curve. The shaft shall be manufactured Ito meet stiff shaft construction with a critical speed at least 25%in excess of operating speed. The shaft shall be reversible to provide for field change of opposite rotation if required. Renewable shaft sleeves shall be provided. I1416-0011935 Vertical In-Line Pump.Doc 11935-3 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 11935 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMP(VERTICAL IN-LINE) F. Bearings: The bearings shall be designed for centrifugal pump service and grease lubricated. The bearings shall carry both radial and thrust loads. Inboard and outboard bearings shall be interchangeable,press fit, and positioned into ground journals. G. Mechanical Seals: Mechanical Seals shall be compact,high performance, cartridge type, 1 John Crane Type 4610. Product recirculation through the seal is required and shall be from the high pressure side of the pump. Restriction bushings shall be provided to raise the pressure in the stuffing box. 1 H. Interior Coating: The interior of the pump must have a National Service Foundation (NSF) coating. I. Motors: Pump motor shall be open drip proof, 30 hp, 1200 RPM, 160 volts, 3 phase,60 Hz, 1.15 service factor. Motors shall be manufactured by US Motors,Premium Efficiency design,or Engineer approved equal by GE,Reliance,or Baldor. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pressure gauges shall be furnished and installed on the suction and discharge side of the pumps. Gauges shall be bronze tube Bourdon type with 31/2 inch dials, 0 to 200 psi. Each gauge shall be installed with snubber and gauge cock and shall be Ashcroft Model 100g, or equal. 2.4 PAINTING ' A. All pumps,motors,bases, and auxiliary equipment and accessories shall be shop primed according to Section 09900, Painting And Finishing section of these specifications. To ' assure compatibility of coating systems,the coating system in the PAINTING section must be approved prior to any shop painting. PART 3 EXECUTION . I 3.1 DELIVERY.& START-UP: A. Delivery: 1. All components shall be delivered with protective cover suitable for storage outside and protected from the effects of weather until installation. Damaged material shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner prior to acceptance. B. Start-Up Services: 1. The manufacturer shall furnish an representative experienced in installation and operation of the equipment furnished under this Section for a minimum of one trips for a total time at the site of not less than two working days to supervise the installation and adjustment of the equipment. 1476.O0 11935 Vcriicel In 11935-4 Z EL -Eine Pmnp —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 11935 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMP(VERTICAL IN-LINE) I 2. The manufacturer's representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation and satisfactory operation of the equipment;he shall be present at least once during the installation. ' 3.2 TESTS A. Shop Tests: Each pump assembly shall be shop tested in accordance with Section A6 of IANSI Specification B58.1. Laboratory data sheets and certified performance curves shall be approved by the Engineer prior to final acceptance. I B. Field Test: After the pumping equipment and controls are installed,the Contractor shall conduct,in the presence of the Engineer and a responsible representative of the manufacturer of the pumps,an eight-hour test run covering the full range of operating I conditions as specified herein. Acceptance of the equipment shall be predicated upon satisfactory operation during this field test. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor,materials, and bear all costs of the eight-hour test of each pumping unit. I3.3 PUMP FOUNDATIONS AND SETTING A. The Contractor shall install pumps as shown on the drawings and specified in "Equipment Erection". All pumping equipment shall be set,aligned, leveled,and grouted in place and such work shall be approved by a responsible representative of the manufacturer of the pumps. END OF SECTION I I IF 1416-0011935 Varicella-Line Pump 11935-5 Z n —ENGINEERS- I I I ......... ..... SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. The work covered by this section of specifications includes instrumentation and controls with appurtenant equipment and accessories as indicated, specified, and as necessary for a I complete and properly operating system.,modification of existing reports. This shall includemanufacture and supply ofnew PLC control panels,PLC application sof are development and testing,engineering design and supplyof field instruments t and.control I devices,and peribrming other work and providing other appurtenances as noted in these specifications. I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010- Electrical- General Provisions B. Section 16050- Basic Materials And Methods 1.3 GENERAL IA. Work includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Engineering design;arid selection of all`:components including SCADA hardware, I field i tr tints and control devices,etc as indicated,spec .ed,and required by the plans,loop descriptions and other specifications sections contained herein. 2. All engineering,hardware and software installation, and onsite supervision I necessary. 3. Testing and operational demonstrations as specified. 4. Final terctinations of all I/O signals and AC power wiring to equipment,, instruments,and° control panels specified and supplied under this section of the Icontract documents. 5. Supply and terminations of fiber optics cable. 6. Training programs as specified. I7. Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 8. Preparation of Record Drawings. I B. Work not included: 1. Installation of fiber optics cable in conduit. 2. Physical installation of in-line devices. I 3. Physical installation of control panels. 4. Physical installation of field instruments and associated mounting hardware. 5. Conduit and wire. I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE The control'syste is an.integrated system arid,as such, shall be:fu .a shed'bysingle IA. licensed and approved Instrumentation and Control System Integrator(ICI) who shall 1416-0013400 Instrumentation 13400-1 ZEL I -ENGINEERS- i I SECTION 13400 I INSTRUMENTATION provide all of the instruments, equipment, and appurtenances regardless of manufacturer, and who shall be responsible to the Contractor for the complete and satisfactory operation of the entire control system. B. These specifications cover the intended functionality of the equipment,but do not necessarily cover all details necessary for a complete,operable and functional system. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator shall supply all devices and appurtenances necessary to provide a complete, operable and satisfactory system as ' indicated or specified. C. Instrumentation and Control System Integrators: 1. It is the intent of these specifications and drawings that the Contractor shall engage a pre-approved and qualified Instrumentation and Control System Integrator to provide the system as specified and indicated. ' 2. Responsibilities of the Instrumentation and Control System Integrator to include: a. Complete the engineering design and furnish a fully integrated and functionally operating instrumentation and control system,warranted to perform the intended functions as herein specified. b. Provide or supply all hardware and software specified herein or required and provide all required and specified collateral services in connection with the system such as testing, calibration, start-up, operation and maintenance manuals, record prints, and operator training without additional cost to the Owner. c. Employ a minimum of three(3)full time employees who are fully trained and qualified Engineers specializing in the areas of instrumentation and controls,project management,project engineering,electrical design, cellular telemetry system design,PLC programming, mechanical design, . I and field service engineering. 3. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator Company shall have been fully engaged in the business of installing instrumentation and control systems for the . 0 II municipal water and wastewater market for a period of at least ten(10)years. 4. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator shall be a certified member of the Control System Integrator Association(CSIA). I 5. The Contractor's shall engage the services of M/R Systems,Inc. of Norcross, GA., Control Instruments, Inc. of Smyrna, GA., Southern Flow, Inc. of Alpharetta, GA or Revere Control Systems,Inc. of Birmingham,Al. I D. Contractor: 1. Shall be fully and solely responsible for the work of the systems supplier and I solely responsible to the Owner for having supplied to the Owner the complete supervisory control and data acquisition system. 2. To provide personal superintendence and direction to the work,maintaining and I supplying complete supervision over and coordination between all subcontractors employed by him. 3. To be responsible for defining the limits of his subcontractor's work. I 1416-0013400 Instrumentation 13400-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I I I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION 4. Shall be responsible for physical mounting/setting of instruments, including instruments as provided under other sections of these specifications. 5. Final piping and/or wiring connections to all instruments, including instruments as I provided under other sections of these specifications shall be made by the Contractor and/or electrical subcontractor. 6. Physical mounting/setting of all control panels shall be made by the Contractor and/or electrical subcontractor. IE. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. (UL)Listing of Control Panels: IF. All control panels supplied for this project shall be UL 508 listed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Component manufacturing data shy indicating pertinent data OM identifying each Icomponent by item number and nomenclature as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. • IC. Component drawings showing dimensions,mounting and external connection details. D. System$ystern wiring schematics,each can a single drawing with full description of operation. Component identification on the schematic shall be as indicated above. E. A system schematic of the major in-plant system components. IF. Component manufacturing data sheets for each system item, including all system peripherals and remote site hardware. I G. Provide six(6)operation and maintenance manuals complying with the following provisions: 1. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings,and I diagrams required for operation and maintenance. . Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and Imaintenance. H. Instruction Manuals I1. Provide a total of five(5) sets of instruction manuals, sturdily bound. Three(3) sets shall be delivered to the Owner,one(1)set shall be delivered to the Engineer, and one(1) set shall be maintained by the Instrumentation and Control System I Integrator. 2. Operating instructions to incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the'las-built" system schematics. 3. Include and clearly define special maintenance requirements particular to the 1 system along with special calibration and test procedures. 1416-0013400 Instrumentation 13400-3 Z E l I —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION I. Software Documentation 1. Provide complete documentation for operation and maintenance, covering both • operating system software and application software. 2. Furnish one(1) set of documentation for operating system software. a. This to be the hardware manufacturer's standard comprehensive documentation for the operating system as supplied for this project. b. Include complete user information for proper utilization of the system. 3. Furnish five(5) sets of detailed user manuals for the application software. Three I (3)sets shall be delivered to the Owner, one(1)set shall be delivered to the Engineer, and one(1) set shall be maintained by the Instrumentation and Control System Integrator. ' J. Design manuals to permit Owner's personnel to adequately understand the operation of the system as it relates to the process being controlled. ' K. Sub-divide manuals into detailed sections describing each of the major software sub- systems provided. ' L. Each sub-section to include an overview or abstract defining in general terms the function of that particular sub-system. I M. Following the overview include a detailed functional description of the operation of that particular sub-system including a detailed explanation of all operator inputs required, copies of typical displays involved with the function of the particular subsystem, and, where applicable,include copies of typical hardcopy printouts associated with the sub- system. N. Make significant use of step-by-step examples to simplify system use and operation. • I 1. User manuals are to be sturdily bound in hardback binders. O. Drawings ' 1. Provide "as-built"drawings containing all necessary information for proper maintenance and system operation. 2. Interconnection information between system components; and system components and packaged equipment found in other sections of these specifications, shall be complete with all necessary interconnection information.Notes referring to equipment manufacturer's drawings for proper interconnection will not be acceptable. 3. Systems manufacturer to be responsible for furnishing the drawings. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,HANDLING AND STORAGE ' A. Schedule the delivery of the equipment to coordinate with the project completion I schedule. Each item of equipment shall be tagged with identifying number shown on the Shop Drawings. I 1416.00 13400 Instrumentation ...13400-4 Z E —ENGINEERS— ' I SECTION 13400 • INSTRUMENTATION I B. Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that equipment has delicate components and extreme care shall be taken in handling to avoid internal and/or external damages. Damaged equipment will not be accepted. 1 C. Equipment not for immediate use shall be stored inside a building,with enclosures under protective coverings and shall be fully protected from moisture, extreme heat and vibration. I1.7 WARRANTY IA. Provide one(1)year warranty from project substantial completion date. B. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator shall furnish a hardware maintenance I contract for the computer system,providing,for an 8-hour response time in normal working hou ,five days per week for a period of ene year after acceptance of the control system. For any service visit during this period,provide the Owner and Engineer with a I written report stating the reason for equipment failure and recommendations to prevent recurrence. Upon expiration of the initial one-year warranty period,the Instrumentation and Control IC. System Integrator shall make available to the Owner a maintenance contract to cover system hardware,HMI software,PLC software,PLC hardware,radio telemetry equipment, field instruments,and instrumentation repair and calibration services. I1.8 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS I A: Process Monitoring and Control System(PMCS). 1. The work under this section includes integrating the systems described below into the existing plant PMCS. IB. Filtration Controls (Filter 1 and 7) 1. Overview: The filters will continue to operate based on filter influent level and I filter effluent flow. Air scour and rinse flow control will be added to the backwash process. 2. Control:I . a. Filter Control Consoles(FCCs): Provide PLC-based consoles(FCC-1 and FCC-7) for local monitoring and control of filters. The consoles shall be equipped to add an additional filter to each console in the future. The consoles shall match the aesthetics and configuration of the existing plant Ifilter consoles(filters 11-17 located in the West Filter Building). Develop the OIT application to provide access to PLCs via the plant-wide Ethernet but maintains local manual control of the filter valves should there be a I failure of the Ethernet. The graphical displays On existing FCCs with shared access to process setpoints, alarms, functions and controls related to filtration and backwash process. Login security shall conform to existing protocols. b. Local Control Station(filter valves) I 1416-00I3400Instrumentation 13400-5 - ZE l —ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION 1) Local/Off/Remote selector switch 2) Open/Close momentary pushbuttons I 3) Open/Close indicator lights 4) In local ode Open/Hold/Close Control is provided at the valve. 5) In remote mode control is via PMCS I c. Remote Control Stations. Provide floor mounted pushbutton stations for valve actuators over 5' above floor level: 1) Local/Off/Remote selector switch 2) Open/Close momentary pushbuttons • 3) Open/Close indicator lights 4) In local mode Open/Hold/Close control is provided at the valves 5) In remote mode control reverts to the PMCS. 3. Hardwired Interlocks: (None) 4. Graphic Displays, Status and Alarms: Conform to existing displays(filters 11-17). 5. Related Items: a. Measure flow through each filter with a Venturi meter and differential pressure flow transmitter. b. Monitor head loss through each filter with a differential pressure transmitter. c. Effluent turbidity through each filter will be monitored with a low range turbidimeter. Do not activate a high turbidity alarm when the filter effluent valve is closed to prevent a false alarm during backwash and rinse cycles. Configure the data logging feature on the Hach 1720E filter I effluent turbidimeters to log filter effluent turbidity every 5 minutes. d. Effluent particle count through each filter will be monitored with a particle counter. Do not activate a high particle count alarm when the filter effluent valve is closed to prevent a false alarm during backwash and rinse cycles. e. Install turbidimeters and particle counters at the combined filter effluent sample. Configure the data logging feature on the combined filter effluent I turbidimeter to log filter effluent turbidity every 5 minutes. f. Provide sonic level transmitter in each filter to indicate satisfactory levels for starting and stopping the air wash system,to activate the opening of the influent valve, and to provide alarms for abnormally High or Low water levels. g. Motor operated valves and slide gates will be provided for the following I services: 1) Filter Influent(slide gate) 2) Effluent Rate of Flow Control 3) Air Wash(2) 4) Drain(slide gate) 5) Wash Water(2) I 6) Wash Water Manifold 7) Rinse I 1416-0013400 Instrumentation 13400-6 Z E L -ENGINEERS- ' I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION h. Provide limit switches on valves for opt and:closedpositions. Intermediate posit on(adjustable)limit switches shall be provided for filter influent valves for use ding the backwash program. Configure Iactuators to transriiit status sails to PLC via DeviceNet communications C. Powdered Activated Carbon(PAC)Storage and Feed System 1. The PAC System PLC and Operator Interface Terminal(OIT)are being furnished Iand programmed under Division 11. Coordinate with the system supplier to obtain PLC logic documentation to interface with the existing plant Process Monitoring and Control System(PMCS). I a. Overview: There are three potential feed points for PAC slurry generated by the.PAC System.. The PAC System generates a measured slurry from the stored dry PACK The PAC slurry is then directed to the appropriate I feed point by the operator, The control should interlock such that only e single feed point is selected. b. Control I 1) Local Control Stations a) FCP-410 Main Control Panel (By Division 11) b) FCE-411 Loading Control Panel(By Division 11) I 2) PCMS a) Provide HMI graphic displays to monitor the PAC Storage and Feed System to include: (1) ..Fill Status (2) PAC Silo Level (3) Silo Dust Collector Status I (4) Silo High, Low and Low-Low Level Alarms (5) Compressed Air System Alarms (6) PAC Slurry Water Flow Rate and Totalization I (7) PAC Slurry Water Booster Pump Status (8) PAC Slurry Water Booster Pump Speed Control (9) PAC Slurry Water Pressure Alarms (10) PAC Volumetric Feeder Rate Set and Status I (11) Feed Point Valve Control and Status c. Hardware Interlocks: (By Division 11) I D. Filter Rinse Modifications 1. Overview: a. The filter rinse pump shall be integrated into the existing filter backwash I cycle. 2. Control: a. Provide a VFD based control panel located in the filter gallery for I controlling the filter rinse pump. Develop the_OIT application in the existing plant SCADA system and existing filter control consoles (FCC) for controlling the operation of the filter rinse pump during the drawdown Icycle by monitoring filter drawdown levels and filter drawdown rates.. f The pump will be used to augment the existing gravity-based drawdown I 1416-00134OO1nstiumentefion 13400-7 Z Eii L —ENGINEERS- ,a w SECTION„13400 INSTRUMENTATION system during the filter badkwash cycle. The level for starting and stopping the pump shall be adjustable. Thespeed of the pump shall be ' controlled to maintain the desired drawdown rate of the filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 FIBER OPTICS CABLE AND TERMINATIONS A. Fiber optics cable shall be 62.5/125 micron, 12-fiber minimum, OFNP/FT-6 listed,UV- resistant, and fully water blocked.Fiber optics cable shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor installation. Fiber optics cable shall be suitable for duct and aerial.with no need for a transition splice when entering the building. B. Fiber optics cable shall be supplied by the Instrumentation and Control System Integrator and shall be installed by the Contractor. ' C. Fiber optics cable shall be Corning FREEDM One Plenum cable. D. All fiber optics terminations shall be the responsibility of the Instrumentation and Control Systems Integrator. E. Fiber Optics Cables shall be provided for the following communications runs: 1. FCC-01 and FCC-07 to existing FOPP-406 panel. F. Fiber Optics Connectors:Fiber optics connectors shall be Siecor SC UNICAM type with I ceramic tip for 62.5/125 micron fiber. G. Provide one(1) 12-fiber buffer tube fan-out kit to terminate each'fiber cable.Buffer tube fanout kit shall be Siecor#FAN-BT25-12 consisting of fan-out clamp, fan-out tubing, alcohol,tissues, and adhesive. 2.2 CONTROL PANELS A. Panel Enclosures 1. It is the intent of these specifications to establish minimum requirements for all control panels to be supplied under this contract. 2. All control panels shall be UL Listed. 3. To match existing equipment and to allow for future connectivity to an Ethernet data highway,programmable logic controllers (PLCs)shall be Modicon M340 family. B. Control panels shall be supplied for locations and functions as noted in the contract specifications and as shown on the contract plans. I 1416-00 13400 Instrumentation 13400-8 Z E L -ENGINEERS- t SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION Tag Panel Name Panel Construction FCC-01 Filter Control Console No. 1 Match Existing Plant Consoles (Filters 11-17) FCC-07 Filter Control Console No. 7 Match Existing Plant Consoles (Filters 11-17) C. Cabinets and Enclosures: 1. Provide cabinets with hinged doors for easy access. 2. Cooling fans and inlet louvers with replaceable filters shall be used to provide proper cooling where required. 3. Enclosures for PLC-based U0 sub-systems that shall be mounted in hostile ' environments or outdoors shall meet NEMA 4X construction,#304 stainless steel as specified above and shall include white aluminum solar shields for the front, both sides, and top of each panel. ' 4. Enclosures for PLC-based U0 sub-systems that shall be mounted in non-hostile indoors environments shall be of NEMA 12 construction(painted carbon steel)or as specified above. 5. Cooling equipment shall be sized to maintain the proper temperature inside the enclosure with outside ambient temperature at 90°F. D. PLC Components: 1. CPU cards shall be Modicon M340#BMXP341000 with 2 MB RAM,USB port, Modbus port, and 8 MB memory card; 2. Ethernet network modules shall be Modicon#BMXNOE0100 with 1 RJ-45 10/100 ' Ethernet port with 2 MB memory module; 3. PLC power supplies shall be Modicon M340#BMXCPS3020,24 to 28 VDC, isolated input,31 watt; 4. PLC backplanes shall be Modicon M340#BMXXBP0800, 1 slot for power supply plus 8 slots for single width modules and CPU,DIN-rail-mounting or Modicon M340#BMXXBP1200, 1 slot for power supply plus 12 slots for single width '. modules and CPU,DIN-rail-mounting; 5. Extension rack kit shall be Modicon M340#BMXXBE2005 with 2 extension rack modules, 0.8 meter extension cable, and one set of 2 line terminators; 6. Discrete input cards shall be Modicon M340#BMXDDI1602, 16 point,24 VDC with#BMXFTB2000 20-point screw clamp terminal block; 7. Discrete output cards shall be Modicon M340#BMXDDO1602, 16 point,24 VDC with#BMXFTB2000,20-point screw clamp terminal block; 8. Analog input cards shall be Modicon M340#BMXAMI0810, 8 point,isolated with #BMXFTB2000, 20-point screw clamp terminal block; ' 9. Analog output cards shall be Modicon M340 BMXAMO0410,4 point,isolated with#BMXFTB2000, 20-point screw clamp terminal block; 1416.00 13400 Instrumentation 13400-9 ZE —ENGINEERS- 1 .. 11 SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION 2.3 PLC ENCLOSURE INTERNAL PANEL WIRING AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION A. All PLC equipment shall be supplied with power supplies suitable for operation on 120 Volt,60 Hertz, single-phase,AC power. B. Receptacles with isolated ground shall be supplied for computer devices in the control room and internal to the PLC enclosures. C. All field wiring terminations shall be made to terminal strips capable of accommodating ' up to#12 AWG wire.Terminal strips shall be mounted using DIN rails. Terminal strips shall be as manufactured by Weidmuller,Phoenix Contact, Square D,or approved equal. ' D. All analog inputs and outputs,including all spare analog inputs and outputs, shall be protected from surges using three separate levels of surge/transient suppression. The first level of protection shall be via a 1/4 Amp 3AG size fast acting fuse. Secondary and tertiary protection shall be fulfilled using combination gas discharge and metallic oxide varistor(MOV)surge protection with current limiting resistors. Terminals shall be installed to allow each of the four analog inputs to be configured for 2-wire or 4-wire process transmitters and to produce either 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 VDC outputs to the PLC and any future display or signal conversion devices.Terminals shall be installed adjacent to each spare analog surge protector to provide 24 VDC for connections of future 2-wire transmitters. Spare analog inputs and outputs shall be wired to analog surge protection, fuses,'etc. and shall be ready to accommodate future field signals. E. All digital inputs,includingspare digital inputs, shall be isolated via indicating electro- mechanical ' P p relays. Minimum contact rating for relays shall be 10 Amps at 250 VAC, minimum. Digital inputs shall be connected to field wiring via DIN rail mounted terminal = , strips.A 2 Amp 3AG size fuse shall protect digital inputs. Spare digital inputs shall be fully wired complete with relay isolation and terminal strips to accommodate future field signals. F. All digital outputs,including spare digital outputs, shall be isolated from field wiring through terminal strips and indicating electro-mechanical relays with contact ratings of 10 Amps at 250 VAC,minimum. Spare digital outputs shall be fully wired complete with relay isolation and terminal strips to accommodate future field signals. G. As a minimum, separate DC power supplies shall be provided for the PLC rack, analog ' I/O field supply, and digital UO field supply.All DC power supplies shall be UL Listed and shall be protected via indicating 3AG size fast acting fuses. Indicating fuse holders shall be DIN rail mounted. ' H. A fluorescent light(24"minimum) shall be mounted in the top of each PLC enclosure. The light shall be wired to a 2-pole limit switch that shall be mounted on the door of the PLC enclosure.When the door is opened,the light will automatically be turned on.When the door is closed,the light will automatically be turned off. The second pole of the limit switch shall be wired to a non-relay-isolated input of the PLC to provide a panel intrusion signal to the SCADA system. 1416-00 13400 Instrumentation 13400-10 Z E l —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION I. Surge protectors shall be provided internal to the PLC enclosure to provide communications signal transient and surge protection. J. Uninterruptible power supplies shall be furnished and installed inside each PLC enclosure and shall be sized to provide at least 30 minutes of backup power for the entire PLC enclosure.UPS systems shall be designed to provide transfer to backup power n the. event of AC power failure without interrupting or halting the PLC processor.Provide ' 1500 VA minimum UPS systems for each PLC enclosure. UPS systems for PLC enclosures shall be APC Model SMT1500 with Ethernet option card and Ethernet software driver. ' K. A minimum of two(2) circuit breakers shall beprovided integral to the PLC enclosure. �' One circuit breaker shall provide protection to the PLC's internal power supplies and the ' other circuit breaker shall provide protection to a Ground Fault Interrupt(GFI)duplex utility outlet. ' L. An AC power surge protector shall be installed integral to the PLC to provide transient and surge protection for incoming AC power. A separate 20 amp GFI duplex utility outlet shall be protected by the surge protector and shall be used only for the UPS system. ' M. For power with 120 VAC supplied from a foreign source,provide an engraved nameplate (white letters,red background)to read"WARNING—This panel energized by foreign control power sources. Equipment will be live with panel disconnect in either on or off I position." N. Fiber optics interconnect center shall be mounted inside the following PLC enclosures: ' FCC-1 and FCC-7.For each location where fiber optics terminations are to be made,one panel-mountable fiber optics interconnect center shall be supplied and installed to provide strain relief and protection for up to 24 fiber terminations via SC-style adapters. Provide ' one fiber optics interconnection box for each fiber optics cable that enters or exits the PLC enclosure. Fiber optics termination centers shall be Siecor#WIC-024 for indoor applications complete with connector panels with SC adapters. ' O. Fiber Optics Jumpers: Provide fiber optics jumpers between the fiber optics interconnect box and the programmable logic controller(PLC)and to bridge each pair of fibers from one interconnect box to other interconnect boxes. Fiber optics jumpers shall be 2-fiber, 62.5/125 micron prefabricated jumper cable assemblies with SC-type connectors. Length of fiber optics jumpers shall be determined by the Instrumentation and Control System ' Integrator. P. Fiber Optics Connectors: Fiber optics connectors shall be Siecor SC UNICAM type with ceramic tip for 62.5/125 micron fiber. ' Q. Provide one(1)buffer-tube tool kit to-terminate each.12 fiber table, Buffer tube kit shall be Siecor#FAN-BT25-12 consisting of fan-out clamp,fan-out tubingg,alcohol,tissues, ' and adhesive. Terminations:All fiber optics terminations shall be the responsibility of the Instrumentation and Control Systems Integrator. 1416-0013400 Insttwnentat;on 13400-11 Z E L. —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 13400, INSTRUMENTATION' 2.4 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION I A. General 1. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator shall supply all equipment specified under this section. 2. The intent of this specification is that all systems form a completely integrated system without the addition of any other equipment than that specified herein. B. Level Transmitter,Ultrasonic 1. Ultrasonic level transmitters with ultrasonic transducers shall be supplied for the following applications: Tag Service Range LE/LIT-301A Filter#1 Side A Level—Transmitter mounts in FCC-1 0 to 12 feet LE/LIT-301B Filter#1 Side B Level—Transmitter mounts in FCC-1 0 to 12 feet LE/LIT-307A . Filter#7 Side A Level—Transmitter mounts in FCC-2 0 to 12 feet LE/LIT-307B Filter#7 Side B Level—Transmitter mounts in FCC-2 0 to 12 feet I 2. For each ultrasonic level transmitter that is mounted more than ten feet away from its ultrasonic transducer,provide a field-mounted NEMA 4X#304 stainless steel junction box for termination of the ultrasonic level transducer cable to field wiring going back to the level transmitter. The purpose of this junction box is to facilitate rapid change out of the transducer should it become damaged. 3. Provide field-mounted Phoenix Contact"Boxtrab"AC Power protection and analog surge protector for each ultrasonic level transmitter. 4. Provide aluminum solar hood for any ultrasonic transmitters mounted outdoors. ' 5. The ultrasonic transmitters for the filter levels shall be supplied in DIN-rail mounting enclosure and shall be subpanel-mounted in the Filter Control Consoles. 6. Ultrasonic level transmitters shall be Rosemount 3107 level transmitter.Provide a #316 stainless steel mounting bracket for each ultrasonic level transducer designed for the specific application. Provide extended 3 year warranty. O C. Turbidimeter, Low Range 1. Low range turbidimeters shall be supplied for the following applications: Tag I Service Range ...... • AE/AIT-301A Filter#1 —Side A Turbidity 0 to 1 NTU AE/AIT-301B Filter#1 —Side B Turbidity 0 to 1 NTU AE/AIT-307A .Filter#7—Side A Turbidity 0 to 1 NTU AE/AIT-307B Filter#7—Side B.Turbidity 0 to 1 NTU 2, Low range turbidimeters shall be Low Range Process Turbidimeter Model 1720E with SC100 Controller as manufactured by the Hach Company. 3. Provide field-mounted Phoenix Contact"Boxtrab"AC Power protection and ' analog surge protector for each low range turbidimeter. 1416-00 134601astrumcntation 1340042 ZEL ENGINEERB— I I Y I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION D. Flow Transmitters—Differential Pressure Tag Service Range FIT-301 Filter No 1 —Effluent Flow 0-4.6 (match existing venture range) I FIT-307 Filter No 7—Effluent Flow 0-4.6(match'existing.venture range) ; Differential pressure flow transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 "Smart" Series. Ii Each transmitter shall be supplied with a factory installed 316 stainless steel, 3 valve manifold. 2. Provide field-mounted Phoenix Contact S-PT1-2PE-24DL analog surge suppressor Ifor each transmitter. E. Mass Flowmeter(Differential Pressure) Tag Service Range FE/FIT-812 East Filter Building Air Scour Air,Flow 0-2000 SCFM M I 1. Insertion Type,low profile probe,negligible pressure loss I 2. 3. Differential Pressure design with flow output 24 volt DC loop powered 4. Programmable via Hart&Local pushbutton interface 5. Accuracy:± 1%of reading 6. Output: 4-20 mAdc,proportional to mass flowrate 7. Service: Air Scour Air Flow I 8. Provide packing gland assembly 9. Connection: Weld-on Packing Hand Assembly 10. Insertion length as required I11. 12. Provide remote electronics package with flowrate indication. Manufacturer: a. Rosemont Annubar Model 485 • II . . b. Approved equal F. Pressure Indicating Transmitters,Differential Pressure 1. Differential pressure indicating transmitters shall be supplied for the following Iapplications: Tag Service Range (MGD) I PDIT-301 Filter No. 1 -Loss-of-Head 0 to 12 ft. PDIT-307 Filter No. 7 -Loss-of-Head 0 to 12 ft. I 2. Differential pressure indicating transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 "Smart" Series suitably ranged for the above applications. Each differential pressure indicating transmitter shall be supplied with a factory-installed 3-valve manifold I constructed of#316 stainless steel I 1416.00134001mtramentation 13400-13 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 13400 - INSTRUIVIENTATION 3. Provide field-mounted Phoenix Contact S-PT1-2PE-24DC"pipe bomb"style analog surge protector for each pressure indicating transmitter. I G. Particle Counters Tag Service Range(Microns) AE/AIT-301C Filter No 1 -Particle Count 2-3, 3-5, 5-15,>15 AE/AIT 307C Filter No 7-Particle Count 2-3,3-5,5-15,>15 • 1. Particle Counters shall be Hach AFC-WI with PCX server, 2081771 strainer and software or Chemtral PC240D. 2. Provide field-mounted Phoenix Contact S-PT1-2PE-24DC analog surge suppresser for each particle counter. 2.5 SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL A. Video Surveillance Equipment 1. Hardware and software shall be provided and configured to create a comprehensive Video Surveillance/Security system integrated fully into the existing plant security system. Cameras shall be provided to monitor the following areas: a. Entrance Gate; b. PAC Silo and Building; 2. In order to match existing camera system,provide Pelco Model DS53C22-PG-EO y Spectra III Camera. 3. Provide Pelco IWM24-GY Dome Wall Mount,Pelco PA402 POL Mount Adaptor, , and Pelco CM400 Camera Mount as required for camera mounting. 4. Housings for the IP cameras shall be suitable for outdoor installation and shall be rated IP66/NEMA 4X with integral heater,blower, and sun shield. B. Entrance Gate Access Controller 1. Hardware and software shall be provided and configured as required to establish an entrance gate access system. 2. Provide one(1)Genetec Model 610OCKN0000 iCLASS R10 Read Only Contactless Smart Card Reader. 3. Provide one(1) Genetec Model Sy-72000AEPONO VertX V2000 Reader Interface/Network Gateway. 4. Supply and configure hardware and software to establish two-way audio between the entrance gate and the control room(located in the West Filter Building). 1416-0013400Inslrumentation 13400-14 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS ' A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING A. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator shall provide a factory software demonstration to verify operation of all functional features of the system. This testing shall be witnessed by representatives of the Owner and the Consulting Engineer. ' B. Software testing shall be conducted on the target computer systems at the supplier's facility. ' 3.3 FIELD EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. B. Verify that the instrumentation is of the correct size and voltage in accordance with the , manufacturer's approved shop drawings. C. Verify that the location is suitable for instrumentation installation. ' 3.4 PREPARATION A. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated. ' B. Do not install any instrument until the building environment or power requirement can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer. ' C. Provide Type 316 Stainless Steel stands as necessary for mounting of the instrumentation and other equipment. ' 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the ' work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Engineer, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. C. Perform all wiring in compliance with NEC. .........._.. ' 1416-0013400 Instrumentation 13400-15 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION ' D. Before and during the installation,the instrumentation shall be protected from site contaminants. I E. Installation shall be where indicated,in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, drawings and recommendations NEMA ICS 3.1. ' F. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. G. Mount control equipment securely on wall or equipment rack at a location 48 inches above the finished floor as shown on drawings using type 316 Stainless steel hardware. H. Mount Transmitters with isolation valves for servicing or replacement without taking line out of service. All mounting frames and hardware shall be#316 stainless steel. I. Properly connect the transmitters to the PLC inputs and power supply to obtain a current loop. J. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing instrumentation. K. Coordinate with Manufacturer for Startup Services as specified. L. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Division 16— ELECTRICAL. 3.6 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. B. All panels shall be thoroughly vacuumed to remove all trash and other debris. 3.7 FIELD SERVICES 1 A. Manufacturer's field representative shall inspect completed installation of all instrumentation for physical damage,proper alignment,anchorage, and grounding. 1 B. The manufacturer field representative shall be a factory certified technical representative to supervise the contractor's installation,testing and start-up of the instrumentation furnished under this specification as specified herein. 3.8 CALIBRATION AND START-UP SERVICES ' A. The Instrumentation and Control System Integrator's(ICSI)on-site field service technician shallbe responsible for the startup and field calibration of all instrumentation and equipment supplied herein. B. The ICSI shall supplier a trained technician for a minimum of ten(10)days in order to place the equipment in operation, calibrate the equipment, and provide training for the 1416-00 13400lnstsumeatation 13400-16 • Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION I Owner in the equipment's proper operation and maintenance. Additional days shall be provided as necessary to insure that the equipment is operating properly. C. The ICSI shall provide a certification letter that all equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations and has been calibrated to their published accuracy. Any deviations shall be promptly reported to the Engineer. I D. Upon completion of field calibration of instrumentation the technician shall place labeling inside of the equipment stating the date,name of certified calibrator, and the calibration range of each item of equipment. IE. ISA style calibration data sheets shall be provided to document calibration of each instrument. These data sheets shall be included with the O&M Manuals. I3.9 TECHNICAL SERVICES ' A. Provide supervisory service of a factory trained service engineer, specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified, for a period of not less than five(5) 8-hour days during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves,methods of installing conduit and special cable,mounting.piping,and wiring;of one of each type of Iservice, and the methods of protecting all of te equipment prior to placing it into service. B. Upon completion of equipment installation,provide services of the above service I engineer for a period of not less than ten(10) hour days for calibration and start-up of the equipment and instructing p the operating personnel. g I C. The number of days specified above does not relieve the system manufacturer of providing sufficient service to place the system in complete and satisfactory operation. ' D. System supplier to provide operation and maintenance training for Owner's personnel to ensure their adequate knowledge of use of the system. E. Training to be conducted on-site by instructors thoroughly familiar with operation of the Isystem,with training divided into three general areas as follows: F. Analog and digital hardware maintenance training: I 1. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper preventative maintenance and repair tasks associated with system maintenance. 2. For analog instrumentation,include detailed instruction of calibration and I checking along with familiarization training for basic repair and maintenance tasks that are expected to be encountered. 3. For computer hardware maintenance,include general familiarization with I . computer hardware and peripheral devices with instruction is preventative maintenance tasks associated primarily with peripheral devices. It is not intended that this course will produce trained computer maintenance technicia 4. Include detailed instruction to m atenance and:repair work associated with the I computer process.I/O sub-system. I 1416-0013400InstrumentB,ion 13400-17 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION 5. Minimum training time for this material to be eight(8)hours. G. Operator familiarization training: 1. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in the proper use of the analog and digital process control system. 2. Include instruction in the system control steps and basic interface with the computer system. 3. Provide sufficient training to Owner's operating personnel so they can respond to ' the normal tasks required for operation of the plant. 4. Minimum training time for this material to be eight(8)hours. H. Supervisor and application software training: I 1. Provide supervisory personnel with a working knowledge of all application software supplied 2. Include basic digital and computer concepts,process control concepts,database configuration,report configuration,graphic display configuration,and control l strategy development. I. Minimum training time for this material to be eight(8)hours. END OF SECTION I II 1 1 1 1 ]4]6.00I3400Instrumentation 13400-18 Z E —ENGINEERS— SECTION 13521 ' FILTER UNDERDRAINS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. The work covered by this section of specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labor, supervision,equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with furnishing and installing the gravity filter underdrains. The work shall be in accordance ' with this section of these specifications and the applicable drawings,subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1 1.21 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03600-Grout B. Section 11000-Equipment Erection ' C. Section 01640—Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment D. _ Section 13522-Filter Media E. Section 13524—Fabricated Media Baffles 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI/AWWA F101 -Contact Molded Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic,Washwater Troughs and Launders B. ANSI/AWWA F102-Matched-Die-Molded Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates C. ANSI/NSF 61 -NSF International for Drinking Water System Components D. ASTM D256-Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens in ' Plastics E. ASTM D570-Water Absorption of Plastics F. ASTM D618-Conditioning Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials for Testing G. ASTM D638-Tensile Properties of Plastics ' H. ASTM D790-Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. ASTM D2583-Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. J. ASTM E831 -Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between 22 Deg F ' and 86 Deg F. 1416-00 13521 Biter UndadmintAddenda.Docx 13521-1 Z E L �. —ENGINEERS- ' Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples I B. Submit in accordance with these Specifications, shop drawings for the filter underdrain system demonstrating compliance with these Specifications,including: 1 1. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications and engineering data defining filter tile underdrain materials, dimensions, construction, weight and flow rate versus pressure. • I 2. Layout drawing of filter box, underdrain system and air piping. 3. Manufacturer's test records from an independent hydraulic laboratory, I demonstrating the equalization of backwash flow under conditions at least equivalent to the layout for this project. 4. Structural calculations for reinforced concrete filter structure, if configuration is different than that shown on the drawings. I C. Submit installation procedure for air wash equipment including coordination of installation with filter media. I D. Submit statements from filter tile underdrain manufacturer certifying that: 1. The tile underdrain manufacturer has reviewed the Backwash Air Blower I specification Section 01640,Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment and that the specified air blower will provide adequate volume and pressure for satisfactory filter air wash. If not, state what modifications are necessary to the I air blower system to provide satisfactory filter air wash. 2. The tile underdrain manufacturer has reviewed the Filter Media specification Section 13522,Filter Media and that the specified media system will function I properly with their underdrain and air wash systems. If nod state what modifications are necessary to the filter media system to insure proper function. 3. Manufacturer to certify that all materials utilized in system are suitable for I operation in a potable water application, and bear NSF 61 Certification if in contact with water. E. Operation and Maintenance instructions. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, I Operation and Maintenance Data. F. Manufacturer's installation instructions for filter underdrain. I G. Installation procedures for air wash equipment including coordination of installation with filter media. I 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. The filter underdrain and air wash system.units shall be the standard products of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the successful production of high quality potable water filter underdrain systems for at least ten (10) years and has at I least five (5) installations in successful operation for at least five (5) years. 1416-0013621 Filter UnderdreinsAddenda.Docx 13521-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I Addendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I I ' SECTION 13521 IFILTER UNDERDRAINS B. Supplier Requirements: To ensure that all the equipment required for the installation I of the filter underdrain system is properly coordinated and will function in accordance with the intent of these Specifications, all of the equipment specified under this Section and Sections 01640, Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment and Section 13522,Filter Media will be from a single supplier in whom the responsibility Ifor the proper function of all the equipment, regardless of manufacturer, as an integrated and coordinated system is vested. The intent of this paragraph is to establish unit responsibility for coordination,operation, and guarantee for all Iequipment by one supplier. Use of the word "responsibility" relating to the filter equipment supplier is in no way intended to relieve the Contractor's ultimate responsibility for equipment installation. I . C. NSF Certification: All materials used in contact with the water and backwash air shall meet National Sanitation Foundation(NSF)Standard 61 Drinking Water System IComponents-Health Effects D. Hydraulic Demonstration: I 1. The filtermanufacturer shall,at their own facilities,if requested by the ENGINEER,set up a.test lateral run of equal length to that required by the project and provide an opportunity for the ENGINEER and/or OWNER to visit the facility I to witness a full scale demonstration of the headloss and flow distribution during backwash. 2. The test facility shall be capable of demonstrating concurrent air and water I , distribution in a submerged trough and water only distribution on a non-submerged test bench. 3. These demonstration services shall be provided by the filter manufacturer with Ireasonable notice and at no additional expense to the OWNER or ENGINEER 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING I , A. The manufacturer.will provide the product banded on skids or other suitable packaging for ease of handling and to minimize damage during shipping. I1.7 GENERAL A. All components or equipment furnished under this specification shall be new and unused. IType Double cell, center gullet filters with center washwater/effluent in each filter. Number of Filters 1 IDimensions (each Cell): Side A Side B -Cell Length, feet 35 35 -Cell Width, feet 15 15 Filter Area (each Filter) -Filter Area, Each Filter sq. feet 1050 -Total Area, All Filters, sq. feet 1050 ' 1416.0013521 FdfiyUnderdrainsAddenda.Docx 13521-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— IAddendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS B. Backwash: Provide uniform water distribution at maximum and minimum flow rates, at no greater than head loss stated. Backwash Units • Maximum Flow Rate gpm/ft2 15 Minimum Flow Rategp m/ft2 5 Maximum Head Loss inches 36 Combined Air/Water Wash Air Flow Rate scfm/ft2 4.0 Pressure Drop (Air) * psi. 5.1 Water Flow Rate gpm/ft2 5.0 C. The filter underdrain system shall be designed and installed to ensure long term stability in its operating characteristics. It shall be resistant to changes in head loss,flow uniformity,and any other effects which would in time cause loss of efficiency or effectiveness in its operation. D. The underdrain system is intended to allow for the uniform collection of filtered water 1 and uniform distribution of backwash water and air over the total area of the filter floor. E. The backwash system shall allow for separate air scouring and water backwashing and for the simultaneous use of air and water at the specified rates. F. The system shall be designed to avoid localized areas of excessive flow(maldistribution) which may cause mounding,lateral displacement,or other deleterious disturbances in the filter media. G. The filters shall consist of 12 inches of silica sand media,and 18 inches of anthracite , media. H. Design Flow Rates: The filter underdrain system shall be furnished and installed to ' perform satisfactorily and as specified when operated under the following conditions: I. Downflow of filtered water up to 10 gpm/sf. , J. Upflow of backwash air at a rate in the range of 2 to 5 scfm/sf K. up gpm/sfU flow of backwash water to 25 Upflow L. Flow Distribution: The filter underdrain system,as installed,shall provide acceptable flow uniformity. Maldistribution(MD)of air and water flows during backwash shall be as follows: 1416410 13521 Filter UnderdrainMAddenda.Docx 135214 Z E —ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS 1. Lateral Water MD: The maldistribution in a lateral 32 feet long or less shall not exceed+1-3 percent of the average gpm/sf of filter for a backwash rate of 20 gpm/sf(48.9 m/h). 2. System Air MD: Visually,the air should show a uniform pattern. 1.8 WARRANTY A. The filter underdrain furnished under these specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance against defective material,equipment, and workmanship.Upon written notice by the Engineer or the Owner of failure of any part of the system,during the guaranty period,the affected part or parts shall be repaired promptly with new parts by and at the expense of the Contractor PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Filter Underdrain and Air Wash System Manufacturers: 1. Xylem Water Solutions / F.B. Leopold (Type XA with I.M.S 200) ' 2.2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: The filter underdrain system,including anchorage,supports,etc. shall be ' designed to safely withstand loadings for the specifiedconditions. installed,Internal Loading: The filter underdrain system,when shall be designed for a net internal loading during backwash of the greater of either 1400 psf or 200 percent of the maximum pressure at maximum backwash rates. No credit shall be taken for the weight of gravel or filter media. ' C. Downward Load: The filter underdrain system shall also be designed to withstand a net downward loading of not less than 2,800 psf. ' D. Air Temperature: During backwash with air,the underdrain shall be suitable to withstand a maximum air temperature of 200°F. ' E. Uplift Certification-The underdrain manufacturer shall provide third party certification that the underdrain can withstand a minimum of 30 psi internal pressure without lifting or separating from the filter floor when properly installed with grout and no mechanical ' anchoring. 2.3 UNDERDRAIN ' A. The underdrain system for the filters shall be a dual parallel lateral whereby feeder and compensating chambers are provided within the cross section of a single block. The cross section of the underdrain-shall be where the feeder(or primary)chamber is adjacent and connected to the compensating(or secondary)chambers through a series of orifices. The 1416-00 13521 Mee UndadninsAddenda.Docx 13521-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid hem#17.268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS I orifices shall be located at four different elevations and sized to provide uniform distribution of air and water. All internal orifices shall be integrally molded to provide a I smooth bore orifice. Underdrains requiring secondary drilling procedures to install internal orifices and underdrains with circular water orifices in the primary chamber will not be considered acceptable. The primary chamber should provide at least 43 square inches of cross sectional area per block to reduce flow velocity during backwash. B. The compensating chambers shall provide the essential uniform pressure and flow distribution from the top of the blocks. The discharge flow from the top of the blocks , I into the filter bed shall be provided by approximately twenty-three dispersion orifices per square foot of filter area. The orifices shall be not less than 11/64 inch diameter to I prevent clogging and shall be recessed from the surface by approximately 1/8 inch. The top of each orifice shall be encircled by a depression approximately 3/8 inch x 3/4 inch, which shall act to prevent the gravel support media from resting directly on and thereby I blocking the dispersion orifice. C. The underdrain shall have a horizontal flat top discharge surface,so that the finished filter bottom is essentially flat,with above stated dispersion orifices for uniform energy intensity of air and water coverage which direct flow vertically for effective penetration and cleaning of the media. D. Dual water recovery channels with return holes shall be incorporated into the top of the I underdrain block to ensure uniform and continuous air flow from the top deck orifices and greater air stability. Underdrains without a water recovery channel will not be I considered acceptable. E. The secondary chambers of the underdrain shall have baffles sized and located to provide I effective air control and to reduce level sensitivity. Underdrains without baffles will not be considered acceptable. F. Materials And Construction: 1. Material: The individual blocks used in the system shall be of impervious high strength, completely corrosion-resistant,high-density polyethylene(HDPE) I material. The blocks shall be resistant to erosion and corrosion and have uniform smooth surfaces. 2. Dimensions: The block size and weight shall permit ease of handling and I installation. The block nominal dimensions shall be 8.25 inches high by 11 inches wide by 48 inches long. The weight of the block shall be approximately 24.5 pounds. 3. Block Geometry: The blocks shall be essentially rectangular in shape with dispersion orifices located in the top flat surface. The blocks shall have ridges and pockets for structural rigidity. The sides of the block shall have grout lock-in lugs I to key into surrounding grout so that the walls can bond with the grout.The bottom of the block shall have integral grout pockets located at each end. 4. Lateral Construction: The blocks shall be arranged end-to-end and mechanically joined to form continuous underdrain laterals approximately equivalent to the I 141600 13521 Fiber Underdrains Addends.Docx 13521-6 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I Addendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 13521 ' FILTER UNDERDRAINS length of the filter cell. The joints shall be gasketed,bell and spigot type with ' internal alignment tabs for proper joint alignment,and be air and water-tight. Joints shall be of snap-lock type so that the blocks are joined with integral interlocking snap lugs and lug receptors for ease of assembly and installation. 5. I.M.S®200 media retainer: The I.M.S®200 media retainer shall be made of thermoplastic through the injection molded process and sealed to the top of the underdrain. The opening size shall be sufficient to prevent the media from ' obstructing or passing through the underdrain.Vertical baffles shall be located on the bottom side of the media retainer to"compartmentalize"the fluid to keep it from moving horizontally along the bottom side of the media retainer thus ensuring each pattern of slots in the media retainer receives equal quantities of air and or water during the backwash cycle.The I.M.S 414 200 media retainer shall replace the need for support gravel and shall not increase the underdrain height by more than 1 1/4 inch.The cap shall be attached and sealed to the underdrain at the ' factory using Type 316 stainless steel self-tapping screws and butyl sealant. 6. Grout Retainer: Grout retaining strips for bridging flumes shall be of high-impact polystyrene or HDPE and properly keyed to fit the underdrain blocks to allow adjustment of lateral center-to-center distance without difficulty. Retaining strips shall be supplied by the filter manufacturer. 2.4 AIR HEADER A. General: The air distribution system shall be generally comprised of a corrosion resistant ' header specially calibrated to evenly distribute air flow via properly located riser pipes to each underdrain lateral. Sufficient relative velocities shall be maintained in both the header and riser pipes to insure proper distribution of air. B. Material: The air header piping shall be Sch. 5,type 304 stainless steel. The anchors and hardware for anchoring the air header shall be type 18-8 stainless steel. 1 2.5 GROUT ' A. Grout shall be standard cement grout conforming to the requirements of Section 03600, Grout. Do not use non-shrink grout. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine items immediately prior to installation B. Factory trained manufacturer's representative to repair or replace damaged items as ' directed by Engineer,at no additional cost to the Owner. ' 1416-00 13521 Fiber UndaMninJAddenda.Docx 13521-7 Z E L ---ENGINEERS— 1 Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS 3.2 UNDERDRA1N INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall install the filter underdrain system in strict accordance with: (1)the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and the manufacturer's installation drawings; (2)the oral and written directions provided by the manufacturer's technical representative who is supervising and observing the WORK;and(3)any additional requirements specified herein. B. Floor Preparation: - I 1. Care shall be exercised in preparing the filter floor slab and in setting the anchors to assure proper alignment and elevation. Steel anchor rods shall be furnished by the filter manufacturer and set in thefloor slab on both sides of the distribution I flume in accordance with the drawing provided. The floor slab shall be screened into a flat level plane and be free of protrusions and depressions. 2. DO NOT PAINT the floor or wall area where it will come in contact with the grout surrounding the underdrain. The filter floor and filter wall extending thirteen(13) inches up from the filter floor is not to be painted. C. Underdrain Lateral Installation: I The underdrain laterals shall be set in relatively level rows on a bed of grout over the filter floor slab. Plates for closing the ends of each row of blocks shall be furnished by the filter manufacturer and installed by the CONTRACTOR. After joining, aligning and setting the blocks,and the bed grout is set-up,as soon as possible,all spaces between the rows of blocks and walls shall be filled with grout so that the entire bed is totally sealed and held firmly in place. Once all grouting is complete,the grout shall be allowed to cure for at least 3 full days before any functional testing. I D. Cleaning and Protection During Installation,Testing,and Startup: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions recommended by the underdrain manufacturer or specified herein to ensure that the filter underdrain system and any piping communicating therewith is completely clean and free of any debris,dirt,or other foreign materials which could clog the underdrain system or interfere with flow. Backwash air and water piping shall be thoroughly flushed clean. All loose debris and dirt within the filter cell and flume shall be removed by brooming down and vacuuming. Care shall be taken to keep grout from being deposited anywhere where it could interfere with flow. Any grout so deposited shall be removed. As installation progresses,partially completed portions of the WORK shall be protected with heavy visqueen or other suitable material to maintain the cleanliness of the underdrain system. Such protection shall be maintained until the support gravel is installed. 2. Any time the underdrain laterals are to be used as a work surface,the underdrain block shall be overlaid with 1/2 inch minimum plywood sheeting where necessary, to distribute the load of yard buckets,wheel barrows,ladders,scaffolds,etc.,to prevent damage to the underdrain. 1416-0013521 Siker UnderdranisAddenda.Docx • 13521-8 Z E L --ENGINEERS-- I Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 1 SECTION 13521 FILTER UNDERDRAINS 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Underdrain Lateral Flow Distribution Test: 1. The filter underdrain system in each filter cell shall be given a series of visual, qualitative, flow distribution tests to verify that orifices are not clogged with debris and that flow distribution is uniform. These tests shall be performed before the filter media is placed. ' 2. During each test,the underdrain laterals shall be visually inspected for uniform distribution of air and water and for any signs of quiescent zones and excessive surface turbulence. ' 13. Manufacturers Field Services: 1. Underdrain supplier to provide factory-trained manufacturer's representative for a minimum of 2 trips at 2 days each to supervise erection and testing of troughs, inspect completed installation, and place in operation. 2. Have manufacturer's representative check and approve installation before initial ' operation. 3. Have manufacturer's representative instruct plant personnel on care and maintenance of troughs and accessories. 4. Underdrain supplier to furnish manufacturer's installation certificate in accordance with these Specifications. • END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 14160413321FdterUnde dwinsAddenda.Docx 13521-9 Z E L —ENGINEERS-- ' Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 13522 FILTER MEDIA ' PART I. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labor, supervision, equipment and materials,and performing all operations in connection with the installation of the filter media,in accordance with ibissection of the specifications and the applicable plans, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 13521 -Filter Underdrains ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AWWA B100-Granular Filter Media ' B. ANSI/NSF 61 -NSF International for Drinking Water System Components C. AWWA 653-87—Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. The media submittal and technical information will be provided and approved by a licensed engineer regularly employed by the filter manufacturer. The engineer shall have at least 15 years experience in water treatment. All submittal shall include the following information as a minimum: ' 1. Supplier's Name 2. Resume of Engineer Providing Submittal 3. Certification that media meets the requirements of AWWA B 100 4. NSF Certification ' 5. Gradation of Each Media Type 6. Date of Sampling/Lot Number 7. Samples of Each Media Type 8. Representative Sample Analysis,(i.e. effective size,uniformity coefficient, specific gravity, grain size distribution curve, acid solubility and MOH hardness for Anthracite only.) ' 9. Material Quantities 10. Diagram with Type of Material and Depth of Each 11. Estimated Shipping Schedule ' 12. Media Loading Procedure 13. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWWA B100. 1416-0013522 Filter Media 13522-1 Z E L _ENGINEERS -- I SECTION 13522 FILTER MEDIA 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The filter media shall be the standard products of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the successful production of high quality media o f this type for at least five(5) years and has at least five (5) installations in successful operation for at least five (5) years B. Supplier Requirements: To ensure that all the material required for the installation of the media system is properly coordinated and will function in accordance with the intent of these Specifications, all of the equipment specified under this Section and Sections 11374,Packaged Rotary Blowers and Section 13521, Filter Underdrains will be from a single supplier in whom the responsibility for the proper function of all the 1 equipment,regardless of manufacturer, as an integrated and coordinated system is vested. The intent of this paragraph is to establish unit responsibility for coordination, operation, and guarantee for all materials and equipment by one supplier. Use of the word"responsibility"relating to the filter equipment supplier is in no way intended to relieve the Contractor's ultimate responsibility for equipment installation. ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Media materials will not be shipped until the submittal is approved by the Owner. Approval of the submittal,including the Quality Control Manual,samples and independent testing, shall constitute approval to ship the media. B. All filter media will be shipped in"semi-bulk" containers having lifting loops and bottom discharge spout,weighing approximately 2,000-4,000 pounds each. C. Delivery of"bulk" shipments will not be permitted unless the CONTRACTOR can demonstrate that the materials can be handled and stored without contamination D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the shipment of supplies of materials and equipment specified herein. Coordination will be required during demolition, construction,start-up, and/or testing. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide storage space for gravel and filter media and protect it ' from exposure to sunlight if stored for more than two weeks. Paper bags(if used)shall be protected from moisture at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER MEDIA ' A. Filter sand shall be composed of hard, durable clean siliceous particles,free of all mica with an average specific gravity of 2.6(+/-.05) and shall be in strict accordance with AWWA B100, and have an effective size of 0.45—0.55 mm, and a uniformity coefficient of 1.40 or less,for a finished depth after backwashing and scraping and removal of fines and debris of 12 inches.A 1/2-inch skimming allowance shall be provided. 1416-00 11522 Filter Media 13522-2 ZE —ENGINEERSRS — 1 1 SECTION 13522 FILTER MEDIA B. Filter anthracite shall be composed of specially selected and graded hard, durable anthracite coal particles. The anthracite shall be composed entirely of deep mined material: A quality control manual shall be included to show the source of the material and the quality of the material produced. The anthracite shall have an average specific ' gravity of 1.60 (+/-.05)with a hardness(MOH scale)of 2.7 or more and shall be essentially free of iron, clay, shale, extraneous dirt,and excessive dust with moisture less than 4.0 percent as shipped. The anthracite shall be in accordance with AWWA B100, ' and have an effective size of 0.95— 1.05 mm, and a uniformity coefficient of 1.40 or less for a finished depth after backwashing and scraping and removal of fines and debris of 2 inches. An average skimming allowance of+/- 1"shall be provided. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 MEDIA INSTALLATION A. Marks shall be placed on the side of the filter designating the top elevation of each layer. B. Carefully place each layer so as not to disturb the previous layers. C. Complete the installation of each layer before the next layer above is started. Do not stand or walk directly upon the filter materials. Workers must stand or walk on boards which will sustain their weight without displacing the gravel and media. D. Measure depth of each layer of media after it has been backwashed and skimmed as ' recommended by the filter equipment manufacturer. E. Clean the filter tanks before any media is placed and keep them clean throughout the placing operation. F. Filter Sand and Filter Anthracite: Place the filter sand and filter anthracite in the bed in ' the order of their respective specific gravities. Place and level the filter sand first. Then backwash the bed a minimum of three times, and remove the surface fines by scraping as required to the correct elevation. Place the filter anthracite and backwash the bed three ' times, and remove the surface fines by scraping as required to the correct elevation. 3.2 DISINFECTION After all work is completed and before the filter is placed in service, the entire filter and associated piping shall be disinfected by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the procedure specified in AWWA 653-87, "Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants". 3.3 FIELDQ UALITY CONTROL I A. Manufacturers Field Services: 1. Media supplier shall provide services of an experienced qualified technician to continuously supervise installation of media systems. After installation is 7416-0013522 lifter Media 13522-3 .. ZEL . ' —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 13522 FILTER MEDIAI complete,have supplier certify that media was installed in a proper manner, meets gradation requirements, and is approved by them. I 2. Submit supplier's certificate stating media was installed in accordance with Specifications,meets graduation requirements, and is approved by them. END OF SECTIONI ' 1 I I i 1 I I I I i 1416.00 13522 Filter Media 13522-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— ' I SECTION 13523 BAFFLED FILTER WASHWATER TROUGHS ' PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES This section includes Baffled Filter Washwater Troughs. IA. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 03600 - Grout B. Section 11000 -Equipment Erection I1.3 GUARANTY I A. The equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed for a period of five years from the date of final acceptance against faulty design, defective materials and inferior workmanship. Faulty design includes any visible oscillations caused by water flowing over or through the baffles. The Manufacturer shall immediately, upon written notice, I make necessary repairs to or replacement of materials and equipment that develops defects or fails within this period (Per Addendum No. 1) I1.4 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop Drawings: The plans show the extent and general arrangement of the equipment I and may be modified as required to suit the equipment furnished, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Submit the following descriptive literature and drawings for all equipment furnished under this section of the specifications: I 1. Critical dimensions,jointing and connections, fasteners, and anchors, 2. Materials of Construction 3. Sizes, spacing,and locations of structural components,connectors, attachments, I 4. adjustments, openings,and fasteners, Support System Design Calculations, and 5. Any other pertinent data. IC. Operation and Maintenance instructions. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. ID. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Troughs shall be suitably packaged to avoid damage during handling and shipment. I Should it be necessary to store product prior to installation,precautions should be taken. to prevent warpage or distortion. I 1416-00 13523 Baffled Filter Washwater Troughs Doc 13523-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- SECTION 13523 1 BAFFLED FILTER WASHWATER TROUGHS B. Troughs shall be stored on a flat place and adequately supported on wooden support members to evenly distribute weight of troughs. When stored more than one(1)high, succeeding items should be stored level and evenly supported by blocks or spacers. 1.6 GENERAL A. All components or equipment furnished under this specification shall be new and unused. B. The equipment furnished under this section of the specifications shall be standard products in regular production by manufacturers who are regularly engaged in the production of equipment of this type, and who have produced such units that have been in satisfactory and successful water works operation for a period of at least five years. ' C. The washwater troughs shall be as described in the contract plans and specifications. Trough carry off capacity shall be 2,800 gpm with a freeboard of at least 2 inches. D. Loadings -The troughs shall be designed to support,within stress and deflection limitation,the following loadings: 1. Gravity Load-Vertical load down shall include the unbuoyed weight of the trough and any attachments,such as weirs and spreaders,together with the weight of water to fill the trough. Any additional loads which may be imposed, such as surface washers and piping, shall also be included. 2. Buoyant Load-The buoyant load shall act vertically upward if the filter cell is filled from below with the trough empty. The magnitude is equal to the weight of water displaced by the trough(ignoring the submerged weight of the trough ' materials). 3. Lateral Load-Loads acting against the trough side walls;specifically,those induced by differential water levels on either side of the trough walls. The , maximum possible differential,existing when the trough is empty and the tank is full,or when the trough is full and when the tank is empty, shall be used when calculating deflection, fiber stress, etc. 4. Backwashing Load-Vertical load down during cell backwash shall include the weight of the trough and any attachments, such as weirs and spreaders(ignoring buoyancy due to 2" lower inside water depth). ' E. Torsional Stability-The trough system shall be designed to resist torsional oscillations induced by the flow of water over trough edges. Any or all of the following trough stabilization techniques shall be considered. 1. Trough-to-trough stabilization 2. Torsional stiffness 3. Support spacing and rigidity 4. Internal baffles and/or flow straighteners F. Deflection Under Load-Maximum vertical deflection under backwashing load shall not ' exceed L/1000 (where "L"is the unsupported trough length in inches). Deflection shall be measured at midpoint between trough supports. Maximum trough side-wall horizontal deflection shall not exceed D/100 (where "D" is the inside trough depth). I 13523-2 IAlfi•0073523Haf77edFi7taNesbwaterTroughs —ENGINEERS— ' 1 SECTION 13523 BAFFLED FILTER WASHWATER TROUGHS I G. Thermal E par sianiContraetion-The troughs shall.be designed to acco unodate a thermally induced expansion(contraction)of 1/8 ittch(3.2 mm)per 20 feet(6,1 in) length of trough over temperature range of 10,°F(-12°C)to 100°F(38°C),without exceeding the deflection or strain limitations set forth in the preceding sections. IPART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements,manufacturers offering products I which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Xylem,Inc.—Zelienople,PA(Leopold Trough Guard). 2. WesTech Engineering- Salt Lake City,UT(General Filter ESSD I Washtroughs). 3. Approved Equal WASHTROUGHS • 12.2 A. The entire troughalon with all spreaders,hangers, support rods, and appurtenant items such as fasteners or weirs shall be Type 304/304L stainless steel. B. A gasketed wall plate shall be provided on the trough discharge designed to be bolted into the existing concrete gullet wall. C. Trough shape shall have a round or polygonal bottom. Flat bottom troughs are not acceptable. I2.3 MEDIA BAFFLES Each washtrough shall be provided with media separator baffles fles to prevent loss of media IA. during combined air and water backwash. A double baffle design with plastic localized velocity d csipati n devices included between the upper and lower baffles shall,be used: Baffles shall be attached to the basin walls and to the wash troughs using stainless steel I bolts and supports.The baffles shall be designed to resist oscillations caused by flow of water over the trough edges. Baffle to baffle and trough to baffle stabilizers shall be furnished as required by the manufacturer. The baffle system along with all spreaders, Ihangers, support rods and appurtenant structural items shall be Type 304 stainless steel. B. Baffle space shall include HDPE tube settlers for media loss prevention. IPART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine items immediately prior to installation I B. Factory trained manufacturer's representative to repair or replace damaged items as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. I 1416-00 13523 Baffled Mar Washwater Troughs 13523-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 13523 BAFFLED FILTER WASHWATER TROUGHS 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install,and assemble in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain weir edges level and straight with not more than 1/8 inch in variation from level or horizontal alignment throughout the length of theassembly. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Site Tests: Fill settling basin with water to top of troughs. Check vertical and horizontal conformance with Specifications ' B. Manufacturers Field Services: 1. Trough supplier to provide factory-trained manufacturer's representative for a minimum of 1 trips at 3 days each to supervise erection and testing of troughs, ' inspect completed installation, and place in operation. 2. Have manufacturer's representative check and approve installation before initial operation. 3. After each; ,site test,have manufacturer's representative make all adjustments required to have troughs conform to Specification tolerances under all operating conditions. 4. Have manufacturer's representative instruct plant personnel on care and maintenance of troughs and accessories. 5. Trough supplier to furnish manufacturer's installation certificate in accordance with these Specifications. i END OF SECTION I I 1 I I 1416-00]3523 Baffled13523-4 ZGINEEL I Filter Weshwster Troughs I ' SECTION 13524 FABRICATED MEDIA BAFFLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes Fabricated Media Baffles for installation on filter washwater troughs. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 11000 -Equipment Erection 1.3 GUARANTY A. The equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed foraP offive o ave Years from the date of final acceptance against faulty design, defective materials and inferior workmanship. Faulty design includes any visible oscillations caused by water flowing over or through the baffles. The Manufacturer shall immediately, upon written notice, make necessary repairs to or replacement of materials and equipment that develops defects or fails within this period. (Per Addendum No 1) 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples ' B. Shop Drawings: The plans show the extent and general arrangement of the equipment and may be modified as required to suit the equipment furnished, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Submit the following descriptive literature and drawings for all ' 1.equipment furnished under this section of the specifications: Critical dimensions,jointing and connections, fasteners, and anchors, 2. Materials of Construction ' 3. Sizes, spacing,and locations of structural components,connectors, attachments, adjustments,openings,and fasteners, 4. Support System Design Calculations,and ' 5. Any other pertinent data. C. Operation and Maintenance instructions. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, ' Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Manufacturer's installation instructions. ' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Baffles shall be suitably packaged to avoid damage during handling and shipment. Should it be necessary to store product prior to installation,precautions should be taken to prevent warpage or distortion. 1 1416-00 13524 Fabricated Media Baffles Doc 13524-1 1 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS— A H SECTION 13524 A 1 FABRICATED MEDIA BAFFLES B. Baffles shall be stored on a flat place and adequately supported on wooden support members to evenly distribute weight of baffles. When stored more than one(1)high, succeeding items should be stored level and evenly supported by blocks or spacers. 1.6 GENERAL , A. All components or equipment furnished under this specification shall be new and unused. B. The equipment furnished under this section of the specifications shall be standard ' products in regular production by manufacturers who are regularly engaged in the production of equipment of this type, and who have produced such units that have been in satisfactory and successful water works operation for a period of at least five years. 1 C. The media baffles shall be designed for installation on fiberglass filter troughs of the type shown on the plans. The baffles shall be designed to prevent media loss during filter backwash operations and adaptable for installation on new or existing concrete, steel or fiberglass washwater troughs. D. Torsional Stability-The baffle system shall be designed to resist torsional oscillations : induced by the flow of water over trough edges. Any or all of the following trough stabilization techniques shall be considered. 1. Trough-to-trough stabilization 2. Torsional stiffness 3. Support spacing and rigidity 4. Internal baffles and/or flow straighteners E. Thermal Expansion/Contraction-The baffles shall be designed to accommodate a thermally induced expansion(contraction)of 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)per 20 feet length of , trough over temperature range of 10°F to 100°F. PART 2 PRODUCTS . 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements,manufacturers offering products , which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Xylem, Inc.—Zelienople,PA(Leopold Trough Guard). 2. WesTech Engineering- Salt Lake City,UT (General Filter ESSD). 3. Approved Equal 2.2 FABRICATED MEDIA BAFFLES 1 A. The entire baffle structure along with all spreaders,hangers,support rods, and appurtenant items such as fasteners or spacers shall be Type 304/304L stainless steel. The system shall incorporate a double baffle design. Baffles shall be attached to the basin walls and to the wash troughs using stainless steel bolts and supports. The baffles shall be designed to resist oscillations caused by flow of water over the trough edges. 1 1416-001M24Fabricated Media Baffles 13524-2 Z E L -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 13524 I FABRICATED MEDIA BAFFLES Baffle to baffle and trough to baffle stabilizers shall be furnished as required by the Imanufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine items immediately prior to installation B. Factory trained manufacturer's representative to repair or replace p p p e damaged items as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION IA. Install and assemble in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain edges level and straight with not more than 1/8 inch in variation from level or horizontal alignment throughout the length of the assembly. I 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Site Tests: Fill settling basin with water to top of troughs. Check vertical and horizontal conformance with Specifications ' B. Manufacturers Field Services: 1. Baffle supplier to provide factory-trained manufacturer's representative p for a minimum of 1 trip at 3 days each to supervise erection and testing of baffles, I 2. inspect completed installation, and place in operation. Have manufacturer's representative check and approve installation before initial operation. 3. After each site test, have manufacturer's representative make all adjustments I required to have troughs conform to Specification tolerances under all operating conditions. I 4. Have manufacturer's representative instruct plant personnel on care and maintenance of troughs and accessories. 5. Trough supplier to furnish manufacturer's installation certificate in accordance with these Specifications. IEND OF SECTION I I I 1416-00 13524 Fabricated Media Baffles 13 524-3 Z E I.. —ENGINEERS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping complete with all fittings,jointing materials,hangers, supports, anchors and necessary appurtenances for: ' 1. Wrought metal piping 2. Drainage piping 3. Waste and vent piping 4. Hot and cold building water supply piping 5. Compressed air piping 6. Other miscellaneous piping 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200-Excavation,Filling And Backfilling ' B. Section 15062-Ductile Iron Pipe ' C. Section 15100-Valves, Cocks and Hydrants D. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe and Flanges and Flanged Fittings B. ANSI B16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings C. ANSI B16.5 -Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings D. ANSI B16.9-Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings ' E. ANSI B16.11 -Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded F. ANSI B16.12-Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings G. ANSI B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings H. ANSI B 16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings I. ANSI B16.24-Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings J. ANSI B 16.26- Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes . K. ANSI B1.20.1 -Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch 1416-0D 15050 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 150604 Z E L ' —ENCaINEER8— 1 I SECTION 1.5060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I L. ANSI B31.1.1 -Power and Process Piping Package Hot-Dipped,ASTM A53 -Pipe, Steel,Black and Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless 1 N. ASTM A74 -Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings I O. ASTM A139-Electric-Fusion(Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe(NPS 4 and Over) P. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 psi Tensile Strength I Q. ASTM A312- Seamless,Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes 1 R. ASTM B32-Solder Metal S. ASTM B75 -Seamless Copper Tube I T. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube I U. ASTM B280- Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service 1 V. ASTM B813 -Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube W. ASTM C553 -Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial I Applications X. ASTM C564-Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings , Y. ASTM D1330 Rubber Sheet Gaskets Z. ASTM D1785 -Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,and 120 1 AA. ASTM D2464-Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 BB. ASTM D2467 Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 . 1 Vin y CC. AWWA C200- 12 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inch(150 Mm)and Larger I DD. CISPI 301 -Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings for sanitary and storm drain,waste, and vent piping applications EE. FS WW-U-531 -Unions,Malleable Iron or Steel I 1 1416-00 15060 Pipe and Pipe Frttm15060-2 ZEL gs —ENGINEERS— I I I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples IB. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Exterior yard piping drawings(minimum scale 1 inch equals 10 feet)with Iinformation including: 1) Dimensions of piping lengths 2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings I 3) Bury depth requirements 4) Details of fittings,tapping locations,thrust blocks,restrained joint segments,harnessed joint segments,hydrants, and related I appurtenances 5) Designated valve or gate tag numbers,manhole numbers, instrument tag numbers,pipe and line numbers I b. 6) Line slopes and vents Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 inch equals 1 foot)with information including: Ii) Dimensions of piping and end connections 2) Invert or centerline dimensions 3) Location and type of pipe supports and anchors I 4) Locations of valves and valve operator type 5) Details of fittings,tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible expansion joints, connections to equipment and related I 6) appurtenances Valve and equipment tag numbers and instrument tag numbers c. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping 1 C. Product Data: Sufficient data to verify compliance with the specifications: 1. Technical product data on piping and piping appurtenances I D. Test Reports: 1. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems 2. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS IA. In accordance with all municipal codes and ordinances,laws and regulations of the state B. In case of apparent conflict, state and local requirements govern over these specifications IC. In absence of state and local regulations,National Plumbing Code applies D. Gas and fuel oil piping: Per National Fire Protection Association I 7416.0P 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-3 Z E L I —ENGINEERS— i I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGSI PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 STEEL PIPE: GALVANIZED OR BLACK AS SCHEDULED A. Standard weight: ASTM A53, standard weight(Schedule 40) III B. Extra strong pipe: Seamless ASTM A53 Types, Grade A extra strong(Schedule 80) C. Lightweight: ASTM A139,AWWA C200: ; I ghtwei gh 1. Wall thickness: 10 gage, 0.135 inch 2. Outside diameter a. 6 inch size: 6-5/8 inch b. 8 inch size: 8-5/8 inch 1) Flanges: Steel plate at least 1/4 inch thick,ANSI B16.1 125 lb drilling and diam I D. Nipples: CS5, extra strong(Schedule 80); close nipples permitted only by special authorization in each case ; , E. Fittings: I 1. Malleable iron: ANSI B16.3: a. Ungalvanized pipe: Type I,ungalvanized b. Galvanized pipe: Type II, galvanized 2. Drainage: ANSI 1316.12 Schedule 80, I 3. Forged Steel: Schedule 40,2,000 lb for standard weight pipe; 3,000 lb for extra strong pipe: a. Socket welding: ANSI B16.11;Bonneyrane,Porter, or equal b. Threaded: Bonney,Crane,Porter,or equalI 4. Flanged: Cast iron, 125 lb,ANSI B16.1 5. Welding: ANSI B16.9 ' 6. Compression: Dresser"165 Plus-temp Couplings,"with restraining.rings,Telsco "Series 700 Clamp Style Fittings,"with stainless steel clamp rings,or equal 7, Unions: a. Malleable iron: FS WW-U-531, Class 2: 1) Ungalvanized pipe: Type A,ungalvanized 2) Galvanized pipe: Type B,galvanized b. Forged steel: Tongue and groove flange with non-metallic gaskets type 8. Lightweight: To match pipe with flange diameter and drilling to match I ANSI B16.1 125 lb 9. Flanges: ANSI.B16.1, 125 lb or ANSA 1316.5, 150 lb 10. Flange bolts and nuts: ASTM A307,length such that after installation bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch beyond outer face of nut tit e 1/8 inch-tluek 11. Flange gaskets: ASTM D1330,Grade I;red rubber,ring type, I 12. Mechanical uplings: Dresser"Style 38," Smith-Blair"Type 411;"or equal 13. Grooved couplings: Mil-C-10387; Gustin-Bacon Gruvagrip Series 100," Victaulic"Style 77," or equal " ig76.D61506CPipe end Pipe Finings 15060—r,. ZEL —ENGINEERS— , I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I 14. Expansion joints: a. 2-1/2 inch and smaller: Flexonics "Model H Expansion Compensation," or equal I b. 3 inch and larger: Flanged and with stainless steel bellows, "Flexonics Free Flexing Expansion Joint," or equal I2.2 COPPER TUBING A. Water tubing: ASTM B88 I B. Instrument tubing: 1. Material: ASTM B75 or B280,hard-drawn,with polyethylene or PVC jacket except where buried 1 2. Minimum wall thickness: a. 1/4 inch O.D.: 0.030 inch b. 3/8 inch O.D.: 0.032 inch I c. 1/2 inch O.D.: 0.032 inch d. 3/4 inch O.D.: 0.040 inch e. Minimum PVC jacket thickness: 0.032 inch IC. Fittings: 1. Flared: ANSI B16.26 2. Solder: ANSI B16.18 or B16.22 1 3. Compression: Crawford"Swagelok,"Hoke "Gryolok," Imperial "Hi-Seal," .Paker4ia €ii n"CPI,"Weatherhead"Self Align,"or equal 4. Insulating: Ia. Threaded: PSI "Delrin Insulating Couplings,"Vallet "V-Line Insulating Couplings,"or equal b. Flanged: Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions," PSI Type E Flange IInsulation," or equal , D. Solder: Solid wire,ASTM B32,Alloy Grade 50A(50-50) E. Soldering flux: Paste Type,ASTM B32,Type I, Form A I F. Brazing filler metal: BCuP-5; Engelhard "Silvaloy 15," Goldsmith "gb-15,"Handy and Hardman "Sil-Foss,"or equal IG. Brazing flux: Paste Type,ASTM B813,Type B H. Flanges: Cast bronze, 150 lb,brazed joints,ANSI B16.24 II. Flange bolts and nuts: As specified for steel pipe J. Flange gaskets: As specified for steel pipe, except full face IK. Expansion joints: Flexonics "Model HB Expansion Compensators,"Mercer, or equal I 1416.00 15060 Pipe end Pipe Fillings 15060-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- SECTION 15060 I PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 2.3 PVC PIPE I A. Water service: Ethyl"Visueen Bell: Ring PBC Pipe,"Johns-Manville."Ring-Tite PVC Pipe ,11 or equal, 160 psi pressure rating, SDR26;with NSF International Seal B. Chemical service: I 1. Pipe: ASTM D1785,Schedule 80,PVC 1120,with.NSF International Seal 2. Fittings: ASTM D2464 o r D2 67,PVC I;by pipe manufacturer or by Celanese, Chemtrol,or equal 3. Flanges: Diameter and drilling per ANSI B16.5, 150 1. Cede 4. Flange belts>and Huta �. 'IA;307, B, galvanized,install such that bolts project 1/8 to 318,inch beyond the outer'face of the nut 5. Flange gaskets: Full face,1/8 inch eek,neoprene or plasticized PVC 6. Expansion joints: Belmont"Style 3915,"Resistoflex"Style R6905"molded , expansion joint,or equal 7. Grooved couplings: Gustin-Bacon "Gruvagrip Series 100," Victaulic"Style 78," or equal 2.4 CHEMICAL HOSE A. Extruded styrene-butadiene(SBR), '/ inch minimum thickness with a with 2plys of I textile reinforcement and SBR cover. Hose shall be suitable for use powdered activated carbon slurry. Working pressure rating of hose shall be not less than 600 psi. Hose shall be provided in minimum lengths of 100 feet for long runs. 1 B. Hose ends shall be factory fitted with internally expanded threaded couplings.. 2.5 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING I A. Tubing: AISI Type 304, 316(18-8 Mo), Schedule 10 "" erulok"Tube Turns"Sokend Fittings," Potts I B. Fittings: Parker-Hannifin ��ta�iiless Steel F , "Spedline Tip Insert Flange,or equal pTurns "224 Epoxy Adhesive,"Parker-Hannifin, or equal I CJoint adhesive: Tube 2.6 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE I A. Where permitted by local ct des,provide.:either hubless cast iron soil pipe or centrifugally cast service weight soil pipe,Contractor's option I B. Extra heavy: ASTM A74,extra-heavy C. Service weight: ASTM A74, service weight I D. Hubless: CISPI 301 L. 1416-00 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittivgs 15060-6 Z E—ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I E. Jointing material: 1. Packing: Hooven&Allison "Sure Seal White Oakum," Sealite "White Oakum Caulking Yarn 110," or equal I2. Rubber gaskets,where permitted by local codes: ASTM C564 2.7 PIPE INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES IA. Piping: ASTM C553, 1 inch thick; glass fiber, with flame retardant vapor barrier jacket B. Watertight and dust-tight pipe sleeves: O-Z Electrical Manufacturing Company, IIncorporated C. Modular,rubber, sealing elements: Thunder Line Corporation, "Link Seal,"or equal ID. Thread tape: Teflon; John Crane"Thread Tape," Garlock "Plasti-Thread,"Hoke"EZ Seal," or equal IE. Sealant: Thiokol or urethane as specified in caulking section F. Snubbers: Operating and Maintenance Specialties "Ray Snubbers," Ashcroft I "Series 1112"or equal G. Gauge cocks: Bronze,tee handle; Lunkenheimer 1178,Powell 915, or equal IH. Protective coatings: 1. Plastic-coated pipe: 3M "Scotchkote," Republic "X-Tru-Coat," or equal I 2. Tape wrap: Protector Wrap "200," Tapecoat"CT,"or equal 3. Coal tar coating: MIL-C-18480; Koppers "50 Bitumastic," Porter "Tarmastic 101,"Tnemec"476 Super Tnemecol," or equal II. Chlorine Tank Car Unloading Connection: Special flanged tubing assembly conforming to materials and details on Drawing No. 118, the Chlorine Institute, Inc: IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION IA. Install as specified and indicated on Drawing I B. Provide a shutoff valve and union at the water, gas, and air supply connections to each fixture and unit of equipment,whether shown on the Drawings or not C. Provide a union within 2 feet of each threaded end valve unless other means for easy Iremoval of the valve are available D. Provide unions where required for equipment removal,indicated on the Drawing or I specified I 1416-00 35060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS` ' E. Do not install piping to obstruct openings and passageways F. Cut pipe to measurement taken at the site,not from the Drawings G. Layout piping to provide for expansion and contraction H. Provide taps for pressure gauge connections with a nipple, snubber, and gauge cock I. Providep expansion joints at not greater than 60 feet intervals in exposed or submerged , PVC piping J. Securely anchor piping at the midpoints between expansion joints , K. "Snake"buried PVC into trench and keep as cool as possible during installation , L. Keep shaded and cover with backfill immediately after installation M. Provide a shutoff valve and union on gas supply lines immediately inside each building N. Hold pipes free of contact with building construction so that noise will not be transmitted after pipe expansion O. Provide air supply piping with sectionalizing valves and valved air inlet connections to isolate portions of system for periodic testing P. Grade all air piping to points of drainage;provide driplegs on drain valves at drainage points Q. Size air piping as follows: Service , _ Min. Size Air Signal 1/4 inch OD Power Air 1/2 inch OD Air Supply 1/2 inch OD Bubbler Droplines 3/4 inch Buried Piping 3/4 inch IL Arrange water supply piping(within buildings) and hot water heating system piping for complete drainage S. Uniformly grade all piping serving metering equipment and provide complete venting to eliminate air traps T. Properly grade steam andcondensate piping to drip pockets, traps, and blowoff valves, and other points of drainage collection U. Pipe stuffing box leakage from water sealed pumps to nearest point of drainage 111 ZEL I416-0015060 Pipe and Pipe Rifts 15060-8 —ENGINEERS— , I - I - . ______ SECTION 15060 PIPE`AND PIPE FITTINGS I V. Provide insulating fittings in all piping except air and gas piping wherever copper tubing or fittings are connected to iron or steel pipe or fittings I W. Drainage piping; 1. Conform,in general,to locations indicated on Drawings 2. Slope horizontal soil and waste pipes at 1 f4 inch per foot where possible,but I never less than 1/8 inch per foot 3. Provide cleanouts in finished floors or in partition walls with a nickel-bronze access cover and frame,with securing screw v 4. Install bell-ups flush with floor surface I5. Lay on uniformly descending grades 6. Handle and store properly pipe with premolded joints . 7. Properly lubricated joints before installation I3.2 JOINTS IA. Make pipe joints carefully and neatly B. Threaded: I1. ANSI B1.20.1,NPT fully and cleanly cut with sharp dies 2. No more than 3 threads exposed after installation 3. Ream pipe ends after threading to remove burrs 4. Apply thread tape:_to joints in all plastic Arid stainless steel piping I5. Apply thread tape or joint compound to joints in otherpiping 6. Apply teflon thread tape or litharge and glycerin paste to joints in steel piping for I chlorine service C. Compression: 1. Cut pipe ends squarely,remove burrs I2. Clean contact surfaces With steel wool D. Flared: I1. Cut tubing ends:squarely,remove burrs 2. Scratches or grooves in flared ends are not allowed I E. Soldered and brazed: 1. Braze joints in 2 inch or larger copper tubing 2. Solder or braze lines smaller than 2 inch where solder fittings are specified, except for aluminum pipe or fittings I 3. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces with flint paper and coat with thin film of flux 4. Install tubing to full depth of socket I 5. Do not overheat metal or flux 6. Uniformly heat Joint to melt filler metal on contact 7. Rem ve surplus filler.metal and flux while joint is still hot F. Solvent welded: 1. Cut PVC pipe ends square and smooth and wipe clean II 7416-00I5060Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-9 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I 2. Apply solvent cement to outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting socket with a small brush , 3. Push the coated surface snugly together and rotate approx 1/2 turn to insure uniform cement distribution 4. Remove excess cement by wiping G. Welded: ANSI B31.1,and per "Code for Pressure Piping" Grooved cou lingS. H. �rt� P 1. Crit grooves with grooving tool 2. Groove to rigid grooving dimensions 3. Groove cleanly and sharply without burrs or cheek marks 4. Form rounded bottom "radius grooves"in plastic piping I. Push on: 1. Per recommendations of pipe manufacturer 2. Bevel each spigot end to facilitate assembly 3. Lubricate with a heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before joint is corn leted 4. Store lubricant in closed containers,keep clean, suitable for use in potable waters 3.3 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through concrete or masonry B. Install before concrete is placed C. Through ceramic or vinyl floors,install sleeves flush with finished floor and provide nickel or Chromium plated floor plates D. Where passing through all other floors,install so the sleeve projects between 1 and 2 inches above the floor E. Seal sleeves passing through slabs with 1 side against soil with a modular sealing element I or a watertight pipe sleeve F. If insulated, extend insulation through sleeves I G. For future pipe installation,provide sleeves and seal ends with plastic caps or plugs H. For piping through interior walls and floors with special finish provide pipe sleeves or I holes drilled with rotary drill I. Make dust and gas tight through room walls and floor J. Six inch or smaller;special dusttight sleeves 1416-00 15060 Pipe cod Pipe Finings 15060-10 —ENGINEERS-- SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS K. Greater than 6 inch seal with modular sealing elements or caulk with oakum and seal both sides with Thiokol or urethane sealant 3.4 CHEMICAL PIPING A. Install so that the lines are readily accessible for cleaning B. At each point where flexible tubing is connected to rigid piping,provide a quick disconnect coupling or flanges. C. histall chlorine gas and vent piping without liquid traps D. Install an elbow and corrosion-resistant insect screen on the open end of each vent E. Provide crosses with plugged openings at changes in direction,except for chlorine piping 3.5 INSULATION A. Install neatly B. Clean,dry and test pipe before applying C. Tightly butt end joints ' D. Hold seams and joints with manufacturer's standard adhesive E. Paste jacket laps neatly F. Point joints with insulating cement G. For flanges, fittings and valves use molded insulation or insulating cement of same thickness as insulation H. Pass through hangers I. Provide saddles to prevent pipe support by insulation 1 3.6 FINISHES A. Tape wrap buried black steel pipe including joints B. Thoroughly clean surfaces immediately before wrapping ' C. Half-lap tape wrapping D. Apply 1 coat of coal tar paint to joints in buried galvanized steel piping ' E. Paint exposed threads of submerged galvanized piping with zinc rich paint 1416-0015060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-11 SEL. —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPEE FITTINGS I C 3.7 CLEANINGI A. General: 1. The inside of all pipe,valves,and fittings shall be smooth, clean,and free from blisters,loose mill scale,sand, and dirt when erected 2. Blow all lines thoroughly before placing in service B. Chlorine Piping: 1. Clean by pulling a cloth saturated with trichlorethylene or other suitable chlorinated solvent through each length of pipe 2. Disassemble valves and clean with a suitable solvent 3. All surfaces which may come in contact with chlorine gas shall be thoroughly dry and free of oil or grease before placing in service 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Test each line at the Contractor's expense in the presence and to the satisfaction of Engineer I B. Provide all testing equipment materials,tools, appliances,devices, and labor C. Test Conditions: 111 Service Test Pressure Test Medium Water supply 100 psi water I Gas supply 15 inch compressed air supply 150psi zero humidity air Freon,or Air supply and signal ° nitrogen Other piping 1-1/2 times suitable fluid or gas working pressure I D. Procedure: 1. Disconnect all fixture devices and other accessories which may be damaged by the specified test pressure I 2. Plug or cap ends as required and no 3. Test for 1 hr with a loss of less than 5 percent of test pressure in air piping, loss in pressure in other piping I 4. Determine leakage by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator or other positive method , 5. After pressure testing,test all gas piping for leakage with gas at operating pressure: a. Clean and dry piping before admitting chlorine gas b. Admit gas slowly c. Check for leakage with a swab soaked in ammonia solution and waved near each fitting d. Do not apply ammonia solution to fittings ZEL 1416-00 S 5060 Pipe end Pipe Fittings 15060-12 —ENGINEERS L I t SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS e. White fumes are evidence of leakage f. Purge all chlorine gas from lines before repairing 6. All joints shall be tight: a. Repair leaking joints b. Repeat tests on repaired lines 7. Test drainage and venting systems by filling with water to level of highest vent stack: a. Plug openings as necessary b. Test for drop in water level after 30 minutes END OF SECTION II I 1 1 f 1 1 I 1416-00 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-13 Z E L -ENGINEERS- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide ductile iron piping, 3-inches and larger, complete with all fittings,jointing g �J g materials,pipe hangers and supports, anchors,blocking, encasement,and other necessary ' appurtenances 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02200-Excavation,Filling And Backfilling B. Section 03000-Concrete C. Section 09900- Painting D. Section 15060 -Pipe and Pipe Fittings E. Section 15100-Valves, Cocks and Hydrants F. Section 15107-Plug Valves G. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe and Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 B. AWWA C104-Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water C. AWWA C105 -Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems D. AWWA C110-Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inch through 48 Inch, for Water and Other Liquids E. AWWA C111 -Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings F. AWWA C115 -Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges ' G. AWWA C150-Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe H. AWWA C151 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast,for Water or Other Liquids I. AWWA C153 -Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 Inch through24 Inch and 54 Inch through 64 Inch, for Water and Other Liquids J. AWWA C600-Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances ' 1416.0015062 Ductile iron Pipe AUD 150624 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I EN 3INEERS— I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE K. AWWA C606 -Grooved and Shouldered Joints L. AWWA C651 -Disinfection Water Mains M. ANSI/AWS D11.2- Guide for Welding Iron Casting r N. NSF 61 -Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION , A. Provide piping complete with all fittings,jointing materials, supports, anchors and accessories as necessary ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop Drawings: Provide piping layout fabrication and assembly drawings with fittings dimensions. Provide sufficient information to verify compliance with these specifications C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide ' manufacturer's catalog information with dimensions,material and assembled weight. Indicate pressure ratings for pipe and appurtenances D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements E. Test Reports: Submit proposed method and reports of field pressure tests under provisions of Section 01400, Quality Control 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances,laws and regulations of the State B. In case of apparent conflict, State and local requirements govern over these specifications ' C. In absence of State and local regulations,National Plumbing Code applies 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720,Project Record Documents ! ' B. Accurately record actual locations of piping, fittings,valves, connections,and top of pipe (or centerline)elevations C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities .. _ 7416-0035D62 Ductile Iron Pipe AUD 15062-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE I1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on piping and fittings 1 B. Same manufacturer to provide all piping, fittings,jointing materials and accessories 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING IA. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment IB. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation 1 C. During loading,transporting,unloading and installation, exercise care to prevent damage to material: 1. Use nylon slings only 1 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings 3. Do not roll or skid against pipe already on ground 4. Repair any damage done to coating or lining 5. Handle per manufacturer's instructions 6. Store rubber gaskets in cool dark location 7. Store all material on wood pallets or timbers ID. Adequately tag or otherwise mark all piping and fittings as to size IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS—DUCTILE 5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE IA. U.S. Pipe and Foundry B. American Cast Iron Pipe IC. McWane Cast Iron Pipe I2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. . Pipe, listed As st d below except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings: I 1. AWWA C150,AWWA C151: a. 3 inches to 12 inches Pressure Class 350 b. 14 inches to 20 inches Pressure Class 250,300, 350 c. 24 inches Pressure Class 200, 250,300, 350 I d. 30 inches to 64 inches Pressure Class 150,200,250, 300,350 2. Where fitted with flanged, grooved or restrained joints,4 inches to 54 inches Special Thickness Class 53 I ' I I416-O0 I5062 D lire Iron Pipe AUD 15062-3 Z E l —ENGINEERS— 111 SECTION 15062 IRON IRON PIPE B. Fittings: A536: 1. Ductile iron standard fittings,ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110,ASTM a. Flanged joints, 4 inch to 48 inch: 250 psi rating b. Mechanical joints,4 inch to 24 inch: 350 psi rating c. Mechanical joints,30 inch to 48 inch: 250 psi rating 2. Ductile iron compact fittings: ANSI A21.53/AWWA C153: a. Flanged joints, 4 inch to 48 inch: 250 psi rating , b. Flanged joints, 54 inch to 64 inch: 150 psi rating c. Mechanical joints,4 inch to 24 inch: 350 psi rating C. Joints: ' 1. Mechanical joints: ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111: a. Bolts and nuts: High strength,low alloy steel,"Cor-Ten"or approved equal 2. Mechanical joints with tie rods: a. Tie rods: ASTM A307,galvanized entire length b. Steel pipe spacers: ASTM A120, standard weight galvanized ' c. Washers: ANSI A27.2 plain steel, galvanized 3; Flanged joints: Class 125 , a. General use: ANSI A21.15/AWWA C115 and ANSI B16.1, b. Where 250 psi working pressure indicated on Drawings or specified: ANSI 21.15/AWWA C115 c. Where Class 250 indicated on Drawings or specified: ANSI B16.1, Class 250,flat faced d. Flange bolting: 1) Material: ASTM A307 2) Type: Bolt and nut,bolt-stud and 2 nuts permitted for 1 inch and larger 3) Bolts and bolt-studs: , a) Length: Ends project 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch beyond nuts b) Ends: Chamfered or rounded c) Threading: ANSI B1.l, coarse thread series, Class 2A fit. Bolt studs may be threaded full length. Studs for tapped holes threaded to match holes 4) Bolt heads: a) Shape: Hexagonal or square b) Dimensions: ANSI B18.2 regular pattern for square,heavy pattern for hexagonal 5) Nuts: a) Dimensions: ANSI B18.2 heavy,semi-finished pattern b) Threading: ANSI B1.1 coarse thread series,Class lB fit 4. Push-on joints: ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111, except gaskets shall be neoprene or other synthetic rubber. Natural rubber is not acceptable: a. Lubricant: Heavy vegetable soap solution suitable for potable water contact b. Pressure rated 350 psi 1916-0615062 Ductile Iron Pipe AUD 15062-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 15062 DUCTILE.IRON PIPE I 5, Restrained push-on joints,24 inch and below: a. U.S. Pipe"TR-Flex" b. American Pipe"LOKFAST" c. Clow"Super Lock" d. EBBA Iron"Megalug" e. Or approved equal 6. Threaded connections: ANSI B2.1.NPT: Provide boss or tapping saddle at all I tapped connections 7, Mechanical couplings: a. Dresser"Style 38,"Rockwell"411"or equal Ib. Brico Industries"Depend-O-Lok"Type 1, standard widths 8. Grooved couplings: a. Standard groove/rigid groove Ib. Pipe ends: Grooved with"radius cut groove" c. Couplings: Victaulic"Style 31", Gustin-Bacon"Series 100 Gruvagrip", or approved equal d. Gaskets: Compatible with pipe material e. Vic-Flange Adapters: Victaulic"Style 341","Style 342", or approved. equal I 9, Flanged coupling adapters: a. 48 inch and under: Ebba Iron Megaflange" or approved equal ; b. Uniflange is not acceptable 0 10. Mechanical joint with restraint device: a. Process piping: 1) Multiple wedging action type I 2) Twist off nuts used to insure proper actuating of the restraining device 3) Working pressure rated to at least 250 psi I 4) EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., MEGA LUG or equal 5) With conventional thrust block restraint and where acceptable to Engineer b. Aeration piping: I 1) AWWA C606 2) Low pressure air piping 3). Brico Industries"AirMaster" or approved equal ID. Wall castings: 1. Mechanical and/or flanged joints, integral weep ring I 2. Sufficient space for bolting of connection piping to joint minimum 6 inches from embedded wall, or with tapped holesfor follower bolts and plastic plugs to prevent holes from filling with concrete, as indicated on Drawings IE. Accessories: 1. Tapping saddles: Ductile iron with double stainless steel straps and rubber I ` sealing gasket,250 psi pressure rating 2. Pipe welded protective caps: Royston"Handy Cap 2",or accepted substitution I141E-0015062 Ductile ironpipoAUD 15062-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE ' 3. Concrete for thrust blocks or encasement: Concrete type specified in Section 03000,Concrete I F. Gaskets: 1. SBR(styrene butadiene rubber): a. All process and sewer piping unless otherwise indicated b. 120 degrees F maximum service temperature c. Gaskets to match pressure rating of piping and jointing system I 2. Neoprene: a. All buried push-on joint piping, and high temperature process piping unless otherwise indicated b. 200 degrees F maximum service temperature c. Gaskets to match pressure rating of piping and jointing system 2.3 CORROSION CONTROL A. Comply with provisions under Section 09900,Painting and Finishing B. Shop paint: • 1. Shop prime exterior surfaces of pipe and fittings to be installed in exposed interior or exterior locations II Shop coat flange faces with rust preventative compound 3. Shop coat all other exterior surfaces of pipe and fittings with a bituminous coating in buried locations,manufacturer's standard,AWWA C110, C151 or C153 C. Shop lining for pipe and fittings: 1. Portland cement mortar lining,AWWA C104: , ' a. All process and gravity ductile iron piping and fittings unless otherwise indicated b. 250 psi min working pressure c. 150 degrees F maximum service temperature(without Sealcoat) d. Standard thickness 2.4 FABRICATION 1 A. Joints: 1. Except as indicated on Drawings: a. Buried locations: Mechanical or push-on b. Buried fittings: Mechanical c. Bells in wall pipe or casting: Mechanical with tapped holes for follower I bolts or extended min. 6 inches beyond wall d. Bells in structures: Mechanical joint type e. Exposed: Flanged 2. 12 inches and smaller branch outlets where main line is at least twice the diameter of the branch,tee or a tapping saddle is acceptable 3. Where restrained joint with groove or grooved couplings are required,increase pipe thickness to provide: 1416-00 15062 Ductile Iron Pipe AVD 15062-6 ZEL —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 111 a. Buried: 0.29 inches minimum at bottom of groove b. All other: 0.25 inches minimum at bottom of groove 4. Where tie rods are required, except as indicated on Drawings provide: I a. 14 inches and below: 2 rods b. 16 inches through 20 inches: 2 rods c. 24 inches through 30 inches: 4 rods 36 inches through 48 inches: 4 rods Id. 5. Mark the centerline of each flange and mechanical joint piece 6. Screw flanges onto screwed-on flanged pipe so that pipe extends completely 1 through and flush with the flange 7. Finish machine pipe ends and flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline in a single operation I B Fittings and specials: 1. Finish with same lining and coating as abutting pipe • 2. Coat by hand all fittings and specials that cannot be mechanically lined using the I 3. same materials and in accordance with AWWA C104 Mark each pipe with pipe class,date of manufacture and manufacturer's name or trademark I 4. Directly thread into wall of pipe outlets up to 2 inches in diameter. Provide integral tee fitting for outlets greater than 2 inches in diameter PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work B. Carefully examine pipe and fittings for cracks,damage to linings and coatings, and other Idefects prior to installation C. Remove all defective pipe from site and replace ID. Examine areas for defects such as weak structural components or deviations beyond allowable tolerances for piping clearances that adversely affect execution and quality of Work I E. Start installation only when conditions are satisfactory 1 3.2 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 02200, Excavation,Filling and Backfilling for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated: 1. Dig bell or coupling holes I 2. Do not support pipe on blocks or mounds of earth 3. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for full length of pipe between bell holes I 1416.0015062 Ductile iron Pipe AUD 15062-7 ZEL —ENGINEERS— 1 a. I SECTION 15062 I DUCTILE IRON PIPE 4. Minor disturbance over a maximum length of 18 inches near the middle of each length of pipe will be permissible by the withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting I tackle B. Alignment and grade: 1 1. Except as indicated on the Drawings,lay all pipe straight between changes in alignment and at a uniform grade between changes in grade 2. Use batter boards to determine and check pipe subgrades 3. Other methods of maintaining alignment and grade may be acceptable. Submit complete information describing the proposed method to the Engineer for review before pipe laying is started C. Place bedding material at trench bottom,level fill materials in one continuous layer per Section 02200,Excavating,Filling and Backfilling II 3.3 INSTALLATION • A. Install as specified or in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions ' B. Cutting pipe: 1. Cut pipe to measurements taken at the site,not from the Drawings 2. Cut pipe neatly without damage to pipe or cement lining 3. Cut smooth,straight, and at right angles to pipe axis 4. Dress and bevel end of cut pipe to remove roughness and sharp corners,recoat exposed metal with coating approved for intended service 5. Cut ductile iron pipe with saw or abrasive wheel C. Piping underground: 111 1. Install ductile iron piping and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600 except as specified herein I 2. Inspect pipe and accessories for defects before lowering into trench 3. Repair or replace any defective,damaged or unsound pipe 4. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, and accessories into the trench with derricks,ropes, and other suitable equipment to prevent damage I 5. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trench 6. Do not lay pipe in water,under unsuitable weather conditions or under unsuitable trench conditions I 7. Joint to form true and smooth line 8. Trim pipe only for closures 1119. Remove any pipe not making a good fit 10. Begin pipe laying at the lowest point unless reverse.laying is accepted by Engineer 11. Utilize implements,tools and facilities as recommended by the manufacturer I 12. Keep pipe clean during and after laying 13. Close all open ends with watertight expandable type plugs: a. At the end of each day's operations b. Whenever pipe ends are left unattended 1416-0015062 Ductile Iron on PipeAUD 15062-8 ' —ENGINEEPS I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE c. Deposit adequate backfill on pipe to prevent flotation d. Do not use wood,burlap or other similar temporary plugs 14. Remove and re-lay any pipe which has floated 15. Provide an isolation or shutoff valve and union at the water connections to each I . fixture and unit of equipment,whether shown on the Drawings or not 16. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical. Maintain 10 feet I minimum separation between potable water and sanitary or storm sewer pipes 17. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 1/2 inch 18. Route pipe in straight line 19. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints I20. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 02675,Disinfection of Water Distribution Systems 21. Slope water pipe and position drain at low points I 22. Protect from lateral displacement by placing embedment evenly on both sides of pipe 23. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying except when Engineer ` authorizes reverse laying 24 Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main. Not required when using restrained joint pipe I 25. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 5 feet of cover 26. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02200, Excavation,Filling and Backfilling I , D, Piping in buildings or structures: 1. Completed installation should present a neat, orderly appearance 2. Do not block openings,passageways, or pipe galleries I 3. Run piping parallel to walls of building or structure 4. Keep piping from contacting walls, structures, or installed items I3.4 JOINTS A. Make joints carefully and neatly IB. Connect piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions I C. Mechanical joints: 1. If an effective seal is not obtained,disassemble joint, clean thoroughly, and reassemble 2. Do not over-tighten bolts to compensate for poor installation I 3. Carefully align holes in mechanical joints with restraint devices to permit installation of the harness bolts 4. Install flange and mechanical joint pieces so the four mechanical joint holes, as I well as the flange holes, straddle the top centerline for horizontal piping, or the side centerline for vertical piping ID. Push-on joints: 1. Bevel spigot ends of field cut piping 7416-0015062 Ductile Iron Pipe AUD 15062-9 I ZEL —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 1. In interior locations and where subject to internal pressure,bloc, anchor or harness piping with mechanically coupled,push-on or similar joints to prevent I separation of joints 2. In buried piping subject to hydrostatic heads in excess of 30 feet provide concrete thrust blocking to prevent pipe movement caused by internal pressure at: a. Fire hydrants and gate valves b. Plugs,tees, and wyes c. Bends deflecting 11-1/4 degrees or more d. Other locations show on Drawings 3, Concrete thrust blocking shall provide: a. Bearing area as indicated on the Drawings b. Provide bond break c. Extend from fitting to solid undisturbed earth d. Installed so joints are accessible for repair e. If the lack of a solid vertical excavation face is due to improper excavation, all additional costs shall be borne by Contractor 4. For areas where ground is unstable or unsuitable for concrete thrust blocking, as determined by the Engineer, or as indicated on the Drawings,provide joint restraint by tied pipe: a. Provide sufficient number of tied joints to equal or exceed restraining length as shown on the Drawings b. In fills and embankments provide concrete thrust blocks and tied joints to equal or exceed restraining length as shown on the Drawings: 1) Tie rods and Cor-ten eye bolts at mechanical joints 2) Tie rods and clamps at push-on joints 3) Restrained joint pipe ' 3.5 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings B. Provide reinforcing as indicated on the Drawings C. Suitably support and block pipe and anchor against flotation r 3.6 CONNECTION TO EXISTING PIPE LINES A. Make connections between new and existing piping by other contractors with suitable fittings,provide all fittings required for testing B. Schedule connection to minimize inconvenience to the Owner,other contractors,and as authorized by Owner C. Provide facilities for adequate dewatering and disposal of water form dewatered line and t excavations without damage to adjacent property D. Potable water lines: I 1. Take special care to prevent contamination 15062-11 Z E L 14 16.00 15062 Ductile Iron Pipe AUD —ENGINEERS-- ' SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 2. Do not permit trench water,Mud,or other contaminating substances in lines I 3. Thoroughly clean the interior ofpipe,;fittings and valves and swab with or dip into a 200 mg/L chlorine solution I3.7 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Provide polyethylene tube encasement on all buried ductile iron pipe, fittings,valves, and' I rodding: 1. Comply with AWWA C105 2. As detailed on the Drawings IB. Metal surfaces: 1. Coat all steel clamps,rods,bolts, and other metal accessories used in tapping I saddles, anchorages, cut ends of pipe,follower rings and bolts or joint harnesses subject to submergence or contact with the earth and not concrete encased,but including pipe fittings and bolts in polyethylene tube encasement I 2. Apply 2 coats of Coal tar paint to clean,dry metal surfaaces 3. Allow the first cOat to dry and harden beforeapplying the second coat 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES IA. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot,two percent minimum but never less than 1/8 inch per foot. Maintain gradients B. Slope exposed water piping and arrange to drain at low points I3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400, Quality Control I B. Test each line at the Contractor's expense in the presence and to the satisfaction of the P Engineer C. Provide e necesSaty pumping equipment,piping connections,pressure.gauges with makimum of 1.0 incroments,and other required equipment, facilities,and materials ID. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements,remove Work,replace and retest at no cost to Owner IE. Hydrostatic Test Conditions: Identi.fy lines,test pressure, and test medium according to Specification 01.601,Piping,Schedule IF. Procedure: 1. Disconnect all fixture devices and other accessories which may be damaged by the specified test pressure I . I 2. Plug or cap ends as required 3. Bleed system to eliminate all air from system I 1416-0011062 DuctilelronPipcAUD 150624 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 4. No testing before concrete thrust blocks have adequate curing time, 7 days minimum 5. Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to testing 6. Test for 2 hours with no more than 5 psi loss in pressure,test all line valves by pressurizing upstream to test pressure and relieving downstream pressure,valve pipe test pressure�in each P pe line reach 7. Structure test so as to test all intermediate valves 8. Leakage is the quantity of water added to a test section to maintain test pressure + 5 psi: a. L=S X D (P)°5 133,200 L=allowable leakage,in gallons per hour S=length of pipe tested,in feet D=nominal diameter of the pipe,in inches P=average test pressure during the test,in psi(gauge) b. All visible leaks shall be stopped to the satisfaction of the Engineer c. All water used for pressure testing must be potable and delivered in acceptable containers I 9,; All joints located in interior locations shall be watertight and free of leaks 10. Length of pipe in the interior locations shall not be included in calculation of allowable leakage quantity joints, and other I 11. Immediately locate and replace all pipe fittings,valves,pipe materials found to be defective with new and acceptable material a Infiltration test: 1. For buried piping when indicated in the Pipeline Schedule 2. 'Vacs test each co rxpleted section of pipeline,pipe joints and fittings for 1 hour to a developed negative pressure of 8 psi without noticeable drop in pressure. H. Owner will provide only water for initial filling and testing of pipeline. 3.10 CLEANING AND DRAINING A. The inside of all pipe,valves,and fittings shall be smooth,clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, and dirt when connected B. Wire brush, if necessary,wipe clean and keep joint contact surfaces clean until I connection is complete. C. Flush all lines thoroughly before disinfection in accordance with Section 02675, I Disinfection of Water Distribution Systems. D. When testing against a closed valve connected to an existing potable water system, I complete flushing and passing disinfection tests per Section 02675, Disinfection of Water Distribution Systems prior to conducting hydrostatic pressure test. END OF SECTION 14]6-0011067 Ductile bon Pipe AIM SEL 15062'13 -ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 15067 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel pipe and fittings g 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200- Excavation,Filling and Backfilling 1 B. Section 03000-Concrete C. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors I1.3 REFERENCES I I A. ANSI B16.1 —Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125,250,and 800 B. ANSI B16.11 —Forged Steel Fittings,Socket Welding and Threaded C. ANSI B36.19—Stainless Steel Pipe D. ASTM A182—Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges,Forged Fittings, and Valves Iand Parts for High-Temperature Service E. ASTM A193—Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service F. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High- Temperature Service G. ASTM A240—Heat-ResistingChromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels H. ASTM A276—Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes 1 I. ASTM A312—Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes J. ASTM A320—Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service K. ASTM A403—Wrought Iron Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings L. ASTM A409—Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High- Temperature Service M. ASTM A480—General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel 117 Plate, Sheet, and Strip 1416-O0 15067Stainless Steel Pipe 15067-1 Z E L -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 15067. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE N. ASTM A774—As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures O. ASTM A778—Welded,Unnealed,Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products P. ASTM D1330—Rubber Sheet Gaskets 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. Provide piping complete with all fittings,jointing materials, supports,anchors and accessories as necessary 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop drawings: Provide piping layout fabrication and assembly drawings with fittings dimensions. Provide sufficient information to verify compliance with Specifications ' C. Product data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog infOrmation with dimensions,material and assembled weight. Indicate pressure ratings for pipe and appurtenances. The following information and data shall be provided: 1. Names and qualification records of proposed welders D. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements REQUIREMENTS ' 1.6 REGULATORY RE Q A. Conform to all municipal(or County)codes &ordinances,laws&regulations of the State I B. In case of apparent conflict, State and local requirements govern over these Specifications C. In absence of State and local regulations,National Plumbing Code applies I 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730,Operation and Maintenance Data B. Accurately record actual locations of piping,fittings,valves, connections, and top of pipe (or centerline) elevations C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities ZEL 14164)0 15067 Stainless Steel Pipe 15067-2 —ENGINEERS^ - ISECTION 15067 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE I1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on piping and fittings B. Same manufacturer to provide all piping, fittings,jointing materials and accessories I1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All pipe, fittings,and fabrications shall be properly marked'with type,gauge,and heat I number. All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage and/or transport after lubrication. All fabricated piping shall be piece-marked with identifying'numbers or codes which correspond to the contractor's layout and I installation drawings. The marks will be located on the spools at opposite ends and 180 degrees apart. Pipe spoolshall be loaded,blocked,and logged as necessary to ensure protection from damage during shipping. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation. Dents,gouges,and scratches instainless steel pipe I . and fittings arc not acceptable and are reason for rejecting pipe and fittings B. Deliver, store,protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, IMaterials and Equipment C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation D. During loading,transporting,unloading and installation, exercise care to prevent damage to material: 1. Use nylon slings only 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings 3. Do not roll or skid against pipe already on ground I4. Repair any damage done to coating or lining 5. Handle per manufacturer's instructions I 6. Store rubber gaskets in cool dark location 7. Store all material on wood pallets or timbers E. Adequately tag or otherwise mark all piping and fittings as to size. IPART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 PIPE A. Stainless steel pipe 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be Type 304, seamless,threaded joints conforming to ASTM A312. The minimum wall thickness shall be Schedule 40S IB. Stainless steelpip�in 3 inches-48 inches in diameter shall be manufactured per ASTM A778 hon ASTM A240 annealed and pickled,sheets;and plates,Tye 304L. Only extra- II low carbon (ELC)materials with .03 percentmaximum carbon shall be used. Pipe shall ''iISieeiPpc 15067-3 Z E 1. —ENGINEERS-- 1 m. I SECTION 15067 I STAINLESS STEEL PIPE be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in ANSI B36.19,Table 2, and shall have I the following nominal wall thickness: Schedule Wall thickness, Nominal pipe hes size, niches gauge/plate inc . ' 3-10 Schedule 5S 0.1.9 2.2 FITTINGS ' A. Stainless steel fittings 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be ASTM A403,of the same material and pressure rating as the pipe,threaded long radius with dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.11 B. Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel fittings 3 inches and larger shall be butt-weld type manufactured in accordance with.ASTM A774 of the same material and in the sante thickness as the pipe. Long radius elbows up to 24 inches in diameter shall be smooth. flow. All short radius, special radius, and reducing elbows acid.long radius elbows greater than 24 inches in diameter shall be of mitered constritction., Reducers shall be , straight tapered, cone type. Tees, crosses,laterals,and wyes shall be shop-fabricated from pipe I 23 JOINTS r A. Stainless steel pipe fabricated into spool pieces shall have shop welded circumferential •butt-weld joints or flanges. Udless otherwise. peeif ed,flangedjoirits shall.be made up I of stainless steel slip-on type,rolled-angle face rings and,ductile iron back-up flanges drilled to ANSI 16.1, Class 125 standard. The angle face ring thickness shall be equalto or greater than the wall othe pipe for fitting to which it is welded,and itShallbe , continuously welded on both sides to the pipe or.fitting. The angle leg shall not interfere with the flange bolt holes. Ductile iron flanges shall be painted as specified in Section 09900. The back-up flanges shall be supplied with the following nominal thickness" I Nominal pipe, Flanged thickness, size,inches inches3 ,, 1/2 4 9/16 6-10 5/8 I 2.4 COUPLINGS A. General: Fabricated stainless steel piping shall be shop-prepared for pipe couplings where specified. Unless otherwise specified,couplings shall bearched-band or grooved type t B. Sleeve Type: Rockwell Type 411,Dresser Style 38,or equal,with the stop.removed from the middle ring. Reducing couplings shall be Rockwell Type 415,Dresser Style 62, or equal. Sleeve-type flanged coupling adapters shall be Rockwell Type 913,Dresser Style.128,or equal. Insulating couplings shall be Rockwell Type 416,Dresser Style 39, 1A16-00J5067Stainless StmZEL 15067-4 1lPipe - —ENGINEERS— - , 117 SECTION 15.067 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE ' or equal. Bolts and nuts shall be made of non-corrosive alloy metal.Pipe shall be plain- end with external weld beads ground smooth to ensure proper gasket seating. For pressure pipe lines,sleeve coupling joints shall be restrained by the use of harness rods ' connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where no adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness lugs shall be welded to the pipe to receive the harness rods C. Arched-Band Type: Arched-band type cou lin s shall be stainless steel of the same p g material and wall thickness as the pipe and shall be Depend-O-Look type as ' manufactured by Brioche,or equal. Couplings shall be fixed--FxF,Expansion--ExE, or Fixed by Expansion--FxE as specified or as required. The pipe shall be plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth and with SS restraining rings shop-welded to the piping for fixed type couplings D. Grooved-End Type: Grooved end flexible-type couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77, or equal. Grooved end rigid-type couplings shall be Victaulic Style 07 Zero-Flex, or equal. Grooved end flanged coupling adapters shall be Victaulic Style 741, or equal. Snap joint grooved end couplings shall be Victaulic Style 78, or equal. Bolts and nuts shall comply with AWWA C606. Submerged couplings shall be the same material as the pipe. The ' pipe ends shall be roll-grooved to the coupling manufacturer's specifications. Where roll grooving is impractical,the pipe shall have heavy-wall machine-grooved pipe nipples or machines ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. Nipples shall be taper-bored to 'E the I.D. of the adjoining pipe to allow full-weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both sides to the piping. Nipples and collars shall be of the same alloy as the piping ' E. Expansion Type: Unless otherwise specified,expansion couplings shall be the flanged rubber arch type. Pipe flanges shall be provided for these couplings ' 2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded pipe, gauge, or instrument connections shall be made using stainless steel, 3000-pound,threaded half-couplings conforming to ASTM A182 or ASTM A276, shop- welded to the pipe at the location specified ' 2.6 GASKETS A. Unless otherwise specified,gaskets shall be ASTM D1330, Grade 1,red rubber,ring type, 1/8 inch thick. For air lines, gaskets shall be neoprene or EPDM, suitable for temperatures to 240 degrees F 2.7 BOLTS ' A. Bolts,nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies and stainless steel couplings shall be the same material, conforming to ASTM A320 for low-temperature service and ASTM A193 and ASTM A194 for high-temperature service. Bolts, nuts, and washers for other couplings shall be as specified in referenced paragraphs for the couplings I ' 1416-00 15067 Stainless Steel Pipe 15067-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 15067 I STAINLESS STEEL PIPE 2.8 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS I A. Unless otherwiseipecifiod,all hangers,rods,structural attachments,and other components of supports systems:for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as I the pipe and conform to Section 15140,.Supports and Anchors 2.9 FINISH A. After manufacture,pipe and fittings shall be piekled and passivated in manufacturer's plant,and scrubbed and washed until discoloration a possible iron picked up from the manufacturing process are removed. The standard finish for 16-gauge through 8-gauge I material shall be No. 1 or 2B per ASTM A480; 3/16-inch and heavier plate material shall be No. 1 mill finish or better per ASTM A480. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING,AND JOINTING A. Pipe cutting;threading,and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. All pipe threads shall be lubricated with Teflon tape 3.2 WELDING 1 A. General: Piping with wall thickness up to 1 i-gauge(0.120 Ynth)shall be welded with the TIG(GTAW)process.Unless otherwise specified,heavier walls shall be properly beveled and have a root pass with the TIG(GTAW)process followed by subsequent passes with theTIG�GTA"4 },.MIG GMAW),`or Metallic Arc(SMAW)process. Filler I : ( wire of ELC grades only shall be added to all,welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed and have a crown of no more than 1/1"6-inch on the I.D. and 3/324ch on the O.D.of the piping. Concavity,undercut,cracks, or crevices shall not be allowed. Butt- welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface,and inert gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint. Excessive weld deposits,slag, spatter, and projections shall be removed by grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall he ground smooth B. Field Welding: use of I 1. Field welding shall be minimized to the greatest extend possible by couplings and prefabrication of pipe systems at the factory. Pipe butt-welds may be performed at the job site providing the butt-welds are performed only with an II inert gas shielded process and that other applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered to 2. All residue, oxide, and heat stain is tobe s from wire brushes,y type of feld weld fol owed by I the affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless cleaning with an agent such as Eutectic Company's"Eucleen,"or equal, followed by complete removal of the agent I ZEL 1 1416-0015067 Stainless Steel Pipe 15067-6 —ENGINEERS- 1 ISECTION 15067 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE ' C. Preparation Of Surfaces To Be Welded: Surfaces of joints to be welded shall be free from mill scale, slag,grease, oil,paint,rust,&other foreign material. Joints to be welded shall be wire-brushed with stainless steel wire brushes and precisely fitted before welding ' D. Weather Conditions. Weldingshall be d g one only when the surfaces are compietely free of any moisture. Welding of the pipe shall nOf be done during periods of high winds or ' rain unless the areas being welded are properly shielded E. Tack Welds, Clips,And Other Attachments: Nicks, gouges,notches, and depressions in the base metal in the area of the joint shall be repaired before the joint weld is made. Tack welds, clips, and other attachments shall be removed and defects repaired, except where the tack welds occur within the weld area and these tack welds do not exceed the ' size of the completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall be removed. Areas to be repaired shall be ground to clean metal and then repaired by building up with weld metal. The repaired areas shall be ground smooth to form a plane surface with the base metal ' F, Defects And Repairs: Welds with cracks, slag inclusions,porosity, undercutting, incomplete penetration, or which are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to ' any provisions of these specifications shall be removed by chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean base metal. Caulking or peening of welds to correct defects shall not be done. Welds found deficient in dimension but not in quality shall be enlarged by additional welding after thoroughly cleaning the surface of previously I deposited metal and the adjoining plate. Weld deposits, slag,weld spatter, and projections into the interior of the pipe shall be removed by grinding 3.3 FABRICATION/INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The piping supplier during manufacturing, fabricating, and handling stages; and the ' contractor during handling and installation stages shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files,wire brushes, etc. shall be used for stainless steel piping only, Pipe storage and fabrication ' rads;shall be non-ferrous or stainless steel or rubber-lined. Nylon slings;or straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the piping walls. After installation,the contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. All welded joints shall be brushed with stainless steel wire brushes and rinsed clean. If rusting of embedded iron occurs,the contractor shall picklethe affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS, or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes, and rinse clean I I 1416.00 15067 Stainless Steel Pipe 15067-7 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 - . ., I SECTION 15067 I STAINLESS STEEL PIPE 3.4 COATINGS A. After installation,the contractor shall paint all steel or iron flanges, cou li Painting of the I appurtenances-in accordance with Section 09900,Painting and Finishing. stainless steel pipe is,;not fequirre4,however,the contractor shall be responsible for supplying andng install the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface. Identifying spool piece axmarlcs shall be removed withpaint thinner or solvents and the • entire stainless steel surface shall be washed with detergent and hot water and rinsed cleaned ` I END OF SECTION • I 1 I { I I —ENGINEERS-- 141b•tHl 15967 Brainiest Steel Pipe Z£I_ 1 15067-8 I ' SECTION 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND HYDRANTS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves indicated on Drawings, specified or as required for proper operation of equipment or systems ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 02200-Excavation, Filing and Backfilling B. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing C. Section 15060-Pipe and Pipe Fittings D. Section 15103 -Butterfly Valves ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges, and Pipe Fittings B. ASTM A313 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire C. ASTM B148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings D. ASTM D2000- Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ' E. AWWA C500-Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service F. AWWA C502-Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants ' G. AWWA C508 - Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service,2 inch through 24 inch NPS H. AWWA C509-Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3 inch through 12 inch NPS,for Water and ' Sewage Systems I. AWWA C511 -Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly ' J. AWWA C512-Air Release,Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service ' K. AWWA C550 -Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants L. NSF 61 -Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects M. UL 246-Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service rvice 1416-0015100 Valves,Cocks and Hydrants 15100-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 1 SECTION 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND HYDRANTS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples facturer's catalog B. Product Data: Provide data on valves and accessories. Provide I d Cate valve data and information with dimensions,materials, and assembled weight. ratings C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide complete manufacturer's installation instructions 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720,Project Record Documents B. Record actual size,type and location of all valves I 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730,Operation and Maintenance Data. ' B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Test valves in accordance with applicable standards referenced above. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: p Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this ' Section with minimum 10 years documented experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances,laws and regulations of the State. I B. In case of apparent conflict, State and local requirements govern over these specifications. C. In absence of State and local regulations,Uniform Plumbing Code will apply. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. B. Prepare valves and accessories for shipment according to AWWA C500. 14)6-00 15100 Valves,Coops and Hydrants 15100-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND HYDRANTS IC. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. D. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. IE. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of foreign matter into valve body. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 GENERAL IA. Construction: 1. Actual valve length within± 1/16 inch of specified or theoretical length 2. Ends, except as otherwise specified: I a. 2-1/2 inch and smaller,threaded or soldered ends b. 3 inch and larger: 1) Buried: Push-on or mechanical joint,ANSI A21.11 I c. 2) Others: Flanges,ANSI 125 lb Wafer style valves designed for installation between ANSI 125 lb flanges B. Shop Painting: I 1. Comply with provisions of Section 0.990€1, Painting and Finishing 2. Shop paint all ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories,both interior and exterior for corrosion protection I3. Manufacturer's standard paint will be acceptable if it is functionally equivalent to the specified paint and compatible with the specified field painting 4. Surfaces to be painted: I a. Unfinished surfaces: 1) Interior: Epoxy 2) Exterior to be buried, submerged, or located in manholes: Two part I epoxy or suitable exterior coating acceptable to Engineer 3) Other exterior: Rust inhibitive primer b. Polished or machined surfaces: Rust-preventive compound Ic. Operators and accessories: Rust inhibitive primer C. Actuators: I 1. Provide manual actuators for all valves not specified to be power actuated or designed for automatic operation: a. General use: Handwheel I b. Seven feet or more above the floor or grade: Chain wheel with operating chain: 1) Equipped with chain guide to permit rapid chain handling or the chain without"gagging"the wheel and to permit reasonable side Ipull on the chain 2) With extensions as required to prevent interference with adjacent piping or equipment I3) Chain heavily zinc or cadmium-plated and looped to extend between 3 feet and 4 feet,of the floor or grade below valveI 4I6-G 15100 v ,Cocks and xya its 15100-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 15100 VALVES,COCKS AND HYDRANTS I c. Buried valve,valves operated through floor boxes,and as indicated on Drawings: Wrench nuts: I 1) AWWA C500, Section 19 2) Provide 2 operating keys d. Plug or ball valves not to be chain forw each r wrvalvench nut operated: Lever: 1) Provide 1 operating lea 2. Rotation: ' a. Counter clockwise(to the left)to open b. The word"OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction to open cast on each valve body or operator 3; Extension stems: a. Provide where indicated on Drawings,specified,req fired for proper operation and for buried valves with operating nuts more than 8 feet below grade I b. Non-rising stems: 1) Solid steel shafting with O.D.not less than 0.D.t less than 0.D. of valve stem f valve stem or galvanized steel pipe with 2) Connected to the valve by a flexible socket coupling 3) All other connections pinned,keyed, or socket c. Rising stem: ' 1) Stainless steel or carbon steel shafting with O.D.not less than O.D. of valve stem 2) Bronze or stainless steel sleeves securely attached to stem 3) Sleeve length and location to extend through each stem guide throughout the full vertical travel of stem d. Stem guides: I 1) Cast iron,bronze brushed,adjustable in two:directions. 2) If extension stem length exceeds 10 feet or the weight exceeds 50 lbs,design top guide to carry the stem weight and provide a collar on the stem to bear against the thrust guide 3) Max spacing: . a) Non-rising stems: 100 times stem O.D. b) Rising stems: 60 times stem O.D. c) Ten feet max e. Buried valves: I 1) Stem extend to within 6 inches of grade 2) Provide spacers to center stem in valve box 3) Provide wrench nut I 4, Operating Stands; a Provide as indicated on Drawings b. Fabricated steel or cast iron c. Support handwheel or lever approximately 36 inches above floor I d. Handwheel diam: 8 inch minimum e. Provide standard weight galvanized pipe sleeve for opening in floor I ZEL 15100-4 --ENGINEERS- 1416-001511 00 Valves,Cocks end Hydrants 1 I -y 111,7 SECTION 15100 VALVES,COCKS AND HYDRANTS If. For longer than 10 feet and without stem guides with thrust bearings, provide a suitable thrust bearing in each stand to carry extension stem weight I 5. Floor boxes: a. Provide when openings are provided in concrete slabs for key operation of wrench nuts in or below the slab I b. Cast iron with cover c. Depth as required for slab d. Nut in slab: Provide a stem guide to center nut in box I e. Nut below slab: Bottom opening to permit passage of key f. Box and cover coated by coal tar,epoxy g. The word "SEWER" cast on each cover I 6. Valve boxes; a. Provide for all buried valves b. Cast iron extension sleeve type with boxes and covers c. Depth as required for valve d. Minimum diam: 5 inch e. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch f. Box,cover, and base coated by dipping in asphalt varnish Ig. An appropriate word designating the valve service case on the cover 2.2 GATE VALVES A. Clear water service, 3/4 inch to 2 inch: 1. Bronze,rising stem,solid wedge,Sam in bonnet I 2. Threaded ends Nibeo '-111, nen_3010,or approved equal 3. Soldered ends: Nibco 5=1,11,Grinnell 3,010 Si,or approved equal B. Gate. alves<4-16"shall be of the resilient seat type designed for a minimum working I pressure of 250 psi. Valves>12"shall be fitted with gear operators. tinderground valves shall have restrained mechanical joint ends to match the piping in which they are installed. Exposed valves shall be flanged. Gate valves shall have a clear waterway Iequal to the full normal diameter of the pipe. Prior to shipment from the factory,each valve<shall be tested by hydraulic:pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. All valves shall conform to the specifications{t tr Gate yalves for Ordinary Water Works IService, AWWA C509. Coatings shall be per AWWA C550. Valves shall be non-rising stem type with 2-inch square operating nut,unless otherwise specified. Valves shall be U.S.Metroseal or approved equal. I2.3 CHECK VALVES I A. Clear Water Service—Dual Disc Style— 14"through 30"lug-style, 250 psig Working pressure or less 1. Valmatic Dual Disc or equal t 2. ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body 3. ASTM B148 Alloy C95200 cast aluminum bronze disc 4. ASTM A313 Type 17-714 Stainless steel torsion spring I1416-0015100 Vulva,Cocks and Hydrants 15100-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND HYDRANTS I 5. ASTM D2000 Buna N or Viton Seals I B. Air and vacuum service: 1. 2 inch and larger: "Technocheck Silent Seatless Check Valves,"Mission"Duo- Check,"or approved equal 2. Smaller than 2 inch: Circle Seal "Model 259," APPCOR'Ball Check Series III," or approved equal I 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Application: 1. Except as otherwise indicated or specified,provide ball valves for all 3 inch or smaller shutoff valves. 2. Provide additional ball valves as indicated on drawings or as specified. _ equal. ` B. Air and water service,3 inch and smaller: Jamesbury A-211 or approved , C. Domestic Water Plumbing Valve,2"and smaller: Class 150, chrome-plated brass ball, I full port valve.Valve shall be Nibco S-580 or T-580 or equal. D. Fabrication: 1. Handles showing direction of opening 2. Ball design which does not allow media contact with stem 3. Balancing stop for all applications 2.5 ELECTRIC VALVES A. 3/4 inch and smaller: 1. Solenoid valves: a. General: I 1) Bronze bodies and bonnets 2) Packless construction without packing box or sliding seal 3) Asco,ITT,or approved equal I 4) 120 V AC encapsulated Class F coils: a) In NEMA 4 enclosures: Spade type terminals 5) Enclosures: I a) With conduit hubs b) General use: NEMA 4 c) Explosion proof areas:NEMA 7 6) Working pressure: I a) Water service: 125 psig b) Air service: 126 psig 7) Maximum required differential: I a) 1/4 inch: 0 psi b) 3/8 inch-1 inch: 5 psi I 1475-00.15]00 Valves,Cocks andAZEA 15100-6 'ydreuts —ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 15100 VALVES,COCKS AND HYDRANTS ' b. Accessories: 1) In water service provide an upstream strainer: a) Bronze bodied,Y-pattem b) Monel or stainless steel screens ' c) Asco 8600,Fisher 260, Hoffman 420, OPW Jordan 811 VP,or approved equal d) With blowoff valve,Nibco "U-valve,"Dyna-Quip "Combo ' Valve,"or approved equal 2) Provide Strainers at:other locators indicated on Drawings 2.6 PNEUMATICALLY ACTUATED DIAPHRAGM VALVES A. Valves shall be George Fisher Diastar 10 or equal with flanged ends. 1 B. Pneumatic operator shall be fail close type with position feedback. C. Valve Body: PVC-U D. Diaphragm: EPDM ' I 2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE(BLOWER SERVICE) A. This valve shall control high pressures and power failure surges by bypassing system pressure that exceeds the high pressure control setting. B. The valve shall be a Kunkle Model 337 or equal. ' C. Materials: 1. Valve Body: ASTM A126 Cast Iron 2. Disc Stem and Lift Pin and Spring: Stainless Steel ' 2.8 YARD HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Wade—W-8609 2. Josam-71600 ' 3. Smith-5810 4. Zum—Z-1360 5. Or approved equal ' B. Hydrant,3/4 inch to 2 inch: 1. Exterior locations 2. Cast iron box and cover,brass valve,and casing for 4'-0"bury 2.9 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. General: 1. Tight shutoff under no flow conditions � 14I6-0015100 Valves,Corks and Hydrants 15100-7 SEL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 15100 I VALVES,COCKS AND HYDRANTS 2. No "hunting"under normal flow conditions 3. Sized and selected as recommended by valve manufacturer I B. Water service: I 1. Provide as indicated on Drawings 2. Max flow greater than 150 gpm: Pilot operated,Cla-Val 90-01, GA 45, OCV 127-3, or approved equal 3. All others: Non-pilot operated Fisher 75A,Mueller H- 9000,or approved equal I 4. 2-1/2 inch or smaller: Provide a Y pattern strainer: a. Bronze body b. Stainless steel or monel screen , c. Cash-Acme SY, Hoffman 420,Mueller H-9330, Fisher 260C,or approved equal d. Blow-off Valve: Nibco "U-Valve,"Dyna-Quip "Combo Valve," or approved equal 2.10 PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVE A. General: 1. Tight shutoff under no flow conditions 2. No 'hunting"under normal flow conditions 3. Sized and selected as recommended byvalve manufacturer B. Non-potable water service: 1. Provide as indicated on Drawings 2. Max flow greater than 125<gpm: Pilot operated,Cla-Val 92-01,GA Fig 6700-DR,OCV Model 108-2 or approved equal ' 2.11 AIR RELEASE VALVES A. General: 1. Provide as indicated on Drawings 2. Water working pressure: 125 psig I B. Clear water service: 1. Individual air release valves: a. Inlet size as indicated on Drawings I b. Conform to AWWA C512 c. GA"Figure 930-T,"Val-Matic"Model 38,"APCO "200A," or approved equal I d. Provide throttling devices where indicated. 2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER I A. Dual check valve assembly with reduced pressure zone B. Construction: I 1. Bronze body 7474.0011 100 Valuta,Cocks and liydrenls ZEL� 15100-8 -ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND HYDRANTS ' 2. Bronze mounted 3. 1 inch—Watts 909QT or approved equal 4. 2 inch—Watts 909MIQT or approved equal ' 2.13 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. Provide as indicated on Drawings: ' 1. Designed for 150 psig working pressure 2. Tested to 300 psig working pressure ' B. Tapping Sleeves: 1. Flanged outlet type designed for attachment to inlet end of tapping valve 2. Mechanical joints at each end of run ' 3. Mueller No.H-615, Clow F-5205,or approved equal 2.14 CORPORATION ACCESSORIES ' A. Corporation stops: 1. Bronze body,AWWA tapered threaded tap 2. 100 psi maximum working pressure ' 3. Ford#B-22 or approved equal B. Curb stops:Ball type(1 inch–2 inch), Ford`B22" Series,or approved equal C. Curb stop box:4 Ford arch base curb box, or approved equal D. Tapping saddles:Ductile iron with double stainless steel strap and rubber sealing gasket, 250 psi pressure rating,Mueller"#H-16100,"Rockwell "#323," Superior Style"36,"or approved equal ' E. Service saddles (large diameter PVC):Wide stainless steel band or bands,bronze body, Ford "S-90"or approved equal ' 2.15 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Bedding:As specified in Section 02200, Excavation,Filling and Backfilling PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install valves and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions ' 2. Provide union or flanged connection within 2 feet of each threaded end valve unless valve can otherwise be easily removed from piping 1 3. Set buried valves on solid bearing 4. Center and plumb valve box over valve 5. Set box cover flush with finished grade .-..... .... ' 1416-00 1$100 Vi4ve,Cocks and Herts 15100-9 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 15100 VALVES,COCKS AND HYDRANTS 6. Evenly fill around box and thoroughly compact on all sides 7. Extend stem to within 6 inches of final grade 8. Provide spacers to center stem in valve box B. Yard;hydrants: 1. provide a concrete slab 18 inch square by 4 inch thick 2. Install plumb 3. Provide 1 cu ft gravel or crushed stone below each hydrant for drainage C. Backflow preventers: Install in an area not subject to flooding 3.2 ADJUSTMENT A. Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions ' END OF SECTION 1 1 id141643015140VaIvZEL 15100-10 es, —ENGINEERS— 1 ISECTION 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES IPART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Butterfly valves for water service where indicated on Drawings I B. All necessary operators,valve stems,valve boxes, and accessories for a complete operable assembly I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing IB. Section 13400-Instrumentation Section 15060-Pipe and Pipe Fittings IC. D. Section 15100-Valves, Cocks and Hydrants IE. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors F. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods II1.3 REFERENCES A. AWWA C504-Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves B. AWWA C540-Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates IC. AWWA C550-Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants D. NSF 61 -Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects I1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples IA. B. Product Data: Provide complete data on valves and accessories sufficient to verify compliance with the specifications: I 1. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with size, dimensions,number of turns to open,materials, and assembled weights. Indicate valve pressure temperature rating I 2. For blower inlet valves,provide calculations showing valve positions under specified operating conditions C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Provide Affidavit of Compliance to certify that products meet Ilior exceed specified requirements I1416-0015103 Butterfly Valves 151034 Z E L -ENGINEERS- i SECTION 15103 t BUTTERFLY VALVES D. Test Reports: Submit reports of shop pressure tests, AWWA C504,under provisions of ' Section 01400, Quality Control. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720,Project Record Drawings B. Accurately record actual locations of valves and accessories 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data B. Maintenance Data: Include installation and maintenance instructions,recommended spare parts lists and exploded assembly views of valves, operators and accessories 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING , A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, Materials and Equipment B. Deliver and store valves and accessories in shipping containers with labeling in place in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 6: 1. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of foreign materials into valve body 2. Box, crate, or otherwise completely enclose valves, operators and accessories to protect against damage 1.8 GUARANTY A. Manufacturer shall warranty equipment from defect for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. Warranty shall include all parts, labor, and travel costs. (Per Addendum No. 1) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. DeZurik,Pratt or approved equal ' 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Valve body shall be shall be constructed of cast or ductile iron and shall have 111integrally cast mechanical joint ends or flanged ends as appropriate. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with AWWA C110&C115,working pressure appropriate to the application 2. Valves shall be of the resilient seat type 1416-0015103 Butterfly Valves doe 15103-2 ZEL , —ENGINEERS— . ISECTION 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES I3. The stem shall be one piece. The disc and stem shall be connected by a stainless steel torque plug that shall provide positive engagement 4. The valve shall have upper and lower RTFE inboard stem bearings, isolated from I the line media, and a heavy-duty upper stem bushing 5. . The body shall be ductile iron,with a cast or ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem, I 6. EPDM seat, acetal upper stem bushing, and BUNA-NV-cup stem seal Valves 4 inch and under in diameter shall be equipped with lever operator and 10 degree increment throttling plate IB. Buried or submerged service: 0-ring shaft seals C. Water Service- General Use: I 1. AWWA C504, as modified herein D. Extended Bonnets: The valves shall befitted with extended bonnets of appropriate I length where shown on the drawings. E. Valve actuators shall conform to latest revision of AWWA C504, and shall be designed I to hold the valve in any intermediate position between full open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. The bearing load shall not exceed 1/5 of the compressive strength of the bearing or shaft material. I1. Manual valve operators shall be of the worm gear or traveling nut type and fully enclosed. Units furnished for buried service shall be fully gasketed and grease I packed. Above ground operators shall have a suitable indicator arrow to give valve position at any point from full open to fully closed. Manual operators shall require at least 30 turns of the handwheel to rotate 90°. Operator components I shall, at the extreme operator positions,withstand without damage a pull of 200 lbs. for handwheel or chainwheel operators or an input torque of 300 ft. lbs. for operating nuts. Buried valves shall be provided with extension stem and valve I position indicator or extended bonnet. Where extended bonnets are called for, the shaft,mounting hardware, and connections shall be stainless steel. 2. Electric motor actuators: Butterfly valves for filter control duty shall be fitted I with electric actuators. a. The actuators shall be AWWA C540 as manufactured by Beck or Limitorque for open-close service,non-modulating for two position duty, Iin NEMA 4 enclosures, open/close/intermediate limit switches,torque switches,mechanical dial position indicator, analog position transmitter proportional to valve position, declutchable handwheel,heater,pad- Ilockable Local-Off-Remote selector and Open-Close Selector mounted integral with operator if mounted 5 feet or less from floor(otherwise remote), local off remote selector switch. Power failure mode shall be last Iposition until power returns. Control signal failure mode shall be close unless noted otherwise. Operating time shall be 60 seconds (stop to stop), except air wash valve which shall be 30 seconds. Device Net digital Inetwork inputs. Indicator lights and a 480 volt three phase service. Valve actuators shall provide reversing start and safety and over current protection for the motor. I1416-0015103 Butterfly Valves doe 15103-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 15103 I BUTTERFLY VALVES b. For modulating duty operator shall be similar and shall alter the valve I position in proportion to a 4-20 MA analog command signal. Positioning shall be accomplished by comparing the command signal to position feed I back. An automatic adjustment based on the difference shall move the valve to the required position without overshoot. Open-Hold-Close selector switch shall be provided. Operators for modulating service shall be rated for 600 starts per hour with a minimum of 10 million cycles. c. Inputs: DeviceNet digital network. d. Control Switches: Padlockable Local-Off-Remote Selector, Open-Hold- I Close or Open-Close Selector(See Schedule). e. Control Switch Mounting: Integral with Operator if Operator is mounted less than 5 feet above floor. Remote(accessible from floor)if Operator is I mounted 5 feet above floor or higher. See Drawings. f. Throttling Service Operators: Operators for throttling service shall be rated for a minimum of 600 starts per hour for a minimum of 10 million cycles. Accuracy vs. operating time shall be+1%. g. Communications: Provide digital communications as follows: 1) Actuators shall respond to the following commands from PMCS I via DeviceNet communications. a) OPEN/HOLD/CLOSE Control b) Throttling Control c) Emergency shutdown(ESD) feature to command the actuator to OPEN, CLOSE or remain in last position via jumper arrangement or programmed in non-volatile I memory. Receipt of an ESD signal shall automatically override any existing signal and shall bypass the motor thermostat. I 2.3 SHOP FINISHING A. Reference provisions under Section 09900,Painting and Finishing for surface preparation and painting materials B. Shop paint all ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories,both interior and exterior I for corrosion protection C. Manufacturer's standard paint will be acceptable if it is functionally equivalent to the I specified paint and compatible with the specified field painting D. Surfaces to be painted: I 1. Unfinished surfaces: a. Interior of valves: Epoxy for potable water applications b. Exterior of valves to be buried, submerged,or located in manholes: Epoxy c. Exterior of other valves: Rust-inhibitive primer compatible with finish coat specified in Section 09900,Painting and Finishing. 1416-0015103 Butterfly Valves.doc 15103-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I ' SECTION 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES d. Actuators and accessories: Rust-inhibitive primer compatible with finish coat specified in Section 09900,Painting and Finishing. ' e. Flange faces and interior working parts: Rust-preventative compound 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop test in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 5.2 ' B. Valve to be droptight on completion of tests PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: ' 1. Install valves and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and Section A.5 AWWA C504 2. Provide a union or flanged connection within 2 feet of each threaded end valve ' unless the valve can otherwise be easily removed from piping 3. Set valve and valve boxes plumb 4. Install valve box directly over the valve it serves with the top of the box flush with finish grade 5. Fill around box with earth and thoroughly tamp on all sides 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS A. Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Appendix A of AWWA C504 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordinate inspection of all valves 10 inches andgreater by manufacturer's representative and instruct plant personnel on their operation and maintenance ' B. All valves shall be in place when lines are tested. Any cracked or defective valves discovered in consequence of the testing shall be removed and replaced with sound ' material and the test shall be repeated until a satisfactory test is achieved END OF SECTION 1 I ' 1416-0015103 Butterfly Valves.doc 15103-5 ZEL ' —ENGINEERS— 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15123 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers Stainless Steel Flow Control Slide Gates and operators. 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 13400-Instrumentation B. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. AWWA C540- Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates B. AWWA C561 -Fabricated Stainless Steel Gates C. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A240-Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications E. ASTM A276- Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes F. ASTM A707-Standard Specification for Forged Carbon and Alloy Steel Flanges for Low-Temperature Service G. ASTM B584- Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications ' H. ASTM D2000 -Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications I. ASTM D4020- Standard Specification for Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials ' J. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts,Hex Cap Screws, and Studs K. ASTM F594- Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts ' 1.4 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ' A. The equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and f placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, 1416-0015123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates 15123-1 Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 ..., ,. . . SECTION 15123. STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES I engineering data,inatructiomand recommendations of the equipment manufacturer =less exception .anoted by the engineer. I B. Gates and operators shall be supplied with all the necessary parts and accessories indicated on the drawings,specified,or otherwise required for a eomPlete,Properly , operating installation,and shall be the latest standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the Production d fabricated gates. m C. Leakage. Slide gates shall be substantially watertdghtimder the design head conditions. II Under the design seating head,the leakage shall not exceed 0.05 US gallons.per Minute per foot of seating perimeter.Under the design unseating head,the leakage for heads of 20 feet or less shall net exceed Q.1 US gallons per minute per foot of perimeter.For unseating heads greater than 20 feet,the allowable leakage shall not exceed the rate per foot of perimeter Specified by the following equation: Gal:100171er Minute per foot of perillleteT=0.10*(0.0025 x(unseating head in feet-20). D. Design Head.The Slide gates shall be designed to withstand the design head shown in the gate schedule. E. Seal Performance Test The gate%sealing system shall have proof of design or have been . tested through a cycle test in an abrasive environment and should show that the leakage requirements are still obtained after 25,000 cycles with a minimum deterioration. F. Gates shall be self-contained or non self contained of the rising stem configuration as indicated on the gate schedule. G. Gate Dimensions per as indicated on the gate schedule. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Shop Drawings:. Provide gate layout fabrication and assembly drawings with dimensions. Provide sufficientinformation to verify compliance with specifications I C. Product Data Provide complete data on gate and accessories sufficient to verify compliance with the,specifications. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with size, dimensions,number of turns to open,materials and assembled weights. Indicate II slide gate seating/unseating head(feet) and leakage rate. D. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, drawings showing the I principal dimensions,general constructionandmaterials used in the gate and lift mechanism. E. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, complete engineering design calculations in compliance with AWWA standards latest edition. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 1416-00 15123 Stainless SteeJ Slide Gates 15123-2 ZEL —ENGINEERS— I II SECTION 15123 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES IA. The manufacturer shall have experience in the production of substantially similar equipment, and shall show evidence of satisfactory operation in at least 50 installations. ' The manufacturer's shop welds, welding procedures and welders shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of the latest edition of ASME, Section IX. ' B. The fully assembled gates shall be shop inspected,tested for operation and leakage, and adjusted before shipping. There shall be no assembling or adjusting on the job sites other than for the lifting mechanism. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720, Project Record Documents B. Accurately record actual locations of valves and accessories ' 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data ' B. Maintenance data: Include installation and maintenance instructions,recommended spare parts lists and exploded assembly views of gates, operators and accessories. 1.9 GUARANTY ' A. Manufacturer shall warranty equipment from defect for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. Warranty shall include all parts, labor, and travel costs. (Per Addendum No. 1) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, ' manufacturers offering fabricated slide and weir gates which may be supplied for the work include the following: 1. Rodney Hunt-20 series, Orange,Mass. 2. Golden Harvest-40 series,Burlington,WA 3: Whipps—Athol,MA 01331 4. Dynamic Water Control Gates,Dollard des Ormeaux, Quebec ' 5. Orbinox—MU Series—Amory,MS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Minimum material thickness for gate construction shall be %4 inch B. Frame,yoke, stem guides, and slide—Stainless steel ASTM A240, Type 304L or 316L ' 1416-00 15123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates.doc 15123-3 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— SECTION 15123 ' STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES C. Slide and top seals, slide guides and stem guide liner—Ultra high molecular weight ' polyethylene(UHMWPE), ASTM D4020-96 D. J or P bulb-EPDM,Neoprene or Nitrile ASTM D2000 ' E. Compression Cord-EPDM,Neoprene or Nitrile ASTM Dd2000 111F. Invert seal -Neoprene ASTM D2000 G. Stem- Stainless Steel ASTM A276,Type 303, 304 or 316 1 H. Fasteners -ASTM F593 and F594 GR1 for Type 304 and GR2 for Type 316 I. Crank-ASTM A240, Type 304E or 316E stainless steel J. Pedestal,wall brackets- ASTM A240, ASTM 304, or ASTM 316 Stainless Steel K. Stem cover-Polycarbonate ASTM A707 L. Lift nut-Mang anese bronze, ASTM B584,UNSC86500 , 2.3 FABRICATION A. FRAME 1. The gate frame shall be constructed of structural members or formed plate welded to form a rigid one-piece frame. The frame shall be of the integral flange back design suitable for mounting on a concrete wall with a non-shrink grout pad or a wall thinbie. 2. The frame configuration shall be of the flush-bottom type and shall allow the replacement of the top and side seals without removing the gate frame from the wall or wall thimble. B. SLIDE 1. The slide shall consist of a flat plate reinforced with formed plates or structural members to limit its deflection to 1/720 of the gate's span under the design head. C. GUIDES AND SEALS 1. The guides shall be made of UHMWPE(ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) and shall be of such length as to retain and support at least tow thirds(2/3)of the vertical height of the slide in the fully open position. 2. The sealing system shall maintain efficient sealing in any position of the slide and allow the water to flow only below the slide plate. 3. The flush bottom seal shall be made of resilient EPDM or neoprene set into to bottom member of the frame or attached to the bottom of the gate. Foir submerged gates the neoprene invert seal shall be attached to the slide. i 1416-00 15123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates doe 15123-4 Z E p —ENGINEERS— ISECTION 15123 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES 1 D. LIFT ASSEMBLIES I 1. Stem And Couplings. a. The operating stem shall be of stainless steel designed to trasmit in compression at least 2 times the rated output of the operating manual Ib. mechanism with a 40 lb (178 N) effort on the crank or handwheel. The stem shall have a slenderness ration(L/R) less than 200. The threaded portion of the stem shall have machine cut threads of the Acme I c. type. Where hydraulic,pneumatic or electric operator is used, the stem design force shall not be less than 1.25 times the output thrust of the hydraulic or I pneumatic cylinder with a pressure equal to the maximum working pressure of the supply, or 1.25 times the output thrust of the electric motor in the stalled condition. I 2. For stems in more than one piece and with a diameter of 1 3/4 inches (45 mm) and larger,the different sections shall be joined together by solid couplings. The couplings shall be grooved and keyed and shall be of greater strength than the I stem. Stems with a diameter smaller than 1 %inches (45 mm) shall be pinned to an extension tube. 3. Gates having a width greater than six feet shall be provided with two lifting Imechanisms connected by a tandem shaft. 4. Stem Guides. Stem guides shall be equipped with a UHMWPE bushing. Guides shall be adjustable and spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's Irecommendation. The L/R ratio shall not be greater than200. 5. Stem Cover. Rising stem gates shall be provided with a clear polycarbonate stem cover. The stem cover shall have a cap and condensation vents and a clear mylar Iposition indicating tape. The tape shall be field applied to the stem cover after the gate has been installed and positioned. 6. Yoke. Self-contained gates shall be provided with a yoke made of structural I members or formed plates. The maximum deflection of the yoke shall be 1/360 of the gate's span. IE. LIFTING MECHANISM 1. General. Operators of the types listed in the schedule shall be provided by the gate manufacturer. Each manual operator shall be designed to operate the gate under Ithe maximum specified seating and unseating heads by using a maximum effort of 40 lb on the crank or handwheel,and shall be able to withstand,without damage, an effort of 80 lb. I2. Gearboxes. Gearboxes shall be provided when required to maintain the operating force below 40 lb. All bearings and gears shall be totally enclosed in a weather I tight housing. The pinion shaft fo crank-operated mechanisms shall be constructed of stainless steel and supported by roller or needle bearings. 3. Manual Actuators. The operating shaft shall be fitted with a 2-inch square ' operating nut and removeable crank. The crank shall be fitted with a corrosion- resistant rotating handle. The maximum crank radius shall be 15-inches and the maximum handwheel diameter shall be 24-inches. Actuator shall be located approximately 36 inches from operating floor. I 1416-0015123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates.doc 15123-5 Z E L ' —ENGINEERS— k. SECTION 15123 I STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES 4. Electric Actuators. Electric actuators shall be provided where required. The I actuators shall be AWWA C540 as manufactured by Beck or Limitorque for open- close service,non-modulating,in NEMA 4 304 stainless steel enclosures, I Open/Close/Intermediate limit switches,torque switches,mechanical dial position indicator,de-clutchable handwheel,heater, open-stop-close pushbuttons with indicators, and pad-lockable local-off-remote selector switch integral to actuator. I Actuators shall be rotary input,electric motor driven,with a 24 inch per minute speed of operation between open and closed. The actuator shall be furnished in sealed, cast semi-steel housing with gasketed limit switch cover. The motor 111shall be housed in a NEMA 4 watertight enclosure. Motors shall operate on 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz A.C,unless noted otherwise. Adjustable limit switches shall be provided to terminate valve travel at a specific point of I rotation other than fully opened or fully closed. Power failure mode shall be last position until power returns. Control signal failure shall be close unless noted otherwise. The actuator shall be capable of being manually operated in the event I of motor failure. The valve control module shall include open and close push buttons (NEMA 4) and motor starters. a. Throttling Service Operators: Operators for Throttling Service shall be I rated for a minimum of 600 Starts Per Hour for a minimum of 10 million cycles. Accuracy vs. Operating Time shall be±1%. b. Inputs: Provide two-wire control valve actuators as follows: I 1) Actuators shall respond to the following commands from the DCS via RS 485 serial data ports using Modbus,DeviceNet, PROFIBUS,or approved equivalent protocool. I a) OPEN/HOLD/CLOSE Control b) Throttling Control I c) Emergency shutdown(ESD)feature to command the actuator to OPEN, CLOSE or remain in last position via jumper arrangement or programmed in non-volatile memory. Receipt of an ESD signal shall automatically I override any existing signal and shall bypass the motor thermostat. I 2) The following status signals shall be transmitted from the actuator to the DCS via RS 485 serial data ports using Modbus,DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, or approved equivalent protocol. I a) Valve Opening b) Valve Closing c) Valve Opened d) Valve Closed e) Valve stopped in mid-travel f) Actuator Fault g) Line Fault h) Field Unit Fault i) Continuous Valve Position I j) Monitor Relay Trip k) Thermostat Trip 1416-0015123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates.doe 15123-6 Z E —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 15123 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES r1) Local/Stop Pressed m) Local/Remote Selector not in"Remote" n) Torque Switch Trip PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Gates and appurtenances shall be handled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 FIELD TESTS ' A. Following the completion of each gate installation,the gates shall be operated through at least two complete open/close/open cycles. If an electric or hydraulic operator is used, ' limit switches shall be adjusted following the manufacturer's instructions. B. Gates shall be checked for leakage by the contractor after installation(refer to the Performance section for approval criteria). 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IA. Gate Vendor shall provide two (2) eight hour days (not including travel time)of services to start-up and certify installation of gates and gate actuators. 1 END OF SECTION r r 1 1 1416-0015123 Stainless Steel Slide Gates.doc 15123-7 —ENGINEERS I i i i i ISECTION 15140 t SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports ' B. Equipment bases and supports C. Sleeves and seals D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03000-Concrete B. Section 03600-Grout C. Section 05120- Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metal D. Section 07900-Joint Sealants E. Section 09900-Painting and Finishing F. Section 15060-Pipe and Pipe Fittings s g G. Section 15062-Ductile Iron Pipe 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping B. ASME B31.2 -Fuel Gas Piping ' C. ASME B31.5 -Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components D. ASME B31,9 -Building Services Piping E. AISI 304 - Stainless Steel Material Specifications ' F. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc(Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ' G. ASTM F708 -Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers H. ASTM A1011 - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, I ` High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability 1416-00 15wo Supports and Anchors 15140-1 ZEA. —ENGINEERS- SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I. MSS SP58 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials,Design and Manufacturer J. MSS SP69 -Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application K. MSS SP89 -Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices , L. NFPA 13 -Installation of Sprinkler Systems M. NFPA 14- Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems N. UL 203 -Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide complete system of pipe supports and anchors for all piping. L B. Support all piping to prevent undue strain on any valve,fitting or piece of equipment. C. Provide support and anchors at changes in direction, changes in elevation, and adjacent to ' flexible couplings. D. Do not install in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. ' 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pipe support system components to withstand total dead load: ' 1. Dead load:Weight of pipe filled with water plus any insulation 2. Factor of safety: 5.0 minimum B. Pipe restraint system components to withstand thrusts created by fluid pressure within pipes: 1. Factor of safety: 5.0 minimum C. Hangers and Supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58. D. Do not exceed manufacturers'recommended loads. E. Brace all piping 2.1/2 inch and larger for Seismic Design Category C forces in accordance with the International Building Code. F. Design and select channels and accessories for 25,000 psi maximum stress and 1/360 of , span maximum deflection. G. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer's name,part number and ' applicable site stamped in the part itself for identification. 1 1415-00 15140 supports end Anchors 15140-2 Z E L I —ENGINEERS-- 1 I SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. I B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of hangers. Include location of all .ipe supports IC. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze,multiple pipe, and riser support Ihangers. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components. I 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS IA. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing piping. B. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. IC. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS IA. Stainless steel, 304L B. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. I2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Manufacturers: IA. 1. Clevis hangers: a. ITT Grinnell b. Unistrut Corporation Ic. B-Line by Eaton d. Or accepted substitution 2. Pipe clamps: I a. ITT Grinnell b. Unistrut Corporation c. B-Line by Eaton Id. Or accepted substitution I, I3496-OO 15140 Supports and Anes 15140-3 Z Ei L -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 2.3 MODULAR FRAMING STRUT SYSTEMS ' A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Corporation 2. Elcen Metal Product Company 3. Other approved manufacturers offering equivalent products 2.4 ACCESSORIES ' A. Hanger rods: Stainless steel, 304L,threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuous threaded 2.5 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated floors: 18 gage Stainless steel, 304L ' B. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated beams,walls, footings, and potentially wet floors: Stainless steel, 304L C. Sleeves for round ductwork: Stainless steel,304L D. Sleeves for rectangular ductwork: Stainless steel, 304L E. Sealant:refer to Section 07900,Joint Sealants 2.6 FINISHING A. All hangers,rods,clamps,protective shields,metal framing support components, and hanger accessories: Stainless steel, 304L unless otherwise indicated or specified no coating required. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions B. Pipe supports and anchors are not indicated on Drawings in all locations;provide adequate support for all pipes as necessary and as specified in PART 2—PRODUCTS. C. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to accommodate insulation thickness. , 3.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork before concrete is poured. ' B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams 1416-0015140 Supports and Anchors 15140-4 Z E L I —ENGINEERS- 1 I _ SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches in diameter. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted,drill throughconcrete slab from below blow and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and recessed into and grouted flush with slab. ' 3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled or as necessary and specified in PART 2— PRODUCTS. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub,with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide multiple or trapeze hangers. ' H. Support riser piping independently of connected d hox7zontal piping. ' I. Piping connections to equipment: Provide pipe support adjacent to equipment. J. Do not support lower pipe from pipe above. ' K. Support pipe 1-1/2 inch minimum from walls and 3 inch minimum below ceilings. L. Primecoat exposed steel angers and supports.Refer to Section 09900,Painting and FinishingHangers`and supportslocated in crawl spaces,pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. M. Paint galvanized hangers and supports in chlorine, dechlorination and feed rooms. 3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete,minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Refer to Section I 03000, Concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 1 - _ 1416.0015140 Supports and Anchors 15140-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 15140 _,- SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1 C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. ' D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.5 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors,and roofs, 3.6 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. r B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor,ceiling,or w 1, close off space between pipe 1 or duct and adjacent work with insulation and caulk. Provide closefitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 MODULAR FRAMING STRUT A. Install level and plumb. B. Attach to structural surfaces with chemical adhesive anchors or as indicated on the ' Drawings. C. May be used for equipment support framing,pipe and conduit hangers,lighting fixture hangers,and other miscellaneous framing, except where indicated otherwise on Drawings. i 1 1 1 1416-00 15140 Supports and Anchors ZELc�ora —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I3.8 SCHEDULES A. Maximum hanger/support spacing and minimum rod diameter for steel,cast or ductile Iiron pipes: Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter I Inches Feet ._ inches 1/2 to 1-14 5 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 8 3/8 I 2-1/2 to 3 9 1/2 4to6 10 5/8-3/4 8 to 12 14 7/8— 1 I C.I. Bell and Spigot(or No-Hub) 5 Same as for steel And at joints IB. Maximum hanger/support spacing and minimum rod diameter for FRP and PVC pipes: Reduce hanger spacing for liquid or air temperatures greater than 68 degrees F per Imanufacturers instructions Pipe Size Max.Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter Inches Feet Inches ILess than 1 Continuous Support Same as for steel 1 4 Same as for steel -1/4 to 2 5 Same as for steel Ii 3 to 6 6 Same as for steel 8 to 12 8 Same as for steel I C. Maximum hanger/support spacing and minimum rod diameter for copper and stainless steel piping: 1. Spacing: I a. 1 inch and small: 5 feet maximum b. 1-1/4 inch and larger: 2 feet less tkan maximum spacing for steel pipe of same size I2. Hanger rod size: Same as for steel END OF SECTION I I 1 I1416-00 15140 Supports and Anchors 15140-7 Z E L ^ENGINEERS— I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS ' PARTY GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Division 16,ELECTRICAL, covers the work necessary for the complete electrical system. Furnish materials, labor, and equipment in accordance with these Specifications ' and the accompanying Drawings 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 13400-Instrumentation and Controls B. Section 16050-Electrical-Basic Materials ' C. Section 16075 -Electrical Identification ' D. Section 16110-Raceways E. Section 16120- Conductors F. Section 16130-Boxes F G. Section 16441 -Safety Switches I H. Section 16450- Grounding ' I. Section 16461 -Dry-Type Transformers J. Section 16470 -Panelboards iK. Section 16500-Lighting 1.3 WORK PROVIDED OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT ' A. Incomingunderground dcrgr und ansforrner primary power cables,materials,installation,, termination,and connection,under this Contract,provide trench,and backfill,and duct system. B. Transformers supplying main electrical service to the facility; site preparation and ' transformer pad included in this Contract. C. Power company metering facilities, except as indicated. 1 I 1416-00 16010 General Provisions 16010-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 1601.0: ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS ' 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS WITH RACEWAY AND ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS FURNISHED, INSTALLED,AND CONNECTED UNDER DIVISION 16,ELECTRICAL A. All Equipment shown on the plans with an electrical or control wiring connection shown on the plans. B. Section 13400—Instrumentation and Controls 1.5 INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The electrical drawings were developed from information supplied by the Owner. Verify 1 all scaled dimensions prior to submitting bids. B. Before submitting a bid,visit the site and determine conditions at the site and at all I • existing structures in order to become familiar with all existing conditions and electrical systems which will, in any way or manner, affect the work required under this Contract. No subsequent increase in Contract cost will be allowed for additional work required ' because of the Contractor's failure to fulfill this requirement. 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY I A. The Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents. 2. Coordinating the incoming electrical service with the electric utility company providing service. 3. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for all ± , Specification Divisions which affect the work covered under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 4. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or specified,but which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating(IESCR): The short circuit current at the line terminals of an assembly which the assembly can interrupt without damage beyond that allowed by NEMA or UL for the short circuit design test for similar equipment;unless otherwise noted,IESCR is expressed in 3-phase, symmetrical,rms amps. 1.8 INTENT OF DRAWINGS 1 A. Electrical plan drawings show only general locations of equipment, devices,and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper routing of raceway, subject to the review of the Engineer. 7416-0036070General Pmvia16010-2 ZELoas —ENGINEERS- 1 I SECTION 16010 I ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.9 DEPARTURES FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I A. Submit to the Engineer in writingdetails of any necessary,proposed departures from these Contract Documents and the reasons therefore. Make no such departures without Iwritten review of the Engineer. 1.10 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT IA. In accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents,manufacturers' names and catalog numbers stated herein are intended to indicate the type and quality of I equipment or materials desired. Unless substitution is specifically forbidden,proposed alternatives may be submitted for approval. I B. Make requests for review of alternatives in writing to the Engineer before submittals of shop drawings. Provide sufficient material or data to allow evaluation of the proposed alternative and determination of compliance with these Contract Documents. List any 111 proposed deviations from these Contract Documents. 1.11 STANDARDS, CODES,PERMITS,AND REGULATIONS: IA. Perform all work; furnish and install all materials and equipment in full accordance with the latest applicable rules,regulations,requirements,and specifications of the following: 1. Local Laws and Ordinances. 2. State and Federal Laws. ' 3. National Electrical CodeE (N C). 4. State Fire Marshall. I5. Underwriters" Laboratories(UL). 6. National Electrical Safety Code(NESC). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 1 8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA). 9. National Electrical Contractor's Association(NECA) Standard of Installation. 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE). I11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association(ICEA). 12. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 13. National Electrical Testing Association(META). 1 14. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). B. Conflicts,if any, that may exist between the above items will be resolved at the discretion Iof the Engineer. C. Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the above I items,the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings govern. Code compliance is mandatory. Construe nothing in the Contract Documents as permitting work not in compliance with these codes. I D. Obtain all permits and pay all fees required by any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Arrange all inspections required by these agencies. On I ,a,e.00 16010ceaeral r,ovn;ons 16010-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I 1 SECTION 16010 1 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS completion of the work, furnish satisfactory evidence to the Engineer that the work is acceptable to the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Provide complete manufacturers'descriptive information and shop drawings for equipment,material, and devices furnished under Division 16,ELECTRICAL, interconnection and connection diagrams,in accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. In addition to submittals for specific items that may be mentioned in other sections, furnish shop drawing information and submittal data on the following items as applicable to the project: - 1. Switchgear 2. Panelboards. 3. Separately mounted circuit breakers and nonfused disconnect switches. 4. PVC conduit. 5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 6. Wireway. 7. Pull boxes and junction boxes with any dimension over 12 inches. 8. Terminal junction boxes. 9. Precast handholes. 10. 600-volt conductors. 11. Control cable. 12. Lighting fixtures. 13. Emergency lighting units. 14. Light poles. 15. Pushbuttons,Indicating Lights, Selector Switches: devices'and stations . 16. Elapsed time meters,separately mounted. 17. Control relays and timers, separately mounted. ' 18. Dry type small power transformers, 0-600V primary. 19. Surge protective equipment. 20. Automatic transfer switches. 21. Lightning protection system. 22. Conductor and Field Test Data 23. Short circuit and protective device coordination study. D. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with provisions of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, in these Contract Documents. Provide the number of copies specified therein containing: 1. Information required by GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. ' 16010-4 Z E L 1416-00 16010 G®cal Provisions —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. Information listed under individual specification items. ' 3. Provide reproducible time-current coordination study. 1.13 GUARANTY ' Materials, equipment,and workmanship shall be guaranteed nteed m accordance with provisions of General Conditions in these Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT, COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL 1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide all first-quality,new materials and equipment, free from any defects,in first-class condition, and suitable for the space provided. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL wherever standards have been ' 2, established by that agency. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or ' equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. STANDARD PRODUCTS Unless otherwise indicated,provide materials and equipment which are the standard ' products ucts of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Provide the manufacturers'latest standard design that conforms to these ' Specifications. C. CLASSIFICATION OF AREAS 1. The following areas are classified nonhazardous and shall use watertight, dusttight, and corrosion resistant NEMA 4X materials and methods unless ' otherwise specified under specific equipment section or noted otherwise on drawings: Outdoor Areas, Chemical Building ' 2. The following areas axe classified nonhazardous and shall use raintight NEMA 3R materials and methods, unless otherwise noted. Piping Gallery,High Service Pump Room ' 3. The following areas are not classified and shall use dusttight NEMA 1A or NEMA 12 materials and methods: All areas not covered above. D. EQUIPMENT FINISH Unless otherwise indicated,provide materials and equipment with manufacturers' ' standard finish system. Provide manufacturers' standard finish color, except where ' 1416-00 16010 General Frgvis ma 16010-5 Z E L. -ENGINEERS- 111 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS- 1 specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with ANSI No. 61,light gray color. , E. EQUIPMENT RATINGS Equipment shall be applied only within its rating. Equipment ratings shown are, minimums. Voltage and current ratings shall be as required to adequately power the connected equipment. Fault current ratings shall be as shown for the particular item or for the next upstream device that has a fault current rating shown. F. ALTITUDE Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under rated conditions at the elevations given on the plans in feet above mean sea level. G. OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT Provide equipment and devices to be installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable for continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 10 degrees F to 110 degrees F. If the equipment being provided will not work within these ambient temperatures,then additional heating or cooling must be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2. MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR ALL ITEMS , A. Provide all fasteners and mounting hardware of Type 316 stainless steel. This shall include screws, anchors,bolts,nuts,fasteners,rivets,or any other fastening or mounting hardware. B. Unistrut: Provide all unistrut mounting channel made of Aluminum or Stainless Steel and all track and mounting hardware for unistrut out of Stainless Steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install materials and equipment correctly using workers skilled in the Particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. Carry out work in accordance with NEMA Standard of Installation,unless otherwise specified. B. Coordinate electrical work with Engineer and work of other trades to avoid conflicts, , � errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with operation of the plant during construction. C. Check the approximate locations of light fixtures, electrical outlets, equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems and equipment having furred locations. In 1436-00 16010 Geml rro,.is:ons 16010-6 Z E L —ENGINEERS ' 1 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS the event of conflicts,notify the Engineer in writing. The Engineer's decision shall govern. Make modifications and changes required to correct conflicts. ' 3.2 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Throughout this Contract,provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage in accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents. Throughout this Contract,follow manufacturers'recommendations for storage. Protect everything from the effects of weather. Prior to installation,store items in clean, dry, indoor locations. Store in clean, dry, indoor,heated locations items subject to corrosion ' under damp'conditions, and items containing electrical insulation, such as transformers, conductors,motors,and controls. Energize all space heaters furnished with equipment. Provide temporary heating, sufficient to prevent condensation,in transformers, switchboards,motors, and motor control centers which do not have space heaters. B. Following installation,protect materials and equipment from corrosion,physical damage, and the effects of moisture on insulation. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at the Contractor's convenience in areas where it is subject to dampness,moisture, dirt, or other adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ' ensure that adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided that is acceptable to the Engineer. Cap conduit runs during construction with manufactured seals. Keep openings in boxes or equipment closed during construction. Energize all space heaters furnished with equipment. 3.3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturers'installation instructions explicitly,unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between the manufacturers'instructions, codes and regulations,and these Contract Documents, follow Engineer's decision. Keep copy of manufacturers'installation instructions on the jobsite available for review at all times. B. Use appropriate conduit and conductor entry fittings with enclosures which maintain the ' specified enclosure environmental capability after proper installation. 3.4 REMOVAL OR RELOCATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Where existing materials and equipment are removed or relocated,remove all materials at pals no longer used such as studs,straps, conduits, and wires. Remove or cut off concealed or ' embedded conduit,boxes, or other materials and equipment to a point at least 3/4-inch below the final finished surface. ' B. Repair affected surfaces to conform to the type, quality, and finish of the surrounding surface in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow specific instructions given by the equipment manufacturer. I ' ZEL 1416-0016010 General PIDVISiuns 16010-7 —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS ' 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully carry out any cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors,walls,partitions, ceilings,paving,or other surfaces required for the installation, support,or anchorage of conduit,raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such work,restore surfaces neatly to original condition. Use skilled craftsmen of the trades involved. 3.6 LOAD BALANCE A. The Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution , equipment. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards,motor control centers, etc. 3.7 MOTOR ROTATION A. After final service connections are made,check and correct the rotation of all motors. ' B. Coordinate rotation checks with the Engineer and the Contractor responsible for the driven equipment. Submit a written report to the Engineer for each motor verifying that rotation has been checked and corrected. 3.8 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of work,remove all materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch up scratches, scrapes,or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish. ? ' if extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces,refinish the entire equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than the factory finish,that meets the requirements of the Specifications,and that is acceptable to the Engineer. 3.9 INSPECTION A. Allow materials, equipment, and workmanship to be inspected at any time by the ' Engineer, or their representatives. Correct work,materials,or equipment not in accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. ' 3.10 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION-OMITTED 3.11 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP ' A. During checkout and startup of the various plant systems,provide a crew of skilled craftsmen to be available for checkout and troubleshooting activities as required by the EL 7416.00 16010 Gcoeral Pro}�5ions 16010-$ Z —ENGINEERS— L 1 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS ' Engineer. Since coordination with other crafts and contractors will often be required,the craftsmen assigned to checkout must be available outside normal working hours when necessary. ' 3.12 TESTS. A. Carry out tests specified hereinafter and as indicated under individual items of materials and equipment specified in other sections. B. OPERATIONS: After the electrical system installation is completed and at such time as ' the Engineer may indicate,conduct an operating test for approval. Demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and Drawings. Demonstrate that protective functions are operating properly and are properly incorporated in control system., circuit breaker, and motor control center circuitry. Perform the test in the presence of the Engineer. Furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. The Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. ' C. VOLTAGE: When the installation is essentially complete and the plant is in operation, check the voltage at the point of termination of the power company supply system to the ' project. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions. D. Record the supply voltage(all three phases simultaneous on the,same graph) for 24 hours ' during a normal working day. Submit the recording with a letter of transmittal to the Owner and his authorized representative within 5 days of the date the test was taken. E. If an unbalance(as defined by NEMA)exceeds 1 percent, or if the voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded conditions more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal,make a written request to the power company,with a copy to the t Owner and his authorized representative,that the condition be corrected. If corrections are not made, obtain from a responsible power company official a written statement that the voltage variations and/or unbalance are within their normal standards. Send a copy of ' this statement with a transmittal letter to the Owner and his authorized representative. F. EQUIPMENT.LINE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE: Check the line current and voltage in ' each phase for each piece of equipment. If the power company makes adjustments to the supply voltage magnitude or balance,make the line current check after the adjustments are made. If any phase current in any piece of equipment is above the rated nameplate ' current, determine the cause of the problem and submit it in writing to the Engineer. G. CONDUCTOR AND EQUIPMENT FIELD TESTS ' 1. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary test equipment and labor to test the insulation of the electrical equipment and circuits before they are energized. A 500-volt megger shall be used to test the insulation resistance of equipment and circuits insulated for 600 volts. 1416-0016010 General Provisions 16010-9 Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16010 1 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. The insulation to ground of each conductor shall be tested and must be at least 5 megohms. The insulation resistance of motors shall be at least 80 percent of the factory test value. The insulation resistance of motors for which factory test values are not available must be at least equal to the values required for low voltage transformers. 3. The insulation resistance of low voltage transformers must be at least as great as the following values: Casep Temperature Test Value 0 12.0 10 7.0 20 4.2 30 2.5 40 1.5 50 1.0 4. Any equipment which does not pass test shall be replaced or repaired to bring the insulation resistance up to the value of comparable new equipment. Any piece of equipment which passes the above test but is significantly below values obtained for comparable new equipment or which the Contractor or the Engineer believe to be faulty on the basis of insulation resistance tests shall be replaced or repaired as above. 5. A written record of all insulation resistance tests shall be kept. The test records shall show the Contractor,tester,witness(if any),date, air temperature at test site, test instrument manufacturer,model and serial number. For each tested circuit or apparatus,the records shall show the test voltage and test results in megohms. These records shall be turned over to the Engineer on request or at the end of the work. H. METER TESTING: After installation,each meter in an electrical assembly shall be 1 calibrated by NEC traceable standards. Where metering circuits include instrumentation transformers,the circuits shall be calibrated using primary injection A record of the calibration, certifying the calibration and fitness of the standards,shall be submitted to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 1 1416.QD16010General t avAiMs 16010-10 Z-eNGi-NEEas. 1 SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install, complete,the materials specified hereinafter. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010- Electrical—General Provisions 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. B. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. ' D. NEMA ICS 3 -Industrial Systems. E. NEMA ICS 6 -Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. F. IEE-All applicable standards G. UL-All applicable standards 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. P B. Provide complete manufacturers'descriptive information and shop drawings for equipment,material, and devices furnished under Division 16,ELECTRICAL, interconnection and connection diagrams,in accordance with provisions elsewhere in ' these Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. When service entrance work is required provide materials and work, as required by the telectric utility which will provide service to the facility,for installation of service conductors, and mounting of utility company equipment. All such materials and work shall meet the requirements of the utility company. 14 6-oo moso B ste Mnaieis 16050-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS 2.2 WIRING DEVICES I A. Switches: y 1, General Use Switches: Provide specification grade,totally-enclosed, actype,quiet tumbler switches meeting NEMA WD 1 performance standards and Federal I Specification W-S-896E,and capable of control of 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads. Use switches rated at 20 amps, 120/277 volts. Provide operating handles colored ivory in office areas, and brown in all other areas. Switches shall have screw terminals. 2. Weatherproof Switches: Use switches as specified mounted in a cast metal box with gasketed,weatherproof device plate as specified. 3. Switches with Pilot Lights: Provide switches as specified with 125 volt,neon light with red jewel,or lighted toggle whichis lighted etricen the Hubbe Hubbell,tch is ON. Passand Seymour,or 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bryant, General equal. B. Receptacles: 1. Single and Duplex: Provide specification grade receptacles meeting NEMA WD 1 performance standards and Federal Specification W-C 596, and having a contact arrangement such that contact is made on two sides of each inserted blade without detent. Use two-pole,three wire grounding type receptacles rated 20 amps, 125 volts,NEMA Configuration 5-20R,and with screw type wire terminals suitable for No. 10 AWG. Provide high strength thermoplastic bases colored ivory. Acceptable ' manufacturers: Bryant,General Electric,Hubbell,Pass and Seymour, Sierra,or equal. 2. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles shall be specified above mounted in a cast I metal box with gasketed,weatherproof device plate as specified below. 3. Ground Fault interrupter(GFI)Receptacles: Provide duplex specification grade GFCI receptacles tripping at 5 milliamps;rated 20 amps, 120 volts,NEMA Configuration 5-20R. Use units meeting NEMA WD 1,fitting standard sized outlet boxes,having provision for needed. not use feedlor. Use thru model�Ac Acceptable dard model where ground fault protection is I manufacturers: Pass and Seymour,Arrow Hart, Hubbel,or equal. 4. Corrosion-Resistant Receptacles: Receptacles shall meet the requirements for single and duplex Receptacles, above. Receptacle bodies shall be made from polycarbonate I or other corrosion-resistant material. Metal parts shall be stainless steel or nickel plated brass or bronze. Receptacles shall be mounted in a nonmetallic box with a gasketed corrosion-resistant device plate as specified below. I 5._ Special Purpose Receptacles:Provide receptacles of the type,rating, and number of poles indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Furnish a matching plug with cord-grip features for each special purpose receptacle. C. Device Plates: 1. Provide plates fitting closely and tightly to the box on which they are to be installed. On surface mounted boxes,provide plates which do not extend beyond the sides of I 1416-00 16050 Basic Materials 16050-2 'iets —E NGI N EEAS— I 11 SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS I the box unless the plates do not have sharp corners or edges. Flush mount plates shall be oversize style plates. 2. Use plate material compatible with the box material such that galvanic corrosion of I 3. the plate and/or box does not occur. Metal(M)Plates: Provide specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal minimal thickness,No. 430 satin finish stainless steel device plates with oval-head, I 4. matching mounting screws. Engraved Plates:•Where device titles are indicated,provide device plates engraved with the designated titles. Provide engraved letters,numbers, or characters 3/16-inch I 5. high with filler of red color. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper,Arrow Hart, Leviton,or equal. IDWeatherproof(WP)Plates: . 1. Where weatherproof receptacles are designated, the receptacle shall be installed in the specified box with a gasketed,weatherproof, cast metal or stainless steel cover plate with individual cap over each receptacle opening and stainless steel mounting I screws. Utilize plates with caps held tightly closed with stainless steel springs when receptacle is not in use. Acceptable manufacturers: General Electric,Bryant, I Hubbell, Sierra, Pass and Seymour, Crouse-Hinds, Bell,or equal. 2. Where weatherproof switches are designated, the switch shall be installed in the specified box with a gasketed, weatherproof,cast metal cover plate incorporating an external operator for the internal switch and with stainless steel mounting screws. I Acceptable manufacturers and types: Crouse-Hinds DS-181 or DS-185,Appleton FSK-1VTS or FSK-1 VS, or equal. 3. Raised Sheet Metal (SM)Plates: Provide 1/2-inch high zinc-or cadmium-plated Isteel device plates designed for one-piece drawn type sheet steel boxes. 4. Corrosion-Resistant(CR)Plates: Where corrosion-resistant receptacles are designated,the receptacle shall be installed in the specified box with a gasketed, Iweatherproof,corrosion-resistant,nonmetallic cover plate individual cap over each receptacle opening and stainless steel mounting screws. Use plates with caps held tightly closed with stainless steel springs when receptacle is not in use. Acceptable Imanufacturers: General Electric,Hubbell, or equal. 2.3 FUSES, 0 TO 600 VOLTS I A. Provide a complete set of current-limiting fuses whenever fuses are indicated. Supply a I set of six spare fuses of each type and each current rating installed. Utilize fuses that fit mountings specified with switches and which provide features rejecting Class H fuses. Provide the following types : I 1. For 0-to 600-volt motor and transformer circuits, 0 to 600 amps,UL Class RK-1 with time delay,Bussmann Type LPS-RK, Shawmut Type A6D-R,or equal. a. For 0-to 250-volt motor and transformer circuits, 0 to 600 amps,UL Class RK-1 with time delay,Bussmann Type LPN-RK, Shawmut Type A2D-R, I or equal. I7416.00 16050 Basic Materials 16050-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16050' BASIC MATERIALS 2. For 0-to 600-volt feeder and service circuits, 0 to 600 amps,UL Class RK-1, Bussmann Type KTS-R, Shawmut Type A6K-R,or equal. 3. For 0-to 250-volt feeder and service circuits, 0 to 600 amps,UL Class RK-1, Bussmann Type KTN-R, Shawmut Type A2K-R, or equal. 2.4 PUSHBUTTONS, INDICATING LIGHTS, AND SELECTOR SWITCHES A. For nonhazardous,indoor,dry locations,including motor control centers,control panels, and individual stations,provide heavy-duty,oiltight type pushbuttons,indicating lights, selector switches,and stations for these devices. Utilize Square D DType K,Alien Bradley,Cutler-Hammer Type T,or other acceptable B. For nonhazardous, outdoor,or normally wet locations, or where otherwise indicated, provide heavy-duty corrosion-resistant,watertight type pushbuttons, or indicating lights, or selector switches mounted in NEMA 4X watertight enclosures. Provide special gasketing required to make complete station watertight. Utilize Square D Type SK, or equivalent by Alien Bradley, Cutler-Hammer,or other manufacturers. C. Provide devices meeting the requirements of NEMA ICS 2, and having individual, extra large nameplates indicating their specific function. Provide pushbutton stations with laminated plastic nameplates indicating the drive they control. Provide contacts with NEMA designation rating A600. Install provisions for locking pushbuttons and selector switches in the OFF position wherever lockout provisions are indicated. D. Utilize selector switches having standard operating levers. Make all indicating lights transformer push-to-test type. Provide ON or START pushbuttons colored black. Provide OFF or STOP pushbuttons colored red. 2.5 TERMINAL BLOCKS 0 TO 600 VOLTS A. Provide terminal blocks for termination of control circuits at enclosures and for ' termination of power and control conductors where shown. Terminal blocks shall be solderless box lug type,rated for the highest phase-to-phase voltage used in the enclosure. Provide terminal blocks manufactured by Square D,General Electric, or equal. 2.6 CONTROL RELAYS A. Provide magnetic control relays,NEMA Class A600(600 volts, 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break),industrial control type with field convertible contacts, and meeting the requirements of NEMA ICS 2. Provide Cutler-Hammer Type M-600, General Electric Type CR120B,or equal. B. Where time delay relays are specified or required,units shall have adjustable time delay with the number of contacts and contact arrangements required. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amperes at 120V ac. Integral knob with calibrated scale shall be provided for adjustment of time delay. Time delay range shall be at least 10:1. Operating voltage shall be 120V ac,plus 10 percent, -15 percent at 60-Hz. Repeat timing accuracy shall be 341e00 16050 Basic r�t 16050-4 ZEL —ENGINEERS— ISECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS ' plus or minus 10 percent over the operating range. Units shall be Agastat Series 7000, or equal. ' C. Where latching(mechanically held)relays or motor thermal detector relays are specified, provide magnetic control relays with mechanical latch attachment with unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts. Utilize an attachment allowing easy manual latching and ' unlatching. 2.7 ELAPSED TIME METERS A. Provide synchronous-motor-driven, elapsed time meters, 0 to 99,999.9 hours range, nonreset type, suitable for semiflush,panel mounting. Provide General Electric Type ' 240, 2-1/2-inch Big Look unit,Eagle Signal Bulletin 705 unit, or equal. 2.8 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS ' A. Provide contactors of the NEMA sizes indicated. Mount contactors in NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated. Mount contactors located in Chlorine Building in NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures. Utilize contactors manufactured and ' rated in accordance with NEMA ICS 2. 2.9 MAGNETIC LIGHTING CONTACTORS -OMITTED 2.10 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES -OMITTED 2.11 CHANNEL FRAMING ' A. Provide Unistrut channel framing,fittings, and hardware of stainless steel in corrosive areas and aluminum in other areas. Contractor may propose, for review by the Engineer, a welded framework as a substitution provided there is no additional cost to the Owner. 2.12 PHASE REVERSAL RELAY-OMITTED 1 2.13 SWITCHBOARD MATTING A. Provide 36-inch wide switchboard matting having a breakdown of 20 kV,minimum. Manufacturers: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company; or equal. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING DEVICES ' A. Switches: Mount switches for switch operation in the vertical position. B. Receptacles: Mount receptacles with grounding slot up except where horizontal mounting is indicated, in which case mount with neutral slot Lip. Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire,not by yoke or screw contact. Mount weatherproof receptacles with the hinge for the protective cover above(not at side, or below)the receptacle opening. 1416-0016050 Basic Materiels 16050-5 ZEIL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16050. BASIC MATERIALS C. Mounting Heights: 1. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor 2. Install wall convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor 3. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor 4. Special Purpose Receptacles:,Locate special purpose receptacles where shown. Install and mount the receptacles in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the applicable codes. D. Device Plates: Securely fasten device plates to switch or receptacle boxes or the wiring device contained therein. Install device plates used with flush mounted boxes with all four edges in continuous contact with the finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar materials. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable. Install device plates vertically or horizontally with an alignment tolerance of 1/16-inch. Do not use sectional type device plates. I 3.2 SWITCHBOARD MATTING A. Install switchboard matting at switchboards,motor control centers, and panelboards. ' Matting shall run the full length of all sides of equipment which have operator controls or provide acces's to devices. 3.3 SPD INSTALLATION A. SPD shall be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions with lead lengths as short and straight as possible. Gently twist conductors together. B. SPD shall be installed on the load side of the main disconnect or as directed by engineer. 1 END OF SECTION I 1 16050-6 ' 1416.00 16050 Basic Materials —ENGINEERS— SECTION.16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION IPART I GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IThis section includes electrical identification materials 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 16050-Basic Materials ande M thods IB. Section 16130-Boxes C. Section 16441 - Safety Switches ID. Section 16470-Panelboards 1.3 REFERENCES I A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1 1.4 'SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340,Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. IB. Product data: Provide catalog data for nameplates and wire markers. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES IA. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic,white letters on black background. Edges shall be chamfered. Minimum size shall be 1 inch high by 2.5 inches wide. IB. Locations: Major items of electrical equipment including switchboards,motor control centers,panelboards,individual starters,safety switches,transformers and individual components of switchboards and motor control centers shall be marked with a nameplate Ito identify the equipment. C. Letter Size: II. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual loads. 2. Use 1/2 inch letters for identifying equipment and grouped loads. I2.2 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Terra-Tape I ,. 2. or equal I 1416-00 16075 Electrical Idetakation 16075-1 Z E L ENGINEERS- I SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ' red plastic tape of 6-inch rr inj num width for usein B. Description. Provide heavy-gauge, trenches containing electric circuits. Utilize tape made of material resistant to corrosive soil. Use tape with printed warning that an electric circuit is located below the tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 1 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Warning Tapes:Bury warning tapes approximately 12 inches above all underground conduit runs or duct banks. Align parallel to,and within 12 inches of the centerline of runs. END OF SECTION i I —ENGINEERS—' I 1416-00 16075 Electrical 111m63 iwn 16075-2 ZEL 111 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install,complete,electrical raceway systems. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 16010-Electrical- General Provisions B. Section 03000- Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Produt Data and Samples. B. Multiple Channel Prewired Raceway submittals shall show the complete layout of all products that make up the complete system prior to installation with raceway lengths, ' f device type,locations and circuit identification. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT(GRC) ' A. Use Galvanized rigid steel conduit, including couplings,bushings, elbows,nipples, and other fittings,hot-dip galvanized and meeting the requirements of UL and the NEC. Do ' not use setscrew type couplings,bushings, elbows,nipples,and other fittings,unless approved by the Engineer. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be threaded on both ends and threads shall be hot-dip galvanized after cutting. Shall be produced in accordance ' with UL safety standard#6 and ANSI C80.1. 2.2 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT(IMC) ' A. Use intermediate metal conduit, including couplings, bushings, elbows,nipples, and other fittings,hot-dip galvanized and meeting the requirements of UL and the NEC. Do not use setscrew type couplings,bushings, elbows,nipples, and other fittings,unless approved by the Engineer.Intermediate metal conduit shall be threaded on both ends and threads shall be hot-dip galvanized after cutting. Shall be produced in accordance with UL safety standard#1242 and ANSI C80.6. 1 , ' 14l6-001e11011z 16110-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 2.3 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING(EMT) A. Use electric metallic tubing, couplings,bushings, elbows,nipples, and other fittings meeting the requirements of ANSI C80.3,ANSI C80.4,UL, and the NEC. Use only compression type couplings,bushings,elbows,nipples, and other fittings,unless approved by the Engineer. 2.4 PVC SCHEDULE 40 CONDUIT ' A. Use rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit,UL listed for concrete-encased, and marked fur use diect wt burial, concealed and direct sunlight exposed se conduits,se, and L listed and bushings, elbows, conductors having 90 degrees C insulation. nipples,and other fittings meeting the requirements of NEMA TC 2 and TC 3,Federal Specification W-C-1094,UL,NEC, and ASTM specified tests for the intended use. Use only conduit with a factory formed bell on one end. Conduit that requires the use of couplings for straight runs will not be acceptable. 2.5 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT LIQUID-TIGHT ' A. Use UL listed liquid-tight flexible metal conduit consisting of galvanized bushings conduit covered with an extruded PVC jacket and terminated w nylon ' bushings with steel or malleable iron body and insulated throat and sealing 0-ring. 2.6 PVC COATED GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT A. NEMA RN-1 and UL-6 rigid steel conduit with factory applied external 40 mil PVC coating and urethane interior coating. Must carry the EFL PVC-001 verged label Prior': to coating,treat conduit with a heat polymerizing adhesive so the bod'between metal and: coating is greater than the tensile strength of the coating. All couplings, fittings,conduit bodies,pipe straps,U bolts,beam clamps,flex connections and other accessories shall ' have factory applied PVC coating. Use PVC coated hubfor connection KorKof coated Cote. conduits—locknuts are not acceptable.Manufacturers: Plast-Bond, , 2.7 WIREWAYS A. Provide screw-cover,indoor, outdoor,rain tight, steel-enclosed wireway and auxiliary gutter where indicated. Utilize wireways and fittings that are UL listed,have a cover that can easily be removed, and have a gray,baked enamel finish. Manufacturers and types: Square D Square-Duct; General Electric Type HS;or equal. 2.8 RACEWAY FITTINGS • A. Use insulated throat bushings of metal with integral plastic bushings rated for Nylon Ddegrees C. For insulated throat bushings for rigid steel conduit,use Thomas &Betts Insulated Metallic Bushings,or O.Z. Gedney Type B. B. Use Myers Scru-Tite hubs. 16110-2 ' 1416-00{6]10Raccways -ENGINEERS- i - SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS C. Use conduit bodies for rigid steel conduit of metal and sized as required by the NEC (NFPA 70-1984). Use Appleton Form 35 threaded Unilets; Crouse-Hinds Mark 9 or Form 7 threaded condulets; Killark Series 0 Electrolets; or equal,for normal conduit ' bodies for rigid steel conduit. Where conduit bodies for rigid steel conduit are required to be approved for hazardous(classified)locations,use conduit bodies manufactured by Appleton, or Crouse-Hinds. ' D. Use Appleton Type EYF,EYM,or ESU; or Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or EZS; sealing fittings for rigid steel conduit. Where condensate may collect on top of a seal,provide a drain by using Appleton Type SF or Crouse-Hinds Type EYD or EZD Drain Seal. ' E. Use Appleton Type ECDB or Crouse-Hinds ECD drain fittings for rigid steel conduit. ' F. Fittings for Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Use insulated throat connectors for liquid-tight flexible metal conduit of metal with an integral plastic bushing rated for 105°C, and of the long design type extending outside of the box or other device at least 2- inches. Use Thomas&Betts Super-Tice Nylon Insulated Connectors, or equal. G. Use cable sealing fittings forming a watertight nonslip connection to pass cords and cables into conduit. Size cable sealing fitting for the conductor OD. For conductors with OD's of 1/2 inch or less,provide a neoprene bushing where the conductor enters the connector. Use Crouse-Hinds CGBS, Appleton CG Series,or equal, cable sealing fittings. 2.9 CABLE TRAY A. A cable tray system shall be furnished to support interlocked armor cable as shown on the drawings. The cable tray system shall be aluminum ladder type,6" flange out, and 9" rung spacing. Tray shall be of widths shown on the drawings, and shall include all components to make a complete system. B. Cable tray shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with NEMA Standard VE1, ' and shall be Class 12B. Tray supports shall be furnished and installed on 10' centers. Tray deflection shall be no more than 0.43"when loaded to 100 lbs/linear ft. with 10' ' span length. C. Expansion connectors shall be used on all straight runs to prevent forces from expansion on support members. Grounding conductors shall be installed as shown on the Drawings, ' and clamps installed at each section of tray. Wall sleeves shall be furnished and installed where trays enter building, and shall be sealed after cables are installed to prevent entry of moisture. D. Tray shall be Type A9PB Electra aluminum ladder as Y manufactured by MPHusky,or equal by P-W Industries, Inc. � t FILENAME\ MERGEFGRMAT 1416-00 16110.Rscewsys 16110-3 ZEL _ENGINEERS_ I L. .._ - __ I SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 2.10 MULTIPLE CHANNEL PREWIRED RACEWAY System A. The multioutlet assembly specified herein shall be the Isoduct Prewired Series AL4320, as manufactured by Wiremold. Manufacturers requesting consideration as an alternative to the Isoduct Prewired Systems shall submit documentation establishing their product equality at least 10 days prior to bid date. Request shall include documentation of UL listings as both a Multioutlet Assembly and a Surface Metal Raceway and include a sample of the prewired components. A list of similarinstallations in service e e considered equal,o rs or longer must be provided. Systems of other manufacturersmay in the opinion, and the written approval of the engineer,thay meet all the performance standards specified herein. ' B Materials: 1. Raceway shall have two(2)wiring compartments with field removable covers. Raceway shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.078". Multiple compartment raceway shall have an integral deviding barrier isolating wiring compartments and provided with fittings that maintain the separation of compartments. Raceway covers shall be 12"in length to facilitate future modification. must Raceway to removable with a standard straight blade screwdriver without marring. have two covers and must allow each cover to be removed separately without allowing access into the compartment enclosed by the other cover. 2, Raceway shall be manufactured of extruded#6063-T5 aluminum and have an Ivory Power Coat finish. Dimensions of the raceway shall be 5-1/4" W x 1-3/4 H and each length of raceway shall be cut to specified job requirements. Field cutting of raceway will not be permitted. 3. Each receptacle shall be identified noting the panel number and circuit number from which it is fed. Receptacles rated higher than a NEMA 5-20R configuration shall also be provided with voltage,phase and amperage identified in the same manner. Raceway sections shall be provided with 12" [304.8mm]pigtails at feed locations for ease of installation. Grounding shall be maintained by means of factory installed NEC sized grounding conductor(s)and utilize insulation displacement connectors as required. ' 44, Raceway covers shall have either holecut provision for communications outlets,if Wiremold Interlink Cabling System data connectors are used,or the voice and data/LAN outlets shall be factory mounted to the cover plates. The raceway must be I capable of containing,but not limited to, snap-in modular jacks (3-pair,4-pair,4-pair keyed and MMJ),coaxial and F-connectors and communication grommets. Wiring connections of these devices shall be completed at the jobsite by the appointed I contractor. 5. The multioutlet assembly is to consist of factory assembled product with a full complement of fittings including,but not limited to, elbows(90°,internal and external), slide couplings for joining raceway sections,blank end caps for closing I open ends of the raceway, and flat tees. 6. The raceway manufacturer will provide a complete line of connectivity outlets and I F modular inserts for UTP (including Category 5), STP(150 ohm)Fiber Optic, 1 1416-0O 16110 Raceways 16110-4 SEL _E.G.._ 1 ENOI NEERS- 1 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS Coaxial and other cabling types with face plates and bezels to facilitate mounting. A complete line of preprinted station and port identification labels, snap-in icon buttons as well as write-on station identification labels shall be available. 2.11 ELECTRICAL PRECAST HANDHOLES -OMITTED 2.12 COMMUNICATIONS HANDHOLE-OMITTED 2.13 RACEWAY TAGS A. Provide permanent,nonferrous metal markers with raceway designations pressure stamped,embossed, or engraved onto the tag. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. Attach tags to raceways with noncorrosive wire. 2.14 WARNING TAPE ' A. Provide heavy-gauge,red plastic tape of 6-inch minimum width for use in trenches containing electric circuits. Utilize tape made of material resistant to corrosive soil. Use tape with printed warning that an electric circuit is located below the tape. Manufacturers ' and types: ITT Blackburn Type RT; Griffolyn Co. Terra-Tape; or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide raceway systems meeting or exceeding the requirements of the NEC. 3.2 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION ' A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions,Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS,prior to installation, store all products specified in this section in a dry location. Following ' installation,protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. Keep openings in conduit and tubing capped with manufactured seals during construction. 3.3 MINIMUM RACEWAY SIZE A. Conduit runs smaller than 3/4"trade size shall not be used except 1/2" conduit maybe used for making attachments to equipment which,because of its construction,will not accept a larger size conduit. Lengths of 1/2" conduits shall be as short as possible. ' 3.4 REQUIRED RACEWAY TYPE FOR LOCATION AND INSTALLATION METHOD A. Exterior, Exposed: GRC. B. Interior, Exposed: IMC. ' 1416-00 16110 Raceways 16110-5 Z E L,,.. -ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS C. Corrosive,Nonhazardous Areas: PVC coated GRC. D. Interior, Concealed(Not Embedded in Concrete): IMC. E. Interior, Concealed above ceiling(Not Embedded in Concrete): EMT I F. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls or Floors: PVC, G. Underground,Direct Earth Burial: PVC Schedule 40 conduit. I H. Concrete Encased Raceways: 1. GRC for analog circuits. 2. PVC Schedule 40 conduit for all other circuits. I. Under Concrete Floor Slabs: PVC. J. Analog: GRC,IMC or PVC coated GRC(dependant on location). 3.5 FINAL CONNECTION TO CERTAIN EQUIPMENT A. Make final connection to motors,wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters,dry type transformers,valves,local instrumentation, and other equipment where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration or where required to facilitate removal or adjustment of equipment,with 18-inch minimum, 60-inch maximum lengths of liquid- tight,PVC jacketed, flexible steel conduit where the required conduit size is 4 inches or less. For larger sizes,use nonflexible conduit as specified. B. The flexible conduit shall be long enough to allow the item to which is connected to be 1 withdrawn or moved off its base. Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit in all areas. C. Special Locations:Use GRC: ' 1. Where conduit changes from underground and/or concrete embedded to exposed. 2. Under equipment mounting pads. ' 3. In exterior light pole foundations. D. Contractor shall use conduit types as specified in section 3.4 unless noted otherwise on drawings. 3.6 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR RACEWAYS 1 A. Location,Routing, and Grouping: 1. Conceal or expose raceways as indicated. Group raceways in same area together. Locate raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of heated piping for other utility systems. 1416-00 16119 Raceways 16110-6 ZEL EN6ii1R8 1 I SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS` I 2. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members,or intersections of vertical planes to provide a neat appearance. Follow surface contours as much as possible. 3, Avoid obstruction of passageways. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of I . bends in the shortest practical distance considering the building construction and other systems. I 4. In block walls, do not run raceways in the same horizontal course with reinforcing steel. 5. Do not route conduits in concrete wall or slabs unless specifically stated on drawings I . 6. or approved by engineer. In outdoor,underground,or wet locations,use watertight couplings and connections in raceways. Install and equip boxes and fittings so as to prevent water from entering I 7; the raceway. Paint all threads of galvanized conduits that are installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound before assembling. Touch up after assembly to cover nicks or scars. I 8 Do not notch or penetrate structural members for passage of raceways except with prior approval of the Engineer. 9. Do not run raceways in equipment foundation pads. I 10. Locate aboveground raceways concealed in poured concrete so that the minimum concrete covering is not less than 1-1/2 inches. Iii. Avoid trapped runs, where possible. Aboveground trapped runs shall have a drain fitting installed at the low point. 12. Except at raceway crossings, separate raceways in slabs not less than six times the raceway outside diameter. I13. Raceways installed under slab floors shall lie completely under the slab with no part of the horizontal run of the raceway embedded within the slab. 14. Install concealed, embedded,and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles I to the surface and have none of the curved portion of the bend exposed. Provide support during pouring of concrete to ensure that raceways remain in position. 15. Support raceways at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements unless otherwise I indicated. Support multiple raceways adjacent to each other by ceiling trapeze. Support individual raceways by wall brackets, strap hangers,or ceiling trapeze, fastened by wood screws on wood,toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion I shields on concrete or brick,and machine screws or welded thread studs on steelwork. 16. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and Inuts may be used in lieu of expansion shields. 17. Support all raceways from structural members only. Do not support from pipe hangers or rods, cable tray, or other conduit. I18. Do not use nails anywhere or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry as a base for raceway or box fastenings. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers. 11, 19. Appropriate pulleys and supports shal be used during cable installation to prevent damage to cable jackets. I 1416-00 16110 Raceways 16110-7 Z E L -ENGINEERS- 1 . , I SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 1 B. Bends: I 1. Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. Make bends and offsets of the longest practical radius. Avoid field-made bends and offsets where possible. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. 2. Factory elbows may be used in parallel or banked raceways. ' 3. For PVC conduits,use factory-made elbows for all bends. 4. Make no bends in flexible conduit that are smaller than allowable bending radius of the cable to be installed or that significantly restricts the conduit's flexibility. I C. Bushing and Insulating Sleeves: 1. Where metallic conduit enters metal equipment enclosures through conduit openings, install a bonding bushing on the end of each conduit. Install a bonding jumper from the bushing to any equipment ground bus or ground pad. 2. If neither exists, connect the jumper to a lag-bolt connection to the metallic enclosure. 3. Use manufacturer's standard insulating sleeves in all metallic conduits terminating at an enclosure. I 4. All metal conduits terminating at NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X enclosures shal use Myers SRU-TITE hubs. 5. Expansion Joints:Provide suitable expansion fittings for raceways crossing I expansion joints in structures or concrete slabs,or provide other suitable means to compensate for expansion and contraction. Provide for the high rate of thermal expansion and contraction of PVC conduit by providing PVC expansion joints as I recommended by the manufacturer and as required. D. PVC Conduit: Chamfer the end of all PVC manufactunduit. servr. Follow manufacturer's solvent joints with solvent recommended by the conduit welding instructions and provide watertight joints. Use acceptable PVC terminal adapters when joining PVC conduit to metallic fittings. Use acceptable PVC female adapters when joining PVC conduit to rigid metal conduit or IMC. E. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Conduit: Installers of PVC coated Galvanized Rigid I conduit shall be certified by the manufacturer and be able to present a valid,unexpired installer card upon inspection. 3.7 PENETRATIONS I A. Seal the interior of all raceways entering structures at the first box or outlet with oakum or suitable plastic expandable compound to prevent the entrance into the structure of I gases,liquids,or rodents. B. Dry pack with nonshrink grout around raceways that penetrate concrete walls, floors, or I ceilings aboveground, or use one of the methods specified for underground penetrations. C. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or a membrane waterproofed wall or floor,provide an acceptable,malleable iron,watertight, entrance 1416-00 16110 Raceways 16110-8 ZEL '—ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 16110 ` RACEWAYS sealing device. When there is no raceway concrete encasement specified or indicated, ' provide such a device having a gland type sealing assembly at each end with pressure bushings, which may be tightened at any time. When there is raceway concrete ' encasement specified or indicated,provide such a device with a gland type sealing assembly on the accessible side. Securely anchor all such devices into the masonry construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to such devices in a permanently watertight manner. D. Where an underground raceway ay without concrete encasement enters a structure through a nonwaterproofed wall or floor,install a sleeve made of Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Fill the space between the conduit and sleeve with a suitable plastic expandable compound,or an oakum and lead joint, on each side of the wall or floor in such a manner as to prevent entrance of moisture. A watertight entrance sealing device as specified may be used in lieu of the sleeve. E. Where raceways penetrate fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, fire stop openings around ' electrical penetrations to maintain the fire resistance rating. 3.8 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGROUND DIRECT BURIAL CONCRETE-ENCASED RACEWAYS A. Coordinate installation of underground raceways with other outside and building construction work. Maintain existing outside utilities in operation unless otherwise G authorized by the Engineer. B. Remove entirely and properly reinstall all raceway installations not in compliance with ' these requirements. C. Do not use union type fittings underground. D. Provide a minimum cover of 2 feet over all underground raceways unless otherwise Y indicated. E. Where a concrete-encased duct bank is installed over an extensive area of disturbed earth such as that within the periphery of a building,provide a separate concrete base under the duct bank to ensure stability of raceways during installation. Allow this base to set before the duct bank is installed. ' F. Do not backfill underground direct burial and concrete-encased raceways until they have been inspected by the Engineer. G. Warning Tapes: Bury warning tapes approximately 12 inches above all underground ' conduit runs or duct banks. Align parallel to and within 12 inches of the centerline of runs. ' 1416-0016110R $ys 16110=9 ZEL L —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS , 3.9 SEPARATION AND SUPPORT A. Separate parallel runs of two or more raceways in a single trench with preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for the purpose. Install spacers at intervals not greater than that specified in the NEC for support of the type raceways used, and in no case greater than 10 feet. B. Support raceways installed in fill areas to prevent accidental bending until backfilling is complete. Tie raceways to supports, and raceways and supports to the ground, so that raceways will not be displaced when concrete encasement or earth backfill is placed. 3.10 ARRANGEMENT AND ROUTING 1 A. Arrange multiple conduit runs substantially in accordance with any details shown on the Drawings. Locate underground conduits where indicated on the Drawings. B. Make minor changes in location or cross-section as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. Where raceway runs cannot be installed substantially as shown because of conditions not discoverable prior to digging of trenches,refer the condition to the Engineer for instructions before further work is done. are encountered or being C. Where other utility piping systems installed along a raceway route,maintain a 1 2-inbh minimum vertical separation between raceways and other systems at crossings. Maintain a 12-inch minimum separation between raceways and other systems in parallel runs. Do not place raceways over valves or couplings in other piping systems. Refer conflicts with these requirements to the Engineer for instructions before further work is done. D. Provide insulated grounding bushings on all metallic raceways entering handholes. Provide bell-ends flush with handhole walls on all nonmetallic raceways entering handholes. E. Provide markers at grade to indicate the direction of underground conduits provided under this Contract. Provide markers consisting of double-ended arrows,straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction. Provide markers at all bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. Use markers made of sheet bronze not less than 1/4-inch thick embedded in and secured to the top of concrete posts. Use markers not less than 10 inches long and 3/4-inch wide and marked ELECTRIC CABLES in letters 1/4 inch high incised into the bronze to a depth of 3/32 inch. F. All conduits shall enter handholes and structures at right angles. G. Raceway Coating: Coat all metallic conduit embedded in the slab or buried under the slab ' and a minimum 6-inch coating length where metallic conduit exits concrete or ground. Coating shall be a bitumastic coating with a final coat thickness a minimum of 10mils. 111 1416-00 lfi]lORscwisye 1611040 ZEL I SECTION 16110. RACEWAYS DIRECT EARTH BURIAL CONDUIT ZONE BACKFILL INSTALLATION P3.11 A. Backfill material for the conduit zone of direct burial conduit d trenches may be selected from the excavated material if it is free from roots,foreign material,and oversized Iparticles. Use material with 3/4-inch maximum particle size and suitable gradation for satisfactory compaction. Remove material if necessary to meet these requirements. I B. Imported 3/4-inch minus gravel or sand may be used in lieu of material from the excavation. I C. After conduits have been properly installed,backfill the french with specified material placed around the conduits and carefully tamped around and over them with hand tampers. Final,tamped conduit cover shall be 4 inches minimum. I3.12 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT I A. Concrete for electrical conduit encasement shall be standard mix with pea gravel aggregate,with admixture to produce red color. Admixture shall be 3%by weight of pure synthetic red iron oxide uniformly mixed into the concrete. Use 3,000 psi concrete as specified in Section 03000, Concrete. IB. Maintain a grade of at least 4 incheser 100 feet, either from m one handhole or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them,depending on the surface contour. I C. Hold conduits for concrete-encased raceways securely in place by acceptable window P type spacer supports. Where,in the opinion of the Engineer, ground conditions are such I as to require concrete forms, install forms constructed of materials and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. No vgriations greater than 1/2 inch in 50 feet will be permitted from a straight line. ID. Envelopes may be poured directly against the sides of trenches if the cut is clean, even, and free of loose material. Remove loose material from trenches before and during I pouring of concrete to ensure sound envelopes. Carefully spade concrete during pouring to eliminate all voids under and between raceways and honeycombing of the exterior surface. IE. Do not use power-driven tampers or agitators unless they are specifically designed for the application, in order to ensure that the watertight integrity of the raceways is maintained. F. Generally,pour an entire concrete envelope in one continuous pour. Where more than one pour is necessary,terminate each pour in a sloped plane, and insert 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending into the concrete 18 inches minimum on each side of I the joint. Obtain Engineer's approval for the number and location of dowels. G. Provide reinforcement where envelopes connect to handholes or building structures to I! prevent shearing of joints. I ZEL 1416.0016110 Racevaya 16110-11 —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS1 3.13 BACKFILL INSTALLATION A. Above Conduit Zone of Direct Burial Conduit or Above Concrete Envelope of Concrete Encased Conduit: Backfill material above the conduit zone of direct burial conduit or above concrete envelope of concrete-encased conduit maybe selected from the excavated material,if it contains no particles larger than 3 inches in diameter and is free from roots or debris. Imported material meeting these same requirements may be used in lieu of material from the excavation. Compact backfill in maximum 12-inch layers to at least 95 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by AASHTO T 180. 3.14 HANDHOLES -OMITTED ' 3.15 WIREWAYS A_ Mount wireways securely in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer's instructions. Locate removable cover or hinged cover on accessible vertical face of wireway unless otherwise indicated. 3.16 PREPARATION FOR PULLING IN CONDUCTORS A. Do not installY crushed or deformed raceways. Take care to prevent the lodging of plaster, ' concrete, dirt, or trash in raceways,boxes,fittings, and equipment during the course of construction. Make raceways entirely free of obstructions or replace them. Ream all raceways,remove burrs, and clean raceway interior before introducing conductors or pull wires. plugor capall racewayends with watertight and dust-tight , B. Immediately after installation, seals until the time for pulling in conductors. C. For concrete-encased raceways, after the concrete envelope has set,pull a mandrel of a diameter approximately 1/4 inch less than the raceway inside diameter,through each raceway. Then pull a bristle brush through each raceway to remove debris. 3.17 EMPTY RACEWAYS A. Certain raceways may have no.conductors pulled in as part of this Contract. Identify with tags at each end and at any intermediate pull point the origin and destination of each such empty raceway. Where a raceway has been identified with a name(number)in a Raceway Schedule,use that name on the tag in lieu of origin and destination. Provide a ' removable permanent cap over each end of each empty raceway. Provide a nylon pull cord in each empty raceway. END OF SECTION 1 1416-00 6110 n 1611042 ZEL -ENGINEERS- 1 wrwrrrrllrwrr►„ ,__._....... SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers the work necessaryto furnish and install, complete, electrical p conductor systems. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010- Electrical—General Provisions B. Section 16075 -Electrical Identification ' 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Provide complete manufacturers'descriptive information and shop drawings for equipment,material, and devices furnished. 1.5 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM ' A. Provide complete power and control conductor identification system so that after installation,circuits can be easily traced from origin to final destination. iB. Identify power and control conductors with preselected circuit name at each termination and in all accessible locations such as handholes,panels, switchboards,pull boxes, ' terminal boxes, etc. For identification,use type of tags specified herein. C. Tag circuits by using the circuit name in the Circuit Schedule if given. D. For circuits that do not appear in the Circuit Schedules or if a circuit schedule is not given, assign a circuit name based on the device or equipment at the load end of the circuit. Where this would result in the same name being assigned to more than one ' circuit,add a number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique. E. Before tagging the circuits, submit a list of circuit names to the Engineer for approval ' prior to any use of that list.Include in this list circuit names not appearing in the Circuit Schedules, along with the same circuit information as is given for circuits in the Schedules if a schedule is given. ' F. Change any circuit name that the Engineer finds unacceptable. 1415-00 16120 Conductors 16120-1 Z E —ENGINEERS- i Iu _ SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS ' 1.6 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING I A. Color coding of multiconductor control and instrumentation cable is specified in the individual cable type specification. B. For power conductors,provide all single conductors and individual conductors of multiconductor poorer call With integral insulation pigmentation of the designated colors,_except Conductors larger than No,6 AWG maybe provided with color coding by wrapping the conductor at each end and at all accessible locations with vinyltape.Where this method of color coding is used,wrap at least six full overlapping turns of tape around the conductor covering an area 1-1/2 to 2 inches wide at a visible location. C. Phase A,B, C implies the direction of positive phase.rotation. ' D. Use the following colors: System Conductor Color All systems Equipment Grounding Green ' ' 208Y/120 volts Grounded neutral White 3-phase,4-wire, and Phase A Black ' circuits derived Phase B Red therefrom without Phase C Blue transformation 480Y/277 volts Grounded neutral White,Black Tracer ' 3-phase,4-wire,and circuits Phase A Brown derived therefrom without Phase B Orange transformation Phase C Yellow II PART 2 PRODUCTS li 2.1 GENERAL I A. Meuse of a manufacturer's name and model.or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only Products of I other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the General Conditions- 2.2 CONDUCTORS I A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, strandedprovide solid conductors where No. 10 AWG and No. 12 AWG are designated fobranch circuit I power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits. , 3416-O0 16120 Conductors ZE 16120-2 o�s —ENGINEERS— I 1 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS 2. Utilize only conductors meeting applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, WC 7, and ICEA S-19-81, S-61-402, and S-66-524. 3. Provide conductors with Type THHN/THWN insulation, except for sizes No. 6 and larger,provide conductors with XIHW insulation. 4. Provide copper conductors. Unless noted otherwise, conductor sizes indicated are based on copper conductors. Do not provide conductors smaller than those indicated. ' 5, For direct burial conductors and cables,provide conductors with UL labeling"TYPE USE" and RHW insulation with heavy-duty,black,neoprene sheath meeting the physical requirements and minimum thickness requirements of ICEA S-19-81 and ' NEMAWC3. 6; Where flexible cords and cables are specified,provide Type SO, 600 volt,with the number and size of copper conductors as required. ' 2.3 CONDUCTORS ACCESSORIES (LOW VOLTAGE) A. Splices for No. 10 and smaller wire shall be self-insulated crimp connectors,Thomas& ' Betts Sta-Kon,Burndy Insulink,or equal. Splices and terminations for No. 8 and larger wire shall be wide range compression type,designed for installation with a dieless tool and shall be Square D VERSAtile connectors,or equal.Terminations for No. 10 and smaller wire shall be self-insulating crimp connectors,which lock to a screw head and shall be Thomas &Betts Sta-Kon Locking Spade,Burndy Vinylug Flanged-Fork-Tongue Terminal,or equal. Tools for installing the above connectors shall be designed for a complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until the connection is completed. Such tools shall be Thomas&Betts Shure-Stake,Burndy Hytool MR8, Square D VERSA- CRIMP tool, or equal. "! B. Wire ties shall be Thomas&Betts Ty-Rap Cable Ties,or equal.Where wire or cord is exposed,Thomas&Betts Ty-Rap Lashing Ties,or equal, shall be used. Cords shall ' terminate in Thomas&Betts Liquid Tight Strain Relief Connectors, or equal. Where hubs would be required for cord connections Thomas and Betts Chase Liquid Tight Cord Connectors, or equal, shall be used. 2.4 MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE A Provide cable that is UL listed Type TC and conforms to the requirements of UL 1277 and NEC Article 340,or UL listed Power Limited Circuit Cable that conforms to the requirements of Article 725 of the National Electrical Code. Provide cables permanently ' and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name, the maximum working voltage for which the cable was tested,the type of cable,and labeled UL(or submit evidence of UL listing). ' B. Provide cables as specified under the type number in this section(Type 1,Type 2, etc.). Conduits shown on the Drawings and in the Circuit/Raceway Schedule have been sized to accommodate the outside diameter for each type. For this reason,use cable diameters I y, equal to or less than the diameters specified. 1. Type 1 (600-Volt Multi-Conductor Control Cable,Type TC): ' 1416-0016320 Conductors 16120-3 _. _. Z E —ENGINEERS- 1 i SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS a. General:Multi-conductor control circuit interconnection cable with or I groin. Suitable forinstillation inopen air,in cable trays, other approved raceways.Minimum cable temperature rating 90 degrees C dry locations,75 degrees C wet locations.Passes vertical tray flame test. b. Individual Conductors:No. 14 AWG,7-strandcopper. insulation . c. Insulation and Jackets: Provide conductors having 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon jacket, and UL listed as Type S 61 02,AppendixCorcode the conductor group in accordance with IC grounding I Method 1,Table K-2.Include one full size green equipment conductor.Bind conductor group with a spiral wrap of barrier tape.. Provide cable with overall outer PVC jacket,which.isflame-retard t, sunlight-and oil resistant,and has a nominal thickness as shown in the table below. d. Use only 7-, 12-, 19-and 25-conductor cables.The green grounding conductor is included in the number of conductors shown in the table below. I No.of Conductors Max.Outside Diameter(inches) Jacket Thickness(Huls) 7 0.48 12 0.65 60 19 0.76 60 25 0.93 60 e. Manufacturers:The Okonite Company,Pome Cable, or approved equal. 2. Type 3 (600-Volt No. 16 AWG Twisted, Shielded Pair Instrumentation Cable,Type TC): a. General: Single pair instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control,computer,or data log applications. Suitable for installation in cable trays,conduit,or other approved raceways:Mininni ni cable temperature rating shall be 90 degrees C dry 1ocatiOns,75 degrees C wet locations. ' b. Individual Conductors:Bare soft annealed copper, Class B,7-strand concentric per ASTM B Si 20 AWG,7-strand titled copper drain wire.: c. Insulation and Jacket:Each conductor 15-mil nominal PVC and.4 mil. nylon insulation.Pair conductors pigmented black and red Jacket flame- . retardant and..sunlight-and oil,resistant PVC with 45 mils nominal thickness. Shield 1.35-mil aluminum/mylar overlapped to provide 100 I percent coverage. d. Dimension: 0.31 inch nominal OD. e. Manufacturers: The Okonite Company,Alpha Wire Corporation,or I approved equal I 16120-4 —ENGINEERS—ZELI 1416-00 16120 Conductors I SECTION 16120. y CONDUCTORS I2.5 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE TAGS A. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. IB. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 12 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking. IC. Provide tags for cables, and for conductors No. 10 AWG and larger,consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate.Attach Ithese marker plates to conductors and cables with nylon tie cord. 2.6 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS IA. Provide stranded copper conductors, as indicated or as required by NEC, for equipment grounding. IB. Provide conductors bare or with green covering. . 2.7 DIRECT BURIED GROUNDING CONDUCTORS IA. Provide bare stranded copper conductors, size as indicated,for the ground system at r transformers,switchgear, and where indicated. IB. Copper-clad steel conductor of equivalent capacity and surface area may be substituted if accepted by the Engineer. I2.8 MOTOR CONDUCTORS FROM VFD A. 600 V, 90°C XHHW2/RHW-2 Anixter B209500-B209507,Belden 29501-29507,or I equal. . Four copper conductors with XLP insulation. 2. Copper Braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire. I3. PVC Jacket. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 GENERAL A. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii.Where pulling compound is used,use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved. IB. Wires shall be gripped either directly or by basket weave pulling grips.Pulling force shall not exceed 0.008 pounds per circular mill cross section. Pull around bends shall not exceed 300 pounds per foot of bend radius. IC Conductors shall not be bent tighter than a bending radius of eight(8) cable diameters. I1416-CO 16120 conductors 16120-5 Z E I —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16120. CONDUCTORS 111 D. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. 1 E. Where single conductors and cables in handholes,junction boxes, and similar locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as are and fireproofing tapes,bundle , throughout their exposed length all conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking,releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on centers. on the Drawings,with no splices except as indicated or F. Run conductors as indicated accepted by the Engineer. 3.2 CONDUCTOR 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 1 A. Provide conductor sizes indicated on Drawings. B. Wire nuts may be used on solid conductors of 120-volt lighting and receptacle circuits only.Place no more than one conductor in any single barrel pressure connector.Use crimp connectors with tools by same manufacturer and/or UL listed for connectors of all stranded conductors. C. Vinyl plastic insulating tape for wire and cable splices and terminations shall be flame ' retardant, 7-mil thick minimum,rated for 90°C minimum meeting the requirements of UL 510. D Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal,remove all burrs, chamfer all edges,and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. ' E. Arrange wiring in cabinets,panels, and motor control centers neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bridle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein. F. Where interlocked armor cables enter enclosures or splice boxes,they shall be terminated ' with properly sized Adalet PLM Type JAG armored cable fittings. 3.3 JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS (LOW VOLTAGE) ' A. All joints, splices,terminations,or other conductor connections shall be compression type, installed with an approved tool. Connections to motor terminals through 15 horsepower may be by rubber wrap cap.Connections to motor terminals above 15 horsepower shall be by tape insulated split bolt connectors. Wire up through No. 1/0 may be terminated directly in tubular clamps and set screw connectors,where provided by the ' manufacturer. Wire up through Size 14 may also be terminated in saddle clamps,where provided by the manufacturer:All other terminations shall be in a specified connector. not be acceptable. B. Soldered mechanical joints willp 141640 16120 CcodudZELurs 16120-6 —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 1612.0 111 CONDUCTORS Terminate e ntr�l:and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals IC. provided,and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions Where terminals provided will accept such lugs,terminate all control and instrumentation wiring(except solid thermocouple leads)with insulated,looking-fork compression.lugs,Thomas&Betts ISta-Kon, or equal. D. For terminals designed to accept.only bare Wire compression terminations,use only Istranded wire,and terminate only one wire per terminal Tighten all terminal screws with torque screwdriver to recommended torque values. I E. Attach compression lugs with a tool.specifically designed for that purpose which provides a complete,controlled crimp where`the tool will not release until the crimp is complete, Use of plier type crimpers is not acceptable. IF. For conductors that will be connected by others,provide at least 6 feet spare conductor in freestanding panels and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies Provide..spare conductors. I in any particular assembly,where it is obvious that more conductors will be needed to reach the termination point. I3.4 CABLES A. Do not splice without permission of the Engineer. Locate splices,when permitted,only in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. I B. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under Section PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM,leave pigtails of Iadequate length for neat bundled type connections. C. Maintaining the integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables is essential to the I operation of the control systems.Take special care in cable installation to ensure that grounds do not occur because of damage to the jacket over the shield. I D. Where conductors carrying both discrete and analog signals are run lathe same item, such as a box or handhole,route analog:and discrete conductors on the opposite side of the item,maintaining as much separation as possible. I3.5 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING TAPES A. Use arc and fireproofing tapes on all 600-volt single conductors and cables except those rated Type TC at splices in all manholes,handholes,vaults, cable trays, arid other indicated locations. IB. Wrap together as a single cable all conductors entering from each conduit. C. Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions. Secure the arc and fireproofing tape I at frequent intervals with bands of the specified glass cloth electrical tape.Make each band of at least two wraps of tape directly over each other. ' 1416.00 16120 Condncton 16120-7 Z E —ENGINEERS— I SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Medium Voltage Cable Testing: I 1. Perform a high voltage dc leakage test on all new 5 kV and 15 kV cable immediately after installation 2. Tests shall be performed by an electrical engineer specializing in electrical cable testing 3. Complete all terminations, connections, and splices prior to testing 4. Isolate cables from all equipment prior to testing 5. Utilize the test voltages and durations recommended by IPCEA for the particular cable construction 6. Record results on forms similar to the sample included in this specification 7. Replace conductors which do not meet IPCEA or manufacturer's specifications B. Low Voltage Cable Testing: 1. Test 600 V power cables for continuity and freedom from short circuits and ground, except where grounding is intentional immediately after installation 2. Test all circuits with a 500 V megger or its equivalent 3. Replace conductors which read less than 1.5 Megohms between conductors and ground, C. Instrumentation Cable:After instrumentation cable installation and conductor termination per the recommendations of the instrumentation and control supplier,perform tests witnessed by the Engineer to ensure that instrumentation cable shields are isolated from I ground, except at the grounding point. Remove all improper grounds. END OF SECTION I I I 1416.00 16120 Conductors 16120-8 Z E L. —ENGINEERS— I I SECTION 16130 1 BOXES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. ' C. Pull and junction boxes. I1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 16110 -Raceways C. Section 16120 -Conductors ' 1.3 REFERENCES: A. NECA- Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. ' C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes,Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2-Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes,Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. ' E. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet,pull, and junction boxes on ' project record documents. ' 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. ' B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1 ' 1416-0016130 Boxes 16130-1 Z E I —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Boxes shall be the type, size and configuration required for its specific use,location, device or fixture to be mounted in or on the box, and number, size and arrangement of raceways connecting thereto. 2.2 OUTLET BOXES ' A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel,unless otherwise specified herein. . I B. Where install exposed to a corrosive atmosphere,rain or spray,boxes shall be corrosion- resistant cast metal with threaded entrances,removable covers,-gaskets,and corrosion- resistant screws. C. Recessed boxes in plaster or gypsum board walls or columns shall be 4"or 4.688" square, 2.125"deep with plaster rings. D. Surface-mounted boxes on walls or columns shall be 4" square,2.125"deep,with no plaster rings or knock-outs. E. Switch boxes with only one conduit entrance shall be single gang. F. Boxes for devices recessed in metal door jambs shall be sheet metal partition boxes sized for the application. G. Recessed boxes in masonry walls shall be square cornered masonry boxes or standard 4" square boxes fitted with square cornered tile covers of proper depth for block. Both type boxes shall be 2.125"minimum depth. H. Recessed boxes in ceilings shall be 4"octagonal or square, 2.125"depth. II. Recessed boxes in concrete shall be UL approved for the application. J. Through-wall type boxes are not acceptable. K. Recessed wall telephone and data boxes shall be 4"deep with single-gang device plaster covers and coverplates. L. Provide specially designed boxes where required for special devices. M. Boxes containing low voltage and line voltage devices or multiple 277V switches, supplied from different phases, shall have metal barriers. N. Boxes for surface-mounted luminairs shall have fixture studs. ' 1..1416-00 16130 Boxes 16130-2 Z E -ENGINEERS- SECTION 16130 BOXES O. Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Efcor,Midland Ross,O-Z/Gedney,Raco,or ' Steel City. 2.3 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes for slabs onade shall be zinc-coated cast ast>ron with integral threaded conduit openings. I1. Boxes shall be watertight, fully adjustable, and constructed to prevent the free entrance of water when the box is embedded in concrete. 2. Boxes shall be provided with a minimum of 2 integral leveling screws for rough ' leveling. Adjusting rings shall provide a minimum 0.75"vertical or angular adjustment of the top after concrete pour and installation of wiring devices. B. A cap shall be provided over the top of each box to protect adjusting ring during concrete pour. C. Floor plates shall be of aluminum construction, configuration as indicated on the ' Drawings. D. Carpet flanges shall be of aluminum construction. E. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds,Hubbell,Pyle National, Steel City,ty,or Thomas&Betts. 2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 1 A. Non-Corrosive Areas ' 1. Boxes shall be constructed of type 5052 H-32 Aluminum unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Boxes shall be of dimensions as required by number and size of connection raceways and wire, and as required by NFPA 70. ' 2. Boxes shall be provided with continuous hinge door with stainless steel door clamp assemblies. 3. Boxes shall be NEMA 4X with Oil-resistant gasket. ' 4. Manufacturers: Hoffman or approved equal. B. Corrosive Areas(Chemical Building&Tank Farm) 1. Boxes shall be constructed of type 304 Stainless Steel unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Boxes shall be of dimensions as required by number and size of connection raceways and wire, and as required by NFPA 70. I 2. Boxes shall be provided with continuous hinge door with stainless steel door clamp assemblies. 3. Boxes shall be NEMA 4X with Oil-resistant gasket. 4. Manufacturers:Hoffinan or approved equal. I r a 1416-00/6130 Boxes 16130-3 SEL -ENGINEERS- SECTION 16130 1 BOXES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices prior to rough-in. Coordinate with architect/engineer so boxes match with furniture layout. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." - B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps,wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated. I D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified or shown on drawings. ' F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches(150 mm)from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. • J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,benches, and backsplashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats, and d similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. I N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. 1 O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls;provide minimum 6 inches(150 mm)separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. 1416-0016130B x 161304 E � i -ENGINEERS- I SECTION 16130 BOXES i Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. I R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. IU. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional I box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. IX. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. I Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Z. Set floor boxes level. I AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged nged enclosure in interior dry locations,surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. I , 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS IA. Coordinate installation of outlet box with wire/cable and raceway installation. B. Coordinate box installation with other trades so that boxes will remain accessible. I3.4 CLEANING IA. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. h. 1 END OF SECTION I I I ' I 1916.00 16130 Boxes 16130-5 ZEL -ENGINEERS- 1 - I 1 1 SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install, e complete,the low-voltage S fused and non-fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 16075 -Electrical Identification C. Section 16450-Grounding 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS-1 -Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum) B. UL-98 -Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: ' 1. Dimensioned outline drawing 2. Conduit entry/exit locations 3. Switch ratings including: ' a. b. Short-circuit rating Voltage c. Continuous current ' 4. Fuse ratings and type 5. Cable terminal sizes 6. Product data sheets 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. The safety switches shall bear a UL label. I 1476-00 16441 SefetySwitrhes 16441-1 Z E L ENGINEERS- SECTION 16441. SAFETY SWITCHES 1.7 DELIVERY A. Storage and Handling: Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One(1)copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. GE ' D. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings,features and functions.Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten(10)days prior to bid date. ' 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings,with the following rating: ' 1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC,DC; 600 volts AC(30A to 200A 600 volts DC) '• 3. 2, 3,4, and 6 poles 4. Fusible and non-fusible 5. Mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors. B. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be visible and plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a red handle that is easily padlockable with three 3/8-inch shank locks in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position, Defeater mechanism shall be front accessible. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base 5. Switches rated 30A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the ON and OFF position. 1 C. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasable,positive quick-make/quick-break type.Bail type mechanisms are not acceptable. t D. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. E. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 1 1476-OO 16441 SdtySwitcbn 16441-2 Z E L —ENGINEERS— i _ SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES F. Suitable for systems capable of 200 kA at 480V with Class J,L,R,or T fusing as Iapplicable. G. Embossed or engraved ON-OFF indication shall be provided. H. Double-make, double-break switch blade feature shall be provided. Fuse pullers shall be provided on all NEMA 4X and 12 switches through 200A. II. J. Renewal parts data shall be shown on the inside of the door. K. All switches shall be manufactured in the USA. L. Enclosures: I1. All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 general purpose unless otherwise noted. 2. Other types,where noted, shall be: a. NEMA 3R rainproof I b. NEMA 4 watertight(800A max.) c. 30A to 200A—304 stainless steel d. 400A to 800A—304 stainless steel Ie. NEMA 12 dust-tight and oil-tight special industry(800A max.). M. Paint color shall be ANSI 61 gray. I7 N. 30A to 100A NEMA 4,4X, and 12 enclosures shall be provided with draw-pull latches. O. All Safety Switches shall be of the heavy-duty type unless noted otherwise on drawings. I 2.3 ENCLOSED ROTARY DISCONNECT SWITCHES I. A. Provide 16-80A ampere rotary disconnect switches as shown on the drawings with the following ratings and characteristics: 1. Padlockable in the OFF position(up to three padlocks)to meet OSHA lockout I requirements. 2. Available in 16-80A ratings 3. 600 Vac, three-and four pole non-fusible device 4. Rated for making and breaking loads I 5. Accepts auxiliary contacts; capability to signal PLC controllers 6. Ground lug connection provided I 7. Possibility of adding one power pole and one auxiliary contact 8. NEMA®Type 1, 3R, 12,4, and 4X 9. Non-fusible switches shall be suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to 10,000A, 1000Vdc. I10. Switches shall have a factory-installed neutral block for terminating grounded conductors when applied on a grounded system. 11. Switches shall be installed with an equipment ground bar. II 1416-00 16441 safetySlvhchec 16441-3 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES 2.4 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplate shall be front cover mounted, containing a permanent record of switch type, 1 ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. PART 3 EXECUTION . 1 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switches in locations as follows. 1. Where shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Where required by the NEC or other governing Code. 3. Where required by local authority having jurisdiction. 4. Where required by manufacturer of equipment. B. Install such that clear working space per NEC Art 110 provided at the disconnect switch. C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases,where required. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer. D. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height,unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base. E. Retain first paragraph below if seismic controls are required for Project. Coordinate with Drawings. F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Sections. G. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporaryliftin eyes,channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All test shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1416.0016441 SafbtySwitcLcx. .. 16441-4 ... ZEA —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers the work necessa to furnish and install,nstall, complete, the electrical grounding system. 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010-Electrical—General Provisions B. Section 16120-Conductors 1 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. B. IEEE-All applicable standards ' C. UL-All applicable standards 1.4 SUBMITTALS IA. Provide under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. Provide complete manufacturers'descriptive information and shop drawings for 1 equipment,material, and devices furnished under this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 GROUND RODS A. Provide copper-clad steel ground rods not less than 3/4 inch in diameter, 10 feet long ' driven full length into the earth. 2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Provide groundingconductors of the size shown and the type specified in Section 16120, Conductors. ' 2.3 GROUND CONNECTIONS ' A. For below grade connections,provide exothermic-welded type of connectors as manufactured by Cadweld,Thermoweld, or equal. B. For above grade connections,provide exothermic-welded, or compression type I connectors. ' 1416.00 16450 Grounding 16450-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL ' A. A green or bare equipment grounding conductor shall be run in each raceway. Such conductors shall be based on the most current edition of the NEC and sized for the highest overcurrent device protecting any conductor in that raceway.The equipment grounding conductors shall be electrically continuous from each piece of equipment to the service ground. B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise,ground all exposed noncurrent-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment,raceway systems, and the neutral of all wiring systems in strict accordance with the NEC, state, and other applicable laws and regulations. C. Where grounding conductors are shown,bond the wires to metallic enclosures at each end and to all intermediate metallic enclosures. Connect grounding conductors to all grounding bushings on raceways.Where any equipment contains a ground bus, extend and connect grounding conductors to that bus. Connect the enclosure of the equipment containing the ground bus to that bus.Run ground conductors inside conduits enclosing the power conductors. ' D. Where an equipment grounding means is not provided,make connections of any grounding conductors to motors 10 hp and above or circuits 20 amps or above by a , solderless terminal and a 5/16-inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing. Ground connections to smaller motors or equipment may be made by fastening the terminal to a connection box. Connect junction boxes to the equipment ' grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on the box or with 3/8-inch machine screws. Completely remove all paint,dirt, or other surface coverings at grounding conductor connection points so that good metal-to-metal contact is made. ' E. Install sufficient ground rods in addition to code required grounding so that resistance to ground as tested by standard methods does not exceed 5 ohm unless otherwise accepted. Where more than one rod is required,install rods at least 6 feet apart. F. Ground shields of any shielded power cable at each splice or termination in accordance with recommendations of the splice or termination manufacturer. Ground shields of any control cables in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Ground metal sheathing and any exposed metal vertical structural elements of buildings. ' Ground metal fences enclosing electrical equipment.Bond any metal equipment platforms,which support electrical equipment to that equipment.Provide good electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations,receptacles, instrument cabinets, etc., and raceways carrying circuits to these devices. H. Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to the system ground network, and to any 1 additional indicated grounding electrodes. ZEL1416-00 ib450 so pro 16450-2 —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16450 GROUNDING 3.2 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS 1 A. Unless shown otherwise,make connections of grounding conductors to ground rods at the upper end of the rod with the end of the rod and the connection point below finished I grade.Provide a capped well, formed of 4-inch PVC conduit, from grade to 2 inches below connection to ground rod,to allow for inspection. IB. Make connections of grounding conductors accessible. C. In handholes, install ground rods with ends 4 to 6 inches above the floor with connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.When making thermite welds,wire I brush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface.Use thermite welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.After welds have been made and cooled,brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly clean the joint.For I compression connectors,use homogeneous copper, anti corrosion, surface treatment compound at connectors in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. Use connectors of proper size for conductors and ground rods specified. Use connector I manufacturer's compression tool. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections. 1 3.3 FIELD TESTS A. The Contractor shall test the resistance of the grounding electrode system by the fall-of- potential method. The Contractor shall supply a Biddle No. 6322 Earth Tester,or equal, and make the test in theresence of the Engineer with p gi grounding conductors disconnected. If the grounding electrode test resistance exceeds 5 ohm,the Contractor I shall add ground rods or other grounding electrodes to the grounding electrode system until the grounding electrode test resistance is 5 ohms or less. Methods, which change soil resistivity, are not acceptable as means of lowering the grounding electrode test Iresistance. This test shall not be made within 24 hours after rainfall. B. Test all ground fault interrupter(GFI)receptacles and circuit breakers for proper Iconnection and operation with methods and instruments prescribed by the manufacturer. C. Provide copies of reports of all grounding system tests for inclusion in Operation and I Maintenance Manuals and for review by the Engineer. END OF SECTION I I I I 1416-0G 16450(hound'mg 16450-3 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose individually mounted dry type transformers of the two-windings type,self-cooled as ' specified herein,and as shown on the contract drawings.Where indicated on the drawings provide K-factor transformers for nonsinusoidal loads 1.2, RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010—General Provisions B. Section 16050—Basic Materials and Methods C. Section 16075-Electrical Identification ' D. Section 16110-Raceways E. Section 16120-Conductors F. Section 16450-Grounding G. Section 16470-Panelboards 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. ' B. NEMA ICS 1 -General Standards for Industrial Control Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2-Standards for Industrial Control Devices,Controllers and Assemblies. ' D. NEMA ICS 3 -Industrial Systems. ' E. NEMA ICS 6-Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. F. IEEE-All applicable standards ' G. UL-Ml applicable standards 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Outline dimensions and weights 1416-0016461 Dry ypelYenttbmwsAddendadoc 16461-1 Z E —ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System m. SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 2. Technical certification sheet 3. Transformer ratings including: I a. kVA b. Primary and secondary voltage c. Taps I d. Basic impulse level(BIL)for equipment over 600 volts e. Design impedance f. Insulation class and temperature rise g. Sound level. 4. Product data sheets C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped,and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins ' for the complete assembly and each major component. D. SUBMITTALS—FOR CONSTRUCTION I 1. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes. 2. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed. 3. Connection diagrams I 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details. 6. The final(as-built)drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS I A. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. u ' B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similarelectrical equipment q 1�ent for a minimum period of five(5)years.When requested by the Engineer,an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with I this requirement. C. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all I applicable seismic requirements of the BOCA National Building Code,paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively,the manufacturer's certification may be based on a detailed computer I analysis of the entire assembly structure and its components.Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment I manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. r i 1416-0016461 Dsy-Typeriensfonnes Mikado doc 16461-2 Z E L --ENGINEERS— • Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I I SECTION 16461 IDRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS D. The test response spectra shall meet or exceed the required response spectra peak I acceleration of 1.6g's(3.2-11 Hz)and a ZPA of 1.0g as specified in the BOCA National Building Code,'for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. 1 1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details,coordinated with the I equipment mounting provision,prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state.Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon • approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. I . The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand,that is, function following the seismic event,including both vertical and lateral required response Ispectra as specified in above codes. C. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved I when the capability of the equipment,meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I1.7 A. "All transformers shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. 1 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I One(1)copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS IA. Cutler-Hammer IB. Square D C. Approved equal ID. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their producXs that do not meet the specified ratings,features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 1 . I 1416-00 ic � �r��Tro, eaa« ao� 16461-3 ZEL 16461n, —ENGINEERS— ' Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System , i SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS I 2.2 RATINGS I A. kVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the drawings. B. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA,for 24 hours a day, I 365 days a year operation,with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96. C. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self- cooled elfcooled ratings: Oto9kV 40 dB 10 to 50 kVA 45 dB I 51 to 150 kVA 50 dB 151 to 300 kVA 55.dB 301 to 500 kVA. 60 dB • 501 to 700 kVA 62 dB I 701 to 1000 kVA 64 dB 1001 to 1500 kVA 65 dB D. Where K-factor transformers are indicated on the drawings,the transformers shall be I specifically designed to supply circuits with a harmonic profile equal to or less than a K- factor of 13 without exceeding 115 degrees C temperature rise. —GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS 1 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Insulation Systems-Transformer insulation system shall be as follows: I 1. Less than 15 kVA: 185 degrees C insulation system with 115 degree C rise, encapsulated design; 15 kVA and above:220 degrees C insulation system with 115 degree C rise,ventilated design. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient,and a 24 hour average ambient of 30 degrees C. I 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. Core and Coil Assemblies: I B. C 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade,nonaging,grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability,and low hysteresis and eddy current I losses.Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the - saturation point.The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10%above thenominal tap voltage.The core laminations shall be ,' tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. 2. On three-phase units rated 15 kVA and above the core and coil assembly shall be I impregnated with non-hydroscopic,thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture.The assembly shall be installed on vibration- absorbing pads. u rr ,,,I, � 16461-4 Z E L t 141640 16461 DryTypdf --^ENGINEERS-- Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 1 SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS C. Taps: ' 1. Three-phase transformers rated 15 through 500 kVA shall be provided with six 2- 1/2%taps,two above and four below rated primary voltage. 2. All single-phase transformers,and three-phase transformers rated below 15 kVA and above 500 kVA,shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard tap configuration. ' D. Electrostatic Shielding: 1. Where shown on the drawings,provide shielded isolation transformers with an electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded. E. NEMA TP-1-1996 Energy Star Labeled: 1. Where shown on the drawings,provide transformers that are low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated at 35%of full load capacity.Transformers shall bear the Energy Star label. ' F. Motor Drive Isolation: 1. Where shown on the drawings,provide motor drive isolation transformers. ' 2. Motor drive isolation transformers shall be designed for use with three-phase AC adjustable frequency drives 600 volts and below to provide isolation between the incoming line and drive circuitry.These drives minimize the line disturbances ' caused by SCR firing within the drive unit. Thermoguards shall be included in all motor drive isolation transformers to provide additional protection for the transformer from increased heating due to the non-sinusoidal characteristics of ' drive currents.The transformer shall provide reduced short-circuit currents and voltage line transients.The transformer shall be specifically sized to the drive kVA requirements dictated by the horsepower of the motor and,as such,will be mechanically braced to withstand the stress of current reversals and short-circuit currents associated with the specific drive kVA rating.Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated at 35%of full load capacity. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION-K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS A. Insulation Systems: 1. Transformers shall be insulated with a UL recognized 220 degrees C insulation system. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient and a 24-hour average ' ambient of 30 degrees C. 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. '. 1416-0016461 Dry-1ypeTwnkrnomaAdde,iadoc 16461-5 Z,E L —ENGINEERS— 111 Addendum 1 Bid Item#17.268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 111 SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 1 B. Core and Coil Assemblies: • 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade,nonaging,grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability,and low hysteresis and eddy current losses.Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point.The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10%above the nominal tap voltage.The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed.Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction.The core shall provide reduced induced currents in the steel caused by the high ratios of peak to-rms currents and voltages found in harmonic loads. 2. The neutral bus shall be configured to accommodate 200%of the rated current. 3. The core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration-absorbing pads. I C. Taps: 1. Three-phase K-factor rated transformers through 300 kVA shall be provided with six 2-1/2%taps,two above and four below rated primary voltage: 2. Single-phase K-factor rated transformers shall be provided with manufacturer's standard tap configuration. D. Electrostatic Shielding: 1. Provide K-rated transformers with electrostatic shielding consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded. 1 2.5 WIRING/TERMINATIONS A. Recommended external cable shall be rated 90 degrees C(sized at 75 degrees C ' ampacity)for encapsulated and 75 degrees C for ventilated designs. Connectors should be selected on the basis of the type and cable size used to wire the specific transformer. 2.6 ENCLOSURE-GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. The enclosure shall be made of heavy-gauge steel.All transformers shall be equipped ' with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring.The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees C.The core of the transformer shall be grounded to the enclosure. B. On three-phase units rated 15 kVA and above and single-phase units rated 15 kVA and abovethe enclosure construction shall be ventilated,NEMA 12,drip proof,with lifting ' holes.All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. ]416-0016461 Dry-•1ypeTiembmias Addendsdoe 16461-6 Z E L --ENGINEERS-- Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 16461 ' DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 2.7 ENCLOSURE-K-FACTOR TRANSFORMER A. The enclosure shall be made of heavy-gauge steel.All transformers shall beui ed � PP with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow ' convenient wiring.The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degrees C rise above a 40 degree C maximum ambient(90 degrees C.)The core of the transformer shall be grounded to the enclosure. ' B. The enclosure construction shall be ventilated,NEMA 2 drip proof,with lifting holes.All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. On outdoor units,provide ' weathershields over ventilated openings. C. FINISH ' 1. Enclosures shall be finished with ANSI 61 color,weather-resistant enamel. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. On ventilated outdoor units provide suitable weather shields over ventilation openings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING ' A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section.All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA ' standards. 1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection ' 3. Applied potential tests 4. Induced potential test 5.. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 3.3 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage. 3.4 FIELD TESTING ' A. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. ' END OF SECTION 1416.00 taw►Gly-Typerranelbimers Aaaena..a� 16461-7 Z E L --ENGINEERS-- Addendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install panelboards as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 16450-Grounding 1 1.3 REFERENCES: A. UL 67-Panelboards B. UL 50- Cabinets and boxes ' C. NEMA PB1 -Panelboards D. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C a. Circuit Breaker—Type I class I b. Fusible Switch—Type II class I ' E. NECA Standard of Installation(published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). F. NEMA AB1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers. G. NEMA ICS 2 -Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. H. NEMA KS1 -Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum). I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment(published by the International Electrical Testing Association). ' J. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Breaker layout drawing and dimensions indicated and nameplate designation 2. component list 1416.0016470Peutlbomds 16470-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS 3, Conduit entry/exit locations I 4. Assembly ratings including a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continous current 5. Cable terminal sizes 6. Product data sheets : C. SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT 1. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements ' in project record documents. 2. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing, source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies,andrecommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly,including circuit breakers and fusible switches. I B. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. `he.m .ufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for ' a MilahllUM period of five(5)years. When requested by the engineer,and acceptable list of installations:with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. as suitable for the I purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacture. ' instructions. One(1)copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. I 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Furnish two of each panelboard key. I A. urn 16470-2 Z E L 1416-00)6470 Pmelboards —ENGIN EERS— 17 0 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS IA. SQUARE D IB. CUTLER HAMMER C. GENERAL ELECTRIC I D. The listing of speeifie manufacturers above does tot imply acceptance of their products: that do not meet the specified ratite;features and functions. Manufactures listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in I compliance with the sp'ee icatton and manufactured by others not-named wall be considered only if pre-approved bythe.engineer� prior to bid.date. To be considered for pre approval, submittals must be received by Enineer a minimuin of 10 days prior to bid I date. 2.2 PANELBOARDS IA. Ratings: 1. Panelboards rated 240V AC or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as herein scheduled,but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS ' symtnetrical.: 2. Panelboards rated 480V AC shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the I drawings or as herin scheduled,but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 3.: Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short-circuit ratings. When series ratings I are applied with integral or remote upstream devices,a label or manual shall be provided. It shall state theconditions of the UL series ratings including: a. Size andtype of upstream device b. Branch devices that can be used c. UL series short-circuit rating B. Construction: 1. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing I adiacentun is and without removing the main bus connectors. 2. Panelboards shall be continuous hinged dor-in-door trim. Door in panelboard; trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semi.flush cylinder lock I and chatch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. Removing trim screws will allow the trim to swing away from the panelboard interior. 3. Di trubition panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching devices handles Ishall be accessible. I2416-0016470PeneIboords 16470-3 Z E —ENGINEERS- I r. I SECTION 16470 I PANELBOARDS 4. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the I box by 3/ of an inch on all sides. 5. A director card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the side of each door. •r 6. All locks shall be keyed alike. C. Bus: 1. Main bus bars shall be copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65°C above an ambient of 40°C maximum. 2. A system ground buliall be included in all panels. 3. Full-size(100%rated)insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards shown with neutral. Bus bar taps'for panels with single-pole branches shall be I ganged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices,. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings°with oversized neutral conductors. D. Branch Circuit Panelboards: 1. The minimum short-circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be as specified berein or as indicated on the drawings 2. Bolt-on.type,heavy-duty quick make,quick-break,single-and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein,shall be provided for each cirait with toggle handles that indicate when unit hs tripped> cin e`handle for all 3. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with coon,.. ' multiple pole circuit breakers Circuit breakers shall be muhimnu t 100-amp frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as:type.SWP for lighting circuits Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type HACR fpr air conditioning equipment circuits. .. ' Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. a. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management,and control system (EMCS)panels and fire alarm panels. 4. Circuit breakers shall have a minimummtemPting rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical at 240 volts,and 14,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 volts,unless otherwise noted on the drawings. E. Distribution Panelboards: 1. Distribution panelboards with bolt-on devices contained therein shall have interrupting ratings as specified herein or indicated on the drawings. Panelboards I shall have molded case circuit breakers as indicated below. 2. Distribution panelboards with plug-on devices contained therein shall have interrupting ratings as indicated on drawings. Panelboards shall have molded case I circ it breakers permanently affixed to plug-on breaker adapter,as indicated below. 7414-0014470 Penelboards 16470-4 ZEL I ENGIN EERS- 1 SECTION 16470. PANELBOAIZDS I 3. Where indicated,provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100%of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure. 4. Provide shunt trips,bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract Idrawings. F. Enclosure: I 1. Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel areed through its box to supply I other electrical equipment,the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.I 2. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends, 3. Where indicated on the drawings,branch circuit panelboards shall be column width type. IG. Nameplates: 1. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section. IH. Finish: 1. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned,primed, and a finish coat of gray ANSI 61 paint applied. I 2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS,INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS I A. General: Provide circuit breakers of the indicating type showing ON/ORP and TRIPPED positions of the operating handle. Do not use single-pole circuit breakers with.handle ties, where.rniiltipele circuit breakers are indicated. Utilize nniltipele circuit breakers I designedso that an overload on one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Provide circuit breakers meeting the requirements of NEMA AB 1. Circuit breakers shall have a Minimum interrupting rating equal to the maximum fault current available at the point of. I application or they shall be part of an assembly with an integratedequipment short circuit rating atleast as great as the fault current available at the point ofapplicatron Where circuit breakers are used as service entrance equipment,provide units UL labeled for that I use. Provide circuit breakers suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C ampacity. I B. Inverse Time Type: 1. Provide thermal-magnetic circuit breaker,unless otherwise shown, for one-and two-pole breakers.breakers operating at 240V or less,.and three-pole branch I 2. circuit breakers operating at 480V. Provide solid state trip circuit breakers with an adjustable short-term function, unless another type breaker is required for coordination, for three-pole,480V I feeder circuit breakers with not more than one downstream, 480V,overcurrent protective device, excluding protective devices provided as part of a process I I4I6-00 16470Paoetboffids 16470-5 ZEL —ENGINEERS- I I SECTION 16470 I PANELBOARDS equipment package. Such breakers shall be Westinghouse Seltronic Circuit I Breakers, Square D,Type ME or PE Circuit Breakers,or equal. 3. Provide solid state trip circuit breakers with at least the following adjustment: long time pickup,long time delay, short time pickup, short time delay,I-squared t for circuit breakers not covered by either of the above cases. C. Instantaneous Only;1 Type:Instantaneous only circuit breakers shall have only an instantaneous trip element. The breakers shall be used only as part of a listed I combinationmotor starter. Instantaneous only break=shall be sized with a continuous rating of at least 115 percent of full-load current ofthe<motor served. The hip Setting shalt be continuously adjustable from a lowest setting of not more than 700 percent to a .; I highest setting of not less than 1,300 percent of the motor full-load current. D. All breakers shall be manufactured by the supplier of the panelboards. I PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. I C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard;install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 111 G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16450 - GROUNDING. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS,except Section 4.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS,Section 7.4 for switches,Section 7.5 for circuit breakers. I 3.3 ADJUSTING p each anelboard feeder;rearrange circuits in the I A. Mas�`e.stady'state load currents at panelboard to balance the phase loadsto within 15 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. I END OF SECTION 1416-0016470 PenotbomZEL 16470-6 Ids —ENGINEERS- — I SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SCOPE ' A. This specification describes the electrical,mechanical, environmental, agency and g Y reliability requirements for three-phase,Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)as specified ' herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16110-Raceways B. Section 16120—Conductors ' C. Section 16450—Grounding 1 1.3 REFERENCES A. The variable frequency drives and all components shall be designed,manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards. 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE) a. IEEE 519-1992: Guide for harmonic content and control 2: Underwriters Laboratories(UL508C:Power Conversion Equipment) k a. UL b. CUL 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA) a. ICS 7.0: Industrial Controls&Systems for VFD. 4. IEC 61800-2 and—3. EN 50082-1 and 2 1 a. Fulfill all EMC immunity requirements B. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed I documents,the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL ' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer. ' 1. Dimensioned outline drawing 2. Schematic diagram ' 3. Power and control connection diagram(s) 1.5 SUBMITTALS-FOR INFORMATION ' A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins 1416-00 164133 Variable Frequency n,ive 16483-1 ZEL —ENGINEERS— i SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 2. Product sheets 3. Harmonic Analysis 1.6 SUBMITTALS-FOR CLOSEOUT A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes prior to final payment. 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed section in 1.04. 2. Installation information. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. The supplier of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the electromechanical power components used within the assembly, such as bypass contactors when specified. B. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. ' C. The supplier of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten(10)years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.8 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' One(1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS • A. Five(5) copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided. I B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: 1. Instruction books 2. Recommended renewal parts list 3. Drawings and information required by Section 1.06. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D Altivar ATV630D22N4 ' B. Approved Equal 1. Naming specific venders does not imply acceptance of their standard products nor relieve them from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 1416-0016493 facia*:Frequency Drive 16483-2 Z E. .. —ENGINEERS— 1 SECTION 16483 ' VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) A. Where shown on the drawings,variable frequency drives 1 through 2000 Horsepower (HP),Variable Torque(VT),shall have the following features:. 1. The VFD shall be rated for 480 VAC(optional input voltages of 208,240,380 and 575 VAC). The VFD shall provide microprocessor-based control for three- phase induction motors. The controller's full load output current rating shall be ' based on 50°C(CT)/40°C(VT)ambient and 10 kHz switching frequency below 40-HP(CT)/50-HP(VT)and 3.6 kHz switching frequency 40-HP(CT)/50-HP (VT)and above to reduce motor noise and avoid increased motor losses. ' 2. The VFD shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated(PWM)design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation.Adjustable Current Source VFD are not acceptable.Insulated ' Gate Bipolar Transistors(IGBT's)shall be used in the inverter section.Bipolar Junction Transistors,GTO's or SCR's are not acceptable. The VFD shall run at the above listed switching frequencies. 3. The VFD shall have efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95%for VFD below 15-HP and 97%for drives 15-HP and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90%at 50%speed and load. ' 4. The VFD shall maintain the line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.96,regardless of speed and load. 5. The VFD shall have a one(1)minute overload current rating of 150%and a two ' (2)second overload current rating of 250%for constant torque drives.The VFD shall have a one(1)minute overload current rating of 110%for variable torque ' drives. 6. The VFD shall be capable of operating of operating any NEMA design B squirrel cage induction motor,regardless of manufacturer,with a horsepower and current rating within the capacity of the VFD. 7. The VFD shall have an integral EMI/RFI filter as standard. 8. Provide wall mount 3-phase line reactor in separate enclosure. Line Reactor shall be TCI KDRC12C2. ' 9. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor(flying start). The VFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation ' without tripping.If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction,the VFD shall start into the motor in the reverse direction,bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed. ' 10. Standard operating conditions shall be: a. Incoming Power: Three-phase, 380—500 Vac(+10%to-15%)and 50/60 Hz(+1-5 Hz)power to a fixed potential DC bus level. ' b. Frequency stability of+1-0.05%for 24 hours with voltage regulation of+/- 1%of maximum rated output voltage. . ' c. Speed regulation of+/-0.5%of base speed d. Load inertia dependant carryover(ride-through)during utility loss. e. Insensitive to input line rotation. f. Humidity: 0 to 95%(non-condensing and non-corrosive). 1416-0016483 V ridaeFIequemcyDlive.doo 16483-3 Z E L ' -ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 1 SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE I g. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet(1000 meters)above sea level. h. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 50°C (CT),-10 to 40 °C(VT). 1 i.. Storage Temperature: -40 to 60°C. 11. Control Functions a. Frequently accessed VFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable 1 from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the VFD. The VFD shall have a 3 line alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain English words for parameters,status, 1 and diagnostic messages. Keypads that are difficult to read or understand are not acceptable,and particularly those that use alphanumeric code and tables. Keypads shall be adjustable for contrast with large characters 1 easily visible in normal ambient light. b. The keypad shall include a Local/Remote pushbutton selection. Both start/ stop source and speed reference shall be independently programmable for 1 Keypad,Remote I/O,or Field Bus. c. The keypad shall have copy/paste capability. d. Upon initial power up of the VFD,the keypad shall display a start up I guide that will sequence all the necessary parameter adjustments for general start up. I e. Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be available by using a personal computer's RS-232 port and WindowsT' based software. In addition the software shall permit control and 1 monitoring via the VFD RS232 port.The manufacturer shall supply a diskette with the required software.An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens shall also be provided. The computers1 software shall be used for modifying the drive setup and reviewing diagnostic and trend information as outlined in this section through section 18. Provide one copy of the advanced programming software. I f. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following: 1 1) Monitor 1 2) Operate 3) Parameter setup I 4) Actual parameter values 5) Active faults 6) Fault history I 7) LCD contrast adjustment 8) Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. I g. The following setups and adjustments,at a minimum,are to be available: 1) Start command from keypad,remote or communications port 2) Speed command from keypad,remote or communications port 1 3) Motor direction selection 4) Maximum and minimum speed limits 5) Acceleration and deceleration times,two settable ranges 1 14164016483 VariableFisemoylhive.doe 16483-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— I Addendum 1 Bid Item#17.268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I - SECTION 16483 f, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 6) Critical(skip) frequency avoidance 1 7) Torque limit 8) Multiple attempt restart function 9) Multiple preset speeds adjustment I 10) Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection 11) Programmable analog output 12) DC brake current magnitude and time 1 13) PID process controller 12. The VFD shall have the following system interfaces: I a. Inputs—A minimum of six(6)programmable digital inputs,two (2) analog inputs and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a minimum: 1) Remote manual/auto I 2) Remote start/stop 3) Remote forward/reverse 4) Remote preset speeds 5) Remote external trip 6) Remote fault reset 7) Process control speed reference interface,4-20mA DC I 8) Potentiometer and 1-10VDC speed reference interface 9) RS-232 programming and operation interface port Serial communications port I10) B. Outputs—A minimum of two (2) discrete progranunable digital outputs,,one(1) programmable open collector output,and one1 �. )programmablcanalog output shall be I provided,with the following available at minimum. 1. Programmable relay outputs with one(1)set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: I a. Fault b. Run c. Ready Id. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed Ig. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over-temperature I2. Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable with the following available atzaumn: a. Fault I b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed I e. Joggingf. At speed I 1415.0016483 UariallePreguearyDrive 16483-5 __ ZEl. —ENGINEERS- I SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over-temperature 3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency c. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC-bus voltage i. All (Analog Input 1) j. AI2(Analog Input 2) k. PT100 temperature 1. FB digital input 4(Field Bus Input) 4. Monitoring and Displays p displayingthree(3)lines a. The VFD display shall be a LCD type capable of p of text and the following thirteen(13)status indicators: 1) Run 2) Forward 3) Reverse 4) Stop 5) Ready. 1116) Alarm 7) Fault 8) Input/Output(I/O)terminal 9) Keypad 10) Bus/Communication 11) Local(LED) 12) Remote(LED) 13) Fault(LED) 5. The VFD keypad shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring functions at a minimum: a. Output frequency b. Frequency reference c. Motor speed d. Motor current e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC-bus voltage i. Unit temperature j. Calculated motor temperature 1416-0016483 Variable Frequency Dtivadoe 16483-6 Z E L—ENGINEERS— Addendum 1 Bid item#17.268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System I . • SECTION 16483 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE k. Voltage level of analog input I 1. Current level of analog input m. Digital inputs status n. Digital and relay outputs status I . o. Analog Input 6. Protective Functions a. The VFD shall include the following protective features at minimum: I i) Over-current 2) Over-voltage 3) Inverter fault I 4) Under-voltage 5) Input phase loss 6) Output phase loss I7) Under temperature 8) Over-temperature 9) Motor stalled I . . 10) Motor over-temperature 11) Motor under-load 12) Logic voltage failure I 13) Microprocessor failure b. The VFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, I and running.VFD with no ground fault protection during running are not acceptable. 7. Diagnostic Features I a. Fault History 1) Record and log faults 2) Indicate the most recent first,and store up to 30 faults I 8. Optional features to be included in the VFD: a. HMCP or thermal magnetic breaker to provide a disconnect means Operating handle shall protrude through the door.The disconnect shall not I be mounted on the door. The handle position shall indicate ON, OFF,and TRIPPED condition. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position with at least three(3)padlocks.Interlocks shall prevent I unauthorized opening or closing of the VFD door with the disconnect handle in the ON position.Door handle interlock can be defeatedby qualified maintenance personnel. I . b. 120 VAC control to allow VFD to interface with remote dry contacts. • c. Motor over-current relay to provide sensing of a given level of load I current. 9. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain,as part of a national network,engineering service facilities within 100 miles of project to provide start-up service, I emergency service calls,repair work, service contracts,maintenance and training of customer personnel. 1 - 1416A016183Variable FirquencyDrivedoc 16483-7 Z E.L —ENGINEERS— I Addendum 1 Bid item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System i SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING 1 A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section.All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA. 1 standards. 1. All printed circuit boards shall be functionally tested via automatic test equipment I prior to unit installation. 2. After all tests have been performed,each VFD shall undergo a bum-in test. The drive shall be burned in at 100%inductive or motor load without an unscheduled shutdown. 3. After the bum-in cycle is complete,eachVFD shall be put through a motor load test before inspection and shipping. B. The manufacturer shall provide three(3)certified copies of factory test reports. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install drives in accordance with standards listed in this specification. B. Install per manufacturer's instructions outlined in installation,operation and maintenance documentation. 3.3 MELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's employed Field Service Engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. Field Service personnel shall be factory trained with periodic updates and have experience with the same model of VFD on the job site. Sales representatives will not be acceptable to perform this work.The manufacturer's service representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, installation as specified in manufacturer's installation instructions,wiring,application dependant adjustments,and verification of proper VFD operation. B. The Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative 1 shall perform the following minimum work. 1. Inspection and final adjustments. 2. Operational and functional checks of VFD and spare parts. 3. The contractor shall certify that he has read the drive manufacturer's installation instructions and has installed the VFD in accordance with those instructions. ' C. The.Contractor shall provide three(3).copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report before final payment is made. 1416.001640VariaNeFoquentyDriveaoo 16483-8 Z E L —ENGINEERS-- Addendum Addendum 1 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System SECTION 16483 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 3.4 MAINTENANCE/WARRANTY SERVICE ' A. Warranty to commence 24 months from the date of start-up,not to exceed 36 months from the date of shipment,and include all parts,labor,and travel time. 3.5 FIELD TESTING-OMITTED ' 3.6 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to 2 owner's representatives for 1 normal workdays with a maximum of 1 trips at a job site location determined by the ' owner. Training and instruction time shall be in addition to that required for start-up service. ' B. The manufacturer's qualified representative shall conduct the training. ' C. The training program shall consist of the following: 1. Instructions-on-the proper operation of the equipment. 2. Instructions on the proper maintenance of the equipment. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 141640 16483 WNW Bcq ienoyDrivb do, 16483-9 Z E L ' -ENGINEERS— Addendum 7 Bid Item#17-268 Highland Avenue Water Treatment Plant Filter Modification and PAC System 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting fixtures and accessories as specified herein,and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16050-Electrical -Basic Materials B. Section 16450-Grounding 1 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 50-Cabinets and Boxes B. UL 67 -Panelboards C. NEMA PB-1 -Panelboards D. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C E. NEMA ICS 6 -Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems F. IEEE-All applicable standards 1.4 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI C78.379-Electric Lamps-Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps-Classification of Beam Patterns. ' B. ANSI C82.1 -Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4-Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps ' (Multiple Supply Type). D. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 1416-00165001 .0• 16500-1 Z E L —ENGINEERS- 1 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: ' 1. Dimension 2. Ratings 3. Performance data ' 4. Recommended mounting data 5. Appearance 6. Lamp Data to include the following at a minimum: ' a. CR1 b. Color Temperature 7. Ballast ' 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this . 1 section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES ' A. Acceptable manufactures are listed in the lighting fixture schedule shown on the drawings. B. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the engineer ten(10)days prior to bid date. All pre-approval request must be made in writing. ' C. Contractor shall verify all requirements as required to give proper installation per the contract documents and per codes. , D. Fixtures shall be UL Listed 2.2 BALLASTS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Advance Transformer Co. 2. General Electric 3. Universal Technologies 4. Osram Sylvania 1416.0016500 tiotht 16500-2 Z E L -ENGINEERS- i SECTION 16500 I LIGHTING B. UL Listed I , C. Ballast to match lamp type and voltage. See fixture schedule. I D. Make every effort to provide all ballast from the same manufacturer. Ballast within luminaries of a given type must be from the same manufacturer. I E. Fluorescent Ballast specifications: 1. Ballast shall be instant start 2. THD of less than 20%unless otherwise noted on drawings I 3. Power factor of greater than .95 4. Ballast shall operate from 60 Hz input source of 120V,277V, or 347V as applicable with sustained vaiations of± 10%(voltage and frequency)with no damage to the ballast 5. Ballast shall be high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency between 20 kHz and 30 kHz or above 42 kHz to avoid interference with infared I 6. devices and eliminate visible flicker. Ballast shall provide for a lamp current crest factor of 1.7 or less in accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendations. I 7. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating for all 4-foot lamps and smaller 8. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor for primary lamp application as follows: 0.75 for low watt, 0.85 for normal light output, and 1.20 for high light. 9. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -18°C (0°F)for standard T8 I lamps. 10. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without Iresetting power. 11. Ballast shall be manufactured in a factory certified to ISO 9002 Quality System Standards, I 12. Ballast shall carry.a five-year warranty from date of manufacture against defects ' in material or workmanship,including replacement, for operation at a maximum case temperature of 70°C. 13. Manufacturer shall have a fifteen-year history of producing electronic ballast for the North American market. F. HID Ballast Specification: 1. Constant wattage autotransformer or regulator,high power factor type 2. Single lamp ballast I 3. Minimum starting temperature of—30°C and designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40°C. 4. Use ballast constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life. I5. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without resetting power. I 6. Ballast shall be manufactured in a factory certified to ISO 9002 Quality System Standards. I1416-0016500Lighiln0 16500-3ZEL —ENGINEEAS- I SECTION 16500. .: .. - LIGHTING 7. Ballast shall carry a two-year warranty from date of manufacture against defects in material or workmanship,including replacement. ' 8. Manufacturer shall have a fifteen-year history of producing magnetic ballast for the North American market. 2.3 LAMPS A, Approved Lamp Manufacturers: < ' 1. General Electric 2. Osram Sylvania 3. Philips ' B. All lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. C. Lamp type and color will be as noted on drawings. ' D. UL Listed 2.4 TIME SWITCH - OMITTED PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires as noted on drawings. Suspend luminaire at height indicated ' on drawings. B. Support luminaires equal to or larger than 2 x 4 foot(600 x 1200 mm) size independent ' of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. ? ' D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. Installation of surface mounted luminaries shall be per manufactures instructions. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from ' building structure. Provide safety clips to secure fixture to ceiling grid, and locate at opposite corners of fixture. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. , G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. ' H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. Support directly from building structure. , 1416.00 16500Ligbtsag 16500-4 Z E L —ENGINEERS— SECTION 16500 ' LIGHTING I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as ' scheduled. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit as indicated. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. ' M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit,exit sign, and luminaire. ' 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate with air handling equipment to provide lighting layout as specified in drawings. ' 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. I 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. ' 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. ' C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. ' D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 1416-0016500 Lighting 16500-5 Z E L —ENGINEERS— 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1